Ricoh MP C3500 - Ricoh MP C4500

Operating Instructions
About This Machine
Getting Started
Entering Text
Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the
Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
Laser Safety:
This equipment complies with requirements of 21 CFR subchapter J for class 1 laser products. This
equipment contains four AlGalnP laser diodes, 7-milliwatt, 645-660 nanometer wavelength for each
emitter. This equipment does not emit hazardous light, since the beam is totally enclosed during all customer modes of operation and maintenance.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes:
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your machine before reading this manual. (For details, see p.12 Machine Types.)
Type 1: C3535/DSc535/LD435c/Aficio MP C3500
Type 2: C4540/C4540g/DSc545/DSc545g/LD445c/Aficio MP C4500/Aficio MP C4500G
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
For good copy quality, the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner from the supplier.
The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts
other than genuine parts from the supplier with your office products.
Power Source
120V, 60Hz, 12A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,
see Troubleshooting.
Manuals for This Machine

Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
About This Machine

Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual
for explanations on how to connect the machine.
Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, staples, and other consumables.
Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered, or
prevent the machine from unauthorized use.
Also refer to this manual for the procedures for registering administrators, as
well as setting user and administrator authentication.
Copy/ Document Server Reference
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to
this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
Facsimile Reference
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided.
This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and
settings that might not be available on this machine. Images, illustrations, and
information about operating systems that are supported might also differ
slightly from those of this machine.
i
Other manuals
PostScript3 Supplement
UNIX Supplement
Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
Auto Document Link Guide
Note
Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the

manuals as PDF files.
For UNIX Supplement, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
PostScript3 Supplement and UNIX Supplement include descriptions of
functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
The following software products are referred to using general names:
Product name
DeskTopBinder Lite
Professional
*1
and DeskTopBinder
ScanRouter EX Professional
er EX Enterprise *1
*1
General name
Optional
ii
*1
DeskTopBinder
and ScanRout- The ScanRouter delivery software
What You Can Do with This Machine

This section introduces the features of this machine.
Note
For details about options, see Options.
Reference
p.14 Options
Copier, Facsimile, Printer, and Scanner Functions

This machine provides copier, facsimile (optional), printer, and scanner functions.
AQH002S
You can make copies of originals. With a finisher (optional), you can staple
copies. See Copy/Document Server Reference.
You can send originals by fax or e-mail, and receive faxes from other parties.
See Facsimile Reference.
You can print documents created in applications. See Printer Reference.
You can print documents from Windows 95/98/Me (TCP/IP, IPP), Windows
2000 (TCP/IP, IPP), Windows XP/Server 2003 (TCP/IP, IPP), Windows NT
4.0 (TCP/IP, IPP), NetWare, UNIX (TCP/IP), and Macintosh (AppleTalk) environments because the machine supports all these. (multi-protocol)
You can scan originals and send scan files to a computer. See Scanner Reference.
iii
Utilizing Stored Documents

You can store files scanned by this machine, or files sent from other fax machine
or computers, into the machine's hard disk. You can print and fax stored files as
required. You can also change print settings and print multiple documents (Document Server).
AQH013S
With DeskTopBinder (optional), you can search, check, print and delete
stored documents using your computer.
You can also retrieve stored documents scanned in printer or scanner mode.
For details, see Printer Reference, and Scanner Reference.
You can retrieve files scanned under the copier function.
For details, see Scanner Reference.
For more information about machine's settings, see Network Settings, General Settings Guide.
For more information about document server in printer mode, see Saving
and Printing Using the Document Server, Printer Reference.
For more information about document server in fax mode, see Storing a Document, Facsimile Reference.
For more information about document server in scanner mode, see Storing
Files Using the Scanner Function, Scanner Reference.
For more information about document server, see Document Server,
Copy/Document Server Reference.
For more information about DeskTopBinder, see DeskTopBinder manuals.
iv
Paperless Fax Transmission and Reception

You can store received fax messages on the machine's hard disk, instead of printing them onto paper.
Reception
You can store received fax documents in electrical format without printing it onto paper.
AQH014S
You can use DeskTopBinder (optional) or a Web Image Monitor to check,

print, delete, retrieve, or download documents using your computer (Storing
received documents). See Facsimile Reference.
Transmission
You can send a fax from your computer over the network (Ethernet, IEEE 1394
(IPv4 over 1394), or wireless LAN) to this machine, which then forwards the fax
via its telephone connection (LAN-Fax).
AQH015S
Print from a Windows application, select the LAN-Fax printer, and then select the fax destination.
The sender can check the images s/he has sent.
For more information about machine's settings, see Network Settings, General Settings Guide.
For more information about how to use the function, see Fax via Computer,
Facsimile Reference.
Fax Transmission and Reception Through the Internet

You can send fax documents via e-mail by specifying the recipient's e-mail address (Internet Fax Transmission).
You can receive sent documents via Internet Fax, or from computers (Internet
Fax Reception).
You can send fax documents by specifying IP-fax destination using IPv4 addresses (IP-Fax Transmission).
You can receive sent documents via Internet Fax (IP-Fax Reception).
AQH016S
Internet Fax
You can send fax documents through e-mail by specifying the recipients
e-mail address.
You can receive sent documents via Internet Fax, or from computers.
You can receive data such as e-mail from computers and faxes from Internet fax machines, and then print or forward that data.
For more information about machine's settings, see Network Settings,
General Settings Guide.
For more information about how to use the function, see Transmission
and Reception, Facsimile Reference.
IP-Fax
You can exchange documents between fax machines directly connected to
the TCP/IP network.
You can send documents by specifying an IPv4 address or host name instead of a fax number.
For details about the machine's settings, see Network Settings, General
Settings Guide.
For details about how to use this function, see Transmission and Reception, Facsimile Reference.
vi
Using the Scanner in a Network Environment

You can use a scanner over the network.
AQH017S
You can send scan files to a specified destination using e-mail (Sending scan
file by e-mail). See Sending Scan Files by E-mail, Scanner Reference.
With the ScanRouter delivery software, you can save scan files in specified
destinations on network computers (Saving scan files). See Scanner Reference.
You can send scan files directly to folders (Sending scan file by Scan to Folder)
See Sending Scan Files to Folder, Scanner Reference.
You can use this machine as a delivery scanner for the ScanRouter delivery
application (Network delivery scanner). You can save scan files in the delivery server or send them to a folder in a computer on the same network. For
details about the machine's settings, see Network Settings, General Settings
Guide. For details about how to use the function, see Delivering Scan Files,
Scanner Reference.
vii
Administrating the Machine/Protecting Documents (Security

Functions)
You can prevent information leakage by managing the machine and protecting
documents.
AQH018S
You can protect documents from unauthorized access and stop them from being copied without permission. See Security Reference.
You can control the use of the machine, as well as prevent machine settings
from being changed without authorization. See Security Reference.
By setting passwords, you can prevent unauthorized access via the network.
See Security Reference.
You can erase the data on the hard disk to prevent the information from leaking
out. See the manual for the DataOverWriteSecurity Unit and Security Reference.
viii
Monitoring the Machine Via Computer

You can monitor machine status and change settings using a computer.
AQH019S
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, or a

Web Image Monitor, you can use a computer to view the machine's status,
such as to check on paper quantities, or misfeeds, etc. See General Settings
Guide.
You can use a Web Image Monitor to make network settings. See General Settings Guide.
With Web Image Monitor, you can register an address book.
See the Web Image Monitor's Help.
ix
Preventing an Unauthorized Copy

You can print embedded pattern on paper to prevent them from being copied.
AQI001S
Using the printer driver, you can embed a pattern in the printed document. If
the document is copied on a machine with the Copy Data Security Unit (optional), protected pages are grayed out in the copy, preventing confidential
information from being copied. If a document protected by unauthorized
copy guard is copied on a machine that is equipped with the Copy Data Security Unit, the machine beeps to notify users that unauthorized copying is
being attempted.
If the document is copied on a machine without the Copy Data Security Unit,
the hidden text becomes conspicuous in the copy, showing that the copy is
unauthorized.
See the printer driver Help and Printer Reference.
Using the printer driver, you can embed text in the printed document for unauthorized copy prevention. If the document is copied, scanned, or stored in
a Document Server by a copier or multifunction printer, the embedded text
appears conspicuous in the copy, discouraging such unauthorized copying.
See the printer driver Help, Printer Reference and Security Reference.
x
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ......................................................................................i
What You Can Do with This Machine..................................................................iii
Copier, Facsimile, Printer, and Scanner Functions................................................... iii
Utilizing Stored Documents....................................................................................... iv
Paperless Fax Transmission and Reception.............................................................. v
Fax Transmission and Reception Through the Internet ............................................ vi
Using the Scanner in a Network Environment ......................................................... vii
Administrating the Machine/Protecting Documents (Security Functions) ................viii
Monitoring the Machine Via Computer...................................................................... ix
Preventing an Unauthorized Copy ............................................................................. x
Notice ......................................................................................................................1
Notice To Wireless LAN Interface (optional) Users....................................................1
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................3
Symbols .....................................................................................................................3
Safety Information .................................................................................................4
Safety During Operation.............................................................................................4
Positions of RWARNING and RCAUTION labels ..............................................7
ENERGY STAR Program .....................................................................................10
Recycled Paper........................................................................................................11
Machine Types .....................................................................................................12
1. Getting Started
Guide to Components .........................................................................................13
Options.....................................................................................................................14
Control Panel........................................................................................................17
Display ..................................................................................................................19
Simplified Display.....................................................................................................20
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed..................................................21
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)...............................................21
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver) ..................................................22
Login (Using the Control Panel) ...............................................................................22
Log Off (Using the Control Panel) ............................................................................23
Login (Using a Printer Driver)...................................................................................23
Login (Using Web Image Monitor) ...........................................................................24
Log Off (Using Web Image Monitor) ........................................................................24
Changing Modes ..................................................................................................25
System Reset...........................................................................................................26
Turning On the Power .........................................................................................27
Turning On the Main Power .....................................................................................27
Turning On the Power ..............................................................................................28
Turning Off the Power ..............................................................................................28
Turning Off the Main Power .....................................................................................29
Saving Energy..........................................................................................................30
xi
2. Entering Text
Entering Text ........................................................................................................31
Available Characters ................................................................................................31
Keys .........................................................................................................................31
How to Enter Text ....................................................................................................32
3. Appendix
Dos and Don'ts.....................................................................................................35
Saving Color Copies ................................................................................................36
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM ...............................................37
Viewing the Contents of the CD-ROM .....................................................................38
Printer Drivers for This Printer..................................................................................38
TWAIN Driver ...........................................................................................................39
LAN-Fax Driver ........................................................................................................40
DeskTopBinder Lite..................................................................................................41
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ................................................................................42
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .......................................................43
Installing the Operating Instructions .................................................................44
PDF Manuals ...........................................................................................................45
Opening the Installed Operating Instructions...................................................46
Opening from the Icon..............................................................................................46
Opening from the [Start] Menu .................................................................................46
Opening from the CD-ROM......................................................................................47
Copy Paper ...........................................................................................................48
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types...................................................................48
Unusable Paper .......................................................................................................52
Paper Storage ..........................................................................................................53
INDEX......................................................................................................... 54
xii
Notice
Warning
This device complies with Part 15 and 18 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Notice To Wireless LAN Interface (optional) Users

Notes to users
You can only install the dedicated Wireless LAN Interface card like "R-WL11B"
for this WLAN card slot.
It is strictly forbidden to use antenna(s) except designated.
A The antenna(s) of this device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
B This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment. End users must follow the specific operating
instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance.
Notes to users in the United States of America
Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
1
Note to users in Canada

Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit Type H:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
The term IC: before the certification/registration number only signifies that
the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to
be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding.
Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its
gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP)
is not more than that required for successful communication.
This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum
gain of [0.00] dBi. Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is [50] ohms.
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement:
Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit Type H:
Ce dispositif est conforme la norme CNR-210 d'Industrie Canada.
L'expression <<IC:>> avant le numro d'homologation/enregistrement signifie
seulement que les spcifications techniques d'Industrie Canada ont t respectes.
Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet
d'une licence, il doit tre utilis l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres
afin de fournir un cran de blindage maximal.
Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est installe l'extrieur, il doit faire
l'objet d'une licence.
Afin de rduire le risque d'interfrence aux autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne
et son gain doivent tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne
quivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne soit pas suprieure au niveau requis pour obtenir une
communication satisfaisante.
Ce dispositif a t conu pour fonctionner avec une antenne ayant un gain maximal
de [0.00] dBi.Une antenne ayant un gain plus lev est strictement interdite par
les rglements d'Industrie Canada.L'impdance d'antenne requise est [50] ohms.
2
How to Read This Manual

Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these
notes. They can be found in the Safety Information section of this manual.
Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the
machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the
Safety Information section of this manual.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure
to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machines functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machines display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machines control panel.
3
Safety Information
When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be followed.
Safety During Operation

In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result
in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result
in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
R WARNING:
Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the
power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.
To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not
remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual.
Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,
not the cable) if any of the following occurs:
You spill something into the machine.
You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.
The external housing of your machine has been damaged.
Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame.
Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer.
Dispose of used toner containers in accordance with local regulations.
Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols.
A fire or an electric shock might occur.
Connect the machine only to the power source described on the inside front cover of this manual. Connect the power cord directly into
a wall outlet and do not use an extension cord.
Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.
Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend it more
than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
If the power cord is damaged (exposure of the core, disconnection, etc.),
contact your service representative to change a new one. Operating the
machine with a damaged power cord may cause an electric shock or fire.
The supplied power cord is for use with this equipment only. Do not use
with other appliances. Doing so may result in fire, electric shock, or injury.
4
R CAUTION:
Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain and snow.
Contact your service representative if you need to lift the machine (such as
when relocating it to another floor). Do not attempt to lift the machine without
the assistance of your service representative. The machine will be damaged
if it topples or is dropped, resulting in malfunction and risk of injury to users.
The machine's various handling areas are for service engineer use only. Do
not touch these areas.
When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside
the machine.
Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.
For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the machine or expended
supply waste at household waste collection points. Disposal can take place
at an authorized dealer.
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a
label indicating the hot surface. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
The fusing section of this machine might be very hot. Caution should be taken when removing misfed paper.
Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might occur.
Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over,
an injury might occur.
Do not use aluminum foil, carbon paper, or similar conductive paper to avoid
a fire or machine failure.
Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and
spacious. Good ventilation is especially important when the machine is used
heavily.
Do not open toner cartridges forcefully. Toner can spill, dirtying your clothes
or hands, and possibly resulting in accidental ingestion.
If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a
fresh air environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large
amounts of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when removing paper jam or replacing toner. If your skin comes into contact with toner, wash the affected
area thoroughly with soap and water.
If toner gets on your clothing, wash with cold water. Hot water will set the
toner into the fabric and may make removing the stain impossible.
5
R CAUTION:
Do not look into the lamp. It can damage your eyes.
When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's staple unit. You can trap your fingers if you do not.
During operation, rollers for transporting the paper and originals revolve. A
safety device is being installed so that the machine can be operated safely.
But take care not to touch the machine during operation. An injury might occur.
Fire and breakdown can result from heavy accumulation of dust inside this
machine. Consult your service representative for details about and charges
for cleaning the machines interior.
6
Positions of RWARNING and RCAUTION

labels
This machine has labels for RWARNING and RCAUTION at the positions
shown below. For safety, please follow the instructions and handle the machine
as indicated.
AQI071S
7
AQI072S
8
AQI073S
9
ENERGY STAR Program

As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined
that this machine model meets the ENERGY STAR
Guidelines for energy efficiency.
The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for
developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental issues, such as global warming.
When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Partner shall
place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office equipment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode.
Low-Power mode
This product automatically lowers its power consumption 15 minutes after
the last copy or print job has finished. Printing is still possible in Low Power
Mode, but if you wish to make copies press the {Energy Saver} key first.
Off mode (for models equipped with the copier function only)
If the machine is left idle for a specific time (default: 60 minutes), it is automatically switched off by Auto Off mode. To turn the machine back on,
switch the Operation switch to On.
If the machine is left idle in Low-Power mode for a specific time (default:
60 minutes), it automatically switches to a power saving mode. This is
called Sleep mode in the ENERGY STAR Program. (Note that you can
send print jobs from your computer or receive incoming faxes even in
Sleep mode.) To wake the machine up, switch the Operation switch to
On.
10
Duplex Priority
The ENERGY STAR Program recommends the duplex function. This function
is less of a burden to the environment. For applicable machines, duplex function (one-sided originals two-sided copies) can be selected preferentially
when the Operation switch or the {Clear Modes} key is pressed, or the machine
resets automatically.
Printer and scanner installed
Type 1
Low-power Mode
Sleep mode
Power consumption
Type 2
184 W
223 W
Default interval
15 minutes
15 minutes
Recovery time
30 seconds
30 seconds
8W
8W
Default interval
60 minutes
60 minutes
Recovery time
45 seconds
60 seconds
Power consumption
Duplex priority
One-sidedTwo-sided
Reference
For details about changing how long the machine waits before switching to
Low-Power mode, see Timer Settings, General Settings Guide.
For details about changing Duplex Priority mode, see Programming Defaults in Initial Display, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Recycled Paper
In accordance with the ENERGY STAR Program, we recommend use of recycled
paper which is environmentally friendly. Please contact your sales representative for recommended paper.
11
Machine Types
This machine comes in two models which vary in copy speed. To ascertain
which model you have, see the inside front cover.
Copy speed
12
Type 1
Type 2
35 copies/minute
(A4K, 81/2 11K)
45 copies/minute
(A4K, 81/2 11K)
1. Getting Started
This section describes how to start using this machine.
Guide to Components
This section introduces the names and functions of the components.
AQI045S
1. Auto Document Feeder (ADF)
6. Internal Tray 1
If you load a stack of originals in the auto

document feeder (ADF), the ADF will automatically feed the originals one by one.
Copied, printed paper or fax messages

are delivered here.
2. Exposure glass
Open this cover to replace toner cartridges.
Place originals face down here for copying.
3. Main power switch
7. Front Cover
8. Paper Tray 1,2
Load paper here.
If the machine does not operate after

turning on the operation switch, check
the main power switch is turned on.
See Turning On the Power.
9. Lower Paper Trays (optional)
4. Operation switch
Heaters
Press to turn the power on (the On indicator lights up). To turn the power off,
press again (the On indicator goes off).
5. Control panel
See Control Panel.
Load paper here.
10. Switch for Anti-Condensation

In a cold place, the machines internal humidity may become too high, making the
paper in the paper trays damp (Trays 1
and 2, and the optional lower paper
trays) and so causing printing problems.
Using the anti-condensation heaters, you
can prevent these problems.
If it is humid or cold, switch the heaters
on.
13
Getting Started
AQH006S
1. Bypass Tray
2. Extender
Use when copying onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translucent paper,
and custom size paper.
Pull this extender out when loading sheets

larger than A4L in the bypass tray.
3. Lower Right Cover

Open this cover when a paper jam occurs.
Reference
p.17 Control Panel
p.27 Turning On the Power
Options
This section introduces the names and functions of main optional parts.
14
Guide to Components
External Options
This section provides explanations about external options.
AQI068S
1. Internal Tray 2
8. Booklet Finisher SR3020
If you select this as the output tray, copied

paper will be delivered here face down.
Used as a receiver when a fax unit is installed.
Sorts, stacks, staples and punches copies.

The saddle stitch function can staple the
copies in the center and fold them into
booklets.
*3: Finisher upper tray
*4: Finisher shift tray
*5: Booklet tray
4. Scanner Accessibility Unit
9. Finisher SR3030
2. Exposure glass cover

Lower over originals for copying.
3. Handset
This unit lets you operate the machine or

scan documents from the side instead of
using the control panel on the machine.
5. Paper Tray 3 (LCT)

You can load up to 2,000 sheets of 81/2"K
paper in this tray.
6. Lower Paper Trays

This is a two-level paper tray.
7. SR790
Sorts, stacks, and staples copies.
Sorts, stacks, staples and punches copies.

10. Bridge Unit

Relays copies to the finisher.
Note
When the Scanner Accessibility Unit
is installed, the control panel and the
scanner unit on the machine cannot be
used.
15
Getting Started
Internal Options
This section describes the options that can be installed in the machine.
Fax unit
Allows you to use the fax function.
Extra G3 Interface Unit
This lets you add a G3 fax line.
PictBridge card
This lets you directly print photographs taken with a PictBridge-compatible
digital camera.
USB host board
This lets you connect a PictBridge-compatible digital camera to the machine
with a USB cable.
IEEE 1284 Interface Board
Allows you to connect to an IEEE 1284 cable.
IEEE 1394 interface board
Allows you to connect to an IEEE 1394 cable.
IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN board
Allows you to install a wireless LAN interface.
Bluetooth unit
Allows you to expand the interface.
Copy Data Security Unit
If a document containing embedded text for unauthorized copy guard is copied, protected pages are grayed out in the copy.
DataOverWriteSecurity Unit
Allows you to erase data on the hard disk.
Note
You cannot install two or more of the options below: IEEE 1394 interface
board, IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN board, Bluetooth unit, IEEE 1284 interface
board.
If the Copy Data Security Unit is installed in the machine, you cannot use the
scanner and fax functions.
16
Control Panel
Control Panel
This illustration shows the control panel of the machine with options fully installed.
AQI040S
1. {User Tools/Counter} key
5. {Interrupt} key (copier and scanner
User Tools
Press to change the default and conditions to meet your requirements. See
Accessing User Tools (System Settings), General Settings Guide.
Counter
Press to check or print the counter value. See Counter, General Settings
Guide.
Enquiry
Press to find out where to order expendable supplies and where to call
when a malfunction occurs. You can
also print these details. See Enquiry,
mode)
2. Display panel
Displays keys for each function, operation status, or messages. See Display.
Press to make interrupt copies during

copying or scanning. See Interrupt
Copy, Copy/Document Server Reference.
6. {Energy Saver} key

Press to switch to and from Energy Saver
mode. See Saving Energy.
7. Main power indicator

The main power indicator goes on when
you turn on the main power switch.
Do not turn off the main power switch
while the Main power indicator is lit or
blinking. Doing so may damage the hard
disk.
8. Operation switch
Press to clear the current settings.
Press to turn the power on (the On indicator goes on). To turn the power off,
press it again (the On indicator goes off).
4. {Program} key (copier, facsimile,
9. {Login/Logout} key
3. {Clear Modes} key

and scanner mode)
Press to register frequently used settings,
or to recall registered settings.
Press this to log in or log out.
10. {Simplified Display} key

Press this to switch to the Simplified Display.
17
Getting Started
11. {Sample Copy} key
16. Function keys
Press to make a single set of copies or

prints to check print quality before making multiple sets. See Sample Copy,
Press to display the operation screen of

one of the following functions: copy, document box, facsimile, printer, or scanner.
The indicator of the selected function
goes on. See Changing Modes.
12. {Start} key

Press to start copying or scanning, or
printing documents stored using the
Document Server function.
13. {q} key (enter key)
17. Alert indicator

Lights continuously if an error has occurred.
18. Data In indicator (printer mode)
Press to enter a value.
Blinks continuously if the machine has

received a print job.
14. {Clear/Stop} key
19. Communicating indicator, Re-
Clear
Press to delete a number entered.
Stop
Press to stop a job in progress, such as
scanning, faxing, or printing.
ceiving File indicator, Confidential

File indicator
15. Number keys

Use to enter the numbers for copies, fax
numbers and data for the selected function.
Reference
p.19 Display
p.30 Saving Energy

p.27 Turning On the Power
p.20 Simplified Display
p.25 Changing Modes
18
Communicating indicator
Lights continuously during data
transmission and reception.
Receiving File indicator
Lights continuously while data other
than personal box data or Memory
Lock File is being received and stored
in the fax memory.
See Substitute Reception, Facsimile
Reference.
Confidential File indicator
Lights continuously while personal
box data is being received.
Blinks while Memory Lock File is being received.
See Personal Boxes, Facsimile Reference and Printing a File Received
with Memory Lock, Facsimile Reference.
Display
Display
The display panel shows machine status, error messages, and function menus.
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an
item by lightly pressing them.
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like
. Keys appearing as
cannot be used.
Important
Don't apply strong impact or force to the screen. Or it may be damaged. Maximum force allowable is approx. 30N (approx. 3 kgf). (N = Newton, kgf = Kilogram force. 1 kgf = 9.8N.)
The copying screen is displayed as default after power on.

The following display is of a machine with the options fully installed.
19
Getting Started
Simplified Display
This section explains the Simplified Display and its keys.
If you press the {Simplified Display} key, functions screens change to their simplified displays.
Simplified displays contain main functions only.
Enlarged characters and keys make for easier operation.
AQI031S
Simplified Display
This illustration shows the copier function's simplified display.
AQI046S
1. [Key Color]
Use this to intensify the screen contrast
by changing the color of the keys. This
does not work on the default screens of
the respective function.
Note
Press the {Simplified Display} key again to return to the copier function's default screen.
Simplified displays do not contain every available key.
20
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed
When the Authentication Screen is

Displayed
1
When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or

Integration Server Authentication is enabled, the Authentication Screen appears
on the screen. The machine only becomes operable after entering your own login
user name and login password. If user code authentication is enabled, you cannot use the machine until you enter the user code.
If you can use the machine, you can say that you are logged in. When you go out
of the operable state, you can say that you are logged out. After logging in the
machine, be sure to log out of it to prevent unauthorized usage.
Important
Ask the user administrator for the login user name, login password, and user
code. For details about user authentication, contact your administrator.
User code to enter on User Code Authentication is the numerical value registered in the address book as login user name.
Note
If authentication fails, the Authentication has failed message appears.
Check that the login user name and login password are correct.
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)

When user authentication is set, the following screen appears:
Enter a user code (up to eight digits), and then press [OK].
Note
To log off, do one of the following:
Press the Operation switch.

Press the {User Tools/Counter} key, press [System Settings], and then press
the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Press the {Energy Saver} key after jobs are completed.
21
Getting Started
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver)

When user authentication is set, specify the user code in the printer properties
of the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver Help.
Login (Using the Control Panel)

Follow the procedure below to log on when Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is set.
A Press [Enter] for [Login User Name].
B Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].

C Press [Enter] for [Login Password].
D Enter a login password, and then press [OK].

E Press [Login].
When the user is authenticated, the screen for the function you are using appears.
Note
If authentication fails, the Authentication has failed message appears.
Check that the login user name and login password are correct.
If user code authentication has been specified, a different screen appears.
22
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed
Log Off (Using the Control Panel)

Follow the procedure below to log off when Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.
A Press the {Login/Logout} key.
AQI038S
B Press [Yes].
Login (Using a Printer Driver)

When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication
is set, make encryption settings in the printer properties of the printer driver,
and then specify a login user name and password. For details, see the printer
driver Help.
Note
When logged on using a printer driver, you do not have to log off.
23
Getting Started
Login (Using Web Image Monitor)

This section explains how to log onto the machine via Web Image Monitor.
A Click [Login].
B Enter a login user name and password, and then click [Login].
Note
For user code authentication, enter a user code in [User Name], and then
click [OK].
Log Off (Using Web Image Monitor)
A Click [Logout] to log off.

Note
Delete the cache memory in the Web Image Monitor after logging off.
24
Changing Modes
Changing Modes
Note
You cannot switch modes in any of the following situations:
When scanning a fax message for transmission

During immediate transmission
When accessing User Tools
During interrupt copying
During On hook dialing for fax transmission
While scanning an original
The copying screen is displayed as default after power on. You can change
this default setting. For the setting procedure, see System Settings, General
Settings Guide.
AQI047S
25
Getting Started
System Reset
The machine returns automatically to its initial condition when the job is finished, after a certain period of time has elapsed. This function is called System
Reset. See System Settings, General Settings Guide.
You can change the System Reset time. See Timer Settings, General Settings
Guide.
26
Turning On the Power

This section explains how to turn on/off the power.
Operation switch
This machine has two power switches: operation switch and main power
switch.
Operation switch (right side of the control panel)
Press to activate the machine. When the machine has finished warming up,
you can make copies.
Main power switch (left side of the machine)
Turning off this switch makes the main power indicator on the right side
of the control panel go off. When this is done, machine power is completely
off. When the fax unit (optional) is installed, fax files in memory may be
lost if you turn this switch off. Use this switch only when necessary.
Note
This machine automatically enters Energy Saver mode or turns itself off if you
do not use it for a while. See Timer Settings, General Settings Guide.
Turning On the Main Power

Turn on the main power as follows:
A Make sure the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
B Open the main power switch cover and turn on the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes on.
AQH009S
Note
Do not turn off the main power switch immediately after turning it on. Doing
so may result in damage to the hard disk or memory, leading to malfunctions.
After you switch the main power on, a screen may appear to indicate that
the machine is initializing. Do not switch the power off during this process.
Initialization takes about three minutes.
27
Getting Started

Turn on the power as follows:
A Press the operation switch.
The On indicator goes on.
AQI039S
Note
If the power does not come on when the operation switch is pressed, check
the main power switch is on. If it is off, turn it on.
Turning Off the Power

Turn off the power as follows:
A Make sure the exposure glass cover or the ADF is in the right position.
B Press the operation switch.
The On indicator goes off.
AQI039S
Note
Even if you press the operation switch, the indicator does not go out, but
blinks in the following cases:
When the exposure glass cover or ADF is open.

During communication with external equipment.
When the hard disk is active.
28
Turning Off the Main Power

Turn off the main power as follows:
Important
Do not turn off the main power switch when the On indicator is lit or blinking. Doing so may result in damage to the hard disk or memory.
Make sure to turn off the main power switch before pulling out the power
plug. Not doing so may result in damage to the hard disk or memory.
A Make sure the On indicator is not lit.

B Open the switch cover, and then turn off the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes out.
Note
When the main power switch is turned off while using the fax function,
waiting fax and print jobs may be canceled, and incoming fax documents
not received. If you have to turn off this switch for some reason, make sure
100% is shown as available memory on the screen before turning off the
main power switch or unplugging the power cord. Fax files in memory are
deleted an hour after you turn off the main power switch or unplug the
power cord.
The On indicator does not go out, but blinks in dial-in mode even if you
press the operation switch. When this happens, check the explanations below, and turn off the main power switch.
The computer is not controlling the machine.
The machine is not receiving a fax.
Reference
Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event of Power Failure, Troubleshooting
29
Getting Started
Saving Energy
This machine has the following two energy saving functions.
Energy Saver
If you do not use the machine for a certain period after an operation, or when
you press the {Energy Saver} key, the display disappears and the machine
goes into Energy Saver mode. When you press the {Energy Saver} key again,
the machine returns to the ready condition. The machine uses less electricity
in Energy Saver mode.
You can change the amount of time the machine waits before switching to Energy Saver mode after copying has finished or the last operation is performed.
See Timer Settings, General Settings Guide.
Auto Off
The machine automatically turns itself off when the job is finished, after a certain period of time has elapsed. This function is called Auto Off.
You can change the Auto Off time. See Timer Settings, General Settings
Guide.
Note
The Auto Off function will not operate in the following cases:
When a warning message appears

When the service call message appears
When paper is jammed
When the cover is open
When the Add Toner message appears
When toner is being replenished
When the User Tools/Counter/Enquiry screen is displayed
When fixed warm-up is in progress
When the facsimile, printer, or other functions are active
When operations are suspended during printing
When the On-hook dialing function is in use
When a recipient is being registered in the address list or group dial list
When the Data In indicator is on or blinking
When the screen of stored document under the printer function is displayed
30
2. Entering Text
This section describes how to enter characters.
Entering Text
When you enter a character, it appears at the position of the cursor. If there is a
character already at the cursor position, the entered character appears before
that.
Available Characters
You can enter the following characters:
Alphabetic characters
Symbols
Numerals
0123456789
Keys
You can change the entry screen using the keys below.
AQI070S
31
Entering Text
Note
When entering uppercase or lowercase letters continuously, use [Shift Lock] to
lock the case.
You can also use the number keys to enter numbers, regardless of mode.
Reference
p.33 Selecting a User Text
How to Enter Text

This section explains text entry more specifically.
A Press [Shift] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.

B Press the letters you want to enter.
Deleting characters
A Press [Backspace] or [Delete All] to delete characters.
32
Entering Text
Selecting a User Text

You can select and use a User Text that is registered in [Program / Change / Delete
User Text].
For details about registering User Texts, see System Settings, General Settings
Guide.
A Press [User Text].
B Select the User Text you want to use.
Reference
System Settings, General Settings Guide
33
Entering Text
34
3. Appendix
This section describes Dos and Don'ts and copy paper.
Dos and Don'ts

The following items should be followed during use of this machine.
R CAUTION:
Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire
or an electric shock might occur.
R CAUTION:
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will
not be damaged under the machine.
Important
Do not turn the power off while the On indicator is lit or blinking. Doing so
may damage the hard disk.
Before unplugging the power cord or turning off the main power switch,
make sure remaining memory space is at 100%, as shown on the screen. See
Turning Off the Power, Turning Off the Main Power.
Do not touch areas on or around the fusing unit. These areas get hot.
After scanning originals continuously, the exposure glass may become warm
- this is not a malfunction.
The area around the ventilation hole might feel warm. This is caused by exhaust air and is not a malfunction.
If the machine is moved from a cold to a warm place, condensation may form
inside it. After moving the machine, do not use it for at least an hour. The machine requires this time to adapt to its new environment.
The machine will malfunction if its internal temperature becomes too high. Be
sure not to block the intake and exhaust vents.
Do not turn off the power while the machine is in operation. See Turning Off
the Power, Turning Off the Main Power.
Do not open the covers of the machine when it is in operation. If you do, misfeeds might occur.
Do not move or tilt the machine when the power is on.
Do not allow small objects such as paperclips to fall into or become stuck inside the machine.
Do not knock the machine while it is operating (for instance, do not use the
machine's surfaces to knock stacks of paper into square).
35
Appendix
Depending on the ambient temperature and humidity, steam may come from
the exhaust vent behind the control panel during printing. This is water vapor
from the paper, not a sign of malfunction.
If condensation forms inside the machine as a result of temperature change,
the machine may not print properly. To minimize this problem, use the optional anti-condensation heaters.
The optional anti-condensation heaters keep the machine in optimal operating condition at all times by ensuring its interior is always warm. For this reason, the heaters will not go off when you switch the machines main power
off. You have to switch them off intentionally.
Be sure to make a note of the registered machine settings in case they are lost
due to accident or malfunction.
Reference
p.28 Turning Off the Power
p.29 Turning Off the Main Power
Saving Color Copies

Followings are notes on saving color copies.
There is no difference between color prints and color copies in terms of fading. However, for long-term storage, make sure to store them in a binder
away from direct sunlight.
Toner may melt if a print and a half-dried print are put on top of each other.
Toner may also melt when using solvent type adhesive agents for pasting
prints.
When folding prints, toner in the folds will come off.
Toner may melt if it is placed on mats made of chlorinated plastic in locations
of high temperature for long periods of time.
Toner may melt if prints are placed in places of extremely high temperatures,
such as near heaters.
36
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM
Software and Utilities Included on the CDROM

Three CD-ROMs come with this machine: Printer Drivers and Utilities, Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities, and Manuals. PS Driver is stored in
Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities. In Manuals, manuals are stored in
PDF format and HTML format.
The following are included in the three separate CD-ROMs:
Font Manager 2000

For installing new screen fonts, or organizing and managing fonts already in
the system. For details about Font Manager 2000, see the manual on the CDROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

For the system administrator to manage network printers.
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
For users to manage their network print status.
1394 Utility
For the optional IEEE 1394 interface unit. For details, see the Readme file or
the manual provided with the optional IEEE 1394 interface unit.
Acrobat Reader
This utility allows you to read PDF files (Portable Document Format).
Printer Utility for Mac
This utility allows users to download and manage a variety of fonts as well as
manage printers. For details about this utility, see PostScript3 Supplement.
Note
Documentation about using the machine is included on the CD-ROM in PDF
format. For details about using Acrobat Reader, see Acrobat Reader online
Help.
Reference
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help

Acrobat Reader online Help
37
Appendix
Viewing the Contents of the CD-ROM

Follow the procedure below to view the contents of the CD-ROMs.
A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.
B Click [Browse This CD-ROM].

Explorer starts and displays the contents of the CD-ROM.
Printer Drivers for This Printer

Printing requires installation of a printer driver for your operating system. The
following drivers are included on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and
Utilities.
Printer Language
PCL 6
PCL 5c
RPCS
PostScript 3
Windows 95
*1
OK
OK
OK
OK *12
Windows 98
*2
OK
OK
OK
OK *12
Windows Me *3
OK
OK
OK
OK *12
Windows 2000 *4
OK
OK
OK
OK *13
Windows XP *5
OK
OK
OK
OK *13
Windows Server 2003 *6
OK
OK
OK
OK *13
Windows NT 4.0 *7
OK *11
OK *10
OK *10
OK *11
Mac OS *8
OK *12
Mac OS X *9
OK *14
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
*10
*11
*12
*12
Microsoft Windows 95 operating system

Microsoft Windows 98 operating system
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition
Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft Windows NT Server operating system version 4.0, Microsoft Windows NT
Workstation operating system version 4.0 in a computer using x86 processors.
Versions 8.6 to 9.2 of the Mac OS (Mac OS X Classic mode is supported.)
Mac OS X 10.1 or later (Native mode)
Requires Service Pack 4 or later.
Requires Service Pack 6 or later.
The Adobe PostScript 3 printer drivers and PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
are included on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities.
38

*13
*14
The PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files are included on the CD-ROM labeled
Printer Drivers and Utilities.
The Adobe PostScript Printer Description (PPD) installer is included on the CDROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities.
PCL printer drivers

Two kinds of PCL printer driver (PCL 5c and PCL 6) are included on the CDROM that comes with this machine. These drivers allow your computer to
communicate with this machine via a printer language.
RPCS printer driver
This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language. In addition to the conventional user interface, another
preset user interface is provided.
Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers and PPD files

Adobe PostScript printer drivers and the PPD files are included on the CDROM provided with this machine. Adobe PostScript printer drivers allow the
computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language. PPD
files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.
PPD files
PPD files are included on the CD-ROM provided with this machine. PPD files
allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.
Note
Some applications may require installation of the PCL 5c printer driver. In
this case, you can install PCL 5c without having to install PCL6.
Reference
Preparing the Machine, Printer Reference
TWAIN Driver
This section describes the file path to and system requirements of the TWAIN
driver.
This driver is required to scan an original using a scanner. To use the machine
as a network TWAIN scanner, this driver must be installed.
File path
The following drivers are included on the CD-ROM labeled Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities provided with this machine:
\DRIVERS\TWAIN
39
Appendix
System requirements
Hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the following operating system
properly
Under Windows NT with RISC-based processors (MIPS R series, Alpha
AXP, or PowerPC), this driver is not supported.
Operating system
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Display resolution
800 x 600 pixels, 256 colors or higher
LAN-Fax Driver
This driver allows you to use LAN-Fax functions.
File path
The following folders are on the CD-ROM labeled Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities:
LAN-Fax Driver for Windows 98/Me
\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\WIN9X_ME
LAN-Fax Driver for Windows NT 4.0
\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\NT4
LAN-Fax Driver for Windows
2000/XP and Windows Server 2003
\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\WIN2K_XP
System requirements
Hardware
PC/AT-compatible
Operating systems
Microsoft Windows 98/Me
Display
VGA 640480 pixels or more
Note
Before beginning installation, exit all other applications.
40
DeskTopBinder Lite
This section explains the file path and system requirements of DeskTopBinder Lite.
DeskTopBinder is to be installed on the client computers for integration and
management of various kinds of files such as scan files, files created with applications, and existing scan files. This software allows you to use various functions
for stored scan files such as viewing stored files. Also, with the ScanRouter delivery software, you can view the files stored in in-trays of the delivery server or
use other functions for stored files.
For details about the software installed with DeskTopBinder Lite, see DeskTopBinder Lite, Scanner Reference.
File path
The following drivers are included on the CD-ROM labeled Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities provided with this machine:
\UTILITY\DESKV2
System requirements
Hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the operating system properly
Operating system
When installing all functions of DeskTopBinder
Microsoft Windows 98SE/Me/2000 Professional SP1 or later/2000 Server SP1
or later/2000 Advanced Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition
When installing only SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Microsoft Windows 95 SP1/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional SP1 or later/2000
Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Reference
Scanner Reference
41
Appendix

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is an application that uses TCP/IP and
IPX/SPX to monitor network printers. It can monitor multiple network printers
using IPv4 address. We recommend that network administrators use this application.
File path
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is stored in the following folder in the CDROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities:
NETWORK\DEVMON\ADMIN\DISK1
Operating system
Protocol stack
Windows 95 / 98 / Me
TCP/IP provided with Windows 95 / 98 / Me

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95 / 98 / Me
NetWare Client provided with Windows 95 / 98
Novell Client provided with Windows 95 / 98
Windows 2000
TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000
NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Window NT
Windows XP
TCP/IP provided with Windows XP

IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP
NetWare Client provided with Windows XP
Novell Client provided with Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003

IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003
NetWare Client provided with Windows Server 2003
Novell Client provided with Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
TCP/IP provided with Windows NT

IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT
Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows NT
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Windows NT
Available functions
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin has the functions to check the followings:
Printer supplies such as paper or ink
Results of print jobs executed from the computer
Reference
Network Guide
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help
42
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client allows you to manage and print
various data such as files created with an application, images scanned with a
scanner, and existing images as one document.
File path
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is stored in the following
folder on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities:
NETWORK\DEVMON\CLIENT\DISK1
Operating environment of the printer driver

Applicable computer
Machines which properly work with the applicable OS below. PC/AT
compatible machine.
Applicable OS
Microsoft Windows 98SE/Me
Note
See DeskTopBinder Lite, Scanner Reference or Help of DeskTopBinderSmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
DeskTopBinder includes SmartDeviceMonitor for Client. See Help of DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
43
Appendix
Installing the Operating Instructions

The supplied Manuals CD-ROM contains HTML-format manuals. Install the
manuals you want to read.
Important
The system requirements for installing the manuals are as follows:
Operating System: Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows

Server 2003, or Windows NT4.0
Minimum Display Resolution: 800600 pixels
Recommended Browser:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 SP2 or later
Netscape 6.2 or later
A simplified manual is displayed if you are using Internet Explorer 3.02 or
Netscape Navigator 4.05 or later versions.
HTML manuals can also be viewed on a Macintosh.
A Click [Install manuals].

B Install the manual you require according to the displayed instructions.
C When installation is complete, click [Finish].
D Click [Finish].
Note
If you cannot install a manual, copy the Manual folder to your computers hard drive, and then run Setup.exe.
To delete an installed manual, on the [Start] menu, click [Programs], then

[Product Name], and then uninstall the data.
44
Installing the Operating Instructions
PDF Manuals
The supplied CD-ROM contains PDF versions of the HTML user manuals.
File path
The PDF manuals are in the following folders on the CD-ROM:
About This Machine
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\INTRO
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\USERTOOL
Troubleshooting
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\TROUBLE
Copy/Document Server Reference
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\COPY
Facsimile Reference
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\FAX
Printer Reference
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\PRINTER
Scanner Reference
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\SCANNER
Network Guide
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\NETWORK
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\PS3
Note
To view the PDF manuals, you need to have Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Reader
installed on your computer.
45
Appendix
Opening the Installed Operating

Instructions
This section explains how to open installed manuals.
Opening from the Icon

This section explains how to open a manual using its desktop icon.
A Double-click the icon on your desktop.
The browser opens, and then the manual appears.
Opening from the [Start] Menu

This section explains how to open a manual from the [Start] menu.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs] (Windows XP: [All Programs]), then
[Product Name], and then click the manual you want to view.
Note
Depending on the settings made during installation, folder names may differ.
46
Opening the Installed Operating Instructions
Opening from the CD-ROM

This section explains how to open a manual from a supplied CD-ROM.
A Click [Read manuals].

B Click the title of the manual you want to view.
47
Appendix
Copy Paper
This section describes recommended paper sizes and types, unusable paper, and
paper storage.
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

The following limitations apply to each tray:
Important
If you use damp or curled paper, a staple clogging or paper jam may occur.
Paper tray 1
Paper type and
weight
Metric version
Inch version
Paper
capacity
Standard
60-81 g/m2
(16-22 lb.)
A4K
81/2" 11"K
550 sheets
Middle thick
paper
82-105 g/m2
(22-28 lb.)
*1
Thick paper
106-169 g/m2
(28.5-44 lb.)
*1
When loading paper, make sure the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark
of the paper tray.
48
Copy Paper
Paper tray 2 and Paper tray 3,4 (option)

Paper type and
weight
Metric version
Standard
60-81 g/m2
(16-22 lb.)
A3L, A4KL, A5K, B4 JISL, B5 JISKL, 11" 17"L,

81/2" 14"L, 81/4" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL, 71/4" 101/2"KL,
8" 13"L, 81/2" 13"L, 81/4" 13"L, 11" 15"L, 10" 14"L,
8" 10"L, 8KL, 16KKL
Custom size
(Vertical: 90-305 mm,
Horizontal: 148-457.2 mm/
For printer or fax Vertical: 90-305 mm,
Horizontal: 148-600 mm)
Middle thick
paper
82-105 g/m2
(22-28 lb.)
*1
550 sheets
3
*1
Custom size
(Vertical: 3.55"-12",
Horizontal: 5.5"-18"/
For printer or fax Vertical: 3.55"-12",
Horizontal: 5.5"-23.6")

81/2" 14"L, 81/4" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL, 71/4" 101/2"KL,
8" 13"L, 81/2" 13"L, 81/4" 13"L, 11" 15"L, 10" 14"L,
8" 10"L, 8KL, 16KKL
Custom size
Paper
capacity
Custom size
(Vertical: 3.55"-12",

81/2" 14"L, 81/4" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL, 71/4" 101/2"KL,
8" 13"L, 81/2" 13"L, 81/4" 13"L, 11" 15"L, 10" 14"L,
8" 10"L, 8KL, 16KKL
Custom size
Thick paper
106-169 g/m2
(28.5-44 lb.)
Inch version
*1
Custom size
(Vertical: 3.55"-12",
of the paper tray.
49
Appendix
Bypass Tray
Paper type and
weight
Metric version
Standard paper
60-81 g/m2
(16-22 lb.)
A3L, A4KL, A5KL, A6L, B4 JISL, B5 JISKL, B6 JISL,

12" 18"L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/4" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"L, 71/4" 101/2"KL, 8" 13"L,
81/2" 13"L, 81/4" 13"L, 11" 15"L, 10" 14"L, 8" 10"L,
8KL, 16KKL
Custom size
3
Middle thick
paper
82-105 g/m2
(22-28 lb.)
Paper capacity
100 sheets
Custom size
(Vertical: 3.55"-12",

12" 18"L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/4" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"L, 71/4" 101/2"KL, 8" 13"L,
81/2" 13"L, 81/4" 13"L, 11" 15"L, 10" 14"L, 8" 10"L,
8KL, 16KKL
Custom size
Thick paper
106-253 g/m2
(28.5-67 lb.)
Inch version
Custom size
(Vertical: 3.55"-12",

12" 18"L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/4" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"L, 71/4" 101/2"KL, 8" 13"L,
81/2" 13"L, 81/4" 13"L, 11" 15"L, 10" 14"L, 8" 10"L,
8KL, 16KKL
Custom size
*1
*1
Custom size
(Vertical: 3.55"-12",
Translucent
paper
A3L, A4KL, B4 JISL, B5 JISKL
1 sheet
OHP
transparencies
A4KL
50 sheets
Label paper
(adhesive labels)
B4 JISL, A4KL
30 sheets
Envelope
91/2" 41/2"K, 71/2" 37/8"K, C6 EnvK, C5 EnvK,

DL EnvK
*1
of the bypass tray.
50
Copy Paper
Large Capacity Tray

Paper type and
weight
Metric version
Inch version
Paper
capacity
Standard
60-105g/m2
(16-28lb.)
A4K
81/2 11K
2000
sheets
Note
When you load paper in Paper Tray 1, 2, or 3 (LCT) or on the optional Lower
Paper Trays, load it print side up.
Load paper into the bypass tray with the print side down.
When using the bypass tray, it is recommended to set the paper orientation to
L.
You must manually specify the size of custom size paper when loading it on
the bypass tray.
When loading paper in Paper Tray 3 (LCT), make sure the top of the stack is
no higher than the limit mark. The number of sheets you can load depends on
the thickness and condition of the paper.
If you want to change the size of paper that can be loaded in Paper Tray 3
(LCT), contact your service representative.
If multiple-sheet jams occur, load the paper sheet by sheet.
Do not use paper designed for inkjet printers, as these may stick to the fusing
unit and cause a misfeed.
We recommend you load OHP transparencies, and adhesive label sheets one
at a time.
When loading OHP transparencies, check the front and back of the sheets,
and place them correctly, or a misfeed might occur. Set the paper orientation
to L.
When loading OHP transparencies, set [Special Paper] in Bypass Tray Paper to
[OHP].
When using OHP transparencies, fan them for each use. If you store the sheets
in the tray, they may adhere and may cause feeding problems.
When copying onto OHP transparencies, remove copied sheets one by one.
When loading thick paper (106-253g/m2, 28.5-67lb.), or adhesive label sheets,
make sure the top of the stack is no higher than the limit mark. The number
of sheets you can load depends on the thickness and condition of the paper.
To load thick paper (106-253g/m2, 28.5-67lb.), set [Special Paper] in Bypass
Tray Paper to [Thick Paper 1], [Thick Paper 2], or [Thick Paper 3].
To print onto adhesive label sheets, set [Special Paper] in Bypass Tray Paper to
[Thick Paper].
When copying onto letterhead paper, the paper placing orientation is different depending on which function you are using. See Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper, Troubleshooting.
51
Appendix
If you load paper of the same size in the same orientation in two or more
trays, the machine automatically shifts to the other tray - except the bypass
tray - when the first tray in use runs out of paper. This function is called Auto
Tray Switching. (However, if one tray has recycled or special paper, the settings of the other trays must be the same for Auto Tray Switching to work.)
This saves interrupting a copy run to replenish paper when making a large
number of copies. See Copier / Document Server Features, and Tray Paper Settings, General Settings Guide.
Unusable Paper
This section describes paper unusable on this machine.

R CAUTION:
Do not use aluminum foil, carbon paper, or similar conductive paper to
avoid a fire or machine failure.
Important
To prevent faults, do not use any of the following kinds of treated paper:
Paper for inkjet printers

Thermal fax paper
Art paper
Aluminum foil
Carbon paper
Conductive paper
Paper with perforated lines
Hemmed-edge paper
Tab stock
Faults can occur if you copy onto sides that are already printed. Take care to
copy onto unprinted sides only.
To prevent misfeeds, do not use the following kinds of paper:
Bent, folded, or creased paper
Perforated paper
Slippery paper
Torn paper
Rough paper
Thin paper with little stiffness
Paper with a dusty surface
If you copy onto rough grain paper, the image might be blurred.
Do not reuse copy paper that has been already copied or printed onto.
52
Copy Paper
Paper Storage
This section describes how to store paper.
When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:
Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
Avoid storing paper in humid areas (humidity: 70% or more).
Store on a flat surface.
Do not store paper vertically.
Under high temperature and humidity conditions, or low temperature and
humidity conditions, store paper in vinyl bags.
53
INDEX
A
Alert indicator, 17
Authentication Screen, 21
Auto Document Feeder (ADF), 13
Auto Off, 30
Available Characters, 31
Energy Saver, 30
Energy Saver key, 17
Energy-saving, 10
ENERGY STAR Program, 10
Entering Text, 31
Enter key (# key), 17
Entry screen, 31
Error indicator, 17
Exposure glass, 13
Exposure glass cover, 15
Extender, 13
External Options, 15
Extra G3 Interface Unit, 16
B
Bluetooth unit, 16
Booklet Finisher SR3020, 15
Bridge Unit, 15
Bypass Tray, 13
C
CAUTION, 4, 7
Changing Modes, 25
Clear Modes key, 17
Clear/Stop key, 17
Color Copies, 36
Communicating indicator, 17
Computer, ix
Confidential File indicator, 17
Control Panel, 21, 22, 23
Copier, iii
Copy Data Security Unit, 16
Copy Paper, 48
D
Data In indicator, 17
DataOverWriteSecurity Unit, 16
DeskTopBinder Lite, 41
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client, 43
Display, 19
Display panel, 17
Document Server, iv
Dos and Don'ts, 35
Duplex Priority, 10
F
Facsimile, iii
Fax unit, 16
Finisher SR3030, 15
Front Cover, 13
Function keys, 17
H
Handset, 15
How to Enter Text, 32
HTML manuals, 44
I
IEEE 1284 Interface Board, 16
IEEE 1394 interface board, 16
IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN board, 16
Installing the manuals, 44
Internal Options, 16
Internal Shift Tray, 15
Internal Tray 1, 13
Internal Tray 2, 15
Internet Fax, vi
Interrupt key, 17
IP-Fax, vi
K
Key arrangement, 31
54
L
LAN-Fax Driver, 40
Login, 22, 23, 24
Login/Logout key, 17
Log Off, 23, 24
Lower Paper Trays, 13, 15
Lower Right Cover, 13
Low-Power mode, 10
M
Main power, 27
Main power indicator, 17
Main power switch, 13
Manuals for This Machine, i
N
Network, vii
Number keys, 17
O
Opening the installed manuals, 46
Operation switch, 13, 17
Options, 14
P
Paperless Fax Transmission and Reception, v
Paper Sizes, 48
Paper Storage, 53
Paper Tray 1,2, 13
Paper Tray 3 (LCT), 15
Paper Types, 48
PCL, 38
PDF manuals, 45
PictBridge card, 16
Positions of WARNING and
CAUTION labels, 7
Power, 27
PPD, 38
Preventing an Unauthorized Copy, x
Printer, iii
Printer Driver, 22, 23, 38
Program key, 17
S
Sample Copy key, 17
Scanner, iii, vii
Scanner Accessibility Unit, 15
Sending fax documents via e-mail, vi
Simplified Display, 20
Simplified Display key, 17, 20
Sleep mode, 10
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, 42
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, 43
Software and Utilities
Included on the CD-ROM, 37
SR790, 15
Start key, 17
Symbols, 3
System Reset, 26
T
Transmission, v
Turning Off the Main Power, 29
Turning Off the Power, 28
Turning On the Main Power, 27
Turning On the Power, 28
Turn off, 27
Turn on, 27
TWAIN Driver, 39
U
Unusable Paper, 52
USB host board, 16
User Code Authentication, 22
User Text, 33
User Tools/Counter key, 17
W
WARNING, 4, 7
Web Image Monitor, v, ix, 24
R
Receiving File indicator, 17
Reception, v
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types, 48
RPCS, 38
55
56
EN
USA
B222-7787
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Adobe, PostScript, and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.
PictBridge is a trademark.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
The product name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95
The product name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
The product names of Windows 2000 are as follows:

The product names of Windows XP are as follows:

The product names of Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:

Microsoft Windows ServerTM 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft Windows ServerTM 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft Windows ServerTM 2003 Web Edition
The product names of Windows NT are as follows:

Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0
Copyright 2006
Operating Instructions About This Machine
Type for C3535/DSc535/LD435c/Aficio MP C3500

Type for C4540g/DSc545g/Aficio MP C4500G
EN USA B222-7787
Connecting the Machine
System Settings
Copier / Document Server Features
Facsimile Features
Printer Features
Scanner Features
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Other User Tools
Appendix
Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction
Important
Notes:
local dealer.
Notes:
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your machine before reading this manual.

About This Machine

Troubleshooting
Security Reference
Facsimile Reference
Printer Reference
Scanner Reference
Network Guide
i
Other manuals
UNIX Supplement
Note

For "UNIX Supplement", please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
"PostScript3 Supplement" and "UNIX Supplement" include descriptions of
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Display Panel..........................................................................................................2
Accessing User Tools ...........................................................................................3
Changing Default Settings .........................................................................................3
Quitting User Tools ....................................................................................................4
Menu Protect..............................................................................................................4
1. Connecting the Machine

Connecting to the Interfaces ................................................................................5
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface .........................................................................6
Connecting to the USB Interface................................................................................8
Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface......................................................................9
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface....................................................................10
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Interface......................................11
Network Settings..................................................................................................14
Settings Required to Use the Printer/LAN-Fax ........................................................14
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax .....................................................................17
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function ............................................................... 21
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder Function ..................................................25
Settings Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner.........................................28
Settings Required to Use Network TWAIN Scanner ................................................31
Settings Required to Use Document Server ............................................................ 33
Using Utilities to Make Network Settings .................................................................36
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone ........................45
Connecting the Telephone Line ...............................................................................45
Selecting the Line Type............................................................................................45
2. System Settings
General Features..................................................................................................47
Output tray settings ..................................................................................................50
Tray Paper Settings .............................................................................................51
Timer Settings ...................................................................................................... 57
Interface Settings.................................................................................................59
Network .................................................................................................................... 59
Parallel Interface ...................................................................................................... 63
IEEE 1394 ................................................................................................................64
IEEE 802.11b ...........................................................................................................66
Print List ...................................................................................................................67
File Transfer .........................................................................................................69
Administrator Tools.............................................................................................76
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server ................................................................84
Programming the LDAP server ................................................................................85
iii
3. Copier / Document Server Features

General Features..................................................................................................91
Reproduction Ratio..............................................................................................96
Edit ......................................................................................................................100
Stamp ..................................................................................................................106
Background Numbering ......................................................................................... 106
Preset Stamp .........................................................................................................107
User Stamp ............................................................................................................110
Date Stamp ............................................................................................................111
Page Numbering .................................................................................................... 113
Input/Output .......................................................................................................116
Adjust Color Image ............................................................................................119
Settings for the Document Server.................................................................... 120
4. Facsimile Features
iv
General Features................................................................................................121
Scan Settings .....................................................................................................124
Send Settings .....................................................................................................125
Reception Settings ............................................................................................128
Initial Settings .................................................................................................... 134
Reception File Setting .......................................................................................139
Reception Report e-mail ........................................................................................140
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size ..............................................................141
Deleting a scan size ...............................................................................................143
Registering Fax Information .............................................................................144
Registering Fax Information ...................................................................................145
Changing Fax Information...................................................................................... 147
Deleting Fax Information ........................................................................................147
Forwarding .........................................................................................................148
Programming an End Receiver ..............................................................................149
Quitting the forwarding function .............................................................................151
Forwarding Mark .................................................................................................... 151
Parameter Settings ............................................................................................152
Changing the User Parameters..............................................................................158
Special Senders to Treat Differently ................................................................159
Authorized Reception.............................................................................................160
Reception File Print Quantity .................................................................................161
Forwarding .............................................................................................................161
Print 2 Sided...........................................................................................................161
Memory Lock..........................................................................................................162
Paper Tray .............................................................................................................162
Programming/Changing Special Senders ..............................................................163
Authorized RX (Authorized Reception) ..................................................................165
Reception File Print Qty ......................................................................................... 165
Forwarding .............................................................................................................166
Print 2 Sided...........................................................................................................167
Memory Lock..........................................................................................................167
Paper Tray per Sender...........................................................................................167
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender....................................................168
Deleting a Special Sender...................................................................................... 171
Box Settings .......................................................................................................172

Programming/Changing Personal Boxes ...............................................................172
Deleting Personal Boxes........................................................................................175
Programming/Changing Information Boxes ...........................................................176
Deleting Information Boxes ....................................................................................179
Programming/Changing Transfer Boxes................................................................180
Deleting Transfer Boxes......................................................................................... 183
Printing the Box List ...............................................................................................184
5. Printer Features
Test Print ............................................................................................................185
Printing the configuration page ..............................................................................186
Maintenance .......................................................................................................188
System ................................................................................................................189
Host Interface .....................................................................................................193
PCL Menu ...........................................................................................................194
PS Menu.............................................................................................................. 196
PDF Menu ...........................................................................................................197
6. Scanner Features
General Settings ................................................................................................199
Scan Settings .....................................................................................................201
Send Settings .....................................................................................................203
7. Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner

Functions
Address Book.....................................................................................................205
Managing names in the Address Book ..................................................................208
Sending fax by Quick Dial ...................................................................................... 208
Sending e-mail by Quick Dial .................................................................................208
Sending scanned files to a shared folder directly...................................................209
Preventing unauthorized user access to shared folders from the machine ...........209
Managing users and machine usage .....................................................................209
Registering Names ............................................................................................210
Registering Names.................................................................................................210
Changing a Registered Name................................................................................212
Deleting a Registered Name ..................................................................................213
Authentication Information ............................................................................... 214
Registering a User Code........................................................................................215
Changing a User Code...........................................................................................216
Deleting a User Code.............................................................................................218
Displaying the Counter for Each User....................................................................219
Printing the Counter for Each User ........................................................................ 219
Printing the Counter for All Users........................................................................... 221
Clearing the Number of Prints................................................................................222
Fax Destination ..................................................................................................223
Fax Destination ......................................................................................................225
IP-Fax Destination..................................................................................................231
v
E-mail Destination..............................................................................................236
Registering an E-mail Destination..........................................................................236
Changing an E-mail Destination.............................................................................238
Deleting an E-mail Destination...............................................................................239
Registering Folders ...........................................................................................240
Using SMB to Connect...........................................................................................240
Using FTP to Connect............................................................................................246
Using NCP to Connect ...........................................................................................251
Registering Names to a Group .........................................................................257
Registering a Group ...............................................................................................257
Registering Names to a Group...............................................................................258
Adding a Group to Another Group .........................................................................260
Displaying Names Registered in a Group ..............................................................261
Removing a Name from a Group ........................................................................... 262
Deleting a Group Within Another Group ................................................................263
Changing a Group Name .......................................................................................265
Deleting a Group .................................................................................................... 266
Registering a Protection Code .........................................................................267
Registering a Protection Code to a Single User.....................................................267
Registering a Protection Code to a Group User.....................................................269
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication..................................................270
SMTP Authentication .............................................................................................270
LDAP Authentication ..............................................................................................272
8. Other User Tools

Maintenance .......................................................................................................275
Changing the Display Language ......................................................................276
Inquiry .................................................................................................................277
Counter ............................................................................................................... 279
Displaying the Total Counter..................................................................................279
9. Appendix
Specifications for the Main Unit .......................................................................281
Specifications for Options ................................................................................286
Information about Installed Software...............................................................292
expat ......................................................................................................................292
NetBSD .................................................................................................................. 292
Sablotron................................................................................................................294
JPEG LIBRARY .....................................................................................................295
SASL ......................................................................................................................295
MD4........................................................................................................................296
MD5........................................................................................................................296
Samba(Ver 3.0.4)...................................................................................................297
RSA BSAFE .........................................................................................................297
Open SSL...............................................................................................................298
Open SSH ..............................................................................................................303
Open LDAP ............................................................................................................308
INDEX....................................................................................................... 310
vi

Symbols
notes. They can be found in the "Safety Information" section of About This Machine.
Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the "Safety
Information" section of About This Machine.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machines functions, and instructions
on resolving user errors.
[]
{}
1
Display Panel
The display panel shows machine status, error messages, and function menus.
. Keys appearing as
cannot be used.
Important
A force or impact of more than 30 N (about 3 kgf) will damage the display
panel.
To display the following screen, press the {User Tools/Counter} key to display the
User Tools menu, and then press [System Settings].
Using the System Settings menu screen as an example, this section explains how
to use the machines display panel.
AQT006S
1. The menu tabs for various settings appear. To display the setting
you want to specify or change, press
the appropriate menu tab.
2. A list of settings appears. To specify or change a setting, press the appropriate key in the list.
3. Press this to quit the User Tools
menu.
2
Accessing User Tools

User Tools allow you to change or set defaults.
Note
Operations for system settings differ from normal operations. Always quit
User Tools when you have finished.
Any changes you make with User Tools remain in effect even if the main
power switch or operation switch is turned off, or the {Energy Saver} or {Clear
Modes} key is pressed.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
Reference
p.4 Quitting User Tools
Changing Default Settings

This section describes how to change the settings of User Tools.
Important
If Administrator Authentication Management is specified, contact your administrator.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
AQT007S
B Select the menu.

To change the System Settings, press [System Settings].
To change the Copier / Document Server Features, press [Copier / Document
Server Features].
To change the Facsimile Features, press [Facsimile Features].
To change the Printer Features, press [Printer Features].
To change the Scanner Features, press [Scanner Features].
To adjust color registration or gradation, press [Maintenance].
To change the language used on the display, press [Espaol].
To check the telephone numbers to contact for repairs, or to order consumables, press [Inquiry].
To check the counter, press [Counter].
3
C Select the user tool you want to change.

D Change settings by following instructions on the display, and then press
[OK].
Note
To cancel changes made to settings and return to the initial display, press
the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.47 System Settings
p.91 Copier / Document Server Features

p.121 Facsimile Features
p.185 Printer Features
p.199 Scanner Features
p.275 Other User Tools
Quitting User Tools

This section describes how to end User Tools.
AQT007S
Note
You can also quit User Tools by pressing [Exit].
Menu Protect
Using Menu Protect, you can prevent unauthenticated users from changing the
user tools. Menu Protect can be specified for each of the following user tools
menus.
Facsimile Features
Printer Features
Scanner Features
For details, consult your administrator.
4
1. Connecting the Machine

This chapter describes how to connect the machine to the network and specify
the network settings.
Connecting to the Interfaces

This section explains how to identify the machines interface and connect the
machine according to the network environment.
AQT002S
1. IEEE 1394 ports (optional)
5. Wireless LAN port (optional)
Ports for connecting the IEEE 1394 interface cable
Port for using the wireless LAN
2. USB2.0 port
Port for connecting the USB2.0 interface
cable
3. 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port
Note
You cannot install two or more of the
options below: IEEE 1394 interface
board, IEEE 1284 interface board,
IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN
Port for connecting the 10BASE-T or

100BASE-TX cable
4. IEEE 1284 port (optional)

Port for connecting the IEEE 1284 interface cable
5
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface

Connect 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX cable to the Ethernet interface.
Important
If the main power switch is on, turn it off.
A A ferrite core for the Ethernet cable is supplied with this machine. Make a
loop in the cable about 3cm (1.2 inch) (1) from the machine end of the cable.
Attach the ferrite core.
AEV047S
B Make sure the main power switch of the machine is off.

C Connect the Ethernet interface cable to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port.
AQS015S
D Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to a network connection device
such as a hub.
6
E Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
1
AME005S
A
B
Indicator (green)
Lights up green when the machine is connected correctly to the network.
Indicator (yellow)
Lights up yellow when 100 BASE-TX is in operation. Goes off when 10
BASE-T is in operation.
Note
For details about installing the printer driver, see "Preparing the Machine",
Printer Reference.
Reference
"Turning On the Power", About This Machine
"Preparing the Machine", Printer Reference
7
Connecting to the USB Interface

Connect the USB2.0 interface cable to the USB2.0 port.
A Connect the USB2.0 interface cable to the USB2.0 port.
AQS014S
B Connect the other end to the USB2.0 port on the host computer.
Note
This machine does not come with a USB interface cable. Make sure you
purchase the appropriate cable for the machine and your computer.
The USB2.0 interface board is supported by Windows Me / 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, Mac OS X 10.3.3 or higher.
For Windows Me:
Make sure to install "USB Printing Support". When used with Windows
Me, only a speed equal to that of USB1.1 is possible.
For Mac OS:
To use Macintosh, the machine must be equipped with the optional
PostScript 3 unit. When used with Mac OS X 10.3.3 or higher, a transfer
speed of USB2.0 is supported.
Printer Reference.
Reference
8
Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface

Connect the IEEE 1394 interface cable to the IEEE 1394 interface board.
A Connect the IEEE 1394 interface cable to the IEEE 1394 port.
AQS016S
B Connect the other end of the cable into the interface connector on the host
computer.
Check the shape of the connector to the computer. Connect the cable firmly.
Note
Use the interface cable supplied with the IEEE 1394 interface board.
Two interface ports are available for connecting the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
Either is one can be used.
Printer Reference.
Reference
9
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface

Connect the IEEE 1284 interface cable to the IEEE 1284 interface board.
A Make sure the main power switch on the machine is off.

B Turn off the main power switch of the host computer.
C Connect the IEEE 1284 interface cable to the IEEE 1284 port.
AQS017S
Use the conversion connector (1) supplied with the IEEE 1284 interface board.
D Connect the other end of the cable into the interface connector on the host
computer.
Check the shape of the connector to the computer. Connect the cable firmly.
E Turn on the main power switch of the machine.

F Turn on the host computer.
When using Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP and Windows Server 2003, a
printer driver installation screen might appear when the computer is turned
on. If this happens, click [Cancel] on the screen.
Note
Printer Reference.
Reference
10
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Interface

Connect to the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) interface.
Note
Check the settings of the IPv4 address and subnet mask of this machine.
For details about how to set the IPv4 address and subnet mask from the control panel of the machine, see "Interface Settings".
Reference
p.59 Network
Setup Procedure
Set up IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) according to the following procedure:
AME006S
11
Note
Select [802.11 Ad-hoc Mode] mode when connecting Windows XP as a wireless
LAN client using Windows XP standard driver or utilities, or when not using
the infrastructure mode.
You can specify either "WEP" or "WPA" to the Security Method.

Specify "WPA", when [Communication Mode] is set to [Infrastructure Mode].
For details about how to specify wireless LAN settings from the control panel
on the machine, see "IEEE 802.11b".
For details about how to specify wireless LAN settings from other than the
control panel on the machine, see "Using Utilities to Make Network Settings".
For details about the setting items, see "IEEE 802.11b".
Reference
p.66 IEEE 802.11b
p.36 Using Utilities to Make Network Settings
Checking the Connection

Check the wireless LAN connection.
Make sure the LED of the IEEE 802.11b interface unit is lit.
When using in infrastructure mode
1
2
ZGDH600J
1. If [LAN Type] on the [Interface Settings] / [Network] screen is not set to [IEEE
802.11b], it does not light, even if the main power is on.
2. If it is connected properly to the network, the LED is green when in infrastructure mode. If the LED is blinking, the machine is searching for devices.
12
When using in adhoc mode / 802.11 ad hoc mode
1
1
2
ZGDH600J
1. If the IEEE 802.11b interface unit is functioning, the LED lights up in orange.
2. If it is connected properly to the network, the LED is green when in ad hoc
mode or 802.11 ad hoc mode. If the LED is blinking, the machine is searching
for devices. The LED will light after a few seconds.
Print the configuration page to verify settings.
Note
For more information about printing a configuration page, see "Print List".
Reference
p.186 Printing the configuration page
Checking the Signal

When using in infrastructure mode, you can check the machine's radio wave status using the control panel.
A Press [System Settings].
B Press [Interface Settings].
C Press [IEEE 802.11b].
D Press [Wireless LAN Signal].
The machine's radio wave status appears.
E After checking radio wave status, press [Exit].
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key to return to the User Tools / Counter / Inquiry
menu.
Note
To check the radio wave status, press [IEEE 802.11b] under [LAN Type] in Network menu of Interface Settings.
Reference
p.36 Using Utilities to Make Network Settings
p.66 IEEE 802.11b
13
Network Settings
This section describes the network settings you can change with User Tools (System Settings). Make settings according to functions you want to use and the interface to be connected.
Important
These settings should be made by the system administrator, or with the advice of the system administrator.
Settings Required to Use the Printer/LAN-Fax

This section lists the settings required for using the printer or LAN-Fax function.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for using the printer or LAN-Fax function
with an Ethernet connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".
Menu
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv4 Address
Necessary
IPv4 Gateway Address
As required
As required
As required
IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
NCP Delivery Protocol
As required
NW Frame Type
As required
SMB Computer Name
As required
SMB Work Group
As required
Ethernet Speed
As required
LAN Type
Permit SNMPv3 Communication
As required
Permit SSL/TLS Communication
As required
Host Name
As required
14
Necessary
Necessary
Network Settings
Menu
User Tool
Machine Name
As required
Note
IPv6 can be used only for the printer function.
For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
[LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN board is installed. If Ethernet
and IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected, the selected interface
has priority.
Reference
p.59 Interface Settings
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)

with an IEEE 1394 connection.
Menu
User Tool
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name
As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name
As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394
Necessary
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Necessary
Note
[IEEE 1394] appears when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.
set to [Active].
Reference
15
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)

with an IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
As required
As required
As required
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
As required
NW Frame Type
As required
SMB Computer Name
As required
SMB Work Group
As required
LAN Type
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
Machine Name
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed
As required
16
Necessary
Necessary
Necessary
Network Settings
Note
set to [Active].
[IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface
board is installed. If both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax

This section lists the settings required for using Internet Fax.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for using Internet Fax with an Ethernet
connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
Necessary
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
File Transfer
SMTP Server
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
As required
File Transfer
POP before SMTP
As required
File Transfer
Reception Protocol
As required
File Transfer
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings
As required
File Transfer
Administrator's E-mail Address
As required
File Transfer
E-mail Communication Port
Necessary
As required
Necessary
Necessary
Necessary
17

Menu
User Tool
File Transfer
E-mail Reception Interval
As required
File Transfer
Max. Reception E-mail Size
As required
File Transfer
E-mail Storage in Server
As required
File Transfer
Program / Change /
Delete E-mail Message
As required
File Transfer
Fax E-mail Account
Necessary
Note
set to [Active].
[LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed. If
both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
SMTP Server and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in order to send Internet Fax.
When POP before SMTP is set to [On], also make setting for Reception Protocol and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.
When SMTP Authentication is set to [On], also make setting for Administrator's E-mail Address.
E-mail Communication Port and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in order to use the reception function.
When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail
Communication Port.
Reference
p.69 File Transfer

This section lists the settings required for using Internet Fax with an IEEE 1394
connection.
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
As required
As required
As required
As required
18
Necessary
Network Settings
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
DNS Configuration
Effective Protocol
Necessary
File Transfer
SMTP Server
Necessary
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
As required
File Transfer
POP before SMTP
As required
File Transfer
Reception Protocol
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
Program / Change /
As required
File Transfer
Fax E-mail Account
As required
Necessary
Necessary
Note
[IEEE 1394] is displayed when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.
set to [Active].
SMTP Server and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in order to use the
send function.
When SMTP Authentication is set to [On], also make setting for Administrator's E-mail Address.
Communication Port.
Reference
p.69 File Transfer
19

This section lists the settings required for using Internet Fax with an IEEE
802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
Necessary
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Necessary
LAN Type
Necessary
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed
As required
File Transfer
SMTP Server
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
As required
File Transfer
POP before SMTP
As required
File Transfer
Reception Protocol
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
20
Necessary
Necessary
Necessary
Network Settings
Menu
User Tool
File Transfer
Program / Change /
File Transfer
Fax E-mail Account
As required
Necessary
Note
set to [Active].
board is installed. If both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
SMTP Server and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in order to use the
send function.
When POP before SMTP is set to [On], you must also make settings for Reception Protocol and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.
When SMTP Authentication is set to [On], you must also make settings for
Administrator's E-mail Address.
Communication Port.
Reference
p.69 File Transfer
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function

This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail with an Ethernet connection.
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
Necessary
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
21

Menu
User Tool
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
File Transfer
SMTP Server
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
As required
File Transfer
POP before SMTP
As required
File Transfer
Reception Protocol
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
Program / Change /
As required
File Transfer
Scanner Resend Interval Time
As required
File Transfer
Number of Scanner Resends
As required
Necessary
As required
Necessary
Necessary
Note
set to [Active].
both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Communication Port.
Reference
p.69 File Transfer
22
Network Settings

This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail with an IEEE 1394 connection.
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
As required
As required
As required
As required
Necessary
Necessary
DNS Configuration
Effective Protocol
Necessary
File Transfer
SMTP Server
Necessary
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
As required
File Transfer
POP before SMTP
As required
File Transfer
Reception Protocol
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
Program / Change /
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
As required
Note
set to [Active].
Communication Port.
Reference
p.69 File Transfer
23

This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail with an IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN) connection.
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
Necessary
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Necessary
LAN Type
Necessary
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed
As required
File Transfer
SMTP Server
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
As required
File Transfer
POP before SMTP
As required
File Transfer
Reception Protocol
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
Program / Change /
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
24
Necessary
Necessary
Network Settings
Note
set to [Active].
When POP before SMTP is set to [On], you must also make settings for Reception Protocol and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.
When setting POP before SMTP to On, check POP3 port number in E-mail
Communication Port.
Reference
p.69 File Transfer
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder Function

This section lists the settings required for sending files.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for sending files with an Ethernet connection.
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
Necessary
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
Necessary
As required
Necessary
25
Note
set to [Active].
Reference
p.69 File Transfer

This section lists the settings required for sending files with an IEEE 1394 connection.
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
As required
As required
As required
As required
Necessary
Necessary
DNS Configuration
Effective Protocol
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
As required
Necessary
Note
set to [Active].
Reference
p.69 File Transfer
26
Network Settings

This section lists the settings required for sending files with an IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN) connection.
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
Necessary
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Necessary
LAN Type
Necessary
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
Necessary
Note
set to [Active].
board is installed. If both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
p.69 File Transfer
27
Settings Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner

This section lists the settings required for delivering data to network.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for delivering data to network with an
Ethernet connection.
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
File Transfer
Delivery Option
As required
File Transfer
Fax RX File Transmission
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
Necessary
As required
Necessary
Note
set to [Active].
[LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed.
When both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
If Delivery Option is set to [On], check that IPv4 Address is specified.
Reference
p.69 File Transfer
28
Network Settings

IEEE 1394 connection.
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
As required
As required
As required
As required
Necessary
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Necessary
File Transfer
Delivery Option
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
Note
set to [Active].
Reference
p.69 File Transfer
29

IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Necessary
LAN Type
Necessary
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed
As required
File Transfer
Delivery Option
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
Necessary
Note
set to [Active].
board is installed. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are
connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
30
Network Settings
Reference
p.69 File Transfer
Settings Required to Use Network TWAIN Scanner

This section lists the settings required for using TWAIN Scanner under the network environment.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for using network TWAIN Scanner with
an Ethernet connection.
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Necessary
LAN Type
Necessary
Ethernet Speed
As required
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
Note
set to [Active].
When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
31

an IEEE 1394 connection.
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
As required
As required
As required
As required
Necessary
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Necessary
Note
set to [Active].
Reference

an IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Necessary
LAN Type
Necessary
32
As required
Network Settings
Menu
User Tool
As required
Host Name
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed
As required
Necessary
Note
set to [Active].
Reference
Settings Required to Use Document Server

This section lists the settings required for using Document Server function under
the network environment.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for using Document Server function with
an Ethernet connection.
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Necessary
33

Menu
User Tool
Ethernet Speed
As required
LAN Type
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
Necessary
Note
set to [Active].
When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference

an IEEE 1394 connection.
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
As required
As required
As required
As required
Necessary
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Necessary
Note
set to [Active].
Reference
34
Network Settings

an IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.
Menu
User Tool
Necessary
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
LAN Type
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed
As required
Necessary
As required/Necessary
Necessary
Note
set to [Active].
Reference
35
Using Utilities to Make Network Settings

You can also specify network settings using utilities such as Web Image Monitor,
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, and telnet.
Note
For details about using Web Image Monitor, see "Using Web Image Monitor",
Network Guide.
For details about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see "Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin", Network Guide.
For Details about using telnet, see "Remote Maintenance", Network Guide.
Reference
"Using Web Image Monitor", Network Guide
"Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin", Network Guide

"Remote Maintenance by telnet", Network Guide
Interface Settings
Change settings by using Web Image Monitor, SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin,
and telnet.
[Network] [Machine IPv4 Address] [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]

Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
[Network] [Machine IPv4 Address] [Specify] [IPv4 Address]
[Network] [Machine IPv4 Address] [Specify] [Sub-net Mask]
[Network] [IPv4 Gateway Address]
36
Network Settings
[Network] [Machine IPv6 Address] [Manual Configuration Address]

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
[Network] [IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration]

[Network] [DNS Configuration] [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]
[Network] [DNS Configuration] [Specify] [DNS Server 1-3]
[Network] [DDNS Configuration]
[Network] [Domain Name] [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]
[Network] [Domain Name] [Specify] [Domain Name]
[Network] [WINS Configuration] [On] [Primary WINS Server]
37
[Network] [WINS Configuration] [On] [Secondary WINS Server]

[Network] [WINS Configuration] [On] [Scope ID]

[Network] [Effective Protocol] [IPv4]
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: You can specify the TCP/IP settings if
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is communicating with the machine using
IPX/SPX.
[Network] [Effective Protocol] [IPv6]
[Network] [Effective Protocol] [NetWare]
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: You can specify the IPX/SPX settings if
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is communicating with the machine using
TCP/IP.
[Network] [Effective Protocol] [SMB]
[Network] [Effective Protocol] [AppleTalk]
38
[Network] [NCP Delivery Protocol]

telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
Network Settings
[Network] [NW Frame Type] [Auto Select]

[Network] [NW Frame Type] [Ethernet II]

[Network] [NW Frame Type] [Ethernet 802.2]
[Network] [NW Frame Type] [Ethernet 802.3]
[Network] [NW Frame Type] [Ethernet SNAP]
[Network] [SMB Computer Name]
[Network] [SMB Work Group]
[Network] [Ethernet Speed]
Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
39
[Network] [LAN Type] [Ethernet]

[Network] [LAN Type] [IEEE 802.11b]

[Network] [Host Name]
[Network] [Machine Name]
[IEEE 1394] [IPv4 Address] [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]
[IEEE 1394] [IPv4 Address] [Specify] [Machine IPv4 Address]
[IEEE 1394] [IPv4 Address] [Specify] [Sub-net Mask]
[IEEE 1394] [DDNS Configuration]
40
Network Settings
[IEEE 1394] [IPv4 over 1394]

[IEEE 1394] [WINS Configuration] [On] [Primary WINS Server]

[IEEE 1394] [WINS Configuration] [On] [Secondary WINS Server]
[IEEE 1394] [WINS Configuration] [On] [Scope ID]
[IEEE 1394] [Host Name]
[IEEE 1394] [Domain Name]
[IEEE 802.11b] [Communication Mode]
[IEEE 802.11b] [SSID Setting]
41
[IEEE 802.11b] [Channel]

[IEEE 802.11b] [Security Method]

[IEEE 802.11b] [Transmission Speed]
[File Transfer] [SMTP Server]
[File Transfer] [SMTP Authentication]
[File Transfer] [POP before SMTP]
[File Transfer] [Reception Protocol]
[File Transfer] [POP3 / IMAP4 Settings]
42
Network Settings
[File Transfer] [Administrator's E-mail Address]

[File Transfer] [E-mail Communication Port]

[File Transfer] [E-mail Reception Interval]
[File Transfer] [Max. Reception E-mail Size]
[File Transfer] [E-mail Storage in Server]
[File Transfer] [Default User Name / Password (Send)]
[File Transfer] [Fax E-mail Account]
[File Transfer] [Scanner Resend Interval Time]
43
[File Transfer] [Number of Scanner Resends]

44
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone

Line and Telephone
1
This section describes how to connect the machine to the telephone lines and select the line type.
Connecting the Telephone Line

To connect the machine to a telephone line, use a snap-in modular type connector.
Important
Make sure the connector is the correct type before you start.
AQT003S
1. External telephone connector

2. G3 interface unit connector
3. Extra G3 interface unit connector
Selecting the Line Type

Select the line type to which the machine is connected. There are two types: tone
and pulse dial.
Select the line type using Administrator Tools.
Note
This function is not available in some regions.
Reference
p.135 Select Dial / Push Phone
45
46
2. System Settings
This chapter describes user tools in the System Settings menu. For details on
how to access System Settings, see "Accessing User tools (System Settings)".
General Features
This section describes the user tools in the General Features menu under System
Settings.
Program / Change / Delete User Text

You can register text phrases you often use when specifying settings, such as
".com" and "Regards".
You can register up to 40 entries.
Program / Change
B Check that [General Features] is selected.
C Press [Program / Change / Delete User Text].
D Press [Program / Change]
E Select the user text you want to change.
To program new user text, press [Not Programmed].
F Press [OK].
G Press [Exit].
Delete
B Check that [General Features] is selected.
C Press [Program / Change / Delete User Text].
D Press [Delete].
E Select the user text you want to delete.
F Press [Clear].
G Press [Exit].
Panel key Sound
The beeper (key tone) sounds when a key is pressed.
On
Off
47
System Settings
Warm-Up Beeper (copier/Document Server)

You can have the beeper sound when the machine becomes ready to copy after leaving Energy Saver mode, or when the power is turned on.
On
Off
Copy Count Display (copier/Document Server)
The copy counter can be set to show the number of copies made (count up) or
the number of copies yet to be made (count down).
Up
Down
Function Priority
Specify the mode to be displayed immediately after the operation switch is
turned on, or when System Reset mode is turned on.
Copier
Document Server
Fax
Printer
Scanner
Print Priority
Print Priority is given to the mode selected.
Display Mode
Copier/Document Server
Facsimile
Printer
Interleave
Job Order
When [Interleave] is selected, the current print job will be interrupted after a
maximum of five sheets.
Function Reset Timer
You can set the length of time the machine waits before changing modes
when using the multi-access function.
This is useful if you are making many copies and have to change settings for
each copy. If you set a longer reset period, you can prevent interruption from
other functions.
Set Time
Immediate
When you select [Set Time], enter the time (330 seconds, in 1 second increments) using the number keys.
The default setting is 3 second(s).
48
General Features
Output: Copier (copier)

Specify a tray to which documents are delivered.
AQT004S
1. Finisher Upper Tray

2. Finisher Shift Tray
7. Finisher Booklet Tray
8. Internal Tray 1
9. Internal Tray 2
Output: Document Server (Document Server)

Internal Tray 1
Internal Tray 2
Finisher Upper Tray
Finisher Shift Tray
Output: Facsimile (facsimile)
Internal Tray 1
Internal Tray 2
Finisher Upper Tray
Finisher Shift Tray
49
System Settings
Output: Printer (printer)

The output trays set on the printer driver have priority over the output tray
specified below.
Internal Tray 1
Internal Tray 2
Finisher Upper Tray
Finisher Shift Tray
System Status/Job List Display Time

Specify how long to display the System Status and Job List display for.
On: 60 second(s)
Off
By selecting [On], you can specify a display time between 10 and 999 seconds.
Key Repeat
You can enable or disable repetition of an operation if a key on the screen or
control panel is pressed continuously.
Off
Normal
Repeat Time: Medium
Repeat Time: Long
Note
If the Panel Tone setting is [Off], the beeper does not sound, whatever the Warm
Up Notice setting.
The Function Reset Timer setting is ignored if Interleave is set for Print Priority.
Reference
p.3 Accessing User Tools
"Function Compatibility", Copy/Document Server Reference
Output tray settings

Important
You cannot interrupt the current stapling job even if a stapling job is specified
by a different function.
When the 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher, or booklet finisher is installed and Staple or Shift Sort is specified for a job, the job will be delivered
to the finisher shift tray regardless of the output tray specified.
50
Tray Paper Settings
Tray Paper Settings

This section describes the user tools in the Tray Paper Settings menu under System Settings.
Important
If the specified paper size differs from the actual size of the paper loaded in
the paper tray, a misfeed might occur because the correct paper size was not
detected.
Paper Tray Priority: Copier (copier/Document Server)

Specify the tray to supply paper for output.
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (optional)
Tray 4 (optional)
When optional paper tray unit is installed, [Tray 3] and [Tray 4]is displayed.
When optional LCT is installed, [Tray 3] is displayed.
Paper Tray Priority: Facsimile (facsimile)
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (optional)
Tray 4 (optional)
Paper Tray Priority: Printer (printer)
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (optional)
Tray 4 (optional)
51
System Settings
Tray Paper Size: Tray 2-4

Select the size of the paper loaded in the paper tray.
The paper guide for the optional LCT is fixed for A4K, 81/2"11"K size paper. Contact your service representative if you need to change the paper size.
The paper sizes you can set for tray 2 are as follows:
Metric version:
"Auto Detect", "A3L", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "B4JISL", "B5JISK",
"B5JISL", "1117L", "1115L", "1014L", "81/214L", "81/213L",
"81/211K", "81/211L", "81/414L", "81/413L", "813L", "810L",
"71/4101/2K", "71/4101/2L", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
Inch version
"Auto Detect", "1117L", "1115L", "1014L", "8 1 / 2 14L",
"81 /2 13L", "8 1/ 2 11K", "8 1/ 211L", "81 / 414L", "81 /4 13L",
"813L", "810L", "71/4101/2K", "71/4101/2L", "A3L", "A4K",
"A4L", "A5K", "B4JISL", "B5JISK", "B5JISL", "8KL", "16KK",
"16KL"
When optional paper tray unit is installed:
Metric version
"B5JISL", "1117L", "1115L", "1014L", "81/214L", "81/213L",
"81/211K", "81/211L", "81/414L", "81/413L", "813L", "810L",
"71/4101/2K", "71/4101/2L", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
Inch version
"Auto Detect", "1117L", "1115L", "1014L", "8 1 / 2 14L",
"8 1 / 2 13L", 8 1 / 2 11K", "8 1 / 2 11L", "8 1 / 4 14L", "8 1 / 4 13L",
"813L", "810L", "71/4101/2K", "71/4101/2L", "A3L", "A4K",
"16KL"
When optional LCT is installed:
"A4K", "81/211K"
Metric version
"B5JISL", "1117L", "1115L", "1014L", "81/214L", "81/213L",
"81/211K", "81/211L", "81/414L", "81/413L", "813L", "810L",
"71/4101/2K", "71/4101/2L", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
Inch version
"Auto Detect", "1117L", "1115L", "1014L", "8 1 / 2 14L",
"81 /2 13L", "8 1/ 2 11K", "8 1/ 211L", "81 / 414L", "81 /4 13L",
"813L", "810L", "71/4101/2K", "71/4101/2L", "A3L", "A4K",
"16KL"
52
Tray Paper Settings
Printer Bypass Paper Size

Specify the size of the paper in the bypass tray when printing data from the computer.
The paper sizes you can set for bypass tray are as follows:
Metric version
"Auto Detect", "A3L", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "A5L", "A6L", "B4JISL",
"B5JISK", "B5JISL", "B6JISL", "C5 EnvK", "C6 EnvK", "DL EnvK",
"1218L", "1117L", "81/214L", "81/213L", "81/211K", "81/211L",
"81/413L", "813L", "71/4101/2K", "71/4101/2L", "51/281/2L",
"41/891/2K", "37/871/2K", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
Specify a custom size of between 90.0-305.0mm vertically, and between
148.0-600.0mm horizontally.
Inch version
"Auto Detect", "1218L", "1117L", "8 1 / 2 14L", "8 1 / 2 13L",
"81/211K", "81/211L", "81/413L", "813L", "71/4101/2K",
"71/4101/2L", "51/281/2L", "41/891/2K", "37/871/2K", "A3L",
"A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "A5L", "A6L", "B4JISL", "B5JISK", "B5JISL",
"B6JISL", "C5 EnvK", "C6 EnvK", "DL EnvK", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
Specify a custom size of between 3.55"-12.00" vertically, and between
5.83"-23.62" horizontally.
Paper Type: Bypass Tray
Sets the display so you can see what type of paper is loaded in the bypass tray.
Paper Type
No Display
Recycled Paper
Color Paper
Letterhead
Label Paper
OHP (Transparency)
Special Paper 1
Special Paper 2
Special Paper 3
Cardstock
Preprinted Paper
Bond Paper
Paper Thickness
Thin Paper
Plain Paper (60-81g/m2, 16-22lb.)
Middle Thick (82-105g/m2, 22-28lb.)
Thick Paper 1 (106-169g/m2, 28.5-44.9lb.)
Thick Paper 2 (170-219g/m2, 45-58lb.)
Thick Paper 3 (220-253g/m2, 58.5-67lb.)
53
System Settings
Paper Type: Tray 1-4

Sets the display so you can see what type of paper is loaded in each paper
tray. The print functions use this information to automatically select the paper tray.
Paper Type
No Display
Recycled Paper
Color Paper
Letterhead
Special Paper 1
Special Paper 2
Special Paper 3
Cardstock
Preprinted Paper
Bond Paper
Paper Thickness
Thin Paper
Plain Paper (60-81g/m2, 16-22lb.)
Middle Thick (82-105g/m2, 22-28lb.)
Thick Paper 1 (106-169g/m2, 28.5-44.9lb.)
Thick Paper 2 (170-219g/m2, 45-58lb.)
Copying Method in Duplex
2 Sided Copy
1 Sided Copy
Apply Auto Paper Select
Yes
No
54
Tray Paper Settings
Cover Sheet Tray

Allows you to specify and display the paper tray that is setting cover sheets.
After selecting the paper tray, you can also specify the display timing and
copy method for two-sided copying.
Tray to Program
Off
Bypass Tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (optional)
Tray 4 (optional)
2 Sided Copy
1 Sided Copy
Display Time
At Mode Selected
Full Time
Slip Sheet Tray

Allows you to specify and display the paper tray that is inserting slip sheets.
After selecting the paper tray, you can also specify the display timing and
copy method for two-sided copying.
Tray to Program
Off
Bypass Tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (optional)
Tray 4 (optional)
2 Sided Copy
1 Sided Copy
Display Time
At Mode Selected
Full Time
55
System Settings
Note
When paper of the same type and size is loaded in two different paper trays
and you want to specify tray for 2 Sided Copy and tray for 1 Sided Copy,
specify the upper tray for 2 Sided Copy. If one of the trays is specified as the
default in Paper Tray Priority, assign 2 Sided Copy to that tray.
A mark appears next to the paper tray if [Off] is selected in [Auto Paper Select].
[Auto Paper Select] can only be selected for the copier function if [No Display]
and [Recycled Paper] are selected. If [No] is selected, Auto Paper Select is not
valid for the tray.
Functions using the cover sheet tray setting are the front cover function and
front/back cover function.
If you set "Display Time" to "At Mode Selected" in "Cover Sheet Tray" and
"Slip Sheet Tray", the trays selected for the cover sheets and slip sheets are indicated only if you have enabled the use of cover sheets and slip sheets.
Reference
"Covers", Copy/ Document Server Reference

"Slip Sheets", Copy/ Document Server Reference
56
Timer Settings
Timer Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Timer Settings menu under System
Settings.
Auto Off Timer

After a specified period has passed, following job completion, the machine automatically turns off, in order to conserve energy. This function is called "Auto Off".
The machine status after the Auto Off operation is referred to as "Off mode", or
"Sleep mode". For the Auto Off Timer, specify the time to elapse before Auto Off.
The default setting is 60 min..
The time can be set from 1 to 240 minutes, using the number keys.
Auto Off may not work when error messages appear.
Energy Saver Timer

Set the amount of time the machine waits before switching to lower-power
mode after copying has finished or the last operation is performed.
The time can be set from 1 to 240 minutes, using the number keys.
The default setting is 15 min..
Panel Off Timer
Set the amount of time the machine waits before switching the panel off after
copying has finished or the last operation is performed.
The warm up time for making a copy from standby mode is 3 seconds for
Panel off Level 1 and 15 seconds for Panel off Level 2.
Enter a time interval between 10 seconds and 240 minutes, using the number
keys.
System Auto Reset Timer
The System Reset setting automatically switches the screen to that of the function set in Function Priority when no operations are in progress, or when an
interrupted job is cleared. This setting determines the system reset interval.
On
Off
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer (copier/Document Server)
Specifies the time to elapse before copier and Document Server modes reset.
On
Off
If [Off] is selected, the machine does not automatically switch to the user code
entry screen.
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.
57
System Settings
Facsimile Auto Reset Timer (facsimile)

Specifies the time to elapse before the facsimile mode resets.
Printer Auto Reset Timer (printer)
Specifies the time to elapse before the printer function resets.
On
Off
Scanner Auto Reset Timer (scanner)

Specifies the time to elapse before the scanner function resets.
On
Off
If [Off] is selected, the machine will not automatically switch to the user code
entry screen.
Set Date
Set the date for the copier's internal clock using the number keys.
To change between year, month, and day, press [ ] and [ ].
Set Time
Set the time for the copier's internal clock using the number keys.
Enter the time using the 24hour format (in 1 second increments).
To change between hours, minutes and seconds, press [ ] and [ ].
Auto Logout Timer
Specify whether or not to automatically log out a user when the user does not
operate the machine for a specified period of time after logging in.
On
Off
The time can be set from 60 to 999 seconds, in one second increments, using
the number keys.
Reference
58
Interface Settings
Interface Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Interface Settings menu under System
Settings.
Network
This section describes the user tools in the Network menu under Interface Settings.

Before using this machine in the network environment, you must specify the
IPv4 address and subnet mask.
When you select [Specify], enter the IPv4 address and subnet mask as
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" ("x" indicates a number).
If the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed, and you are using the IEEE 1394
interface, you must specify a domain address that is different from the [IPv4
Address] of [IEEE 1394]. If you to set the address for the same domain, set a different value for the subnet mask.
When you select [Specify], make sure that IPv4 address is different from that
of other machines on the network.
The physical address (MAC address) also appears.
If you are using Ethernet and IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394) interfaces at the
same time, settings must be made carefully.
Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
Specify
Machine IPv4 Address: 011.022.033.044
Sub-net Mask: 000.000.000.000
A gateway is a connection or interchange point between two networks.
Specify the gateway address for the router or host computer used as a gateway.
IPv4 Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000
Specify the machines IPv6 network address.
Link-local Address
The machines specified link-local address appears.
Manual Configuration Address
The machines manually configured address appears.
Stateless Address: 1-5
The specified stateless address appears.
59
System Settings

Displays the machines IPv6 gateway address.
Specify IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration.
Active
Inactive
DNS Configuration
Make settings for the DNS server.
When you select [Specify], enter the DNS Server IPv4 address as "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"("x"
indicates a number).
Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
Specify
DNS Server 1: 000.000.000.000
DNS Server 2: 000.000.000.000
DNS Server 3: 000.000.000.000
DDNS Configuration
Specify the DDNS settings.
Active
Inactive
Domain Name
Specify the domain name.
The default domain name is blank.
Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
Specify
WINS Configuration
Specify the WINS server settings.
If [On] is selected, enter the WINS Server IPv4 address as "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"("x" indicates a number).
If DHCP is in use, specify the scope ID.
Enter a scope ID using up to 31 characters.
On
Primary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
Secondary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
Scope ID
Off
60
Interface Settings
Effective Protocol
Select the protocol to use in the network.
IPv4: Active / Inactive
IPv6: Active / Inactive
NetWare: Active / Inactive
SMB: Active / Inactive
AppleTalk: Active / Inactive

Select the protocol for NCP delivery.
IPX Priority
TCP / IP Priority
IPX Only
TCP / IP Only
If you select "IPX Only" or "TCP / IP Only", you cannot switch the protocol
even if you cannot connect with it. If "NetWare" in [Effective Protocol] is set to
"Inactive", you can only use TCP/IP.
NW Frame Type
Select the frame type when you use NetWare.
Auto Select
Ethernet II
Ethernet 802.2
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet SNAP
SMB Computer Name
Specify the SMB computer name.
Enter the computer name using up to 15 characters.
"*+,/:;<>=?[\]|. and spaces cannot be entered.
Do not set a computer name starting with RNP and rnp.
Use uppercase letters for alphabets.
SMB Work Group
Specify the SMB work group.
Enter the computer name using up to 15 characters.
"*+,/:;<>=?[\]|. and spaces cannot be entered.
Use uppercase letters for alphabet.
61
System Settings
Ethernet Speed
Set the access speed for networks.
Select a speed that matches your network environment. [Auto Select] should
usually be selected.
Auto Select
10Mbps Full Duplex
10Mbps Half Duplex
100Mbps Full Duplex
10Mbps Half Duplex
LAN Type
When you have installed the IEEE 802.11b interface unit, select the method of
connection.
Ethernet
IEEE 802.11b
[LAN Type] is displayed when wireless LAN board is installed. If Ethernet and
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected, the selected interface has
priority.
Ping Command
Check the network connection with ping command using given IPv4 address.
If you fail to connect to the network, check the following, and then retry the
ping command.
Make sure that "IPv4" in [Effective Protocol] is set to "Effective".
Check that the machine with assigned IPv4 address is connected to the network.
There is a possibility that the same IPv4 address is used for the specified
equipment.
Set the encrypted communication of SNMPv3.
Encryption Only
Encryption / Clear Text
If you select to [Encryption Only], you need to set an encryption password for
the machine.
Set the encrypted communication of SSL/TLS.
Ciphertext Only
Ciphertext Priority
Ciphertext / Clear Text
If you set to [Ciphertext Only], you need to install the SSL certificate for the machine.
62
Interface Settings
Host Name
Specify the host name.
Enter the host name using up to 63 characters.
Machine Name
Specify the machine name.
Enter the machine name using up to 31 characters.
Parallel Interface
This section describes the user tools in the Parallel Interface menu under Interface Settings.
[Parallel Interface] is displayed when this machine is installed with the IEEE 1284
interface board.
Parallel Timing
Sets the timing for the control signal of the parallel interface.
ACK Outside
ACK Inside
STB Down
Parallel Communication Speed
Sets the communication speed for the parallel interface.
High Speed
Standard
Selection Signal Status
Sets the level for the select signal of the parallel interface.
High
Low
Input Prime
Sets whether to validate or invalidate the input prime signal upon reception.
Active
Inactive
Bidirectional Communication
Sets the printer's response mode to a status acquisition request when using a
parallel interface.
On
Off
When set to [Off], the bidirectional communication function will be disabled,
and the printer driver will not be installed under Windows Auto Detect function.
63
System Settings
Signal Control
Specifies how error during printing or sending facsimile from the computer
is to be dealt with.
Job Acceptance Priority
Printer Priority
IEEE 1394
This section describes the user tools in the IEEE 1394 menu under Interface Settings.
[IEEE 1394] is displayed when this machine is installed with the IEEE 1394 interface board.
IPv4 Address
Before using this machine in the network environment, you must specify the
IPv4 address and subnet mask.
When you select [Specify], enter the IPv4 address and subnet mask as
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" ("x" indicates a number).
When you use the IEEE 1394 interface on a network, you cannot use the Ethernet interface in the same domain. To use both interfaces in the same domain, set different values for the subnet mask.
When you select [Specify], make sure that IPv4 address is different from that
of other machines on the network.
The physical address (MAC address) also appears.
If you are using Ethernet and IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394) interfaces at the
same time, settings must be made carefully.
Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
Specify
Machine IPv4 Address: 000.000.000.000
Sub-net Mask: 000.000.000.000
DDNS Configuration
Specify the DDNS settings.
Active
Inactive
Host Name
Enter the host name using up to 63 characters.
64
Domain Name
Make settings for the domain name.
The default domain name is blank.
Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
Specify
Enter the domain name using up to 63 characters.
Interface Settings
WINS Configuration
Specify the WINS server settings.
If [On] is selected, specify the WINS Server IPv4 address as "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
("xxx" indicates a number).
If DHCP is in use, specify the scope ID.
Enter scope ID using up to 31 characters.
On
Primary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
Secondary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
Scope ID
Off
IPv4 over 1394

When you use the IPv4 over 1394 function of the IEEE 1394 interface to connect the machine to the network, or printing from computer with the IPv4
over 1394 driver, you must specify [Active] for [IPv4 over 1394].
Active
Inactive
Printing with IPv4 over 1394 is possible under Windows Me/XP and Windows Server 2003.
SCSI print (SBP-2)
When you print using the SCSI print client function supported by Windows
2000/XP, or Windows Server 2003, you must set [SCSI print (SBP-2)].
Active
Inactive
Bidirectional SCSI print
Specifies the printer's response mode etc. for status requests when using the
IEEE 1394 interface.
On
Off
If this is set to [Off] bidirectional communication will not work.
65
System Settings
IEEE 802.11b
This section describes the user tools in the IEEE 802.11b menu under Interface
Settings.
[IEEE 802.11b] is displayed when this machine is installed with the wireless LAN
interface board.
Be sure to make all settings simultaneously.
Communication Mode
Specifies the communication mode of the wireless LAN.
802.11 Ad-hoc Mode
Ad-hoc Mode
Infrastructure Mode
SSID Setting
Specifies SSID to distinguish the access point in infrastructure mode or 802.11
ad hoc mode.
The characters that can be used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes).
If blank is specified in 802.11b ad hoc mode or ad hoc mode, "ASSID" appears.
Channel
Specifies a channel when you select 802.11b ad hoc mode or ad hoc mode.
The default setting is 11.
The following channels are available:
Metric version: 1-14
Inch version: 1-11
Security Method
Specifies the encryption of the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
If you select [WEP], always enter WEP key. If you select [WPA], the encryption
and authentication methods.
Specify "WPA", when [Communication Mode] is set to [Infrastructure Mode].
Off
WEP
WPA
WPA Encryption Method
Select either "TKIP" or "CCMP(AES)".
WPA Authent. Method
Select either "WPA-PSK" or "WPA802.1X)". If you have selected "WPAPSK", enter the pre-shared key (PSK) of 8- 63 characters in ASCII code.
Wireless LAN Signal
When using in infrastructure mode, you can check the machine's radio wave
status using the control panel.
Radio wave status is displayed when you press [Wireless LAN Signal].
66
Interface Settings
Transmission Speed
Specifies the communication speed of the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
Auto Select
11Mbps Fixed
5.5Mbps Fixed
2Mbps Fixed
1Mbps Fixed
Restore Factory Defaults

You can return the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) settings to their defaults.
No
Yes
Reference
Print List
You can check items related to the network environment.
The configuration page shows the current network settings and network information.
B Press [Interface Settings].
67
System Settings
C Press [Print List].
2
D Press the {Start} key.
The configuration page is printed.
E Press [Exit].
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
You can also exit by pressing [Exit] on the User Tools main menu.
68
File Transfer
File Transfer
This section describes the user tools in the File Transfer menu under System Settings.
Delivery Option
Enables or disables sending stored or scanned documents to the ScanRouter
delivery server.
On
Main Delivery Server IPv4 Address
Sub Delivery Server IPv4 Address
Off
Specify this option when selecting whether or not to use the ScanRouter delivery
software. If you do, you will have to preregister I/O devices in the ScanRouter
delivery software.
Capture Server IP Address

Specify the capture server IPv4 address.
This setting appears when the media link board is installed, and that the capture function is being used by the ScanRouter delivery software.
69
System Settings

Specify how to deliver fax files received via the different lines.
Setting per Line
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
E-mail
IP-Fax
The lines appear according to the operating environment.
RX File Delivery
Specifies whether or not received fax documents are sent to the ScanRouter
delivery software for each fax line.
Deliver to Server
Do not Deliver
Print at Delivery
Specify whether or not received fax documents sent to the ScanRouter delivery software should also be printed at the same time.
Print
Do not Print
File to Deliver
Specify whether all received fax documents or only received fax documents that include delivery codes (ID or SUB/SEP codes) are sent to the
ScanRouter delivery software.
File with Delivery Code
Print File
Delivery Failure File
If a received fax document cannot be sent to the ScanRouter delivery software, it is stored in memory. To print a stored file, select [Print File], to delete, select [Delete File].
If the machine can send the data to the ScanRouter delivery software, it
does so automatically. If you delete the data, you will not be able to distribute or print it.
Print File
Delete File
SMTP Server
When using DNS, enter the host name.
When not using DNS, enter the SMTP server IPv4 address.
Server Name
Port No.: 25
Enter the server name using up to 127 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.
Enter port number between 1 and 65535 using the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
70
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
Specify SMTP authentication (PLAIN, LOGIN, CRAMMD5, DIGEST-MD5).
When sending e-mail to an SMTP server, you can enhance the SMTP server
security level using authentication that requires entering the user name and
password.
If the SMTP server requires authentication, set [SMTP Authentication] to [On],
and then specify the user name, password and encryption.
Enter the user name and password to be set for the Administrator's e-mail address when using Internet Fax.
SMTP AUTH
On
User Name
Enter the user name using up to 191 characters. Spaces cannot be entered. Depending on the SMTP server type, "realm" must be specified.
Add "@" after the user name, as in "user name@realm".
E-mail Address
Password
Enter the password using up to 63 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.
Encryption: Auto / On / Off
[Encryption]-[Auto]: Use If the authentication method is PLAIN, LOGIN,
CRAM-MD5, or DIGEST-MD5.
[Encryption]-[On]: Use If the authentication method is CRAMMD5 or DIGEST-MD5.
[Encryption]-[Off]: Use If the authentication method is PLAIN, or LOGIN.
Off
POP before SMTP

Specify POP authentication (POP before SMTP).
When sending e-mail to an SMTP server, you can enhance the SMTP server
security level by connecting to the POP server for authentication.
To enable POP server authentication before sending e-mail via the SMTP
server, set [POP before SMTP] to [On]. E-mail is sent to the SMTP server after the
time specified for [Wait Time after Authent.] has elapsed.
If you select [On], enter [Server Name] in [POP3 / IMAP4 Settings]. Also, check the
port number for [POP3] in [E-mail Communication Port].
On
Wait Time after Authent.: 300
Specify [Wait Time after Authent.] from zero to 10,000 milliseconds, in increments of one millisecond.
User Name
Enter the user name using up to 63 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.
E-mail Address
Password
Enter the password using up to 63 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.
Off
71
System Settings
Reception Protocol
Specify Reception Protocol for receiving Internet Fax.
POP3
IMAP4
SMTP
Specify the POP3/IMAP4 server name for receiving Internet faxes.
The specified POP3/IMAP4 server name is used for [POP before SMTP].
Server Name
If DNS is in use, enter the host name.
If DNS is not in use, enter the POP3/IMAP4 or server IPv4 address.
Enter POP3/IMAP4 server name using up to 127 characters. Spaces cannot
be entered.
Encryption
Auto
Password encryption is automatically set according to the POP/IMAP
server settings.
On
Encrypt password.
Off
Do not encrypt password.

On e-mailed scanned documents, if the sender is not specified this appears as
the sender's address.
When sending e-mail under the Internet fax function, administrator's e-mail
address will appear as the senders address under the following conditions:
The sender has not been specified and the machines e-mail address has
not been registered.
The specified sender is not registered in the machines address book and
the machines e-mail address has not been registered.
When conducting SMTP authentication for the transmitted files under the Internet fax function, the Administrator's E-mail Address will appear in the
"From:" box. If you have specified the user name and e-mail address in [SMTP
Authentication], make sure to specify this setting.
Enter up to 128 characters.
On e-mailed scanned documents, if [Auto Specify Sender Name] is [Off], specify
the sender.
72
File Transfer

Specify the port numbers for receiving Internet faxes. The specified POP3
port number is used for [POP before SMTP].
POP3: 110
IMAP4: 143
SMTP: 25
Enter a port number between 1 and 65535 using the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.

Specify, in minutes, the time interval for receiving Internet faxes via POP3 or
IMAP4 server.
On: 15 minute(s)
Off
If [On] is selected, the time interval can be set from 2 to 1440 minutes in increments of one minute.
Specify the maximum reception e-mail size for receiving Internet faxes.
2MB
Enter a size from one to 50 MB in increments of one megabyte.
Specify whether or not to store received Internet fax e-mails on the POP3 or
IMAP4 server.
Off
All
Errors Only
Default User Name / Password (Send)
Specify the user name and password required when sending scan files directly to a shared folder on a computer running Windows, to an FTP server, or to
a NetWare server.
SMB User Name
SMB Password
FTP User Name
FTP Password
NCP User Name
NCP Password
Enter in up to 64 characters.
73
System Settings
Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message

You can program, change, or delete the e-mail message used when sending
an Internet fax or scan file as an attachment.
Program / Change
B Press [File Transfer].
C Press [TNext].
D Press [Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message].
E Press [Program / Change].
F Press [Not Programmed].
G Press [Change].
H Enter a name, and then press [OK].
Enter the name using up to 20 characters.
I Press [Edit].
To start a new line, press [OK] to return to the e-mail message screen,
and then press [TNext] in "Select Line to Edit:".
J Enter the text, and then press [OK].
Enter up to five lines of text. Each line can consist of up to 80 characters.
K Press [OK].
L Press [Exit].
Delete
B Press [File Transfer].
C Press [TNext].
D Press [Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message].
E Press [Delete].
F Select the e-mail message to delete.
The confirmation message about deleting appears.
G Press [Yes].
74
File Transfer
Auto Specify Sender Name

Set whether or not to specify the name of the sender when sending e-mail.
On
If you select [On], the specified e-mail address will appear in the "From:"
box. If you do not specify the senders address, the administrators e-mail
address will appear in the "From:" box.
If you do not specify the sender when sending a file by e-mail under the
fax function, or if the specified e-mail address is not registered in the machines address book, the machines e-mail address will appear in the
"From:" box. If the machine does not have an e-mail address, the administrators e-mail address will appear in the "From:" box.
Off
If you select [Off], the specified e-mail address will appear in the "From:"
box, but you cannot send e-mail without specifying the senders e-mail address. Under the fax function, you cannot send e-mail if the specified senders e-mail address is not registered in the machines address book.
Fax E-mail Account

Specify e-mail address, user name and password for receiving Internet faxes.
Receive
E-mail Address
Enter an e-mail address using up to 128 characters.
User Name
Enter a user name using up to 64 characters.
Password
Enter a password using up to 64 characters.
Do not Receive
Specifies the interval the machine waits before resending a scan file, if it cannot be sent to the delivery server or mail server.
The interval time can be set from 60 to 999 seconds in one second increments,
using the number keys.
This setting is for the scanner function.
Sets a maximum number of times a scan file is resent to the delivery server or
mail server.
On: 3 time(s)
Off
If [On] is selected, the number of times can be set from 1 to 99. This setting is
for the scanner function.
This setting is for the scanner function.
Reference
75
System Settings
Administrator Tools
This section describes the user tools in the Administrator Tools menu under System Settings.
Administrator Tools are used by the administrator. To change these settings,
contact the administrator.
We recommend specifying Administrator Authentication before making Administrator Tools settings.
Address Book Management

You can add, change or delete information registered in the Address Book.
For details, see "Address Book".
Program / Change
You can register and change names as well as user codes.
Names
You can register a name, key display, registration number, and title selection.
Auth. Info
You can register a user code, and specify the functions available to each
user code. You can also register user names and passwords to be used
when sending e-mail, sending files to folders, or accessing an LDAP
server.
Protection
You can register a protection code.
Fax Dest.
You can register a fax number, international TX mode, fax header, label
insertion, IP-Fax destination, and protocol.
E-mail
You can register an e-mail address.
Folder
You can register the protocol, path, port number, and server name.
Add to Group
You can put names registered in the Address Book into a group.
Delete
You can delete a name from the Address Book.
You can register up to 2,000 names.
You can register up to 500 user codes.
You can also register and manage names in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
76
Administrator Tools
Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group

Names registered in the Address Book can be added into a group.
You can then easily manage the names registered in each group.
Program / Change
You can register and change groups.
Names
You can register a name, key display, registration number, and title selection.
Programmed User/Group
You can check the names or groups registered in each group.
Protection
You can register a protection code.
Add to Group
You can put groups registered in the Address Book into a group.
Delete
You can delete a group from the Address Book.
You can register up to 100 groups.
You can also register and manage groups in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin provided with the printer scanner unit.
Address Book: Change Order

Changes the order of registered names.
You can rearrange the order of items on the same page, but you cannot move
items to another page.
For example, you cannot move an item from "PLANNING" ([OPQ]) to "DAILY" ([CD]).
B Press [Administrator Tools].
C Press [Address Book: Change Order].
77
System Settings
D
Press the name key to be moved.
You can select a name using the number keys.

Press the name key in the place you want to move it to.
The user key is moved to the selected position, and the user key currently
at the selected position is moved forward or backward.
If you move the selected user key forward, the user key currently at the selected position is moved backward.
If you move the selected user key backward, the user key currently at the
selected position is moved forward.
You can also select a name using the number keys.
78
Administrator Tools
Print Address Book: Destination List

You can print the destination list registered in the Address Book.
Print in Title 1 Order
Prints the Address Book in Title 1 order.
Print Group Dial List
Prints the group Address Book.
C Press [Print Address Book: Destination List].
D Select the print format.
E To print the list on two-sided pages, select [Print on 2 Sides].
F Press the {Start} key.
The list prints out.
Address Book: Edit Title

You can edit the title to easily find a user.
C Press [Address Book: Edit Title].
Press the title key you want to change.
79
System Settings
E
F
Enter the new name, and then press [OK].

Press [OK].
Address Book: Switch Title

Specifies the title to select a name.
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
Back Up / Restore Address Book

You can back up the machines address book to external storage or restore the
backup copy from the external storage.
Back Up
You can back up the machines address book to external storage.
Restore
You can restore the backup copy of the address book from external storage.
Format
You can format the external storage.
Obtain Media Info
The free space and occupied space of the external storage are displayed.
Display / Print Counter
Allows you to view and print the number of prints.
Displays the number of prints for each function (Total, Copier, Printer, A3 /
DLT, Duplex, Fax Prints, Send / TX Total, Fax Transmission, Scanner Send).
Print Counter List
Prints out a list of the number of prints made under each function.
Display / Clear / Print Counter per User
Allows you to view and print the numbers of prints accessed with user codes,
and to set those values to 0.
Press [UPrevious] and [TNext] to show all the numbers of prints.
The number of prints may differ from the counter values shown in Display /
Print Counter.
Print Counter List for All Users
Prints the counter value for all the users.
Clear Counter List for All Users
Resets the counter value for all the users.
Print Counter List per User
Prints the counter value for each user.
Clear Counter List per User
Resets the counter value for each user.
Select All on the Page
Select the all users on the page.
80
Administrator Tools
User Authentication Management

User Code Auth.
Using User Code Authentication, you can limit the available functions and
supervise their use.
When using User Code Authentication, register the user code.
Using the Printer PC Control function, you can obtain a log of prints corresponding to the codes entered using the printer driver.
If User Code Authentication has been specified, Auto Color Select cannot be
used.
For details about Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP
Authentication, and Integration Server Authentication, consult your administrator.
Copier: Restrict All, Single Color / Full Color, Full Color, Do not Restrict
Printer: Black & White, PC Control, Do not Restrict
Other Functions: Document Server, Facsimile, Scanner
Printer Job Authentication: Entire, Simple (Limitation), Simple (All)
Basic Auth.
Windows Auth.
LDAP Auth.
Integration Svr. Auth.
Off
Enhanced Authentication Management

For details about this function, consult your administrator.
Administrator Authentication Management
Program / Change Administrator
Key Counter Management
Specify the functions you want to manage with the key counter.
Copier: Full Color / Single Color
Printer: Single Color
Other Functions: Document Server / Facsimile / Scanner
Extended Security
Specify whether or not to use the extended security functions. For details
about the extended security functions, consult your administrator.
81
System Settings
Auto Delete File in Document Server

Specify whether documents stored in the Document Server will or will not be
deleted after a specified period of time.
On: 3 day(s)
Off
If you select [On], documents stored subsequently are deleted after the specified period.
If you select [Off], documents are not automatically deleted.
If you select [On], enter a number of days from 1 to 180 (in 1 day increments).
The default is 3 days, this means documents are deleted 3 days (72 hours) after they are stored.
Delete All Files in Document Server

You can delete files stored in the Document Server, including files stored for Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print under the printer function.
No
Yes
Even if a password is always set, all documents are deleted.
A confirmation message appears. To delete all documents, select [Yes].
82
Program / Change/Delete LDAP Server

Program the LDAP server to find up e-mail destinations in the LDAP server
Address Book directly. This function is possible when sending scan files by email using the scanner or fax function.
Name
Server Name
Search Base
Port Number
Use Secure Connection (SSL)
Authentication
User Name
Password
Search Conditions
Search Options
To start an LDAP search, make sure that the items listed below are set. For
other items, check your environment and make any necessary changes.
Server Name
Search Base
Port Number
Search Conditions
Authentication
To use the LDAP server in Administrator Tools, select [On] under LDAP server.
This function supports LDAP Version 2.0 and 3.0. Ver 2.0 does not support
High Security authentication.
Administrator Tools
LDAP Search
Specify whether or not to use the LDAP server for searching.
On
Off
If you select [Off], LDAP server list will not appear on the searching display.
AOF (Always On)
Specify whether or not to use Auto Off.
On
Off
Firmware Version
You can check the version of the software installed in this machine.
Network Security Level
Auto Erase Memory Setting
Erase All Memory
Delete All Logs
Transfer Log Setting
Data Security for Copying
Reference
p.205 Address Book

p.219 Printing the Counter for Each User
p.279 Counter
83
System Settings
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server

This section explains how to specify the LDAP server settings.
To program / change the LDAP server

C Press [Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server].
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
E Select the LDAP server you want to program or change.
When programming the server, select [Not Programmed].
F Set each item as necessary.

G Press [OK] after setting each item.
For details about LDAP server, see "Programming the LDAP server".
H Press [Exit].
I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.85 Programming the LDAP server
To delete the programmed LDAP server

C Press [Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server].
D Press [Delete].
E Select the LDAP server you want to delete.
F Press [Yes].
G Press [Exit].
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
84
Administrator Tools
Programming the LDAP server

This section explains how to specify the LDAP server settings.
To enter an identification name
A Press [Change] under "Name".
Register a name for the LDAP server that will appear on the server selection
screen of the LDAP search operation.
B Enter the servers identification name.

C Press [OK].
To enter a server name
A Press [Change] under "Server Name".

Register the LDAP servers host name or IPv4 address.
B Enter the LDAP server name.

C Press [OK].
To enter the search base
A Press [Change] under "Search Base".

Select a route folder to start the search from e-mail addresses registered in the
selected folder are search targets.
B Enter the search base.

For example, if the search target is the sales department of ABC company, enter "dc=sales department, o=ABC". (In this example, the description is for an
active directory. "dc" is for the organization unit, and "o" is for the company.)
Search base registration may be required depending on your server environment. When registration is required, unspecified searches will result in error.
Check your server environment and enter any required specifications.
C Press [OK].
85
System Settings
To enter a port number
A Press [Change] under "Port No.".

Specify the port number for communicating with the LDAP server. Specify a
port that is compliant with your environment.
B Enter the port number using the number keys, and then press the {#} key.
When SSL is set to [On], the port number automatically changes to "636".
To start SSL communication
A Press [On] under "Use Secure Connection (SSL).

Use SSL to communicate with the LDAP server.
To use SSL, the LDAP server must support SSL.
When SSL is set to [On], the port number automatically changes to "689".
SSL setting must be enabled on this machine. For details, consult your network administrator.
To set authentication
A Press [TNext].
B Press [On] or [High Security] under "Authentication".
To make a search request to the LDAP server, use the administrator account
for authentication.
Authentication settings must comply with your servers authentication settings. Check your server settings before setting this machine.
[High Security] is available only with LDAP Version 3.0.
When [High Security] is selected, the administrator password is encrypted before it is sent to the network. When [On] is selected, the password is sent without encryption.
86
Administrator Tools
To enter the user name and password
A Press [TNext].
B Press [Change] under "User Name".
When [On] or [High Security] is selected for the authentication setting, use the
administrator account name and password. Do not enter the administrator
account name and password when using authentication for each individual
or each search.
C Enter the user name, and then press [OK].

Procedures for the user name setting differ depending on server environment. Check your server environment before making the setting.
Example: Domain Name\User Name, User Name@Domain Name,
CN=Name, OU=Department Name, DC=Server Name
D Press [Change] under "Password".

E Enter the password, and then press [OK].
The user name and password are required for administrator authentication to
access the LDAP server.
You can set the user name and password in this machines Address Book to
allow individual authentication access to the LDAP server. Use Administrator Tools to select the user name and password you want to use.
To test the connection
A Press [Connection Test].

Access the LDAP server to check the proper connection is established. Check
authentication works according to the authentication settings.
A connection test is carried out.
B Press [Exit].
If the connection test fails, check your settings and try again.
This function does not check search conditions or the search base.
87
System Settings
To set search conditions
A Press [TNext] twice.

B Press [Change] for items you want to use as search conditions from the following: [Name], [E-mail Address], [Fax Number], [Company Name], and [Department Name].
You can enter an attribute as a typical search keyword. Using the entered attribute, the function searches the LDAP servers Address Book.
C Enter the attribute you want to use when searching for e-mail addresses,
and then press [OK].
The attribute value may change depending on the server environment. Check
the attribute value complies with your server environment before setting it.
You can leave items blank, but you cannot leave attributes blank when
searching for e-mail addresses from the LDAP server Address Book.
To set search options
A Press [TNext] three times.

B Press [Change] under "Attribute".
C Enter the attribute you want to use when searching for e-mail addresses,

To search the LDAP server data using a keyword other than prepared keywords such as Name, E-mail Address, FAX Number, Company Name, and
Department Name, specify the attribute for the keyword registered in your
LDAP server, and the name to be displayed on the control panel during the
search. For example, to search e-mail addresses by employee number, enter
"employeeNo." in the Attribute field, and "Employee No." in the key display
field.
The attribute value may change depending on the server environment. Check
the attribute complies with your server environment before setting it.
D Press [Change] under "Key Display".
88
Administrator Tools
E Enter the key display, and then press [OK].

The registered "key display" appears as a keyword for searching LDAP.
Without key display registration
With key display registration
The key does not appear on the search screen unless both "Attribute" and
"Key Display" are registered. Make sure you register both to use the optional
search.
89
System Settings
90
3. Copier / Document Server

Features
This chapter describes user tools in the Copier / Document Server Features menu.
For details on how to access Copier / Document Server Features, see "Accessing
User Tools (System Settings)".
General Features
This section describes the user tools in the General Features menu under Copier /
Document Server Features.
Auto Image Density Priority

You can set whether Auto Image Density is "On" or "Off" when the machine
is turned on, reset, or modes are cleared.
Full Color
On
Off
B&W / Single Color
On
Off
Original Type Priority
You can select the original type effective when the power is turned on, or modes
cleared.
Full Color
Text
Text / Photo
Photo
Pale
Generation Copy
Map
B&W / Single Color
Text
Text / Photo
Photo
Pale
Generation Copy
Map
91
Original Photo Type Priority

When you select "Text / Photo" or "Photo" in "Original Type Priority", you
can change the settings of the selected original type.
Glossy Photo
Printed Photo
Copied Photo
Original Type Display
You can have the original types shown on the initial display.
Hide
Display
If you select [Hide], the display is as below.
Paper Display
You can choose to have the available paper trays and sizes shown on the initial display.
Hide
Display
If you select [Hide], the display is shown as below. Press [Auto Paper Select] to
display paper sizes.
Original Orientation in Duplex Mode

You can set the original orientation when making two-sided copies.
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
92
General Features
Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode

You can set the copy orientation when making two-sided copies.
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
Max. Copy Quantity
The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 999.
The default setting is 999 sheets.
Auto Tray Switching
If you load paper of the same size in two or more trays, the machine automatically shifts to the other when the first tray runs out of paper (when Auto Paper Select is selected.) This function is called "Auto Tray Switching". This
setting specifies whether to use Auto Tray Switching or not.
With Image Rotation
Use to copy when using the Auto Tray Switching function.
Without Image Rotation
Only copies with Auto Tray Switching if you load paper of the same size
and in the same orientation in two or more trays. If the paper is not the
same size or in the same orientation, copying is interrupted and the message "Load paper." is displayed.
Off
When a paper tray runs out of paper, copying is interrupted and the message "Load paper." is displayed.
Tone: Original Remains

The beeper (key tone) sounds if you forget to remove originals after copying.
On
Off
If Panel Tone of User Tools (System Settings) is [Off] the beeper does not
sound irrespective of the Tone: Original Remains setting.
Job End Call
You can choose whether or not the beeper sounds when copying is complete.
If Panel Tone of User Tools (System Settings) settings is [On], the machine
beeps to notify you that it did not complete a job for reasons such as copying
was interrupted, the paper tray ran out of paper, or a paper jam occurred.
On
Off
93
Customize Function: Copier

You can assign up to six frequently-used functions to Copy Function keys.
Off
2 originals 2 Sided: Top to Top
2 originals 2 Sided: Top to Bottom
2 Sided 2 Sided
2 Sided 2 Sheets
1 Sided 1 Sided Combine: 2 originals
4 originals 2 Sided Combine: Top to Top
4 originals 2 Sided Combine: Top to Bottom
1 Sided Magazine
2 Sided Magazine
Create Margin
Original Orientation
Batch
Staple: Top Slant/Left
Staple: Bottom Slant/Left
Staple: Left 2
Staple: Top 2
Staple: Top
Staple: Bottom
Saddle Stitch
2 Holes Left
2 Holes Top
3 Holes Left
3 Holes Top
4 Holes Left
4 Holes Top
94
General Features
Rotate Sort
Positive/Negative
Customize Function: Document Server Storage

You can assign up to six frequently-used functions to Document Server Storage keys.
Off
2 Sided original: Top to Top
2 Sided original: Top to Bottom
2 Sided: Top to Top 1 Sided Combine: 2 originals
2 Sided: Top to Bottom 1 Sided Combine: 2 originals
Create Margin
Batch
Positive/Negative
Reference
p.47 Panel key Sound

"Selecting the Original Type Setting", Copy/ Document Server Reference
"Adjusting Copy Image Density", Copy/ Document Server Reference
"Selecting Copy Paper", Copy/ Document Server Reference
95
Reproduction Ratio
This section describes the user tools in the Reproduction Ratio menu under
Copier / Document Server Features.
Shortcut R/E
You can register up to three frequently used Reduce / Enlarge ratios other
than the fixed Reduce / Enlarge ratio and have them shown on the initial display. You can also change registered Reduce/ Enlarge ratios.
Metric version
25%
A3 A5, 8"13" A5 (50%)
A3 8"13" (65%)
A3 A4, A4 A5 (71%)
B4JIS 8"13" (75%)
8"13" A4, B4JIS 8"13" (82%)
93%
B4JIS A3 (115%)
8"13" A3, A4 B4JIS (122%)
A4 A3, A5 A4 (141%)
A5 A3 (200%)
400%
User R / E Ratio (25-400%)
Off
Default:
F1: 71%
F2: 141%
F3: 93%
Inch version
25%
11"17" 51/2"81/2" (50%)
11"17" 81/2"11" (65%)
11"15" 81/2"11" (73%)
81/2"14" 81/2"11" (78%)
81/2"13" 81/2"11" (85%)
93%
81/2"14" 11"17" (121%)
81/2"11" 11"17" (129%)
96
Reproduction Ratio
51/2"81/2" 81/2"14" (155%)

51/2"81/2" 11"17" (200%)
400%
Off
Default:
F1: 73%
F2: 155%
F3: 93%
R / E Ratio
Specify the enlargement and reduction ratios that appear if [Reduce / Enlarge]
is pressed on the copier screen.
Metric version
25%
A3 A5, 8"13" A5 (50%)
A3 8"13" (65%)
A3 A4, A4 A5 (71%)
B4JIS 8"13" (75%)
8"13" A4, B4JIS 8"13" (82%)
93%
B4JIS A3 (115%)
8"13" A3, A4 B4JIS (122%)
A4 A3, A5 A4 (141%)
A5 A3 (200%)
400%
Inch version
25%
11"17" 51/2"81/2" (50%)
11"17" 81/2"11" (65%)
97
98
11"15" 81/2"11" (73%)

81/2"14" 81/2"11" (78%)
81/2"13" 81/2"11" (85%)
93%
81/2"14" 11"17" (121%)
81/2"11" 11"17" (129%)
51/2"81/2" 81/2"14" (155%)
51/2"81/2" 11"17" (200%)
400%
R/E Ratio Priority

You can set the ratio that has priority when [Reduce / Enlarge] is pressed.
Metric version
400%
A5 A3 (200%)
A4 A3, A5 A4 (141%)
8"13" A3, A4 B4JIS (122%)
B4JIS A3 (115%)
93%
8"13" A4, B4JIS 8"13" (82%)
B4JIS 8"13" (75%)
A3 A4, A4 A5 (71%)
A3 8"13" (65%)
A3 A5, 8"13" A5 (50%)
25%
Inch version
400%
51/2"81/2" 11"17" (200%)
51/2"81/2" 81/2"14" (155%)
81/2"11" 11"17" (129%)
81/2"14" 11"17" (121%)
93%
81/2"13" 81/2"11" (85%)
81/2"14" 81/2"11" (78%)
11"15" 81/2"11" (73%)
11"17" 81/2"11" (65%)
11"17" 51/2"81/2" (50%)
25%
Reproduction Ratio
Ratio for Create Margin

You can set a Reduce / Enlarge ratio when registering Create Margin in a shortcut key.
Enter a ratio using number keys (in the range of 90 to 99%).
The default setting is 93%.
Reference
99
Edit
This section describes the user tools in the Edit menu under Copier / Document
Server Features.
Enter the width of the binding margin with the number keys as follows:
Metric version: 030 mm (in increments of 1 mm)
Inch version: 0"-1.2" (in increments of 0.1 inch)
Enter the width of the erased margin with the number keys as follows:
Metric version: 299 mm (in increments of 1 mm)
Inch version: 0.1"-3.9" (in increments of 0.1 inch)
An image of approximately 1.5 mm (0.06") will not be displayed as the width of
the separation line, when specifying solid or broken lines.
Front Margin: Left / Right

Specify left and right margins on the front side of copies in Margin Adjustment mode.
Left
Right
Default:
Metric version: Left 5 mm
Inch version: Left 0.2"
Back Margin: Left / Right
Specify left and right margins on the back side of copies in Margin Adjustment mode.
Left
Right
Default:
Metric version: Right 5 mm
Inch version: Right 0.2"
Front Margin: Top / Bottom
Specify top and bottom margins on the front side of copies in Margin Adjustment mode.
Top
Bttm.
Default:
Metric version: T / B: 0mm
Inch version: T / B: 0.0"
100
Edit
Back Margin: Top/Bottom

Specify top and bottom margins on the back side of copies in Margin Adjustment mode.
Top
Bottom
Default:
1 Sided 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoT
In 1 sided to 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on the back side.
The margin is set to the same value of "Back Margin: Left/Right".
Left
Right
Default:
Metric version: Right 5 mm
Inch version: Right 0.2"
1 Sided 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoB

In 1 sided to 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on the back side.
The value set for "Back Margin: Top/Bottom" is used.
Top
Bottom
Default:
Erase Border Width
Top/Bottom 0mm
Default:
Metric version: 10mm
Inch version: 0.4"
Erase Original Shadow in Combine
In Combine mode, you can specify whether to erase a 3 mm, 0.1" boundary
margin around all four edges of each original.
On
Off
Erase Center Width
Specify the width of the erased center margins with this function.
Default:
Metric version: 10 mm
Inch version: 0.4"
101
Front Cover Copy in Combine

You can make a combined copy on the front cover sheet when you select
Front Cover mode.
GCST019E
Combine
Do not Combine
Copy Order in Combine

You can set the copy order in Combine mode to Left to Right or Top to Bottom.
GCAH090E
From Left to Right

From Top to Bottom
Orientation: Booklet, Magazine

Select the opening orientation of copies made using Booklet or Magazine
mode.
Open to Left
Open to Right
Copy on Designating Page in Combine
Specify whether to make a combined copy on the inserted slip sheets in
Desig./Chapter mode.
Combine
Do not Combine
102
Edit
Image Repeat Separation Line

You can select a separation line and color using the Image Repeat function
from: None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
None
Solid
3
Broken A
Broken B
Crop Marks
Line color (Full Color):

Yellow
Red
Cyan
Magenta
Green
Blue
Black
Separation lines cannot be specified when using [None].
In "Black and White", printing will be done in black.
Selecting solid or broken lines might produce a blank area of approximately
1.5 mm (0.06") in width along the separation line.
103
Double Copies Separation Line

You can select a separation line using the Double Copies function from: None,
Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
None
Solid
3
Broken A
Broken B
Crop Marks

Yellow
Red
Cyan
Magenta
Green
Blue
Black
104
Edit
Separation Line in Combine

You can select a separation line using the Combine function from: None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
None
Solid
3
Broken A
Broken B
Crop Marks

Yellow
Red
Cyan
Magenta
Green
Blue
Black
Reference
"Booklet/Magazine", Copy/ Document Server Reference
105
Stamp
This section describes the user tools in the Stamp menu under Copier / Document
Server Features.
Background Numbering
This section describes the user tools in the Background Numbering menu under
Stamp.
Size
You can set the size of the numbers.
Small
Normal
Large
Density
You can set the density of the numbers.
Light
Normal
Dark
Very Dark
Stamp Color
You can set the color of the numbers.
Yellow
Red
Cyan
Magenta
Green
Blue
Black
106
Stamp
Preset Stamp
This section describes the user tools in the Preset Stamp menu under Stamp.
Stamp Language
You can select the language of the message printed in Stamp mode.
English
German
French
Italian
Spanish
Dutch
Portuguese
Polish
Czech
Swedish
Finnish
Hungarian
Norwegian
Danish
Russian
Japanese
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Hangul
Stamp Priority
You can select the stamp type given priority when [Preset Stamp] is pressed.
COPY
URGENT
PRIORITY
For Your Info.
PRELIMINARY
For Internal Use Only
CONFIDENTIAL
DRAFT
107
Stamp Format
Specify how each of stamp is printed.
Stamp Position
Specify where to print the stamp.
Top Left
Top Center
Top Right
Center Left
Center
Center Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Center
Bottom Right
Stamp Position
You can adjust the position of the stamp within the available ranges shown
below.
Metric version:
"Top Left"T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Top Center"T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Top Right"T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Center Left"T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Center"T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Center Right"T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Bottom Left"T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Bottom Center"T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Bottom Right"T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
Inch version:
"Top Left"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Top Center"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Top Right"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Center Left"T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Center"T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Center Right"T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Bottom Left"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Bottom Center"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Bottom Right"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
Size
You can set the size of the stamp.
1X
2X
108
Stamp
Density
You can set the pattern used to print the stamp.
Normal
The stamp is printed on the image. You cannot check which parts will
overlap.
Lighter
The image can be seen through the stamp.
Lightest
The image appears even clearer than in the Lighter setting.
Page to Stamp
You can have the stamp printed on the first page or all pages.
All Pages
1st Page Only
Stamp Color
Sets the stamp print color.
Yellow
Red
Cyan
Magenta
Green
Blue
Black
Reference
"Preset Stamp", Copy/ Document Server Reference
109
User Stamp
This section describes the user tools in the User Stamp menu under Stamp.
Program/Delete Stamp
You can register, change, or delete user stamps.
You can register up to four custom stamps with your favorite designs.
Stamp Format:1-4
Specify how each of registered User Stamps 1 to 4 is printed.
Stamp Position
Specify where to print the User Stamp.
Top Left
Top Center
Top Right
Center Left
Center
Center Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Center
Bottom Right
Stamp Position
You can adjust the position of the User Stamp within the available ranges
shown below.
Metric version:
"Center Left"T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Center"T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Center Right"T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm
Inch version:
"Top Left"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Top Center"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Top Right"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Center Left"T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Center"T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Center Right"T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Bottom Left"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
110
Stamp
Page to Stamp
Sets whether to print the stamp on all pages or only the first page.
All Pages
1st Page Only
Stamp Color:1-4
Sets the color registered in User Stamp color (1 to 4).
Yellow
Red
Cyan
Magenta
Green
Blue
Black
Reference
"User Stamp", Copy/Document Server Reference
Date Stamp
This section describes the user tools in the Date Stamp menu under Stamp.
Format
You can select the date format for Date Stamp mode.
MM / DD / YYYY
MM.DD.YYYY
DD / MM / YYYY
DD.MM.YYYY
YYYY.MM.DD
Default:
Metric version: DD / MM / YYYY
Inch version: MM / DD / YYYY
Font
You can select the Date Stamp font.
Font 1
Font 2
Font 3
111
Size
You can set the Date Stamp size.
Auto
Large
Middle
Small
Superimpose
You can have the Date Stamp printed in white when it overlaps black parts of
the image.
On
Off
Stamp Color
You can set the selected priority color when printing the date.
Yellow
Red
Cyan
Magenta
Green
Blue
Black
112
Stamp Setting
Specify how Date Stamp is printed.
Stamp Position
Specify where to print the Date Stamp.
Top Left
Top Center
Top Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Center
Bottom Right
Stamp Position
You can adjust the position of the Date Stamp within the available ranges
shown below.
Metric version:
Stamp
Inch version:
"Top Left"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Top Center"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Top Right"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Bottom Left"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
Page to Stamp
Sets whether to print the stamp on all pages or only the first page.
All Pages
1st Page Only
Page Numbering
This section describes the user tools in the Page Numbering menu under Stamp.
Stamp Format
You can select the page number format given priority when [Page Numbering]
is pressed.
P1,P2
1/5,2/5
-1-,-2-
P.1,P.2
1,2
1-1,1-2
Font
You can select the page number printed in Page Numbering mode.
Font 1
Font 2
Font 3
Size
You can set the size of the stamp printed in Page Numbering mode.
Auto
Large
Middle
Small
Duplex Back Page Stamping Position
You can set the position of the duplex back page number printed in Duplex
mode.
Opposite Position
Same Position
113
Page Numbering in Combine

You can set page numbering when using the Combine function and the Page
Numbering function together.
Per Original
Per Copy
Stamp Position on Designating Page
You can select to print the page number onto slip sheets when using the Designate function set to [Copy] and the Page Numbering function together.
On
Off
Stamp Position
Specify how each of stamp is printed.
Stamp Position
Specify where to print the stamp.
Top Left
Top Center
Top Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Center
Bottom Right
Stamp Position
You can adjust the position of the stamp within the available ranges shown
below.
Metric version:
Inch version:
"Top Left"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Top Center"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Top Right"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Bottom Left"T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
114
Superimpose
You can have page numbers printed in white when they overlap black parts
of the image.
On
Off
Stamp
Stamp Color
Yellow
Red
Cyan
Magenta
Green
Blue
Black
Page Numbering Initial Letter

You can select the page numbering initial letter between "P1, P2.../P.1, P.2..."
and "S1, S2.../S.1, S.2...".
P1, P2.../P.1, P.2...
S1, S2.../S.1, S.2...
Reference
115
Input/Output
This section describes the user tools in the Input/Output menu under Copier /
Document Server Features.
Switch to Batch
You can select to have Batch mode or SADF mode displayed when you press
the [Special Original] key.
Batch
SADF
SADF Auto Reset

In SADF mode, an original must be set within a specified time after the previous original has been fed.
You can adjust this time from 3 to 99 seconds in increments of 1 second.
Rotate Sort: Auto Paper Continue
Specify to continue copying when paper of the required orientation has run
out during rotate sort.
On
Copying continues using copy paper of a different orientation. The copy
job will finish even if you have left the machine.
Off
When paper of the required orientation runs out, the machine stops copying and prompts you to supply copy paper. After you have loaded paper,
the machine will continue copying.
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart
When memory becomes full while scanning originals, the machine can make
copies of scanned originals first, and then automatically proceed scanning remaining originals.
On
You can leave the machine unattended to make copies, but sorted pages
will not be sequential.
Off
When memory becomes full, the machine stops operation allowing you to
remove the copy pages delivered on the output tray.
Letterhead Setting
If you select [Yes] in this function, the machine rotates the image correctly.
Yes
No
Orientation-fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper might not be printed
correctly depending on how the originals and paper are placed.
116
Input/Output
Staple Position
Specify which Top 2 staples or Bottom shown on the initial display with priority.
The optional 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher, or booklet finisher is required to use this function.
Top 1
Center
Left 2
Top 2
Bottom 1
Slant
Off
Punch Type
Specify which punch type (2 holes or 3 holes) has priority to be shown on the
initial display.
The optional 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher, or booklet finisher is required to use this function.
2 Holes Left
2 Holes Top
3 Holes Left
3 Holes Top
4 Holes Left
4 Holes Top
Off
Simplified Screen: Finishing Types
You can select which key is displayed with higher priority for "Finishing
Types" on the Simplified Screen.
Stack
Slant
Top 1
Bottom 1
Left 2
2 Holes Left
3 Holes Left
4 Holes Left
Do not Display
117
Reference
"Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper", Troubleshooting

"Batch mode", Copy/ Document Server Reference
"Sort", Copy/ Document Server Reference
118
Adjust Color Image
Adjust Color Image

This section describes the user tools in the Adjust Color Image menu under
Copier / Document Server Features.
Background Density of ADS (Full Color)

"The background density is adjusted to skip the texture and copy. You can adjust the background density up to 5 levels when in Full Color.
Center of the 5 level adjustment is set by default.
Color Sensitivity
You can adjust the color specified to convert in "Color Convert" and the color
specified for "Erase Color", in 5 levels.
When the color width has been set to "Wider", and the color to be deleted, for
example is red, all the colors that are close to magenta and orange are deleted.
If it's set to "Narrower" the color red will be deleted.
A.C.S. Sensitivity
This 5-step setting determines the level of the standard used for discriminating between black & white originals and full color originals when "Auto Color Select" is selected.
A.C.S. Priority
This setting determines the copy priority between "Black & White" and "Full
Color" when "Auto Color Select" is selected.
Full Color
Black & White
Reference
119
Settings for the Document Server

For details, see "System Settings", and "Copier / Document Server Features".
Heading
items
Default
General Features
2 Sided Original:
Top to Top
General Features
1 sided
Comb 2 orig
General Features
1 sided
Comb 4 orig
General Features
1 sided
Comb 8 orig
General Features
Create Margin
General Features
Off
Heading
Item
Default
General Features
Warm-up Beeper
On
General Features
Copy Count Display
Up
General Features
Output: Document Server
Internal Tray 1
System Settings
Tray Paper Settings Paper Tray Priority: Copier
Tray 1
Tray Paper Settings Cover Sheet Tray
Off
Tray Paper Settings Slip Sheet Tray
Off
Timer Settings
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer
60 second(s)
Administrator
Tools
3 day(s)
Administrator
Tools
Reference
p.91 Copier / Document Server Features
120
4. Facsimile Features
This chapter describes user tools in the Facsimile Features menu. For details on
how to access Facsimile Features, see "Accessing User Tools (System Settings)".
General Features
This section describes the user tools in the General Features menu under Facsimile Features.
Quick Operation Key (1-3)

Frequently used functions programmed as Quick Operation keys are shown
on the menu immediately after the power is turned on.
If [On] is selected, the Quick Operation keys can be programmed with the following items:
On
Manual E-mail RX
Send Later
Subject
Text
Recept. Notice
E-mail TX Results
BCC transmission
Std. Message
Fax Header Print
Label Insertion
Closed Network
SUB Code TX
SEP Code Reception
Stamp
Print Memory Lock
TX File Status
RX File Status
Journal
Print Stored RX File
TX Status Report
Forwarding
Switch RX Mode
SUB Code TX
Off
121
Facsimile Features
Up to three functions can be programmed to Quick Operation keys.

Functions that appear dimmed have already been set.
Switch Title
Select the title to be shown on the destination list.
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
Search Destination
Select a destination list to be used in "Search Destination".
You can select from Address Book, or registered LDAP Server.
Communication Page Count
Checks the transmission, reception, and totals on the display.
Transmissions:
Total number of transmitted pages
Receptions:
Total number of received pages
A Press [Facsimile Features].
B Press [General Features].
C Press [Communication Page Count].
D After checking the display, press [Exit].
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Adjust Sound Volume

Adjust the sound volume during On Hook Mode and Immediate Transmission.
On Hook Mode
At Transmission
At Reception
At Dialing
At Printing
Box Setting
The following functions are for delivery and transfer of documents:
Personal Box
Information Box
Transfer Box
For details about Box Setting, see "Box Settings".
Box Setting: Print List
You can print a list of the currently registered Personal Boxes, Information
Boxes, and Transfer Boxes.
122
General Features
On Hook Mode Release Time

Use this function to specify a time to cancel On Hook mode after you transmit
using On Hook dialing.
1 minute
3 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
Reference
p.172 Box Settings

"Adjusting the Volume", Troubleshooting
"Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)", Facsimile Reference
"Fax Header Print", Facsimile Reference
"Reading the Display", Facsimile Reference
123
Facsimile Features
Scan Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Scan Settings menu under Facsimile
Features.
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size

You can program, change, or cancel frequently used scan sizes.
For details about programming Scan Size, see "Program / Change / Delete
Scan Size".
Reference
p.141 Program / Change / Delete Scan Size
124
Send Settings
Send Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Send Settings menu under Facsimile
Features.
Max. E-mail Size

When the other party has a limit on the size of e-mail messages that can be
received, or sending data heavy e-mail causes problems, you can make settings to limit the size of sent e-mail. When this function is set to on, transmission of e-mail that exceeds the set size is aborted.
On
Off
When e-mail exceeds the maximum file size, an Error Report is output, and
the e-mail is deleted.
Even when e-mail does not exceed the size limit, it may be rejected if it does
not meet the requirements of the server settings.
B Press [Send Settings].
C Press [Max. E-mail Size].
D Press [On].
Enter the maximum e-mail size using the number keys.
Maximum e-mail size can be between 128 and 102,400 KB.

If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter
again.
Press [OK].
125
Facsimile Features
Program / Change / Delete Standard Message

Program standard messages to be printed at the top of the first page of the
original of the opposite party. It is useful for personalizing messages such as
sending greetings.
You can program three standard messages. You cannot change the "Confidential", "Urgent", "Please phone.", or "Copy to corres. section" messages.
The procedure is the same for both programming and changing.
C Press [Program / Change / Delete Standard Message].
To delete the registered message, press [Delete].
F
G
H
I
Select the message you want to program or change.

To delete the registered message, select the message you want to delete,
and then press [Yes].
Enter a new message.
For details about entering text, see "Entering Text", About This Machine.
Press [OK].
To cancel a registration, press [Cancel].
Press [Exit].
Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
126
Send Settings
Backup File TX Setting

You can specify whether or not to send to a selected folder the backup of a file
sent by Memory Transmission.
By setting [Backup File TX Setting] to [On] and selecting the destination folder,
you can automatically send to the selected folder the backup of a file sent by
Memory Transmission using the machines control panel, Web Image Monitor, DeskTopBinder, or LAN-Fax.
Select the destination folder for the backup file from the address book.
On
Off
If you set [Backup File TX Setting] to [On] but the Backup File TX fails, the machine automatically prints a backup file TX communication failure report.
For details about the communication failure report, see "Communication
failure report", Facsimile Reference.
Using the parameter settings (switch 04, bit 1), specify whether or not to
print a communication failure report.
The backup file format will be the same as that specified for files sent by
Scan to Folder. Using the parameter settings (switch: 21, bit: 3), select TIFF
or PDF as the format for sending a file. The format is factory-preset to TIFF.
Using the parameter settings, you can specify the redial interval (switch 35,
bits 0-7) and the maximum number of redials (switch 36, bits 0-7). The redial interval is factory-preset to 15 minutes; the maximum number of redials, to 192.
Using the parameter settings, (switch 37, bit 0) you can specify whether to
stop sending a backup file if the destination folder becomes full while the
machine is sending or waiting to send a fax or the backup file.
C Press [Backup File TX Setting].
D Press [On].
If there is a folder already programmed, a folder name is shown. If you
want to change the folder, press [Folder] and proceed to step 5.
E Specify a folder for back up, and then press [OK].
The folder name is shown to the right of [Folder].
F Press [OK].
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.152 Parameter Settings

"Entering Text", About This Machine
"Communication failure report", Facsimile Reference
"Maximum Values", Facsimile Reference
127
Facsimile Features
Reception Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Reception Settings menu under Facsimile Features.
Switch Reception Mode

Specify the method for receiving fax documents.
Manual Reception
Auto Reception
Program Special Sender
By programming particular receivers as Special Sender in advance, you can
have Special Senders treated differently.
For details about how to program Special Sender, see "Special Senders to
Treat Differently".
Program Special Sender: Print List

You can print the Special Sender List.
B Press [Reception Settings].
C Press [Program Special Sender: Print List].
To cancel printing a list before pressing the {Start} key, press [Cancel] or the
{Clear/Stop} key.
Forwarding
Specify whether or not received fax documents are to be forwarded to a programmed receiver.
On
Off
Reception File Setting
Selects whether received documents are saved on the hard disk to be printed
later or printed immediately without being saved.
For details about Reception File Setting, see "Reception File Setting".
128
Reception Settings
Stored Reception File User Setting

The administrator can be specified for managing documents stored on the
machine after fax documents are received. To specify the administrator, enter
the administrator user code for managing documents using Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder.
You must register the administrator's User Code to the destination list in advance.
This function is only available when [Store] is selected in "Reception File Setting".
It is recommended that you use a Web Image Monitor operating under the
same network environment as this machine. Otherwise, the Web browser
may not open and an error may occur.
C Press [Stored Reception File User Setting].
D If you want to use a user code, press [On].
E Press the Destination key of the user you wish to specify, and then press
[OK].
F Check the selected user, and then press [OK].
When a programmed user is deleted from the destination list, message
"Deleted from Address Book" is displayed. Enter the user again.
If the programmed user code was deleted using the Address Book Management function under System Settings, you cannot view received and saved
documents using a Web Image Monitor. Select [Off] in step 4 or reprogram the
user code.
SMTP RX File Delivery Settings

This function is available on systems that allow routing of e-mail received via
SMTP.
On
Off
When an authorized e-mail address is set, e-mail received from addresses that
do not match the authorized address is discarded, and an error message is returned to the SMTP server.
The authorized e-mail address is compared with the addresses of e-mail originators, as illustrated by the following examples.
When the authorized e-mail address is set to "@aaa.abcd.com":
abc@aaa.abcd.com - accepted
def@aaa.xyz.com - not accepted
abc@abcd.com - not accepted
No Error Report is output even when e-mail is discarded.
129
Facsimile Features
A
Press [On].
Press [Change], and then enter the sending e-mail address to be authorized.
If you make a mistake, press [Backspace] or [Clear], and then enter again.
Press [OK] twice.
2 Sided Print
Specify whether or not received fax documents are to be printed on both sides
of the paper.
On
Off
Checkered Mark
Specify whether or not a checkered mark is to be printed on the first page of
received fax documents.
On
Off
Center Mark
Specify whether or not a center mark is to be printed halfway down the left
side and at the top center of each page received.
On
Off
130
Reception Settings
Print Reception Time

Specify whether or not the received date, time, and file number are printed at
the bottom of received fax documents.
On
Off
Reception File Print Quantity
Specify the number of copies to be printed for each fax document received.
1 to 10 set(s)
Paper Tray
Use this function to print fax documents received from programmed senders
and fax documents from other senders, using different paper trays.
Display of tray names may differ depending on the options installed.
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (option)
Tray 4 (option)
LCT (option)
Auto Select
Specify Tray for Lines

Specify a paper tray for each line (telephone, Internet Fax, IP-Fax).
Off
On
C Press [Specify Tray for Lines], and then press [TNext].
D Press [On].
If you select [Off], the received fax is delivered to a default tray.
131
Facsimile Features
Select the line type.
Select a tray to deliver the received paper onto, and then press [OK].
If you want to specify another line type, repeat from step 5.
Folder Transfer Result Report

You can set whether the Folder Transfer Result Report is transmitted to the
specified e-mail address, when folders are programmed as the forwarding
destinations to which documents are sent from all senders or Special Senders.
You must first register the destination for the Folder Transfer Result Report
in the destination list. See "Registering a Fax Destination".
Specify a group destination to transfer documents to multiple destinations. A
maximum of 500 parties can be specified in a group. See "Registering Names
to a Group".
Even if the Folder Transfer Result Report is not successfully transmitted, the
report is not printed on this machine.
E-mail
Do not E-mail
C Press [TNext].
D Press [Folder Transfer Result Report].
E To send the Folder Transfer Result Report, press [E-mail].
To not send the Folder Transfer Result Report, press [Do not E-mail], and
then press [OK].
F Press [Notify Destination].
G Press the Destination key of the e-mail address for notification, and then
press [OK].
H Check the selected destination, and then press [OK].
132
Reception Settings
Memory Lock Reception

When you switch Memory Lock on, received documents are stored in memory and not printed automatically. When a document is received in the Memory Lock mode, the Confidential File indicator blinks. To print this document,
enter the Memory Lock ID. A user without the ID cannot print the document.
This prevents unauthorized users from accessing the document. To use Memory Lock, program the Memory Lock ID, and then switch Memory Lock on.
To store incoming documents from Special Senders only in Memory Lock,
program each sender with "Special Senders to Treat Differently".
This function is not available with Internet Fax.
B Press [Reception Settings], and then press [TNext].
C Press [TNext].
D Press [Memory Lock Reception].
E Select [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].
Reference
p.139 Reception File Setting

p.49 Output: Facsimile (facsimile)
p.159 Special Senders to Treat Differently
p.135 Program Memory Lock ID
p.225 Registering a Fax Destination
p.257 Registering Names to a Group
133
Facsimile Features
Initial Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Initial Settings menu under Facsimile
Features.
Parameter Setting
User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs.
For details about Parameter Setting, see "Parameter Settings".
Parameter Setting: Print List
You can print Parameter Setting list.
Print this list to see the current User Parameter settings. However, not all the
parameter settings are printed.
B Press [Initial Settings].
C Press [Parameter Setting: Print List].
{Clear/Stop} key.
Program Closed Network Code

Register an ID required for Closed Network communication.
C Press [Program Closed Network Code].
D Enter an ID using the number keys and [A] to [F], and then press [OK].
Register a four-digit number using 0 to 9 and A to F (except for 0000 and
FFFF).
134
Initial Settings
Program Memory Lock ID

Program a Memory Lock ID to be entered before printing documents when
the Memory Lock function is activated.
C Press [Program Memory Lock ID].
D Enter an ID using the number keys, and then press [OK].
A Memory Lock ID can be any four-digit number, except 0000.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
Internet Fax Settings

You can select to display the Internet Fax icon or not. When you want to send
an Internet Fax, set On to display the icon.
On
Off
Select Dial / Push Phone
Use this function to select a line type when the machine is connected to a G3
analog line.
Dial and Push lines are available for selection.
If the optional extra G3 interface unit is installed, settings for the extra G3
lines appear.
This function is not available in some regions.
C Press [Select Dial / Push Phone].
D Press [Push Button Phone] or [Dial Phone (10PPS)] to select the line, and then
press [OK].
135
Facsimile Features
Program Fax Information

Program information to be shown on the display of the other machine and
printed as a report. The following information can be programmed.
Fax Header
Own Name
Own Fax Number
For details about how to program Fax Information, see "Registering Fax Information".
Enable H.323
Specify whether or not H.323 is used for IP-Fax transmission.
On
Off
Enable SIP
Specify whether or not SIP is used for IP-Fax transmission.
On
Off
H.323 Settings
Set the IPv4 address or host name, and alias telephone number of the gatekeeper.
If you select [On] using the User Parameters, you can use the gatekeeper server.
See "Parameter Settings" ( switch 34, bit 0).
You can use numbers, and symbols ("#" and "*") for registration of the alias
telephone number in H.323 Settings. Make sure you enter these characters
correctly.
C Press [H.323 Settings].
D Press [Change] for each property.
E Enter the IPv4 address or host name, and alias telephone number and
press [OK].
F Press [OK].
136
Initial Settings
SIP Settings
Set the SIP server's IPv4 address or host name, and SIP user name.
If you select [On] using the User Parameters, you can use the SIP server. See
"Parameter Settings" ( switch 34, bit 1).
You can use alphanumeric symbols (lower and upper cases) and symbols (";",
"?", ":", "&", "=", "+", "$", ",", "-", "_", ".", "!", "~", "*", "#", "", "(", ")", "%", "/", and
"@") for registration of the SIP User Name in SIP Settings. Make sure you enter
these characters correctly.
Use numbers and periods (".") to enter the correct IPv4 addresses for the gatekeeper, SIP server, and gateway. To obtain the correct IPv4 addresses, consult
the administrator.
C Press [SIP Settings].
D Press [Change] for each property.
A proxy server relays call requests and responses.
A redirect server processes request destination inquiries.
A register server registers location information of user agents (which correspond to telephones or facsimiles on public telephone lines) on an IP network.
E Enter the IPv4 address or host name, and SIP user name, and then press
[OK].
F Specify whether to perform SIP digest authentication.
If you select [On], enter the password using up to 128 characters.
G Press [OK].
Program / Change / Delete Gateway

Register, change, or delete the gateway used for transmission to IP-Fax.
Program / Change
C Press [Program / Change / Delete Gateway].
E Press a gateway to register.
When registering a new gateway, press [Not Programmed].
137
Facsimile Features
F
G
Press [Change] for "Prefix".

Enter the Prefix using the number keys, and then press [OK].
To change the existing prefix, press [Clear], and then enter a new prefix.
For documents sent using a gateway to G3 Fax, prefixes can be used. If
the first several digits of IP-Fax number and the gateway- specific prefix
are identical, documents can be transmitted using the registered digits
of the gateway. For example, if both 03 and 04 have been registered as
gateway number while 0312345678 is also specified, documents can be
transmitted via a gateway for which 03 is used as a prefix.
When you wish to use the gateways regardless of the IP-Fax destination
numbers, register only the gateway addresses without registering the
prefix.
Select a protocol.
Press [Change] for Gateway Address.

J Enter the gateway address, and then press [OK].
K Press [OK].
Delete
C Press [Program / Change / Delete Gateway].
D Press [Delete], and then select a gateway to delete.
E Press [Yes] on the confirmation message.
If you do not want to delete the gateway you have selected, press [No].
F Press [Exit].
Reference
p.133 Memory Lock Reception

p.144 Registering Fax Information
p.162 Memory Lock
138

Specify whether received documents are to be saved on the hard disk or printed
immediately without being saved. You can print stored documents repeatedly
or download them as images to a computer using a Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder. If you select printing without saving, documents are printed each
time they are received.
If you have used System Settings to specify to have received faxes distributed to
the delivery server, the documents cannot be saved on the hard disk.
Important
The optional printer/scanner unit is required.

C Press [Reception File Setting].
D Press [Print] or [Store], and then press [OK].
To cancel your selection, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of stepC.
When [Store] is selected, you can select whether or not to send notice of reception to a specific e-mail address. To notify of reception, press [Notify Destination] and select an e-mail address from the Internet Fax destinations
programmed in the address book. Further, you can register a group destination. In such a case, a maximum of 500 destinations can be specified in a
group.
139
Facsimile Features

Note
You can use "Parameter Settings" (switch 10, bit 5) to select whether or not
to print stored received documents. See "Parameter Settings".
If [Store] is selected and a destination for notification is specified, notification of document reception can be sent to the specified e-mail address.
Documents saved on the hard disk are categorized as received and stored
documents.
You cannot change to a different setting if received documents have been
stored on the hard disk. To change to a different setting, print documents
stored on the hard disk if necessary, and then delete them.
Received confidential documents are stored in memory. Use the Print Confidential RX File function to print them.
With [Store] selected, more memory space is used as the number of saved
documents increases. After memory space becomes insufficient, no more
documents are saved on the hard disk. When this happens, the machine
starts printing then overwriting old documents.
You can store received documents up to a total of approximately 320 pages
or 2,240 pages of A4 size Standard <ITU-T#1Chart>.
You cannot send received documents.
You cannot manage stored documents from the Document Server display.
It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor running under the
Reference
"Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete Stored

RX File)", Facsimile Reference
"Sending Stored Documents", Facsimile Reference
Reception Report e-mail

When a received document is stored, this report is sent to the e-mail address set
as the destination for notification.
140

Program frequently used scan sizes.
Important
When programming or changing a scan size, it is recommended that you make
a record of the new size.
When you select a scan size to scan a custom size original, two custom sizes are
available (Program Size 1 and Program Size 2). Use these functions to program
a custom size in advance. The procedure is the same for programming and
changing.
You can program up to two sizes.
Specify a horizontal length from 128 to 1200 mm, or from 5.5 to 47 inches.

B Press [Scan Settings].
C Press [Program / Change / Delete Scan Size].
D Select [Program Size 1] or [Program Size 2].
141
Facsimile Features
E Enter a horizontal size using the number keys.
Each time you press [mm] or [inch], the units switch between "mm" and "inch".
If you enter a length and press [mm] or [inch], the length is converted automatically according to the unit (fractions are rounded off). For example, when
you enter {2}, {2}, and {0} in millimeters and change to "inch", the length "8.7
inch" is shown on the display. If you press [mm] or [inch] again, "221 mm" is
displayed.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try again.
To cancel a scan size, press [Cancel].
F Select a vertical size, and then press [OK].

The displayed vertical size differs depending on the selected unit. When [mm]
is selected, [Auto Detect], [210 mm (A4)], [257 mm (B4 JIS)], [297 mm (A3)], [216 mm
(8 1/2)], and [279 mm (11)] are shown. When [inch] is selected, [Auto Detect], [8.3
inch (A4)], [10.1 inch (B4 JIS)], [11.7 inch (A3)], [8.5 inch], and [11.0 inch] are shown.
To cancel a scan size, press [Cancel].
G Press [Exit].
142
Deleting a scan size

Delete programmed scan size.

C Press [Program / Change / Delete Scan Size].
D Press [Delete], and then select [Program Size 1] or [Program Size 2].
E Press [Delete].
To cancel deleting, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of stepD.
F Press [Exit].
143
Facsimile Features
Registering Fax Information

You can send information to the other party when transmitting or receiving a fax
document. This information is shown on the display of the other machine and
printed as a report. The following information can be sent.
Important
You can confirm programmed settings from the User Parameter List. It is recommended that you print and keep the User Parameter List when you program or change settings. See "Parameter List".
In the USA, the Fax Header must contain the telephone number of the line
your machine is connected to. It will be printed on the header of every page
you send. Required in the USA.
Fax Header
The Fax Header is printed as the header of every fax you send. You should
include your name in the Fax Header.
You can program Fax Header1 or Fax Header2. When you send originals using the destination list, you can select which Fax Header is printed on the document received by the other party.
You can register "Fax Header" using up to 32 alphanumeric characters and
symbols.
You can use characters, symbols, numbers, and spaces.
You can set whether or not to print a Fax Header using [Fax Header Print] under
Options . See "Fax Header Print", Facsimile Reference
Own Name
The Own Name is sent to the other party when you send or receive a fax . This
name should include your name. The Own Name is shown on the display of
the other machine and printed in a report.
Own Name can be used only if the other machine is of the same manufacturer
and has the Own Name function.
You can register "Own Name" using up to 20 alphanumeric characters and
symbols.
Own Fax Number
The sender's Own Fax Number is sent to the other party when sending a fax.
The received facsimile number is shown on the display of the other machine
and printed in a report.
This function is available regardless of the manufacturer of the other party's
machine.
You can register "Own Fax Number" using up to 20 numbers, space, and
"+"symbol.
Reference
"Fax Header Print", Facsimile Reference
144

C Press [Program Fax Information].
D Select the Fax Information you want to register or change.
E Register the name and facsimile number.

F Press [Exit].
G Press the {User tools/Counter} key.
Registering a Fax Header
A Check that [Fax Header] is selected.

B Press [First Name] or [Second Name].
C Enter a fax header including your Own Name and Fax Number, and then
press [OK].
145
Facsimile Features
Registering an Own Name
A Press [Own Name].

B Press [Own Name].
4
C Enter your own name, and then press [OK].
Registering an Own Fax Number
A Press [Own Fax Number].

B Select line type to program.
The display differs depending on the optional units installed on the machine.
C Enter your own facsimile's number using the number keys, and then press
[OK].
To enter a + sign or a space, press [+] or [Space].
146
Changing Fax Information

D Select the Fax Information you want to change.
To change a Fax Header, see "Registering a Fax Header".
To change Own Name, see "Registering an Own Name".
To change Own Fax Number, "Registering an Own Fax Number".
E Press [Exit].
F Press the {User tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.145 Registering a Fax Header
p.146 Registering an Own Name

p.146 Registering an Own Fax Number
Deleting Fax Information

D Press [Fax Header], [Own Name], or [Own Fax Number] to delete.
E Press the item you want to delete.
F Press [Backspace] or [Delete All], and then press [OK].
When deleting your own facsimile's number, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop}
key, and then press [OK].
G [Exit].
H Press the {User tools/Counter} key.
147
Facsimile Features
Forwarding
Print documents received and forward to a specified End Receiver. This is useful
if, for example, you are visiting another office and would like a copy of your documents to be sent to that office.
You can also specify a "folder" as the forwarding destination.
Important
To use this function, set Forwarding under Reception Settings to On (enable).
You can select end receivers only from among destinations programmed in
the Address Book. You cannot specify programmed transfer stations as end
receivers.
A fax number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder can be set as the
forwarding destination.
Even when [On] is selected for "Forwarding" in "Reception Settings", if [Off] is selected for the forwarding destination in this function, only printing is performed, not forwarding.
When you wish to change the end receivers depending on the senders, specify
the end receivers by the senders, at "Program Special Sender". Documents not received from specified senders are sent to the destination specified in this function.
You can specify whether or not to print forwarded documents. See "Parameter
Settings"(switch 11, bit 6).
Deleting a destination specified as a forward destination from the destination
list causes the settings of the forward destination to be deleted, so they must be
registered again. When a destination is changed, a document is transmitted to
the new destination. If there is no destination of the specified type, you can set
which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 32, bit 0).
You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function.
If you have specified a folder for forwarding, you can specify the file format
used for forwarding. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 21, bit 3).
Reference
p.121 General Features

p.128 Reception Settings
p.159 Special Senders to Treat Differently
148
Forwarding
Programming an End Receiver

Important
One end receiver can be registered for each special sender. To register two or
more end receivers, use group destination. However, a maximum of 500 destinations can be specified in a group.

C Press [Forwarding].
D Press [On].
If there is an End Receiver already programmed, a receiver name is shown. If

you want to change the receiver, press [Receiver] and proceed to stepE.
To cancel Forwarding, press [Off]and proceed to stepF.
149
Facsimile Features
E Specify an End Receiver using the destination list, and then press [OK].
The receiver name is shown to the right of [Receiver].

Press the key on the left of the display to switch the destination between fax
number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder.
Set a folder destination in Address Book Management under Administrator
Tools in the System Settings menu. See "Registering Folders".
If you have specified a folder for forwarding, you can specify the file format
used for forwarding. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 21, bit 3).
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
F Press [OK].
Reference
p.240 Registering Folders
150
Forwarding
Quitting the forwarding function

C Press [Forwarding].
D Press [Off], and then press [OK].

Forwarding Mark
You can print a Forwarding Mark on receiver's documents that have been forwarded.
The receiver can distinguish between forwarded and normally received documents.
This function is not available when memory forwarding is performed to a folder

destination.
Reference
151
Facsimile Features
Parameter Settings
User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs. To
change function settings, set the User Parameter Switches.
Switches and Bits

Each User Parameter has a set of switches, and each of the switches consist of
eight bits, whose values are "0" or "1". The right most bit is bit 0 and the left
most is bit 7. You can adjust the settings to match your needs by switching the
value of bits between "0" and "1".
Switch 02
User Parameter List

User Parameter Switches are outlined in the following table.
Switch Bit
Item
02
Forwarding Mark
Off
On
02
TSI Print
Off
On
03
Automatic printing of the Communication

Result Report
Off
On
03
Automatic printing of the Memory Storage

Report
Off
On
03
Whether or not to print the SEP Code RX Reserve Off

Report automatically.
On
03
Whether or not to print the SEP Code RX Result Off

Report automatically.
On
03
Automatic printing of the Immediate TX Result

Report
Off
On
03
Automatic printing of the Journal
Off
On
04
Automatic printing of the Confidential File

Report
Off
On
04
Automatic printing of Communication Failure

Report and Transfer Result Report
Off
On
04
Indicates the parties
Off
On
04
Include sender's name on reports
Off
On
04
Include a portion of the image on reports
Off
On
05
Receive Service Call (SC) Condition (Substitute Reception during service call)
Possible
(Substitute
RX)
Not possible
(Reception
off)
152
Parameter Settings
Switch Bit
Item
05
Substitute the reception when the machine

cannot print (because paper is jammed, all
paper trays have run out of paper, toner is
empty, or all paper trays are out of order)
00: Enabled
unconditionally
(Free)
2,1
01: Enabled
when Own
Name/
Own Fax
Number is
received
10: Enabled
for Closed
Network
Code match
11: Disabled
(Reception
off)
05
Print sheet is limited to that which has high- Off

est priority.
On
05
Empty tray alert (Paper Empty Warning)

even when one paper tray is empty
Off
On
07
Whether or not to produce a beeping sound

when the machine receives a fax.
Beep
Do not send
a voice
message.
07
Parallel Memory Transmission
Off
On
08
Authorized Reception Type
Receive
from specified senders only.
Receive all
documents
except from
specified
senders.
10
Page reduction when printing
Off
On
10
Reception file setting
Off
On
10
Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results
Off
On
11
Local print when forwarding
Off
On
14
Print documents received with Auto Power- Immediate

On Reception (Night Printing mode)
printing
(On)
When turning on the

operation
switch
(Off)
14
Long Document Transmission (Well Log)
Off
On
14
Reset when function changed
Off
On
153
Facsimile Features
Switch Bit
Item
15
Selecting the available paper feed tray.
001: Tray 1
0, 1, 2
010: Tray 2
011: Tray 3
100: Tray 4
101: Large
Capacity
Tray (LCT)
15
Whether or not to select the available paper

feed tray.
17
Whether you need to press [Add] after speci- Not necesfying a destination with the Destination key sary
when broadcasting
Necessary
17
Whether or not to reset the settings when

original is scanned.
On
Off
17
Receive documents by pressing the {Start}

key when originals are not set.
Off (no documents received after

pressing the
{Start} key)
On (documents received after

pressing the
{Start} key)
18
Print date with Fax Header
Off
On
18
Print transmitter origin with Fax Header
Off
On
18
Print file number with Fax Header
Off
On
18
Print page number with Fax Header
Off
On
19
Use paper delivery shift function (Offset

Print)
Off
On
19
Sort Journal by line type
Off
On
20
Automatic printing of the LAN-Fax Result

Report.
Off
On
154
Off
On
Parameter Settings
Switch Bit
Item
20
Reprinting time of stored documents in

memory that could not be printed using
LAN-Fax Driver
0000:
0 minutes
5,4,3,2
0001:
1 minutes
0010:
2 minutes
0011:
3 minutes
0100:
4 minutes
0101:
5 minutes
0110:
6 minutes
0111:
7 minutes
1000:
8 minutes
1001:
9 minutes
1010:
10 minutes
1011:
11 minutes
1100:
12 minutes
1101:
13 minutes
1110:
14 minutes
1111:
15 minutes
21
Print results of sending Reception Notice Re- Off

On
quest message
(print only
when an error occurs)
21
Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request
21
File format for files forwarded to folder des- TIFF

tinations
PDF
21
Transmit Journal by E-mail
Off
On
21
Display Network error
Display
(On)
Not display
(Off)
21
Transmit Error Mail Notification
On
Off
22
Detect a dial tone before sending faxes when

using the telephone line (LINE)
Not detect
(Off)
Detect
(On)
Off
On
155
Facsimile Features
Switch Bit
Item
22

using the telephone line (LINE2)
Not detect
(Off)
Detect
(On)
22

using the telephone line (LINE3)
Not detect
(Off)
Detect
(On)
24
Store documents that could not be transmitted in memory
Off
On
24
Length of time documents that could not be

transmitted are stored in memory
24 hours
72 hours
24
Whether to retain the stored file permanently
No
Yes
32
Select which order of priority to be used to

select an alternative destination when there
is no destination of the specified type.
Paper Output Priority
Electronic
Output Priority
<Priority
Order>
1. IP-Fax
destination
2. Fax number
<Priority
Order>
1. E-mail address
2. Folder
3. E-mail ad- 3. IP-Fax

dress
destination
4. Folder
4. Fax number
34
Use gatekeeper server with IP-Fax
Off
On
34
Use SIP server with IP-Fax
Off
On
35
7, 6, 5,
4, 3, 2,
1, 0
Redial interval when sending a backup file
00000000:
0 minute(s)
00000001:
1 minute(s)
00000010:
2 minute(s)
.
.
00001111:
15 minute(s)
.
.
11111111:
25 5
minute(s)
156
Parameter Settings
Switch Bit
Item
36
Maximum number of redials when sending a

backup file
00000000:
7, 6, 5,
4, 3, 2,
1, 0
1 time(s)
00000001:
2 time(s)
00000010:
3 time(s)
.
.
11000000:
195 time(s)
.
.
11111111:
254 time(s)
37
Whether to stop sending a backup file if the

destination folder becomes full while the
machine is sending or waiting to send a fax
or the backup file
No
37
3, 2
Whether to print the backup file if it cannot

be sent
00:
Do not print
Yes
01:
Print first
page only
10:
Print whole
file
157
Facsimile Features
Changing the User Parameters

This section describes how to set parameters.
Important
Access to some User Parameter Settings may require options, or other settings
may need to be made beforehand.
It is recommended that you print and keep a User Parameter list when you
program or change a User Parameter.
Do not change any bit switches other than those shown on the previous pages.

C Press [Parameter Setting].
D Select the switch number you want to change.
E Select the bit number you want to change.
When the bit number is pressed, the current value switches between 1 and 0.
Repeat from stepE to change another bit number for the same switch.
F Press [OK].
To cancel these settings, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of stepD.
G Repeat stepD through stepE to change the switch settings.

H After all the settings are finished, press [Exit].
158
Special Senders to Treat Differently

By programming particular senders in advance, you can set the following function for each sender:
Authorized RX
Forwarding
Reception File Print Qty
Print 2 Sided
Memory Lock
Paper Tray
Use Own Name or Own Fax Number to program your senders. If the sender has
a machine of the same manufacturer, program an Own Name that has already
been programmed as a sender. If the machine is not from the same manufacturer,
Own Fax Number is used.
You can apply the same settings to all programmed numbers. You can then customize the settings for individual numbers as necessary using the Special Sender
Registration function.
The following items can be programmed.
Special Senders
Up to 30 Special Senders can be registered. A maximum of 20 characters can
be used or each name when using G3.
Full/Partial agreement
When you program own names and facsimile names for multiple destinations,
you can program a common sequence of characters to identify destinations.
Destination to be programmed
(Own Name)
Number of programmed identifications
NEW YORK BRANCH
HONG KONG BRANCH

SYDNEY BRANCH
Using Partial matching

Destination to be programmed
(Own Name)
Number of programmed identifications
BRANCH
You can program up to 30 wild cards.

Spaces are ignored when identifications are compared.
You can use wild cards for the following functions:
Forwarding
Special Senders
Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)
When using Partial agreement, you can enter up to the first 24 characters of
an e-mail address to use it as an own name or facsimile name.
159
Facsimile Features
Note
You cannot program senders as Special Senders if they do not have Own
Name or Own Fax Number programmed.
The machine cannot differentiate between Polling Reception and Free Polling
documents from Special Senders.
You cannot use the following functions with Internet Fax receptions.
Authorized RX
Memory Lock
You can program up to 24 characters for the sender.
To use Forwarding, Print 2 Sided, or Paper Tray with Internet Fax reception,
program the sender's e-mail address.
You can check Own Name and Own Fax Number using the Journal. You can
check programmed Special Senders using the specified sender list.
If you select "Off" for the Special Sender function in "Initial Set Up", the settings will be the same as the Reception Settings.
Authorized Reception
Use this function to limit incoming senders.
The machine only receives faxes from programmed Special Senders, and therefore, it helps you screen out unwanted documents, such as junk mail, and saves
wasting fax paper.
Note
To use this function, program the Special Senders function, and then select
"On" in "Authorized RX" with "Reception Settings". See "Parameter Settings"
(switch 08, bit 2).
Without programming Special Senders, the Authorized RX function will not

work, even if you select "On".
If you select "Off" for "Authorized RX" in "Initial Set Up", settings are the same
as the Reception Settings.
You can change Special Senders in the same way as you program them.
Reference
Facsimile Reference "Reception Settings"
160

Print the specified number of copies of documents received from programmed
senders (Special Senders).
If you do not program any Special Senders, the machine prints the specified
number of copies for all received documents.
Note
You cannot use multi-copy printing with Memory Lock.
You can specify up to 10 copies.
Forwarding
Print received documents, and then transfer them to those receivers programmed beforehand.
Folder destination can be registered.
It is also possible to forward faxes sent only by senders programmed as Special
Senders.
Note
To use this function, program your Special Senders, and then select "On" for
"Forwarding" in "Reception Settings".
If you specify "On" in "Forwarding" and select [Same as Basic Settings], the fax document is forwarded to the receivers programmed in "Specify End Receiver.".
If you do not program any Special Senders, the machine transfers all incoming documents to the other end receivers specified in "Specify End Receiver.".
You can set the fax destination, Internet fax destination, IP-Fax destination or
folder destination, as a forward destination.
Set folder destinations using the Address Book Management function under
System Settings. See "Registering Folders".
Reference
p.148 Forwarding

"Reception Settings", Facsimile Reference
Print 2 Sided
Print on both sides of the paper.
Note
If you select the bypass tray for "Paper Tray", duplex printing is disabled.
161
Facsimile Features
Memory Lock
Store incoming documents from programmed senders (Special Senders) in
memory without printing them. People without the Memory Lock ID cannot
print the documents, and therefore this function is useful for receiving confidential documents . If you do not program any senders, the machine receives fax
document from all senders using Memory Lock reception.
Important
You must register Memory Lock ID in advance.
If you program the same sender in Memory Lock and Forwarding, Forwarding is disabled.
Reference
p.135 Program Memory Lock ID
Paper Tray
Print documents received from programmed senders (Special Senders) and the
documents from other senders on different types of paper.
For example, if blue paper is in Tray 1 and white paper is in Tray 2, the machine
prints the documents from Special Senders on the blue paper and prints the documents from other senders on the white paper, making it easy for you to separate the two.
If you do not program any Special Senders, the machine outputs documents received from all senders using the default paper tray.
Note
If the machine receives a document that has a different size from the paper in
the specified tray, the machine prints it after splitting it or minimizing its size.
Selection of the bypass tray enables you to specify the paper size in "Scan Area".
Reference
"Placing Originals", Facsimile Reference
162
Programming/Changing Special Senders

Program and change Special Senders.

C Press [Program Special Sender].
D Check [Program / Change] is selected.
E Select the sender to program or change.
F Enter a sender name, and then press [OK].

Enter a destination name using Own Name or Own Fax Number.
G Press [Full Agreement] or [Partial Agreement].
163
Facsimile Features
H Select the item you want to program.
You must select only the item you want to program.

To cancel these settings, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of stepE.
I Press [OK].
A Special Sender is programmed.

To program another sender, repeat the procedure from stepE.
J Press [Exit].
K Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.159 Full/Partial agreement
p.165 Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)

p.166 Forwarding
p.165 Reception File Print Qty
p.167 Print 2 Sided
p.167 Memory Lock
p.167 Paper Tray per Sender
164
Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)

Specify when programming a Special Sender.
A Press [Authorized Reception per Sender].

B Press [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].
4
A Press [RX File Print Quantity per Sender].

B Press [Number of Sets].
C Enter the print quantity using the number keys, and then press [OK].
Note
Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for
"RX File Print Qty" of "Reception Settings".
165
Facsimile Features
Forwarding
Important
One forward destination can be registered for each Special Sender. To register
two or more forward destinations, use group destinations. However a maximum of 500 destinations can be specified in a group.
A Press [Forwarding per Sender].

B Select [On] or [Off].
If you select [Off], proceed to stepD.
C Press the Destination key of a forward destination, and then press [OK].
D Press [OK].
Note
"Forwarding" under "Administrator Tools".
Press the key on the left of the display to switch the destination between
fax number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder.
When a folder is specified as the forward destination, you can set a file format for forwarding. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 21, bit 3).
Deleting a destination specified as a forward destination from the destination list causes the settings of the forward destination to be deleted, so they
must be registered again. When a destination is changed, a document is
transmitted to the new destination. If there is no destination of the specified type, you can set which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 32, bit 0).
After you perform stepJ, set "Forwarding" of "Reception Settings" to "On".
Reference
166
Print 2 Sided
A Press [2 Sided Print per Sender].

Note
Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for "2
Sided Print" of "Reception Settings".
Memory Lock
A Press [Memory Lock Reception per Sender].

Note
"Program Memory Lock ID" under "Administrator Tools".
Paper Tray per Sender

A Press [Paper Tray per Sender].

B Select the tray you want to use, and then press [OK].
Note
"Paper Tray" of "Reception Settings".
167
Facsimile Features
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender

Program the "Initial Set Up" of a Special Sender. You can also specify the Bypass
Tray Paper Size.

D Press [Initial Set Up].
E Select the function you want to program.
In this feature, "Authorized RX" has the same settings as "Reception Settings".
F To program Authorized RX and Special RX Function, press [Authorized Reception] or [Special Reception Function].
168
G Press [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].

The illustration shows the "Authorized RX" display as an example.
H To program Bypass Tray Paper Size, press [Bypass Tray Paper Size].
You can select a size from [Auto Detect], [Regular Size], or [Custom Size].
If you select [Auto Detect], proceed to stepsI and N.
If you select [Regular Size], proceed to stepsI, J and N.
If you select [Custom Size], proceed to stepsI and K to N.
I Select the size you want to program.
If you select [Regular Size], select a paper size displayed, and then proceed to
stepN.
If you select [Custom Size], proceed to stepK.
J Select the size you want to program from the sizes shown.
K Make sure that [Vertical] is selected.
169
Facsimile Features
L Enter the vertical size of the paper using the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
Specify a vertical size from 90 mm (3.6") to 305 mm (12.0"). You cannot enter
a size smaller than 90 mm or larger than 305 mm.
If you enter a length and change the units by pressing [mm] or [inch], it is converted automatically (fractions are rounded off).
M Enter the horizontal size of the paper using the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
Specify a horizontal size from 148 mm (5.9") to 600 mm (23.7"). You cannot enter a size smaller than 148 mm or larger than 600 mm.
If you enter a length and change the units by pressing [mm] or [inch], it is converted automatically (fractions are rounded off).
N Press [OK].
O Press [Exit].
P Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
If you select [Auto Detect], the machine recognizes the paper size automatically.
Reference
"Reception Settings", Facsimile Reference
170
Deleting a Special Sender

Use this function to delete "Initial Set Up" of a Special Sender. The Bypass Tray
Paper Size can also be deleted.

D Press [Delete], and then select the Special Sender you want to delete.
E Press [Yes].
To cancel deleting a special sender, press [No]. The display returns to that of
stepD.
F Press [Exit].
171
Facsimile Features
Box Settings
The following functions are for delivery and transfer of documents:
Personal Box
Information Box
Transfer Box
SUB Code and SEP Code

SUB Code and SEP Code are IDs consisting of up to 20 digits, and can include
numbers, #, *, and spaces.
To use this function, you must program a box and SUB/SEP Code beforehand. The other party can send documents to, and retrieve stored documents
from, this box using the code.
Note
The combined total of items that can be stored using the Personal Box, Information Box, and Transfer Box functions is 150.
You cannot set the same Box code on two different boxes.
Transmission or programming may not be allowed if there is not enough free
memory left. The amount of free memory left differs depending on the optional equipment installed.
Programming/Changing Personal Boxes

This section describes how to program Personal Boxes.
You can program the following items:
Box name (required)
Up to 20 characters long
SUB Code (required)
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits 0-9, "#", "*", and spaces
(the first character cannot be a space).
Password (optional)
When programming a password, a mark is displayed before the Box name.
Receiver (optional)
You can program one delivery destination for each Personal Box. Specify a
delivery destination programmed in Destination key.
172

C Press [Box Setting].
Box Settings
E Select a box to program.

When programming a new box, press [Not Programmed].
To change a box already programmed, press it and proceed to stepH.
F Press [Personal Box].

G Enter a box name, and then press [OK].
H Enter a SUB Code.
To change the SUB Code, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try
again. To change a Box name, press [Box Name], and then repeat from step G.
I Specify the settings you require.
If you do not want to program a password or receiver, proceed to stepP.
J Press [Password].
173
Facsimile Features
K Enter a password, and then press [OK].
L Re-enter the password, and then press [OK].

To change the password after pressing [OK], press [Change] and repeat stepsK
and L, or press [Cancel] and repeat from stepJ.
M Press [OK].
N Press [Receiver].
O Select a destination using the destination list, and then press [OK].
Press the key on the left of the display to switch the destination between fax
number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder.
P Press [OK].
Q Press [Exit].
174
Box Settings
R Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Note
Specify a fax number, Internet Fax destination and IP-Fax destination as

the transmission destination.
The Fax Header is not printed on delivered documents.
If a document cannot be delivered, a Communication Failure Report is
printed and the document is saved as a Confidential Reception document.
You can edit boxes in the same way you program them. However, boxes
that are being used cannot be edited.
If a destination in the destination table is deleted after being registered, delivery is not performed and the settings of the delivery destination are also
deleted. Also, when a delivery destination is changed, a document is sent
to the changed destination. If there is no destination of the specified type,
you can set which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See
"Parameter Settings" (switch 32, bit 0).
Reference
"Personal Boxes", Facsimile Reference

Deleting Personal Boxes

This section describes how to delete Personal Boxes.
Important
If there are documents in the box, you cannot delete the box.

D Press [Delete], and then select the box you want to delete.
175
Facsimile Features
E If the password is programmed, enter a password using the number keys,

F Press [Delete].
To cancel deleting a box, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of
stepD.
G Press [Exit].
Programming/Changing Information Boxes

This section describes how to set up an Information Box.
You can store the following items:
Box name (required)
Up to 20 characters long
SEP Code (required)
Password (optional)

176
Box Settings
E Select the box to program.

To change a box already programmed, press it, and then proceed to stepH. If
a password is programmed, enter the password, press [OK], and then proceed
to stepH.
F Press [Information Box].

G Enter a box name, and then press [OK].
H Enter the SEP Code.
To change the SEP Code, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try
again. To change the box name, press [Box Name], and then repeat the procedure from stepG.
I Press [Password].
If you do not want to program a password, proceed to stepL.
177
Facsimile Features
J Enter a password, and then press [OK].
K Re-enter the password, and then press [OK].

L Press [OK].
M Press [Exit].
N Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
You can edit boxes in the same way you program them. However, boxes
that are being used cannot be edited.
If a destination in the destination list is deleted after being registered, delivery is not performed and the settings of the delivery destination are also
deleted. Also, when a delivery destination is changed, a document is sent
to the changed destination. If there is no destination of the specified type,
you can set which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See
"Parameter Settings" (switch 32, bit 0).
Reference
"Information Boxes", Facsimile Reference

178
Box Settings
Deleting Information Boxes

This section describes how to delete Information Boxes.
Important
If there are documents in the box, you cannot delete the box.


F Press [Delete].
To cancel deleting a box, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of
stepD.
G Press [Exit].
179
Facsimile Features
Programming/Changing Transfer Boxes

This section describes how to set up an Transfer Box.
This function turns the machine into a fax relay station. Documents sent with a
SUB Code that matches the SUB Code programmed as a Transfer Box are received, and then relayed to a programmed receiver.
Since documents can be sent to multiple destinations in a single transfer request,
you can economize on call charges when sending to distant destinations.
Inform the Requesting Party of the SUB Code assigned to the Transfer Box.
When they want to have a document transferred by your machine, ask them to
send the document using SUB Code Transmission and specifying this SUB
Code. If a password has also been programmed, inform them of this too, and ask
them to enter it as the SID code.
You can store the following items:
Box name (required)
Up to 20 characters
SUB Code (required)
End Receiver (required)
You can store five End Receivers (destinations to which documents are forwarded) for each box. Specify End Receivers using a single or group destination programmed in the destination list beforehand.
Password (optional)
When programming a password, a mark is displayed in front of the Box
name.

180
Box Settings
E Select the box to program.

To change a box already programmed, press it, and then proceed to stepH.
F Press [Transfer Box].

G Enter a Box name, and then press [OK].
H Enter a SUB Code.
To change the SUB Code, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try
again. To change Box name, press [Box Name], and then repeat from stepG.
I To Program End Receivers, Select an Receiving Station.

You can store five Receiving Station.
181
Facsimile Features
J Specify End Receivers with Destination keys, and then press [OK].
You can change the display to the fax destination, Internet fax destination,
and IP-Fax destination using the key on the left side of the display.
A reception station can also be registered as a group destination. In such a
case, a maximum of 500 parties including End Receivers 1-5 can be specified
in a group.
To register another End Receiver, repeat from stepI.
K To program a password, press [Password].
If you do not want to program a password, proceed to stepN.
L Enter a password, and then press [OK].
M Re-enter the password, and then press [OK].

To change the password after pressing [OK], press [Change] and repeat stepsL
and M, or press [Cancel] and repeat from stepK.
N Press [OK].
O Press [Exit].
182
Box Settings
P Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Note
After documents are transferred, Transfer Result Reports are not sent back
to the sender.
Specify the Internet fax destination and IP-Fax destination as a reception

station.
After documents are transferred, they are deleted.
When this function is set to on, the machine prints out the received documents it transfers and a Transfer Result Report after the transfer has finished. If you do not want it to print, contact your service representative.
When the programmed receiver is a group destination for Multi-step
Transfer, Multi-step Transfer takes place. For more information, contact
your service representative.
You can edit boxes in the same way you program them.
If you delete a destination specified as a reception destination using the
destination list, the settings of the reception destination are also deleted, so
they must be registered again. When a destination is changed, a document
is transmitted to the new destination. If there is no destination of the specified type, you can set which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 32, bit 0).
Reference
Deleting Transfer Boxes

This section describes how to delete Transfer Boxes.

183
Facsimile Features

F Press [Delete].
To cancel deleting a special sender, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns
to that of stepD.
G Press [Exit].
Printing the Box List
Print a list showing the currently programmed Personal Boxes, Information Boxes,
and Transfer Boxes.

C Press [Box Setting: Print List].
After printing the list, you can then start from stepC.
{Clear/Stop} key. The display returns to that of stepC.
To cancel printing a list after pressing the {Start} key, press [Stop Printing]. The
display returns to that of stepC.
184
5. Printer Features
This chapter describes user tools in the Printer Features menu. For details on
how to access Printer Features, see "Accessing User Tools (System Settings)".
Test Print
This section describes the user tools in the Test Print menu under Printer Features.
Multiple Lists
You can print the configuration page and error log.
Configuration Page
You can print the machine's current configuration values.
Error Log
You can print error logs listing all errors that occurred during printing. The most
recent 30 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added when there are
30 errors already stored, the oldest error is deleted. However, if the oldest error
belongs to one of the following types of print jobs, it is not deleted. Instead, it will
be stored separately in error logs for each job type, up to a maximum of 30 for
each log. You can check any of these print jobs for error log information.
Sample Print
Locked Print
Hold Print
Stored Print
The records of Auto Job Cancel and jobs canceled manually from the control
panel can be printed.
Menu List
You can print a Menu List showing the machine's function menus.
PCL Config./Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PCL font list.
PS Config./Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PostScript font list.
This menu can be selected only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
PDF Config./Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PDF font list.
This menu can be selected only when the PostScript 3 unit is installed.
Hex Dump
You can print in the Hex Dump mode.
185
Printer Features
Printing the configuration page
A Press [Printer Features].

B Press [Configuration Page] on the [List / Test Print].
The configuration page is printed.
C Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Interpreting the configuration page
System Reference
Unit Number
Displays the serial number assigned to the board by its manufacturer.
Total Memory
Displays the total amount of memory (SDRAM) installed on the printer.
Firmware Version
Printer
Displays the version number of the printer firmware.
System
Displays the version number of the system firmware.
Engine
Displays the version number of the printer engine.
LCDC
Displays the version number of the panel display.
NIB
Displays the version number of the Network interface.
Device Connection
This item(s) appears when the device option(s) is installed.
HDD: Font / Macro Download
Displays the capacity of the hard disk drive.
Printer Language
Displays the version number of the printer driver language.
186
Test Print
Connection Equipment
Displays the installed optional equipments.
Paper Input
Displays settings made under Tray Paper Settings menu.
System
Displays settings made under the System menu.
PCL Menu
Displays settings made under PCL Menu.
PS Menu
Displays settings made under PS Menu.
PDF Menu
Displays settings made under PDF Menu.
Host Interface
Displays settings made under the Host Interface menu.
When DHCP is active on the network, the actual IPv4 address, subnet mask
and gateway address appear in parentheses on the configuration page.
Interface Information
Displays the interface information.
Reference
187
Printer Features
Maintenance
This section describes the user tools in the Maintenance menu under Printer Features.
List / Test Print Lock

You can lock the [List / Test Print] menu.
On
Off
Delete All Temporary Print Jobs
You can delete all print jobs temporarily stored in the machine.
Delete All Stored Print Jobs
You can delete all print jobs stored in the machine.
4 Color Graphic Mode

Text Priority
Use the optimum CMYK toner combination for text printing.
Photo Priority
Use the optimum CMYK toner combination for photo printing.
Reference
188
System
System
This section describes the user tools in the System menu under Printer Features.
Print Error Report

Select this to have an error report printed when a printer or memory error occurs.
On
Off
Auto Continue
You can select this to enable Auto Continue. When it is On, printing continues
after a system error occurs.
Off
Immediate
1 minute
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
Memory Overflow
Select this to have a memory overflow error report printed.
Do not Print
Error Information
Job Separation
You can enable Job Separation.
This menu can be selected only when a finisher (optional) is installed.
On
Off
Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs
You can select to automatically delete print jobs temporarily stored in the machine.
On
Off
If you select [On], you can set up to 200 hours for auto file deleting.
Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs
You can select to automatically delete print jobs stored in the machine.
On: 3 day(s)
Off
If you select [On], you can set up to 180 days for auto file deleting.
189
Printer Features
Initial Print Job List

You can set the desired type of print job list that appears on the screen when
you press [Print Jobs].
Complete List
Displays the list of print jobs stored in the machine.
List Per User ID
Displays the list of the User ID who stored a file in the machine.
Memory Usage
You can select the amount of memory used in Font Priority or Frame Priority,
according to paper size or resolution.
Font Priority
This setting uses memory for registering fonts.
Frame Priority
This setting uses frame memory for high speed printing.
Duplex
You can select to have print on both sides of each page.
Off
Long Edge Bind
Short Edge Bind
Copies
You can specify the number of print sets. This setting is disabled if the number of pages to print has been specified with the printer driver or another
command.
The number of copies can be specified from 1 to 999 by increments of one.
Default: 1
Blank Page Print
You can select whether or not to print blank pages.
On
Off
Pages that match one of the following conditions are identified as blank.
There are no images.
There are images but they are outside the printable area.
There are only blank characters.
190
Reserved Job Waiting Time

You can specify how long the machine waits to receive a print job before allowing other functions such as the copier and scanner functions to interrupt it.
Long Wait
Medium Wait
Short Wait
In Reserved Job Order
System
Printer Language
Specify the printer language.
Auto
PCL
PS
PDF
This menu appears only when the PostScript 3 unit is installed.
Sub Paper Size
You can enable the Auto Substitute Paper Size (A4, LT) feature.
Auto
Off
Page Size
You can select the default paper size.
The paper size you can select is as follows:
1117, 81/214, 81/213, 81/211, 81/413, 813, 71/4101/2, 51/281/2,
41/891/2, 31/871/2, A3, A4, A5, A6, B4JIS, B5JIS, B6JIS, C5 Env, C6 Env,
DL Env, 8K, 16K, Custom Size
Default: Metric version: A4, Inch version: 81/211
Letterhead Setting
You can rotate original images when printing.
When printing, original images are always rotated by 180 degrees. Therefore,
output might not be as expected when printing onto letterhead or preprinted paper requiring orientation. Using this function, you can specify image rotation.
Off
When set to Off, original images are rotated by 180 degrees.
Auto Detect
When set to Auto Detect, the machine detects a letterhead or preprinted
paper automatically, and does not rotate the image.
On (Always)
When set to On (Always), the machine does not rotate.
This function reduces printing speed.
Bypass Tray Setting Priority
Specify whether (Printer) Driver / Command or Machine Settings, has priority for determining the paper size for the bypass tray.
Driver / Command
Machine Settings
Edge to Edge Print
You can select whether or not to print on the entire sheet.
Off
On
The 5 mm margin along the edges may not be printed properly.
191
Printer Features
Default Printer Language

You can set the default printer language if the machine cannot find the printer
language automatically.
PCL
PS
PDF
This menu appears only when the PostScript 3 unit is installed.
Tray Switching
You can set to switch the paper tray.
Off
On
Reference
"Loading paper", Troubleshooting
192
Host Interface
Host Interface
This section describes the user tools in the Host Interface menu under Printer
Features.
I/O Buffer
You can set the size of the I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change
this setting.
128KB
256KB
I/O Timeout
You can set how many seconds the machine should wait before ending a print
job. If data from another port usually arrives in the middle of a print job, you
should increase this timeout period.
10 seconds
15 second(s)
20 seconds
25 seconds
60 seconds
Reference
193
Printer Features
PCL Menu
This section describes the user tools in the PCL Menu under Printer Features.
Orientation
You can set the page orientation.
Portrait
Landscape
Form Lines
You can set the number of lines per page.
The number of lines can be specified from 5 to 128 by increments of one.
Default: Metric version: 64, Inch version: 60
Font Source
You can set the storage location of the default font.
Resident
RAM
HDD
SD
RAM, HDD and SD can be selected only when fonts have been downloaded
to the machine.
Font Number
You can set the ID of the default font you want to use.
The number of font numbers can be specified from 0 to 63 by increments of
one.
The default setting is 0.
Point Size
You can set the point size you want to use for the selected font.
The number of point sizes can be specified from 4.00 to 999.75 by increments
of 0.25.
This setting is effective only with variable-space fonts.
The default setting is 12.00.
Font Pitch
You can set the number of characters per inch for the selected font.
The number of characters per inch can be specified from 0.44 to 99.99 by increments of 0.01.
This setting is effective only with fixed-space fonts.
The default setting is 10.00 pitches.
194
PCL Menu
Symbol Set
Specify the character set of the selected font. The available options are as follows:
Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852, PC8-TK, Win
L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ, Math-8, PS
Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO 21, ISO 60,
ISO 69, Win 3.0
Courier Font
You can select a courier font type.
Regular
Dark
Extend A4 Width
You can extend the printing area width (when printing on A4 sheet with
PCL).
Off
On
When the setting is On, the width will be 81/2 inches.
Append CR to LF
When set to On, a carriage return will follow each line feed: CR=CR, LF=CRLF,
FF=CRFF.
Off
On
Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.
300 dpi
600 dpi (Fast)
600 dpi (Standard)
600 dpi (High Quality)
Reference
195
Printer Features
PS Menu
This section describes the user tools in the PS Menu under Printer Features.
This menu appears only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
Data Format
You can select a data format.
Binary Data
TBCP
This setting is not effective when operating the machine with a parallel or
EtherTalk connection.
When operating the machine with a parallel connection, and also if the binary
data is sent from the printer driver, the print job is canceled.
When operating the machine with an Ethernet connection, the print job is canceled under the following conditions:
The printer driver data format is TBCP, and the data format selected on the
display panel is Binary Data.
The printer driver data format is binary, and the data format selected on
the display panel is TBCP.
Resolution
600 dpi (Fast)
600 dpi (Standard)
Color Setting
You can make an RGB setting.
Off
Fine
Super Fine
Color Profile
You can set the color profile.
Auto
Presentation
Solid Color
Photographic
User Setting
Reference
196
PDF Menu
PDF Menu
This section describes the user tools in the PDF Menu under Printer Features.
Change PDF Password

Set the password for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
Current Password
New Password
Confirm New Password
A password can be set using the Web Image Monitor, but in this case the password information is sent through the network. If security is a priority, set the
password using this menu from the Control Panel.
PDF Group Password
Set the group password already specified with DeskTopBinder.
Current Password
New Password
Confirm New Password
A password can be set using the Web Image Monitor, but in this case the password information is sent through the network. If security is a priority, set the
password using this menu from the Control Panel.
Resolution
600 dpi (Fast)
600 dpi (Standard)
Color Setting
None
Fine
Super Fine
197
Printer Features
Color Profile
Auto
Presentation
Solid Color
Photographic
User Setting
Reference
198
6. Scanner Features
This chapter describes user tools in the Scanner Features menu. For details on
how to access Scanner Features, see "Accessing User Tools (System Settings)".
General Settings
This section describes the user tools in the General Settings menu under Scanner
Features.
Switch Title
Select the title to be shown on the destination list.
Update Delivery Server Destination List
Press [Update Delivery Server Destination List] to update the receivers from the
delivery server. To use this function, it is necessary to set [Delivery Option] to
[On].
Search Destination
Select a destination list to be used in "Search Destination".
To search from LDAP server, it is necessary to register the LDAP server in
[System Settings] and set [LDAP Search] to [On].
TWAIN Standby Time
When the machine is being used to send e-mail or a file, or functioning as Document Server or a network delivery scanner, a scanning request to the machine
as a TWAIN scanner will switch the machine to the network TWAIN scanner
function. This setting determines the delay until the machine switches to the
network TWAIN scanner function.
Off
When [Off] is selected, the machine will switch to the network TWAIN
scanner function at once.
On: 10 sec.
When [On] is selected, you can enter the delay time with the number keys
(3-30 seconds). The machine will switch to the network TWAIN scanner
function when the time set here passes after the last key operation.
Destination List Display Priority 1
Select a destination list to be displayed when the machine is in the initial state.
You can select either [E-mail / Folder] or [Delivery Server].
E-mail / Folder
Delivery Server
199
Scanner Features

In the machines address book, select which address book appears by default.
You can select either [E-mail Address] or [Folder].
E-mail Address
Folder
Print & Delete Scanner Journal
Up to 100 transmission/delivery results can be checked on this machine. If
the stored transmission/ delivery results reach 100, select whether to print
the delivery journal.
On
The transmission/delivery journal is printed automatically. The printed
journal is deleted.
Off
Transmission/delivery results are deleted one by one as new results are
stored.
Do not Print: Disable Send
Transmission/delivery cannot be performed when the journal is full.
When printed, all records are deleted after printing. When not printed,
records over the limit are automatically deleted in succession from the oldest
record.
While the journal is being printed, files with the status waiting cannot be sent.
Print Scanner Journal

The scanner journal is printed and deleted.
Delete Scanner Journal
The scanner journal is deleted without being printed.
Reference
200
Scan Settings
Scan Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Scan Settings menu under Scanner
Features.
A.C.S. Sensitivity Level

Sets the sensitivity level for judging color/black and white for scanning originals when [Scan Type] is set to [Auto Color Select].
Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass
To divide originals and scanning them individually with the exposure glass
to form a single file, select [Continuous Wait], [Off], or [Set Wait Time] for the waiting status.
Continuous Wait
Off
Set Wait Time: 60 sec.
If you select [SADF] in [Original Feed Type] on the Scan to Folder screen, the [Wait
Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass] setting becomes invalid.
If you select [Batch] in [Original Feed Type] on the Scan to Folder screen, the
[Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass] setting becomes invalid, and the machine waits for an additional original to be placed.
If [Set Wait Time] is selected, enter the wait time in seconds (3-999) for placing
additional originals with the number keys. Scanning will start if additional
originals are placed and the {Start} key is pressed within this time. You can
end scanning and begin transmission by pressing the {q} key within this
time. Once the specified time has elapsed, transmission starts automatically.
If [Continuous Wait] is selected, the machine will wait for additional originals
until the {q} key is pressed. Scanning will start when additional originals
are placed and the {Start} key is pressed. You can end scanning and begin
sending by pressing the {q} key.
If originals are placed in the ADF (auto document feeder), transmission will
start without waiting for additional originals after all originals in the ADF
have been scanned, regardless of the specified settings.
If a paper misfeed occurs or any of the following operations are performed
while the machine is waiting for additional originals, the countdown stops
and does not start again until the {q} key is pressed.
Changing the settings such as the scan settings
Opening the upper cover of the ADF
Pressing the {Interrupt} key to activate the copy mode
201
Scanner Features
Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF

When dividing originals and scanning them separately with the ADF to form
a single file, select [Set Wait Time] or [Continuous Wait] for the waiting status.
Continuous Wait
Set Wait Time: 60 sec.
This setting is valid if [SADF] is specified for [Original Feed Type] when scanning.
If [Set Wait Time] is selected, enter the wait time in seconds (3-999) for placing
additional originals with the number keys. Scanning will start automatically
if additional originals are placed within this time. You can end scanning and
begin transmission by pressing the {q} key within this time. Once the specified time has elapsed, transmission starts automatically.
If [Continuous Wait] is selected, the machine will wait for the additional originals until the {q} key is pressed. Scanning will start when additional originals are placed and the {Start} key is pressed. You can end scanning and begin
sending by pressing the {q} key.
Even if originals are placed on the exposure glass, the machine will operate
according to the specified settings. However, every time originals are placed
on the exposure glass, you must press the {Start} key to start scanning. Scanning will start if additional originals are placed and the {Start} key is pressed
within this time. You can end scanning and begin transmission by pressing
the {q} key within this time. Once the specified time has elapsed, transmission starts automatically.
If originals are placed in the auto document feeder (ADF), transmission will
start without waiting for additional originals after all originals in the ADF
have been scanned, regardless of the specified settings.
If a paper misfeed occurs or any of the following operations are performed
while the machine is waiting for additional originals, the countdown stops
and does not start again until the {q} key is pressed.
Changing the settings such as the scan settings
Opening the upper cover of the ADF
Pressing the {Interrupt} key to activate the copy mode
Background Density of ADS (Full Color)

Characteristics due to the type of paper such as nonwhiteness like newspaper
or transparent originals can be reduced by correcting the scanning density.
Reference
"Batch, SADF", Scanner Reference

"Items for Specifying Scan Settings", Scanner Reference
"Setting Items for Original Feed Type", Scanner Reference
"Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File", Scanner Reference
202
Send Settings
Send Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Send Settings menu under Scanner
Features.
Compression (Black & White)

Select whether or not to compress black and white scan files.
On
Off
Compression reduces the time required for transferring the scan file.
The actual time required for file transfer will vary depending on the file size
and network load.
Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)
Specify whether or not to compress multi-level (grayscale / full color) scan
files.
On
Off
If you select [On], you can specify the compression level between one and five.
The image quality is better for lower compression, but the time required for
file transfer increases accordingly.
The actual time required for file transfer will vary depending on the file size
and network load.
High Compression PDF Level

Select compression level when creating high compression PDF files.
Higher
Standard
Max. E-mail Size
Select whether or not to limit the size of an e-mail to which an image is attached.
On
Off
When [On] is selected, enter the size limit (128-102400 KB) with the number
keys.
When the SMTP limits the size, match that setting.
203
Scanner Features
Divide & Send E-mail

This function is effective only when [On] is selected for [Max. E-mail Size].
Select whether or not an image exceeding the size specified in [Max. E-mail Size]
should be divided and sent using more than one e-mail.
Yes (per Max. Size)
Yes (per Page)
Off
When [Yes (per Max. Size)] is selected, enter the Max. Number of Divisions (2500) with the number keys.
When [Multi-page: TIFF] or [Multi-page: PDF] is selected for [File Type], the image
will not be divided even if [Yes (per Page)] is selected.
When [Yes (per Max. Size)] is selected, some received files may not be able to be
restored, depending on the type of e-mail software.
When [No] is selected, the e-mail is not sent if its size exceeds the limit, and an
error message appears. The scan file is discarded.
Set the maximum e-mail size within the capacity of the SMTP server.
E-mail Information Language
Select the language in which e-mail information such as title, document
name, and sender's name is sent.
Select one of the following 20 languages:
British English, American English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch,
Portuguese, Polish, Czech, Swedish, Finnish, Hungarian, Norwegian, Danish, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Russian, and Hangul.
The e-mail text which is a template cannot be changed.
No. of Digits for Single Page Files

Sets digit number for serial number to attach to Single Page file name.
4 Digits
8 Digits
Stored File E-mail Method
Specify the e-mail setting for sending stored files. You can select [Send File] or
[Send URL Link]. This setting can be used for the following:
Send File
Sending Stored Files by E-mail
Send URL Link
Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail
If you select [Send File], actual files are attached to e-mails.
If you select [Send URL Link], URL Links to file locations are attached to emails.
Reference
204
7. Registering Addresses and Users

for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
This chapter describes how to register destinations and users in the Address
Book. For details on how to access System Settings, see "Accessing User Tools
(System Settings)".
Address Book
Registering information such as the names of users and their e-mail addresses in
the Address Book allows you to manage them easily.
Important
Address Book data is stored on the hard disk. It can be lost if there is some
kind of hard disk failure. The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any
damages resulting data loss.
You can register and manage the following items in the Address Book:
Names
You can register the name of the user and the key display. This is the basic information required for managing user of the machine.
To register a fax number or e-mail address in the address book, you must register information such as the user name and destination name in advance.
Auth. Info
You can register user codes in order to restrict particular functions to certain
users, and to check their use of each function. You can also register login user
names and login passwords to be used when sending e-mail, sending to folders, or accessing an LDAP server.
205
Protection
You can set protection codes to stop sender's name from being used or folders
from being accessed without authorization.
Fax Dest.
You can register fax numbers, line, fax header and select label insertion.
When using IP-Fax, you can register the IP-Fax destination and select the protocol.
7
E-mail
You can register e-mail destinations in the Address Book.
206
Address Book
Folder
You can register the protocol, path name and server name.
SMB
FTP
NCP
Add to Group
You can put registered e-mail and folder destinations into a group for easier
management.
207
Note
You can also use a Web Image Monitor to register names in the Address Book.
With the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can register multiple names at
the same time. For details about using Web Image Monitor, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
Using [Address Management Tool] in SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can

backup Address Book data. We recommend backing up data when using the
Address Book. For operating instructions, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Managing names in the Address Book

By registering a name and key display beforehand, you can specify e-mail and
folder destinations simply by selecting the name key.
Reference
p.210 Registering Names
Sending fax by Quick Dial

Register a fax number in the Address Book so you can specify it only by selecting
the fax destination, shown on the fax initial display when sending a fax. When
label insertion is set to "On", the receiver's name and standard messages are
printed on the fax message when it is received at the other end.
By registering IP-Fax destinations in the Address Book, you can specify a destination simply by selecting it from the destinations that appear in the initial fax
display. Registered IP-Fax numbers can be used and printed as senders IP-Fax
numbers.
Reference
p.223 Fax Destination
Sending e-mail by Quick Dial

By registering e-mail addresses in the Address Book, you can specify e-mail destinations simply by selecting them from the fax initial display when sending a
document by Internet fax.
You can also specify an e-mail address by selecting the destination shown on the
initial scanner display when sending a document using the scanner function. A
registered e-mail address can be used as the sender's address, and the sender's
addresses are automatically entered in the "From" field of an e-mail header.
Reference
p.236 E-mail Destination
208
Address Book
Sending scanned files to a shared folder directly

After registering the path name, user name and password, you can connect to a
shared folder simply by selecting the destination shown on the initial scanner
display whenever sending files using the scanner function to a shared folder.
To share the folder using Windows, select the SMB protocol.
To register the folder to the FTP server, select the FTP protocol.
To register the folder to the NetWare server, select the NCP protocol.
Reference
Preventing unauthorized user access to shared folders from the machine

After registering a protection code, you can specify the object of protection to
prevent an e-mail destination from being used without permission.
You can prevent unauthorized access to registered folders.
Reference
p.267 Registering a Protection Code
Managing users and machine usage

Register user codes to limit users to the following functions and check their use
of each function:
Copier
Document Server
Facsimile
Scanner
Printer
Reference
p.214 Authentication Information
209
Registering Names
Register user information including their names.
The user name is useful for selecting a destination when sending faxes or e-mail.
You can also use it as a folder destination.
You can register up to 2000 names.
Registering Names
This section describes how to register names.

C Press [Address Book Management].
E Press [New Program].
F Press [Change] on the right of the Name.
The name entry display appears.
G Enter the name, and then press [OK].
210
Registering Names
H Press the key for the classification you want to use under Select Title.
The keys you can select are as follows:

[Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.
[AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]: Added
to the list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Frequent] and one more page for each title.
I Press [OK] twice.

J Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
The name can be used for documents in the Document Server. For details
about the Document Server, see "Using the Document Server", Copy/ Document Server Reference.
Reference
"Using the Document Server", Copy/ Document Server Reference
211
Changing a Registered Name

This section describes how to change a name.

E Select the registered name you want to change.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
F To change the name or key display, press [Change] on the right of the name
or key display.
G Enter the name or key display, and then press [OK].

H To change the title, press the key for the classification you want to use from
Select Title.
I To change the registration number, press [Change] under Registration No..

J Enter a new registration number using the number keys, and then press the
{q} key.
K Press [OK].
L Press [Exit].
M Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail
address, or IP-Fax destination.
Reference
212
Registering Names
Deleting a Registered Name

This section describes how to delete a name.

D Press [Delete].
E Select the name you want to delete.
F Press [Yes].
G Press [Exit].
213
Authentication Information
Following describes the procedure for authenticating a user code.
Important
The functions associated with each user code are the same. If you change or
delete user codes, management data and limits associated with that code become invalid.
Register user codes to limit users to the following functions and check their use
of each function:
Copier
Document Server
Facsimile
Scanner
Printer
Note
You can register up to 500 user codes.
The number of copies made of documents stored in the Document Server using the facsimile function is counted for each user code. This allows you to
check each user's usage.
The number of copies scanned using the scanner function is counted for each
user code. This allows you to check each user's usage.
To automatically register the printer driver user code, select [Printer: PC Control] for the printer in User Code Authentication. To use the user code set in
User Tools, set the user codes registered in User Tools for the printer driver.
For details about setting user codes for the printer driver, see Printer Driver
Help.
Reference
p.81 User Authentication Management
214
Registering a User Code

This section describes how to register a user code.

E Press the name whose code is to be registered, or enter the registered num-
ber using the number key.

You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
F Press [Auth. Info].

G Enter the user code using the number keys, and then press {q} key.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key.
H Press [TNext] twice.
215
I Select the functions to be used with the user code from Available Functions.
J Press [OK].
K Press [Exit].
L Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
You can enter a one-to eight-digit user code.
To register the name, see Registering Names".

Reference
Changing a User Code

This section describes how to change a user code.
Important
Even if you change a user code, the counter value will not be cleared.

216
E Select the user whose user code you want to change.


G Press [Change], and then enter the new user code using the number keys
H Press {q} key.

I To change the available functions, press [Auth. Info] and then press [TNext]
twice.
J Press the key to select the functions to enable them.
Press the key to highlight it, and then the function is enabled. To cancel a selection, press the highlighted key.
K Press [OK].
L Press [Exit].
M Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".
Reference
p.212 Changing a Registered Name
217
Deleting a User Code

This section describes how to delete a user code.
Important
After clearing the user code, the counter is automatically cleared.

D Press [Delete].
E Select the name whose code is to be deleted.

G Press [Change] to delete the user code, and then press {q} key.
H Press [OK].
I Press [Exit].
218

Note
To delete a name from the Address Book entirely, see "Deleting a Registered
Name".
Reference
p.213 Deleting a Registered Name
Displaying the Counter for Each User

This section describes how to display the counter for each user.

C Press [Display / Clear / Print Counter per User].
D Select the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter], [Fax Counter] or [Scanner Counter].
Counters for individual function usage under each user code appear.
Printing the Counter for Each User

This section describes how to print the counter for each user.
219

D Select a user code from the left side of the display.
Press [Select All on the Page] to select all user codes on the page.
E Press [Print Counter List] under Per User.
7
Enter the user code, and then press {q} if the user code is registered.
F Select the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter], [Fax Counter], and [Scanner Counter].
G Press [Print].
220
Printing the Counter for All Users

This section describes how to print the counter for all users.

D Press [Print Counter List] under All Users.
Enter the user code, and then press {q} if the user code is registered.
E Select the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter], [Fax Counter], and [Scanner Counter].
F Press [Print].
221
Clearing the Number of Prints

This section describes how to clear the counter.

D Select the user code to clear.
E To clear the number of prints made under a user code, select the user code
from the left side of the display.
Press [Select All on the Page] to select all user codes on the page.
F Press [Clear] under Per User.

G Select the function usage you want to clear from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter],[Fax Counter], and [Scanner Counter].
H Press [OK].
I To clear the number of prints for all user codes, press [Clear] under All Users.
J Select the function usage you want to clear from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter],[Fax Counter], and [Scanner Counter].
K Press [OK].
222
Fax Destination
Fax Destination
Register a fax destination so you do not need to enter fax numbers each time, and
can send documents that have been scanned in using the facsimile function.
It is easy to select the fax destination if you register "Name" and "Key Display"
for the fax destination.
You can register fax destinations as a group. For details about registering a
group, see "Registering Names to a Group".
You can register fax destinations by selecting them from redial function.
Registered Fax numbers can be used as sender's Fax numbers.
There are two types of fax destination, as shown below:
Fax Destination
Select this to send the fax over the telephone network.
IP-Fax
Select this to send the fax to a machine on a TCP/IP network.
You cannot send the fax to a machine on another network if that network is
behind a firewall.
You can program the following items in a fax destination:
Fax number
Registers the destination's fax number. You can enter a fax number using up
to 128 digits. You must include every digit in the number.
SUB Code
Registering a SUB Code allows you to use Confidential Transmission to send
messages to the other fax machines which support a similar function called
"SUB Code". See "SUB Code", Facsimile Reference.
SEP Code
Registering a SEP Code allows you to use Polling Reception to receive faxes
from the other fax machines which support Polling Reception. See "SEP
Code", Facsimile Reference.
Line
If the optional extra G3 interface unit is installed, you can select the line type
per destination.
International TX mode
When setting the International TX mode to [On], the machine transmits more
carefully by lowering transmission speed. However, communication times
increase.
Fax header
You can select to print a fax header on fax messages the other party receives.
The default is "1st Name".
223
Label insertion
Use label insertion to print information such as the destination name on the
sheet printed out at the destination.
Data is printed as follows:
Destination Name
The destination name specified in [Fax Destination] is printed with "To" before it at the top of the sheet.
Standard Message
A registered two-line sentence is printed under "Destination Name".
To use this function, set Label Insertion to [On] when programming fax destinations and also press [Label Insertion] when sending fax documents.
Fax header and label insertion are also printed when sending by e-mail using
the fax function.
You can program a standard message other than those registered in the machine. See "Programming, Changing, and Deleting Standard Messages", Facsimile Reference
You can program the following items in an IP-Fax Destination:
IP-Fax
Register the IP-Fax destination. You can register the name using up to 128
characters. You must make this setting when using IP-Fax.
This setting only works if the IP-Fax function has been selected.
SUB Code
Registering a SUB Code allows you to use Confidential Transmission to send
messages to the other fax machines which support a similar function called
"SUB Code". See "SUB Code", Facsimile Reference.
SEP Code
Registering a SEP Code allows you to use Polling Reception to receive faxes
from the other fax machines which support Polling Reception. See "SEP
Code", Facsimile Reference.
Select Protocol
Select the protocol for the IP-Fax transmission.
This setting only works if the IP-Fax function has been selected.
Reference
224
Fax Destination
Fax Destination
This section describes how to register a fax number.
Registering a Fax Destination

E Select the name whose fax destination you want to register. Press the name
key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
F Press [Fax Dest.].

G Enter the fax number using the number keys, and then press [OK] under
Facsimile No..
H Specify optional settings such as "SUB Code", "SEP Code", and "International TX mode".
225
I Press [OK].
Note
When a group is registered, you can also add this fax destination to the group.
For details about registering groups, see "Registering Names to a Group".
To register the name, see "Registering Names".

Reference
p.227 Using a Fax Destination as a sender

p.227 To change the line
p.228 To change the SUB Code
p.228 To change the SEP Code
p.228 To set the International TX Mode
p.228 To select the fax header
p.229 To set label insertion
Changing a Fax Destination

E Select the name whose fax destination you want to change.
226

G Change the settings.
Fax Destination
H Press [OK].
Note
Reference
p.227 To change the fax number

p.227 To change the line
p.228 To change the SUB Code
p.228 To change the SEP Code
p.228 To set the International TX Mode
p.228 To select the fax header
p.229 To set label insertion
Using a Fax Destination as a sender
A Press [Protection].
B Press [Sender] on the right side of Use Name as.
To change the fax number
A Press [Change]under Facsimile No..

B Enter the new fax number using the number keys, and then press [OK].
To change the line
A Press [Select Line].
B Select the line, and then press [OK].

227
To change the SUB Code
A Press [Adv. Features], and then press [SUB Code].

B Press [Change] under TX SUB Code.
C Enter the new SUB Code, and then press [OK].
D To change the password, press [Change] under Password (SID).
E Enter the new password, and then press [OK].
F Press [OK].
To change the SEP Code
A Press [Adv. Features], and then press [SEP Code].

B Press [Change] under RX SEP Code.
C Enter the new SEP Code, and then press [OK].
D To change the password, press [Change] under Password (PWD).
E Enter the new password, and then press [OK].
F Press [OK].
To set the International TX Mode
A Press [Change] under International TX Mode.

B Select [Off] or [On], and then press [OK].
To select the fax header
You can register the fax header in Program Fax Information in the system settings for Facsimile Features.
A Press [Change] under Fax Header.

B Select [1st Name] or [2nd Name], and then press [OK].
Reference
p.144 Registering Fax Information
228
Fax Destination
To set label insertion

When Label Insertion is set to ON, the receiver's name and standard messages
are printed on the fax message when it is received at the other end.
A Press [Change] under Label Insertion.

B Press [On].
C Press [Change] under Line 2.
D Select the new standard message or press [Manual Entry] to enter the new
message.
E Enter the new message, and then press [OK].

F Press [OK].
G Press [Change] under Line 3.
H Select the new standard message, and then press [OK].
I Press [OK].
Note
To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered
Name".
Reference
Deleting a Fax Destination

Important
If you delete a destination that is a specified delivery destination, messages to
its registered Personal Box, for example, cannot be delivered. Be sure to check
the settings in the fax function before deleting any destinations.

229

D Press [Delete].
E Select the name whose fax destination you want to delete.

G Press [Change] under Facsimile No..
H Press [Delete All].
I Press [OK] twice.

Note
To delete the name, key display, and title, see "Deleting a Registered Name".
Reference
230
Fax Destination
IP-Fax Destination
This section describes how to register a IP-Fax destination.
Note
For details about sending an IP-Fax, "Sending by IP-Fax", Facsimile Reference.
Reference
"Sending by IP-Fax", Facsimile Reference
Registering an IP-Fax Destination

E Select the name whose IP-Fax destination you want to register.

G Press [Select Line], and then select [H.323] or [SIP].
H Press [Change] under "Fax Destination".

231
I Enter the IP-Fax destination.

J Press [OK] twice.
Note
Reference
p.215 Registering a User Code

Changing a Registered IP-Fax Destination
7
E Select the name whose IP-Fax destination you want to change.
232
Fax Destination
G Press [Change] under "Fax Destination".
H Enter the new destination, and then press [OK].

I Press [OK].
J Press [OK].
Note
Reference
Using the IPFax Destination as the sender
B Press [Sender] under [Use Name as].
To change the IP-Fax Destination
A Press [Change] under [Use Name as].

B Enter the new destination, and then press [OK].
To select the protocol

B Select [H.323] or [SIP].
233
To program the SUB Code

B Press [Change] under TX SUB Code.
C Enter the SUB Code, and then press [OK].
D To enter a password, press [Change] under Password (SID).
E Enter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
F Press [OK].
To program the SEP Code

B Press [Change] under RX SEP Code.
C Enter a SEP Code using the number keys, and then press [OK].
D To enter a password, press [Change] under Password (PWD).
E Enter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
F Press [OK].
To set the International TX Mode
A Press [Change] under International TX Mode.

B Select [Off] or [On], and then press [OK].
To select the fax header
A Press [Change] under Fax Header.

B Select [1st Name] or [2nd Name], and then press [OK].
234
Fax Destination
Deleting a Registered IP-Fax Destination

If you delete a destination that is a specified delivery destination, messages to its
registered Personal Box, for example, cannot be delivered. Be sure to check the
settings in the fax function before deleting any destinations.

D Press [Delete].
E Select the name whose IP-Fax destination you want to delete. Press the
name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.

G Press [Change] under "Fax Destination".
I Press [OK] twice.
Note
Reference
235
E-mail Destination
Register e-mail destinations so you do not need to enter an e-mail address every
time, and can send scan files from scanner or fax function by e-mail.
It is easy to select the e-mail destination if you register "Name" and "Key Display" as the e-mail destination.
You can register e-mail destinations as a group.
You can use the e-mail address as the sender's address when sending scan
files in scanner mode. If you want to do this, set a protection code on the sender address to prevent unauthorized access.
Note
You can select an e-mail address from an LDAP server, and then register it in
the Address Book. See "Sending Scan File by E-mail", Scanner Reference.
You can set the machine to send a Transmission Result Report by e-mail
whenever a transmission is sent. See Facsimile Reference You can set the machine to send a Transmission Result Report by e-mail whenever a transmission is sent. See Facsimile Reference.
Reference
Registering an E-mail Destination

E Select the name whose e-mail address you want to register. Press the name
key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
F Press [E-mail].
236
E-mail Destination
G Press [Change].
H Enter the e-mail address.
I Press [OK].
J Select [E-mail / Internet Fax Destination] or [Internet Fax Destination Only].
K If you want to use Internet fax, specify whether or not to use " Send via SMTP
Server".
L Press [OK].
Note
You can enter up to 128 characters for the e-mail address.

Reference

237
Changing an E-mail Destination

E Select the name whose e-mail address you want to change.
F Press [E-mail].
G Press [Change] under E-mail Address.
H Enter the e-mail address, and then press [OK].

I Press [OK].
Note
Reference
238
E-mail Destination
Using the e-mail address as the sender
B Press [Sender] under [Use Name as].
Deleting an E-mail Destination

D Press [Delete].
E Select the name whose e-mail address you want to delete.
F Press [E-mail].
G Press [Change] under E-mail Address.
I Press [OK] twice.
Note
Reference
239
Registering Folders
By registering a shared folder, you can send scan files to it directly.
There are three types of protocol you can use:
SMB
For sending files to shared Windows folders.
FTP
Use when sending files to an FTP server.
NCP
Use when sending files to an Net- Ware server.
Note
For details about protocols, server names, and folder levels, consult your network administrator.
You can prevent unauthorized users from accessing folders from the machine. See "Registering a Protection Code".
You can only select either SMB, FTP, or NCP. If you change protocol after finishing your settings, all previous entries are cleared.
Using SMB to Connect
Note
To register a folder in an FTP server, see "Using FTP to Connect".
To register a folder in an NetWare server, see "Using NCP to Connect".

Reference
p.246 Using FTP to Connect
p.251 Using NCP to Connect
Registering an SMB Folder
240
Registering Folders

E Select the name whose folder you want to register. Press the name key, or
enter the registered number using the number keys.
F Press [Auth. Info], and then press [Next].
G Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of Folder Authentication.
H Press [Change] under Login User Name.
I Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].
J Press [Change] under Login Password.
K Enter the password, and then press [OK].
L Enter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].
M Press [Folder].
N Press [SMB].
O Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.

P Press [Exit].
Q Press [OK].
241
R Press [Exit].
Note
You can enter up to 64 characters for the user name.

You can enter up to 64 characters for the password.
You can enter a path using up to 128 characters.
To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the
folder by browsing the network.
If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.
When [Do not Specify] is selected, the SMB User Name and SMB Password
that you have specified in Default User Name / Password (Send) of File
Transfer settings applies.
If User Authentication is specified, contact your administrator.
Reference
p.242 To locate the SMB folder manually

p.243 To locate the SMB folder using Browse Network
To locate the SMB folder manually
A Press [Change] under Path.

B Enter the path where the folder is located.
C Press [OK].
If the format of the entered path is not correct, a message appears. Press [Exit],
and then enter the path again.
Note
Enter the path using this format: "\\ServerName\Share- Name\PathName".
You can also enter an IPv4 address.

242
Registering Folders
To locate the SMB folder using Browse Network
A Press [Browse Network].

The client computers sharing the same network as the machine appear.
Network display only lists client computers you are authorized to access.
B Select a client computer.

Shared folders under it appear.
You can press [Up One Level] to switch between levels.
C Select the folder you want to register.

D [OK].
If a Login Screen Appears

This section explains how to log on to the machine if the login screen appears
when you try to access a folder by browsing the network.
If you have not specified folder authentication, or if an incorrect user name or
password has been entered for folder authentication, the login screen appears.
A Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].

Enter the login user name specified for folder authentication.
B Enter the password, and then press [OK].

The path to the selected folder appears.
If a message appears, press [Exit], and then enter the login user name and
password again.
243
Changing an SMB Folder

E Select the name whose folder you want to change.
F Press [Folder].
G Select the items you want to change.
When specifying a folder, enter the path directly or select it by referencing the
network. For more information, see "To locate the folder manually" and "Using Browse Network to locate the folder".
H Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.

I Press [OK].
J Press [Exit].
Note
Reference
244
Registering Folders
To change the protocol
A Press [FTP] or [NCP].
B A confirmation message appears. Press [Yes].

Changing the protocol will clear all settings made under the previous protocol.
C Enter each item again.

Reference
p.246 Registering an FTP Folder
Deleting an SMB registered folder
A [System Settings].

D Press [Delete].
E Select the name whose folder you want to delete.
F Press [Folder].
245
G Press the protocol which is not currently selected.

A confirmation message appears.
H Press [Yes].
I Press [OK].
J Press [Exit].
Note
Reference
Using FTP to Connect

Note
To register a shared folder configured in Windows, see "Using SMB to Connect".
To register a folder in an NetWare server, see "Using NCP to Connect".

Reference
p.240 Using SMB to Connect
p.251 Using NCP to Connect
Registering an FTP Folder

E Select the name whose folder you want to register.
246
Registering Folders

M Press [Folder].
N Press [FTP].
7
O Press [Change] under Server Name.
P Enter the server name, and then press [OK].
Q Press [Change] under Path.
R Enter the path.
S Press [OK].
T Press [Change] under "Port No."
U Enter Port No..
V Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
W Press [Exit].
X Press [OK].
247
Y Press [Exit].
Note

You can enter a server name using up to 64 characters.
You can enter an absolute path, using this format: "/user/ home/username"; or a relative path, using this format: "directory/sub-directory".
If you leave the path blank, the login directory is assumed to be the current
working directory.
You can also enter an IPv4 address.
To change the port number, press [Change] under Port No.. Enter the port
number using the number keys, and then press {q}.
You can enter 1 to 65535.
When [Do not Specify] is selected, the FTP User Name and FTP Password
Transfer settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".
Reference
p.242 To locate the SMB folder manually

p.243 To locate the SMB folder using Browse Network
Changing an FTP Folder
248

Registering Folders

E Select the name whose folder you want to change, and then press [Folder].
F Press [Folder].
G Select the items you want to change.
H Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
I Press [OK].
J Press [Exit].
Note
Reference
A Press [SMB], or [NCP].


Reference
p.240 Registering an SMB Folder
249
Changing items under FTP
A Press [Change] under Port No.

B Enter the new port number, and then press {q}.
C Press [Change] under Server Name.
D Enter the new server name, and then press [OK].
E Press [Change] under "Path".
F Enter the new path, and then press [OK].
Deleting an FTP Folder
7
D Press [Delete].
E Select the name whose folder you want to delete.
F Press [Folder].
H Press [Yes].
I Press [OK].
250
Registering Folders
J Press [Exit].
Note
To delete a name entirely, see "Deleting a Registered Name".
Reference
Using NCP to Connect

Note
To register a shared folder configured in Windows, see "Using SMB to Connect"
To register a folder in an FTP server, see "Using FTP to Connect"

Reference
p.240 Using SMB to Connect
p.246 Using FTP to Connect
Registering an NCP Folder

E Press the name you want to register or enter the registered number using
the number keys.


251

M Press [Folder].
N Press [NCP].
O Select "Connection Type".
If you want to specify a folder in an NDS tree, press [NDS]. If you want to specify a folder on a NetWare server, press [Bindery].
P Specify the folder.

Q Press [OK].
R Press [Exit].
Note

If you have set "Connection Type" to [NDS], enter the user name followed
by the name of the context where the user object is located. If the user name
is "user" and the context name is "context", enter "user.context"
To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the
folder by browsing the network.
When [Do not Specify] is selected, the NCP User Name and NCP Password
Transfer settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".
Reference
p.253 To locate the NCP folder manually

p.253 To locate the NCP folder using Browse Network
252
Registering Folders
To locate the NCP folder manually
A Press [Change] under Path.

B Enter the path where the folder is located.
C [OK].
D Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
E Press [Exit].
Note
If you set "Connection Type" to [NDS], and if the NDS tree name is "tree",
the name of the context including the volume is "context", the volume
name is "volume" and the folder name is "folder", then the path will be
"\\tree\volume. context\folder".
If you set "Connection Type" to [Bindery], and if the NetWare server name
is "server", the volume name is "volume" and the folder name is "folder",
then the path will be "\\server\volume\folder".
To locate the NCP folder using Browse Network
A Press [Browse Network].

B If you have set "Connection Type" to [NDS], a list of items in the NDS tree
appears. If you have set "Connection Type" to [Bindery], a list of items on the
NetWare server appears.
C Search for the destination folder in the NDS tree or NetWare server.
You can press [Up One Level] to switch between levels.
D Select the folder you want to register.

E [OK].
Note
Only the folders you are allowed to access appear in [Browse Network].
If the languages used on the machine and the destination you want to view
differ, the items in the list may not appear correctly.
Up to 100 items can be displayed in the list.
253
Changing an NCP registered folder

E Select the user of the registered folder you want to change.
F Press [Folder].
G Select "Connection Type".
If you want to specify a folder in an NDS tree, press [NDS]. If you want to specify a folder on a NetWare server, press [Bindery].
H Specify the folder.

To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the folder
by browsing the network.
I Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.

J Press [OK].
K Press [Exit].
Note
Reference
254
Registering Folders
A Press [SMB], or [FTP].


Reference
p.240 Registering an SMB Folder
p.246 Registering an FTP Folder
Deleting an NCP Folder
7
D Press [Delete].
E Select a user of the folder you want to delete.
F Press [Folder].
H Press [Yes].
I Press [OK].
255
J [Exit].
Note
To delete a name entirely, see Deleting a Registered Name".
Reference
256
Registering Names to a Group

You can register names to a group to enable easy management of e-mail addresses
and folders for each group.
To add names to a group, the groups must be registered beforehand.
Important
When using Scan to Folder function, you cannot send scan files to a group
with over 50 folders registered.
The maximum number of destinations registerable to a group is 500.

Note
You can set a protection code to prevent unauthorized access to the folders
registered in a group. For details, see "Registering a Protection Code".
Reference
Registering a Group

C Press [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].
E Press [New Program].
257
F Press [Change] under Group Name.
G Enter the group name, and then press [OK].

The Key Display name is set automatically.
H Press the title key under Select Title, if necessary.

The keys you can select are as follows:
[Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.
[AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]
Added to the list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Frequent] and one more page for each title.
I When you want to change the key display, press [Change] under Key Dis-
play. Enter the key display, and then press [OK].
J Press [OK].
Reference

You can put names that have been registered in the Address Book into a group.
When registering new names, you can also register groups at the same time.
258

E Select the name to register in a group.
F Press [Add to Group].

G Select a group to which you want to add the name to.
The group key that you have selected becomes highlighted, and the name is
added to it.
H Press [OK].
259
Adding a Group to Another Group

You can add a group to another group.

E Select the group that you want to put into another group.
Press the group key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
260
G Select the group which you want to add to.
The group key that you have selected becomes highlighted, and the group is
added to it.
H Press [OK].
Displaying Names Registered in a Group
You can check the names or groups registered in each group.

261
E Select the group where the members you want to check is registered.
F Press [Programmed User/Group].

All the names registered will be displayed.
G Press [OK].
Removing a Name from a Group

E Select the name to remove from a group.
262
G Select the group from which you want to remove the name.
The group key that you have selected becomes highlighted, and the name is
added to it.
H Press [OK].
7
Deleting a Group Within Another Group

263
E Select the group that you want to delete from.

Press the group key, or enter the registered number during the number keys.

The keys of groups in which the group is registered appear highlighted.
G Select the group that you want to delete from.
The group key is deselected and the group is deleted from it.
H [OK].
264
Changing a Group Name

E Press the group key you want to change.
F To change the group name and key display, press [Change] under Group
Name or Key Display.
G Enter the new group name or key display, and then press [OK].
H To change the title, press the title key under Select Title.
I To change the registration number, press [Change] under Registration No..
J Enter the new registration number using the number keys.
K Press the {q} key.
L Press [OK].
265
Deleting a Group

D Press [Delete].
E Press [Yes].
F Press a group key you want to delete.
G Press [Yes].
266
Registering a Protection Code

You can stop sender's names or folders being accessed by setting a protection
code.
You can use this function to protect the following:
Folders
You can prevent unauthorized access to folders.
Sender's names
You can prevent misuse of sender's names.
Reference
Registering a Protection Code to a Single User

E Select the name whose protection code you want to register.
267
F Press [Protection].
G Press [Destination] or [Sender] under Use Name as.
Both [Destination] and [Sender] can be selected at the same time.
H Press [Change] under Protection Code.

I Enter a protection code using the number keys, and then press {q}.
J Press [OK].
K Press [Exit].
Note
Specify a protection code of up to eight digits. You can also specify "Protection" without specifying a protection code.
268
Registering a Protection Code to a Group User

E Press the group key you want to register or enter the registered number using the number keys.
G Press [Folder Destination] under Protection Object.
H Press [Change] under Protection Code.
I Enter a protection code using the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
J Press [OK].
K Press [Exit].
Note
Specify a protection code of up to eight digits. You can also specify "Protection" without specifying a protection code.
269
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication

SMTP Authentication
For each user registered in the Address Book, you can register a login user name
and login password to be used when accessing an SMTP server.
To use an SMTP server, you need to program it beforehand.
Important
When [Do not Specify] is selected for SMTP Authentication, the User Name and
Password that you have specified in SMTP Authentication of File Transfer
settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".
7
the number keys


G Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of SMTP Authentication.
270

M [OK].
Note

When using POP before SMTP Authentication, you can enter up to 63 characters.
To change the SMTP Authentication settings, repeat stepB to M.
Reference
p.14 Network Settings

271
LDAP Authentication
For each user registered in the Address Book, you can register a login user name
and login password to be used when accessing an LDAP server.
To use an LDAP server, you need to program it beforehand. For details, see
"LDAP Server Settings", Network Guide.
Important
When [Do not Specify] is selected for LDAP Authentication, the User Name
and Password that you have specified in Program / Change LDAP Server of
Administrator Tools settings applies. For details, see "LDAP Server Settings".

the number keys.

G Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of LDAP Authentication.
272

M Press [OK].
Note
To register the name, see "Registering Names".
When [Do not Specify] is selected for LDAP Authentication, the User Name
and Password that you have specified in Program / Change LDAP Server
of Administrator Tools settings applies.
To change the LDAP Authentication settings, repeat stepB to M.
Reference
273
274
8. Other User Tools

Initial settings allow you switch the language as well as checking the number of
printed papers by displaying the counter. For details on how to access respective
settings, see "Accessing User Tools (System Settings)".
Maintenance
This section describes the user tools in Maintenance.
[Maintenance] allows color drift and gradient correction.
Auto Color Calibration

If a certain color is strong or the color of the copy differs from the original, adjust
the yellow, magenta, cyan and black balance.
Color Registration
If the color documents show registration shifting, perform automatic color
registration.
Note
For details about "Auto Color Calibration" and "Color Registration", see "Maintenance", Troubleshooting.
Reference
"Maintenance", Troubleshooting
275
Other User Tools
Changing the Display Language

You can change the language used on the display. English is set as default.
A Press [Espaol].
The language is changed to Spanish.
B Press [Salir].
8
The menu appears in Spanish.
Reference
276
Inquiry
Inquiry
The inquiry function lets you check the telephone numbers to contact for repairs,
or ordering consumables such as toner. Be sure to contact your service engineer
to verify the following:
Consumables
Telephone No. to order
Toner
Staple
Staple (Center)
TX Stamp Name
Machine Maintenance/Repair
Telephone No.
Serial No. of Machine
Sales Representative
Telephone No.
A Press [Inquiry].
Inquiry information appears.
B Press [Print Inquiry List].
277
Other User Tools
C Press the {Start} key.

Inquiry information prints out.
D Press [Exit] twice.

Reference
278
Counter
Counter
Displaying the Total Counter
You can display the total counter value used for all functions.
A Press [Counter].
B To print a counter list, press [Print Counter List].
8
A counter list prints out.
Reference
279
Other User Tools
280
9. Appendix
Specifications for the Main Unit
Configuration:
Desktop
Photosensitivity type:
OPC drum
Original scanning:
One-dimensional solid scanning system through CCD
Copy process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system
Development:
Dry two-component magnetic brush development system
Fusing:
Oilless belt fusing
Resolution:
600 dpi
Exposure glass:
Stationary original exposure type
Original reference position:
Rear left corner
Warm-up time:
Type 1: 25 seconds or less (23C)
Type 2: 29 seconds or less (23C)
Originals:
Sheet/book/objects
Maximum original size:
A3L, 11"17"L
281
Appendix
Copy paper size:

Trays: A3L-A5K, 11"17"L-71/4"101/2"L
Bypass:A3L-A6L, 11"17"L-71/4"101/2"L
Bypass (custom size): Vertical: 90.0-305.0mm, 3.55"-12.00" Horizontal:
148.0-600.0mm, 5.83"-23.62"
Duplex: A3L-A5K, 11"17"L-101/2"L
LCT: A4K, 81/2"11"K
Paper weight:
Paper Tray: 60-216g/m2, 16-57lb.
Bypass: 60-253g/m2, 16-67lb.
Duplex: 64-169g/m2, 17-45lb.
Non-reproduction area:
Leading edge: 51mm
Trailing edge: 21mm
Left edge: 21mm
Right edge: 21mm
First copy time:
Type 1:
Color: 8 seconds or less
B&W: 4.9 seconds or less
Type 2:
Color: 7 seconds or less
B&W: 4.5 seconds or less
Copying speed: (Type 1) Full Color / B&W

35/35 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2"11"K)
Copying speed: (Type 2) Full Color / B&W
40/45 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2"11"K)
282
Reproduction ratio:
Preset reproduction ratios:
Enlargement
Metric version
Inch version
400%
400%
200%
200%
141%
155%
122%
129%
115%
121%
Full size
Metric version
Inch version
100%
100%
Reduction
Metric version
Inch version
93%
93%
82%
85%
75%
78%
71%
73%
65%
65%
50%
50%
25%
25%
Zoom: From 25 to 400% in increments of 1%
Maximum continuous copy run:

999 sheets
Paper capacity:
Tray1,2: 550 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
Bypass tray: 100 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
283
Appendix
Power consumption:
Main unit only
Complete system
Warm-up
about 1.44 kW
about 1.44 kW
Stand-by
about 250W
about 280 kW
During printing
about 1.2 kW
about 1.3 kW
Maximum
about 1.44 kW
about 1.44 kW
The complete system consists of the main unit, booklet finisher, large capacity
tray, file format converter, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) interface unit, and
USB Host interface unit.
Dimensions (W D H up to exposure glass):

670670760mm, 26.8"26.8"30.4"
Space for main unit (W D):
Type 1,2: 910670mm, 36.4"26.8"
Noise emission:
Sound power level:
Main unit only
Type 1
Type 2
Stand-by
less than 44 dB(A)
less than 44 dB(A)
Copying
less than 66 dB(A)
less than 67 dB(A)
Type 1
Type 2
Stand-by
less than 45 dB(A)
less than 45 dB(A)
Copying
less than 71 dB(A)
less than 71 dB(A)
Type 1
Type 2
Stand-by
less than 32 dB(A)
less than 32 dB(A)
Copying
less than 52 dB(A)
less than 53 dB(A)
Complete system
Sound pressure level:

Main unit only
284
Complete system
Type 1
Type 2
Stand-by
less than 33 dB(A)
less than 33 dB(A)
Copying
less than 61 dB(A)
less than 61 dB(A)
Sound power level and sound pressure level are actual values measured in accordance with ISO 7779.
Sound power level and sound pressure level are measured from the position of the bystander.
The complete system consists of the main unit, auto document feeder, 2
tray paper unit, bridge unit, booklet finisher, and punch kit for the
booklet finisher.
Weight:
Type 1, 2: Approx. 110 kg, 242lb.
HDD:
80 GB or more
Capacity for Document Server
36 GB
Capacity for memory sorting
14-16 MB
Capacity for others
8.7 GB or more
285
Appendix
Specifications for Options

Exposure Glass Cover
Lower this over originals for copying.
Auto Document Feeder
Lower this over originals for copying.
Mode:
ADF mode, Batch mode, SADF mode, Mixed Size mode, Custom Size
Originals mode, Auto detect (A4, 81/2"11")
Original size:
A3L-B6JISKL
Vertical: 128-297mm, 5.1"-11.7"
Horizontal: 128-432mm, 5.1"-17.3"
Maximum number of originals:
100 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
Dimensions (WDH):
570520135mm, 22.8"20.8"5.4"
Weight:
Approx. 12kg, 26.4lb.
286
1000-sheet Finisher
Finisher Upper Tray:
Paper siez:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 12"18"L,
11"17"L, 81/2"14"L, 81/2"11"KL, 81/2"51/2"KL
Paper weight:
52-260g/m2, 14-69lb.
Stack capacity:
250 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 81/2"11"KL,
81/2"51/2"KL
50 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, 12"18"L, 11"17"L, 81/2"14"L
Finisher Shift Tray:
Paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, 12"18"L, 11"17"L,
81/2"14"L, 81/2"11"KL, 81/2"51/2"KL
Paper weight:
52-163g/m2, 1443lb.
Stack capacity:
No Staple:
1,000 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, 81/2"11"KL, 81/2"51/2"KL
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
Staple:
2-9 sheets: 100 sets (A4K, 81/2"11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
10-50 sheets:10020 sets (A4K, 81/2"11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
2-9 sheets: 100 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
10-50 sheets: 50-10 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
2-9 sheets: 50 sets (A3L, B4JISL, 12"18"L, 11"17"L, 81/2"14"L)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
10-30 sheets: 50-10 sets (A3L, B4JISL, 12"18"L, 11"17"L, 81/2"14"L)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
Staple capacity:
2-30 sheets: A3L B4JISL, 12"18"L, 11"17"L, 81/2"14"L
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
2-50 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, 81/2"11"KL (80g/m2, 20lb.)
Staple paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, 12"18"L, 11"17"L, 81/2"14"L,
81/2"11"KL
Staple paper weight:
64-90g/m2, 16-24lb.
Staple position
1 staples - 2 positions
Power consumption:
50W (power is supplied from the main unit)
Dimensions (WDH)
520520790mm, 20.8"20.8"31.6"
Weight:
Approx. 25kg, 55lb.
3000-sheet Finisher
Paper siez:
11"17"L, 81/2"14"L, 81/2"11"KL, 81/2"51/2"L
Paper weight:
52-163g/m2, 14-43lb.
Stack capacity:
81/2"51/2"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
287
Appendix
288

Paper size:
11"17"L, 81/2"14"L, 81/2"11"KL, 81/2"51/2"L
Paper weight:
52-256g/m2, 1468lb.
Stack capacity:
No Staple:
3,000 sheets: A4K, 81/2"11"K (80g/m2, 20lb.)
1,500 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, A4L, B5JISKL, 12"18"L, 11"17"L,
81/2"14"L, 81/2"11"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)
500 sheets: A5K (80g/m2, 20lb.)
100 sheets: A5L, B6JISL, A6L, 81/2"51/2"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)
Staple:
20-50 sheets: 150-60(A4K, 81/2"11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
15-50 sheets:100-30 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
Staple capacity:
Without Mixed Size:
50 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, 81/2"11"KL (80g/m2, 20lb.)
30 sheets: A3L B4JISL, 12"18"L, 11"17"L, 81/2"14"L
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
With Mixed Size:
30 sheets (A3L / A4K, B4JISL / B5JISK, 11"17"L / 81/2"11"K)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
Staple paper size:
81/2"11"KL
64-90g/m2, 17-24lb.
Staple position
Power consumption:
Dimensions (WDH)
657613960mm, 26.3"24.5"38.4"
Weight:
Approx. 54kg, 119lb.
Booklet Finisher
Paper siez:
11"17"L, 81/2"14"L, 81/2"11"KL, 81/2"51/2"L
Paper weight:
52-163g/m2, 14-43lb.
Stack capacity:
81/2"51/2"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
Paper size:
11"17"L, 81/2"14"L, 81/2"11"KL, 81/2"51/2"L
Paper weight:
52-256g/m2, 1467lb.
Stack capacity:
No Staple:
2,000 sheets: A4K, 81/2"11"K (80g/m2, 20lb.)
1,000 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, A4L, B5JISKL, 12"18"L, 11"17"L,
81/2"14"L, 81/2"11"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)
500 sheets: A5K (80g/m2, 20lb.)
100 sheets: A5L, B6JISL, A6L, 81/2"51/2"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)
Staple:
13-50 sheets: 150-40(A4K, 81/2"11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
10-50 sheets:100-20 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
289
Appendix
Staple capacity:
Without Mixed Size:
50 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, 81/2"11"KL (80g/m2, 20lb.)
30 sheets: A3L B4JISL, 12"18"L, 11"17"L, 81/2"14"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)
With Mixed Size:
30 sheets (A3L / A4K, B4JISL / B5JISK, 11"17"L / 81/2"11"K)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
Staple paper size:
81/2"11"KL
64-90g/m2, 17-24lb.
Staple position
Saddle stitch
Paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4L, B5JISL, 12"18"L, 11"17"L, 81 /2"14"L,
81/2"11"L
Saddle stitching capacity:
2-15 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
Stack capacity:
2-5 sheets: 30 sets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
6-10 sheets: 15 sets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
11-15 sheets: 10 sets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
Folding:
Center folding
Paper weight:
64-90g/m2, 17-24lb.
Position:
1 position
Power consumption:
Dimensions (WDH)
657613960mm, 26.3"24.5"38.4"
Weight:
290
Punch Kit (3000-sheet Finisher / Booklet Finisher)

Paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, 11"17"L, 81/2"14"L,
81/2"11"KL, 81/2"51/2"KL
Paper weight:
52-163g/m2, 14-43.4lb.
Weight:
Approx. 2kg, 4.4lb.
2 Tray Paper Unit
Paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5K, 11"17"L, 8 1 / 2 "14"L,
81/2"11"KL, 81/4"14"L, 71/4"101/2"KL, 8"13"L, 81/2"13"L,
81/4"13"L, 8KL, 16KKL
Paper weight:
60-216g/m2, 16-57lb.
Paper capacity:
1,100 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.) 2 trays
Power consumption:
Maximum 50W (power is supplied from the main unit)
Dimensions (WDH):
580620260mm, 22.9"24.5"10.3"
Weight:
Approx. 25kg 55.2lb.
Large Capacity Tray
Paper size:
A4K, 81/2"11"K
Paper weight:
60-105g/m2, 16-28lb.
Paper capacity:
2,000 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
Power consumption:
Maximum 50W (power is supplied from the main unit)
Dimensions (WDH, option unit):
580620260mm, 22.9"24.5"10.3"
Weight:
Bridge Unit
Dimensions:
415412111mm, 16.4"16.3"4.4"
Weight:
Approx. 5kg, 11lb.
291
Appendix
Information about Installed Software

expat
The software including controller, etc. (hereinafter "software") installed on

this product uses the expat under the conditions mentioned below.
The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the software of
the product including the expat, and the product manufacturer makes the initial developer and copyright holder of the expat, free from these obligations.
Information relating to the expat is available at:
http://expat.sourceforge.net/
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Centre, Ltd. and Clark
Cooper.
Copyright 2001, 2002 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
NetBSD
1. Copyright Notice of NetBSD
For all users to use this product:
This product contains NetBSD operating system:
For the most part, the software constituting the NetBSD operating system is not
in the public domain; its authors retain their copyright.
The following text shows the copyright notice used for many of the NetBSD
source code. For exact copyright notice applicable for each of the files/binaries,
the source code tree must be consulted.
A full source code can be found at http://www.netbsd.org/.
292 Copyright 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
A Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
B Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
C All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgment:
This product includes software developed by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
and its contributors.
D Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND
CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
2.Authors Name List
All product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners.
The following notices are required to satisfy the license terms of the software
that we have mentioned in this document:
This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Berkeley and its contributors.
This product includes software developed by Jonathan R. Stone for the NetBSD Project.
This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
and its contributors.
This product includes software developed by Manuel Bouyer.
This product includes software developed by Charles Hannum.
This product includes software developed by Charles M. Hannum.
This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou.
This product includes software developed by TooLs GmbH.
This product includes software developed by Terrence R. Lambert.
293
Appendix
This product includes software developed by Adam Glass and Charles Hannum.
This product includes software developed by Theo de Raadt.
This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone and Jason R.
Thorpe for the NetBSD Project.
This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors.
This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.
This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou for
the NetBSD Project.
This product includes software developed by Paul Kranenburg.
This product includes software developed by Adam Glass.
This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone.
This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone for the NetBSD
Project.
This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.
This product includes software developed by Frank van der Linden for the
NetBSD Project.
This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Frank
van der Linden
This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Jason R.
Thorpe.
The software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
This product includes software developed by Chris Provenzano, the University of California, Berkeley, and contributors.
Sablotron
294
Sablotron (Version 0.82) Copyright 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved
a) The application software installed on this product includes the Sablotron software
Version 0.82 (hereinafter, "Sablotron 0.82"), with modifications made by the product
manufacturer. The original code of the Sablotron 0.82 is provided by Ginger Alliance Ltd., the initial developer, and the modified code of the Sablotron 0.82 has been
derived from such original code provided by Ginger Alliance Ltd.
b) The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the application
software of this product including the Sablotron 0.82 as modified, and the product manufacturer makes Ginger Alliance Ltd., the initial developer of the Sablotron 0.82, free from these obligations.
c) The Sablotron 0.82 and the modifications thereof are made available under the
terms of Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (hereinafter, "MPL 1.1"), and the application software of this product constitutes the "Larger Work" as defined in MPL 1.1.
The application software of this product except for the Sablotron 0.82 as modified is
licensed by the product manufacturer under separate agreement(s).
d) The source code of the modified code of the Sablotron 0.82 is available at: http://support-download.com/services/device/sablot/notice082.html
e) The source code of the Sablotron software is available at: http://www.gingerall.com
f) MPL 1.1 is available at: http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/MPL-1.1.html
JPEG LIBRARY
The software installed on this product is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
SASL
CMU libsasl
Tim Martin
Rob Earhart
Rob Siemborski
Copyright (c) 2001 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.
A Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
B Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
C The name "Carnegie Mellon University" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission.
For permission or any other legal details, please contact:
Office of Technology Transfer

Carnegie Mellon University
5000 Forbes Avenue
Pittsburgh, PA 15213-3890
(412) 268-4387, fax: (412) 268-7395
tech-transfer@andrew.cmu.edu
Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by Computing Services at Carnegie Mellon University (http://www.cmu.edu/computing/)."
295
Appendix
CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH

REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL CARNEGIE
MELLON UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
MD4
Copyright (C) 1990-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as
the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material
mentioning or referencing this software or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such
works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 MessageDigest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular
purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation
and/or software.
MD5
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as
the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material
mentioning or referencing this software or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such
works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 MessageDigest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular
296 purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation
and/or software.
Samba(Ver 3.0.4)
For SMB transmission, this machine uses Samba ver 3.0.4 (hereinafter referred to
as Samba 3.0.4).
Copyright Andrew Tridgell 1994-1998
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
Note
The source code for SMB transmission by this machine can be downloaded
from the following website:
http://support-download.com/services/scbs
RSA BSAFE
9
This product includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security Inc.
RSA and BSAFE are registered trademarks of RSA Security Inc. in the United
States and/or other countries.
RSA Security Inc. All rights reserved.
297
Appendix
Open SSL
Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may
"OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the
OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT `ÀS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
298
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found
in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL
code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software
are publicly available on the Internet and at any major bookstore, scientific library, and patent office worldwide. More information can be found e.g. at "http://www.cs.hut.fi/crypto".
The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions
and restrictions. Use only at your own responsibility. You will be responsible for
any legal consequences yourself; I am not making any claims whether possessing or using this is legal or not in your country, and I am not taking any responsibility on your behalf.
NO WARRANTY
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE
OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
299
Appendix
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO

IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY
WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE
OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN
IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
2)
The 32-bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack.c was contributed by
CORE SDI S.A. under a BSD-style license.
Cryptographic attack detector for ssh - source code
Copyright (c) 1998 CORE SDI S.A., Buenos Aires, Argentina.
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that this copyright notice is retained.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDI S.A. BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR MISUSE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Ariel Futoransky <futo@core-sdi.com>
<http://www.core-sdi.com>
3)
One component of the ssh source code is under a 3-clause BSD license, held by
the University of California, since we pulled these parts from original Berkeley
code.
Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1992, 1993, 1995
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
300
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
`ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
4)
Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard 2-term
BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders:
Markus Friedl
Theo de Raadt
Niels Provos
Dug Song
Kevin Steves
Daniel Kouril
Wesley Griffin
Per Allansson
Jason Downs
Solar Designer
Todd C. Miller
301
Appendix
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
5)
Portable OpenSSH contains the following additional licenses:
c) Compatibility code (openbsd-compat)
Apart from the previously mentioned licenses, various pieces of code in the
openbsd-compat/ subdirectory are licensed as follows:
Some code is licensed under a 3-term BSD license, to the following copyright
holders:
Todd C. Miller
Theo de Raadt
Damien Miller
Eric P. Allman
The Regents of the University of California
302

Open SSH
The licences which components of this software fall under are as follows. First,
we will summarize and say that all components are under a BSD licence, or a licence more free than that.
OpenSSH contains no GPL code.
1)
Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <ylo@cs.hut.fi>, Espoo, Finland All rights reserved
As far as I am concerned, the code I have written for this software can be used
freely for any purpose. Any derived versions of this software must be clearly
marked as such, and if the derived work is incompatible with the protocol description in the RFC file, it must be called by a name other than "ssh" or "Secure
Shell".
[Tatu continues]
However, I am not implying to give any licenses to any patents or copyrights
held by third parties, and the software includes parts that are not under my direct control. As far as I know, all included source code is used in accordance with
the relevant license agreements and can be used freely for any purpose (the
GNU license being the most restrictive); see below for details.
[However, none of that term is relevant at this point in time. All of these restrictively licenced software components which he talks about have been removed
from OpenSSH, i.e.,
- RSA is no longer included, found in the OpenSSL library
- IDEA is no longer included, its use is deprecated
303
Appendix
- DES is now external, in the OpenSSL library

- GMP is no longer used, and instead we call BN code from OpenSSL
- Zlib is now external, in a library
- The make-ssh-known-hosts script is no longer included
- TSS has been removed
- MD5 is now external, in the OpenSSL library
- RC4 support has been replaced with ARC4 support from OpenSSL
- Blowfish is now external, in the OpenSSL library
[The licence continues]
Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software
are publicly available on the Internet and at any major bookstore, scientific library, and patent office worldwide. More information can be found e.g. at "http://www.cs.hut.fi/crypto".
The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions
and restrictions. Use only at your own responsibility. You will be responsible for
any legal consequences yourself; I am not making any claims whether possessing or using this is legal or not in your country, and I am not taking any responsibility on your behalf.
NO WARRANTY
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE
OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
304
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO

IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY
WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE
OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN
IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
2)
The 32-bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack.c was contributed by
CORE SDI S.A. under a BSD-style license.
Cryptographic attack detector for ssh - source code
Copyright (c) 1998 CORE SDI S.A., Buenos Aires, Argentina.
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that this copyright notice is retained.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDI S.A. BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR MISUSE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Ariel Futoransky <futo@core-sdi.com>
<http://www.core-sdi.com>
3)
One component of the ssh source code is under a 3-clause BSD license, held by
the University of California, since we pulled these parts from original Berkeley
code.
Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1992, 1993, 1995
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
305
Appendix
4)
Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard 2-term
BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders:
Markus Friedl
Theo de Raadt
Niels Provos
Dug Song
Kevin Steves
Daniel Kouril
Wesley Griffin
Per Allansson
Jason Downs
Solar Designer
Todd C. Miller
306
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
5)
Portable OpenSSH contains the following additional licenses:
c) Compatibility code (openbsd-compat)
Apart from the previously mentioned licenses, various pieces of code in the
openbsd-compat/ subdirectory are licensed as follows:
Some code is licensed under a 3-term BSD license, to the following copyright
holders:
Todd C. Miller
Theo de Raadt
Damien Miller
Eric P. Allman
The Regents of the University of California
307
Appendix

Open LDAP
The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2.8, 17 August 2003
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"), with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution, and
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.

The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. Each revision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under
terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of
the license.
308
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND

ITS CONTRIBUTORS `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP
FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S)
OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without
specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright in this Software shall at all
times remain with copyright holders.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California,
USA. All Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of
this document is granted.
309
INDEX
1 Sided to 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoB, 100
1 Sided to 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoT, 100
2 Sided Print, 128
4 Color Graphic Mode, 188
A
About Address Book, 205
Accessing User Tools, 3
A.C.S. Priority, 119
A.C.S. Sensitivity, 119
A.C.S. Sensitivity Level, 201
Address Book: Change Order, 76
Address Book: Edit Title, 76
Address Book: Program / Change /
Delete Group, 76
Address Book: Switch Title, 76
Address Book Management, 76
Adjust Color Image / Copier / Document
Server Features, 119
Adjust Sound Volume, 121
Administrator Authentication
Management, 76
Administrator's E-mail Address, 69
Administrator Tools / System Settings, 76
ADS Background (Full Color), 119
AOF (Always On), 76
Append CR to LF, 194
Authentication Information, 214, 270
Authorized Reception, 160
Auto Color Calibration, 275
Auto Continue, 189
Auto Delete File in Document Server, 76
Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs, 189
Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs, 189
Auto Erase Memory Setting, 76
Auto Image Density Priority, 91
Auto Logout Timer, 57
Auto Off Timer, 57
Auto Specify Sender Name, 69
Auto Tray Switching, 91
310
Background Density of ADS (Full Color), 201

Background Numbering, 106
Back Margin: Left / Right, 100
Back Margin: Top / Bottom, 100
Backup File TX Setting, 125
Back Up / Restore Address Book, 76
Bidirectional Communication, 63
Bidirectional SCSI print, 64
Blank Page Print, 189
Box Setting, 121
Box Setting: Print List, 121
Box Settings, 172
Bypass Tray Setting Priority, 189
C
Capture Server IP Address, 69
Center Mark, 128
Change PDF Password, 197
Changing a Fax Destination, 226
Changing a Group Name, 265
Changing an E-mail Destination, 238
Changing an FTP Folder Destination, 248
Changing a Registered Name, 212
Changing a User Code, 216
Changing Fax Number, 227
Changing the Display Language, 276
Changing the registered SMB Folder
Destination, 244
Changing the User Parameters, 158
Channel, 66
Checkered Mark, 128
Checking the Wireless LAN Connection, 12
Clearing the Counter, 222
Clearing the Number of Prints, 222
Color Profile, 196, 197
Color Registration, 275
Color Sensitivity, 119
Color Setting, 196, 197
Communication Mode, 66
Communication Page Count, 121
Compression (Black & White), 203
Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color), 203
Configuration Page, 185
Connecting the Telephone Line, 45
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface, 6
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface, 10
Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface, 9
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b
(Wireless LAN) Interface, 11
Connecting to the Interface, 5
Connecting to the USB Interface, 8
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset
Timer, 57
Copier / Document Server Features /
Adjust Color Image, 119
Edit, 100

General Features, 91
Input/Output, 116
Reproduction Ratio, 96
Stamp, 106
Copies, 189
Copy Count Display, 47
Copy on Designating Page in Combine, 100
Copy Order in Combine, 100
Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode, 91
Counter, 279
Courier Font, 194
Cover Sheet Tray, 51
Customize Function: Copier, 91
Customize Function: Document Server
Storage, 91
D
Data Format, 196
Data Security for Copying, 76
Date Stamp, 111
DDNS Configuration, 59
DDNS Configuration (IEEE 1394), 64
Default Printer Language, 189
Default User Name / Password (Send), 69
Delete All Files in Document Server, 76
Delete All Logs, 76
Delete All Stored Print Jobs, 188
Delete All Temporary Print Jobs, 188
Delete Scanner Journal, 199
Deleting a Fax Destination, 229
Deleting a Group, 266
Deleting a Group Within Another Group, 263
Deleting a NCP Folder Destination, 255
Deleting an E-mail Destination, 239
Deleting an FTP Folder Destination, 250
Deleting a Registered Name, 213
Deleting a scan size, 143
Deleting a Special Sender, 171
Deleting a User Code, 218
Deleting Fax Information, 147
Deleting Information Boxes, 179
Deleting Personal Boxes, 175
Deleting Transfer Boxes, 183
Delivery Option, 69
Density (Background Numbering), 106
Destination List Display Priority 1, 199
Destination List Display Priority 2, 199
Display/Clear/Print Counter per User, 76
Displaying Names Registered in a Group, 261
Displaying the Counter for Each User, 219

Display Panel, 2
Display/Print Counter, 76
Divide & Send E-mail, 203
DNS Configuration, 59
Document Server, 120
Domain Name, 59
Domain Name (IEEE 1394), 64
Double Copies Separation Line, 100
Duplex, 189
(Page Numbering), 113
E
Edge to Edge Print, 189
Edit / Copier / Document Server
Features, 100
Effective Protocol, 59
E-mail Communication Port, 69
E-mail Destination, 236
E-mail Information Language, 203
E-mail Reception Interval, 69
E-mail Storage in Server, 69
Enable H.323, 134
Enable SIP, 134
Energy Saver Timer, 57
Enhanced Authentication Management, 76
Erase All Memory, 76
Erase Border Width, 100
Erase Center Width, 100
Erase Original Shadow in Combine, 100
Error Log, 185
Ethernet Speed, 59
Extend A4 Width, 194
Extended Security, 76
F
Facsimile Auto Reset Timer, 57
Facsimile Features / General Features, 121
Facsimile Features / Initial Settings, 134
Facsimile Features / Reception Settings, 128
Facsimile Features / Scan Settings, 124
Facsimile Features / Send Settings, 125
Fax Destination, 223, 225
Fax E-mail Account, 69
Fax RX File Transmission, 69
File Transfer / System Settings, 69
Firmware Version, 76
Folder Destination, 240
Folder Transfer Result Report, 128
Font (Date Stamp), 111
Font Number, 194
Font (Page Numbering), 113
311
Font Pitch, 194

Font Source, 194
Format (Date Stamp), 111
Form Lines, 194
Forwarding, 128, 148, 161
Forwarding Mark, 151
Front Cover Copy in Combine, 100
Front Margin: Left / Right, 100
Front Margin: Top / Bottom, 100
Function Priority, 47
Function Reset Timer, 47
G
General Features / Copier / Document
Server Features, 91
General Features / Facsimile Features, 121
General Settings / Scanner Features, 199
General Settings / System Settings, 47
H
H.323 Settings, 134
Hex Dump, 185
High Compression PDF Level, 203
Host Interface / Printer Features, 193
Host Name, 59
Host Name (IEEE 1394), 64
I
IEEE 1394, 64
IEEE 802.11b, 13, 66
Image Repeat Separation Line, 100
Initial Print Job List, 189
Initial Settings / Facsimile Features, 134
Input/Output / Copier / Document
Server Features, 116
Input Prime, 63
Inquiry, 277
Interface Settings / System Settings, 59
Internet Fax Settings, 134
Interpreting the configuration page, 186
I/O Buffer, 193
I/O Timeout, 193
IPv4 Address (IEEE 1394), 64
IPv4 Gateway Address, 59
IPv4 over 1394, 64
IPv6 Gateway Address, 59
IPv6 Stateless Address
Autoconfiguration, 59
312
J
Job End Call, 91
Job Separation, 189
K
Key Counter Management, 76
key Repeat, 47
L
LAN Type, 59
LDAP Authentication, 272
LDAP Search, 76
Letterhead Setting, 116, 189
List / Test Print Lock, 188
M
Machine IPv4 Address, 59
Machine IPv6 Address, 59
Machine Name, 59
Maintenance, 275
Maintenance / Printer Features, 188
Max. Copy Quantity, 91
Max. E-mail Size, 125, 203
Max. Reception E-mail Size, 69
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, 116
Memory Lock, 162
Memory Lock Reception, 128
Memory Overflow, 189
Memory Usage, 189
Menu List, 185
Multiple Lists, 185
N
NCP Delivery Protocol, 59
Network, 59
Network Security Level, 76
Network Settings, 14
No. of Digits for Single Page Files, 203
Number of Scanner Resends, 69
NW Frame Type, 59
O
On Hook Mode Release Time, 121
Orientation, 194
Orientation: Booklet, Magazine, 100
Original Orientation in Duplex Mode, 91
Original Photo Type Priority, 91
Original Type Display, 91
Original Type Priority, 91
Output: Copier, 47
Output: Document Server, 47

Output: Facsimile, 47
Output: Printer, 47
Output tray settings, 50
P
Page Numbering, 113
Page Numbering Initial Letter, 113
Page Size, 189
Panel key Sound, 47
Panel Off Timer, 57
Paper Display, 91
Paper Tray, 128, 162
Paper Tray Priority: Copier, 51
Paper Tray Priority: Facsimile, 51
Paper Tray Priority: Printer, 51
Paper Type: Bypass Tray, 51
Paper Type: Tray 1-4, 51
Parallel Communication Speed, 63
Parallel Interface, 63
Parallel Timing, 63
Parameter Setting, 134
Parameter Setting: Print List, 134
Parameter Settings, 152
PCL Config./Font Page, 185
PCL Menu / Printer Features, 194
PDF Config./Font Page, 185
PDF Group Password, 197
PDF Menu / Printer Features, 197
Permit SNMPv3 Communication, 59
Permit SSL/TLS Communication, 59
Ping Command, 59
Point Size, 194
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings, 69
POP before SMTP, 69
Preset Stamp, 107
Print Address Book: Destination List, 76
Print & Delete Scanner Journal, 199
Printer Auto Reset Timer, 57
Printer Bypass Paper Size, 51
Printer Features / Host Interface, 193
Printer Features / Maintenance, 188
Printer Features / PCL Menu, 194
Printer Features / PDF Menu, 197
Printer Features / PS Menu, 196
Printer Features / System, 189
Printer Features / Test Print, 185
Printer Language, 189
Print Error Report, 189
Printing the Box List, 184
Printing the configuration page, 186
Printing the Counter for All User, 221

Printing the Counter for Each User, 219
Print List, 67
Print Priority, 47
Print Reception Time, 128
Print Scanner Journal, 199
Program / Change Administrator, 76
Program / Change / Delete E-mail
Message, 69
Program / Change / Delete Gateway, 134
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server, 84
Program / Change/Delete LDAP Server, 76
Program / Change /
Delete Scan Size, 124, 141
Program / Change / Delete Standard
Message, 125
Program / Change / Delete User Text, 47
Program Closed Network Code, 134
Program/Delete Stamp (User Stamp), 110
Program Fax Information, 134
Program Memory Lock ID, 134
Programming an End Receiver, 149
Programming/Changing Information
Boxes, 176
Programming/changing Personal Boxes, 172
Programming/Changing Special Senders, 163
Programming/Changing Transfer Boxes, 180
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special
Sender, 168
Programming the LDAP server, 85
Program Special Sender, 128
Program Special Sender: Print List, 128
PS Config./Font Page, 185
PS Menu / Printer Features, 196
Q
Quick Operation Key (1-3), 121
Quitting the forwarding function, 151
R
Ratio for Create Margin, 96
Reception File Print Quantity, 128, 161
Reception File Setting, 128, 139
Reception Protocol, 69
Reception Report e-mail, 140
Reception Settings / Facsimile Features, 128
Registering a Fax Destination, 225
Registering a Group, 257
Registering a NCP Folder Destination, 251
Registering an E-mail Destination, 236
Registering an FTP Folder Destination, 246
Registering an SMB Folder Destination, 240
313
Registering a Protection Code to a Group

User, 269
Registering a Protection Code to a Single
User, 267
Registering a User Code, 215
Registering Fax Information, 144, 145
Registering Folders, 240
Registering LDAP Authentication, 270, 272
Registering Names, 210
Registering Names to a Group, 258
Registering SMTP Authentication, 270
Registering user names and destination
names, 210
Removing a Name from a Group, 262
Reproduction Ratio / Copier / Document
Server Features, 96
R / E Ratio, 96
R/E Ratio Priority, 96
Reserved Job Waiting Time, 189
Resolution, 194, 196, 197
Restore Factory Defaults, 66
Rotate Sort: Auto Paper Continue, 116
S
SADF Auto Reset, 116
Scanner Auto Reset Timer, 57
Scanner Features / General Settings, 199
Scanner Features / Scan Settings, 201
Scanner Features / Send Settings, 203
Scanner Resend Interval Time, 69
Scan Settings / Facsimile Features, 124
Scan Settings / Scanner Features, 201
SCSI print (SBP-2), 64
Search Destination, 121, 199
Security Method, 66
Select Dial / Push Phone, 134
Selecting the Telephone Line type, 45
Selection Signal Status, 63
Select Punch Type, 116
Send Settings / Facsimile Features, 125
Send Settings / Scanner Features, 203
Separation Line in Combine, 100
Set Date, 57
Set Time, 57
Settings for the Document Server, 120
Settings Required to Use Document
Server, 33
Server / Ethernet, 33
Server / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 34
Settings Required to Use Document Server /
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), 35
314
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function /

Ethernet, 21
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 23
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax, 17
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax /
Ethernet, 17
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 18
Settings Required to Use Network
TWAIN Scanner, 31
TWAIN Scanner / Ethernet, 31
TWAIN Scanner / IEEE 1394
(IPv4 over 1394), 32
TWAIN Scanner / IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN), 32
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder
Function, 25
Function / Ethernet, 25
Function / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 26
Function / IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), 27
Settings Required to Use the Network
Delivery Scanner, 28
Delivery Scanner / Ethernet, 28
Delivery Scanner / IEEE 1394
(IPv4 over 1394), 29
Delivery Scanner / IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN), 30
Settings Required to Use the Printer/
LAN-Fax, 14
LAN-Fax / Ethernet, 14
LAN-Fax / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 15
LAN-Fax / IEEE 802.11b (wireless
LAN), 16
Setup IEEE 802.11b, 11
Setup Wireless LAN, 11
Shortcut R/E, 96
Signal Control, 63
Simplified Screen: Finishing Types, 116
SIP Settings, 134

Size (Background Numbering), 106
Size (Date Stamp), 111
Size (Page Numbering), 113
Slip Sheet Tray, 51
SMB Computer Name, 59
SMB Work Group, 59
SMTP Authentication, 69, 270
SMTP RX File Delivery Settings, 128
SMTP Server, 69
Special Senders to Treat Differently, 159
Specifications, 281
Specifications for the Main Unit, 281
Specify Tray for Lines, 128
SSID Setting, 66
Stamp Color:1-4 (User Stamp), 110
Stamp Color (Background Numbering), 106
Stamp Color (Date Stamp), 111
Stamp Color (Page Numbering), 113
Stamp Color (Preset Stamp), 107
Stamp / Copier / Document Server
Features, 106
Stamp Format:1-4 (User Stamp), 110
Stamp Format (Page Numbering), 113
Stamp Format (Preset Stamp), 107
Stamp Language (Preset Stamp), 107
Stamp Position on Designating Page
Stamp Position (Page Numbering), 113
Stamp Priority, 107
Stamp Setting (Date Stamp), 111
Staple Position, 116
Stored File E-mail Method, 203
Stored Reception File User Setting, 128
Sub Paper Size, 189
Superimpose (Date Stamp), 111
Superimpose (Page Numbering), 113
Switch Reception Mode, 128
Switch Title, 121, 199
Switch to Batch, 116
Symbol Set, 194
System Auto Reset Timer, 57
System / Printer Features, 189
System Settings / Administrator Tools, 76
System Settings / File Transfer, 69
System Settings / General Features, 47
System Settings / Timer Settings, 57
System Settings / Tray Paper Settings, 51
System Status/Job List Display Time, 47
315
T
Test Print / Printer Features, 185
Timer Settings / System Settings, 57
To enter an identification name, 85
To enter a port number, 86
To enter a server name, 85
To enter the search base, 85
To enter the user name and password, 87
Tone: Original Remains, 91
To set authentication, 86
To set search conditions, 88
To set search options, 88
To start SSL communication, 86
To test the connection, 87
Transfer Log Setting, 76
Transmission Speed, 66
Tray Paper Settings / System Settings, 51
Tray Paper Size: Tray 2-4, 51
Tray Switching, 189
TWAIN Standby Time, 199
U
Update Delivery Server Destination List, 199
User Authentication Management, 76
User Code, 214
User Stamp, 110
Using a Fax Destination as a sender, 227
Using SMB to Connect, 240
Using Utilities to Make Network Settings, 36
W
Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass, 201
Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF, 201
Warm-Up Beeper, 47
WINS Configuration, 59
WINS Configuration (IEEE 1394), 64
Wireless LAN Signal, 66
EN
USA
B222-7857
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Web Edition
The product names of Windows NT are as follows:
Copyright 2006
Operating Instructions General Settings Guide

EN USA B222-7857
Troubleshooting
When the Machine Does Not Operate As wanted
Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function
Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function
Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function
Adding paper, Toner and Staples
Clearing Misfeeds
Remarks
Introduction
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your legal advisor.
This machine is equipped with a function that prevents making counterfeit bank bills. Due to this function the original images similar to bank bills may not be copied properly.
Colors on color keys or the color circle may differ slightly from the colors of actual copies.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for
direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Notes:
local dealer.
Power Source
120 V, 60 Hz, 12 A or more.
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as shown above. For details about power
source, see p.120 Power Connection.
Trademarks
TrueType is registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
PostScript and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
Bluetooth is a Trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. (Special Interest Group) and licensed to Ricoh Company Limited.
The product name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95.
The product name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
The product names of Windows NT 4.0 are as follows:

About This Machine

Troubleshooting
Security Reference
Facsimile Reference
Printer Reference
Scanner Reference
Network Guide
i
Other manuals
Information
UNIX Supplement
Note

dealer.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Names of Major Options ............................................................................................2
1. When the Machine Does Not Operate As wanted

Indicators................................................................................................................3
Panel Tone..............................................................................................................4
Checking Machine Status and Settings...............................................................5
When an Indicator to the Right of a Function Key is Lit ....................................8
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine.............................................9
When a Job is Not Performed.............................................................................14
2. Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function

When a Message Appears...................................................................................19
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies ...............................................................23
When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted .....................................................25
When Memory is Full ...............................................................................................29
3. Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function

Adjusting the Volume ..........................................................................................31
When You Cannot Send or Receive Fax Messages as Wanted.......................40
When Memory is Full ...............................................................................................43
If an Error Report is Printed................................................................................ 44
Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event of Power Failure............................ 45
When an Error Occurs Using Internet Fax ........................................................46
Error Mail Notification...............................................................................................46
Error Report (E-Mail)................................................................................................46
Server-Generated Error E-mail ................................................................................46
4. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

When a Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver................47
Windows 95/98/Me...................................................................................................47
Windows 2000..........................................................................................................48
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003........................................................................48
Windows NT 4.0.......................................................................................................49
If USB Connection Fails ......................................................................................50
Status Messages...................................................................................................... 51
Alert Messages ........................................................................................................52
Checking the Error Log ............................................................................................53
iii
When You Cannot Print.......................................................................................54

Other Printing Problems .....................................................................................57
When PictBridge Printing Does Not Work.........................................................63
5. Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function

When Scanning is Not Done as Expected .........................................................65
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files .............................................................66
When Stored Files Cannot be Accessed .................................................................66
When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scan file ................................... 66
When the TWAIN Driver Cannot be Started ............................................................ 66
When Stored Files Cannot be Edited.......................................................................67
When the Network Delivery Function Cannot be Used............................................67
Operations are not possible when messages appear .............................................. 67
When a Message is Displayed ............................................................................68
When a Message is Displayed on the Control Panel ...............................................68
When a Message is Displayed on the Client Computer...........................................75
6. Adding paper, Toner and Staples

Loading paper ...................................................................................................... 79
Loading Paper into the Paper Trays ........................................................................80
Loading Paper into the Large Capacity Tray (LCT) ................................................. 81
Changing the Paper Size.....................................................................................83
Changing the Paper Size in the Paper Tray.............................................................84
Adding Toner........................................................................................................89
Inserting Toner ......................................................................................................... 90
When Toner Remains ..............................................................................................91
Sending Faxes or Scanned Documents When Toner Has Run Out ........................91
Used Toner ..............................................................................................................91
Maintenance .........................................................................................................92
Adjusting the Color Registration...............................................................................92
Auto Color Calibration ..............................................................................................94
Adding Staples.....................................................................................................98
SR790 ......................................................................................................................98
Finisher SR3030 and Booklet Finisher SR3020.......................................................99
Booklet Finisher SR3020 (Saddle Stitch)...............................................................100
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge ........................................................................101
iv
7. Clearing Misfeeds
Removing Jammed Paper .................................................................................103
Locating Jammed Paper ........................................................................................104
Removing Jammed Paper...................................................................................... 105
Removing Jammed Staples .............................................................................. 111
SR790 ....................................................................................................................111
Finisher SR3030 and Booklet Finisher SR3020.....................................................112
Booklet Finisher SR3020 (Saddle Stitch)...............................................................113
Removing Punch Waste ....................................................................................114
Finisher SR3030 and Booklet Finisher SR3020.....................................................114
8. Remarks
Where to Put Your Machine .............................................................................. 117
Machine Environment ............................................................................................117
Moving....................................................................................................................119
Power Connection..................................................................................................120
Access to the Machine ...........................................................................................121
Maintaining Your Machine ................................................................................122
Cleaning the Exposure Glass.................................................................................122
Cleaning the Exposure Glass Cover ......................................................................123
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder.....................................................................123
Cleaning the Dustproof Glass ................................................................................124
INDEX....................................................................................................... 125
v
vi

Symbols

notes. They can be found in the Safety Information section of About This Machine.

Safety Information section of About This Machine.
[]
{}
1
Names of Major Options

Major options of this machine are referred to as follows in this manual:
Auto Document Feeder ADF
Booklet Finisher SR3020 Booklet Finisher SR3020
Finisher SR3030 Finisher SR3030
Finisher SR790 SR790
2
1. When the Machine Does

Not Operate As wanted
This chapter explains basic troubleshooting procedures that are applicable to all
functions of this machine.
Indicators
This section explains Indicators displayed when the machine requires the user
to remove misfed paper, add paper, or other perform other procedures.
x: Misfeed indicator
Appears when a misfeed occurs.

See p.103 Removing Jammed Paper.
B: Add Paper indicator
Appears when paper-out condition occurs.

See p.79 Loading paper.
D: Add Toner indicator
Appears when toner runs out.

See p.89 Adding Toner.
d: Add Staple indicator
Appears when staples run out.

See p.98 Adding Staples.
y: Empty Hole Punch Receptacle

indicator
Appears when the hole punch receptacle is full.
L: Service Call indicator
Appears when the machine is malfunctioning or requires maintenance.
M: Open Cover indicator
Appears when the front cover, etc., is open.
See p.114 Removing Punch Waste
3
Panel Tone
The following table explains the meaning of the various beep patterns that the
machine produces to alert users about left originals and other machine conditions.
Beep pattern
Meaning
Cause
Two long beeps.
Machine has warmed up. After cooling or being switched on, the
machine has fully warmed up and is
ready for use.
Single short beep.
Panel/screen input accepted.
A control panel or screen key was

pressed. Single short beeps are produced only when valid keys are
pressed.
Single long beep.
Job completed.
A Copier/Document Server Features

job has finished.
Four long beeps.
Soft alert.
The initial screen returns when the machine goes into energy-saving mode
and when simplified display is cancelled.
Four long beeps repeated

five times.
Soft alert.
An original has been left on the exposure glass, paper is empty, or the punch
waste box is full.
Five short beeps repeated

five time.
Strong alert.
The machine requires user attention because paper has jammed, the toner
needs replenishing, or other problems
have occurred.
Note
Users cannot mute the machine's beep alerts. When the machine beeps to alert
users of a paper jam or toner request, if the machine's covers are opened and
closed repeatedly within a short space of time, the beep alert might continue,
even after normal status has resumed.
Reference
For details about enabling or disabling beep alerts, see The System Settings,
4
Checking Machine Status and Settings

You can check the machine's system status.
Maintenance Info
You can check the following items under [Maintenance Info]:
[Remaining Toner]
Displays the amount of remaining toner.
[No Staples]
Displays whether there are staples remaining or not.
[Punch Receptacle Full]
Displays whether the hole punch receptacle is full.
[Paper Tray]
Displays the paper type and size loaded in the paper tray.
[Output Tray Full]
Displays whether the output tray is overloaded.
[Original Misfeed]
Displays state of and solutions for original misfeeds.
[Paper Misfeed]
Displays state of and solutions for paper jams.
[Cover Open]
Indicates whether front cover, duplex unit, etc., is open.
Data Storage
You can check the following items under [Data Storage]:
[HDD Remaining Memory]
Displays the amount of available hard disk drive memory.
[HDD File(s)]
Displays the total number of jobs stored in the hard disk drive.
[Print Job(s)]
Displays the number of jobs for Hold print/Stored print/Locked
print/Sample print.
[Fax TX / RX File(s)]
Displays the number of TX standby files, Print memory lock files, Reception print files, and other files stored in the hard disk drive.
[Memory Erase Status]
Displays the state of the memory data.
5
Machine Address Info

You can check the following items under [Machine Address Info]:
[Fax No.]
Displays the machine's fax number.
[H.323 Own Fax No.]
Displays the machine's alias telephone number.
[SIP User Name]
Displays the machine's SIP user name.
[Fax E-mail Account]
Displays the machine's fax e-mail account.
[Machine IPv4 Address]
Displays the machine's IPv4 address.
[Machine IPv6 Address]
Displays the machine's IPv6 address.
Inquiry
You can check the following items under [Inquiry]:
[Machine Repairs]
Displays the machine number and contact number that are required for
service.
[Sales Representative]
Displays the sales representative's telephone number.
[Supply Order]
Displays the contact number for placing supply orders.
[Supply Details]
Displays the name of toner, staples, etc., used on the machine.
6
A On the control panel, press [System Status] on the control panel.
B Press each tab and check the contents.
C After checking the information, press [Exit]. The previous screen returns.
Note
[No Staples], [Punch Receptacle Full], [Output Tray Full], [Original Misfeed], [Paper
Misfeed], and [Cover Open] appear only when these errors occur.
For details about how to locate and remove misfeeds, see Checking
Jammed Paper or Removing Jammed Paper.
Reference
p.104 Locating Jammed Paper.
p.103 Removing Jammed Paper.
7
When an Indicator to the Right of a

Function Key is Lit
When an indicator to the right of a function key lights up, press the corresponding function key. Then, follow the instructions displayed on the control panel.
AQE037S
If an error occurs in the function you are using, check the message that appears
on the control panel, and then refer to When a Message is Displayed for the
relevant function.
Following explain the main reasons the function key is lit.
Problem
Cause
Solution
Documents and reports do not print out.
The paper output tray

is full.
Remove the paper from the tray.
Documents and reports do not print out.
There is no copy paper

left.
Add more paper. See p.79 Loading paper.
An error has occurred. The function whose in- Record the code number shown in the display
dicator is lit is defecand contact your service representative. See
tive.
When a Message displayed of each chapter.
You can use other functions normally.
The machine is unable
to connect to the network.
A network error has

occurred.
Check the displayed message and take an

appropriate action. See When a Message
displayed of each chapter.
Check that the machine is correctly connected to the network, and that the machine is correctly set. See Network
Settings, General Settings Guide.
Contact the administrator.
When the function key is still lit, even if
you take the measures above, contact
Reference
p.19 Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function.
p.31 Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function.

p.47 Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function.
p.65 Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function.
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine
When You Have Problems Operating the

Machine
1
The following chart gives explanations of common problems and messages.

If other messages appear, follow the instructions displayed.
Important
Check the contact address and Serial No. of Machine shown in the call service
message (L), and then contact your service representative.
Problem
Cause
Solution
Although the copier

Functions other than the
screen appears when the copier function are not
machine is turned on us- yet ready.
ing the main power
switch, it cannot be
switched to another
screen by pressing the
{Printer} or {Scanner} key.
Wait a little longer.
The machine has just

been turned on and the
User Tools screen is displayed, but the User
Tools menu has items
missing.
Functions other than the

copier function are not
yet ready. Time required
varies by function. Functions appear in the User
Tools menu when they
become ready for use.
Wait a little longer.
The main power indicator continues blinking

and does not turn off
when pressed.
This occurs in the follow- Close ADF, and check if the machine is
ing cases:
communicating with a computer.
ADF is open.
The machine is communicating with external equipment.
The hard disk is active.
The display is off.
The machine is in Energy

Saver mode.
Press the {Energy Saver} key to cancel

Energy Saver Mode. mode.
The display is off.
The operation switch is

turned off.
Turn on the operation switch.
Nothing happens when

the operation switch is
turned on.
The main power switch is

turned off.
Turn on the main power switch.
Please wait.
appears.
This message appears

Wait for the machine to get ready.
when you turn on the operation switch.
Please wait.
appears.
This message appears

Wait for the machine to get ready.
when you change the toner cartridge.
9

Problem
Memory is full.
Do you want to
store scanned
file? appears.
Cause
Solution
The scanned originals ex- Press [Store File] to store pages that
ceed the number of
have been scanned. Delete unnecessheets/pages that can be
sary files with [Delete File].
stored in the hard disk.
Press [No] if you are not storing pages that have been scanned. Delete
unnecessary files with [Delete File].
Self checking... appears.
The machine is perform- The machine may perform periodic

ing image adjustment op- maintenance during operations. The
erations.
frequency and duration of maintenance
depends on the humidity, temperature,
and printing factors such as number of
prints, paper size, and paper type. Wait
for the machine to get ready.
The user code entry

screen is displayed.
Users are restricted by

user management.
Enter the user code (up to eight digits),

The Authentication
screen appears.
Basic Authentication,
Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication or Integration Server
Authentication is set.
Enter your login user name and user

password. See When the Authentication Screen is Displayed, About This
Machine.
You do not have
The use of the function is

restricted to authenticated users only.
This user code is not allowed to use the function

selected.
Press the {Energy Saver} key. Confirm

that the display goes off, and then
press the {Energy Saver} key again. The
display will return to the user code entry display. When printing under the
copier or printer function, press the
{Energy Saver} key only after printing
has finished.
When a misfeed message appears, it remains until you open

and close the cover as
required.
Clear misfed paper, and then open and

close the front cover. see p.103 Clearing Misfeeds.
the privileges to
use this function. is displayed.
You do not have
the privileges to
use this function. continues to be
displayed even though
you have entered a valid
user code.
An error message remains, even if misfed paper is removed.
Paper is still jammed

in the tray.
Original images are
printed on the reverse
side of the paper.
10
You may have loaded the

paper incorrectly.
Load paper correctly. Place paper in the

paper tray with the print side up. Load
paper into the bypass tray with the
print side down. See p.82 OrientationFixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper.

Problem
Cause
Misfeeds occur frequently. The tray's side fences

may not be locked.
Solution
Remove the paper. See p.103 Removing Jammed Paper.
Check the side fences are locked.
See p.83 Changing the Paper Size.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The tray's end fence may

not be set properly.

Check the end fence is set properly.
Misfeeds occur frequently. Paper of undetectable

size has been loaded.

When loading the paper of undetectable size, specify the paper size
in Tray Paper Size. See Paper
Size: Tray 1-4, General Settings
Guide and Copy Paper, About
This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. There is a foreign object

on the finisher tray.

Do not place anything on the finisher tray. It may cause a paper jam.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The staple cartridge is not

set correctly.
The Booklet Finisher SR3020 requires

the saddle stitch stapler cartridge also.
See p.98 Adding Staples.
Cannot print in duplex

mode.
[1 Sided Copy] is selected

for Paper Type: Tray 1-4.
Select [2 Sided Copy] for Paper Type:

Tray 1-4 See Paper Size: Tray 1-4,

mode.
You cannot select duplex

printing if the paper type
is set to [OHP], [Thin Paper], [Label Paper], [Thick
Paper 2] or [Thick Paper 3].
Select a paper type that allows duplex

printing. See Paper Size: Tray 1-4,
Authentication failed.
The entered login user

name or login password
is not correct.
Inquire the user administrator for the

correct login user name and login password.
Authentication failed.
The machine cannot perform authentication.
The selected file(s) contained file(s) without access privileges. Only

file(s) with access privileges will be deleted.
You have tried to delete

files without the authority to do so.
Files can be deleted by the person who

created the file. To delete a file which
you are not authorized to delete, contact the person who created the file.
11
Document Server
Problem
Cause
Solution
The number of scanned

pages exceeds the capacity per file of the Document Server.
To store scanned pages as a file, press

[Store File]. Scanned data is stored as a
file in the Document Server. If you do
not want to store scanned pages, press
[No]. Scanned data is deleted.
You forgot your password.
You cannot access a protected file without entering the password.
You cannot find out what

is stored in a file.
You may not be able to

ascertain the contents of a
file simply from the file
name.
You can switch the Select File screen between [List] and [Thumbnail] display to
check the contents of the file. In list display, the file name, date and time of
storage, and user name are shown. In
thumbnail display, an image of the
stored file appears. You can enlarge the
image by pressing [Preview]. Use the Select File screen to check information
other than the file name. See Checking
the Details of a Stored Document,
Memory frequently becomes full.
The document server

memory is full.
Delete unnecessary files. On the file selection display, select unnecessary files,
and then press [Delete File]. If this does
not increase available memory, do the
following.
Exceeded max.
number of pages
per file. Do you
want to store the
scanned pages as
1 file? appears.
To delete the files stored in the document server, select [Delete All Files in Document Server]. As this will permanently
delete every single file, make sure the
document server does not contain any
files you want to keep. See Delete All
Files in Document Server, General Settings Guide.
Switch to the scanner screen, and

then delete unnecessary files stored
under the scanner function.
Switch to the printer screen, and
then delete unnecessary files stored
under Sample Print, Locked Print,
Hold Print, or Stored Print.
12

Problem
Cause
Solution
You want to check print

quality before making a
large print run.
You can print a single

copy without specifying
the setting again.
Check print quality by printing out

only the first set using the {Sample
Copy} key.
Original is being scanned by

another function.
Please wait. ap-
Copier or Scanner function is in use.
To cancel a job in progress, first press

[Exit], and then press the {Copy} key or
{Scanner} key. Next, press the
{Clear/Stop} key. When the message
The Stop key was pressed.
Stop copying? press [Stop].
The image data may have

been corrupted.
Pressing [Exit] displays the preview

screen without a thumbnail.
pears.
Cannot display
preview of this
page. appears, and
you can not check the

thumb nail image.
Note
If you cannot make copies as you want because of paper type, paper size, or
paper capacity problems, use recommended paper. See Copy Paper, About
This Machine.
Using curled paper often causes misfeeds, soiled paper edges, or slipped positions while performing staple or stack printing. When using curled paper,
take the stiffness out of the paper with your hands to straighten out the curl,
or load the paper up side down. Also, to prevent paper from curling, lay paper on a flat surface, and do not lean it against the wall.
13
When a Job is Not Performed

If you cannot execute a function, it may be that the machine is being held up by
another function.
If you cannot execute a function, terminate any other functions currently active,
and then try executing the function again. In certain cases, you can carry out another job (copier, document server, printer, scanner) without canceling the current job being performed. Performing multiple functions simultaneously like
this is called Multi-accessing.
Combination Chart
Function Compatibility
The chart shows Function Compatibility when print priority is set to Interleave. See Print Priority, General Settings Guide.
: Simultaneous operations are possible.
: Operation is enabled when the relevant function key is pressed and remote switching (of the scanner/external extension) is done.
: Operation is enabled when the {Interrupt} key is pressed to interrupt the
preceding operation.
: Operation is performed automatically once the preceding operation ends.
: The operation must be started once the preceding operation ends. (Simultaneous operations are not possible.)
14
Transmission
Facsimile Interrupt Copying

Copy
Mode before you select
Operations
for Copying
Stapling
*
1
Sort
*
1
Transmission
Operation/Manual Reception
Operation

*
1
*
2
*
2
Operations
for Copying
Copying
Scanning an

original for
Memory
Transmission
*
1
Interrupt Copying
*
1
*
1
*
5
*
2
*
2
*
2
*
2
Printing from Document Server

Sending a Facsimile from Document Server
Printing
Printer
Web Document Server
DeskTopBinder
TWAIN
Document Server
Scanner
Print
Reception
Transmission
Facsimile
Scanning a Document to Store in Document Server
Memory Transmission
Immediate Transmission
Memory Reception
Printing Received Data
Data Reception
Printing
Stapling
Operations for Scanning
Scanning
Scanning
Operations for Document Server
Scanning an Original for Memory Transmission
Mode after you select Copy
Transmission Operation/Manual Reception Operation
Operations for Copying

Stapling
Sort
Copying
*
2
*
4
*
4
*
4
*
2
*
2
15
Scanner
Print
Printer
Reception
Transmission
Facsimile
Stapling
*
2
16
*
2
Interrupt Copying
*
2
*
3
Immediate

Transmission
*
3
*
3
*
3
*
3
*
7
Data Reception
Printing
*
2
*
3
*
3

*
3
*
5
Operations
for scanning
Scanning
*
2

Printing
Printer
Memory
Transmission
*
4
*
4
Web Document Server
DeskTopBinder
TWAIN
Document Server
Scanner
Print
Reception
Transmission
Facsimile
Memory Transmission
Memory Reception
Data Reception
Printing
Stapling
Scanning
Scanning

Stapling
Sort
Copying
*
7
*
2
Memory Reception
*
7
*
7
*
4
DeskTopBinder
Printing from
Document
Server
Web Document Server

TWAIN
Scanning
Document Server
Operations
for Document Server
Printing
Scanning a
Document to
Store in Document Server
Printing from
Document
Server
Interrupt Copying
*
4
Sending a
Facsimile
from Document Server
*
6
*
6

Printing
Printer
Web Document Server
DeskTopBinder
TWAIN
Document Server
Scanner
Print
Reception
Transmission
Facsimile
Memory Transmission
Memory Reception
Data Reception
Printing
Stapling
Scanning
Scanning

Stapling
Sort
Copying
*
2
*
6
*
4
*
4
17

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
Simultaneous operations are only possible after the preceding job documents are all
scanned and [New Job] key appears.
You can scan a document after the preceding job documents are all scanned.
Operation is possible when extra lines are added.
During stapling, printing automatically starts after the current job.
Stapling is not available.
Simultaneous operation become possible after you press [New Job] key.
During parallel reception, any subsequent job is suspended until the receptions are
completed.
Note
Stapling cannot be used at the same time for multiple functions.
If the machine is capable of executing multiple functions simultaneously,

specify which function should have priority in Print Priority. This setting is
factory-preset to Display Mode. For setting of Printing Priority Function,
see Print Priority, General Settings Guide.
When Booklet Finisher SR3020, Finisher SR3030 or SR790 is installed on the
machine, you can specify the output tray where documents are delivered. See
Output tray settings, General Settings Guide.
While printing is in progress, scanning a document using another function
may take more time.
18
2. Troubleshooting When
Using the Copy Function
This chapter explains likely causes of and possible solutions for copier function
problems.
When a Message Appears

This section explains the machine's main messages. If other messages appear,
follow the instructions they contain.
Important
For messages that are not listed here, see p.9 When You Have Problems Operating the Machine.
Message
Cause
Solution
Cannot detect
original size.
Improper original is
placed.
Select paper manually, not in Auto Paper Select mode, and do not use Auto
Reduce/Enlarge function. See Sizes
difficult to detect, Copy/Document
Server Reference.
Cannot detect
original size.
Improper original is
placed.
Place the original on the exposure glass.

See Placing Originals on the Exposure
Glass and Sizes difficult to detect,
Cannot detect
original size.
Original is not placed.
Place your originals.
Check original
orientation.
Original is not placed in a

proper orientation.
Change the orientation of the original.
Check paper size. Improper paper size is

set.
If you press the {Start} key, copy will

start onto the selected paper.
Rotate Sort is
not available
with this paper
size.
A size of paper for which

Rotate Sort is not available is selected.
Select the proper paper size. See Sort,

Duplex is not
available with
this paper size.
A paper size not available

in Duplex mode has been
selected.
The following paper sizes are available

for Duplex mode: A3L, B4L, A4KL,
B5KL, A5K, 1117L, Legal
(81/214)L, 81/414L, Letter
(81/211)KL, Executive
(71/4101/2)KL, F/GL (813)L,
Foolscap (813)L, Folio
(81/413)L, 1115L, 1014L,
810L, 8KL, 16KKL. Select one of
these sizes.
19

Message
Cause
Solution
Cannot punch this

paper size.
The Punch function cannot be used with paper

size selected.
The following paper sizes are available

for Punch mode:
2 holes:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL,
1117L, Legal(81/214)L,
81/414L, Letter(81/211)KL,
Half Letter (51/281/2)L, Executive
(71/4101/2)KL, F/GL (813)L,
Foolscap (81/213)L, Folio
(81/413)L, 1115L, 1014L,
810L, 8KL, 16KKL. Select one of
these sizes.
3 holes:
A3L, B4L, A4K, B5K, 1117L,
Letter(81/211)K, Executive
(71/4101/2)K, 1115L,
1014L, 8KL, 16KK. Select one
of these sizes.
4 holes:
Metric version:
A3L, B4L, A4K, B5K, 1117L,
Letter(81/211)K, Executive
(71/4101/2)K, 1115L, 8KL,
16KK. Select one of these sizes.
Narrow 2 2 version:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL,
1117L, Legal(81/214)L,
81/414L, Letter(81/211)KL,
Half Letter (51/281/2)L, Executive
(71/4101/2)KL, F/GL (813)L,
Foolscap (81/213)L, Folio
(81/413)L, 1115L, 1014L,
810L, 8KL, 16KKL. Select one
of these sizes.
Cannot staple pa- The Staple function canper of this size. not be used with paper
size selected.
Select a paper size that can be used in

Staple mode. See Supplementary Informations, Copy/Document Server
Reference.
Stapling capacity
exceeded.
The number of sheets per

set is over the staple capacity.
Maximum number of
sets is nn.
The number of copies ex- You can change the maximum copy
ceeds the maximum copy quantity. See Max. Number of Sets,
quantity.
(A figure is placed at n.)
20
Check the stapler capacity. See Supplementary Informations, Copy/Document Server Reference.

Message
Cause
Solution
File being stored

exceeded max.
number of pages
per file. Copying
will be stopped.
The scanned originals

have too many pages to
store as one document.
Press [Exit], and then store again with

an appropriate number of pages.
Magazine or Booklet mode is not

available due to
mixed image mode.
You selected the MagaMake sure originals for the Magazine

zine or Booklet function
or Booklet function are scanned using
for originals scanned us- the same function.
ing different functions,
such as copy and printer.
This user code is not alContact the administrator.

You do not have
the privileges to lowed to use the function
use this function. selected.
This user code is not alIf the message continues to be displayed
You do not have
the privileges to lowed to use the function and you cannot switch the screen, press
the {Energy Saver} key. Confirm that the
use this function. selected.
display goes off, and then press the {Energy Saver} key again. The display will
return to the user code entry display.
When printing under the copier or printer function, press the {Energy Saver} key
only after printing has finished.
Authentication
has failed.

is not correct.
Inquire the user administrator for the

correct login user name and login password.
Authentication
has failed.
The machine cannot perform authentication.

The selected
file(s) contained files without the authority to do so.
file(s) without
access privileges. Only file(s)
with access privileges will be
deleted.
Files can be deleted by the person who

created the file. To delete a file which
you are not authorized to delete, contact the person who created the file.
Document Server or
Orig. is being
scanned by anoth- Scanner function is in
use.
er function.
Please wait.
To cancel the job in process, press [Exit],

and then press the {Document Server} or
{Scanner} key. Next, press the {Clear/Stop}
key. When the message The Clear /
Stop key was pressed. Are

you sure you want to stop
scanning? appears, press [Cancel].
21

Message
Please wait.
Cause
Solution
The destination list is be- Wait until the message disappears. Do

ing updated from the
not switch off the power while this
network using SmartDe- message is displayed.
viceMonitor for Admin.
Depending on the number of destinations to be
updated, there may be
some delay before you
can resume operation.
Operations are not possible while this message is
displayed.
Reference
p.9 When You Have Problems Operating the Machine
22
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for unclear copies.
Problem
Copies appear dirty.
Cause
Solution
Image density is too high. Adjust the image density. See Adjusting Copy Image Density, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Copies appear dirty.
Auto Image Density is

not selected.
The reverse side of an

original image is copied.
The reverse side of an

original image is copied.
Auto Image Density is

not selected.
A shadow appears on
copies if you use pasted
originals.
Adjust the auto density. See Adjusting

Copy Image Density, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Adjust the auto density. See Adjusting

Copy Image Density, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Change the orientation of the original.

Put mending tape on the pasted part.
The same copy area is
dirty whenever making
copies.
The exposure glass, scan- Clean them. See p.122 Maintaining

ning glass, or ADF is dirty. Your Machine.
The same copy area is

dirty whenever making
copies.
The original that has

already been printed is
scanned.
Copies are too light.
Image density is too light. Adjust the image density. See Adjusting Copy Image Density, Copy/Document Server Reference.
A light copy may result

when you use damp or
rough grain paper.
Select [Generation Copy], and then begin

copying. See Generation Copy,
Use the recommended paper. also, use

paper that has been stored in the recommended temperature and humidity
condition. See Copy Paper, About
This Machine.
Contact your service representative.
Toner cartridge is almost

empty.
Add toner. See p.89 Adding Toner.
Parts of images are not

copied.
The original is not set cor- Set originals correctly. See Placing
rectly.
Originals, Copy/Document Server
Reference.
Parts of images are not

copied.
The correct paper size is

not selected.
Select the proper paper size.
23

Problem
Cause
Solution
Images appear only partially colored.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the

recommended temperature and humidity condition. See Copy Paper,
About This Machine.
Colored lines appear.
The exposure glass or

scanning glass is dirty.
Clean them. See p.122 Maintaining

Your Machine.
White lines appear.


Your Machine.
White lines appear.
When D is blinking, ton- Add toner. See p.89 Adding Toner.

er is beginning to run out.
Copies are blank.
The original is not set cor- When using the exposure glass, face the
rectly.
originals down. When using the ADF,
face them up.
A moir pattern is produced on copies.
Your original has a dot

pattern image or many
lines.
Black spots appear on the

copy of a photographic
print.
Because of high humidi- Place the print on the exposure glass in

ty, the photographic print either of the following ways:
has stuck to the exposure Place an OHP transparency on the exglass.
posure glass, and then place the print
on top of the OHP transparency.
Place the original on the exposure glass

at a slight angle.
Place the print on the exposure

glass, and then place two or three
sheets of white paper on top of it.
Leave the auto-document feeder
(ADF) open when copying.
24
When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for unclear copies.
Basic
Problem
Cause
Solution
Misfeeds occur frequently. The number of sheets

Load paper only as high as the upper
loaded exceeds the capac- limit markings on the side fence of the
ity of the machine.
paper tray or bypass tray. See Copy
Paper, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper tray's side
fence is set too tightly.
Push the side fence lightly, and then reset it. Also, we recommend you set at
least 20 sheets of thick paper.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is damp.

About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is too thick or

too thin.
Use recommended paper. See Copy

Misfeeds occur frequently. The copy paper is wrinkled or has been folded/creased.
Use recommended paper. Use paper

that has been stored in the recommended temperature and humidity condition. See Copy Paper, About This
Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. Printed paper is being

used.
Use recommended paper. Do not use

paper that has been already copied or
printed onto. See Copy Paper, About
This Machine.
Copy paper becomes

creased.
The paper is damp.

About This Machine.
Copy paper becomes

creased.
The paper is too thin.

Copies are not stapled.
There are jammed staples

in the stapler.
Remove jammed staples. See p.111 Removing Jammed Staples.
25

Problem
Cause
Solution
The number of copies ex- Check the stapler capacity. See Supceeds the capacity of the plementary Informations, Copy/Docstapler.
ument Server Reference.
Copy paper is curled.
Turn the copy paper over in the tray.
Staples are wrongly posi- Originals are not set cortioned.

rectly.
Check the correct position to place the

originals. See Staple, Copy/Document Server Reference.
You cannot combine sev- Selected functions cannot

eral functions.
be used together.
Check the combination of functions

and make the settings again. See Function Compatibility, Copy/Document
Server Reference.
When sorting, the pages

are divided into two
blocks.
The memory became full

in the middle of sorting
and the pages were delivered in two blocks.
You can interrupt copying when the

memory becomes full. See Memory
Full Auto Scan Restart, General Settings Guide.
Paper does not output

during printing with stapling.
When you stop printing

while using the staple
function, paper not stapled during printing may
be left in the staple unit.
Press the {Clear Modes} key and cancel

copy settings, including stapling.
The copy is grayed out or

a text pattern appears in
the background of the
copy.
You have copied a copy- Check the document. See Using [Data
guarded document proSecurity for Copying], Printer Reference.
tected from unauthorized
copying.
Images are skewed.
The side fences in the

paper feed tray is not
locked.
Make sure the paper guide is locked.

Images are skewed.
The paper is feeding in at

a slant.
Load the paper correctly. See p.79

Loading paper.
Edit
Problem
In Double Copies mode,
parts of the original image are not copied.
Cause
Solution
Combination of original Select A3L for A4K originals and A4

and copy paper is not cor- for A5 originals.
rect.
In Border, Centre, or Cen- You set a wide erased

tre/ Border mode, parts
margin.
of the original image are
not copied.
Make the margin width narrower. You

can adjust it between 2 - 99 mm (0.1 3.9). See Erase Border Width and
Erase Centre Width, General Settings
Guide.
In Border, Centre, or Cen- Originals are not scanned

tre/ Border mode, parts
correctly.
of the original image are
not copied.
Place the originals correctly.
26

Problem
Cause
In Margin Adjustment
You set a wide erased
mode, parts of the origi- margin.
nal image are not copied.
Solution
Set a narrower margin with User Tools.
You can set the width between 0 - 30
mm (0 - 1.2).
See Front Margin: Left/Right, Back
Margin: Left/Right, Front Margin:
Top/Bottom and Back Margin:
Top/Bottom, General Settings Guide.
In Margin Adjustment
There is a lack of margin
mode, parts of the origi- space on the opposite
nal image are not copied. side of the binding position.
In Image Repeat mode,

the original image is not
copied repeatedly.
Set a narrower margin with User Tools.

You can set the width between 0 - 30
mm (0 - 1.2).
See Front Margin: Left/Right, Back
Margin: Left/Right, Front Margin:
Top/Bottom and Back Margin:
Top/Bottom, General Settings Guide.
You selected copy paper Select copy paper larger than the origithe same size as the originals or select the proper reproduction
nals, or you did not select ratio.
the proper reproduction
ratio.
Stamp
Problem
Cause
Solution
The stamp position is

wrong.
The paper orientation is

wrong.
Check the paper orientation and stamp

position.
The stamp is not printed

on the back side of sheets
when duplex copying.
The back side stamp posi- Reset the back side stamp position. See
tion is incorrect for the
Back Side Stamp Position in Duplex,
paper size.
Combine
Problem
Cause
Solution
You cannot make a book

from Booklet or Magazine mode by folding
copies.
You selected a setting

(Open to leftor Open
to right) that does not
match the orientation of
originals.
Change the setting. See Orientation:

Booklet, Magazine, General Settings
Guide.
When using Combine,

parts of the image are not
copied.
You specified a reproduction ratio that does not

match the sizes of your
originals and copy paper.
When you specify a reproduction ratio

using Manual Paper Select mode, make
sure that the ratio matches your originals and the copy paper. Select the correct reproduction ratio before using
Combine mode.
Copies are not in correct

order.
You placed the originals

in the incorrect order.
When placing a stack of originals in

the ADF, the last page should be on
the bottom.
If you place an original on the exposure glass, start with the first page to
be copied.
27
Duplex
Problem
Cause
Solution

mode.
You have loaded paper

on the bypass tray.
Remove paper loaded on the bypass

tray. Load paper in another tray.

mode.
You have loaded paper

exceeding 169 g/m2.
Change the paper.

mode.
You have selected a tray

which is set to [1 Sided
Copy] in [Tray Paper Settings] in [System Settings].
Set the tray to [2 Sided Copy] in [Tray Paper Settings] in [System Settings]. See
System Settings, General Settings
Guide.
Copies are not in correct

order.

in the incorrect order.
When placing a stack of originals in the

ADF, the last page should be on the bottom.
If you place an original on the exposure
glass, start with the first page to be copied.
When using Duplex,

copy is made Top to Bottom even though [Top to
Top] is selected.
28

in the wrong orientation.
Place the original in the correct orientation. See Original Orientation,

When Memory is Full

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for problems related
to full memory.
Message
Cause
Solution
Memory is full.
nn originals have
been scanned.
Press [Print] to
copy scanned
originals. Do not
remove remaining
originals.
The scanned originals exceeds the number of pages that can be stored in
memory.
Press [Print] to copy scanned originals

and cancel the scanning data. Press
[Stop] to cancel the scanning data and
not copy.
The machine checked if

the remaining originals
should be copied, after
the scanned originals was
printed.
To continue copying, remove all copies,

and then press [Resume Printing]. To
stop copying, press [Stop].
n in the message represents a changeable number.
Press [Continue]
to scan and copy
remaining originals.
Note
If you set [Memory Full Auto Scan Restart] in User Tools to [On], even if the memory becomes full, the memory overflow message will not be displayed. The
machine will make copies of the scanned originals first, then automatically
proceed scanning and copying the remaining originals. In this case, the resulting sorted pages will not be sequential. See Input / Output, General Settings Guide.
29
30
Using the Facsimile Function
This chapter explains likely causes of and possible solutions for facsimile function problems.
Adjusting the Volume

The following describes how to adjust the volume.
You can change the volume of the following sounds that the machine makes.
On Hook Mode
Heard when the [On Hook] is pressed.
At Transmission
Heard when Immediate transmission is performed.
At Reception
Heard when the machine receives a document.
At Dialing
Heard after pressing the {Start} key, until the line connects to the destination.
At Printing
Heard when a received document is printed.
A Press the {User Tools / Counter} key.
AQE025S
B Press [Facsimile Features].
31
C Check that [General Settings] screen appears.

D Press [Adjust Sound Volume].
3
E Press [Lower] or [Louder] to adjust the volume, and then press [OK].
F Press the {User Tools / Counter} key.

The standby display appears.
Note
You can adjust the On Hook volume when you press the [On Hook]. See
On Hook Dial, Facsimile Reference.
When you press [Check] on the Adjust Sound Volume screen, you will hear
a confirmation sound so you can check the volume.
If you press [Cancel], the volume setting is canceled. The display returns to
that of step D.
You can set the volume level to between 0 and 7.
32

This section explains the machine's main messages. If other messages appear,
follow their instructions.
Message
Cause
Solution
Put original
back, check it
and press the
Start key.
Original jammed during

Memory Transmission.
Place originals that have not been

scanned on the exposure glass or ADF
again.
Cannot detect
original size.
Place original
again, then press
the Start key.
The machine failed to de- Place original again, and then press the
tect the size of the origi{Start} key.
nal.
Functional prob- There is a problem with

lems with facsim- the fax.
ile. Data will be
initialized.
Remove the paper
from Internal
Tray 1.
Record the code number shown in the

display and contact your service representative. Other functions can be used.
The Internal Tray 1 is full. Remove the paper. If the other tray is
also full, the tray name shown in the
display changes. Remove paper from
the tray indicated in the display.
Original is being The machine is scanning

scanned by anoth- an original under another
function.
er function.
Switch to the following function,
then press the
Stop key to cancel
scanning or press
the Start key to
continue.
Before sending a file by fax, cancel the

job in progress. To do this, press [Exit],
and then press the {Copy} or {Document
Server} key to display the suspended
function. Then, on the copier or document server screen, press the
{Clear/Stop} key to display the The
Stop key has been pressed.

Are you sure you want to
stop copying? or The Clear
/ Stop key was pressed. Are
you sure you want to stop
scanning? prompt, and then press
[Stop].
33

Message
Cause
Solution
Updating the destination list...

Please wait.
Specified destination(s) or
sender's name has
been cleared.
The destination list is

Wait until the message disappears. Do
being updated from the not switch off the power while this
network using SmartDe- message is displayed.
viceMonitor for Admin
or Web Image Monitor.
Depending on the number of destinations to be
updated, there may be
some delay before you
can resume operation.
Operation is not possible while this message is
displayed.
The selected
file(s) contained
file(s) without
deleted.
You tried to delete a document for which you do

not have permission to
delete.
Only the administrator can delete this

document. Contact the administrator if
you want to delete a document for
which you do not have permission to
delete.
Connection with
LDAP server has
failed. Check the
server status.
A network error has occurred and connection

has failed.
Try the operation once more. If the message is still shown, the network may be
crowded. Check the information of
[System Settings]. See System Settings,
LDAP server authentication has

failed. Check the
settings.

has failed.
Make settings correctly for the user

name and the password for LDAP server authentication.
Exceeded max. No.

of display search
results. Max.:
The number of search results has exceeded the

maximum number of
items that can be displayed.
Search again after changing the search

conditions.
34

Message
Cause
Solution
Exceeded time
limit for LDAP
server search.
Check the server
status.

has failed.
crowded. Check the information of
[System Settings]. See System Settings,
The specified
group contains
some destination(s) that do
not have access
privileges. Do
you want to select only the
privileged destination(s)?
The specified group contains some destinations

for sending by e-mail and
some destinations for
sending by Scan to Folder.
To select destinations for sending by email, press [Select] for the message displayed on the e-mail screen. To select
destination for sending by Scan to Folder, press [Select] for the message displayed on the Scan to Folder screen.
Cannot find the

specified path.
Please check the
settings.
The name of the comput- Check whether the computer name and
er or folder entered as the the folder name for the destination are
destination is wrong.
correct.
Sender has not

been specified.
The sender has not been

specified.
A sender's name should be specified

before sending e-mail. Send e-mail after
specifying the sender's name.
E-mail address
entered is not
correct. Please
re-enter.
The entered e-mail address is wrong.
Make sure the e-mail address is correct,

and then enter it again.
You do not have

the privileges to
use this function.
Use of this function is restricted.
Authentication
has failed.
Wrong login user name

or password.
Confirm correct login user name or

password.
Authentication
has failed.
Authentication is not
possible from this machine.
35

Message
Check whether
there are any
network problems.
{13-10}
Cause
The alias telephone num- Check the alias telephone number is

ber you entered is alcorrectly programmed using the
ready registered on the
Web Image Monitor. See the Web
gatekeeper by another
Image Monitor's Help.
device.
Consult the administrator.
Cannot access gatekeepCheck whether

er.
there are any
network problems.
{13-11}
Solution
Use your Web Image Monitor to

check the gatekeeper address is correctly programmed. See the Web
Registering of user name Use your Web Image Monitor to

Check whether
is rejected by SIP server.
check the gatekeeper address is corthere are any
rectly programmed. See the Web
network problems.
{13-17}
Cannot access SIP server. Use your Web Image Monitor to

Check whether
check the SIP server address is corthere are any
rectly programmed. See the Web
network problems.
{13-18}
Cannot find the DNS

Check whether
server, SMTP Server or
there are any
network problems. folder for forwarding.
{14-01}
Check that the DNS server IPv4 address is correctly programmed using Web Image Monitor. See the
Web Image Monitor's Help.
Check that the host name and IPv4
address of SMTP Server are correctly programmed using Web Image
Monitor. See the Web Image Monitor's Help.
Check that the host name or IPv4
address of the SMTP server is correctly programmed using Web Image Monitor. See the Web Image
Monitor's Help.
Check that the SMTP server is correctly programmed using Web Image Monitor. See the Web Image
Monitor's Help.
Check that the folder for forwarding
is correctly specified.
Check that the computer in which
the folder for forwarding is specified is correctly operated.
Check that the LAN cable is correctly connected to the machine.
36

Message
Check whether
there are any
network problems.
{14-09}
Cause
Solution
E-mail transmission was Check that the machine e-mail adrefused by SMTP authendress is correctly programmed from
tication, POP before
File Transfer under System Settings.
SMTP authentication or
See File Transfer, General Settings
login authentication of
Guide. You can also use the Web
the computer in which
Image Monitor for confirmation.
the folder for transfer is
specified.
Check that the user name and password of the E-mail Account are correctly programmed from File
Transfer under System Settings. See
File Transfer, General Settings
Check that the user ID and password for the computer in which the
folder for forwarding is specified
are correctly programmed.
Check that the folder for forwarding
is correctly specified.
Check that the computer in which
the folder for forwarding is specified is correctly operated.
No machine's e-mail adCheck whether
dress is programmed.
there are any
network problems.
{14-33}
Check that the e-mail address of

mail account is correctly programmed using File Transfer of
System Settings. See File Transfer, General Settings Guide. You
can also use the Web Image Monitor
for confirmation. See the Web Image
Monitor's Help.
No POP3/IMAP4 server
Check whether
address is programmed.
there are any
network problems.
{15-01}

address of the POP3/IMAP4 server
is correctly programmed using the
Web Image Monitor. See the Web
Cannot log on to the

Check whether
POP3/IMAP4 server.
there are any
network problems.
{15-02}
Check that the user name and password of the E-mail Account are correctly programmed using File
File Transfer, General Settings
37

Message
Cause
Solution
No machine e-mail adCheck whether

dress is programmed.
there are any
network problems.
{15-03}
Check that the machine e-mail address is correctly programmed using File Transfer under System
Settings. See File Transfer, General Settings Guide. You can also use
the Web Image Monitor for confirmation. See the Web Image Monitor's Help.
Cannot find the DNS

Check whether
server or POP3/IMAP4
there are any
network problems. server.
{15-11}
Check that the DNS server IPv4 address is correctly programmed using Web Image Monitor. See the
Web Image Monitor's Help.
Check that the DNS server is correctly programmed using Web Image Monitor. See the Web Image
Monitor's Help.
address of the POP3/IMAP4 server
is correctly programmed using Web
Image Monitor. See the Web Image
Monitor's Help.
Check that the POP3/IMAP4 server
is correctly programmed using Web
Image Monitor. See the Web Image
Monitor's Help.
Check that the LAN cable is correctly connected to the machine.
Cannot log on to the

Check whether
POP3/IMAP4 server.
there are any
network problems.
{15-12}
Check that the user name and password of the E-mail Account are correctly programmed from File
File Transfer Settings, General
Settings Guide. You can also use the
Web Image Monitor for confirmation. See the Web Image Monitor's
Help.
Check that the user name and password for POP before SMTP authentication are correctly programmed
from File Transfer under System
Settings. See File Transfer Settings, General Settings Guide. You
can also use the Web Image Monitor
for confirmation. See the Web Image
Monitor's Help.
38
Note
If the Check whether there are any network problems. message appears, the machine is not correctly connected to the network or the settings of
the machine are not correct. If you do not need to connect to a network, you
can specify the setting so this message is not displayed, and then the {Facsimile} key no longer lights. See Parameter Settings, General Settings Guide. If
you reconnect the machine to the network, be sure to set Display with User
Parameters.
If the paper tray runs out of paper, Add paper. appears on the display, asking you to add more paper. If there is paper left in the other trays, you can receive documents as usual, even if the message appears on the display. You
can turn this function on or off with Parameter Setting. See Parameter Settings, General Settings Guide.
39
When You Cannot Send or Receive Fax

Messages as Wanted
This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for transmission and
reception-related problems.
Transmission/Reception
Problem
Cause
Both transmission and re- The modular cord may be

ceiving are impossible.
disconnected.
Solution
Make sure that the modular cord is correctly connected. See Connecting the
Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone, Genera Settings Guide.
Transmission
Problem
Cause
Solution
Document appears blank

at the other end.
The original was placed

upside down.
Place it correctly. See Placing Originals, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Transmission failed due

to maximum e-mail
size error.
If the e-mail size specified

on the machine is too
large, the Internet Fax
document cannot be sent.
Set Max. E-mail Size to [Off], or set the

maximum e-mail size to a larger value.
Then, re-send the document. See Maximum E-mail Size, General Settings
Guide.
When using On Hook

Dial or Manual Dial,
Receiving data... appears and
transmission is not allowed.
If the machine fails to detect the size of the original when {Start} key is
pressed, it performs a receiving operation.
Press [Scan Size], select the scan area,

and then resend the document. If you
use On Hook Dial or Manual Dial frequently, it is recommended that you set
Receive documents by pressing the
{Start} key when originals are not set.
to Off in User Parameters. If this is set
to Off, when using Manual Dial you
cannot receive by pressing the {Start}
key. See Parameter Settings, General
Settings Guide.
LAN-Fax Driver does not

work.

name, login password, or
driver encryption key is
incorrect.
Check your login user name, login

password, or driver encryption key,
and enter them correctly. Contact the
administrator.
LAN-Fax Driver does not

work.
A high security level is

set by the extended security function.
To cancel a Memory
Transmission.
Press the {Clear/Stop} key or [Stop] to

cancel the job during scanning. See
Canceling a Transmission, Facsimile
Reference.
40
When You Cannot Send or Receive Fax Messages as Wanted

Problem
Cause
Solution
To cancel a Memory
Transmission.
If the original is being sent or if it is in

standby, press the {Clear/Stop} key or
[Check / Stop Transmission File]. See
Canceling a Transmission, Facsimile
Reference.
To cancel an Immediate
Transmission.
Press the {Clear/Stop} key. See Canceling a Transmission, Facsimile Reference.
Although a group specification was set for the following, reception was not
possible.
The number of specified

destinations exceeds
the maximum number
that can be specified as
a group.
A maximum of 500 parties can be specified for a group. Check if there are over
the specified numbers registered in the
address book. If a group was registered
in another group or designated in 1-5 of
Transfer Box, transmission is canceled
but an error message does not appear.
See Registering a Names to a Group,
Cause
Solution
Receiving Station of Information Box, Forwarding, Forwarding of

Special Sender, Reception
Report e-mail, Email TX
Results, routing e-mail
received via SMTP.
Reception
Problem
The machine failed to
print received fax documents.
If this happened when

the Receive File indicator
was lit, low paper may
have caused printing to
stop.
The machine failed to

print received fax documents.
Store has been selected

Print the fax documents using a Web
for Reception File Setting. browser or the Print Stored RX File
function. See Printing Received and
Stored Documents and Printing fax
information using a Web browser,
Facsimile Reference.
Load paper into the tray.

Add toner.
See Substitute Reception, Facsimile
Reference.
The machine failed to print Add Paper indicator is lit. Load paper into the tray. See p.79
received fax documents.
Loading paper.
Printing
Problem
Cause
Solution
Print is slanted.
The tray's side fences

might not be locked.
Print is slanted.
The paper is fed at a slant. Load the paper correctly. See p.79
Loading paper.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The number of feeding in

exceeds the capacity of
the machine.
Check the side fences are locked. See

p.83 Changing the Paper Size.
Load paper only as high as the upper

limit markings on the side fences of the
paper tray or bypass tray. See Copy
41

Problem
Cause
Solution
Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is damp.

About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is too thick or

too thin.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The copy paper is wrinkled or has been folded/creased.
Use recommended paper. Use paper

that has been stored in the recommended temperature and humidity condition. See Copy Paper, About This
Machine.
Copy paper becomes

creased.
Printed paper is being

used.

Copy paper becomes

creased.
The paper is damp.

About This Machine.
Copy paper becomes

creased.

Images are only partially

printed.
The paper is damp.

About This Machine.
Black lines appear on the

print produced at the
destination.


Your Machine.
Background of received
Image density is too high. Adjust scan density. See Image Densiimages appears dirty. Imty (Contrast), Facsimile Reference.
ages from the back of the
page appear.
Printed or sent images
are spotty.
The ADF, exposure glass Clean them. See p.122 Maintaining

or scanning glass is dirty. Your Machine.
Make sure that ink or correction fluid is
dry before placing originals.
Received image is too

light.
When using moist, rough, Only use recommended paper. See

or processed paper, areas Copy Paper, About This Machine.
of print may not be fully
reproduced.

light.
When D is blinking, ton- Add toner. See p.89 Adding Toner.

er is beginning to run out.

light.
The image density has

been set too low.
The original of the
transmitted fax was
printed on paper that
is too thin.
42
Increase the scanning density. See

Image Density (Contrast), Facsimile Reference.
Ask the sender to reprint the original on thicker paper and fax it again.
When You Cannot Send or Receive Fax Messages as Wanted
Others
Problem
Cause
Solution
All fax documents stored

in memory have been lost.
Those documents include
ones stored through Memory Transmission/Reception, Memory Lock,
Substitute Reception, or
Auto Document.
When about one hour

passes after power to the
machine is turned off, all
fax documents stored in
memory are lost.
If any documents have been lost for this

reason, a Power Failure Report is automatically printed when the machine is
turned on. If fax documents stored for
Memory Transmission have been lost,
check the destinations and resend the
documents. If fax documents received
through Memory, Memory Lock or
Substitute Reception have been lost,
ask the senders to resend the documents. If Auto Documents have been
lost, reprogram them. See p.45 Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event
of Power Failure.
When a correct password

is entered, you cannot
print documents that appear in the confidential
box or bulletin board box,
or transmit / print out
stored documents.
Documents are locked by Contact the administrator.

a security function if incorrect passwords are entered a certain number of
times.
[Prg. Dest.] or [Manual Entry] does not appear.
This function is made un- Contact the administrator.

available by the enhanced
security function.
The following functions

are not available: Forwarding, Store File in the
Information Box, routing
e-mail received via
SMTP.
This function is made un- Contact the administrator.

available by the enhanced security function.
When Memory is Full

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for problems related
to full memory.
Problem
Memory is full.
Cannot scan any more.
Transmitting scanned
pages only.
Cause
The memory is full.
Solution
If you press [Exit], the machine returns
to standby mode and starts transmitting the stored pages.
43
If an Error Report is Printed

An Error Report is printed if a document cannot be successfully sent or received.
Possible causes include a problem with the machine or noise on the telephone
line. If an error occurs during transmission, resend the original. If an error occurs
during reception, ask the sender to resend the document.
Note
If an error happens frequently, contact your service representative.
The Page column gives the total number of pages. The Page not sent or
Page not received column gives the number of pages not sent or received
successfully.
You can display a destination with the User Parameters. See Parameter Settings, General Settings Guide.
You can display a sender name with the User Parameters. See Parameter Settings, General Settings Guide.
44
Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event of Power Failure
Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event of

Power Failure
This section explains the machine status when the power is turned off or if the
power fails.
R CAUTION:
Important
Do not turn off the main power switch while the power indicator is lit or
blinking. If you do, the hard disk and memory may be damaged and failure
could result.
Turn off the main power switch before pulling out the plug. If you pull out
the plug with the switch on, the hard disk and memory may be damaged and
failure could result.
Make sure that 100% is shown on the display before you unplug the machine.
If a lower value is shown, some data is currently present in memory.
Right after a power failure, the internal battery needs to be sufficiently recharged to guard against future data loss. Keep the machine plugged in and
the main power switch on for about 24 hours after the power loss.
Even if the main power switch is turned off, the contents of the machine memory
(for example, programmed numbers) will not be lost. However, if power is lost
for about one hour because the main power switch is turned off, there is a power
cut, or the power cable is removed, contents of the Fax memory are lost. Lost
items will include any fax documents stored in memory using Memory Transmission/Reception, Auto Document, Confidential Reception, Memory Lock, or
Substitute Reception.
If a file was deleted from memory, a Power Failure Report is automatically printed as soon as the power is restored.
This report can be used to identify lost files. If a memory stored for Memory
Transmission was lost, resend it. If a document received by Memory Reception
or Substitute Reception was lost, ask the sender to resend it.
RDS (Remote Diagnostic System)

If the machine has a problem, a service representative can perform various
settings over the telephone line from the service station. If you want to use
this function, change the User Parameter. See Parameter Settings, General
Settings Guide.
45
When an Error Occurs Using Internet Fax

This section explains reports that the machine sends if an Internet Fax error occurs.
Error Mail Notification

The machine sends the Error Mail Notification to the sender when it is unable to
successfully receive a particular e-mail message. A cc of this notification is also
sent to the administrator's e-mail address when one is specified.
Note
You can select to send Error Mail Notification with User Parameters. See Parameter Settings, General Settings Guide.
If Error Mail Notification cannot be sent, the Error Report (E-Mail) is printed
by the machine.
If an error occurs when an e-mail is received via SMTP, the SMTP server
sends an error e-mail to the originator of the document.
Error Report (E-Mail)

The Error Report (E-Mail) is printed by the machine when it is unable to send an
Error Mail Notification.
Server-Generated Error E-mail

The transmitting server sends this error e-mail to the originator of e-mail that
cannot be transmitted successfully (due to reasons such as specifying an incorrect e-mail address).
Note
After a server-generated error e-mail is printed, the first page of the sent document is printed.
46
Using the Printer Function
This chapter explains likely causes of and possible solutions for printer function
problems.
When a Message Appears during

Installation of the Printer Driver
This section explains what to do if a message appears when installing the printer
driver.
The following describes operations when a message appears during installation
of the printer driver. Message number 58 or 34 indicates that the printer driver
cannot be installed using Auto Run. Install the printer driver using [Add Printer]
or [Install Printer].
Message number 58 appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver
already installed.
Windows 95/98/Me
This section explains the procedure under Windows 95/98/Me.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

B Double-click the Add Printer icon.
C Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in
the following location:
RPCS (Printer Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM)
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
PCL 5c (Printer Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM)
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
PCL 6 (Printer Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM)
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
PostScript 3 (Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM)
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
47
Windows 2000
This section explains the procedure under Windows 2000.

D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003

This section explains the procedure under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

B Click [Add a printer].
48
When a Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver
Windows NT 4.0
This section explains the procedure under Windows NT 4.0.

D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5C\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
49
If USB Connection Fails

This section explains how to troubleshoot a problem related to USB connection.
Problem
Cause
Solution
The machine is not automatically recognized.
The USB cable is not con- Turn off the power of the machine, renected properly.
connect the USB cable, and then turn it
on again.
Windows has already

configured the USB settings.
Check whether the computer has identified the

machine as an unsupported device.
Open Windows' Device Manager, and

then, under [Universal Serial Bus controllers], remove any conflicting devices.
Conflicting devices have a [!] or [?] icon
by them. Take care not to accidentally
remove required devices. For details,
see Windows Help.
When using Windows 2000 / XP or
Windows Server 2003, an erroneous device is displayed under [USB Controller]
in the [Device Manager] dialog box.
Windows Me and the ma- You need to download

chine cannot be connect- USB Printing Support for
ed.
Windows Me.
50
Download USB Printing Support from

the supplier's website.
Search the model name you use on the
supplier's website, and download USB
Printing Support.

This section describes the principal messages that appear on the panel display.
If a message not described here appears, act according to the message.
Reference
Before turning the main power off, see Turning On/Off the Power, About
This Machine.
Status Messages
This section describes the machine status messages.
Message
Problem
Ready
This is the default ready message. The machine is ready

for use. No action is required.
Printing...
The machine is printing. Wait a while.
Waiting...
The machine is waiting for the next data to print. Wait a

while.
Offline
The machine is offline. To start printing, switch the machine online by pressing {Online} key.
Please wait.
The machine is preparing the development unit. Wait a

while.
Resetting job...
The machine is resetting the print job. Wait until

Ready appears on the display panel.
Setting change...
The machine is setting changing. Wait a while.
Hex Dump Mode
In the Hex Dump mode, the machine receives data in

hexadecimal format. Turn off the machine after printing, and then turn back on.
51
Alert Messages
This section describes the machine Alert messages.
Message
Cause
Cannot connect with IEEE 802.11b interface

unit was not inserted
the wireless card.
when the machine was
Turn the main power
turned on, or it was
switch off, then
pulled out after the
check the card.
machine turned on.
/ Problems with the
The settings are not
wireless card.
updated although the
/ Problems with the
unit is detected, or erwireless board.
Solution
Turn off the machine and check the
IEEE 802.11b interface unit is inserted
correctly. Then, turn the machine on
again. If the message appears again, call
rors are found while

accessing the unit.
Problems with
IEEE 1394 Board.
An error may have occurred in the IEEE 1394

board.
Turn off the main power switch, and back

on again. If the message appears again,
contact your service representative.
Problem with Hard

Disk.
An error has occurred in

the hard disk drive.

The entered password is incorrect.
The password of the encrypted PDF file has been

entered incorrectly.
Enter the correct password.
USB has a problem. An error has occurred in

the USB interface.
Hardware Problem:
Ethernet

the Ethernet board.

Use of this function is re- Contact the administrator.

You do not have
the privileges to stricted.
use this function.
Authentication
has failed.
The login user name

or password entered
is incorrect.
Check your login user name and

password.
The machine currently cannot perform authentication.
Parallel I/F board

has a problem.

the parallel interface
board.
Printer font error. An error has occurred in

the font settings.
52


Message
Memory Overflow
Cause
Solution
Maximum capacity of
PCL 5c/6 or PostScript 3
list display has been exceeded.
Reduce the value of [Resolution] in the

printer driver. Alternatively, select
[Frame Priority] from [Memory Usage] in
[System]. If this message continues to
appear after taking these steps, decrease
the number of files sent to the machine.
Checking the Error Log

If files could not be stored due to printing errors, identify the cause of the errors
by checking the error log on the control panel.
A Press the {Printer} key to display the printer screen.
AQE026S
B Press [Error Log].
An error log list appears.

Note
The most recent 30 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added
when there are 30 errors already stored, the oldest error is deleted. However, if the earliest error is a Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, or
Stored print error, it is not deleted. The error is stored separately until the
number of errors reaches 30.
If the main power switch is turned off, the log is deleted.

You cannot view the [Error Log] on the simplified display.
53
When You Cannot Print

Use the following procedures if printing does not start even after performing
[Print].
Problem
Cause
Solution
Printing does not start.
The power is off.
The machine is set to Of- Press the {Online} key.

fline.
The cause is displayed on

the display of the control
panel.
Check the error message or warning

status on the display panel and take the
required action.
The interface cable is not

connected correctly.
Connect the interface cable securely. If

it has a fastener, fasten that securely as
well. See Connecting to the Interfaces, General Settings Guide.
The correct interface cable is not being used.
The type of interface cable you should

use depends on the computer. Be sure
to use the correct one. If the cable is
damaged or worn, replace it. See Connecting to the Interfaces, General Settings Guide.
The interface cable was

connected after the machine was switched on.
Connect the interface cable before turning on the machine.
If the machine is operating in an extended wireless LAN, failure to print

might result from a weak
wireless signal.
To check signal status, press the {User

Tools / Counter} key, and then press [System Settings] on the display panel. On
the [Interface Settings] tab, select [IEEE
802.11b], and then press [Wireless LAN
Signal]. If signal quality is poor, move
the machine to a location where radio
waves can pass or remove objects that
might cause interference.
Check the cable is securely plugged

into the power outlet and the machine.
Turn on the main power switch.
(You can check signal status only when

using wireless LAN in the infrastructure mode.)
54
If the machine is operating in an extended wireless LAN, SSID settings

are incorrect.
Check using the machine's display panel that the SSID is correctly set. See
Network Settings, General Settings
Guide.
When You Cannot Print

Problem
Cause
Solution
If the machine is operating in an extended wireless LAN, the receiver's

MAC address may be
preventing communication with the access point.
Check access point settings when in the

infrastructure mode. Depending on the
access point, client access may be limited by MAC address. Also, check there
are no problems in transmission between access point and wired clients,
and between access point and wireless
clients.
The extended wireless

LAN has not started.
Confirm the orange LED is lit, and the

green LED is lit or blinks during transmission.
The login user name, log- Check the login user name, login passin password, or driver
word, or driver encryption key.
encryption key is invalid.
Advanced encryption has Check the settings of the Extended Sebeen set using the Excurity function with the administrator.
tended Security function.
Data-in lamp does not

blink or light up.
If the data-in lamp is unlit

or not flashing even after
performing [Print], the
machine has not received
the data.
When the machine is connected to a

computer via a cable, check the
computer print port settings are correct. See Confirming the Connection Method, Printer Reference.
When it is networked with a computer, Contact the administrator.
The status indicator of

the printer is lit.
The cause is displayed on

the display of the control
panel.
Updating the des-
The destination list is be- Wait until the message disappears. Do

not switch off the power while this
message is displayed. Depending on
the number of destinations to be updated, there may be some delay before you
can resume operation. Operations are
not possible while this message is displayed.
Check the error message on the display

panel and take required action. See p.51
When a Message Appears.
ing updated from the

tination list...
Please wait. Speci- network using SmartDefied destination(s) viceMonitor for Admin.
or sender's name
has been cleared.
appears.
[List / Test Print] is disabled.
A mechanical error might

have occurred.

See List/Test Print, General Settings
Guide.
Printing does not start

when using the extended
wireless LAN in Ad-hoc
mode.
The correct Communication mode is not set.
Turn the main power off and back on.

See Turning On/Off the Power,
About This Machine.
Or, change the settings for [System Settings], [Interface Settings], and [Network].
See Network Settings, General Settings Guide.
If the printing does not start, consult your service representative.
55
When the machine is connected to the computer using the interface cable
The following shows how to check the print port when the data-in lamp does
not light up or blink.
Check if the print port setting is correct. When it is connected using a parallel
interface, connect it to LPT1 or LPT2.
For Windows 95/98/Me
A Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab.
D In the [Print to the following port:] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
For Windows 2000 or Windows NT 4.0
A Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
C Click the [Ports] tab.
D In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
Windows XP
A Click the [Start] button, and then click [Printers and Faxes].
Windows Server 2003
A Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers and Faxes].
56
Other Printing Problems

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for problems that
can occur when printing from a computer.
Problem
Print is smudges.
Cause
Settings for thick paper have not been
made when printing
on thick paper in the
bypass tray.
Solution
PCL 5c/6 and PostScript 3
Select [Thick] in the [Type:] list on the [Paper]
tab.
RPCS
Select [Thick] in the [Paper type:] list on the
[Print Settings] tab.
The print on the entire

page is faded.
When D is blinking,
toner is beginning to
run out.

page is faded.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the recommended temperature and humidity condition.
See Copy Paper, About This Machine.

page is faded.
The paper is unsuitable.
Use the recommended paper. (Printing on

coarse or treated paper might result in faint
print image.) See Copy Paper, About This
Machine.

page is faded.
If the [Toner saving]

check box is selected
in the printer driver
settings, the entire
page will be faded
when printed.
For the RPCS printer driver, [Toner saving] is located on the [Print Quality] tab. For the PostScript 3 printer driver, see PostScript 3
Supplement. See the printer driver Help.
Image bleeds when

rubbed.
If you are using thick

paper, [Paper type:]
might not be set to
[Thick].
On the printer driver's [Setup] tab, set [Paper

type:] to [Thick]. See the printer driver Help.
Paper is not fed from

the selected tray.
When you are using a

Windows operating
system, printer driver
settings override
those set using the
display panel.
Set the desired input tray using the printer

driver. See the printer driver Help.
The printed image is

different from the image on the computer's
display.
With certain funcIn the application, change the layout, character

tions, such as enlarge- size, and character settings.
ment and reduction,
image layout might
be different to that on
the computer display.
The printed image is

different from the image on the computer's
display.
You might have selected to replace True

Type fonts with machine fonts in the
printing process.
To print an image similar to that of the computer display, make settings to print True Type
fonts as an image. See the printer driver Help.
57
Problem
Cause
Solution
Images are printed at

slant.
The tray's side fences

might not be locked.
Check the side fences are locked. See p.83

Changing the Paper Size.
Print is slanted.
The paper is feeding

in at a slant.
Load the paper correctly. See p.79 Loading

paper.
Misfeeds occur
frequently.
The number of sheets Load paper only as high as the upper limit
loaded exceeds the ca- markings on the side fences of the paper tray
pacity of the machine. or bypass tray. See Copy Paper, About This
Machine.
Misfeeds occur
frequently.
The paper is damp.
Misfeeds occur
frequently.
The paper is too thick

or too thin.
Use recommended paper. See Copy Paper,

About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur
frequently.
The copy paper is

wrinkled or has been
folded/creased.
Use recommended paper. Use paper that has

been stored in the recommended temperature
and humidity condition. See Copy Paper,
About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur
frequently.
Printed paper is being

used.

About This Machine.
Copy paper becomes

creased.
The paper is damp.
Copy paper becomes

creased.

About This Machine.
White lines appear.
When D is blinking,
toner is beginning to
run out.
When printing graph- If the printer driver is

ics, the output and the configured to use the
screen are different.
graphics command,
the graphics command from the machine is used to print.
If you want to print accurately, set the printer

driver to print without using the graphics
command. See the printer driver Help.
Garbled characters
are printed.
Set the correct printer language.
The correct printer

language might have
not been selected.
Images are printed in The feed orientation

Set the machine's feed orientation and the
the wrong orientation. you selected and the
printer driver's feed orientation accordingly.
feed orientation seSee the printer driver Help.
lected in the printer
driver's option setup
might not be the same.
There is considerable
delay between the
print start instruction
and actual printing.
Off mode / Sleep

mode might be set.
58
The machine requires time to warm up if it has

been in Off mode/Sleep mode. Specify Off
mode/Sleep mode in [System Settings], [Auto
Off Timer].

Problem
Cause
There is considerable
delay between the
print start instruction
and actual printing.
Processing time depends on data volume. High volume

data, such as graphics-heavy documents,
take longer to process.
Solution
If the data-in lamp is blinking, data has been
received by the printer. Wait for a moment.
Making the following setting on the printer
driver may reduce the computer's workload.
For how to open the printing preferences dialog box, see Setting Up the Printer Driver,
Printer Reference.
PCL 5c/6
Select the lower value for the [Resolution]
list on the [Print Quality] tab in the printing
preferences dialog box.
PostScript 3
If your operating system is Windows, select [PostScript (optimize for speed)] in the
[PostScript Output Option] list. [PostScript Output Option] is located as follows:
[PostScript output format:] on the [PostScript] tab in the printing preferences dialog box.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003
[PostScript Output Option] in the [PostScript Options] on the [Advanced...] on the
[Layout] tab in the printing preferences
dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[PostScript Output Option] in the [PostScript Options] on the [Document Options]
on the [Advanced] tab in the printing
preferences (document defaults) dialog
box.
RPCS
Select [Speed] in the [Print priority] on the
[Print Quality] tab in the printing preferences
dialog box.
Also, select the [User settings] check box,
and then click [Change User Settings...].
Select the lower value for the [Resolution:]
list on the [Image Adjustments] tab in the
[Change User Settings] dialog box.
See the printer driver Help.
Images are cut off, or
excess is printed.
You may be using paper smaller than the

size selected in the application.
Use the same size paper as that selected in the

application. If you cannot load paper of the
correct size, use the reduction function to reduce the image, and then print. See the printer
driver Help.
59

Problem
Cause
Solution
Page layout is not as

expected.
Print areas differ depending on machine

used. Information
that fits on a single
page on one machine
may not fit on a single
page of another machine.
Adjust the [Printable area:] setting in the [Printer

Configuration...] dialog box on the [Print Settings]
tab in the RPCS printer driver. See the printer
driver Help.
Photo images are

coarse.
Some applications
print at lower resolution.
Use the application's settings to specify a higher resolution.
Solid lines are printed

as broken lines.
Dither patterns do not

match.
Make the following settings with the printer

driver: Change the [Dithering:] setting on the
[Image Adjustments] tab in the [Change User Settings...] dialog box, on the [Print Quality] tab in
the RPCS printer driver. See the printer driver
Help.
Optional components
connected to the machine are not recognized when using
Windows 95 / 98 /
Me, Windows 2000 /
XP, Windows Server
2003, and Windows
NT 4.0.
Bidirectional communication is not working.
Set up optional devices on the Properties of the

printer.
Duplex printing is
malfunctioning.
Duplex printing cannot be done with paper set in the bypass

tray.
When using duplex printing, make settings to

use paper from a tray other than the bypass
tray.
Duplex printing is
malfunctioning.
The upper tray cannot

be used as an output
destination in duplex
mode.
Specify a another output tray.
Duplex printing is
malfunctioning.
You have loaded thick Specify another paper type.

paper heavier than
169 g/m2.
Duplex printing is
malfunctioning.
Duplex printing cannot be done with a

tray for which [1 Sided
Copy] has been specified as Paper Type on
the System Settings
menu.
60
Change the Paper Type setting for the tray to

[2 Sided Copy] on the System Settings menu.
See System Settings, General Settings
Guide.

Problem
Cause
Solution
When using Windows The correct applica95 / 98 / Me / 2000 / tion or printer driver
XP, Windows Server
settings are not made.
2003, or Windows NT
4.0, combined printing
or booklet printing
does not come out as
expected.
Make sure the application's paper size and orientation settings match those of the printer
driver. If a different paper size and orientation
are set, select the same size and orientation.
A print instruction
was issued from the
computer, but printing did not start.
User Authentication
may have been set.
Contact the administrators.
No transmission
when using 1394 interface connection.
Interface connection has not been

made.
Check using the following procedure:
The correct computer settings are

not made.
A Confirm the IEEE 1394 interface cable is
connected securely.
B Restart the computer. If the error occurs
even after executing the above operation,

proceed to the following steps.
C Unplug the IEEE 1394 interface cable con-
nected to the computer.

D Run the utility tool for the IEEE 1394 inter-
face board, which is stored in the following

path on the CD-ROM Printer Drivers and
Utilities:
\UTILITY\1394\
(For more information about using the utility tool for IEEE 1394, see the README file
in the same directory on the CD-ROM.)
E Restart the computer.
Changes to printer
The correct printer
driver color settings
driver settings are not
produce extreme
made.
change in print colors.
Make only minor adjustments to the [Balance

Adjustments] setting on the printer driver's
[Change User Settings] tab. The sample displayed on the printer driver gives only an indication of the adjustment, it does not give an
accurate indication of the printed color.
Images are not printed in the specified

colors.
The correct printer

driver settings are not
made.
If it is only one particular color that does not

print, turn off the machine's power, and then
turn it back on.
If the problem persists, contact your service
representative.
Color originals are

printed in black and
white.
No color print settings are made on the

printer driver.
For the functional window: On the [Setup]

tab, for [Color/Black and White:], select [Color].
For the custom setting: On the [Print Settings] tab, for [Color/Black and White:], select
[Color].
61

Problem
PDF files do not print
out/cannot perform
[PDF Direct Print].
Cause
PDF files are password-protected.
Solution
To print password-protected PDF files, enter
the password in the [PDF Menu] or on Web Image Monitor.
For details about [PDF Menu], see PDF
Menu, General Settings Guide.
For details about Web Image Monitor, see
the Web Image Monitor Help.

out/cannot perform
[PDF Direct Print].
PDF files cannot be

printed if they are
print-disabled in PDF
file security setting.
Change the PDF file security setting.

out/cannot perform
[PDF Direct Print].
High compression
PDF files created using the machine's
scanner function cannot print directly.
Open the application used to create the PDF,

and then print the file using the application's
driver.
Re-save the file in normal (non-compressed)
PDF format.
Some types of High Compression PDF files are
not supported. Consult your sales representative about the supported file types.
[PDF Direct Print] produces strange or malformed characters.
Fonts were not embedded.
Embed fonts in the PDF file you want to print

and then print.
Printing by Bluetooth
is slow.
The number of jobs

exceeds the capacity
of the machine.
Reduce the number of jobs.
Printing by Bluetooth
is slow.
A communication
error might have
occurred.
Remove the machine from close proximity

with IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN devices.
Interference from
IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN)
devices can reduce
communication
speed.
If there are active IEEE 802.11b wireless

LAN devices or other Bluetooth devices
nearby, relocate the machine or disable
those devices.
Bluetooth transmission speeds are

not high.
If the problem cannot be solved, contact your service representative.
62
When PictBridge Printing Does Not Work
When PictBridge Printing Does Not Work

This section explains likely causes and possible solutions for problems that can
occur when PictBridge printing.
Problem
PictBridge is not available.
Cause
There is a problem with
the USB connection or the
PictBridge settings.
Solution
Use the following procedure to check
the connection and settings:
A Disconnect and then reconnect the
USB cable.
B Check the PictBridge settings are
enabled.
C Disconnect the USB cable, and then
turn off the machine. Turn the machine back on. When the machine
has fully booted up, reconnect the
USB cable.
When two or more digital
cameras are connected,
the second and subsequent cameras are not
recognized.
You have connected mul- Connect one digital camera only. Do

tiple digital cameras.
not connect multiple cameras.
Printing is disabled.
The number of originals

exceeds the maximum
number of pages that can
be printed at a time.
The maximum specifiable print quantity at a time is 999. Respecify the quantity to 999 or less, and then retry printing.
Printing is disabled.
There is no paper of the

specified size remaining.
There is no paper of the specified size

remaining.
If you have to use paper that is not of

the specified size, perform Form Feed.
To cancel printing, perform Job Cancel.
63
64
Using the Scanner Function
This chapter explains likely causes of and possible solutions for scanner function
problems.
When Scanning is Not Done as Expected

This section explains causes and remedies when scan results are not as expected.
Problem
Cause
Solution
The scanned image is

dirty.
The exposure glass or auto docu- Clean these parts. See p.122
ment feeder (ADF) is dirty.
Maintaining Your Machine.
The image is distorted

or out of position.
The original was moved during

scanning.
Do not move the original during

scanning.
The image is distorted

or out of position.
The original was not pressed flat

against the exposure glass.
Make sure that the original is

pressed flat against the exposure
glass.
The scanned image is

upside down.
The original was placed upside

down.
Place the original in the correct

orientation. See Placing Originals, Copy/Document Server
Reference.
No image results from

scanning.
The original was placed with the

front and back reversed.
When the original is placed directly on the exposure glass, the

side to be scanned must face
down. When the original is fed
via the ADF, the side to be
scanned must face up. See Placing Originals, Copy/Document
Server Reference.
Images are scanned in

rotated.
If you set the original with its upper edge backward and save full
color/grey scale images as a TIFF
or JPEG file, they are scanned in
rotated.
When placing a stack of originals

in the ADF, place their upper
edges first.
If you scan originals using

functions other than the network TWAIN scanner function, certain paper size and
resolution settings may produce scanned images that are
larger than the specified size
because of margins being
added to the sides.
Scanning at a higher resolution

may reduce the margins.
The scanned image

contains white spaces.
See Various Scan Settings,

Scanner Reference.
If the File Format Converter

(optional ) is installed, the
margins may become wider.
65
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files

The following sections explain likely causes of and solutions for Network Delivery
and E-mail Sending-related problems.
When Stored Files Cannot be Accessed

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for job access-related
problems.
Problem
The stored file is locked
and is not accessible.
Cause
Solution
The file, which is password pro- Contact the administrator.

tected, is locked because the password was incorrectly entered ten
times.
When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scan file

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the Browse
Network failing to operate when files are sent.
Problem
Cause
The network cannot be The following machine settings

browsed when specify- may not be correct:
ing the destination
IPv4 address
folder.
Subnet Mask
Solution
Check the settings. See Network
Settings , General Settings
Guide.
When the TWAIN Driver Cannot be Started

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the TWAIN driver
failing to operate.
Problem
Cause
Solution
The Scanner Properties

dialog box cannot be
displayed.
Advanced encryption has been

specified in the extended security
setting.
For details about the extended security setting, contact an administrator.
66
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files
When Stored Files Cannot be Edited

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the TWAIN driver
failing to operate.
Problem
Cause
Stored files cannot be

deleted. File names and
passwords cannot be
changed. Files cannot
be redelivered.
Limits have been imposed using

the available extended security
function.
Solution
When the Network Delivery Function Cannot be Used

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the Network
Delivery function failing to operate.
Problem
Cause
Solution
The network delivery

function cannot be
used.
The delivery software may be an

old version or a security setting
may be specified.
The network delivery

function cannot be
used.
The network delivery function

setting is not correct.
Specify it correctly. See Settings

Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner, General Settings
Guide.
Operations are not possible when messages appear

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for messages that
appear and when the machine fails to operate.
Message
Cause
Solution
Destination list /
machine settings
are updated. Selected destinations or function
settings have been
cleared. Please
re-select the settings.
The destination list is being updated from the network using

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Depending on the number of destinations to be updated, there
may be some delay before you
can resume operation. Operations are not possible while this
message is displayed.
Wait until the message disappears. Do not switch off the power while this message is
displayed.
67
When a Message is Displayed

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for error messages
that may appear on the machine's control panel.
When a Message is Displayed on the Control Panel

This section explains causes and remedies if an error message appears on the
display of the control panel.
Important
If a message not described here appears, act according to the message. For
information about how to turn off the main power switch, see About This
Machine.
Message
Cause
Solution
Connection with
LDAP server has
failed. Check the
server status.

has failed. Try the operation once more.
crowded. Check the information of System Settings. See System Settings,
LDAP server authentication has

failed. Check the
settings.
The user name and pass- Make settings correctly for the user name
word differ from those
and the password for LDAP server auset for LDAP Authentica- thentication.
tion.
The destination
list has been updated. Specified
destination(s) or
sender's name has
been cleared.
A specified destination or Specify the destination or sender's

sender's name was
name again.
cleared when the destination list in the delivery
server was updated.
Updating the des- A network error has octination list has curred.
failed. Try again?
Check whether the server is connected.
A network error has ocThe destination

list has been up- curred.
dated. Specified
destination(s) or
sender's name has
been cleared.
If a destination or sender's name was already selected, re-select it after this

message disappears.
68

Message
Cause
Solution
Exceeded max.
number of files
which can be sent
at the same time.
Reduce the number
of the selected
files.
The number of files exceeded the maximum

number possible.
Reduce the number of files and send

them again.
Cannot detect
original size.
Place original
again, then press
the Start key.
You have loaded paper of

a size not shown on the
paper size selector.
Place the original correctly.
Exceeded max. No.

of results to
display. Max.:
Search results have exceeded the max. displayable number.
Search again after changing the search

conditions.
You do not have

the privileges to
use this function.
The machine has not been Contact the administrator.

set to allow you to use the
function.
Exceeded max.
number of standby
files.Try again
after the current
file is sent.
The maximum number of There are 100 files waiting in the sendstandby files was exceeding queue for e-mail, Scan to Folder, or
ed.
delivery functions. Wait until files have
been sent.
Exceeded time
limit for LDAP
server search.
Check the server
status.

has failed.
crowded. Check the information of System Settings. See System Settings,
The specified group

contains some destination(s) that do
not have access
privileges. Do you
want to select only
the privileged destination(s)?
The specified group contains some destinations

for sending by e-mail and
some destinations for
sending by Scan to Folder.
To select destinations for sending by email, press [Select] for the message displayed on the e-mail screen. To select
destination for sending by Scan to Folder, press [Select] for the message displayed on the Scan to Folder screen.
Specify the scan size.

When placing an original directly
on the exposure glass, the lifting/
lowering action of the ADF triggers
the automatic original size detection
process. Lift the ADF by more than
30 degrees. See Placing Originals,
69

Message
Cause
Solution
Cannot find the

specified path.
Please check the
settings.
The destination computer name or folder name is

invalid.
Check whether the computer name and

the folder name for the destination are
correct.
Exceeded max. number of alphanumeric characters for

the path.
The maximum number of

specifiable alphanumeric
characters in a path has
been exceeded.
The maximum number of characters

which can be entered for the path is 128.
Check the number of character you entered, and then enter the path again.
See Transmission function, Scanner
Reference.

The selected
file(s) contained files without the authority to do so.
file(s) without
deleted.
The files can be deleted by the file administrator. To delete a file which you
are not authorized to delete, contact the
administrator.
You cannot delete a file

which is waiting to be
transmitted (Waiting...
status displayed) or
whose information is being changed with DeskTopBinder.
Cancel transmission (Waiting...status

cleared) or the DeskTopBinder setting,
and then delete the file.
Some of selected
files are currently in use.
They could not be
deleted.
You cannot cancel a file

Cannot cancel
currently being sent.
sending all selected file(s).
Certain file(s)
are currently being sent.
You can only cancel files waiting to be

sent. You cannot cancel files already
sent or currently being sent, files that
were sent but did not reach the destination, or files that have been cancelled.
Selected file is
currently in use.
Cannot change
file name.
You cannot change the

name of a file whose status is Waiting... or that
is being edited with
DeskTopBinder.
Change the file name after canceling

delivery or completing editing.
Selected file is
currently in use.
Cannot change
password.

password of a file whose
status is Waiting... or
that is being edited with
DeskTopBinder.
Delete the password after canceling delivery or completing editing.
Selected file is
currently in use.
Cannot change
user name.

sender's name whose sta- before sending e-mail. Send e-mail after
tus is Waiting... or that specifying the sender's name.
is being edited with
DeskTopBinder.
70

Message
Cause
Connection with
the destination
has failed. Check
the status and
connection. To
check the current
status, press
[Scanned Files
Status].
The correct Network settings are not made.
Solution
Check the network settings of the
client computer.
Check that components such as the
LAN cable are connected properly.
Check that the server settings are
correct and the server is working
properly.
The entered user name or Check that the user name and passAuthentication
word are correct.
with the destina- password was invalid.
tion has failed.
Check that the ID and password for
the destination folder are correct.
Check settings.
To check the cur A password of 128 or more characrent status,
ters may not be recognized.
press [Scanned
Files Status].
Sender has not

been specified.
The sender's name was

not specified.
Exceeded max. Email size. Sending

E-mail has been
cancelled. Check
[Max. E-mail Size]
in Scanner Features.
The maximum e-mail size Increase the size of [Max. E-mail Size].
has been exceeded.
Set [Divide & Send E-mail] to [Yes (per
Page)] or [Yes (per Max. Size)].
Sending the data

has failed. The
data will be resent later.
A network error has occurred and a file was not

sent correctly.
Wait until sending is retried automatically after the preset interval. If sending
fails again, contact the administrator.
Transmission has
failed. To check
the current status,
press [Scanned
Files Status].
While a file was being

sent, a network error occurred and the file could
not be sent correctly.
crowded. Contact the administrator. If
multiple files were sent, use the
Scanned Files Status screen to check for
which file the problem occurred.
Transmission has
failed. Insufficient memory in the
destination hard
disk. To check the
current status,
press [Scanned
Files Status].
Transmission has failed. Allocate sufficient space.

There was not enough
free space on the hard
disk of the SMTP server,
FTP server, or client computer at the destination.

before sending e-mail. Send e-mail after
specifying the sender's name.
See Send Settings, General Settings

Guide.
71
Message
Cause
Solution
Output buffer is
full. Sending the
data has been
cancelled. Please
try again later.
Too many jobs are in

standby state, and sending was cancelled.
Retry sending after sending jobs in

standby state completes.
Exceeded max.
number of pages
per file. Do you
want to store the
scanned pages as
1 file?
The file being stored has

exceeded the max. number of pages for one file.
Specify whether to use the data or not.

Scan the pages that were not scanned
and store them as a new file. See Storing Files Using the Scanner Function,
Scanner Reference.
Too many files are waitExceeded maximum

number of file to ing to be delivered.
store. Delete all
unnecessary files.
Please try again after they have been

delivered.
Exceeded max. num- Too many files are waiting to be delivered.

ber of stored
files. Cannot send
the scanned data
as capturing files
is unavailable.
Please try again after they have been

delivered.
Exceeded max. number of files which

can be used in
Document Server at
the same time.

files that can be stored in
the document server has
been exceeded.
Check the files stored by the other functions, and then delete unneeded files.
See Document Server, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Entered protection code for

destination is
incorrect. Please
re-enter.
The correct protect destination code was not entered.
Make sure the protection code is correct, and then enter it again. See Registering a Protection Code, General
Settings Guide.
Entered user code

is not correct.
You have entered an incorrect user code.
Check the authentication settings, and

then enter a correct user code.
Exceeded max.
number of alphanumeric characters.
The maximum enterable

number of alphanumeric
characters has been exceeded.
Make sure the maximum number of

characters which can be entered, and
then enter it again. See Values of various set items for transmission/storage/delivery function, Scanner
Reference.
Authentication
has failed.

is incorrect.
Check the login user name and login

password. The machine is unable to authenticate. Contact an administrator.
72

Message
The entered path

is not correct.
Please re-enter.
Cause
Solution
The entered path format

is incorrect.
Confirm the destination computer and

the path, and then enter it again.
Captured file ex- The maximum number of

ceeded max. num- pages per file has been
ber of pages per exceeded.
file. Cannot send
the scanned data.
Reduce the number of pages in the

transmitted file, and then resend the
file. See Storage function, Scanner
Reference.
Original is being The machine is using

scanned by anoth- another function such
as copying.
er function.
Please wait.
Retry scanning after the operation with

the other function is completed.
[Copier][Document Server]...
E-mail address
entered is not
correct. Please
re-enter.
The entered e-mail address is incorrect.
Make sure the e-mail address is correct,

and then enter it again.
Memory is full.
Scanning has been
cancelled. Press
[Send] to send
the scanned data,
or press [Cancel]
to delete.
Because there is not

enough free hard disk
space in the machine for
delivering or sending by
e-mail while storing in
the Document Server,
only some of the pages
could be scanned.
Memory is full.
Cannot scan. The
scanned data will
be deleted.
Because of insufficient
hard disk space, the
first page could not be
scanned.
Try one of the following measures:
Wait for a while, and then retry the

scan operation.
Reduce the scan area or scanning
resolution. See Setting items for
Scan Settings, Scanner Reference.
Delete unneeded stored files. See
Deleting a Stored File, Scanner
Reference.
Memory is full.
Do you want to
store scanned
file?
Because there is not

enough free hard disk
space in the machine for
storing in the Document
Server, only some of the
pages could be scanned.
No paper is set in the

No paper. Load
specified paper tray.
paper of one of
the following
sizes, then press
[Start Printing].
Load paper of the sizes listed in the

message.
73

Message
Cause
Exceeded max. data The scanned original exceeded maximum data

capacity.Check
the scanning reso- capacity.
lution, then reset
original(s).
Solution
Specify the scan size and resolution
again. Note that it may not be possible
to scan very large originals at a high
resolution. See Relationship between
Resolution and File Size, Scanner Reference.
Exceeded max. data

capacity.Check
scanning resolution, then press
Start key again.
The scanned data exceeded Specify the scan size and resolution
maximum data capacity.
again. Note that it may not be possible
to scan very large originals at a high
resolution. See Relationship between
Resolution and File Size, Scanner Reference.
Exceeded max.
page capacity per
file. Press
[Send] to send the
scanned data, or
press [Cancel] to
delete.
The number of scanned

pages exceeded maximum page capacity.
74
Select whether to send the data so far.
When a Message is Displayed on the Client Computer

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the main error
messages displayed on the client computer when using the TWAIN driver.
Important
If a message not described here appears, act according to the message. For
information about how to turn off the main power switch, see About This
Machine.
Message
Clear Misfeed(s)
in ADF.
Cause
A paper misfeed has occurred inside the ADF.
Solution
Remove jammed originals, and place
them again.
Check whether the originals are suitable to be scanned by the machine.
Invalid Winsock
version. Please
use version 1.1
or higher.
You are using an invalid

version of Winsock.
Install the operating system of the computer or copy Winsock from the operating system CD-ROM.
The name is already in use.

Check the registered names.
You tried to register a

name that is already in
use.
Use another name.
Cannot detect the The set original was mis- Place the original correctly.
paper size of the aligned.
Specify the scan size.
original. Specify
When placing an original directly
the scanning size.
on the exposure glass, the lifting/lowering action of the ADF
triggers the automatic original size
detection process. Lift the ADF by
more than 30 degrees.
Cannot add any

more scanning
mode.

registerable scan modes
has been exceeded.
The maximum number of modes that

can be stored is 100. Delete unneeded
modes.
Cannot specify
any more scanning
area.

registerable scan areas
has been exceeded.
The maximum number of scanning areas that can be stored is 100. Delete unneeded scanning area.
An unrecoverable error
Call Service
Please call your has occurred in the maservice represen- chine.
tative.
Call your service representative.
75

Message
Cause
The TWAIN scanner

Scanner is not
available on the function cannot be used
specified device. on this machine.
Scanner is not
available. Check
the scanner connection status.
The machine's main

power switch is off.
The machine is not
connected to the network correctly.
Solution
Set the main power switch to On.

Check whether the machine is connected to the network correctly.
Deselect the personal firewall function of the client computer.
Use an application such as telnet to
make sure SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 is
set as the machines protocol. See
Network Settings, General Settings Guide and Using telnet,
Network Guide.
No response from
the scanner.
The machine or client

Check whether the machine or client
computer is not connected computer is connected to the network
to the network correctly.
correctly.
No response from
the scanner.
The network is crowded.
Wait for a while, and then try to reconnect.
Error has occurred

in the scanner.
The application-specified scan conditions have

exceeded the setting
range of the machine.
Check whether the scanning settings made with the application exceed the setting range of the
machine.
Disable the client computer's own
firewall.
Fatal error has

occurred in the
scanner.
An unrecoverable error
has occurred on the machine.
An unrecoverable error has occurred in

the machine. Call your service representative.
Cannot connect to
the scanner. Check
the network Access
Mask settings in
User Tools.
An access mask is set.
Contact the network or scanner administrator.
Scanner is not
ready. Check the
scanner and the
options.
The ADF cover is open.
Check whether the ADF cover is closed.
76

Message
Cause
Solution
Insufficient mem- Scanner memory is insuf- Reset the scan size.

ficient.
ory. Reduce the
Lower the resolution.
scanning area.
Set with no compression. See
TWAIN Driver help.
The problem may be due to the following cause:
The Relationship between the Resolution and the Scanning Area
chart in Help for halftone scanning
might not always apply. Scanning
cannot be performed if large values
are set for brightness when using
halftone or high resolution.
Cannot find "XXX"

scanner used for
the previous
scan. "YYY" will
be used instead.
(XXX and YYY indicate scanner names.)
The main power

switch of the previously used scanner is
not set to On.
The machine is not
Check whether the main power

switch of the scanner used for the
previous scan is turned off.
Check the previously used scanner is

Cancel the Personal Firewall of the
client computer.
Use an application such as telnet to
make sure SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 is
set as the machines protocol. See
Network Settings, General Settings Guide and Using telnet,
Network Guide.
Select the scanner used for the previous scan.
Error has occurred

in the scanner
driver.

the driver.
Check whether the network cable is

connected correctly to the client
computer.
Check whether the Ethernet board
of the client computer is recognized
correctly by Windows.
Check whether the client computer
can use the TCP/IP protocol.
Communication er- A communication error

ror has occurred has occurred on the network.
on the network.
Check whether the client computer can

use the TCP/IP protocol.
77

Message
Cause
Solution
Scanner is in use A function of the machine Wait for a while and reconnect.
other than the scanner
for other function. Please wait. function is being used such
as the copier function.
Insufficient mem- Memory is insufficient.

ory. Close all
other applications, then restart scanning.
Close all the unnecessary applications running on the client computer.

Uninstall the TWAIN driver, and
then reinstall it after restarting the
computer.
No User Code is
registered. Consult your system
administrator.
Access is restricted with

user codes.
Any of Login User

Name, Login Password or Driver
Encryption Key is
incorrect.

Check the login user name, login
name, password, or drivpassword, and driver encryption
er encryption key was inkey.
valid.
Permission to use this function has
not been granted. Contact the administrator.
Cannot register
the user because
the scanner's address book is
full.
Failed to authenticate the

user at the authentication
server because the address book is full.
Contact the administrator of the machine.
The user has been

already registered in the
scanner's address
book.
Failed to authenticate the

user at the authentication
server because same user
name has been already
registered in the address
book.
78
6. Adding paper, Toner and

Staples
This chapter explains troubleshooting procedures that are applicable to all the
machine's functions.
Loading paper
This section explains what to do when paper runs out and needs reloading.
R CAUTION:
When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
Tray 1 and LCT use Letter- sized paper (8 1/2 11K) exclusively. Load only
Letter- sized paper at all times.
Note
Fan the paper before loading.
Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.

If you want to load A4K paper in Tray 1 or LCT, contact your service representative.
For paper types and sizes, see Recommended Paper Sizes and Types,
About This Machine.
To load paper in the bypass tray, see Using the Bypass Tray, Copy/Document Server Reference.
79
Loading Paper into the Paper Trays

The following procedure explains loading paper (in paper tray 2 as an example).
Important
Tray 1 uses only Letter- sized paper (8 1/2 11K). If you want to load A4K,
The position of the side and end fences can be changed in tray 2, 1 tray paper
unit, and 2 tray paper unit. Paper of various sizes can then be loaded in them.
When changing paper size, see Changing the Paper Size.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
A Carefully pull out the paper tray until it stops.
6
AQD027S
B Square the paper and load it print side up.
AQD028S
C Carefully push the paper tray fully in.

Note
If you load a paper size that is not selected automatically, you will need to
specify the paper size with the control panel.
Reference
p.83 Changing the Paper Size
p.86 Changing to a Size That is Not Automatically Detected
80
Loading paper
Loading Paper into the Large Capacity Tray (LCT)

The following procedure explains loading paper into the large capacity tray
(LCT).
Important
LCT (optional) uses Letter- sized paper (8 1/2 11K) exclusively. Only
load 8 1/2 11K paper. If you want to load A4K, contact your service
representative.
Align the paper stacks and load them against the left and right walls, or a paper misfeed might occur.
A Pull out the LCT, slowly until it stops.
6
AQD029S
B With the print side up, align all four sides of two paper stacks, and then
load them next to each other in the tray. Each side has a limit of 1,000 sheets.
AQD030S
C Push the paper tray slowly in until it stops.
81
Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper

The following explains loading paper whose orientation and print side is specified (letterhead paper).
Orientation-fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper (for example, letterhead
paper, punched paper, or copied paper) might not print correctly, depending on
how the originals and paper are placed. Select [On] in [Letterhead Setting] under
[Copier / Document Server Features], and then place the original and paper as
shown below. See Letterhead Setting, General Settings Guide. When printing
with the printer function, placement orientation is the same.
For printing using the printer function, load paper in the same orientation.
Exposure glass
ADF
copy
scanner
6
Paper Orientation
Paper
loading
Paper tray
Bypass tray
Copy mode: Copy mode: Printer

Place origi- Place origi- mode
Copy mode: Copy mode: Printer

Place origi- Place origi- mode
nals on the
exposure
glass.
nals on the
exposure
glass.
nals in the
ADF.
nals in the
ADF.
Paper orientationK
Paper orientationL
Note
For [System Settings], specify Letterhead as Paper Type for the paper tray
you want to use. See Tray Paper Settings, General Settings Guide.
82
Changing the Paper Size

This section explains how to change a paper size.
Procedures for changing the paper size differ depending on the tray (tray 1 or
other optional paper tray units). Make sure you are following the appropriate
procedure before you begin.
Note
Be sure to select the paper size with User Tools. If you do not, misfeeds might
occur.
Tray 1 and LCT (optional) use only Letter- sized paper (8 1/2 11K). To
load A4K, contact your service representative.
Fan the paper before loading.
Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
For details about paper sizes and types, see Copy Paper, About This
Machine.
83
Changing the Paper Size in the Paper Tray

The following procedure explains how to change a paper size in the paper tray.
Important
Check the top of the paper is aligned to the right side.
A Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used for copying, and then
pull the tray carefully out until it stops.
AQD027S
B Remove papers if loaded.

C Release the lock on the side fences.
AMJ015S
D While pressing down the release lever, slide the side fences until they are
aligned the paper size you want to load.
AMJ016S
84
E Slide the end fence until it is aligned with the size of paper to you want to
load.
ZHXH760J
F Square the paper and load it print side up.
6
AQD028S
G Re-lock the side fences again.
AMJ055S
H Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

I Check the size on the display.
Note
If there is space between the side fence and paper, bring the side fence
flush against the edge of the paper.
85
Changing to a Size That is Not Automatically Detected

If you load a paper size that is not selected automatically, you need to specify the
paper size with the control panel.
Important
Following paper sizes that are not selected automatically.
Tray 2, Optional paper feed unit (Tray 3, 4):

A3L, B4L, A4KL, 71/4 101/2KL, 8 13L, 81/2 13L, 81/4
13L, 11 15L, 10 14L, 8 10L
Bypass Tray:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 12 18L, 81/2
14L, 81/2 11K, 71/4 101/2KL, 8 13L, 81/2 13L, 81/4
13L, 11 15L, 10 14L, 8 10L
AQE025S
B Press [System Settings].
86
C Press [Tray Paper Settings] tab.
D Select the tray for which you want to change the paper settings.
Press either of [Tray Paper Size: Tray 2] to [Tray Paper Size: Tray 4].
6
E Select the loaded paper size and feed direction, and then press [OK].
The set paper size and feed direction is displayed.
87
F Press the {User Tools / Counter} key.

The initial display is shown.
Note
If you want to print on paper that is selected automatically after printing
on a paper size that is not selected automatically, you must return the setting to Auto Detect. Reload the paper, select Auto Detect in step E. The
setting is returned to Auto Detect.
88
Adding Toner
Adding Toner
This section explains adding and storing toner.
R WARNING:
Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner containers
in accordance with local regulations.
R CAUTION:
Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.
R CAUTION:
If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a
fresh air environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
R CAUTION:
If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large
amounts of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
R CAUTION:
If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
R CAUTION:
Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when removing a paper jam or
replacing toner. If your skin comes into contact with toner, wash the affected
area thoroughly with soap and water.
If toner gets on your clothing, wash with cold water. Hot water will set the
toner into the fabric and may make removing the stain impossible.
R CAUTION:
Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and functionality, and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies available at an authorized dealer.
R CAUTION:
Do not open toner cartridges forcefully. Toner can spill, dirtying your clothes
or hands, and possibly resulting in accidental ingestion.
89
Important
Fault may occur if you use toner other than the recommended type.
When adding toner, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, settings
will be lost.
Always add toner when the machine instructs you.
When a message DAdd Toner is shown on the display, replace the applicable color-toner.
Store toner containers in a cool, dry place free from direct sunlight.
Store on a flat surface.
Note
You can check name of the required toner name and the replacement procedure using the DAdd Toner screen.
Press [System Status] to check contact number where you can order supplies.
See p.5 Checking Machine Status and Settings.
You can add all four color toners in the same way.
Inserting Toner
The following describes how to replace toner.

Important
Do not shake the removed toner cartridge. The remaining toner might scatter.
AQE038S
90
Adding Toner
When Toner Remains

Toner can remain inside the toner cartridge in certain environments. If this happens, set the toner cartridge again. Toner will be supplied automatically, and
you can then continue to use it.
Sending Faxes or Scanned Documents When Toner Has Run Out

When the machine has run out of toner, the indicator on the display lights. Note
that even if there is no toner left, you can still send faxes or scanned documents.
Important
If number of communications executed after the toner has run out and not
listed in the automatically output Journal exceeds 200, communication is not
possible.
A Make sure that the machine is in facsimile or scanner mode.

B Press [Exit], and then perform transmission operation.
The error message disappears.
Note
The report that can be printed for transmitted files cannot be printed for
files transmitted with Memory Transmission.
If the fax or scanner screen does not appear in step A, press the {Facsimile}
key or {Scanner} key.
Used Toner
Toner cannot be re-used.
Bring the stored used container to your sales representative or service representative for recycling through our recycling system. If you discard it on your own,
treat it as general plastic waste material.
91
Maintenance
This section explains how to adjust the color registration and gradation by specifying the settings in [Maintenance].
Adjusting the Color Registration

When the machine is moved, the Fusing Unit is replaced, or after printing repeatedly for some time, registration shifting might occur. By performing color
registration adjustment, you can maintain optimum print results.
Color Registration
If the color documents show registration shifting, perform automatic color
registration.
AQE025S
B Press [Maintenance].
92
Maintenance
C Press [Color Registration].
D Press [OK].
6
Auto color registration takes about fifty seconds. When it is completed, the
display returns to the color registration menu.
E When you have made all the settings, press the {User Tools / Counter} key.
The initial display is shown.
93

If a certain color is strong or the color of the copy differs from the original, adjust
the yellow, magenta, cyan and black balance.
Note
If DAdd Toner is shown on the display panel, the test pattern cannot be
printed.
AQE025S
B Press [Maintenance].
94
Maintenance
C Press [Auto Color Calibration].
D Press [Start].
6
E Press [Start Printing] and a test pattern will be printed.
F Place the test pattern on the exposure glass and press [Start Scanning].
The image will be corrected after Scanning...Please wait disappears.
95
Note
When performing the auto color calibration from the copy function, press
[Start] under Copier Function. When performing from the printer function,
press [Start] under Printer Function.
The test pattern will not be read if it is set in the ADF.

When performing the auto color calibration from the printer function, select test patterns from [600 600 dpi], [1800 600 dpi] and [2400 600 dpi] and
then press [Start Printing].
The test pattern will be printed on an A4K, 81/2 11K size page (If
A4K is not available then A3 L, B4 JISL will be used.). Make sure to
check the paper set in the paper tray.
Set the test pattern in the following way:
6
GCCLCPIE
When the ADF is installed, make sure to set the test pattern on the exposure glass, and then 2 or 3 white sheets, same size as the test pattern, above
the test pattern.
96
Maintenance
Returning to the Previous Setting

Previous Setting means to return to the previous status before any changes.
A Press [Previous Setting].
B Press [Yes].
The settings return to the previous contents.

Note
When returning the auto color calibration of the copy function, press [Previous Setting] of the Copier Function. If returning the auto color calibration
of the printer function, press [Previous Setting] of the Printer Function.
When returning the auto color calibration from the printer function, select
test patterns from [600 600 dpi], [1800 600 dpi] and [2400 600 dpi] and then
press [Yes].
97
Adding Staples
This section explains what to do when staples need replacing.
R CAUTION:
Important
Stapling failures or jams may occur if you use a staple cartridge other than
that recommended.
Refill the stapler according to the finisher type. (Check the type if you are unsure.) For details about type of finisher, see Options, About This Machine.
SR790
The following procedure explains how to add staples to the SR790.
AQE904S
Note
If you cannot pull out the upper unit, there are staples remaining inside the
cartridge. Use all the staples, do not add more.
98
Adding Staples
Finisher SR3030 and Booklet Finisher SR3020

The following procedure explains how to add staples to the Finisher SR3030 and
Booklet Finisher SR3020.
AQE003S
Note
99
Booklet Finisher SR3020 (Saddle Stitch)

The following procedure explains how to add staples to the Booklet Finisher
SR3020.
AQE004S
Note
100
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge

If the transmission stamp becomes faint, replace the cartridge.
Important
This stamp cartridge is used for facsimile and scanner functions.
Do not add ink to the cartridge by yourself. Neglecting this can cause ink
leakage.
Be sure not to dirty your fingers with ink from the cartridge.
Use the cartridge specified for this machine.
A Open the ADF cover.
6
AQD032S
B Raise lever P2, and then pull open cover P2.
AQD033S
C Push on the area of cover P3 marked PUSH, and then open the cover P3.
AQD034S
101
D Pull out the old stamp cartridge.
AQD035S
E Insert the new stamp cartridge.

Push in the cartridge until the metal parts are no longer visible.
6
AQD036S
F Close cover P3, P2, and the ADF cover.
102
7. Clearing Misfeeds
This chapter explains what to do when paper or originals misfeed (become
jammed inside the machine).
Removing Jammed Paper

R CAUTION:
The fusing section of this machine might be very hot. Caution should be taken when removing misfed paper.
R CAUTION:
Important
When clearing misfeeds, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your
copy settings will be lost.
To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper inside the machine.
Contact your service representative if misfeeds occur frequently.
Note
For details about how to locate and remove misfeeds, see Checking Jammed
Paper or Removing Jammed Paper.
Reference
p.104 Locating Jammed Paper.
p.105 Removing Jammed Paper.
103
Clearing Misfeeds
Locating Jammed Paper

If a misfeed happens, remove the misfed paper or original following the procedures stated on the sticker on the rear of main unit front cover.
A misfeed has occurred in the place corresponding to the letter displayed on the
control panel.
7
AQD024S
A Press the key of the section from where you want to remove the jammed paper.
B After each step is complete, press [Next]. To go back to the previous step,
press [Previous].
104
C When all jammed paper are removed, restore the machine to the original
state.
Note
More than one misfeed may be indicated. When this happens, check all the
areas indicated.

The following procedure explains how to remove jammed paper.
Important
The internal parts of the machine may be hot. Wait for the duplex unit to cool
down before clearing a paper jam in the unit.
When A is lit
7
AQE009S
When B is lit
AQE010S
105
Clearing Misfeeds
When C is lit
AQE011S
When D is lit
AQE012S
106
When P is lit (when ADF is installed)
AQE013S
When R is lit (when SR790 is installed)
AQE014S
107
Clearing Misfeeds
When R1 - R8 is lit (when Finisher SR3030 is installed)
AQE015S
108
When R1 - R12 is lit (when Booklet Finisher SR3020 is installed)
AQE016S
109
Clearing Misfeeds
AQE017S
When Y is lit (when Wide Large Capacity Tray is installed)
AQE018S
When Z1 is lit
AQE020S
Note
Inside the finisher, or inside the front cover, there is a sticker explaining how
to remove misfed paper.
If a detailed removal instruction appears on the right of the screen, follow it.
You can also use the procedure indicated in [System Status] to remove jammed paper.
110
Removing Jammed Staples

This section explains how to remove jammed staples.
R CAUTION:
Important
Curled paper may cause staples to jam. To avoid this, turn copy paper over
in the tray.
When the finisher is installed, after removing jammed staples, staples will not
be ejected the first few times you try to use the stapler.
Remove the jammed staples according to the finisher type. (Check the type if
you are unsure.) For details about type of finisher, see Options, About This
Machine.
SR790
The following procedure explains how to remove jammed staples from the
SR790.
AQE903S
111
Clearing Misfeeds

The following procedure explains how to remove jammed staples from the Finisher SR3030 and Booklet Finisher SR3020.
AQE007S
112
Booklet Finisher SR3020 (Saddle Stitch)

The following procedure explains how to remove jammed staples from the
Booklet Finisher SR3020.
ANS062S
113
Clearing Misfeeds
Removing Punch Waste

This section explains how to remove punch waste.
Note
While Hole Punch Receptacle is full. is displayed, you cannot use
the Punch function.

The following procedure explains how to remove punch wastes from the Finisher SR3030 and Booklet Finisher SR3020.
A Open the finisher front cover.
7
AQD021S
B Pull out the punch waste box carefully, and then remove punch waste.
ADB033S
114
C Reinstall the punch waste box.
ADB034S
D Close the finisher front cover.

Hole Punch Receptacle is full. disappears.
Note
If you do not reinstall the punch waste box in Step C, the Hole Punch Receptacle is full. message continues to be displayed.
If the message is still displayed, reinstall the punch waste box.
115
Clearing Misfeeds
116
8. Remarks
This chapter describes how to maintain and operate the machine.
Where to Put Your Machine

This section provides precautions for installation, movement and disposal.
Machine Environment
Choose your machine's location carefully.
Environmental conditions greatly affect its performance.
Optimum environmental conditions

The following describes precautions when moving the machine.
R CAUTION:
Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might occur.
Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over,

an injury might occur.
R CAUTION:
After you move the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise the machine might move or come down to cause an injury.
R CAUTION:
Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and
spacious. Good ventilation is especially important when the machine is used
heavily.
Temperature: 10-32 C (50-89.6 F) (humidity to be 54% at 32 C, 89.6 F)

Humidity: 15-80% (temperature to be 27 C, 80.6 F at 80%)
A strong and level base.
The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2 inches: both front to rear and left
to right.
To avoid possible buildup of ozone, make sure to locate this machine in a
large well ventilated room that has an air turnover of more than 30
m3/hr/person.
117
Remarks
Environments to avoid
Locations exposed to direct sunlight or other sources of strong light (more
than 1,500 lux).
Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air
from a heater. (Sudden temperature changes can cause condensation to form
inside the machine.)
Locations close to machines generating ammonia, such as a diazo copy machine.
Places where the machine will be subject to frequent strong vibration.
Dusty areas.
Areas with corrosive gases.
118
Moving
The following describes precautions when moving the machine.
R CAUTION:
Contact your service representative if you need to lift the machine (such as
when relocating it to another floor). Do not attempt to lift the machine without
the assistance of your service representative. The machine will be damaged
if it topples or is dropped, resulting in malfunction and risk of injury to users.
The machine's various handling areas are for service engineer use only. Do
not touch these areas.
R CAUTION:
Before moving the machine, be sure to disconnect all external connections,
especially the power cord from the wall outlet. Damaged power cords are a
fire and electric shock hazard.
R CAUTION:
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.
Important
Be careful when moving the machine. Take the following precautions:
Turn off the main power.

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. When you pull out the plug
from the socket, grip the plug to avoid damaging the cord, thereby reducing the risk of fire or electric shock.
Close all covers and trays, including the front cover and bypass tray.
Keep the machine level and carry it carefully, taking care not to jolt or tip it.
Rough handling may cause a malfunction or damage the hard disk or memory, resulting in loss of stored files.
Do not take off the holding stand.
Protect the machine from strong shocks. Impact can damage the hard disk
and cause stored files to be lost. As a precautionary measure, files should be
copied to another computer.
119
Remarks
Power Connection
The following explains power supply.
R WARNING:
The supplied power cord is for use with this equipment only. Do not
use with other appliances. Doing so may result in fire, electric shock,
or injury.
R WARNING:
Connect the machine only to the power source described on the inside
front cover of this manual. Connect the power cord directly into a wall
outlet and do not use an extension cord.
Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.

Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend it more
than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
R WARNING:
If the power cord is damaged (exposure of the core, disconnection,
etc.), contact your service representative to change a new one. Operating the machine with a damaged power cord may cause an electric
shock or fire.
R CAUTION:
R CAUTION:
To disconnect the power code, pull it out by plug. Do not drag the code itself.
Doing so may result in damage to the code, leading to fire or electric shock.
Make sure the plug is inserted firmly in the wall outlet.

Voltage must not fluctuate by more than 10%.
The wall outlet shall be installed near the machine and shall be easily accessible.
120
Access to the Machine

Place the machine near the power source, providing the clearance areas shown.
AAE004S
1. Rear: 10 cm (4) or more

2. Right: 55 cm (22) or more
3. Front: 75 cm (29.6) or more
4. Left: 10 cm (4) or more
Note
For the required space when options are installed, contact your service representative.
121
Remarks
Maintaining Your Machine

If the exposure glass, exposure glass cover, or ADF belt is dirty, copy clarity may
be reduced. Clean these parts if they are dirty.
Important
Do not use chemical cleaners or organic solvents, such as thinner or benzene.
If such substances get inside the machine or melt plastic parts, a failure might
occur.
Do not clean parts other than those explicitly specified in this manual. Other
parts should only be cleaned by your service representative.
How to maintain
Cleaning the machine: Wipe the machine with a soft, damp cloth, and then
wipe it with a dry cloth to remove the water.
Cleaning the Exposure Glass

The following procedure explains how to clean the exposure glass and the
scanning glass.
Clean 1 and 2.
122
Maintaining Your Machine
Cleaning the Exposure Glass Cover

The following procedure explains how to clean the exposure glass cover.
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder

The following procedure explains how to clean the ADF.
2
1
8
AMJ031S
Clean 1 and 2.
123
Remarks
Cleaning the Dustproof Glass

The dustproof glass may require cleaning if white lines appear on the print side
of the document.
Important
Do not insert the brush forcefully, or the machine might be damaged.
8
AQE031S
Note
Insert the cleaning stick so that its rubber surface is pointing down.
124
INDEX
A
Access to the Machine, 121
Adding
Paper, 79
Staples, 98
Toner, 89
Adding Staples
Booklet Finisher SR3020, 99, 100
Finisher SR3030, 99
Finisher SR790, 98
Adjusting the Color Registration, 92
Adjusting the Volume, 31
Alert Messages, 52
Auto Document Feeder (ADF), 123
D
Data Storage, 5
Document Server, 9
Duplex, 25
Dustproof Glass, 124
E
Edit, 25
End fence, 84
Enquiry, 5
Environment, 117
Environments to avoid, 118
Error Log, 53
Error Mail Notification, 46
Error Occurs Using Internet Fax, 46
Error Report (E-Mail), 46
Exposure Glass, 122
Exposure Glass Cover, 123
B
Booklet Finisher SR3020, 99, 100, 112,
113, 114
F
C
Cannot Browse
the Network to Send a Scan File, 66
Cannot Make Clear Copies, 23
Cannot Make Copies As Wanted, 25
Cannot Print, 54
Cannot Send
or Receive Fax Messages as Wanted, 40
Cannot Send Scanned Files, 66
Changing the Paper Size, 83
in the Paper Tray, 84
Changing to a Size That is Not
Automatically Detected, 86
Checking Machine Status and Settings, 5
Checking the Error Log, 53
Cleaning
Auto Document Feeder, 123
Dustproof Glass, 124
Exposure Glass, 122
Exposure Glass Cover, 123
Scanning Glass, 122
Clearing Misfeeds, 103
Combine, 25
Copy Function, 19
Facsimile Function, 31
Finisher, 114
Finisher SR3030, 99, 112, 114
Finisher SR790, 98, 111
H
How to Read This Manual, 1
I
If an Error Report is Printed, 44
If USB Connection Fails, 50
Indicators, 3
Inserting Toner, 90
J
Job is Not Performed, 14
L
LCT, 81
Letterhead, 82
Loading Paper, 79
Loading Paper
into the Large Capacity Tray, 81
Loading Paper into the Paper Trays, 80
Locating Jammed Paper, 104
125
M
Machine Address Info, 5
Machine environment, 117
Maintaining Your Machine, 122
Maintenance, 92
Maintenance Info, 5
Memory is Full, 29
Moving, 119
Multi-accessing, 14
N
Names of Major Options, 2
Network Delivery Function
Cannot be Used, 67
O
Operations are Not Possible
When Messages Appear, 67
Optimum environmental conditions, 117
Orientation-Fixed Paper
or Two-Sided Paper, 82
Other Printing Problems, 57
P
Panel Tone, 4
PictBridge, 63
PictBridge Printing Does Not Work, 63
Power connection, 120
Printer Function, 47
Printing, 40
Problems Operating the Machine, 9
Punch, 114
Punch waste, 114
R
Reception, 40
Remote Diagnostic System, 45
Removing Jammed Paper, 103, 105
Removing Jammed Staples, 111
Booklet Finisher SR3020, 112, 113
Finisher SR3030, 112
Finisher SR790, 111
Booklet Finisher SR3020, 114
Finisher SR3030, 114
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge, 101
Returning to the Previous Setting, 97
126
S
Scanner Function, 65
Scanning Glass, 122
Scanning is Not Done as Expected, 65
Sending Faxes or Scanned Documents
When Toner Has Run Out, 91
Server-Generated Error E-mail, 46
Side fences, 84
Stamp, 25
Stamp Cartridge, 101
Status Messages, 51
Stored Files Cannot Be Accessed, 66
Stored Files Cannot be Edited, 67
T
Toner, 89
Transmission, 40
Transmission/Reception, 40
Troubleshooting
Copy Function, 19
Turning Off the Main Power /
In the Event of Power Failure, 45
TWAIN, 66, 75
TWAIN Driver Cannot be Started, 66
U
Used Toner, 91
W
Copy Function, 19
Scanner Function (Client Computer), 75
When a Message Appears during
Installation of the Printer Driver, 47
When an Indicator to the Right of a
Function Key is Lit, 8
When Memory is Full, 43
When the Machine
Does Not Operate As wanted, 3
When Toner Remains, 91
Windows 2000, 48
Windows 95/98/Me, 47
Windows NT 4.0, 49
Windows Server 2003, 48
Windows XP, 48
EN
USA
B222-7757
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
c means STAND BY.
Copyright 2006
Operating Instructions Troubleshooting
Type for C3535/DSc535/LD435c/Aficio MP 3500

Type for C4540/DSc545/LD445c/Aficio MP 4500
EN USA B222-7757
Paper type: OK Prince Eco G100(55kg), Paper Thickness=80 m // Pages in book=232 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book Paper thickness / 2 = 9.280000 mm
Operating Instructions Security Reference
Operating Instructions Security Reference

Printed in China
EN USA B222-7907
Security Reference
Getting Started
Authentication and its Application
Preventing Information Leaks
Managing Access to the Machine
Enhanced Network Security
Specifying the Extended Security Functions
Troubleshooting
Appendix
B2227907
Paper type: OK Prince Eco G100(55kg), Paper Thickness=80 m // Pages in book=232 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book Paper thickness / 2 = 9.280000 mm
Introduction
Important
Trademarks
AppleTalk, EtherTalk, are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Bonjour is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc.
NetWare is a registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
Bluetooth is a Trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. (Special Interest Group) and licensed to Ricoh
Company Limited.




Notes
Copyright 2006

About This Machine

Troubleshooting
Security Reference(This manual)
Facsimile Reference
Printer Reference
Scanner Reference
Network Guide
i
Other manuals
UNIX Supplement
Note

Product name
DeskTopBinder Lite
Professional
*1
and DeskTopBinder
ScanRouter EX Professional
er EX Enterprise *1
*1
General name
Optional
ii
*1
DeskTopBinder
and ScanRout- The ScanRouter delivery software
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ...................................................................................... i
How to Read This Manual ..................................................................................... 1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
1. Getting Started
Enhanced Security................................................................................................. 3
Glossary .....................................................................................................................4
Setting Up the Machine..............................................................................................5
Security Measures Provided by this Machine..................................................... 7
Using Authentication and Managing Users ................................................................7
Preventing Information Leaks ....................................................................................7
Limiting and Controlling Access .................................................................................9
Enhanced Network Security.....................................................................................10
2. Authentication and its Application

Administrators and Users ................................................................................... 11
Administrators ..........................................................................................................11
User..........................................................................................................................12
The Management Function .................................................................................13
About Administrator Authentication..........................................................................14
About User Authentication .......................................................................................15
Enabling Authentication......................................................................................16
Authentication Setting Procedure.............................................................................16
Administrator Authentication .............................................................................17
Specifying Administrator Privileges..........................................................................17
Registering the Administrator...................................................................................20
Logging on Using Administrator Authentication .......................................................23
Logging off Using Administrator Authentication .......................................................26
Changing the Administrator......................................................................................27
User Authentication.............................................................................................29
User Code Authentication ........................................................................................29
Basic Authentication.................................................................................................33
Windows Authentication...........................................................................................42
LDAP Authentication ................................................................................................50
Integration Server Authentication.............................................................................58
If User Authentication is Specified..................................................................... 66
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)...............................................66
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver) ..................................................66
Login (Using the Control Panel) ...............................................................................67
Log Off (Using the Control Panel) ............................................................................68
Login (Using a Printer Driver)...................................................................................69
Login (Using Web Image Monitor) ...........................................................................69
Log Off (Using Web Image Monitor) ........................................................................69
Auto Logout..............................................................................................................70
Authentication using an external device...................................................................71
iii
3. Preventing Information Leaks

Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying ......................................................... 73
Unauthorized Copy Prevention ................................................................................74
Data Security for Copying ........................................................................................75
Printing Limitations...................................................................................................76
Notice .......................................................................................................................77
Printing with Unauthorized Copy Prevention and Data Security for Copying...........77
Printing a Confidential Document ...................................................................... 80
Choosing a Locked Print file ....................................................................................80
Printing a Locked Print File ......................................................................................81
Deleting Locked Print Files ......................................................................................83
Changing Passwords of Locked Print Files..............................................................84
Unlocking Locked Print Files....................................................................................86
Specifying Access Permission for Stored Files ...............................................87
Assigning Users and Access Permission for Stored Files .......................................88
Specifying Access Privileges for Files Stored using the Scanner and Fax Functions...91
Assigning the User and the Access Permission for the Users Stored Files ............94
Specifying Passwords for the Stored Files...............................................................97
Unlocking Files.........................................................................................................99
Preventing Data Leaks Due to Unauthorized Transmission.......................... 101
Restrictions on Destinations...................................................................................101
Protecting the Address Book ...........................................................................104
Address Book Access Permission .........................................................................104
Encrypting the Data in the Address Book .............................................................. 107
Deleting Data on the Hard Disk ........................................................................ 110
Overwriting the Data on the Hard Disk................................................................... 110
4. Managing Access to the Machine

Preventing Modification of Machine Settings .................................................119
Menu Protect ...................................................................................................... 120
Menu Protect..........................................................................................................120
Limiting Available Functions ............................................................................ 124
Specifying Which Functions are Available .............................................................124
Managing Log Files ...........................................................................................126
Specifying Delete All Logs .....................................................................................126
Transfer Log Setting...............................................................................................127
5. Enhanced Network Security

Preventing Unauthorized Access.....................................................................129
Enabling/Disabling Protocols .................................................................................129
Access Control .......................................................................................................130
Specifying Network Security Level.........................................................................131
Encrypting Transmitted Passwords.................................................................135
Driver Encryption Key ............................................................................................ 136
Group Password for PDF files................................................................................138
IPP Authentication Password.................................................................................139
iv
Protection Using Encryption ............................................................................ 140

SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption................................................................ 141
User Settings for SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) ...................................................... 144
Setting the SSL / TLS Encryption Mode.................................................................145
SNMPv3 Encryption ...............................................................................................147
6. Specifying the Extended Security Functions

Changing the Extended Security Functions ................................................... 151
Changing the Extended Security Functions ........................................................... 151
Settings .................................................................................................................. 153
Other Security Functions ..................................................................................158
Fax Function ..........................................................................................................158
Scanner Function ................................................................................................... 159
Limiting Machine Operation to Customers Only ............................................160
Settings .................................................................................................................. 160
7. Troubleshooting
Authentication Does Not Work Properly .........................................................165
A Message Appears...............................................................................................165
Machine Cannot Be Operated................................................................................167
8. Appendix
Operations by the Supervisor...........................................................................169
Logging on as the Supervisor ................................................................................170
Logging off as the Supervisor ................................................................................171
Changing the Supervisor........................................................................................171
Resetting an Administrators Password .................................................................173
Machine Administrator Settings.......................................................................174
System Settings .....................................................................................................174
Maintenance...........................................................................................................176
Copier / Document Server Features ......................................................................176
Facsimile Features................................................................................................. 177
Printer Features .....................................................................................................178
Scanner Features................................................................................................... 179
Settings via Web Image Monitor ............................................................................179
Settings via SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin........................................................... 181
Network Administrator Settings .......................................................................182
System Settings .....................................................................................................182
File Administrator Settings ...............................................................................186
System Settings .....................................................................................................186
Printer Features .....................................................................................................186
v
User Administrator Settings ............................................................................. 188

System Settings .....................................................................................................188
Document Server File Permissions..................................................................190
The Privilege for User Account Settings in the Address Book ..................... 191
User Settings...................................................................................................... 194
Copier / Document Server Features ......................................................................194
Printer Functions ....................................................................................................198
System Settings .....................................................................................................203
Web Image Monitor Setting.................................................................................... 209
Functions That Require Options ......................................................................222
INDEX....................................................................................................... 223
vi

Symbols
"Safety Information" section of About This Machine.
[]
{}
1
2
1. Getting Started
Enhanced Security
This machine's security function can be enhanced through the management of
the machine and its users using the improved authentication functions.
By specifying access limits on the machines functions and the documents and
data stored in the machine, you can prevent information leaks and unauthorized
access.
Data encryption can prevent unauthorized data access and tampering via the
network.
Authentication and Access Limits

Using authentication, administrators manage the machine and its users. To
enable authentication, information about both administrators and users must
be registered in order to authenticate users via their login user names and
passwords.
Four types of administrator manage specific areas of machine usage, such as
settings and user registration.
Access limits for each user are specified by the administrator responsible for
user access to machine functions and documents and data stored in the machine.
Reference
For details, see p.11 Administrators.
Encryption Technology
This machine can establish secure communication paths by encrypting transmitted data and passwords.
3
Getting Started
Glossary
Administrator
There are four types of administrator according to the administered function:
machine administrator, network administrator, file administrator, and user
administrator. We recommend only one person take each administrator role.
You can spread the workload and limit unauthorized operation by a single
administrator.
Basically, administrators make machine settings and manage the machine;
they cannot perform normal operations, such as copying and printing.
User
A user performs normal operations on the machine, such as copying and
printing.
File Creator (Owner)
This is a user who can store files in the machine and authorize other users to
view, edit, or delete those files.
Registered User
This is a user whose personal information is registered in the address book.
The registered user is the user who knows the login user name and password.
Administrators are authenticated by means of the login user name and login
password supplied by the administrator when specifying the machines settings or accessing the machine over the network.
User Authentication
Users are authenticated by means of the login user name and login password
supplied by the user when specifying the machines settings or accessing the
machine over the network.
The users login user name and password, as well such personal information
items as telephone number and e-mail address, are stored in the machines
address book. The personal information can be obtained from the Windows
domain controller (Windows authentication), LDAP Server (LDAP authentication), or Integration Server (Integration Server Authentication) connected
to the machine via the network.
Login
This action is required for administrator authentication and user authentication.
Enter your login user name and login password on the machines control panel.
A login user name and login password may also be supplied when accessing
the machine over the network or using such utilities as Web Image Monitor
and SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Logout
This action is required with administrator and user authentication. This action
is required when you have finished using the machine or changing the settings.
Enhanced Security
Setting Up the Machine

If you want higher security, make the following setting before using the machine:
A Turn the machine on.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
C Press [System Settings].
D Press [Interface Settings].
E Specify IP Address.
For details, see the General Settings Guide.
F Connect the machine to the network.

G Start the Web Image Monitor, and then log on to the machine as the administrator.
For details, see p.69 Login (Using Web Image Monitor).
H Install the server certificate.

For details, see p.140 Protection Using Encryption.
I Enable secure sockets layer (SSL).

5
Getting Started
J Enter the administrators user name and password.

During steps F to I, the administrators default account (user name: admin,
password: blank) in unencrypted form will be vulnerable to network interception, and this account may be used for breaking into the machine over the
network.
If you consider this risky, we recommend that you specify a temporary administrator password between steps A and F.
Reference
p.20 Registering the Administrator
6
Security Measures Provided by this Machine
Security Measures Provided by this

Machine
1
Using Authentication and Managing Users

Enabling Authentication
To control administrators and users access to the machine, perform administrator authentication and user authentication using login user names and
login passwords. To perform authentication, the authentication function
must be enabled.
Reference
For details, see p.16 Enabling Authentication.
Specifying Authentication Information to Log on

Users are managed using the personal information managed in the machines
address book.
By enabling user authentication, you can allow only people registered in the
address book to use the machine. Users can be managed in the address book
by the user administrator.
Reference
For details, see p.39 Specifying Authentication Information to Log on.
Specifying Which Functions are Available

This can be specified by the user administrator. Specify the functions available to registered users. By making this setting, you can limit the functions
available to users.
Reference
For details, see p.124 Specifying Which Functions are Available.

Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying (Unauthorized Copy Prevention)
Using the printer driver, you can embed mask and pattern in the printed document.
Reference
For details, see p.73 Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying.
Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying (Data Security for Copying)

Using the printer driver to enable data security for the copying function, you
can print a document with an embedded pattern of hidden text.
To gray out the copy or stored file of a copy-guarded document when the
document is copied or stored , the optional security module is required.
7
Getting Started
Reference
For details, see p.73 Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying.
Printing confidential files

Using the printers Locked Print, you can store files in the machine as confidential files and then print them. You can print a file using the machines control panel and collect it on the spot to prevent others from seeing it.
Reference
For details, see p.80 Printing a Confidential Document.
Protecting Stored Files from Unauthorized Access

You can specify who is allowed to use and access scanned files and the files
in Document Server. You can prevent activities such as the printing of stored
files by unauthorized users.
Reference
For details, see p.87 Specifying Access Permission for Stored Files.
Protecting Stored Files from Theft

You can specify who is allowed to use and access scanned files and the files
in Document Server. You can prevent such activities as the sending and
downloading of stored files by unauthorized users.
Reference
Preventing Data Leaks Due to Unauthorized Transmission

You can specify in the address book which users are allowed to send files using the scanner or fax function.
You can also limit the direct entry of destinations to prevent files from being
sent to destinations not registered in the address book.
Reference
For details, see p.101 Preventing Data Leaks Due to Unauthorized Transmission.
Protecting Registered Information in the Address Book

You can specify who is allowed to access the data in the address book. You
can prevent the data in the address book being used by unregistered users.
To protect the data from unauthorized reading, you can also encrypt the data
in the address book.
To protect the data from unauthorized reading, you can also encrypt the data
Reference
For details, see p.104 Protecting the Address Book.
8
Security Measures Provided by this Machine
Managing Log Files

You can improve data security by deleting log files stored in the machine. By
transferring the log files, you can check the history data and identify unauthorized access.
To transfer the log data, the log collection server is required.
Reference
For details, see p.126 Managing Log Files.
Overwriting the Data on the Hard Disk

Before disposing of the machine, make sure all data on the hard disk is deleted. Prevent data leakage by automatically deleting transmitted printer jobs
from memory.
To overwrite the hard disk data, the optional DataOverwriteSecurity unit is
required.
Reference
For details, see p.110 Overwriting the Data on the Hard Disk.
Limiting and Controlling Access

Preventing Modification or Deletion of Stored Data
You can specify who is allowed to access stored scan files and files stored in
Document Server.
You can permit selected users who are allowed to access stored files to modify
or delete the files.
Reference
Preventing Modification of Machine Settings

The machine settings that can be modified depend on the type of administrator account.
Register the administrators so that users cannot change the administrator settings.
Reference
For details, see p.119 Preventing Modification of Machine Settings.
Limiting Available Functions

To prevent unauthorized operation, you can specify who is allowed to access
each of the machines functions.
Reference
For details, see p.124 Limiting Available Functions.
9
Getting Started

Preventing Unauthorized Access
You can limit IP addresses or disable ports to prevent unauthorized access
over the network and protect the address book, stored files, and default settings.
Reference
For details, see p.129 Preventing Unauthorized Access.
Encrypting Transmitted Passwords

Prevent login passwords, group passwords for PDF files, and IPP authentication passwords being revealed by encrypting them for transmission.
Also, encrypt the login password for administrator authentication and user
authentication.
Reference
For details, see p.135 Encrypting Transmitted Passwords.
Safer Communication Using SSL

When you access the machine using a Web Image Monitor or IPP, you can establish encrypted communication using SSL. When you access the machine
using an application such as SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can establish encrypted communication using SNMPv3 or SSL.
To protect data from interception, analysis, and tampering, you can install a
server certificate in the machine, negotiate a secure connection, and encrypt
transmitted data.
Note
To establish encrypted communication using SSL, the machine must have
the printer and scanner functions.
Reference
For details, see p.140 Protection Using Encryption.
10
2. Authentication and its

Application
Administrators and Users
When controlling access using the authentication specified by an administrator,
select the machines administrator, enable the authentication function, and then
use the machine.
The administrators manage access to the allocated functions, and users can use
only the functions they are permitted to access. To enable the authentication
function, the login user name and login password are required in order to use
the machine.
Specify administrator authentication, and then specifying user authentication.
Important
If user authentication is not possible because of a problem with the hard disk
or network, you can use the machine by accessing it using administrator authentication and disabling user authentication. Do this if, for instance, you
need to use the machine urgently.
Reference
For details, see p.37 Specifying Login User Name and Login Password.
Administrators
machine administrator, network administrator, file administrator, and user administrator.
By sharing the administrative work among different administrators, you can
spread the workload and limit unauthorized operation by a single administrator. You can also specify a supervisor who can change each administrators password. Administrators are limited to managing the machines settings and
controlling user access. so they cannot use functions such as copying and printing. To use such functions, you need to register a user in the address book and
then be authenticated as the user.
Reference
For details, see p.20 Registering the Administrator.
For details, See p.169 Operations by the Supervisor.
User Administrator
This is the administrator who manages personal information in the address book.
A user administrator can register/delete users in the address book or change
users personal information.
Users registered in the address book can also change and delete their own information. If any of the users forget their password, the user administrator can
delete it and create a new one, allowing the user to access the machine again.
11
Machine Administrator
This is the administrator who mainly manages the machines default settings.
You can set the machine so that the default for each function can only be specified by the machine administrator. By making this setting, you can prevent
unauthorized people from changing the settings and allow the machine to be
used securely by its many users.
Network Administrator
This is the administrator who manages the network settings. You can set the
machine so that network settings such as the IP address and settings for sending and receiving e-mail can only be specified by the network administrator.
By making this setting, you can prevent unauthorized users from changing
the settings and disabling the machine, and thus ensure correct network operation.
File Administrator
This is the administrator who manages permission to access stored files. You
can specify passwords to allow only registered and permitted users to view
and edit files stored in Document Server. By making this setting, you can prevent data leaks and tampering due to unauthorized users viewing and using
the registered data.
Supervisor
The supervisor can delete an administrators password and specify a new
one. The supervisor cannot specify defaults or use normal functions. However, if any of the administrators forget their password and cannot access the
machine, the supervisor can provide support.
User
Users are managed using the personal information managed in the machines
address book.
By enabling user authentication, you can allow only people registered in the address book to use the machine. Users can be managed in the address book by the
user administrator.
Reference
For details about registering users in the address book, see General Settings
Guide, the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help, or the Web Image Monitor
Help.
12
The Management Function

The machine has an authentication function requiring a login user name and
login password. By using the authentication function, you can specify access
limits for individual users and groups of users. Using access limits, you can not
only limit the machines available functions but also protect the machine settings
and files and data stored in the machine.
Important
If you have enabled [Administrator Authentication Management], make sure not to
forget the administrator login user name and login password. If an administrator login user name or login password is forgotten, a new password must
be specified using the supervisors authority.
Be sure not to forget the supervisor login user name and login password. If
you do forget them, a service representative will to have to return the machine to its default state. This will result in all data in the machine being lost
and the service call may not be free of charge.
Reference
For details, see p.169 Operations by the Supervisor.
13
About Administrator Authentication

user administrator, machine administrator, network administrator, and file administrator.
AYJ002S
1. User Administrator
4. File Administrator
This administrator manages personal information in the address book. You can
register/delete users in the address book
or change users personal information.
This administrator manages permission

to access stored files. You can specify
passwords for the files stored in the Document Server so only authorized users
can view and change them.
2. Machine Administrator
This administrator manages the machines default settings. You can set the
machine so that the default such as data
security for copying function and delete
all logs can only be specified by the machine administrator.
3. Network Administrator
This administrator manages the network
settings. You can set the machine so that
network settings such as the IP address
and settings for sending and receiving email can only be specified by the network
administrator only.
14
5. Authentication
Administrators must enter their login
user name and password to be authenticated.
6. This machine
7. Administrators manage the machines settings and access limits.
For details about each administrator,
see p.11 Administrators.
About User Authentication

This machine has an authentication function to prevent unauthorized access.
By using login user name and login password, you can specify access limits for
individual users and groups of users.
AYJ001S
1. User
4. Authentication
A user performs normal operations on

the machine, such as copying and printing.
Using a login user name and password,

user authentication is performed.
2. Group
A group performs normal operations on
the machine, such as copying and printing.
3. Unauthorized User
5. This Machine
6. Access Limit
Using authentication, unauthorized users are prevented from accessing the machine.
7. Authorized users and groups can

use only those functions permitted
by the administrator.
15
Enabling Authentication
To control administrators and users access to the machine, perform administrator or user authentication using login user names and passwords. To perform
authentication, the authentication function must be enabled. To specify authentication, you need to register administrators.
Reference
For details, see p.20 Registering the Administrator.
Authentication Setting Procedure

Specify administrator authentication and user authentication according to the
following chart:
Note
To specify Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication, you must first specify administrator authentication.
You can specify User Code Authentication without specifying administrator

authentication.
Specifying Administrator Privileges
See p.17 Specifying Administra- See p.17 Specifying Administrator Privileges.

tor Privileges.
Registering the Administrator
See p.20 Registering the Administrator.
User Authentication
Specifying User Authentication
See p.16 Enabling Authentication.
A Authentication that requires only the machine:
User Code Authentication

See p.29 User Code Authentication.
Basic Authentication
See p.33 Basic Authentication.
B Authentication that requires external devices:
Windows Authentication
See p.42 Windows Authentication.
LDAP Authentication
See p.50 LDAP Authentication.
Integration Server Authentication
See p.58 Integration Server Authentication.
16
Administrators are handled differently from the users registered in the address
book. When registering an administrator, you cannot use a login user name already registered in the address book. Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication and Integration Server Authentication are not performed for an
administrator, so an administrator can log on even if the server is unreachable
because of a network problem.
Each administrator is identified by a login user name. One person can act as
more than one type of administrator if multiple administrator authority is granted to a single login user name.
You can specify the login user name, login password, and encryption password
for each administrator.
The encryption password is a password for performing encryption when specifying settings using Web Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
The password registered in the machine must be entered when using applications such as SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Administrators are limited to managing the machines settings and controlling
user access. so they cannot use functions such as copying and printing. To use
such functions, you need to register a user in the address book and then be authenticated as the user.
Note
Administrator authentication can also be specified via Web Image Monitor.
For details see the Web Image Monitor Help.
Specifying Administrator Privileges

To specify administrator authentication, set Administrator Authentication Management to [On]. You can also specify whether or not to manage the items in System Settings as an administrator.
To log on as an administrator, use the default login user name and login password.
The defaults are "admin" for the login name and blank for the password.
Important
If you have enabled [Administrator Authentication Management], make sure not to
forget the administrator login user name and login password. If an administrator login user name or login password is forgotten, a new password must
be specified using the supervisors authority.
Reference
For details, see p.169 Operations by the Supervisor.
17
Note
For details about logging on and logging off with administrator authentication, see p.23 Logging on Using Administrator Authentication, p.26 Logging off Using Administrator Authentication.

C Press [Administrator Tools].
D Press [Administrator Authentication Management].
18
E Press the [User Management], [Machine Management], [Network Management], or

[File Management] key to select which settings to manage.
F Set "Admin. Authentication" to [On].
[Available Settings] appears.
G Select the settings to manage from "Available Settings".
The selected settings will be unavailable to users.

[Available Settings] varies depending on the administrator.
For details about Available Settings, see p.119 Managing Access to the Machine
Note
To specify administrator authentication for more than one category, repeat
steps E to G.
19
H Press [OK].
Registering the Administrator
If administrator authentication has been specified, it is recommended to assign
each administrator role to a different person.
By sharing the administrative work among different administrators, you can
spread the workload and limit unauthorized operation by a single administrator.You can register up to four login user names (Administrators 1 to 4) to which
you can grant administrator privileges.
Administrator authentication can also be specified via Web Image Monitor. For
details see the Web Image Monitor Help.
Preparation
Log on using a registered administrator name and password. The administrator defaults are "admin" for the login name and blank for the password. For
details about logging on and logging off with administrator authentication,
see p.23 Logging on Using Administrator Authentication, p.26 Logging
off Using Administrator Authentication.
Note
You can use up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols when registering
login user names and login passwords. Keep in mind that passwords are
case-sensitive.
You cannot include spaces, semicolons (;), or quotes (") in the user name nor
can you leave the user name blank.
Do not use Japanese, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, or Hangul
double-byte characters when entering the login user name or password.If you
use multi-byte characters when entering the login user name or password,
you cannot authenticate using Web Image Monitor.

20
2
D Press [Program / Change Administrator].
E In the line for the administrator whose authority you want to specify, press
[Administrator 1], [Administrator 2], [Administrator 3] or [Administrator 4], and then
press [Change].
If you allocate each administrators authority to a different person, the screen

appears as follows:
21
F Press [Change] for the login user name.
2
G Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].
H Press [Change] for the login password.
I Enter the login password, and then press [OK].

Follow the password policy to make the login password more secure.
For details about the password policy, see p.157 Password Policy.
J If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
K Press [Change] for the encryption password.
22
L Enter the encryption password, and then press [OK].
2
M If a password reentry screen appears, enter the encryption password, and
then press [OK].
N Press [OK] twice.

You will be automatically logged off.
O Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Logging on Using Administrator Authentication
If administrator authentication has been specified, log on using an administrators user name and password.This section describes how to log on.
Note
To log on as an administrator, enter the administrators login user name and
login password.
If you log on that a user name that has the privileges of multiple administrators, only one of those administrators' names is displayed.
If you try to log on from an operating screen, "Selected function cannot
be used." appears. Press the {User Tools/Counter} key to change the default.
AMG044S
23
B Press [Enter] next to "Login User Name".
2
C Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].
Note
When you log on to the machine for the first time as the administrator, enter "admin".
D Press [Enter] next to "Login Password".
Note
If assigning the administrator for the first time, proceed to step F without
pressing [Enter].
24
E Enter the login password, and then press [OK].
2
F Enter [Login].
"Authenticating... Please wait." appears, followed by the screen for

specifying the default.
25
Logging off Using Administrator Authentication

If administrator authentication has been specified, be sure to log off after completing settings. This section explains how to log off after completing settings.
A Press the {Login/Logout}key.
AMG044S
B Press [Yes].
26
Changing the Administrator

Change the administrators login user name and login password. You can also
assign each administrators authority to the login user names "Administrator 1"
to "Administrator 4" To combine the authorities of multiple administrators, assign multiple administrators to a single administrator.
For example, to assign machine administrator authority and user administrator
authority to [Administrator 1], press [Administrator 1] in the lines for the machine
administrator and the user administrator.
Preparation

27
2
E In the line for the administrator you want to change, press [Administrator 1],
[Administrator 2], [Administrator 3] or [Administrator 4], and then press [Change].
F Press [Change] for the setting you want to change, and re-enter the setting.
G Press [OK].
H Press [OK] twice.
You are logged off automatically.
28
User Authentication
User Authentication
There are five types of user authentication method: user code authentication, basic authentication, Windows authentication, Integration Server Authentication,
and LDAP authentication. To use user authentication, select an authentication
method on the control panel, and then make the required settings for the authentication. The settings depend on the authentication method.
Note
Under user code authentication, authentication is based on the user code. In
contrast, under basic authentication, Windows authentication, and LDAP authentication, authentication is carried out for individual users.
User authentication can also be specified via Web Image Monitor. For details
see the Web Image Monitor Help.
User Code Authentication

This is an authentication method for limiting access to functions according to the
user code. The same user code can be used by more than one user. For details
about specifying user codes, see General Settings Guide.
Limitation
To control the use of DeskTopBinder for the delivery of files stored in the machine, select Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication.
Reference
For details about specifying the user code for the printer driver, see Printer
Reference or the printer driver Help.
For details about specifying the TWAIN driver user code, see the TWAIN
driver Help.
29
Specifying User Code Authentication

This can be specified by the machine administrator.

D Press [User Authentication Management].
30
User Authentication
E Select [User Code Auth.].
2
Note
If you do not want to use user authentication management, select [Off].
F Select which of the machines functions you want to limit.
The selected settings will be unavailable to users.

For details about Limiting Available Functions see p.124 Limiting Available
Functions.
31
G Select the "Printer Job Authentication" level.

Note
If you select [Entire], you cannot print using a printer driver or a device that
does not support authentication. To print under an environment that does
not support authentication, select [Simple (All)].
If you select [Simple (Limitation)], you can specify clients for which printer
job authentication is not required. Specify [Parallel Interface: Simple], [USB:
Simple] and the clients IPv4 address range in which printer job authentication is not required. Specify this setting if you want to print using unauthenticated printer drivers or without any printer driver. Authentication is
required for printing with non-specified devices.
If you select [Simple (All)] or [Simple (Limitation)], you can print even with unauthenticated printer drivers or devices. Specify this setting if you want to
print with a printer driver or device that cannot be identified by the machine or if you do not require authentication for printing.However, note
that, because the machine does not require authentication in this case, it
may be used by unauthorized users.
If you select [Entire], proceed to step L.
If you select [Simple (All)] or [Simple (Limitation)], proceed to step H.
Reference
For details, see p.64 Printer Job Authentication Levels and Printer Job
Types.
H Press [Simple (Limitation)]
I Press [Change].
32
User Authentication
J Specify the range in which [Simple (Limitation)] is applied to Printer Job Authentication.
2
You can specify the IPv4 address range to which this setting is applied, and
whether or not to apply the setting to the parallel and USB interfaces.
K Press [Exit].
L Press [OK].
M Press [Exit].
Basic Authentication
Specify this authentication when using the machines address book to authenticate for each user. Using basic authentication, you can not only manage the machines available functions but also limit access to stored files and to the personal
data in the address book. Under basic authentication, the administrator must
specify the functions available to each user registered in the address book.
Specifying Basic Authentication


33
2
E Select [Basic Auth.].
Note
34
User Authentication
F Select which of the machines functions you want to permit.
2
The selected settings will be available to users.
For details about Limiting Available Functions see p.124 Limiting Available
Functions.

Note
Reference
Types.
35
2
I Press [Change].
K Press [Exit].
L Press [OK].
M Press [Exit].
36
User Authentication
Authentication Information Stored in the Address Book

This can be specified by the user administrator.
If you have specified [User Authentication], you can specify access limits for individual users and groups of users. Specify the setting in the address book for each
user.
User authentication can also be specified via SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin or
Web Image Monitor.
Preparation
You need to register a user in the address book. For details about the address
book, see General Settings Guide.
See p.124 Limiting Available Functions.
Specifying Login User Name and Login Password

In [User Authentication Management], specify the login user name and password.

D Press [Address Book Management].
37
E Select the user or group.
2
G Press [Change] for [Login User Name].
H Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].

I Press [Change] for [Login Password].
38
User Authentication
J Enter a login password, and then press [OK].

K If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
L Press [OK].
M Press [Exit] twice.
Specifying Authentication Information to Log on

The login user name and password specified in [User Authentication Management]
can be used as the login information for "SMTP Authentication", "Folder Authentication", and "LDAP Authentication".
For details about specifying login user name and login password, see p.37 Specifying Login User Name and Login Password.
If you do not want to use the login user name and password specified in [User
Authentication Management] for "SMTP Authentication", "Folder Authentication",
or "LDAP Authentication", see General Settings Guide.

39
2
If the setting to be specified does not appear, press [TNext] to scroll down to
other settings.
G Specify the login user name and password.
40
User Authentication
H Select [Use Auth. Info at Login] in "SMTP Authentication".
2
other settings.
Limitation
When using [Use Auth. Info at Login] for "SMTP Authentication", "Folder Authentication", or "LDAP Authentication", a user name other than "other" ,
"admin" , "supervisor" or "HIDE***" must be specified. The symbol "***"
represents any character.
To use [Use Auth. Info at Login] for SMTP authentication, a login password
up to 128 characters in length must be specified.
Note
For folder authentication, select [Use Auth. Info at Login] in "Folder Authentication".
For LDAP authentication, select [Use Auth. Info at Login] in "LDAP Authentication".
I Press [OK].
J Press [Exit].
K Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
41
Windows Authentication
Specify this authentication when using the Windows domain controller to authenticate users who have their accounts on the directory server. Users cannot
be authenticated if they do not have their accounts in the directory server. Under
Windows authentication, you can specify the access limit for each group registered in the directory server. The address book stored in the directory server can
be registered to the machine, enabling user authentication without first using the
machine to register individual settings in the address book. If you can obtain
user information, the senders address (From:) is fixed to prevent unauthorized
access when sending e-mails under the scanner function.
Important
During Windows Authentication, data registered in the directory server, such
as the users e-mail address, is automatically registered in the machine. If user
information on the server is changed, information registered in the machine
may be overwritten when authentication is performed.
Operational Requirements for Windows Authentication

To specify Windows authentication, the following requirements must be
met:
The Printer/Scanner unit must be installed.
A domain controller has been set up in a designated domain.
This function is supported by the operating systems listed below. NTLM
authentication is used for Windows authentication. To obtain user information when running Active Directory, use LDAP. If SSL is being used,
this requires a version of Windows that supports TLS v1, SSL v2, or SSL v3.
Windows NT 4.0 Server
Windows 2000 Server
Windows Server 2003
Limitation
Users managed in other domains are subject to user authentication, but they
cannot obtain items such as e-mail addresses.
If you have created a new user in the domain controller and selected [User
must change password at next logon], log on to the machine from the computer
to change the password before logging on from the machines control panel.
Note
The first time you access the machine, you can use the functions available to
your group. If you are not registered in a group, you can use the functions
available under [Default Group]. To limit which functions are available to
which users, first make settings in advance in the address book.
42
When accessing the machine subsequently, you can use all the functions
available to your group and to you as an individual user.
Enter the login password correctly, keeping in mind that it is case-sensitive.
User Authentication
Users who are registered in multiple groups can use all the functions available to those groups.
If you specify in the address book which functions are available to global
group members, those settings have priority.
A user registered in two or more global groups can use all the functions available to members of those groups.
If the "Guest" account on the Windows server is enabled, even users not registered in the domain controller can be authenticated. When this account is
enabled, users are registered in the address book and can use the functions
available under [*Default Group].
Specifying Windows Authentication

Note
Under Windows Authentication, you can select whether or not to use secure
sockets layer (SSL) authentication.
To automatically register user information such as fax numbers and e-mail

addresses under Windows authentication, it is recommended that communication between the machine and domain controller be encrypted using SSL.
Under Windows Authentication, you do not have to create a server certificate
unless you want to automatically register user information such as fax numbers and e-mail addresses using SSL.

43
2
E Select [Windows Auth.].
Note
44
User Authentication
F Press [Change] for "Domain Name", enter the name of the domain controller
to be authenticated, and then press [OK].
Note
Reference
Types.
45
2
I Press [Change].
K Press [Exit].
46
User Authentication
L Press [On] for "SSL".
2
If you do not use secure sockets layer (SSL) for authentication, press [Off].
If global groups have been registered under Windows server, you can limit
the use of functions for each global group.
You need to create global groups in the Windows server in advance and register in each group the users to be authenticated.
You also need to register in the machine the functions available to the global
group members.
Create global groups in the machine by entering the names of the global
groups registered in the Windows Server. (Keep in mind that group names
are case sensitive.) Then specify the machine functions available to each
group.
If global groups are not specified, users can use the available functions specified in [*Default Group]. If global groups are specified, users not registered in
global groups can use the available functions specified in [*Default Group]. By
default, all functions are available to [*Default Group] members. Specify the
limitation on available functions according to user needs.
M Under "Group", press [Program / Change], and then press [ * Not Programmed].
other settings.
47
N Under "Group Name", press [Change], and then enter the group name.
2
O Press [OK].
P Select which of the machines functions you want to permit.
For details about limiting available functions, see p.124 Limiting Available
Functions.
Q Press [OK] twice.

48
User Authentication
-Installing Internet Information Services (IIS) and Certificate services

Specify this setting if you want the machine to automatically obtain e-mail addresses registered in Active Directory.
We recommended you install Internet Information Services (IIS) and Certificate
services as the Windows components.
Install the components, and then create the server certificate.
If they are not installed, install them as follows:
A Select [Add/Remove Programs] on the [Control Panel].
B Select [Add/Remove Windows Components].
C Select the [Internet Information Services (IIS)] check box.
D Select the [Certificate Services] check box, and then click [Next].
E Installation of the selected Windows components starts, and a warning message appears.
F Click [Yes].
G Click [Next].
H Select the Certificate Authority, and then click [Next].
On the displayed screen, [Enterprise root CA] is selected.
I Enter the Certificate Authority name (optional) in [CA Identifying Information],
and then click [Next].
J Leave [Data Storage Location] at its default, and then click [Next].
-Creating the Server Certificate

After installing Internet Information Services (IIS) and Certificate services Windows components, create the Server Certificate as follows:
A Start [Internet Services Manager].
B Right-click [Default Web Site], and then click [Properties].
C On the [Directory Security] tab, click [Server Certificate].
Web Server Certificate Wizard starts.
D Click [Next].
E Select [Create a new certificate], and then click [Next].
F Select [Prepare the request now, but send it later], and then click [Next].
G Enter the required information according to the instructions given by Web
Server Certificate Wizard.
H Check the specified data, which appears as Request File Summary, and then
click [Next].
The server certificate is created.
49
-If the fax number cannot be obtained

If the fax number cannot be obtained during authentication, specify the setting
as follows:
A Start [C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\adminpak].
Start Setup Wizard.
B Select [Install all of the Administrator Tools], and then click [Next].
C On the [Start] menu, select [Run].
D Enter [mmc], and then click [OK].
E On the [Console], select [Add/Remove Snap-in].
F Click [Add].
G Select [ActiveDirectory Schema], and then click [Add].
H Select [facsimile Telephone Number].
I Right-click, and then click [Properties].
J Select [Replicate this attribute], and then click [Apply].
LDAP Authentication
Specify this authentication when using the LDAP server to authenticate users
who have their accounts on the LDAP server. Users cannot be authenticated if
they do not have their accounts on the LDAP server. The address book stored in
the LDAP server can be registered to the machine, enabling user authentication
without first using the machine to register individual settings in the address
book.When using LDAP Authentication, to prevent the password information
being sent over the network unencrypted, it is recommended that communication between the machine and LDAP server be encrypted using SSL. You can
specify on the LDAP server whether or not to enable SSL. To enable this, you
must create a server certificate for the LDAP server.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can specify whether or not to check the reliability of the SSL server being connected to.
Important
During LDAP Authentication, the data registered in the LDAP server, such as
the users e-mail address, is automatically registered in the machine. If user
information on the server is changed, information registered in the machine
may be overwritten when authentication is performed.
50
User Authentication
Operational Requirements for LDAP Authentication

To specify LDAP authentication, the following requirements must be met:
The Printer/Scanner unit must be installed.
The network configuration must allow the machine to detect the presence
of the LDAP server.
When SSL is being used, TLSv1, SSLv2, or SSLv3 can function on the LDAP
server.
The LDAP server must be registered in the machine.
For details about registration, see Network Guide.
Limitation
Under LDAP authentication, you cannot specify access limits for groups registered in the LDAP Server.
When using LDAP Authentication, you cannot use reference functions in

LDAP Search for servers using SSL.
Enter the users login user name using up to 32 characters and login password
using up to 128 characters.
Do not use double-byte Japanese, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, or
Hangul characters when entering the login user name or password. If you use
double-byte characters , you cannot authenticate using Web Image Monitor.
Note
Under LDAP Authentication, if Anonymous Authentication in the LDAP
servers settings is not set to "Prohibit", users who do not have an LDAP server account might still be able to gain access.
If the LDAP server is configured using Windows Active Directory, Anonymous Authentication might be available. If Windows Authentication is available, we recommend you use it.
The first time an unregistered user accesses the machine after LDAP authentication has been specified, the user is registered in the machine and can use
the functions available under [Available Functions] during LDAP Authentication.
To limit the available functions for each user, register each user and corresponding [Available Functions] setting in the address book, or specify [Available
Functions] for each registered user. The [Available Functions] setting becomes effective when the user accesses the machine subsequently.
51
Specifying LDAP Authentication


52
User Authentication
E Select [LDAP Auth.].
2
Note
F Select the LDAP server to be used for LDAP authentication.
53

Note
Reference
Types.
54
User Authentication
I Press [Change].
2
K Press [Exit].
L Select which of the machines functions you want to permit.

For details about limiting available functions, see p.124 Limiting Available
Functions.
55
M Press [Change] for "Login Name Attribute".
2
N Enter the login name attribute , and then press [OK].
Note
You can use the Login Name Attribute as a search criterion to obtain information about an authenticated user. You can create a search filter based on
the Login Name Attribute, select a user, and then retrieve the user information from the LDAP server so it is transferred to the machines address
book. The method for selecting the user name depends on the server environment. Check the server environment and enter the user name accordingly.
O Press [Change] for "Unique attribute".
56
User Authentication
P Enter the unique attribute and then press [OK].
2
Note
Specify Unique Attribute on the machine to match the user information in
the LDAP server with that in the machine. By doing this, if the Unique Attribute of a user registered in the LDAP server matches that of a user registered in the machine, the two instances are treated as referring to the
same user.You can enter an attribute such as "serialNumber" or "uid". Additionally, you can enter "cn" or "employeeNumber", provided it is unique.
If you do not specify the Unique Attribute, an account with the same user
information but with a different login user name will be created in the machine.
Q Press [OK].
57
Integration Server Authentication

To use Integration Server Authentication, you need a server on which ScanRouter software that supports authentication is installed.
For external authentication, the Integration Server Authentication collectively
authenticates users accessing the server over the network, providing a server-independent centralized user authentication system that is safe and convenient.
For example, if the delivery server and the machine share the same Integration
Server Authentication, single sign-on is possible using DeskTopBinder.
To use [Integration Svr. Auth.], the machine must have access to a server on which
ScanRouter System or Web SmartDeviceMonitor software and [Authentication
Manager] are installed.
For details about the software, contact your local dealer.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can specify whether or not to check the reliability of the SSL server being connected to.
Important
During Integration Server Authentication, the data registered in the server,
such as the users e-mail address, is automatically registered in the machine.
If user information on the server is changed, information registered in the machine may be overwritten when authentication is performed.
Note
The built-in default administrator name is "Admin" on the Server and "admin" on the machine.
Specifying Integration Server Authentication

This section explains how to specify the machine settings.
For details, see the Authentication Manager manual.

58
User Authentication
2
E Select [Integration Svr. Auth.].
Note
If you do not wish to use User Authentication Management, select [Off].
59
F Press [Change] for "Server Name".
2
Specify the name of the server for external authentication.
G Enter the server name, and then press [OK].
Enter the IPv4 address or host name.
H In "Authentication Type", select the authentication system for external authentication.
Select an available authentication system.
60
User Authentication
I Press [Change] for "Domain Name".
2
J Enter the domain name, and then press [OK].
Note
You cannot specify a domain name under an authentication system that
does not support domain login.
K Press [Obtain URL].
The machine obtains the URL of the server specified in [Server Name].
other settings.
If [Server Name] or the setting for enabling SSL is changed after obtaining the
URL, the "URL" is "Not Obtained".
L Press [OK]
If you set "Authentication Type" to "Windows", you can use the global group.
If you set "Authentication Type" to "Notes", you can use the Notes group. If
you set "Authentication Type" to "Basic (Integration Server)", you can use the
groups created using the Authentication Manager.
61
M Select the "Printer Job Authentication" level.
2
Note
If you select [Entire], proceed to step R.
If you select [Simple (All)] or [Simple (Limitation)], proceed to step N.
Reference
Types.
N Press [Simple (Limitation)]
62
User Authentication
O Press [Change].
2
P Specify the range in which [Simple (Limitation)] is applied to Printer Job Authentication.
Q Press [Exit].
R Press [On] for SSL and then press [OK].
To not use secure sockets layer (SSL) for authentication, press [Off].
S Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
63
Printer Job Authentication Levels and Printer Job Types

This section explains the relationship between printer job authentication levels and printer job types.
Depending on the combination of printer job authentication level and printer
job type, the machine may not print properly. Set an appropriate combination
according to the operating environment.
User authentication is supported by the RPCS and PCL printer drivers.
Machine Settings (displayed on the control panel)
Printer Job Types
[User Authentication
Management]
[Printer Job Authentication]
[Restrict Use of
Simple Encryption]
[Off]
[User Code Auth.],

[Basic Auth.],
[Windows Auth.],
[LDAP Auth.],
[Integration Svr. Auth.]
[Simple (All)]
[Off]
[On]
[Entire]
[Off]
[On]
: Printing is possible regardless of user authentication.

: Printing is possible if user authentication is successful. If user authentication fails, the print job is reset.
$: Printing is possible if user authentication is successful and [Driver Encryption Key] for the printer driver and machine match.
: Printing is not possible regardless of user authentication, and the print job
is reset.
Reference
For details about [Restrict Use of Simple Encryption], see p.151 Changing the
Extended Security Functions.
[Printer Job Authentication]

[Entire]
The machine authenticates all printer jobs and remote settings, and cancels
jobs and settings that fail authentication.
Printer Jobs: Job Reset
Settings: Disabled
[Simple (All)]
The machine authenticates printer jobs and remote settings that have authentication information, and cancels the jobs and settings that fail authentication.
Printer jobs and settings without authentication information are performed without being authenticated.
[Simple (Limitation)].
You can specify the range to apply [Simple (Limitation)] to by specifying [Parallel Interface: Simple], [USB: Simple], and the clients IPv4 address.
64
User Authentication
Printer Job Types

A In the RPCS printer driver dialog box, the [Confirm authentication information
when printing] and [Encrypt] check boxes are selected.
In the PCL printer driver dialog box, the [User Authentication] and [Encrypt]
check boxes are selected.
Personal authentication information is added to the printer job.
The printer driver applies advanced encryption to the login passwords.
The printer driver encryption key, enables the driver encryption to prevent
the login password being stolen.
B In the RPCS printer driver dialog box, the [Confirm authentication information
when printing] check box is selected.
In the PCL printer driver dialog box, the [User Authentication] and [Encrypt]
check boxes are selected.
Personal authentication information is added to the printer job.
The printer driver applies simple encryption to login passwords.
C In the RPCS printer driver dialog box, the [Confirm authentication information
when printing] check box is not selected.
In the PCL printer driver dialog box, the [User Authentication] check box is
not selected.
Personal authentication information is added to the printer job and is disabled.
D When using the PostScript 3 printer driver, the printer job contains user
code information.
Personal authentication information is not added to the printer job but the
user code information is.
Note
This type also applies to recovery/parallel printing using an RPCS/PCL
printer driver that does not support authentication.
E
When using the PostScript 3 printer driver, the printer job does not contain
user code information.
Neither personal authentication information nor user code information is
added to the printer job.
Note
Type 5 also applies to recovery/parallel printing using an RPCS/PCL
printer driver that does not support authentication.
A printer job or PDF file is sent from a host computer without a printer
driver and is printed via LPR.
Personal authentication information is not added to the printer job.
A PDF file is printed via ftp.
Personal authentication is performed using the user ID and password used
for logging on via ftp. However, the user ID and password are not encrypted.
65
If User Authentication is Specified

When user authentication (User Code Authentication, Basic Authentication,
Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication) is set, the authentication screen is displayed. Unless a valid user name
and password are entered, operations are not possible with the machine. Log on
to operate the machine, and log off when you are finished operations. Be sure to
log off to prevent unauthorized users from using the machine.When auto logout
timer is specified, the machine automatically logs you off if you do not use the
control panel within a given time. Additionally, you can authenticate using an
external device. For details, see p.71 Authentication using an external device.
Note
Consult the User Administrator about your login user name, password, and
user code.
For user code authentication, enter a number registered in the address book
as [User Code].
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)

When user authentication is set, the following screen appears.
Enter a user code (up to eight digits), and then press the [OK] key.
Note
To log off, do one of the following:
Press the Operation switch.

Press the {User Tools/Counter} key, press [System Settings], and then press
the {User Tools/Counter} key again.
Press the {Energy Saver} key after jobs are completed.
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver)

When user authentication is set, specify the user code in the printer properties
of a printer driver. For details, see the printer driver Help.
66
Login (Using the Control Panel)

Follow the procedure below to log on when Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is set.
A Press [Enter] for [Login User Name].
B Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].
C Press [Enter] for [Login Password].
67
D Enter a login password, and then press [OK].
2
E Press [Login].
When the user is authenticated, the screen for the function you are using appears.
Log Off (Using the Control Panel)

Follow the procedure below to log off when Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.
AMG044S
B Press [Yes].
68
Login (Using a Printer Driver)

When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication
is set, make encryption settings in the printer properties of a printer driver, and
then specify a login user name and password. For details, see the printer driver
Help.
Note
When logged on using a printer driver, logging off is not required.
Login (Using Web Image Monitor)

This section explains how to log onto the machine via Web Image Monitor.
A Click [Login].
B Enter a login user name and password, and then click [Login].
Note
For user code authentication, enter a user code in [User Name], and then
click [OK].
The procedure may differ depending on the Web Image Monitor used.
Log Off (Using Web Image Monitor)
A Click [Logout] to log off.

Note
Delete the cache memory in the Web Image Monitor after logging off.
69
Auto Logout
When using user authentication management, the machine automatically logs
you off if you do not use the control panel within a given time. This feature is
called "Auto Logout". Specify how long the machine is to wait before performing
Auto Logout.

C Press [Timer Settings].
D Press [Auto Logout Timer].
other settings.
70
E Select [On].
2
Note
If you do not want to specify [Auto Logout Timer], select [Off].
F Enter "60" to "999" (seconds) using the number keys, and then press [q].

Authentication using an external device
If you authenticate using an external device, see the Kit manual.
For details, contact your local dealer.
71
72
3. Preventing Information Leaks

Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying
Using the printer driver, you can embed a pattern in the printed copy to discourage or prevent unauthorized copying.
If you enable data security for copying on the machine, printed copies of a document with data security for copying are grayed out to prevent unauthorized
copying.
Make the setting as follows:
Unauthorized Copy Prevention

A Using the printer driver, specify the printer settings for unauthorized copy
prevention.
See p.77 Specifying Printer Settings for Unauthorized Copy Prevention
(Printer Driver Setting).
A Using the printer driver, specify the printer settings for data security for
copying.
See p.78 Specifying Printer Settings for Data security for copying (Printer
Driver Setting).
B Specifying data security for copying on the machine. Printed copies of a
document with data security for copying are grayed out.
See p.78 Specifying Data Security for Copying (Machine Setting).
73
Unauthorized Copy Prevention

Using the printer driver, you can embed mask and pattern (for instance, a warning such as "No Copying") in the printed document.
If the document is copied, scanned, or stored in a Document Server by a copier
or multifunction printer, the embedded pattern appears clearly on the copy, discouraging unauthorized copying.
AKB001S
1. Printed Documents
Using the printer driver, you can embed
background images and pattern in a
printed document for Unauthorized
Copy Prevention.
2. The document is copied, scanned,

or stored in the Document Server.
3. Printed Copies
Embedded pattern (for instance, a warning such as "No Copying") in a printed
document appears conspicuously in
printed copies.
Important
Unauthorized copy prevention discourages unauthorized copying, and will
not necessarily stop information leaks.
The embedded pattern is not assured to be copied, scanned, or stored properly in the Document Server.
Limitation
Depending on the machine and scanner settings, the embedded pattern may
not be copied ,scanned, or stored in the Document Server.
Note
To make the embedded pattern clear, set the character size to at least 50 pt
(preferably 70 to 80 pt) and character angle to between 30 and 40 degrees.
Reference
To use the printer function under the User Authentication, you must enter the
login user name and password for the printer driver.
For details see the printer driver Help.
74

Using the printer driver to enable data security for the copying function, you can
print a document with an embedded pattern of hidden text. Such a document is
called a data security for copying document.
If a data security for copying document is copied or stored in the Document
Server using a copier or multi-function printer with the Copy Data Security Unit,
protected pages are grayed out in the copy, preventing confidential information
being copied. Also if a document with embedded pattern is detected, the machine beeps. The unauthorized copy log is also stored. To gray out copies of data
security for copying documents when they are copied or stored in the Document
Server, the optional Copy Data Security Unit must be installed in the machine.
AKB002S
1. Documents with data security for

copying
2. The document is copied or stored
in the Document Server.
3. Printed Copies
Text and images in the document are
grayed out in printed copies.
Limitation
If the Copy Data Security Unit is installed in the machine, you cannot use the
scanner and fax functions.
If the Copy Data Security Unit is installed, you cannot specify a scaling factor
less than 50% using the Control Panel under the Copier and Document Server
functions.
If a document with embedded pattern for data security for copying is copied,
or stored in the Document Server by a copier or multi-function printer without
Copy Data Security Unit, the embedded pattern appears conspicuously in the
copy. However, how conspicuously the text appears depends on the model of
the copier or multi-function printer being used and its scanning setting.
75
Note
You can also embed pattern in a document protected by data security for copying. However, if such a document is copied or stored in the Document Server using a copier or multi-function printer with the Copy Data Security Unit,
the copy is grayed out, so the embedded pattern does not appear on the copy.
If misdetection occurs, contact your service representative.

If a document with embedded pattern for data security for copying is copied,
scanned, or stored in the Document Server using a copier or multi-function
printer without the Copy Data Security Unit, the embedded pattern appears
clearly on the copy.
If the scanned data security for copying document is registered as a user
stamp, the machine does not beep, the file registered as a user stamp is grayed
out, and no entry is added to the unauthorized copying log.
Printing Limitations
The following is a list of limitations on printing with unauthorized copy prevention and data security for copying.
Unauthorized copy prevention / Data security for copying

Limitation
You can print using the only RPCS printer driver.
You cannot print at 200 dpi resolution.

You cannot partially embed pattern in the printed document.
You can only embed pattern that is entered in the [Text] box of the printer
driver.
Printing with embedding takes longer than normal printing.
Data security for copying Only

Limitation
Select 7.2 10.1 inches or larger as the paper size.
Select Plain or Recycled with a brightness of 70% or more as the paper type.
If you select Duplex, the data security for copying function may not work
properly due to printing on the back of sheets.
76
Notice
1.The supplier does not guarantee that unauthorized copy prevention and data
security for copying will always work. Depending on the paper, the model of
copier or multi-function printer, and the copier or printer settings, unauthorized
copy prevention and data security for copying may not work properly.
2.The supplier is not liable for any damage caused by using or not being able to
use unauthorized copy prevention and data security for copying.
Printing with Unauthorized Copy Prevention and Data Security

for Copying
Specifying Printer Settings for Unauthorized Copy Prevention (Printer Driver Setting)
Using the printer driver, specify the printer settings for unauthorized copy prevention.
For details about specifying data security for copying using the printer driver,
see the printer driver Help.
A Open the printer driver dialog box.

B On the [Edit] tab, select the [Unauthorized copy...] check box.
C Click [Control Settings...].
D In the [Text] box in the [Unauthorized copy prevention: Pattern] group, enter the
text to be embedded in the printed document.
Also, specify [Font], [Font style:], and [Size].
E Click [OK].
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
77
Specifying Printer Settings for Data security for copying (Printer Driver Setting)
If a document printed using this function is copied or stored in the Document
Server by a copier or multi-function printer, the copy is grayed out.
Using the printer driver, specify the printer settings for data security for copying.
For details about data security for copying, see p.75 Data Security for Copying.
For details about specifying data security for copying using the printer driver,
see the printer driver Help.

B On the [Edit] tab, select the [Unauthorized copy...] check box.
C Click [Control Settings...].
D In the [Unauthorized copy prevention: Pattern] group, check the [Data security for
copying].
E Click [OK].
Reference
Specifying Data Security for Copying (Machine Setting)

To use this function, the Copy Data Security Unit must be installed.
If a document printed is copied or stored in the Document Server, the copy is
grayed out.
For details about data security for copying, see p.75 Data Security for Copying.
Preparation
Limitation
If a document that is not copy-guarded is copied or stored, the copy or stored
file is not grayed out.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}key.

78
D Press [Data security for copying].

If the setting you want to specify does not appear, press [TNext] to scroll
down to other settings.
E Press[On].
If you do not want to specify [Data security for copying], select [Off].
F Press[OK].
G Press [Exit].
79
Printing a Confidential Document

To use this function, Printer/Scanner unit must be installed.
Depending on the location of the machine, it is difficult to prevent unauthorized
persons from viewing prints lying in the machines output trays. When printing
confidential documents, use the Locked Print function.
Locked Print
Using the printers Locked Print function, store files in the machine as Locked
Print files and then print them from the control panel and retrieve them immediately, preventing others from viewing them.
Note
To store files temporarily, select [Stored Print] under the printer driver. If you
select [Share stored print files], also, you can share these files.
Choosing a Locked Print file

Using the printer driver, specify a Locked Print file.
If user authentication has been enabled, you must enter the login user name and
login password using the printer driver. For details see the printer driver Help.
You can perform Locked Print even if user authentication is not enabled. For details see Printer Reference.

B Set [Job type] to [Locked Print].
C Click [Details...].
D Enter the user ID and password.
Note
The password entered here let you use the Locked Print function.
To print a Locked Print file, enter the same password on the control panel.
Limitation
Enter the user ID using up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
Enter the password using 4 to 8 numbers.
E Click [OK].
F Confirm the password by re-entering it.

G Click [OK].
80
H Perform Locked Print.

Reference
Printing a Locked Print File

Print Locked Print files using the control panel.
Consult your administrator if you have forgotten your password.
This can also be specified via Web Image Monitor.
Preparation
For details about logging on and logging off with user authentication, see p.67
Login (Using the Control Panel), p.68 Log Off (Using the Control Panel).
A Press the {Printer} key.

B Press [Print Jobs].
C Press [Locked Print Job List].
Only Locked Print files belonging to the user who has logged on appear.
D Select the Locked Print file to print.

81
E Press [Print].
F Enter the password for the stored file, and then press [OK].
Note
Enter the password specified in step D on p.80 Choosing a Locked Print
file.
G Press [Yes].
82
Deleting Locked Print Files

This can be specified by the file creator (owner).
To delete Locked Print files, you must enter the password for the files. If the
password has been forgotten, ask the file administrator to change the password.
Note
Locked Print files can also be deleted by the file administrator.

D Select the file.
83
E Press [Delete].
F Enter the password of the Locked Print file, and then press [OK].
G Press [Yes].
Changing Passwords of Locked Print Files
This can be specified by the file creator (owner) or file administrator.
If the password has been forgotten, the file administrator change the password.
A Press the {Printer}key.


D Select the file.
84
E Press [Change Password].
F Enter the password for the stored file, and then press [OK].
The machine administrator does not need to enter the password.
G Enter the new password for the stored file, and then press [OK].
H If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
85
Unlocking Locked Print Files

If you specify "Enhance File Protection", the file will be locked and become inaccessible if an invalid password is entered ten times. This section explains how to
unlock files.
Only the file administrator can unlock files.
For details about "Enhance File Protection", see p.151 Changing the Extended
Security Functions.
Note
You can use the same procedure to unlock stored print files also.

D Select the file.

E Press [Unlock File].
F Press [Yes].
86
Specifying Access Permission for Stored Files
Specifying Access Permission for Stored

Files
You can specify who is allowed to access stored scan files and files stored in the
Document Server.
This can prevent activities such as printing or sending of stored files by unauthorized users.
You can also specify which users can change or delete stored files.
Access Permission
To limit the use of stored files, you can specify four types of access permission.
Read-only
In addition to checking the content of and information about stored files, you can also
print and send the files.
Edit
You can change the print settings for stored

files. This includes permission to view files.
Edit / Delete
You can delete stored files.

This includes permission to view and edit
files.
Full Control
You can specify the user and access permission.This includes permission to view, edit,
and edit / delete files.
Note
Files can be stored by any user who is allowed to use the Document Server,
copy function, scanner function, or fax function.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can check the content of stored files. For
details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
The default access permission for the file creator (owner) is "Read-only".
You can also specify the access permission.
Password for Stored Files

Passwords for stored files can be specified by the file creator (owner) or file
administrator.
You can obtain greater protection against the unauthorized use of files.
87
Assigning Users and Access Permission for Stored Files

Specify the users and their access permissions for each stored file.
By making this setting, only users granted access permission can access stored
files.
Preparation
Important
If files become inaccessible, reset their access permission as the file creator
(owner). This can also be done by the file administrator. If you want to access
a file but do not have access permission, ask the file creator (owner).
A Press the {Document Server} key.

B Select the file.
C Press [File Management].
88
D Press [Change Access Priv.].
E Press [Program/Change/Delete].
F Press [New Program].
89
G Select the users or groups you want to assign permission to.

You can select more than one users.
By pressing [All Users], you can select all the users.
3
H Press [Exit].
I Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then
select the permission.
Select the access permission from [Read-only], [Edit], [Edit / Delete], or [Full Control].
J Press [Exit].
K Press [OK].
90
Specifying Access Privileges for Files Stored using the Scanner

and Fax Functions
If user authentication is set for the scanner and fax functions, you can specify access privileges for made using these functions when storing them in the Document Server. You can also change the access privileges for the file.
Specifying Access Privileges When Storing Files

This section explains how to specify the access privileges and then store a file in
the Document Server under the scanner or fax function.
The scanner screen is used to illustrate the procedure.
A Press [Store File].
B Press [Access Privileges].
91
C Press [New Program].
D Select the users or groups you want to assign permission to. You can select
more than one users.
E Press [Exit].
Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then select the permission.
F Press [Exit].
G Press [OK].
H Store files in the Document Server.
Changing Access Privileges for Previously Stored Files
This section explains the authentication process for accessing a file stored in the
Document Server under the scanner or fax function.
The scanner screen is used to illustrate the procedure.
A Press [Select Stored File].
B Select the file.

92
C Press[Manage / Delete File].
D Press [Change Access Priv.].
E Press [Program/Change/Delete].
G Select the users or groups you want to assign permission to.
H Press [Exit].
Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then select the permission.
I Press [Exit].
J Press [OK].
93
Assigning the User and the Access Permission for the Users
Stored Files
This can be specified by the file creator (owner) or user administrator.
Specify the users and their access permission to files stored by a particular user.
Only those users granted access permission can access stored files.
This makes the management of access permission easier than it is when permission is specified for each stored file.
Preparation
Important
If files become inaccessible, be sure to enable the user administrator, and then
reset the access permission for the files in question.

94
95
G Under "Protect File(s)", press [Program/Change/Delete] for "Permissions for

Users/Groups".
3
other settings.
H Press [New Program].
I Select the users or groups to register.

J Press [Exit].
96
K Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then
3
L Press [Exit].
M Press [OK].
N Press [Exit].
Specifying Passwords for the Stored Files
Specify passwords for the stored files.
Provides increased protection against unauthorized use of files.
Preparation

B Select the file.
97
D Press [Change Password].
E Enter the password using the number keys.
You can use 4 to 8 numbers as the password for the stored file.
F Press [OK].
G Confirm the password by re-entering it using the number keys.
H Press [OK].
I Press [OK].
98
Unlocking Files
If you specify "Enhance File Protection", the file will be locked and become inaccessible if an invalid password is entered ten times. This section explains how to
unlock files.
Only the file administrator can unlock files.
For details about "Enhance File Protection", see p.151 Changing the Extended
Security Functions.
Preparation

B Select the file.
99
D Press [Unlock File].
E Press [Yes].
F Press [OK].
100
Preventing Data Leaks Due to

Unauthorized Transmission
If user authentication is specified, the user who has logged on will be designated
as the sender to prevent data from being sent by an unauthorized person masquerading as the user.
You can also limit the direct entry of destinations to prevent files from being sent
to destinations not registered in the address book.
Restrictions on Destinations
Make the setting to disable the direct entry of e-mail addresses and phone numbers under the scanner and fax functions.
By making this setting, the destinations can be restricted to addresses registered
If you set [Restrict Use of Destinations] to [On], you can prohibit users from directly
entering telephone numbers, e-mail addresses, or Folder Path in order to send
files. If you set [Restrict Use of Destinations] to [Off], [Restrict Adding of User Destinations] appears. In [Restrict Adding of User Destinations], you can restrict users from
registering data in the address book.
If you set [Restrict Adding of User Destinations] to [Off], users can directly enter destination telephone numbers, e-mail addresses, and Folder Path in [Program Dest.]
on the fax and scanner screens. If you set [Restrict Adding of User Destinations] to
[On], users can specify destinations directly, but cannot use [Program Dest.] to register data in the address book. When this setting is made, only the user administrator can change the address book.
For details, see p.151 Changing the Extended Security Functions.
Preparation
101
D Press [Extended Security].
E Press [On] for "Restrict Use of Destinations".
102
F Press [OK].
Reference
This can also be specified using Web Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. For details, see the Help for each application.
103
Protecting the Address Book

If user authentication is specified, the user who has logged on will be designated
as the sender to prevent data from being sent by an unauthorized person masquerading as the user.
To protect the data from unauthorized reading, you can also encrypt the data in
the address book.
Address Book Access Permission
This can be specified by the registered user. The access permission can also be
specified by a user granted full control or the user administrator.
You can specify who is allowed to access the data in the address book.
By making this setting, you can prevent the data in the address book being used
by unregistered users.
Preparation

104
G Under "Protect Destination", press [Program/Change/Delete] for "Permissions

for Users/Groups".
105
H Press [New Program].
I Select the users or groups to register.

J Press [Exit].
K Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then
Select the permission, from [Read-only], [Edit], [Edit / Delete], or [Full Control].
106
L Press [Exit].
M Press [OK].
N Press [Exit].
Encrypting the Data in the Address Book

Encrypt the data in the address book.
Reference
See p.151 Changing the Extended Security Functions.
Preparation
Note
If you register additional users after encrypting the data in the address book,
those users are also encrypted.

107
E Press [On] for "Encrypt Address Book".
F Press [Change] for [Encryption Key].
G Enter the encryption key, and then press [OK].

Enter the encryption key using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
H Press [Encrypt / Decrypt].
108
I Press [Yes].
Do not switch the main power off during encryption, as doing so may corrupt
the data.
Encrypting the data in the address book may take a long time.
The time it takes to encrypt the data in the address book depends on the
number of registered users.
The machine cannot be used during encryption.
Normally, once encryption is complete, [Exit] appears.
If you press [Stop] during encryption, the data is not encrypted.
If you press [Stop] during decryption, the data stays encrypted.
J Press [Exit].
K Press [OK].
109
Deleting Data on the Hard Disk

A
Hard Disk
The machines hard disk lets you store data under the copy, printer, fax, scanner, and document server functions, as well as the address book and counters
stored under each user code.
Data Not Overwritten in the Hard Disk
The machines memory lets you store fax numbers and data transmitted using the fax function, and network TWAIN scanner. Even if you delete the data
on the hard disk, this data remains intact.
Overwriting the Data on the Hard Disk

To use this function, the optional DataOverwriteSecurity unit must be installed.
To prevent data on the hard disk being leaked before disposing of the machine,
you can overwrite all data stored on the hard disk. You can also automatically
overwrite temporarily-stored data.
Note
Depending on the hard disk capacity and the method of erasing the data, this
action may take a few hours. Once you start the Erase All Memory function,
no other machine operation is possible until the function completes or you
quit the function.
Auto Erase Memory Setting

To erase selected data on the hard disk, specify [Auto Erase Memory Setting].
Erase All Memory
To erase all the data on the hard disk, using [Erase All Memory].
Methods of Erasing the Data
You can select the method of erasing the data from the following:
The default is "NSA".
NSA *1
Overwrites the data on the hard disk twice

with random numbers and once with zeros.
DoD *2
Overwrites the data with a number, its complement, and random numbers, and then
checks the result.
Random Numbers
Overwrites the data with random numbers

the specified number of times.
You can specify between 1 and 9 as the
number of times the data is overwritten with
random numbers. The default is 3 times.
*1
*2
National Security Agency

Department of Defense
110
Reference
For details, see the manual supplied with the DataOverwriteSecurity unit.
"Auto Erase Memory Setting"

A document scanned in Copier, Fax, or Scanner mode, or print data sent from a
printer driver is temporarily stored on the machine's hard disk.
Even after the job is completed, it remains in the hard disk as temporary data.
Auto Erase Memory erases the temporary data on the hard disk by writing over
it.
Overwriting starts automatically once the job is completed.
The Copier, Fax, and Printer functions take priority over the Auto Erase Memory
function. If a copy, fax or print job is in progress, overwriting will only be done
after the job is completed.
Preparation

111
D Press [Auto Erase Memory Setting].
other settings.
E Press [On], and then select the method of erasing the data.
Select the method of erasing the data from [NSA], [DoD], or [Random Numbers].
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to step F.
If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to step H.
F Press [Change].
112
G Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number
keys, and then press [q].
3
H Press [OK].
Auto Erase Memory is set.
Important
When Auto Erase Memory is set to "On", temporary data that remained on
the hard disk when Auto Erase Memory was "Off" might not be overwritten.
Note
Should the main power switch of the machine be turned off before overwriting is completed, the temporary data will remain on the hard disk until the main power switch is next turned on and overwriting is resumed.
If the overwriting method is changed while overwriting is in progress, the
remainder of the temporary data will be overwritten using the method set
originally.
Canceling Auto Erase Memory
A Follow steps A to D in "Auto Erase Memory Setting".

B Press [Off].
C Press [OK].
Auto Erase Memory is disabled.
Note
To set Auto Erase Memory to "On" again, repeat the procedure in "Auto Erase
Memory Setting".
113
Types of Data that Can or Cannot Be Overwritten

The following table shows the types of data that can or cannot be overwritten by
Auto Erase Memory.
Data overwritten by Auto
Erase Memory
Copier
Copy jobs
Printer
Print Jobs
Sample Print/Locked
Print/Stored Print Jobs *1
Spool Printing jobs
PDF Direct Print data

LAN fax print jobs
Fax *2
Internet fax transmitted

data
Scanner
*3
Scanned files sent by e-mail

Files sent by Scan to Folder
Documents sent using
DeskTopBinder, the ScanRouter delivery software
or a Web Image Monitor
Data not overwritten by Auto

Erase Memory
Documents stored by the user in the Document Server using

the Copier, Printer or Scanner functions *4
Information registered in the Address Book *5
Counters stored under each user code
Image overlay data *6
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
A Sample Print, Locked Print, or Stored Print job can only be overwritten after it has
been executed.Stored print jobs can be overwritten by Auto Erase Memory only if
they have been deleted in advance.
The data for fax transmission and the registered fax numbers are stored in the memory. This data is not stored on the hard disk, so it will not be overwritten by Auto
Erase Memory.
Data scanned with network TWAIN scanner will not be overwritten by Auto Erase
Memory.
A stored document can only be overwritten after it has been printed or deleted from
the Document Server.
Data stored in the Address Book can be encrypted for security. For details, see p.107
Encrypting the Data in the Address Book.
Image overlay data can be overwritten by Auto Erase Memory only if it is deleted in
advance.
114
"Erase All Memory"

You can erase all the data on the hard disk by writing over it. This is useful if you
relocate or dispose of your machine.
Preparation
Important
If you select Erase All Memory, the following are also deleted: user codes,
counters under each user code, user stamps, data stored in the Address Book,
printer fonts downloaded by users, applications using Embedded Software
Architecture, SSL server certificates, and the machines network settings.
Note
Before erasing the hard disk, you can back up user codes, counters for each
user code, and Address Book data using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. For
details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
A Disconnect communication cables connected to the machine.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
D Press [Administrator Tools].
115
E Press [Erase All Memory].
other settings.
F Select the method of erasing the data.
Select the method of erasing the data from [NSA], [DoD], or [Random Numbers].
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to step G.
If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to step I.
G Press [Change].
116
H Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number
keys, and then press [q].
3
I Press [OK].
J Press [Yes].
K When overwriting is completed, press [Exit], and then turn off the power.
Reference
Before turning the power off, see "Turning On the Power", About This Machine..
Important
Should the main power switch of the machine be turned off before Erase
All Memory is completed, overwriting is canceled.
Make sure the main power switch is not turned off during overwriting.
Note
If the main power is turned off when Erase All Memory is in progress,
overwriting will start again when you next turn on the main power.
If an error occurs before overwriting is completed, turn off the main power. Turn it on again, and then repeat from stepB.
117
Canceling Erase All Memory
A Press [Cancel] while Erase All Memory is in progress.

B Press [Yes].
Erase All Memory is canceled.
Note
If you stop this before completion, the data is not fully erased. Execute
[Erase All Memory] again to erase the data.
C Turn off the main power.

Note
To resume overwriting after power off, turn on the main power of the machine, and then repeat the procedure in "Erase All Memory".
118
4. Managing Access to the

Machine
Preventing Modification of Machine
Settings
Administrator type determines which machine settings can be modified. Users
cannot change the administrator settings. In [Admin. Authentication], [Available Settings], the administrator can select which settings users cannot specify.
Register the administrators before using the machine.
Type of Administrator
Register the administrator on the machine, and then authenticate the administrator using the administrators login user name and password. The administrator can also specify [Available Settings] in [Admin. Authentication] to prevent
users from specifying certain settings. Administrator type determines which
machine settings can be modified. The following types of administrator are
available:
User Administrator
File Administrator
Reference
For details, see p.11 Administrators.
For details, see p.17 Administrator Authentication.

For details, see p.174 Machine Administrator Settings.
For details, see p.182 Network Administrator Settings.
For details, see p.186 File Administrator Settings.
For details, see p.11 User Administrator.
Menu Protect
Use this function to specify the permission level for users to change those settings accessible by non-administrators.
You can specify Menu Protect for the following settings:
Facsimile Features
Printer Features
Scanner Features
Reference
For details, see p.194 User Settings.
119
Menu Protect
The administrator can also limit users access permission to the machines settings. The machines System Settings menu and the printers regular menus can
be locked so they cannot be changed. This function is also effective when management is not based on user authentication.
To change the menu protect setting, you must first enable administrator authentication.
Reference
For details about the menu protect level for each function, see p.194 User Settings.
Menu Protect
You can set menu protect to [Off], [Level 1], or [Level 2]. If you set it to [Off], no
menu protect limitation is applied. To limit access to the fullest extent, select
[Level 2]. For details about the menu protect level for each function, see p.194
User Settings.
Copying Functions
To specify [Menu Protect] in [Copier / Document Server Features], set [Machine Management] to [On] in [Administrator Authentication Management] in [Administrator Tools] in
[System Settings].

B Press [Copier / Document Server Features].

D Press [Menu Protect].
120
Menu Protect
E Select the menu protect level, and then press [OK].
Fax Functions
To specify [Menu Protect] in [Facsimile Features]: Under [System Settings], [Administrator Tools], [Administrator Authentication Management], set [Machine Management], to
[On].

B Press [Facsimile Features].
C Press [Initial Settings].

other settings.
121
Printer Functions
To specify [Menu Protect] in [Printer Features], set [Machine Management] to [On] in
[Administrator Authentication Management] in [Administrator Tools] in [System Settings].

B Press [Printer Features].
C Press [Maintenance].
122
Menu Protect

Scanner Functions
To specify [Menu Protect] in [Scanner Features], set [Machine Management] to [On] in
[Administrator Authentication Management] in [Administrator Tools] in [System Settings].

B Press [Scanner Features].
C Press [Initial Settings].

123

To prevent unauthorized operation, you can specify who is allowed to access
each of the machines functions.
Available Functions
Specify the available functions from the copier, Document Server, fax, scanner, and printer functions.
Copier
Full Color/Two Color/Single Color/Black & White, Two

Color/Single Color/Black & White, Single Color/Black & White,
Black & White Only, Color
Printer
Full Color, Single Color, Color
Other Functions
Document Server, Facsimile, Scanner
Note
To copy in both color and black/white select Full Color/Two Color/Black
& White. To print in both color and black/white select Full Color.
Unless you select all items in the Copier or Printer setting, the {Auto Color
Selection} key cannot be used.
Specifying Which Functions are Available

This can be specified by the user administrator. Specify the functions available
to registered users. By making this setting, you can limit the functions available
to users.
Preparation

124

E Select the user.

G In [Available Functions], select the functions you want to specify.
other settings.
H Press [OK].
I Press [Exit].
125
Managing Log Files

A
Log information
To view the log, the log collection server is required.
The following log information is stored in the machines memory and on its
hard disk:
Job log
Stores information about workflow related to user files, such as copying,
printing, fax deliverly, and scan file delivery
Access log
Stores information about access, such as logging on and off, creating and
deleting files, scanning data security for copying documents, administrator procedures *1 , and customer engineer procedures. *2
*1
*2
Deleting all log information

Formatting the hard disk
Deleting log information

To delete the log, the log collection server is required.
By deleting the log stored in the machine, you can free up space on the hard
disk.
Transferring log information
To transfer the log, the log collection server is required.
You can transfer the log information, which indicates who tried to gain access
and at what time.
By transferring the log files, you can check the history data and identify unauthorized access.
Specifying Delete All Logs

By deleting the log stored in the machine, you can free up space on the hard disk.

126
Managing Log Files
D Press [Delete All Logs].

other settings.
E Press [Yes].
F Press [Exit].
G Press the {User Tools/Counter}key.
The machine administrator can select [On] from the log server only.
When using the machines control panel, you can change the setting to [Off] only
if it is set to [On].
You can check and change the transfer log setting. This setting lets you transfer
log files to the log server to check the history data and identify unauthorized access.
For details about log collection server, contact your local dealer.
For details about the transfer log setting, see log collection server help.

127
D Press [Transfer Log Setting].
other settings.
E Press [Off].
F Press [OK].
G Press the {User Tools/Counter}key.
128
5. Enhanced Network Security

You can limit IP addresses, disable ports and protocols, or use Web Image Monitor to specify the network security level to prevent unauthorized access over the
network and protect the address book, stored files, and default settings.
Enabling/Disabling Protocols
This can be specified by the network administrator.
Specify whether to enable or disable the function for each protocol.
By making this setting, you can specify which protocols are available and so prevent unauthorized access over the network.
Preparation

C Press [Interface Settings].
129
D Press [Effective Protocol].
E Press [Inactive] for the protocol you want to disable.
F Press [OK].
Reference
Advanced network settings can be specified using Web Image Monitor.
For details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
Access Control
The machine can control TCP/IP access.
Limit the IP addresses from which access is possible by specifying the access
control range.
For example, if you specify the access control range as [192.168.15.16][192.168.15.20], the client PC addresses from which access is possible will be from
192.168.15.16 to 192.168.15.20.
Limitation
Using access control, you can limit access involving LPR, RCP/RSH, FTP, IPP,
DIPRINT, Web Image Monitor, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client or DeskTopBinder. You cannot limit the Monitoring of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
You cannot limit access involving telnet, or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
130
A Open a Web Image Monitor.

B Enter "http://(machine's-address)/" in the address bar to access the machine.
C Log onto the machine.
The network administrator can log on using the appropriate login user name
and login password.
D Click [Configuration], under [Security], click [Access Control].

The [Access Control] page appears.
E To specify the IPv4 Address, in [Access Control Range], enter an IP address

that has access to the machine. To specify the IPv6 Address, in [Access Control Range] - [Range], enter an IP address that has access to the machine, or in
[Mask], enter an IP address that has access to the machine and specify the
[Mask Length].
F Click [OK].
Access control is set.
G Log off from the machine.

Reference
For details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
Specifying Network Security Level

This setting lets you change the security level to limit unauthorized access.
Set the security level to [Level 0], [Level 1], or [Level 2].
Select [Level 2] for maximum security to protect confidential information.
Select [Level 1] for moderate security. Use this setting if the machine is connected
to the office local area network (LAN).
Select [Level 0] to use this setting if no information needs to be protected.
You can specify the entire network security level setting the machines control
panel.
Reference
For details about logging on and logging off with user authentication, see p.23
Logging on Using Administrator Authentication, p.26 Logging off Using
Administrator Authentication.
131

D Press [Network Security Level].
If the setting you want to specify does not appear, press [TNext] to scroll
down to other settings.
132
E Select the network security level.
Select [Level 0], [Level 1], or [Level 2].
F Press [OK].
G Press [Exit].
H Press the {User Tools/Counter}key.
-Status of Functions under each Network Security Level

= Available
= Unavailable
U = Port is open.
| = Port is closed.
= Automatic
= Ciphertext Only
= Ciphertext Priority
Function

Level 0
Interface
Level 1
Level 2
IEEE1394 SBP-2
Bluetooth
IPv4 over 1394
133

Function

Level 0
TCP/IP
Level 2
Port 80
Port 443
Port 631
Port 7443/7444
Port 80
Port 631
Port 443
DIPRINT
LPR
TCP/IP
HTTP
IPP
Level 1
FTP
Port 21
ssh
Port 22
RSH/RCP
SNMP
Setting
Browse
sftp
RFU
SNMP v1v2
Port 10021
SNMP v3
SNMP Encryption
TELNET
SSDP
Port 1900
NBT
Port 137/138
DNS
SMB
NetWare
NetWare
AppleTalk
AppleTalk
SSL
SSL / TLS Encryption Mode
134

Prevent login passwords, group passwords for PDF files, and IPP authentication
passwords being revealed by encrypting them for transmission.
Also, encrypt the login password for administrator authentication and user authentication.
Driver Encryption Key

Encrypt the password transmitted when specifying user authentication.
To encrypt the login password, specify the driver encryption key on the machine and on the printer driver installed in the users computer.
Reference
Group Passwords for PDF Files

DeskTopBinder Lites PDF Direct Print function allows a PDF group password to be specified to enhance security.
Note
You cannot perform PDF Direct Print for compressed PDF files.
To use PDF direct print, the optional PostScript3 unit must be installed.
Password for IPP Authentication

To encrypt the IPP Authentication password on the Web Image Monitor, set
[Authentication] to [DIGEST], and then specify the IPPAuthentication password
set on the machine.
Note
You can use Telnet or FTP to manage passwords for IPP authentication, although it is not recommended.
135

Specify the driver encryption key on the machine.
By making this setting, you can encrypt login passwords for transmission to prevent them from being analyzed.
Reference
Preparation

136
E For [Driver Encryption Key], press [Change].
F Enter the driver encryption key, and then press [OK].

Enter the driver encryption key using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Note
The network administrator must give users the driver encryption key
specified on the machine so they can register it on their computers. Make
sure to enter the same driver encryption key as that specified on the machine.
G Press [OK].
Reference
See the TWAIN driver Help.
137
Group Password for PDF files

On the machine, specify the group password for PDF files.
By using a PDF group password, you can enhance security and so protect passwords from being analyzed.
Preparation
Note
The network administrator must give users the group password for PDF files
that is already registered on the machine. The users can then register it in
DeskTopBinder on their computers.For details, see the DeskTopBinder Help
Make sure to enter the same character string as that specified on the machine
for the group password for PDF files.
The group password for PDF files can also be specified using Web Image
Monitor. For details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.

C Press [PDF Menu], and then press [PDF Group Password].

If the setting to be specified does not appear, press [TNext].
D For [Current Password], press [Enter].

E Enter the password, and then press [OK].
Enter the group password for PDF files using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
F Press [OK].
G For [New Password], press [Enter].
138
H Enter the password, and then press [OK].

I For [Confirm New Password], press [Enter].
J Enter the password and press [OK].
K Press [OK].
IPP Authentication Password
Specify the IPP authentication passwords for the machine using Web Image
Monitor.
By making this setting, you can encrypt IPP authentication passwords for transmission to prevent them from being analyzed.
Note
When using the IPP port under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, you
can use the operating systems standard IPP port.

B Enter "http://(machine's-address)/" in the address bar to access the machine.
The network administrator can log on. Enter the login user name and login
password.
D Click [Configuration], click [Security], and then click [IPP Authentication].

The [IPP Authentication] page appears.
E Select [DIGEST] from the [Authentication] list.

F Enter the user name in the [User Name] box.
G Enter the password in the [Password] box.
H Click [Apply].
IPP authentication is specified.
I Log off from the machine.
139
Protection Using Encryption

When you access the machine using a Web Image Monitor or IPP, you can establish encrypted communication using SSL. When you access the machine using
an application such as SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can establish encrypted communication using SNMPv3 or SSL.
To protect data from interception, analysis, and tampering, you can install a
server certificate in the machine, negotiate a secure connection, and encrypt
transmitted data.
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
AFN001S
A
B
C
D
E
140
To access the machine from a users computer, request for the SSL server
certificate and public key.
The server certificate and public key are sent from the machine to the users computer.
Using the public key, encrypt the data for transmission.
The encrypted data is sent to the machine.
The encrypted data is decrypted using the private key.
Note
To establish encrypted communication using SSL, the machine must have
the printer and scanner functions.
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption

To protect the communication path and establish encrypted communication,
create and install the server certificate.
There are two ways of installing a server certificate: create and install a self-certificate using the machine, or request a certificate from a certificate authority and
install it.
Configuration flow (self-signed certificate)

A Creating and installing the server certificate
Install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
B Enabling SSL
Enable the [SSL/TLS] setting using Web Image Monitor.
Configuration flow (certificate issued by a certificate authority)
A Creating the server certificate
Create the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
The application procedure after creating the certificate depends on the certificate authority. Follow the procedure specified by the certificate authority.
B Installing the server certificate
C Enabling SSL
Enable the [SSL/TLS] setting using Web Image Monitor.
Creating and Installing the Server Certificate (Self-Signed Certificate)
Create and install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
Note
To confirm whether SSL configuration is enabled, enter https://(machinesaddress) in your Web Image Monitors address bar to access this machine. If
the "The page cannot be displayed" message appears, check the configuration
as the SSL configuration is invalid.
Creating and Installing the Self-Signed Certificate

Create and install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
This section explains the use of a self-certificate as the server certificate.

B Enter "http://(machine's-address)/" in the address bar to access the printer.
The network administrator can log on.
Enter the login user name and login password.
141
D Click [Configuration], under [Security], click [Device Certificate].

E Click [Create].
F Make the necessary settings.
Reference
For details about the displayed items and selectable items, see Web Image
Monitor Help.
G Click [OK].
The setting is changed.
H Click [OK].
A security warning dialog box appears.
I Check the details, and then click [OK].

[Installed] appears under [Certificate Status] to show that a server certificate for
the printer has been installed.
J Log off from the machine.

Note
Click [Delete] to delete the server certificate from the machine.
Creating the Server Certificate (Certificate Issued by a Certificate Authority)

Create the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
This section explains the use of a certificate issued by a certificate authority as
the server certificate.


The [Device Certificate] page appears.
E Click [Request].
F Make the necessary settings.
Reference
Monitor Help.
142
G Click [OK].
[Requesting] appears for [Certificate Status] in the Certificates area.
H Log off from the machine.

I Apply to the certificate authority for the server certificate.
The application procedure depends on the certificate authority. For details,
contact the certificate authority.
For the application, click the Web Image Monitor Details icon and use the information that appears in Certificate Details.
Note
Using Web Image Monitor, you can create the contents of the server certificate but you cannot send the application.
Click [Cancel Request] to cancel the request for the server certificate.
Installing the Server Certificate (Certificate Issued by a Certificate Authority)

This section explains the use of a certificate issued by a certificate authority as
the server certificate.
Enter the server certificate contents issued by the certificate authority.


The [Device Certificate] page appears.
E Click [Install].
F Enter the contents of the server certificate.
In the [Certificate Request] box, enter the contents of the server certificate received from the certificate authority.
Reference
Monitor Help.
G Click [OK].
[Installed] appears under [Certificate Status] to show that a server certificate for
the machine has been installed.
143
H Log off from the machine.

Enabling SSL
After installing the server certificate in the machine, enable the SSL setting.
This procedure is used for a self-signed certificate or a certificate issued by a certificate authority.

D Click [Configuration], under [Security], click [SSL/TLS].
The [SSL/TLS] page appears.
E Click [Enable] for [SSL/TLS].

F Click [OK].
The SSL setting is enabled.
G Log off from the machine.

Note
If you set [Permit SSL/TLS Communication] to [Ciphertext Only], enter "https://(machine's address)/" to access the machine.
User Settings for SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)

If you have installed a server certificate and enabled SSL (Secure Sockets Layer),
you need to install the certificate on the users computer.
The network administrator must explain the procedure for installing the certificate to users.
If a warning dialog box appears while accessing the machine using the Web Image Monitor or IPP, start the Certificate Import Wizard and install a certificate.
A When the [Security Alert] dialog box appears, click [View Certificate].
The [Certificate] dialog box appears.
To be able to respond to inquiries from users about such problems as expiry
of the certificate, check the contents of the certificate.
B On the [General] tab, click [Install Certificate...].

Certificate Import Wizard starts.
144
C Install the certificate by following the Certificate Import Wizard instructions.
Note
For details about how to install the certificate, see the Web Image Monitor
Help.
If a certificate issued by a certificate authority is installed in the printer,

confirm the certificate store location with the certificate authority.
Reference
For details about where to store the certificate when accessing the machine
using IPP, see the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
Setting the SSL / TLS Encryption Mode

By specifying the SSL/TLS encrypted communication mode, you can change the
security level.
Encrypted Communication Mode

Using the encrypted communication mode, you can specify encrypted communication.
Ciphertext Only
Allows encrypted communication only.

If encryption is not possible, the machine
does not communicate.
Ciphertext Priority
Performs encrypted communication if encryption is possible.

If encryption is not possible, the machine
communicates without it.
Ciphertext / Clear Text
Communicates with or without encryption,

according to the setting.
Setting the SSL / TLS Encryption Mode

After installing the server certificate, specify the SSL/TLS encrypted communication mode. By making this setting, you can change the security level.
Preparation
145
D Press [Permit SSL/TLS Communication]
other settings.
146
E Select the encrypted communication mode.
Select [Ciphertext Only], [Ciphertext Priority], or [Ciphertext/Clear Text] as the encrypted communication mode.
F Press [OK].
Note
The SSL/TLS encrypted communication mode can also be specified using
Web Image Monitor. For details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
SNMPv3 Encryption
When using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin or another application to make
various settings, you can encrypt the data transmitted.
By making this setting, you can protect data from being tampered with.
Preparation

147
D Press [Permit SNMPv3 Communication].
other settings.
E Press [Encryption Only].
F Press [OK].
148

Note
To use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin for encrypting the data for specifying settings, you need to specify the network administrators [Encryption
Password] setting and [Encryption Key] in [SNMP Authentication Information] in
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, in addition to specifying [Permit SNMPv3
Communication] on the machine.
If network administrators [Encryption Password] setting is not specified, the

data for transmission may not be encrypted or sent.
Reference
For details about specifying the network administrators [Encryption Password] setting, see p.20 Registering the Administrator.
149
150
6. Specifying the Extended

Security Functions
Changing the Extended Security Functions
As well as providing basic security through user authentication and the machine
access limits specified by the administrators, you can increase security by, for instance, encrypting transmitted data and data in the address book. If you need extended security, specify the machines extended security functions before using
the machine.
This section outlines the extended security functions and how to specify them.
For details about when to use each function, see the corresponding chapters.

To change the extended security functions, display the extended security screen
as follows:
Preparation
Procedure for Changing the Extended Security Functions

151
6
E Press the setting you want to change, and change the setting.
F Press [OK].
152
Settings
This can be specified by the network administrator. Encrypt the password
transmitted when specifying user authentication. The Driver Encryption Key
must match the encryption key set on the machine.
Reference
See the LAN Fax driver Help.

See the TWAIN driver Help.
Encrypt Address Book

This can be specified by the user administrator. Encrypt the data in the machines address book.
Reference
See p.107 Encrypting the Data in the Address Book.
On
Off
Note
Default: Off
Restrict Use of Destinations

The available fax and scanner destinations are limited to the destinations registered in the address book.
Reference
See p.101 Restrictions on Destinations.
A user cannot directly enter the destinations for transmission.
Limitation
If you specify the setting to receive e-mails via SMTP, you cannot use [Restrict Use of Destinations].
Note
The destinations searched by "Search LDAP" can be used.
On
Off
Note
Default: Off
153
Restrict Adding of User Destinations

When "Restrict Use of Destinations" is set to [Off]. After entering a fax or scanner destination directly, you can register it in the address book by pressing
[Program Dest.]. If [On] is selected for this setting, [Program Dest.] does not appear. If you set [Restrict Adding of User Destinations] to [On], users can specify
destinations directly, but cannot use [Program Dest.] to register data in the address book. When this setting is made, only the user administrator can change
the address book.
On
Off
Note
Default: Off
Restrict Display of User Information

This can be specified if user authentication is specified. When the job history
is checked using a network connection for which authentication is not available, all personal information can be displayed as "********". For example,
when someone not authenticated as an administrator checks the job history
using SNMP in SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, personal information can be
displayed as "********" so users cannot be identified. Because no information
identifying registered users can be viewed, unauthorized users can be prevented from obtaining information about the registered files.
On
Off
Note
Default: Off
154
Enhance File Protection

This can be specified by the file administrator. By specifying a password, you
can limit operations such as printing, deleting, and sending files, and can prevent unauthorized people from accessing the files. However, it is still possible
for the password to be cracked.
By specifying "Enhance File Protection", files are locked and so become inaccessible if an invalid password is entered ten times. This can protect the files
from unauthorized access attempts in which a password is repeatedly
guessed.
The locked files can only be unlocked by the file administrator. When "Enhance File Protection" is specified, ( ) appears at the screen.
Note
If files are locked, you cannot select them even if the correct password is
entered.
On
Off
Note
Default: Off
Settings by SNMP v1 and v2

This can be specified by the network administrator. When the machine is accessed using the SNMPv1, v2 protocol, authentication cannot be performed,
allowing machine administrator settings such as the paper setting to be
changed. If you select [Prohibit], the setting can be viewed but not specified
with SNMPv1, v2.
Prohibit
Do not Prohibit
Note
Default: Do not Prohibit
Restrict Use of Simple Encryption

For example, this setting is set to [On] and you want to edit the address book
in User Management Tool or Address Management Tool in SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, or you want to access the machine using DeskTopBinder
or the ScanRouter delivery software, enable SSL/TLS for encrypted communication. For details about specifying SSL/TLS, see p.145 Setting the SSL /
TLS Encryption Mode.
If you select [On], specify the encryption setting using the printer driver.
On
Off
Note
Default: Off
155
Transfer to Fax Receiver

If you use [Forwarding] or [Transfer Request] under the fax function, files stored
in the machine can be transferred or delivered.
If you select [Prohibit] for this setting, stored files cannot be transferred by [Forwarding] and [Transfer Request].
Use this setting, to prevent the stored files being transferred by mistake.
Prohibit
Do not Prohibit
Note
If you select [Prohibit] for this setting, the following functions are disabled:
Polling Transmission
Transfer Request
Forwarding
Transfer Box
Delivery from Personal Box
Information Box
Delivery of Mail Received via SMTP
Reference
For details, see Facsimile Reference.
Authenticate Current Job

This setting lets you specify whether or not authentication is required for operations such as canceling jobs under the copier and printer functions.
If you select [Login Privilege], authorized users and the machine administrator
can operate the machine. When this is selected, authentication is not required
for users who logged on to the machine before [Login Privilege] was selected.
If you select [Access Privilege], users who canceled a copy or print job in
progress and the machine administrator can operate the machine.
Limitation
Even if you select [Login Privilege] and log onto the machine, you cannot
cancel a copy or print job in progress if you are not authorized to use the
copy and printer functions.
You can specify [Authenticate Current Job] only if [User Authentication Management] was specified.
Login Privilege
Access Privilege
Off
156
Note
Default: Off
Password Policy
The password policy setting is effective only if [Basic Auth.] is specified.
This setting lets you specify [Complexity Setting] and [Minimum Character No.] for
the password. By making this setting, you can limit the available passwords
to only those that meet the conditions specified in [Complexity Setting] and [Minimum Character No.].
If you select [Level 1], specify the password using a combination of two types
of characters selected from upper-case letters, lower-case letters, decimal
numbers, and symbols such as #.
If you select [Level 2], specify the password using a combination of three types
of characters selected from upper-case letters, lower-case letters, decimal
numbers, and symbols such as #.
@Remote Service
Communication via HTTPS for @Remote Service is disabled if you select [On].
Prohibit
Do not Prohibit
Note
157
Other Security Functions

This section explains settings for preventing information leaks, and functions
that you can restrict to further increase security.
Fax Function
Not Displaying Destinations and Senders in Reports and Lists
You can specify whether or not to display destinations and senders by clicking [Facsimile Features], [Administrator Tools], [Parameter Setting] and specifying
"Bit No. 04" and "Bit No. 05" under "Switch 04". Not displaying destinations
and senders helps prevent information leaks.
Reference
For details, see "User Parameters", Facsimile Reference.
Stored RX File User Setting

Specify which users can manage fax files stored on the hard disk by setting
[Facsimile Features], [Administrator Tools], [Stored Reception File User Setting] to
[On].
To access the machine over a network, specified users must enter their user
codes or login user names and passwords.
Allowing only authorized users to manage files can prevent others seeing faxes you have sent.
Reference
For details, see "Stored RX File User Setting", Facsimile Reference.
Printing the Journal

When making authentication settings for users, to prevent personal information in transmission history being printed, set the Journal to not be printed.
Also, if more than 200 transmissions are made, transmissions shown in the
Journal are overwritten each time a further transmission is made.
To prevent the Transmission History being overwritten, perform the following procedures:
In the default settings for Fax, under "Administrator Settings", "Parameter
Settings" (Switch 03, Bit 7), change the setting for automatically printing
the Journal.
In the default settings for Fax, under "Administrator Settings", "Parameter
Settings" (Switch 21, Bit 4), set "Transmit Journal by E-mail" to "ON".
158
Other Security Functions
Scanner Function
To prevent personal information in the transmission/delivery history being
printed automatically, set user authentication and the journal will not print
automatically. Instead, items in the Print&Delete Scanner Journal are overwritten one by one when the number of transmissions/deliveries exceeds
250. To prevent the transmission/delivery history from overwritten, change
the setting so that the Scanner Journal is printed automatically.
159
Limiting Machine Operation to Customers

Only
The machine can be set so that operation is impossible without administrator authentication.
The machine can be set to prohibit operation without administrator authentication and also prohibit remote registration in the address book by a service representative.
We maintain strict security when handling customers data. Also, by being authenticated by an administrator to use the machine, we operate the machine under the customers control.
Use the following settings.
Service Mode Lock
Settings
Service Mode Lock
This can be specified by the machine administrator. Service mode is used by
a customer engineer for inspection or repair. If you set the service mode lock
to [On], service mode cannot be used unless the machine administrator logs
onto the machine and cancels the service mode lock to allow the customer engineer to operate the machine for inspection and repair. This ensures that the
inspection and repair are done under the supervision of the machine administrator.
Specifying Service Mode Lock

Preparation

160
Limiting Machine Operation to Customers Only
D Press [Service Mode Lock].
6
E Press [On] and then [OK].
F Press [Yes].
161
Canceling Service Mode Lock

For a customer engineer to carry out inspection or repair in service mode, the
machine administrator must log onto the machine and cancel the service mode
lock.
Preparation

6
D Press [Service Mode Lock].
162
Limiting Machine Operation to Customers Only
E Press [Off] and then press [OK].

The customer engineer can switch to service mode.
163
164
7. Troubleshooting
Authentication Does Not Work Properly
This section explains what to do if a user cannot operate the machine because of
a problem related to user authentication. Refer to this section if a user comes to
you with such a problem.
A Message Appears
This section explains how to deal with problems if a message appears on the
screen during user authentication.
The most common messages are explained. If some other message appears, deal
with the problem according to the information contained in the message.
Messages
Causes
Solutions
You do not have the

privileges to use
this function.
The authority to use the function is not specified.
If this appears when trying

to use a function:
The function is not specified in the address book
management setting as being available. The user administrator must decide
whether to authorize use
of the function and then
assign the authority.
If this appears when trying
to specify a default setting:
The administrator differs
depending on the default
settings you wish to specify. Using the list of settings, the administrator
responsible must decide
whether to authorize use
of the function.
165
Troubleshooting
Messages
Causes
Failed to obtain URL. The machine cannot connect

to the server or cannot establish communication.
Solutions
Make sure the server's settings, such as the IP Address
and host name, are specified
correctly on the machine.
Make sure the host name of
the UA Server is specified correctly.
Authentication has
failed.
The machine is connected to

the server, but the UA service
is not responding properly.
Make sure the UA service is

specified correctly.
SSL is not specified correctly

on the server.
Specify SSL using Authentication Manager.
Server authentication failed.
Make sure server authentication is specified correctly on

the machine.
The entered login user name

or login password is not correct
Inquire the user administrator

for the correct login user name
and login password.
Delete unnecessary user adThe number of users registered in the address book has dresses.
reached the maximum limit
allowed by Windows Authentication or , LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server
Authentication, so you cannot
register additional users.
Cannot access the authentication server when using Windows authentication , LDAP
Authentication, or Integration
Server Authentication.
A network or server error may

have occurred. Contact to the
network administrator.
The selected file(s) You have tried to delete files

without the authority to do so.
contained file(s)
without access privileges. Only file(s)
with access privileges will be deleted.
Files can be deleted by the file

creator (owner) or file administrator. To delete a file which
you are not authorized to delete, contact the file creator
(owner).
166
Authentication Does Not Work Properly
Machine Cannot Be Operated

If the following conditions arise while users are operating the machine, provide
instructions on how to deal with them.
Condition
Cause
Solution
Cannot print using the printer

driver or connect using the
TWAIN driver.
User authentication has been

rejected.
Enter the login user name and

login password in the printer
driver.
If using Windows authentication or , LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server
Authentication, inquire the
network administrator for the
user name and login name.
If using basic authentication,
inquire the user administrator.
Cannot authenticate using the

TWAIN driver.
After starting [User Management Tool] or [Address Management Tool] in

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin and entering the correct
login user name and password, a message appears to
notify that an incorrect password has been entered.
Cannot log on to the machine
using [Document Server: Authentication/Encryption] in DeskTopBinder.
The encryption key specified

in the driver does not match
the machines driver encryption key.
Specify the driver encryption

key registered in the machine.
Another user is logging on to

the machine.
Wait for the user to log off.
Authentication is taking time

because of operating conditions.
Make sure the LDAP server

setting is correct.
Authentication is not possible

while the machine is editing
the address book data.
Wait until editing of the address book data is complete.
"Restrict Simple Encryption"

is not set correctly. Alternatively, [SSL/TLS] has been enabled although the required
certificate is not installed in
the computer.
Set "Restrict Simple Encryption" to [On]. Alternatively,

enable [SSL/TLS], install the
server certificate in the machine, and then install the certificate in the computer.
See p.136 Driver Encryption

Key.
Make sure the network settings are correct.
Reference
See p.155 Restrict Use of
Simple Encryption.
See p.145 Setting the SSL
/ TLS Encryption Mode.
Cannot access the machine using ScanRouter EX Professional V3 / ScanRouter EX

Enterprise V2.
167
Troubleshooting
Condition
Cause
Solution
Cannot connect to the ScanRouter delivery software.
The ScanRouter delivery software may not be supported by

the machine.
Update to the latest version of

the ScanRouter delivery software.
Cannot access the machine us- ScanRouter EX Professional V2 does not support user authentication.
ing ScanRouter EX Professional V2.
Cannot log off when using the

copying or scanner functions.
The original has not been

scanned completely.
When the original has been

scanned completely, press
[q], remove the original, and
then log off.
[Program Dest.] does not appear on the fax or scanner

screen for specifying destinations.
[Restrict Adding of User Destinations] is set to [Off] in [Restrict

Use of Destinations] in [Extended
Security], so only the user administrator can register destinations in the address book.
Registration must be done by

the user administrator.
Stored files do not appear.
User authentication may have

been disabled while [All Users]
is not specified.
Re-enable user authentication,

and then enable [All Users] for
the files that did not appear.
For details about enabling [All
Users], see p.87 Specifying
Access Permission for Stored
Files.
Destinations specified using

the machine do not appear.
User authentication may have

been disabled while [All Users]
is not specified.
Re-enable user authentication,

and then enable [All Users] for
the destinations that did not
appear.
For details about enabling [All
Users], see p.104 Protecting
the Address Book.
Cannot print when user authentication has been specified.
User authentication may not

be specified in the printer
driver.
Specify user authentication in

the printer driver.
If you try to interrupt a job

while copying or scanning, an
authentication screen appears.
With this machine, you can

log off while copying or scanning. If you try to interrupt
copying or scanning after logging off, an authentication
screen appears.
Only the user who executed a

copying or scanning job can
interrupt it.Wait until the job
has completed or consult an
administrator or the user who
executed the job.
After you execute [Encrypt Address Book] the [Exit] message

does not appear.
The hard disk may be faulty.
168
The file may be corrupt.
For details, see the printer

driver Help.
8. Appendix
Operations by the Supervisor
The supervisor can delete an administrators password and specify a new one.
If any of the administrators forget their passwords or if any of the administrators
change, the supervisor can assign a new password. If logged on using the supervisors user name and password, you cannot use normal functions or specify defaults. Log on as the supervisor only to change an administrators password.
Important
The default login user name is "supervisor" and the login password is blank.
We recommend changing the login user name and login password.
When registering login user names and login passwords, you can specify up
to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols. Keep in mind that user names
and passwords are case-sensitive.
Be sure not to forget the supervisor login user name and login password. If
you do forget them, a service representative will to have to return the machine to its default state. This will result in all data in the machine being lost
and the service call may not be free of charge.
Note
You cannot specify the same login user name for the supervisor and the administrators.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can log on as the supervisor and delete an administrators password.
169
Appendix
Logging on as the Supervisor

If administrator authentication has been specified, log on using the supervisor
login user name and login password. This section describes how to log on.
AMG044S
B Press [Enter] for [Login User Name].

C Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].
Note
When you assign the administrator for the first time, enter "supervisor".
D Press [Enter] for [Login Password].

E Enter a login password, and then press [OK].
Note
When you assign the administrator for the first time, proceed to step F
without pressing [Enter].
F Press [Login].
170
Logging off as the Supervisor

If administrator authentication has been specified, be sure to log off after completing settings. This section explains how to log off after completing settings.
AMG044S
B Press [Yes].
Changing the Supervisor


171
Appendix
E Under "Supervisor", click [Change].
F Press [Change] for the login user name.
G Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].

H Press [Change] for the login password.
I Enter the login password, and then press [OK].
J If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
K Press [OK] twice.

172
Resetting an Administrators Password
AMG044S
B Log on as the supervisor.

You can log on in the same way as an administrator.

D Press [Administrator Tools].
E Press [Program / Change Administrator].
F Press [Change] for the administrator you wish to reset.
G Press [Change] for the login password.

H Enter the login password, and then press [OK].
I If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
J Press [OK].
K Press [OK].
173
Appendix
Machine Administrator Settings

The machine administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
System Settings
The following settings can be specified.
General Features
All the settings can be specified.
Tray Paper Settings
Timer Settings
File Transfer
Delivery Option
SMTP Authentication
SMTP Authentication
User Name
E-mail Address
Password
Encryption
POP before SMTP
Wait Time after Authent.
User Name
E-mail Address
Password
Reception Protocol
Server Name
Encryption
SMB User Name / SMB Password
FTP User Name / FTP Password
NCP User Name / NCP Password
Fax E-mail Account
174
Administrator Tools
You can specify which authentication to use.
You can also edit the settings for each function.
Machine Management
You can change the user name and the full-control users authority.
Extended Security
Transfer to Fax Receiver
@Remote Service
Print Counter List
Capture Priority *1
Capture: Ownership
Capture: Public Priority
Capture: Owner Defaults
Extended Features
AOF (Always On)
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server
Identification Name
Server Name
Search Base
Port No.
Use Secure Connection (SSL)
Authentication
Search Conditions
Search Options
LDAP Search
Service Mode Lock
Auto Erase Memory Setting *2
Erase All Memory *2
*1
*2
File Format Converter option must be installed.

The DataOverwriteSecurity unit option must be installed.
175
Appendix
Maintenance

Color Registration

General Features
Reproduction Ratio
Edit
Stamp
Input / Output
Adjust Color Image

Administrator Tools
176
Facsimile Features
General Settings
All the settings can be specified
Scan Settings
All the settings can be specified
Send Settings
The following settings can be specified
Program / Change / Delete Standard Message
Reception Settings
2 Sided Print
Checkered Mark
Center Mark
Initial Settings
Parameter Setting
Menu Protect
177
Appendix
Printer Features
List / Test Print

Maintenance
Menu Protect
4Color Graphic Mode
System
Print Error Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Job Separation
Memory Usage
Duplex
Copies
Blank Page Print
Printer Language
Sub Paper Size
Paper Size
Letterhead Setting
Edge to Edge Print
Tray Switching
Host Interface
PCL Menu
178
PS Menu *1
PDF Menu *1
*1
The PostScript 3 unit option must be installed.
Scanner Features
General Settings
Scan Settings
Send Settings
Compression (Gray Scale/Full Color)
Initial Settings
Settings via Web Image Monitor

Top Page
Reset Printer Job
Reset Device
Device Settings
System
Spool Printing
Protect Printer Display Panel
Output Tray
Paper Tray Priority
Cover Sheet Tray
Slip Sheet Tray
179
Appendix
Paper
Timer
Date/Time
E-mail
Auto E-mail Notification
On demand E-mail Notification
File Transfer
Machine Administrator Authentication
Available Settings for Machine Administrator
Program/Change Administrator
You can specify the following administrator settings as the machine administrator.
Login User Name
Login Password
Change Encryption Password
LDAP Server
Printer
System
Host Interface
PCL Settings
PS Settings *1
PDF Settings *1
Duplex
Blank Page Print
PDF Group Password
Resolution
Tray Parameters (PCL)
180
Tray Parameters (PS)

PDF Group Password
PDF Fixed Password
*1
Fax
Environment Settings
Send/Reception Settings
Parameter Settings
Interface Settings
Parallel Interface
USB
Pict Bridge
Network
SNMPv3
RC Gate
Webpage
Settings via SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

Device Information
Reset Device
Reset Current Job
Reset All Jobs
User Management Tool
User Page Count
Access Control List
Reset User Counters
181
Appendix
Network Administrator Settings

The network administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
System Settings
Interface Settings
Network
IEEE 1394 *1
IEEE 802.11b *2
Note
If DHCP is set to [On], the settings that are automatically obtained via
DHCP cannot be specified.
*1
The IEEE1394 interface board option must be installed.
*2
The IEEE802.11b interface unit option must be installed.
File Transfer
SMTP Server
Server Name
Port No.
Max. Reception E-mail size
182
Administrator Tools
Network Management
You can specify the user name and change the full-control users authority.
Extended Security
Settings by SNMP V1 and V2
Restrict Use of Simple Encryption
Facsimile Features
Send Settings
Max. E-mail Size
Initial Settings
Enable H.323
Enable SIP
H.323 Settings
SIP Settings
Program/Change/Delete Gateway
Scanner Features
Send Settings
Max. E-mail Size
Device Settings
System
Device Name
Comment
Location
E-mail
Reception
SMTP
You can specify the following administrator settings for the machine administrator.
Login User Name
Login Password
183
Appendix

Network Administrator Authentication
Available Settings for Network Administrator
Fax
Send/Reception Settings
Maximum E-mail Size
IP-Fax Settings
IP-Fax Gateway Settings
Interface
Change Interface
IEEE 802.11b *1
Communication Mode
SSID
Channel
WEP Setting
Authentication Type
WEP Key Status
Key
Confirm Key
IEEE 1394 *2
IP over 1394
SCSI print (SBP-2)
Bluetooth *3
Operation Mode
*1
*2
*3
184

The Bluetooth interface unit option must be installed.
Network
IPv4
IPv6
NetWare
AppleTalk
SMB
SNMP
SNMPv3
SSDP
Bonjour
Webpage
Security
Network Security
Access Control
IPP Authentication
SSL/TLS
ssh
Site Certificates
Device Certificates

NIB Setup Tool

185
Appendix
File Administrator Settings

The file administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
System Settings
Administrator Tools
File Management
File Administrator
Extended Security
Enhance File Protection
Facsimile Features
Reception Settings
Printer Features
Maintenance
System
186
File Administrator Settings

Top Page
Reset Printer Job
Document Server
Job
Printer
Print Jobs *1
*1
The file administrator can select [Delete], [Delete Password], and [Unlock Job]. The
file administrator cannot print files.
Device Settings
File Administrator Authentication
Available Settings for File Administrator
You can specify the following administrator settings for the file administrator.
Login User Name
Login Password
Printer
Webpage
Download Help File
187
Appendix
User Administrator Settings

The user administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
System Settings
Administrator Tools
User Management
User Administrator
Extended Security
Restrict Use of Destinations
Restrict Adding of User Destinations
Encrypt Address Book
Password Policy
Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Transfer Request
188
User Administrator Settings

Address Book
Device Settings
The user administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
Login User Name
Login Password
Webpage
Download Help File

Address Management Tool

User Management Tool
Restrict Access To Device
Add New User
Delete User
User Properties
189
Appendix
Document Server File Permissions

The authorities for using the files stored in Document Server are as follows:
The authority designations in the list indicate users with the following authorities.
Read-only
This is a user assigned "Read-only" authority.
Edit
This is a user assigned "Edit" authority.
Edit / Delete
This is a user assigned "Edit / Delete" authority.
Full Control
This is a user granted full control.
Owner
This is a user who can store files in the machine and authorize other users to
view, edit, or delete those files.
File Administrator
This is the file administrator.
=Granted authority to operate.
- =Not granted authority to operate.
User
Viewing
Details
about
Stored
Files
Readonly
Edit
Edit /
Delete
Specify- Unlocking Per- ing Files

mission
s for Users/Gro
ups
Changing Informati
on
about
Stored
Files
Deleting
Files
Specifying File
Password
Full
Control
Owner
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
File Administrator
*1
Viewing Print/Tr
Thumb- ansmisnails
sion
This setting can be specified by the owner.
190
The Privilege for User Account Settings in the Address Book
The Privilege for User Account Settings in

the Address Book
The authorities for using the address book are as follows:
The authority designations in the list indicate users with the following authorities.
Read-only
This is a user assigned "Read-only" authority.
Edit
This is a user assigned "Edit" authority.
Edit / Delete
This is a user assigned "Edit / Delete" authority.
Full Control
This is a user granted full control.
Registered User
This is a user whose personal information is registered in the address book.
The registered user is the user who knows the login user name and password.
User Administrator
This is the user administrator.
191
Appendix
=You can view and change the setting.

U =You can view the setting.
- =You cannot view or specify the setting.
Settings
User
Readonly
User AdministraEdit / Detor

lete
Edit
Registered
User
Full Control
Registration No.
Key Display
Name
Select Title
Auth. Info User Code
Login User
Name
Login
Password
*1
*1
SMTP
Authentication
*1
*1
Folder
Authentication
LDAP
Authentication
*1
*1
Available
Functions
Protection Use
Name as
Protection
Code
*1
*1
Protection
Object
Protect
Dest.: Permissions
for Users/Groups
Protect
File(s): Permissions
for Users/Groups
192
The Privilege for User Account Settings in the Address Book

Settings
User
Readonly
FaxDest.
Edit
User AdministraEdit / Detor

lete
Registered
User
Full Control
Transmission Format
Facsimile
Number
International TX
Mode
Fax
Header
Label Insertion
E-mail
Address
Folder
SMB/FT
Destination P/NCP
SMB: Path
FTP: Port
No.
FTP:
Server
Name
FTP: Path
NCP: Path
NCP:
Connection type
E-mail
Address
*1
You can only enter the password.
193
Appendix
User Settings
If you have specified administrator authentication, the available functions and
settings depend on the menu protect setting.
The following settings can be specified by someone who is not an administrator.
=You can view and change the setting.
U =You can view the setting.
- =You cannot view or specify the setting.
Note
Settings that are not in the list can only be viewed, regardless of the menu protect level setting.

The default for [Menu Protect] is [Level 2].
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
Oriental Type Priority
Original Photo Type Priority
Paper Display
Original Orientation in Duplex Mode
Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode
Max. Copy Quantity
Auto Tray Switching
Job End Call
Customize Function: Copier
R/E Ratio
R/E Ratio Priority
General Features Auto Image Density Priority
Level 1 Level 2
Reproduction Ratio Shortcut R/E
194
User Settings
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
Edit
Level 1 Level 2
Front Margin: Left/Right
Back Margin: Left/Right
Front Margin: Top/Bottom
Back Margin: Top/Bottom
1 Sided 2 Sided Auto Margin: T to T
1 Sided 2 Sided Auto Margin: T to B
Erase Border Width
Erase Original Shadow in Combine
Erase Center Width
Front Cover Copy in Combine
Copy on Designating Page in Combine
Image Repeat Separation Line
Double Copies Separation Line
Separation Line in Combine
195
Appendix
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
Stamp
Level 1 Level 2
Size
Background
Density
Numbering Stamp Color
Preset
Stamp
Stamp Language
Stamp Priority: COPY *1
Stamp Priority: URGENT *1
Stamp Priority: PRIORITY *1
Stamp Priority: For Your Info. *1
Stamp Priority: PRELIMINARY *1
Stamp Priority: For Internal Use Only *1
Stamp Priority: CONFIDENTIAL *1
Stamp Priority: DRAFT *1
Stamp Color: COPY *1
Stamp Color: URGENT *1
Stamp Color: PRIORITY *1
Stamp Color: For Your Info. *1
Stamp Color: PRELIMINARY *1
Stamp Color: For Internal Use Only *1
Stamp Color: CONFIDENTIAL *1
Stamp Color: DRAFT *1
Program / Delete Stamp
Stamp Format: 1
Stamp Format: 2
Stamp Format: 3
Stamp Format: 4
Stamp Color: 1
Stamp Color: 2
Stamp Color: 3
Stamp Color: 4
8
User
Stamp
196
User Settings
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
Stamp
Date
Stamp
Page
Numbering
Input / Output
Format
Font
Size
Superimpose
Stamp Color
Stamp Setting
Stamp Format
Font
Size
Stamp on Designating Slip Sheet
Stamp Position: P1, P2 *1
Stamp Position: 1/5, 2/5 *1
Stamp Position: -1-, -2- *1
Stamp Position: P.1,P.2... *1
Stamp Position: 1, 2 *1
Stamp Position: 1-1, 1-2 *1
Superimpose
Stamp Color
Page Numbering Initial Letter
Switch to Batch
SADF Auto Reset
Rotate Sort: Auto Paper Continue
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart
Letterhead Setting
Color Sensitivity
A.C.S Sensitivity
A.C.S Priority
Adjust Color Image Background Density of ADS (Full Color /

Two-color)
*1
Level 1 Level 2
You can adjust the print position but not specify it.
197
Appendix
Printer Functions
Normal Printer Screen

Functions
Menu Protect
Off
Print Jobs
Level 1 Level 2
Printer Features
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
Maintenance
System
Host Interface
Level 1 Level 2
4Color Graphic Mode
Print Error Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Job Separation
Memory Usage
Duplex
Copies
Blank Page Print
Printer Language
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
Letterhead Setting
Edge to Edge Print
Tray Switching
I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout
198
User Settings
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
PCL Menu
PS Menu *1
PDF Menu *1
*1
Level 1 Level 2
Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
Courier Font
Extend A4 Width
Append CR to LF
Resolution
Data Format
Resolution
Color Setting
Color Profile
Change PDF Password
PDF Group Password
Resolution
Color Setting
Color Profile
199
Appendix
Scanner Features
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
General Settings
Scan Settings
Send Settings
Level 1 Level 2
Switch Title
Search Destination
TWAIN Standby Time
A.C.S Sensitivity Level
Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass
Background Density ADS (Full Color)
Compression (Gray Scale/Full Color)
Max. E-mail Size
200
User Settings
Facsimile Features
The default for [Menu Protect] is [Off].
Tab
Names Settings
Menu Protect
Off
Level 1
Level 2
Quick Operation Key 1-3
Switch Title of Quick Dial Table
Switch Title
Search Destination
Adjust Sound Volume
Box Setting
Scan Settings
Program/Change/Delete Scan Size
Send Settings
Max E-mail Size
Program/Change/Delete Standard Message
Reception Settings Switch Reception Mode
Forwarding
SMTP RX File Delivery Setting
2 Sided Print
Checkered Mark
Center Mark
Paper Tray
General Settings
201
Appendix
Tab
Names Settings
Menu Protect
Off
Initial Settings
Level 1
Level 2
Parameter Setting
Parameter Setting:Print List
Enable H.323
Enable SIP
H.323 Setting
SIP Setting
Program/Change/Delete Gateway
202
User Settings
System Settings
The settings available to the user depend on whether or not administrator authentication has been specified.
If administrator authentication has been specified, the settings available to the
user depend on whether or not "Available Settings" has been specified.
Tab Names
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.
Administrator authentication has

been specified.
"Availa- "Available Set- ble Settings"
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Panel Key Sound
Warm-up Beeper
Copy Count Display
Function Priority
Print Priority
Function Reset Timer
Output: Copier
Output: Document Server
Output: Facsimile
Output: Printer
System Status / Job List Display Time
Key Repeat
Paper Tray Priority: Facsimile
Paper Tray Priority: Printer
Tray Paper Size: Tray 1-4
Printer Bypass Paper Size
Paper Type: Bypass Tray
Paper Type: Tray 1-4
Cover Sheet Tray
Slip Sheet Tray
General Features Program / Change / Delete User Text
Tray Paper Settings Paper Tray Priority: Copier
203
Appendix
Tab Names
Timer Settings
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Auto Off Timer
Energy Saver Timer
Panel Off Timer
Copier/ Document Server Auto Reset Timer
Facsimile Auto Reset Timer
Printer Auto Reset Timer
Scanner Auto Reset Timer
Set Date
Set Time
Auto Logout Timer
204
User Settings
Tab Names
InterNetface
work
Settings
Parallel
Interface *8
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Machine IPv4 Address *1
Machine IPv6 Address *1
DNS Configuration *1
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name *1
WINS Configuration *1
Effective Protocol
NW Frame Type
SMB Computer Name
SMB Work Group
Ethernet Speed
Ping Command
Permit SNMP v3 Communication
Permit SSL / TLS Communication
Host Name
Machine Name
Parallel Timing
Input Prime
Signal Control
205
Appendix
Tab Names
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
IP Address *1
DDNS Configuration
Host Name
Domain Name *1
WINS Configuration *1
IP over 1394
SCSI print (SBP-2)
Communication Mode
IEEE
802.11b
Transmission Speed
*6
SSID Setting
Channel
WEP
WEP (Encryption) Key *2
(EncrypTransmission Speed
tion)
Setting Restore Defaults
Print
List
InterIEEE
face
1394 *5
Settings
Settings
206
User Settings
Tab Names
File Transfer
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Delivery Option *3
SMTP Server
SMTP Authentication *4
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol
Default User Name / Password (Send) *4
Fax E-mail Account
207
Appendix
Tab Names
Administrator
Tools
*1
*2
*3
*4
208
*5
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Back Up / Restore Address Book
External Charge Unit Management
Enhanced External Charge Unit Management
Extended Security
Capture Priority *7
Capture: Delete All Unsent Files *7
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server *4
LDAP Search
AOF (Always On)
Firmware Version
Auto Erase Memory Setting *9
Erase All Memory *9
If you select [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)], you can only view the setting.
You can only view the encryption setting.
You can only view Main Delivery Server IP Address and Sub Delivery Server IP Address.
You can only specify the password.
User Settings
*6
*7
*8
*9

File Format Converter option must be installed.
The IEEE 1284 interface board option must be installed.
The data overwrite security unit option must be installed.
Web Image Monitor Setting

Device Settings
If administrator authentication has been specified, the settings available to
the user depend on whether or not "Available Settings" has been specified.
Category
System
Paper
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Device Name
Comment
Location
Spool Printing
Protect Printer Display Panel
Output Tray
Paper Tray Priority
Cover Sheet Tray
Slip Sheet Tray
Paper Size
Paper Type
Custom Paper Size
Apply Auto Paper Select
Large Capacity Tray - Paper Type
Large Capacity Tray - Apply Auto Paper Select
Large Capacity Tray - Copying Method in Duplex
Bypass Tray - Paper Size
Bypass Tray - Custom Paper Size
Bypass Tray - Paper Type
209
Appendix
Category
Date/Time
Timer
8
Logs
E-mail
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Set Date
Set Time
SNTP Server Address
SNTP Polling Interval
Time Zone
Auto Off Timer
Energy Saver Timer
Panel Off Timer
Copier/ Document Server Auto Reset Timer
Facsimile Auto Reset Timer
Scanner Auto Reset Timer
Printer Auto Reset Timer
Auto Logout Timer
Collect Job Logs
Collect Access Logs
Administrator E-mail Address
Reception Protocol
SMTP Server Name
SMTP Port No.
SMTP Authentication
SMTP Auth. E-mail Address
SMTP Auth. User Name
SMTP Auth. Password *1
SMTP Auth. Encryption
POP before SMTP
210
User Settings
Category
E-mail
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
POP E-mail Address
POP User Name
POP Password *1
Timeout setting after POP Auth.
POP3/IMAP4 Server Name
POP3/IMAP4 Encryption
POP3 Reception Port No.
IMAP4 Reception Port No.
SMTP Reception Port No.
Fax E-mail Address
Receive FAX E-mail
Fax E-mail User Name
Fax E-mail Password *1
E-mail Notification E-mail Address
Receive E-mail Notification
E-mail Notification User Name
E-mail Notification Password
211
Appendix
Category
Auto E-mail
Notification
On-demand
E-mail Notification
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Notification Message
Address List
Call Service
Out of Toner
Toner Almost Empty
Used Toner Bottle is Full
Used Toner Bottle is Almost Full
Add Staple
Paper Misfeed
Cover Open
Out of Paper
Almost Out of Paper
Hole Punch Receptacle is Full
Paper Tray Error
Output Tray Full
Unit Connection Error
Duplex Unit Error
Document Server Memory Full
Detailed Settings of Each Item
Notification Subject
Notification Message
Restriction to System Config. Info.
Restriction to Network Config. Info.
Restriction to Printer Config. Info.
Restriction to Supply Info.
Restriction to Device Status Info.
Receivable E-mail Address/Domain Name
E-mail Language
212
User Settings
Category
File Transfer
*1
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
SMB User Name
SMB Password *1
FTP User Name
FTP Password *1
NCP User Name
NCP Password *1
User Code Authentication - Printer Job Authentication
User Code - Available Function
Basic Authentication - Printer Job Authentication
Windows Authentication - Printer Job Authentication
Windows Authentication - Domain Name
Windows Authentication - Group Settings

for Windows Authentication
LDAP Authentication - Printer Job Authentication
LDAP Authentication - LDAP Authentication
LDAP Authentication - Login Name Attribute
LDAP Authentication - Unique Attribute
Integration Server Authentication - Printer

Job Authentication
Integration Server Authentication - Integration Server Name
Integration Server Authentication - Authentication Type
Integration Server Authentication - Obtain URL
Integration Server Authentication - Domain Name
Integration Server Authentication - Group

Settings for Integration Server Authentication
You can only specify the password.
213
Appendix
Printer
Category
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
System
Host Interface
PCL Settings
Level 1 Level 2
Print Error Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Memory Usage
Duplex
Copies
Blank Page Print
Toner Saving
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
Letterhead Setting
Edge to Edge Print
Tray Switching
I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout
Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
Courier Font
Extend A4 Width
Append CR to LF
Resolution
214
User Settings
Category
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
PS Settings *1
PDF Settings *1
*1
Level 1 Level 2
Duplex
Blank Page Print
Data Format
Resolution
Resolution
PDF Temporary Password
PDF Fixed Password
PDF Group Password
Fax
Functions that can be used and specified via Web Image Monitor depend on
which administrators are set to [On] in [Menu Protect], [Facsimile Features].
Category
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
Environmental
Setting
Send/ Reception Settings
Level 1 Level 2
Closed Network Code
Internet Fax
Fax Information
Fax Information
Select Dial/Push Phone
Maximum E-mail Size
Reception Mode Auto Switch Time
Duplex Print
Checkered Mark
Center Mark
Paper Tray
215
Appendix
Category
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
IP-Fax Settings
IP-Fax Gateway
Settings
Level 1 Level 2
Enable H.323
Enable IP-Fax Gatekeeper
Gatekeeper Address(Main)
Gatekeeper Address(Sub)
Own Fax No.
Enable SIP
Enable Server
Server IP Address
Proxy Server Addr. (Main)
Proxy Server Address (Sub)
Redirect Svr. Addr. (Main)
Redirect Svr. Addr. (Sub)
Registrar Address (Main)
Registrar Address (Sub)
Digest Authentication
Prefix 1-5
Select Protocol 1-5
Gateway Address 1-5
Convert to PDF When Transferring to Folder
Journal
Immediate Transmission Result Report
Communication Result Report
Memory Storage Report
SEP Code RX Result Report
SEP Code RX Reserve Report
Confidential File Report
LAN-Fax Result Report
Inclusion of Part of Image
Error E-mail Notification
Display Network Errors
Journal Notification by E-mail
Response to RX Notice Request
Select Destination Type Priority
Parameter Settings Just Size Printing
216
User Settings
Interface
Category
IEEE 802.11b *1
IEEE 1394 *2
Bluetooth *3
Settings
USB
*1
*2
*3
*4

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Change Interface
Communication Mode
Channel
WEP Setting
WEP Key Status
Authentication Type
Confirm
IPv4 over 1394
SCSI print (SBP-2)
Operation Mode
Input Prime
USB
Parallel Interface Parallel Timing

*4
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

The Bluetooth interface unit option must be installed.
The IEEE 1284 interface board option must be installed.
217
Appendix
Network
Category
Protocol
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
LPR
RSH/RCP
DIPRINT
FTP
IPP
Bonjour
NetWare
AppleTalk
SMB
SNMP
218
User Settings
Category
IPv4
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Host Name
DHCP
Domain Name
IPv4 Address
Subnet Mask
DDNS
WINS
Primary WINS Server
Secondary WINS Server
Scope ID
Default Gateway Address
DNS Server
LPR
RSH/RCP
DIPRINT
FTP
IPP
IPP Timeout
219
Appendix
Category
IPv6
8
NetWare
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
IPv6 Address
Host Name
Domain Name
Stateless Address
Stateless Address Autoconfiguration
Default Gateway Address
DNS Server
LPR
RSH/RCP
DIPRINT
FTP
sftp
IPP
IPP Timeout
NetWare
Print Server Name
Logon Mode
File Server Name
NDS Tree
NDS Context Name
Operation Mode
Remote Printer No.
Job Timeout
Frame Type
Print Server Protocol
220
User Settings
Category
AppleTalk
SMB
Bonjour
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings"
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
AppleTalk
Printer Name
Zone Name
SMB
Workgroup Name
Computer Name
Comment
Notify Print Completion
Bonjour
Computer Name
Location
DIPRINT
LPR
IPP
221
Appendix
Functions That Require Options

The following functions require certain options and additional functions.
Hard Disk overwrite erases function
DataOverwriteSecurity unit
Data security for copying function
Copy Data Security Unit
PDF Direct Print function
PostScript unit
222
INDEX
A
Access Control, 130
Access Permission, 87
Address Book, 189
Address Management Tool, 189
Administrator, 4
Administrator Authentication, 4
Administrator Tools, 175, 176, 182, 186, 188
AppleTalk, 184
Authenticate Current Job, 156
Authentication and Access Limits, 3
Auto Erase Memory Setting, 110
Available Functions, 124
F
Fax, 181, 184, 215
File Administrator, 12, 119, 190
File Creator (Owner), 4
File Transfer, 174, 182
Full Control, 190, 191
G
General Features, 174, 176
General Settings, 177, 179
Group Passwords for PDF Files, 135
H
H.323 Settings, 183
Host Interface, 178
B
Bonjour, 185
C
Configuration flow (certificate issued
by a certificate authority), 141
Configuration flow (self-signed certificate), 141
D
Device Information, 181
Device Settings, 179, 183, 187, 189, 209
Driver Encryption Key, 135, 136, 153
E
Edit, 176, 190, 191
Edit / Delete, 190, 191
Enable H.323, 183
Enable SIP, 183
Encrypt Address Book, 153
Encrypted Communication Mode, 145
Encryption Technology, 3
Enhance File Protection, 155
Environment Settings, 181
Erase All Memory, 110
I
Initial Settings, 177, 179, 183
Input / Output, 176
Interface, 217
Interface Settings, 181, 182, 184
IPv4, 184
IPv6, 184
J
Job, 187
L
List / Test Print, 178
Locked Print, 80
Login, 4
Logout, 4
M
Machine Administrator, 12, 119
Maintenance, 178, 186
Max. E-mail Size, 183
Menu Protect, 119, 120
Methods of Erasing the Data, 110
N
NetWare, 184
Network, 181, 184, 218
Network Administrator, 12, 119
NIB Setup Tool, 185
223
O
Operational Requirements
for Windows Authentication, 42
Owner, 190
P
Parameter Settings, 181
Password for IPP Authentication, 135
Password for Stored Files, 87
Password Policy, 157
PCL Menu, 178
PDF Menu, 179
Print & Delete Scanner Journal, 159
Printer, 180, 187, 214
Printer Job Authentication, 64
Printing the Journal, 158
Program/Change/Delete Gateway, 183
PS Menu, 179
R
RC Gate, 181
Read-only, 190, 191
Reception Settings, 177, 186
Registered User, 4, 191
@Remote Service, 157
Reset Device, 179
Reset Printer Job, 179
Restrict Adding of User Destinations, 154
Restrict Display of User Information, 154
Restrict Use of Destinations, 153
Restrict Use of Simple Encryption, 155
224
Scan Settings, 177, 179

Security, 185
Send/Reception Settings, 181
Send Settings, 177, 179, 183
Service Mode Lock, 160
Settings by SNMP v1 and v2, 155
SIP Settings, 183
SMB, 184
SNMP, 184
SNMPv3, 185
SSDP, 185
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), 140
Stamp, 176
Stored RX File User Setting, 158
Supervisor, 12
System, 178, 186
System Settings, 182
T
Timer Settings, 174
Top Page, 179, 187
Transfer to Fax Receiver, 156
Tray Paper Settings, 174
Type of Administrator, 119
U
User, 4
User Administrator, 11, 119, 191
User Authentication, 4
User Management Tool, 181
W
Webpage, 181, 185, 187, 189
MEMO
225
MEMO
226
EN
USA
B222-7907
Copy/Document Server
Reference
Placing Originals
Copying
Document Server
Appendix
Introduction
Important
Notes:
Caution:
Notes:
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your machine before reading this manual. (For details, see Machine Types, About This Machine.)
local dealer.

About This Machine

Troubleshooting
Security Reference
prevent the machine from unauthorized use. Also refer to this manual for the
procedures for registering administrators, as well as setting user and administrator authentication.
Facsimile Reference
Printer Reference
Scanner Reference
Network Guide
i
Other manuals
UNIX Supplement
Note

dealer.
ii

<Color Functions/Color Adjustments>
Color Copying
You can switch the color copy mode depending on the type of originals used and
the desired finish.
See p.40 Selecting a Color Mode.
Full Color Copy

Copies using four colors: yellow, magenta, cyan and black.
AMF033S
Black/White Copy
Copies in black and white even if the original is colored.
AMF034S
Convert Colors
See p.41 Convert Colors.
Copies by changing a specific color in the original to another color.
AMF038S
iii
Erase Specified Color

See p.42 Erase Color.
Copies by deleting a specific color in the original.
AMF039S
Color Background
See p.43 Color Background.
Copies by adding a color to the whole page.
AMF040S
iv
Stamping on Copies
Copies with the date, page numbers, etc. The stamp color can be yellow, red, cyan, magenta, green, blue, and black.
AQI075S
Printed inserts types:
See p.107 Background Numbering.
Preset Stamp
See p.108 Preset Stamp.
User Stamp
See p.111 User Stamp.
Date Stamp
See p.116 Date Stamp.
Page Numbering
See p.119 Page Numbering.
v
Adjusting Colors
See p.47 Color Adjustment.
Primary Colors
AMA013S
Colors can be created by combining the 3 primary colors: yellow, magenta

and cyan. Black can be made by combining yellow, magenta and cyan, however, as there might be some slight differences, black will be expressed using a black toner.
Adjust Color
Adjusts the specific colors (yellow, red, magenta, blue, cyan and green) by
mixing them with adjacent colors in the color circle.
See p.47 Color Adjustment.
AMA014S
vi
Color Balance
Adjusts the overall color tone of copies.
See p.44 Color Balance.
AMA015S
Adjusting Images
See p.48 Image Adjustment.
Sharp/Soft
Adjusts the outline of the image.
See p.50 Adjusting the sharpness/softness.
AMA016S
Contrast
Adjusts the shades of the image.
See p.50 Adjusting the contrast.
AMA017S
vii
Background Density
Adjusts the background density of the image.
See p.51 Adjusting the background density.
AMA018S
Other Adjustments
Adjust U.C.R.
See p.51 Adjusting the U.C.R..
Text/Photo Sensitivity
See p.52 Adjusting the Text/Photo sensitivity.
viii

Functions differ depending on machine type and options.
Reference
See p.3 Functions Requiring Optional Configurations.
Types of Duplex Copies

1 Sided 2 Pages 2 Sided 1 Page
See p.83 Duplex.
2 Sided 1 Page 2 Sided 1 Page

See p.83 Duplex.
1 Sided 4 Pages Combine 2 Sided 1 Page

See p.89 Two-Sided Combine.
GCSHVY9J
ix

GCSHVYAE
1 Front
2 Back

GCSHVY5E
1 Front
2 Back

GCSHVY1E
x

GCSHVY2E
1 Front
2 Back

GCSHVY6E
1 Front
2 Back
Bound Originals 2 Sided 1 Page

See p.94 Booklet/Magazine.
xi
Front & Back Bound Originals 2 Sided Pages

Copying Book Originals

1 Sided 4 Pages Booklet
Open to left
GCBOOK0E
Open to right
GCBOOK1E
xii
2 Sided 2 Pages Booklet

Open to left
GCAH010E
Open to right
GCAH020E
1 Sided Magazine
Open to left
GCBOOK3E
Open to right
GCBOOK4E
xiii
2 Sided Magazine
Open to left
GCAH030E
Open to right
GCAH040E
xiv
Combining Multiple Pages onto a Single Page

See p.87 One-Sided Combine.
GCSHVY7E
GCSHVY8J
GCSHVY3J
xv
2 Sided 1 Page Combine 1 Sided 1 Page
GCSHVYOJ
GCSHVYBJ
GCSHVY4J
xvi
Copying Originals Such as Books

Bound Originals 1 Sided 2 Pages
See p.92 Series Copies.
CP2B0100
Bound Originals 2 Sided 1 Page

Front & Back Bound Originals 2 Sided Pages

xvii
Copying 2-Sided Pages onto 1-Sided Pages

See p.92 Series Copies.
2 Sided 1 Page 1 Sided 2 Pages
CP2B0200
Copying onto Thick Paper

Copying onto Thick Paper
See p.38 When Copying onto Thick Paper.
xviii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
What You Can Do with This Machine <Color Functions/Color Adjustments>....iii
Color Copying ........................................................................................................... iii
Stamping on Copies................................................................................................... v
Adjusting Colors ........................................................................................................ vi
Adjusting Images...................................................................................................... vii
What You Can Do with This Machine..................................................................ix
Types of Duplex Copies ............................................................................................ ix
Copying Book Originals............................................................................................ xii
Combining Multiple Pages onto a Single Page ........................................................ xv
Copying Originals Such as Books...........................................................................xvii
Copying 2-Sided Pages onto 1-Sided Pages.........................................................xviii
Copying onto Thick Paper...................................................................................... xviii
Notice ......................................................................................................................1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................2
Functions Requiring Optional Configurations....................................................3
Display ....................................................................................................................4
Simplified Display.......................................................................................................5
User Tools Menu (Copier / Document Server Features) ....................................6
1. Placing Originals
Originals ...............................................................................................................11
Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals.......................................................11
Sizes Detectable by the Auto Paper Select .............................................................13
Missing Image Area .................................................................................................14
Placing Originals..................................................................................................15
Original Orientation ..................................................................................................16
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass.................................................................17
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder ......................................................18
Batch Mode ..............................................................................................................20
SADF Mode..............................................................................................................21
Mixed Size Mode...................................................................................................... 22
Original Size.............................................................................................................23
2. Copying
Basic Procedure...................................................................................................25
Interrupt Copy ..........................................................................................................26
Left Original Beeper .................................................................................................27
Job Preset ................................................................................................................27
Job List ................................................................................................................. 28
Job List Screen ........................................................................................................29
Checking Jobs in the Print Queue............................................................................30
Changing the Order of Jobs .....................................................................................30
Holding Print Jobs ....................................................................................................31
Deleting Jobs ...........................................................................................................31
Checking Job History ...............................................................................................32
xix
Copying from the Bypass Tray...........................................................................33

When Copying onto Regular Size Paper .................................................................35
When Copying onto Custom Size Paper..................................................................36
When Copying onto OHP Transparencies or Thin Paper ........................................37
When Copying onto Thick Paper ............................................................................. 38
When Copying onto Envelopes................................................................................39
Color Functions ...................................................................................................40
Selecting a Color Mode............................................................................................40
Convert Colors ......................................................................................................... 41
Erase Color ..............................................................................................................42
Color Background ....................................................................................................43
Color Balance...........................................................................................................44
Color Balance Program............................................................................................45
Color Adjustment...................................................................................................... 47
Image Adjustment ....................................................................................................48
User Color ................................................................................................................53
Copier Functions .................................................................................................57
Adjusting Copy Image Density .................................................................................57
Selecting the Original Type Setting.......................................................................... 59
Selecting Copy Paper ..............................................................................................60
Preset Reduce/Enlarge ............................................................................................63
Zoom ........................................................................................................................65
Auto Reduce/Enlarge ...............................................................................................67
Size Magnification ....................................................................................................68
Directional Magnification (%) ...................................................................................69
Directional Size Magnification (Inch)........................................................................71
Sort........................................................................................................................... 72
Stack ........................................................................................................................76
Staple ....................................................................................................................... 78
Punch ....................................................................................................................... 81
Duplex ......................................................................................................................83
One-Sided Combine.................................................................................................87
Two-Sided Combine.................................................................................................89
Series Copies...........................................................................................................92
Booklet/Magazine.....................................................................................................94
Margin Adjustment .................................................................................................100
Erase......................................................................................................................101
Background Numbering ......................................................................................... 107
Preset Stamp .........................................................................................................108
User Stamp ............................................................................................................111
Date Stamp ............................................................................................................116
Page Numbering .................................................................................................... 119
Image Repeat.........................................................................................................126
Double Copies........................................................................................................129
Centering................................................................................................................130
Positive/Negative ...................................................................................................132
Mirror......................................................................................................................133
Covers....................................................................................................................134
Designate ...............................................................................................................136
Chapters.................................................................................................................137
Slip Sheets .............................................................................................................138
Storing Data in the Document Server ..............................................................140
xx
Programs ............................................................................................................142
Storing a Program ..................................................................................................143
Changing a Stored Program ..................................................................................144
Deleting a Program ................................................................................................145
Recalling a Program...............................................................................................145
Programming Defaults in Initial Display .................................................................146
3. Document Server
Relationship between Document Server and Other Functions .....................147
Document Server Display ...................................................................................... 148
Simplified Display...................................................................................................150
Preview Display......................................................................................................151
Using the Document Server.............................................................................. 152
Storing Data ...........................................................................................................152
Changing User Name, File Name or Password of a Stored Document .................157
Checking the Details of a Stored Document .......................................................... 158
Searching for a Stored Document..........................................................................159
Printing a Stored Document ...................................................................................162
Deleting a Document..............................................................................................168
Displaying a Document in Document Server with Web Image Monitor..................169
Downloading Stored Documents............................................................................170
4. Appendix
Function Compatibility ......................................................................................171
Supplementary Information .............................................................................. 173
INDEX....................................................................................................... 184
xxi
xxii
Notice
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no
responsibility for its completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your legal
advisor.
The color samples in this manual may differ slightly from the colors of actual
copies.
Colors on color keys or the color circle may differ slightly from the colors of actual copies.
This machine is equipped with a function that prevents making counterfeit bank
bills. Due to this function the original images similar to bank bills may not be
copied properly.
1

Note
For proper use of this product, be sure to read About This Machine first.
Supplementary information about the copier mode is described in Supplementary Information.

Reference
p.173 Supplementary Information
About This Machine
Symbols
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these notes.
They can be found in the Safety Information section of About This Machine.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.
2
Functions Requiring Optional

Configurations
Certain functions require special machine configuration and extra options as follows:
Stack: SR790, Booklet Finisher SR3020 or Finisher SR3030
Staple: SR790, Booklet Finisher SR3020 or Finisher SR3030
Staple (Center): Booklet Finisher SR3020
Punch: Booklet Finisher SR3020 or Finisher SR3030, Punch kit
Note
The bridge unit and paper tray unit are required when you install the finisher.
3
Display
. Keys appearing as
cannot be used.
Initial copy display
AQI048S
1. Original function, Image Density

and Special Original function.
2. Operational status and messages.
3. You can register up to three frequently used reduce/enlarge ratios
other than the fixed reduce/enlarge
ratios. See Reproduction Ratio,
4. Numbers of originals scanned into

memory, copies set, and copies made.
5. Displays contents of the Shortcut

keys. You can register frequently used
functions in these keys. See Copier
/ Document Server Features, General
Settings Guide.
6. Sort, Stack, Staple, and Punch
functions.
7. Displays available functions. Press

a function name to display its menu.
For example, press [Reduce / Enlarge]
to switch to the Reduce/Enlarge menu.
8. A clip mark indicates the currently selected function.
4
Simplified Display
This section explains how to use the Simplified Display and introduces its
keys.
You can view the simplified display from the Copier's initial screen by pressing
the {Simplified Display} key.
The simplified display contains main functions only.
Enlarged characters and keys make for easier operation.
AQI031S
Simplified Copier Screen
AMG055S
1. [Key Color]
by changing the color of the keys.
Not available on the copier default
screen.
Note
Press the {Simplified Display} key again to return to the copier default screen.
The simplified display screen does not contain every available key.
5
User Tools Menu (Copier / Document

Server Features)
This section describes items that can be specified on the Copier / Document
Server Features screen. The Copier / Document Server Features screen can be
displayed by pressing the {User Tools/Counter} key. For details about how to set
up these items, see General Settings Guide.
General Features
Item
Description
Auto Image Density Prior- Select whether Auto Image Density is automatically applied after
ity
power on, when modes are cleared or reset, or a color selection
key is pressed.
Original Type Priority
Specify the original type that is automatically selected after power

on, when modes are cleared or reset, or when a color selection key
is pressed.
Original Photo Type Priority When you select Text / Photo or Photo in Original Type Priority, you can change the settings of the selected original type.
You can have the original types shown on the initial display.
Paper Display
You can choose to have the available paper trays and sizes shown
on the initial display.
Original Orientation in
Duplex Mode
You can set the original orientation when making two-sided copies.
Copy Orientation in Duplex You can set the copy orientation when making two-sided copies.
Mode
Max. Copy Quantity
You can set the maximum copy quantity.
Auto Tray Switching
If you load paper of the same size in two or more trays, the machine automatically shifts to the other when the first tray runs out
of paper (when Auto Paper Select is selected.) This function is
called Auto Tray Switching. This setting specifies whether to
use Auto Tray Switching or not.
The beeper (key tone) sounds if you forget to remove originals after copying.
Job End Call
You can choose to have the beeper sound when copying is complete.
Customize Function: Copier Register up to six frequently used functions and display them on
the initial screen. (Registered functions can be changed.)
Customize Function:
Document Server Storage
6
Register up to six frequently used functions and display them on

the initial screen. (Registered functions can be changed.)
Reproduction Ratio
Item
Description
Shortcut R / E
You can register up to three frequently used Reduce/Enlarge ratios other than the fixed Reduce/Enlarge ratio and have them
shown on the initial display. You can also change registered Reduce/ Enlarge ratios.
R / E Ratio
Specify the enlargement and reduction ratios that appear on the

copier screen when you press [Reduce / Enlarge].
R / E Ratio Priority
Specify the enlargement and reduction ratios that are prioritized

when you press [Reduce / Enlarge].
You can set a Reduce/Enlarge ratio when registering Create Margin in a shortcut key.
Edit
Item
Description
Front Margin: Left / Right
You can specify left and right margins on the front side of copies
using the Margin Adjustment function.
Back Margin: Left / Right
You can specify left and right margins on the back side of copies
Front Margin: Top / Bottom You can specify top and bottom margins on the front side of copies using the Margin Adjustment function.
Back Margin: Top / Bottom You can specify top and bottom margins on the back side of copies
1 Sided 2 Sided Auto
Margin: TtoT
When using the 1 sided 2 sided Duplex function, you can specify margins on the back side.
1 Sided 2 Sided Auto

Margin: TtoB
When using the 1 sided 2 sided Duplex function, you can specify margins on the back side.
Erase Border Width
You can specify the width of erased border margins using this function.
Erase Original Shadow in

Combine
In Combine Copy or Booklet/Magazine Copy mode, you can

specify whether to erase a 3 mm, 0.1" bounding margin around all
four edges of each original.
Erase Center Width
You can specify the width of the erased center margins using this function.
Front Cover Copy in Combine You can make a combined copy on the front cover sheet when you
select the Front Cover function.
You can set the copy order when using the Combine function to
Left to Right or Top to Bottom.
Orientation: Booklet, Magazine You can select the orientation of copies to open when using Booklet or Magazine function.
Copy on Designating Page
in Combine
You can make a combined copy on the inserted slip sheets when
using the Desig./Chapter Copy function.
Image Repeat Separation

Line
You can select a separation line used in the Image Repeat function
Double Copies Separation

Line
You can select a separation line used in the Double Copies function from: None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
Separation Line in Combine You can select a separation line used in the Combine function
Stamp
Item
Description
Size
You can set the size of the numbers.
Density
You can set the density of the numbers.
Stamp Color
You can set the color of the numbers.
Preset Stamp
Stamp Language
You can select the language of the stamp.
Stamp Priority
You can select the stamp type given priority when [Preset Stamp]
is pressed.
Stamp Format
You can adjust the stamp printing quality (COPY, URGENT,

PRIORITY, For Your Info., PRELIMINARY, For Internal
Use Only, CONFIDENTIAL, DRAFT).
Stamp Color
You can specify the stamp printing color (COPY, URGENT,

PRIORITY, For Your Info., PRELIMINARY, For Internal
Use Only, CONFIDENTIAL, DRAFT).
User Stamp
Program / Delete Stamp
You can register, change, or delete these user stamp designs.
Stamp Format: 1 to 4
You can set the position where the stamp is printed.
Stamp Color: 1 to 4
Select which color to prioritize for printing User Stamps 1 to 4.
Date Stamp
Format
You can select the date format for the Date Stamp function.
Font
You can select the Date Stamp font.
Size
You can set the Date Stamp size.
Superimpose
You can have the Date Stamp printed in white where it overlaps
black parts of the image.
Stamp Color
Stamp Setting
You can have the date printed on the first page or all pages.
Page Numbering
Stamp Format
You can select the page number format given priority when [Page
Numbering] is pressed.
Font
You can select the page number font.
Size
You can set the size of the page number.
Duplex Back Page Stamping You can set the position of the duplex back page number printed
Position
using the Duplex function.
Page Numbering in Combine You can set page numbering when using the Combine and Page
Numbering function together.
Stamp on Designating Slip
Sheet
You can print the page number onto designating slip sheets when
using the Designate function and the Page Numbering function
together.
Stamp Position:P1,P2...
Stamp Position:1/5,2/5...
8
Item
Description
Stamp Position:-1-,-2-...
Stamp Position:P.1,P.2...
Stamp Position:1,2...
Stamp Position:1-1,1-2...
Superimpose
You can have page numbers printed in white where they overlap
black parts of the image.
Stamp Color
Page Numbering Initial

Letter
You can select the page numbering initial letter between P.1,
P.2.../P.1, P.2... and S1, S2.../S.1, S.2....
Input / Output
Item
Description
Switch to Batch
You can select to have either [Batch] or [SADF] displayed when you
press [Special Original].
SADF Auto Reset
When you set one original at a time in the ADF, the Auto Feed indicator lights for a specified time after an original is fed, to show
the ADF is ready for another original.
Rotate Sort:
Auto Paper Continue
You can continue copying when paper of the required orientation

has run out during rotate-sorting.
Memory Full Auto Scan

Restart
If memory becomes full while scanning originals, the machine

will copy the scanned originals first, and then automatically proceed scanning remaining originals. You can enable or disable this
function.
Letterhead Setting
If you select [Yes] for this function, the machine rotates images
correctly.
Staple Position
You can select a key to appear preferentially for staple on the initial screen.
Punch Type
You can select a key to appear preferentially for punch on the initial screen.
Simplified Screen:
Finishing Types
You can select a key to appear preferentially for finishing on the

simplified display screen.
9
Adjust Color Image

Item
Description
Background Density of ADS The background density is adjusted to skip the texture and copy.
(Full Color / Two-color)
You can adjust the background density up to 5 levels when in Full
Color.
Color Sensitivity
You can adjust the color specified to convert in Convert Color

and the color specified for Erase Color, in 5 levels.
A.C.S. Sensitivity
This 5-step setting determines the level of the standard used for
discriminating between black & white originals and full color
originals when Auto Color Select is selected.
A.C.S. Priority
This setting determines the copy priority between Black &

White and Full Color when Auto Color Select is selected.
Administrator Tools
Item
Description
Menu Protect
You can prevent unauthenticated users from changing the user

tools settings.
10
1. Placing Originals
This chapter describes the types of originals you can set and how to place originals.
Originals
This section describes the types of originals that can be placed, paper sizes that
are automatically detected, and missing image area.
Note
As the color of markers or highlighters is difficult to reproduce, the copy might
not come out depending on the color or a different color might be copied.
Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals

The following describes recommended paper sizes and non-recommended originals for the ADF:
Metric version
Where original is
placed
Original size
Original weight
Exposure glass
Up to A3
ADF
One-sided originals: A3L - B6 JIS

(Japanese Industrial Standard)KL
40-128 g/m2
(35-110 kg)
Two-sided originals: A3L - A5KL
52-128 g/m2
(45-110 kg)
Where original is
placed
Original size
Original weight
Exposure glass
Up to 11" 17"
ADF
One-sided originals:
11" 17"L-51/2" 81/2"KL
11-34 lb.
Two-sided originals:
11" 17"L-51/2 81/2"KL
14-34 lb.
Inch version
Note
About 100 originals can be placed in the ADF.
The weight range for originals in the Mixed size mode is 52-81.4 g/m2 (13.8-22.0 lb).
11
Placing Originals
Non-compatible originals for the Auto Document Feeder

Placing the following types of originals in the ADF can cause paper misfeeds or
light & black lines or result in damage to the originals. Place these originals on
the exposure glass instead.
Originals other than those specified on Sizes and Weights of Recommended
Originals
Stapled or clipped originals
Perforated or torn originals
Curled, folded, or creased originals
Pasted originals
Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper
Originals with perforated lines
Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
Sticky originals such as translucent paper
Thin, highly flexible originals
Thick originals such as postcards
Bound originals such as books
Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
Originals that are still wet with ink or white-out
Note
The original might become dirty if it is written with a pencil or a similar tool.
12
Originals
Sizes Detectable by the Auto Paper Select

Sizes detectable by the exposure glass and ADF are:
Metric version
Size A3L B4
A4K B5
A5K B6
11"
JISL L
JISK L
JISK
Location
L
L
17"
of the
L
original
Exposure
*1
81/2"
11"
KL
81/2"
13"
L
ADF
8KL 16K
KL
*2
*3
*3
*2
*4
*4
: Detectable size : Undetectable size

*1
*2
*3
*4
If you want to make A5 size detectable, consult your service representative.

You can select from 81/2" 13", 81/4" 13", 8" 13" with User Tools (System Settings).
You can select from A3 or B4 JIS to 8K, from A4, A5 or B5 JIS to 16K with User
Tools (System Settings).
You can select from 11" 17" to 8K, from 81/2" 11" to 16K with User Tools (System Settings).
Inch version
Size A3L A4K
L
Location
of the
original
Exposure
11"
17"
L
81/2"
14"
L
81/2"
11"
KL
51/2"
81/2"
KL
*1
ADF
81/2"
13"
L
11"
15"
L
10"
14"
L
8"
10"
L
71/4"
101/2"
LK
*2
*2
*2
*2
: Detectable size : Undetectable size
*1
*2
If you want to make 51/2" 81/2" size detectable, consult your service representative.
You can select from 81/2" 14" to 81/2" 13", from 11" 17" to 11" 15", from
81/2" 11"L to 8" 10", from 81/2" 11"K to 71/4" 101/2"K with User Tools
(System Settings).
Exposure glass
CP01AEE
13
Placing Originals
ADF
AAE044E
Note
When you copy custom size originals, make sure you specify the size of the
originals. If not, the image may not be copied properly.
Reference
See p.24 Custom sizes.
Sizes difficult to detect

It is difficult for the machine to detect the sizes of the following originals, so select the paper size manually:
Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
Dark originals with a lot of text and drawings
Originals which partially contain a solid image
Originals which have solid images at their edges
Missing Image Area

Even if you place originals in the ADF or on the exposure glass correctly, 3 mm
(0.1") margins on all four sides might not be copied.
14
Placing Originals
Placing Originals
This section describes the procedure for placing originals on the exposure glass
and in the ADF.
Take care to place originals after any correction fluid and ink has completely
dried. Not taking this precaution could cause marks on the exposure glass that
will be copied onto paper.
Note
For original sizes you can set, see Originals.
Reference
See p.11 Originals.
15
Placing Originals
You can set the original orientation in the following ways. When placing the
original on the exposure glass, set it facing downwards.
Standard orientation
Select this function when the original orientation is the same as the copy paper orientation.
90 turn
Use this function when you want to copy A3L, B4 JISL or 11" 17"L size
originals. The machine rotates the copy image by 90 and you can make copies as you want.
This is useful for copying large originals with the Staple, Duplex, Combine or
Stamp functions.
For example, to copy A3L or 11" 17"L originals with the Staple function
selected:
AMG017S
16
Placing Originals
A Press [Special Original].
B Select the original orientation (
or
), and then press [OK].
Note
It is recommended to use this function together with the [Auto Paper Select]
or [Auto Reduce / Enlarge] function.
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass

Place originals on the exposure glass.
Important
Do not lift the exposure glass cover or ADF forcefully. Otherwise, the cover
of the ADF might open or be damaged.
A Lift the exposure glass cover or ADF.

Be sure to lift the exposure glass cover or ADF by more than 30 degrees. Otherwise, the size of the original might not be detected correctly.
B Place the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be
aligned to the rear left corner.
Start with the first page to be copied.
AQH010S
A
B
Positioning mark
Left scale
C Lower the exposure glass cover or ADF.

17
Placing Originals
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder

Place originals in the ADF.
Settings should be made in the following situations:
When placing originals consisting of more than 100 pages:

See p.20 Batch Mode.
When placing originals one by one:
See p.21 SADF Mode.
When copying originals of various sizes:
See p.22 Mixed Size Mode.
When placing custom size originals:
See p.24 Custom sizes.
18
Placing Originals
A Adjust the guide to the original size.

B Set the aligned originals face up into the ADF.
Do not stack originals beyond the limit mark.
The last page should be on the bottom.
Be sure not to block the sensor or load the original untidily. Doing so may
cause the machine to detect the size of the scanned image incorrectly or display a paper misfeed message. Also, be sure not to place originals or other objects on the top cover. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
AQH011S
Sensors
AQH012S
A
B
Limit mark
Document guide
Note
Straighten curls in the originals before placing them on the ADF.
To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the original before
placing it on the ADF.
Set the original squarely.
19
Placing Originals
Batch Mode
In Batch mode, the machine copies an original of more than 100 pages as one
document, even if it is placed on the ADF in parts.
B Select [Batch] and then press [OK].

C Place the first part of the original, and then press the {Start} key.
D After the first part of the original has been fed, place the next part, then
press the {Start} key.
Note
When [SADF] is displayed in step B, set the Batch mode with [Switch to
Batch]. See Input/Output, General Settings Guide.
To copy subsequent originals in this mode, repeat step D.

When the Sort, Combine or 1 Sided2 Sided mode has been set, press the
{q} key after all originals have been scanned.
20
Placing Originals
SADF Mode
In SADF mode, even when an original is placed page by page in the ADF, each
page is automatically fed when placed.
Important
You should make a setting so that [SADF] will be displayed when you press
[Special Original]. See Input/Output, General Settings Guide.
Press [Special Original].
B Press [SADF], and then press [OK] .

C Place one page of an original, and then press the {Start} key.
D When the machine instructs you to place another original, place the next
page.
The second and subsequent pages will be fed automatically without pressing
the {Start} key.
Note
When the Sort, Combine or 1 Sided2 Sided mode has been set, press the
{q} key after all originals have been scanned.
Reference
See Input/Output, General Settings Guide.
21
Placing Originals
Mixed Size Mode

When placing different size originals of the same width in the ADF at the same
time, the machine automatically checks the size of the originals and makes copies.
Important
When placing originals of different sizes in the ADF and making copies without using the Mixed size mode, paper might become jammed or parts of the
original image might not be copied.
The sizes of the originals that can be placed in this mode are follows:
Metric version
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL
Inch version
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
B Select [Mixed Sizes], and then press [OK].

C Align the rear and left edges of the originals as shown in the illustration.
APG045S
A
B
Place the originals into the ADF

Vertical size
D Adjust the guide to the widest original size.

E Place originals in the ADF.
22
Placing Originals
Original Size
Specify the size of the originals.
Regular sizes
Select the size of the originals from the regular sizes.
B Press [Original Size] .

C Press [Regular Size].
D Select the size of original, and then press [OK] .

E Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.
23
Placing Originals
Custom sizes
When placing custom size originals in the ADF, specify the size of the originals.
Important
Paper that has a vertical length of 128297 mm (5.1"-11.6") and a horizontal
length of 128432 mm (5.1"-17") can be placed with this function.
B Press [Original Size].

C Press [Custom Size].
D Enter the horizontal size of the original with the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
E Enter the vertical size of the original with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
F Press [OK].
G Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
If you make a mistake in step D or E, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key,
and then enter the value again.
24
2. Copying
This chapter describes the procedure for making copies in various modes.
Basic Procedure
This section describes the basic procedure for making copies.
Important
When User Code Authentication is set, enter your user code (up to eight digits) with the number keys so that the machine accepts copy jobs. See Administrator Tools, General Settings Guide.
When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is set, enter your login user name
and user password so that the machine accepts copy jobs. Ask the user administrator for the login user name and login password. For details, see
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed, About This Machine.
A Make sure Ready appears on the screen.

If any other function is displayed, press the {Copy} key on the left side of the
control panel.
B Make sure no previous settings remain.

When there are previous settings remaining, press the {Clear Modes} key.
C Place your originals.

D Make desired settings.
E Enter the number of copies using the number keys.
The maximum copy quantity that can be set is 999.

The machine starts copying.
When placing originals on the exposure glass, press the {q} key after all
originals are scanned.
Copies are delivered face down.
25
Copying
Note
Always log off when you have finished using the machine to prevent unauthorized users from using the machine.
To stop the machine during a multi-copy run, press the {Clear/Stop} key.
To cancel all copy jobs and return the machine to the default condition,
press the {Clear Modes} key.
To clear entered values, press the {Clear/Stop} key or [Cancel] on the screen.
To confirm settings, press the [Check Modes].
Interrupt Copy
Use this function if you want to interrupt a long copy job to make urgently needed copies.
Important
You cannot use the Interrupt Copy function when fax originals are being
scanned or the scanner function is being used.
A Press the {Interrupt} key.
AQI033S
B The machine stops scanning. Remove the originals that were being copied.
C Place the originals you want to copy.
The machine starts making copies.
E When copying is complete, remove the originals and copies.

F Press the {Interrupt} key again.
The interrupt key indicator goes off.
G Replace the originals that you were copying, and then press the {Start} key.
Following message Reset n originals., replace the originals that you
were copying.
26
Basic Procedure
Note
The previous copy job settings are restored. Simply press the {Start} key to
continue copying from where it left off.
Left Original Beeper

The beeper sounds and an error message is displayed when you leave your originals on the exposure glass after copying.
Reference
For details, see Copier / Document Server Features, General Settings
Guide.
Job Preset
You can set up the next copy content during copying. If a long copy job is in
progress and you do not want to wait for it to finish, you can use this function
to set up the next copy job in advance. When the current copy job is finished, the
next job will start automatically.
A Press [New Job] when Copying... appears.
B Be sure message Ready appears, and then set up the next copy job.
C Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
All originals are scanned.
When the job preset is complete, a job preset confirmation dialog box appears.
D Press [Exit].
You return to the copy screen.
After the current copy job, the next copy job starts automatically.
Note
You can switch the display to the current copy job by pressing [To Copying
Screen]. You can switch the display to the preset job by pressing [To Reserv.
Screen].
Preset copy jobs are registered under job numbers in the Reserv. Screen.
27
Copying
Job List
Jobs printed using Copy, Document Server, or Printer mode are temporarily
stored in the machine, and then executed in order. The Job List function allows
you to manage these jobs. For example, you can cancel incorrect job settings or
print an urgent document.
Note
You cannot use the Job List function when Interrupt Copy is active.
Documents printed using the facsimile function and scanner function are not
displayed in the job list.
28
Job List
Job List Screen

This section explains displays and icons that appear in the Job List screen.
The Job List screen varies depending on whether [Job Order] is selected with
Print Priority for the System Settings. For details about the setting procedure, see
System Settings, General Settings Guide.
When [Job Order] is not selected:

The job list is displayed for each of the functions.
AQI049S
When [Job Order] is selected:

The job list is displayed for all functions in the order of print jobs.
AMG060S
A
B
C
D
Switches between job lists for each function.

Switches between [Current / Waiting Job List] and [Job History].
Displays reserved job numbers.
Displays the function used to print jobs.
: Job printed using copy function
: Job printed using printer function
: Job printed using Document Server function
: Job printed using DeskTopBinder
: Job printed using Web Image Monitor
Reference
See System Settings, General Settings Guide.
29
Copying
Checking Jobs in the Print Queue

You can check the contents of jobs in the print queue.
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job whose contents you want to check.
C Press [Details], and then check the contents.

D Press [Exit].
Changing the Order of Jobs
You can change the order in which print jobs in the job list are served:
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job whose order you want to change.
C Press [Change Order].

D Change the order using [Top], [Previous], or [Next].
30
Job List
E Press [OK].
Holding Print Jobs
The machine holds jobs that are queued and currently printing.
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job(s) to hold.
C Press [Suspend Printing].

Deleting Jobs
You can delete a job that is queued or currently printing.
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job you want to delete.
C Press [Delete Reservation].

D Press [OK].
Note
To delete multiple print jobs, select them in step B.
31
Copying
Checking Job History

You can view the history and contents of completed print jobs.
A Press [Job List].

B Press [Job History].
A list of completed print jobs appears.
C Select the job whose contents you want to check.

D Press [Details], and then check the contents.
E Press [Exit].
32
Copying from the Bypass Tray

Use the bypass tray to copy onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translucent paper, postcards and copy paper that cannot be loaded in the paper trays.
Important
When the duplex unit is attached, the default is [1 Sided 2 Sided]. When copying from the bypass tray, cancel [1 Sided 2 Sided] in [Dup./Combine/Series].
You can change the initial settings. See Programming Defaults in Initial Display.
Paper that has a vertical length of 90-305 mm (3.6-12 inches) and a horizontal
length of 148-457.2 mm (5.9-18 inches) can be copied from the bypass tray.
However, when paper larger than 433 mm (17.1 inches) in size is used, the paper may become wrinkled, may not be fed into the machine, or may cause paper jams.
The machine can detect the following sizes as regular size copy paper:
11" 17"L, 81/2" 11"L, 51/2" 81/2"L. If you want to use the size of paper
other than the above, be sure to specify the size.
When copying on OHP transparencies or paper heavier than 81 g/m2 (about
70 kg, 21 lb.), you need to specify the type and size of paper with Special
Original.
The maximum number of sheets you can load at the same time depends on
paper type. The maximum number of sheets should not exceed the upper limit.
When copying paper lighter than 59 g/m2 or tracing paper, you need to specify the paper type.
[Bypass Tray Usage]

Press [Bypass Tray Usage] to display a description on using the bypass tray.
33
Copying
A Open the bypass tray.
2
AQF070S
B Insert the paper face-down until you hear the beep, and then align the pa-
per guide to the paper size by pinching the clip.

If the guides are not flush against the copy paper, images might be skewed or
paper misfeeds might occur.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark, otherwise images might be skewed or
paper misfeeds might occur.
Swing out the extender to support paper sizes larger than A4L or 81/2" 11"L.
Fan paper to get air between the sheets and avoid a multi-sheet feed.
AQF071S
A
B
Extender
Paper guide
C Press [Bypass], and then press the {q} key.

D Select the size and type of the paper.
E Press [OK].
F Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.
G When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Note
When the Sort function is selected, press the {q} key after all originals
have been scanned.
34
When the beeper is turned off , it will not sound if you insert paper into the
bypass tray.
Reference
See p.146 Programming Defaults in Initial Display.
See System Settings, General Settings Guide.
When Copying onto Regular Size Paper
Makes copies onto regular size paper from the bypass tray.
A Open the bypass tray, and then insert the paper face-down until you hear
the beep.
B Align the paper guide to the paper size by pinching the clip.
D Press [Select Size].
E Select the paper size.

F Press [OK] twice.
G Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.
H When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
35
Copying
When Copying onto Custom Size Paper

Makes copies onto custom size paper from the bypass tray.
the beep.
D Press [Custom Size].
E Enter the horizontal size of the original with the number keys, and then
press [q] .
F Enter the vertical size of the original with the number keys, and then press
[q] .
G Press [OK].
H Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.
I When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Note
If you make a mistake in step E or F, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key,
and then enter the value again.
36
To register the custom size entered in step F, press [Program] and then
press [Exit] in the confirmation screen.
When Copying onto OHP Transparencies or Thin Paper

When copying onto OHP transparencies or thin paper, select the type and size
of paper.
Important
We recommend that you use specified OHP transparencies.
OHP transparencies must be loaded face-down in the tray with the notched
corner of the sheet in the appropriate corner of the tray.
To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan paper before placing it
on the tray.
When copying onto OHP transparencies, remove copied sheets one by one.
the beep.
D Select paper type ([OHP (Transparency)] or [Thin Paper]) in the special paper
settings.
E Set the paper size, and then press [OK] to return to the initial display.
F Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.
G When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Note
For OHP transparencies or thin paper, print speed is slower when compared to printing on plain paper.
37
Copying
When Copying onto Thick Paper

When copying onto thick paper, select the type and size of paper.
To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan paper before placing it on
the tray.
the beep.
D Press [Select Thick Paper].
E Select paper type (one of [Thick Paper 1], [Thick Paper 2], [Thick Paper 3], [Thick
1: Dup.Back], [Thick 2: Dup.Back], and [Thick 3: Dup.Back]), and then press [OK].
Select [Thick Paper 1] when copying paper whose weight is between 106 g/m2
(28.5 lb.) and 169 g/m2 (45.0 lb.).
Select [Thick Paper 2] when copying paper of 220 g/m2 (58.5 lb.) or less.
Select [Thick Paper 3] when copying paper of 253 g/m2 (67.3 lb.) or less.
F Set the paper size, and then press [OK] to return to the initial display.
G Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.
H When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Note
If Internal Tray 1 is not selected for the output paper tray, copies are delivered to it.
For thick paper, print speed is slower when compared to printing on plain
paper.
38
When Copying onto Envelopes

When copying onto envelopes, select the paper type.
A Open the bypass tray, and then insert the envelopes with the side you want
to copy face-down until the beeper sounds.
B Align the paper guide to the envelope side by pinching the clip.
D Press [Select Thick Paper].
E Select [Thick Paper 1], and then press [OK].
F Select the paper size.
G Press [OK] twice.
H Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.
I When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Note
When placing an original on the exposure glass, place the original with the
bottom line aligned to the left scale.
When placing an original in the ADF, place the original with the bottom
line inserted in the ADF.
When inserting envelopes, be sure to unfold the flaps and position them
opposite to the paper feed direction.
AQI006S
Reference
For details about supported size of envelope, see Recommended Paper
Sizes and Types, About This Machine.
39
Copying
Color Functions
This section describes functions that are used for color copying.
Selecting a Color Mode
Select a color (or colors) that suits your originals and copying requirements.
For color images, refer to What You Can Do with This Machine <Color Functions/Color Adjustments>.
The following three color modes are available:
Auto Color Selection

Judges the color of the original automatically, and copies either in full color
or black/white.
Full Color Copy
Copies by overlaying yellow, magenta, cyan and black.
Black/White Copy
Copies in black regardless of the color of the original.
A Select the type of color.
Note
For color images, see What You Can Do with This Machine <Color Functions/Color Adjustments>.
To use a user color, you need to register it beforehand. For details, see
Registering Colors.
Reference
See p.iii What You Can Do with This Machine <Color Functions/Color
Adjustments>.
See p.53 User Color.
40
Color Functions
Convert Colors
Copies by changing the color in the original to a different color.
Important
It is possible to specify up to 4 colors.
To use this function, [Full Color] must be selected.

If any other color mode is selected, you cannot select [Convert Color].
A Press [Full Color].
B Press [Edit / Color].
C Make sure that [Color] is selected before pressing [Convert Color].

D Select any one item from [Conversion 1] to [Conversion 4].
E Selects the color to be converted.

41
Copying
F Selects the new color.

You can adjust the density of each color in four steps.
To select User Color, press [User Color], and then select the color.
G After selecting all colors to be converted, press [OK] three times.

H Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
The width of the color to be converted can be adjusted in five levels. If the
color width is set to [Wider] and red has been specified, colors, which are
close to magenta or orange, will also be converted. The color width can be
adjusted in User Tools. This adjustment will be valid in Erase Color. See
Adjust Color Image, General Settings Guide.
When you want to change the converted color in step F, press from [Conversion 1] to [Conversion 4] and make the selection again.
When changing more than two colors, repeat steps D to F.
The full color counter will advance by 1.
Erase Color
Copies by erasing a certain color in the image of the original.
A Press [Edit / Color].
B Make sure that [Color] is selected before pressing [Erase Color].

C Select the color to be erased.
It is possible to select up to 4 colors.
D After selecting all colors to be erased, press [OK] twice.

E Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
42
Color Functions
Note
The width of the color to be deleted can be adjusted in five levels. If the color width is set to [Wider] and red has been specified, colors, which are close
to magenta or orange, will also be deleted. The color width can be adjusted
in User Tools. See Adjust Color Image, General Settings Guide.
You can cancel the selection by pressing the selected (highlighted) key in
step C.
When the Full Color Copy is selected, the full color counter will advance
by 1. When the Black/White is selected, the mono-color counter will advance by 1.
Color Background
Copies by adding a color in the whole page.
Important
Since the Color Background function overprints the entire original, the color
of the image may change.
B Make sure that [Color] is selected before pressing [Color Background].

C Select the background color, and then press [OK] twice.
You can adjust the density of each color in four steps.
D Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.

Note
You can cancel the selection by pressing the selected (highlighted) key in
step C.
by 1. When the Black/White is selected, the mono-color counter will advance by 1.
43
Copying
Color Balance
Adjusts the overall color tone when the overall copy is reddish or bluish.
B Make sure that [Color] is selected before pressing [Adjust Color].

C Make sure that [Color Balance] is selected.
D Adjust the color balance by pressing [Lighter] or [Darker].
E Press [OK] twice.

F Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
The adjusted settings will be deleted and the initial values will be reset,
when Auto Clear has been performed, when the {Clear Modes} key has
been pressed or when the power has been turned off.
For types and examples of the image adjustment functions, see What You
Can Do with This Machine <Color Functions/Color Adjustments>.
Reference
Adjustments>.
44
Color Functions
Color Balance Program

You can also store the color balance setting as a color balance program and recall
it when you want to use it.
You can store up to three programs.
Note
If you want to change the registered settings, register them one more time. In
this case, the previously registered contents will be changed.
Registering the adjusted color balance

Register adjusted color balance settings so that you can use them later.
A Change the color balance.

B Press [Program Color Balance].
C Press [m Program].
D Select a program number ([1]-[3]) for this setting.
The color balance setting will be registered in the selected number.
E Press [OK] twice.

Note
If you select the program number key where the m is displayed in step D,
the previously registered settings will change (will be overwritten).
For details about how to adjust the color balance, see Color Balance.
Reference
Adjustments>.
See p.44 Color Balance.
45
Copying
Changing the registered contents

Changes contents stored in color balance programs.

C Make sure that [Color Balance] is selected before pressing [Program Color Bal-
ance].
D Make sure that [Recall] is selected, and then select the program number ([1][3]) to be changed.
The programmed color balance appears.
E Change the registered contents.

F After the programmed contents are changed, press [Program Color Balance].
G Press [Program], and then press the program number to be overwritten.
H Press [Yes].
The program is overwritten.
I Press [OK] twice.

Copying with the registered contents
Applies settings registered in color balance programs to the copy job.

C Make sure that [Color Balance] is selected before pressing [Program Color Balance].
D Make sure that [Recall] is selected, and then select the program number registered by the color balance to be used.
E Press [OK] twice.

46
Color Functions

Note
After copying has been completed, pressing the {Clear Modes} key deletes
the recalled contents.
Deleting the registered contents
Deletes contents stored in color balance programs.

C Make sure that [Color Balance] is selected before pressing [Program Color Balance].
D Press [Delete], and then select the program number registered by the color
balance to be deleted.
E Press [Yes].
F Press [OK] twice.
Color Adjustment
Adjusts the specific colors (yellow, red, magenta, blue, cyan and green) by mixing them with adjacent colors in the color circle.
You can adjust up to three colors from yellow, red, magenta, blue, cyan, or
green.
Important
This function is not available if Black & White is selected.

C Press [Adjust Color].
47
Copying
D Select the colors you want to adjust.

You can select up to 3 colors.
E Adjust the color tastes using [] or [].

Refer to the color circle on the control panel.
F Press [OK] twice.

Note
Reference
Adjustments>.
Image Adjustment
The following five types of image adjustments are available:
Sharp/Soft
Adjusts the outline of an image.
Contrast
Adjusts the shades of an image.
Background Density
Adjusts the background density of an image.
Adjust U.C.R.
Adjusts the amount of black toner to express vividly the black areas in an image.
48
Color Functions
Text/Photo Sensitivity
Adjusts the standard level in judging the image in the text and photo part
when using Text / Photo.

C Press [Copy Quality].
D Adjust the settings.
E Press [OK] twice.
Note
[Sharp / Soft], [Contrast], and [Background Density] can each be adjusted, however, their adjustments can affect the level of other adjustment functions.
Reference
Adjustments>.
49
Copying
Adjusting the sharpness/softness

Adjusts the outline of an image.
A Adjust by pressing [Soft] or [Sharp].
B Press [OK].
Adjusting the contrast
Adjusts the shades of an image.
A Adjust by pressing [Low] or [High].
B Press [OK].
50
Color Functions
Adjusting the background density

Adjusts the background density of an image.
A Adjust by pressing [Lighter] or [Darker].
B Press [OK].
Note
Adjustments should be made lighter when copying dark textured originals, such as newspaper or recycled paper.
Adjustments should be made darker when darkening the color of markers

or highlighters. However, as the color of highlighters is difficult to reproduce, the copy might not come out depending on the color or a different
color might be copied.
Adjusting the U.C.R.

Adjusts the amount of black toner to express vividly the black areas in an image.
A Adjust by pressing [Lighter] or [Darker].
B Press [OK].
51
Copying
Adjusting the Text/Photo sensitivity

Adjusts the standard level in judging the image in the text and photo part when
using Text / Photo.
A Adjust by pressing [Text] or [Photo].
B Press [OK].
Note
Make sure to set to Text when parts of the texts are faded or are not clear.
Set to Photo when the outline of photos becomes dark.
52
Color Functions
User Color
You can register User Colors made by adjusting the density of yellow, magenta,
cyan, and black. You can also give a name to the colors you register, and print
out a list of user colors.
You can create colors by:
Adjusting the density of each color based on the density of a chosen basic color.
Directly specifying the density of each color using the number keys.
Note
Adjust the colors to be registered so that the total of yellow, magenta, cyan
and black is under 400%.
When copying using user colors, the fine shades might vary depending on the
condition of the machine.
In order to correctly reproduce originals, the values, which have been input,
are corrected inside the machine, and copies are made using the best suitable
values. Therefore, there might be slight color differences when copying using
Text and when using Photo.
Up to 15 colors can be registered.
Sample prints of user colors can also be made on an A4K, 81/2" 11"K,
A3L, or 11" 17"L size page.
When printing a list of user colors, the full color counter will advance by 1.
Reference
See p.iii What You Can Do with This Machine <Color Functions/Color Adjustments>.
53
Copying
Adjusting colors based on selected color

Creates colors by adjusting the density of each color based on the density of a
chosen basic color.
B Press [Color], and then press [User Color].
C Make sure that [Program] is selected, and then select the number ([01]-[15])
for the color you want to register.
D Select the color to be used as a base for registration from the basic and user
colors.
The density of each color for the selected color is displayed.
54
Color Functions
E Select the color whose density is to be specified, and then specify the density in percentages using [n] or [o].
F Check names and densities of each color, and press [OK].

G Press [OK] twice.
Note
It is also possible to specify density by pressing [Adjust with Number Keys] in
step E.
Selecting a user color key that is indicated by a solid line will change (overwrite) the contents of that color.
Creating colors by directly specifying the density of each color with number keys
Creates colors by directly specifying the density of each color using the number keys.

for the color you want to register.
D Press [Custom Setting].

E Select the color whose density is to be specified.
F Enter the density (%) using the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
Repeat steps E-F if you want to specify the density of multiple colors.
G Check names and densities of each color, and press [OK].

H Press [OK] three times.
Note
It is also possible to specify density by pressing [Adjust with [n] [o]] and
then using [n] and [o] in step F.
Selecting a user color key that is indicated by a solid line will change (overwrite) the contents of that color.
55
Copying
Renaming a user color

Renames a user color.

for the color you want to rename.
D Select the color you want to rename.

E Press [Change Name].
F Enter the name of the color (up to 16 characters), and then press [OK].
G Press [OK] three times.
Deleting user colors
Deletes user colors.
Important
You can not delete colors registered in the program or user colors that are currently being used.

C Press [Delete].
D Select the number of the user color (whose key is indicated by a solid line)
you want to delete.
E Press [Yes].
F Press [OK] twice.
Printing a list of user colors
Prints a list of user colors.

C Check the copy paper, and then press [Print Sample of User Color].
The list of user colors is output in the internal tray.
56
Note
The list will be copied on a A4K, 81/2" 11"K, A3L or 11" 17"L sheet.
Copier Functions
Copier Functions
This section describes the copy functions.
Adjusting Copy Image Density
There are three types of adjustment available.
Auto image density

The machine automatically adjusts the image density by scanning the densities of originals. Dark texture originals (such as newspaper or recycled paper)
will be copied so that background will not be reproduced.
Manual image density
You can adjust the density of the overall original in nine steps.
Combined auto and manual image density
Adjusts the density of an image only for dark texture originals.
Auto image density
The machine automatically adjusts the image density by scanning the densities
of originals. Dark texture originals (such as newspaper or recycled paper) will
be copied so that background will not be reproduced.
A Make sure that [Auto Density] is selected.
57
Copying
Manual image density

You can adjust the density of the overall original in nine steps.
A When [Auto Density] is selected, press [Auto Density] to cancel it.

B Press [W] or [V] to adjust the image density. The density indicator {
moves.
Combined auto and manual image density

Adjusts the density of an image only for dark texture originals.
A Make sure [Auto Density] is selected.

B Press [W] or [V] to adjust the density. The density indicator { moves.
58
Copier Functions
Selecting the Original Type Setting

Select one of the following 6 types to match your originals:
Text
Select this mode when your originals contain only text (no pictures).
Text/Photo
Select [Text / Photo] when your originals contain photographs or pictures with text.
Photo
Delicate tones of photographs and pictures can be reproduced with this mode.
When copying developed photographs:
When copying photographs or pictures that are printed on paper (e.g.
magazines):
When copying copies or originals generated by color copiers:
Generation Copy
If your originals are copies (generation copies), the copy image can be reproduced sharply and clearly.
Select this type from [Others] when Original Type Display (Copier / Document Server Features) has been set to Hide.
Pale
The machine scans originals with settings suitable for originals that have lighter
lines written in pencil, or for faint copied slips. The faint lines will be clearly copied.
Map
The machine scans originals with settings suitable for map originals.
A Select the original type, and then press [OK].
Reference
See Copier / Document Server Features and Adjust Color Image, General Settings Guide.
59
Copying
Selecting Copy Paper

There are two ways to select copy paper:
Auto Paper Select

The machine selects a suitable size of copy paper automatically based on original size and reproduction ratio.
Manual Paper Select

Choose the tray containing the paper you want to copy onto: a paper tray, bypass tray or LCT.
See the following table for copy paper sizes and orientations that can be used
with Auto Paper Select (when copying at a ratio of 100%):
Metric version
Where original is set
Paper size and orientation
Exposure glass
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, 8" 13"L
ADF
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL, 11 17L,

81/2" 11"KL, 8" 13"L, 8KL, 16KKL
Inch version
Exposure glass
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
ADF
A3L, A4KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL,

51/2" 81/2"KL, 10" 14"L, 71/4" 101/2"L
Note
Only the paper trays set to [No Display] or [Recycled Paper] in Paper Type in
Tray Paper Setting in System Settings and also set to [Yes] in Apply Auto Paper Select can be selected in Auto Paper Select mode.
Reference
See Tray Paper Settings, General Settings Guide.
See Copier / Document Server Features, General Settings Guide.

See p.14 Sizes difficult to detect.
60
Copier Functions
Auto Paper Select

The machine selects a suitable size of copy paper automatically based on the
original size and the reproduction ratio.
A Make sure that Auto Paper Select is selected.

Trays with a key mark ( ) will not be automatically selected.
Reference
Manual Paper Select

Choose the tray containing the paper you wish to copy onto: a paper tray, bypass
tray or large capacity tray (LCT).
A Select the paper tray, bypass tray or the LCT.

The indicator corresponding to the selected paper tray is highlighted.
61
Copying
Note
If the orientation in which your original is placed (K or L) is different
from that of the paper you are copying onto, this function rotates the original image by 90 to fit it on the copy paper.
2
GCROTA0E
This function works when [Auto Paper Select] or [Auto Reduce / Enlarge] is selected. See Auto Paper Select and Auto Reduce/Enlarge.
The default setting for Auto Tray Switching is [With Image Rotation]. You cannot
use the Rotated Copy function if this setting is changed to [Without Image Rotation]
or [Off]. See Copier / Document Server Features, General Settings Guide.
You cannot use the Rotated Copy function if 2 is selected for stapling when
using SR790.
You cannot use the Rotated Copy function if 2 or Center is selected for stapling when using Booklet Finisher SR3020.
You cannot use the Rotated Copy function when enlarging onto A3, B4 JIS
or 11" 17", 81/2" 14" size paper. In this case, place your original in the L
orientation.
Original size and orientation
You cannot
rotate:
81/2"
11", or
51/2"
81/2"
K
Copy paper size and orientation

When enlarging to
81/2"
14", or
11"
17"
GCROTA1E
GCROTA2E
However, you 81/2"

can use:
11", or
51/2"
81/2"
L
When enlarging to
GCROTA3E
81/2"
14", or
11"
17"
GCROTA3E
Reference
See p.33 Copying from the Bypass Tray.
See p.61 Auto Paper Select.

See p.67 Auto Reduce/Enlarge.
See p.78 Staple.
See p.81 Punch.
62
Copier Functions
Preset Reduce/Enlarge
You can select a preset ratio for copying.
Base Point
The base point of Reduce/Enlarge differs depending on how the original is
scanned. When the original is placed on the exposure glass, the upper left corner will be the base point. When it is placed in the ADF, the bottom left corner
will be the base point.
GCKA031e
A
B
Base point when placed on the exposure glass.

Base point when placed in the ADF.
A Press [Reduce / Enlarge].
B Select a ratio, and then press [OK].

C Place your originals, and then press the {Start} key.
63
Copying
Note
To select a preset ratio on the initial display in step A, press the shortcut
reduce/enlarge key and go to step C.
Reference
See Reproduction Ratio, General Settings Guide.
Create Margin function

The Create Margin function reduces the image to 93% of its original size to place
the reduced image at the center. By combining it with the Reduce/Enlarge function, you can further increase a margin.
A Press [Create Margin] displayed on the initial display.
B If you do not want to combine it with the Reduce/Enlarge function, place

your originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Reference
See Copier / Document Server Features, Reproduction Ratio, General
Settings Guide.
64
Copier Functions
Zoom
You can change the reproduction ratio in increments of 1%.
To select the ratio with [o] and [n]

Select a ratio using [o] or [n].
B Select a preset ratio which is close to the desired ratio.

C Adjust the ratio with [o] or [n].
To change the ratio in increments of 1%, press [o] or [n]. To change the ratio
in increments of 10%, press and hold down [o] or [n].
D Press [OK].
Note
If you have incorrectly entered the ratio in step C, readjust it with [o] or
[n].
65
Copying
To enter the ratio with the number keys

Select a ratio using the number keys.
B Press [Number keys].

C Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
D Press [OK] twice.
E Place your originals, and then press the {Start} key.
66
Copier Functions
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
The machine can choose an appropriate reproduction ratio based on the paper
and original sizes you select.
Important
You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.
When using Auto Reduce/Enlarge, see the following table for paper sizes
and orientations you can use:
Metric version
Where original is placed
Exposure glass
ADF

81/2" 11"KL, 8" 13"L, 8KL, 16KKL
Inch version
Where original is placed
Exposure glass
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
ADF
A3L, A4KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL,

51/2" 81/2"KL, 10" 14"L, 71/4" 101/2"L
A Press [Auto Reduce / Enlarge].
B Select the paper size.

67
Copying
C Place your originals, and then press the {Start} key.

Reference
See p.14 Sizes difficult to detect.
Size Magnification
This function calculates an enlargement or reduction ratio based on the lengths of the original and copy.
ANP059S
Measure and specify the lengths of the original and copy by comparing A with a.
B Press [Size Magnification].

C Enter the length of the original with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
You can enter sizes within the following ranges:
Metric version: 1 - 999 mm (increments of 1 mm)
Inch version: 0.1" - 99.9" (increments of 0.1")
D Enter the length of the copy with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
E Press [OK] twice.
68
Note
To change the length after pressing the {q} key in step D, select [Original]
or [Copy], and then enter the desired length.
Copier Functions
Directional Magnification (%)

Specify the horizontal and vertical lengths of the original and copy image at different reproduction ratio. Copies can be reduced or enlarged at different reproduction ratios horizontally and vertically.
CP2P01EE
a: Horizontal ratio
b: Vertical ratio
To enter the ratio with the number keys

Select a ratio using the number keys.
B Press [Direct. Mag. %].

C Press [Horizontal].
D Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
E Press [Vertical].
F Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
G Press [OK] twice.
69
Copying
To specify the ratio with [o] and [n]

Select a ratio using [o] or [n].
B Press [Direct. Mag. %].

C Press [[n] [o] keys].
D Press [Horizontal].
E Adjust the ratio using [n] or [o].
Pressing [n] or [o] changes the ratio in increments of 1%. Pressing and holding down [n] or [o] changes it in increments of 10%.
F Press [Vertical].
G Adjust the ratio with [n] or [o].
H Press [OK] twice.
I Place your originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
If you have incorrectly entered the ratio in step E or G, readjust it with [n]
or [o].
70
Copier Functions
Directional Size Magnification (Inch)

Specify the horizontal and vertical lengths of the original and copy image. Copies
can be reduced or enlarged at different reproduction ratios horizontally and vertically.
CP2M01EE
Horizontal original size: A mm (inch)

B Vertical original size: B mm (inch)
C Horizontal copy size: a mm (inch)
D Vertical copy size: b mm (inch)
Measure and specify the lengths of the original and copy by comparing A with
a and B with b.
B Press [Dir. Size Mag. Inch].

C Enter the horizontal size of the original with the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
You can enter sizes within the following ranges:
Metric version: 1 - 999 mm (increments of 1 mm)
Inch version: 0.1" - 99.9" (increments of 0.1")
D Enter the horizontal size of the copy with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
E Enter the vertical size of the original with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
71
Copying
F Enter the vertical size of the copy with the number keys, and then press the
{q} key.
G Press [OK] twice.

Note
To change a length in steps C to F, press the key you wish to change and
enter the new value.
Sort
The machine assembles copies as sets in sequential order.
Important
To use the Rotate Sort function, two paper trays loaded with same size and
type paper, but in different orientation (KL), are required. See Tray Paper
Settings, General Settings Guide.
You cannot use the bypass tray with Rotate Sort.
Sort
Copies are assembled as sets in sequential order.
Rotate Sort
Every other copy set is rotated by 90 degrees (KL) and delivered to the copy
tray.
72
Copier Functions
A Press [Finishing].
B Select [Sort] or [Rotate Sort].
When a finisher is not installed:
When SR790 is installed:
When Booklet Finisher SR3020 is installed:
When Finisher SR3030 is installed:
73
Copying
C Press [OK].
D Enter the number of copy sets using the number keys.
E Place your originals.
When placing an original on the exposure glass, start with the first page to be
copied. When placing an original in the ADF, set so the first page is on the top.
When placing an original on the exposure glass or in the ADF using Batch
mode, press the {q} key after all the originals have been scanned.

Note
To confirm the type of finishing, press the {Sample Copy} key in step E.
Reference
See Input/Output, Copier / Document Server Features, General Settings Guide.
Sample Copy
Use this function to check the copy settings before making a long copy run.
Important
This function can be used only when the Sort function is turned on.
A Select Sort and any other necessary functions, and then place the originals.
B Press the {Sample Copy} key.
One copy set is delivered as a sample.
AQI034S
C If the sample is acceptable, press [Continue].

The number of copies made is the number specified, minus one for the proof copy.
74
Copier Functions
Note
If you press [Suspend] after checking the results, return to step A to adjust
the copy settings as necessary. You can change the settings for Staple,
Punch, Duplex (1 sided 2 sided, 2 sided 2 sided), Copy Orientation,
Margin Adjust., Cover/Slip Sheet, Stamp, and Designate. However, depending on the combination of functions, you may not be able to change
some settings.
Reference
See p.171 Function Compatibility.
Changing the number of sets

You can change the number of copy sets during copying.
Important
This function can only be used when the Sort function is turned on.
A While Copying... is displayed, press the {Clear/Stop} key.

B Press [Change Quantity].
C Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys, and then press the
{q} key.
D Press [Continue].
Copying starts again.
Note
The number of sets you can enter in step C differs depending on when the
{Clear/Stop} key is pressed.
75
Copying
Stack
Copies can be assembled with each page placed.
2
If a finisher is installed, each time the copies of one page are delivered, the next
copy is shifted when delivered so you can separate each job by page.
Important
A finisher is required.
B Press [Stack].
SR790
Booklet Finisher SR3020
76
Copier Functions
Finisher SR3030
2
C Press [OK].
D Enter the number of copies with the number keys.
Note
When placing an original on the exposure glass, start with the first page to
be copied. When placing an original in the ADF, set so the last page is on
the bottom.
77
Copying
Staple
Each copy set can be stapled together.
Important
A finisher is required.
Stapling position and original setting

Place all the originals in the ADF in the orientation in which they can be read
normally. When placing the original on the exposure glass, keep the same orientation, but set the original facing downwards. When there is copy paper
that is identical in size and orientation to your original, the staple positions
are as follows:
SR790
AQI076S
78
Copier Functions
AQI050S
Finisher SR3030
AQI051S
79
Copying
These tables show the stapling positions, not the orientation of delivery.
Left 2K and Top 2L are not available for paper larger than A4 size.
B Select one of the stapling positions.
SR790
Finisher SR3030
When you select a stapling position, Sort mode is automatically selected.
C Press [OK].
D Enter the number of copy sets using the number keys.
80
Copier Functions
Note
be copied. When placing an original in the ADF, set so that the last page is
on the bottom.
Reference
See Input/Output, General Settings Guide.
Punch
You can make punch holes in copies.
2 holes
GCPNCH1E
3 holes
GCPNCH3E
Important
Booklet Finisher SR3020 or Finisher SR3030 is required.
81
Copying
Punch hole positions

The relationship between the orientation in which you place the original and
the punch hole positions is as follows:
AQI052S
This table shows the punch hole positions, not the orientation of delivery.
2 hole left K, 2 hole top L, 3 hole left K, and 3 hole top L are not available for
paper larger than A4 size.
B Select one of the punch hole positions.
82
Copier Functions
Finisher SR3030
2
C Press [OK].
D Place your originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Duplex
There are two types of duplex.
1 Sided 2 Sided
Copies 2 one-sided pages on 1 two-sided page.
2 Sided 2 Sided
Copies 1 two-sided page on 1 two-sided page.
83
Copying
Original orientation and completed copies

The resulting copy image will differ according to the orientation in which you
place your originals (vertical or horizontal).
The table shows the orientation of images on the front and back of copies, not
the orientation of delivery.
AMG050S
A Press [Dup./Combine/Series].
84
Copier Functions
B Press [Duplex].
C Select [1 Sided 2 Sided] or [2 Sided 2 Sided].
D Press [OK].
Note
The maximum paper weight that can be used with duplex copying is 64
105 g/m2 (17-28 lb.).
be copied. When placing an original in the ADF, set so that the last page is
on the bottom.
To change originals and copy orientation in step C, press [Orientation].
Reference
See p.100 Margin Adjustment.
For related initial settings, see Edit, General Settings Guide.
85
Copying
Originals and copy orientation

You can select the orientation.
Top to Top
2
Duplex1
Top to Bottom
Duplex2
A Press [Orientation].
B Select orientation ([Top to Top]/[Top to Bottom]), and then press [OK].
Note
The default setting is [Top to Top]. You can change the default orientation
with Copier/Document Server Features in User Tools.
Reference
86
Copier Functions
One-Sided Combine
Combine several pages onto one side of a sheet.
There are six types of One-Sided Combine.
1 Sided 2 Pages Combine 1 Side

Copies 2 one-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
GCSHVY7E

2 Sided 1 Page Combine 1 Side
Copies 1 two-sided original to one side of a sheet.
Copies 2 two-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
Copies 4 two-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
Orientation of the original and image position of combine
Open to left (K) originals
GCSHUY1E
Open to top (L) originals
GCSHUY2E
87
Copying
Placing originals (originals placed in the ADF)

Originals read from left to right
Combine5
Originals read from top to bottom
Combine6
B Press [Combine].
C Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for Original, and then press [Combine 1 Side] for
Copy.
D Select the number of originals to combine.

F Press [OK].
G Place your originals, and then press the {Start} key.
88
Copier Functions
Note
Reference
See p.86 Originals and copy orientation.
See Edit, General Settings Guide.
Two-Sided Combine
Combines various pages of originals into one sheet with two sides.
There are six types of Two-Sided Combine.
1 Sided 4 Pages Combine 2 Sides

Copies 4 one-sided originals to one sheet with two pages per side.
GCBOOK1E

Copies 8 one-sided originals to one sheet with four pages per side.
GCSHVYAE
A
B
Front
Back
89
Copying

Copies 16 one-sided originals to one sheet with eight pages per side.
2
GCSHVY5E
A
B
Front
Back

Copies 2 two-sided originals to one sheet with two pages per side.
GCSHVY1E

Copies 4 two-sided originals to one sheet with four pages per side.
GCSHVY2E
A
B
Front
Back
90
Copier Functions

Copies 8 two-sided originals to one sheet with eight pages per side.
2
GCSHVY6E
A
B
Front
Back
B Press [Combine].
C Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for Original, and then press [Combine 2 Sides] for
Copy.
D Press [Orientation].
E Select orientation ([Top to Top]/[Top to Bottom]), and then press [OK].
F Select the number of originals to combine.
G Select the paper size.
91
Copying
H Press [OK].
Note
Reference
See p.86 Originals and copy orientation.
Series Copies
Separately copies the front and back of a two-sided original or the two facing
pages of a bound original onto two sheets.
There are two types of Series Copies.
Important
You cannot use the Book 1 Sided function from the ADF.
See the following table for original and copy paper sizes when using a 100%
ratio:
Metric version
AMA020S
Inch version
AMA027S
92
Copier Functions
Book 1 Sided
You can make one-sided copies from two facing pages of a bound original
(book).
2
CP2B0100
2 Sided 1 Sided
You can make one-sided copies from two-sided originals.
B Press [Series].
C Select [2 Sided 1 Sided] or [Book 1 Sided], and then press [OK].
If you selected [2 Sided 1 Sided], you can change the orientation.
D Place your original on the exposure glass, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
Press the {q} key after all originals have been scanned.
93
Copying
Booklet/Magazine
Copies two or more originals in page order.
There are six types of Booklet/Magazine.
Important
The following table shows the paper sizes of two-sided original and two-sided copy (when copying at a ratio of 100%):
Metric version
AMA020S
Inch version
AMA027S
1 Sided Booklet
Make copies in page order for a folded booklet as shown.
Open to left
GCBOOK0E
94
Copier Functions
Open to right
2
GCBOOK1E
2 Sided Booklet
Make two-sided originals to copies in page order for a folded booklet as
shown.
Open to left
GCAH010E
Open to right
GCAH020E
95
Copying
1 Sided Magazine
Copies two or more originals to make copies in page order when they are
folded and stacked.
Open to left
GCBOOK3E
Open to right
GCBOOK4E
2 Sided Magazine
Copies two or more originals of two-sided to make copies in page order when
they are folded and stacked.
Open to left
GCAH030E
96
Copier Functions
Open to right
2
GCAH040E
Book 2 Sided
Copies a two-page spread original onto one sheet with one page per side.
You cannot use the bypass tray with Book 2 Sided or Front&Back 2
Sided.
Front & Back 2 Sided

Copies each two-page spread original as it is onto both sides of a sheet.
97
Copying
How to fold and unfold copies to make a booklet

As shown below, fold a copy along the centerline, and open.
2
GCBOOK2E
A
B
Open to left
Open to right
How to fold and unfold copies to make a magazine

As shown below, fold and stack copies to make a magazine, and open.
Open to left
GCBOOK5E
Open to right
GCBOOK6E
98
Copier Functions
A Select [Open to Left] or [Open to Right] with User Tools.

B Press [Dup./Combine/Series].
C Press [Book].
D Select a book type separately for the original ([1 Sided] or [2 Sided]) and copy
([Booklet] or [Magazine]), or select a book type from [Book 2 Sided] and
[Front&Back 2 Sided].

F Press [OK].
Note
The machine sets the reproduction ratio automatically to meet the paper
size.
Reference
99
Copying
Margin Adjustment
Copies originals leaving a binding margin.
B Press [Margin Adj.].

C Set a binding margin for a front page. Press [] and [] when setting the
left and right margins, and [] and [] when setting the top and bottom margins.
D Set a binding margin for the back side pages. Press [] and [] when setting the left and right margins, and [] and [] when setting the top and bottom margins, and then press [OK].
Margin on the back side of the page is valid when [1 Sided 2 Sided] or [Combine 2 Sides] is selected.

Note
If you make a mistake, press [], [], [], [], or press [Clear] to set a new
value.
If you do not need to specify the margins for the back side pages in step D,
press [OK] and proceed to step E.
Reference
100
Copier Functions
Erase
This function erases the center and/or all four sides of the original image.
This function has the following three types:
Border
This mode erases the edge margin of the original image.
GCCENT2E
Center
This mode erases the center margin of the original image.
GCCENT1E
Center/Border
This mode erases both the center and edge margins of the original image.
GCCENT3E
101
Copying
Note
The erase width is set to 10 mm (0.4 inches) as a default. You can change this
setting with User Tools. See Edit, General Settings Guide.
The relationship between the original orientation and the erased part is as follows:
L original
K original
A
B
Erased part
2-99 mm (0.1"-3.9")
Border Erase (same width)

B Press [Erase].
C Press [Erase Center / Border].
D Press [Same Width].
102
Copier Functions
E Set an erase border width with [n] or [o].

Pressing [n] or [o] changes the width in increments of 1 mm (0.1 inches).
Pressing and holding down the relevant key changes the width in increments
of 10 mm (1 inch).
F Press [OK] twice.

Note
To change the value entered in step E, press [n] and [o] to set a new value.
Border Erase (different width)

B Press [Erase].
D Press [Different Width].
103
Copying
E Press the key for the border you want to change and set an erase width with
[n] and [o].
F Press [OK] twice.

Center Erase
This mode erases the center margin of the original image.
B Press [Erase].
D Press [Erase Center].
E Set the erase center width with [n] and [o].
F Press [OK] twice.
104
Copier Functions
Center/Border Erase (same width)

B Press [Erase].
D Press [Erase Center / Border].
E Press [Same Width].
F Press [Center], and then set the erase center width with [n] and [o].
G Press [Border], and then set the erase border width with [n] and [o].
H Press [OK] twice.
105
Copying
Center/Border Erase (different width)

B Press [Erase].
D Press [Erase Center / Border].
E Press [Different Width].
F Press the key for the border you want to change and set an erase width with
[n] and [o].
G Press [OK] twice.

H Place your originals, and then press the {Start} key.
106
Copier Functions
Use this function to have numbers printed on the background of copies. If this
function is used in conjunction with Sort, the same numbers are printed on each
set of copies, helping you keep track of confidential documents.
GCSTMP2J
Important
B Press [Stamp].
C Press [Background Numbering].
D Enter the number to start counting from with the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
E Press [OK] twice.

F Place your originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
To change the value entered in step D, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key
to set a new value.
by 1.
The default color is black.
107
Copying
Reference
See Background Numbering, General Settings Guide.
Preset Stamp
Messages are stamped on copies.
GCSTMP1E
Important
Only one message can be stamped at a time.

The following eight messages are available for stamping:
COPY, URGENT, PRIORITY, For Your Info., PRELIMINARY,
For Internal Use Only, CONFIDENTIAL, DRAFT
Stamp position and original orientation

The stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you place
your originals.
108
GCSTMP5E
Copier Functions
2
B Press [Stamp].
C Press [Preset Stamp].
D Select the desired message.
You can change the stamp color, position, size, and density of the stamp.
E Press [All Pages] or [1st Page Only] to select the print page.
F After you specify all desired settings, press [OK].

G Press [OK].
Note
by 1.
The default user stamp color is red.

Reference
See Preset Stamp, General Settings Guide.
109
Copying
Changing the stamp color

Changes the stamp color.
A Press [Stamp Color] under Stamp Color.

B Select the stamp color, and then press [OK].
Changing the stamp position, size and density

Changes the stamp position, size and density.
A Press [Change] under [Position / Size / Density].

B Select the position for print, size, and density, and then press [OK].
110
Copier Functions
User Stamp
Copies a scanned image as a stamp. Letters or images you use frequently can be
registered.
GCSTMP0E
Important
You have to register a user stamp before using this function.

Only one message can be stamped each time.

The user stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you
place your originals.
GCSTMP6E
111
Copying
2
B Press [Stamp].
C Press [User Stamp].
D Select the stamp you require.
You can change the stamp color and position.
F After making all settings, press [OK].

G Press [OK].
Note
by 1.
The default user stamp color is red.

Reference
See p.113 To program the user stamp.
See User Stamp, General Settings Guide.
112
Copier Functions
Changing the user stamp color


Changing the user stamp position

Changes the stamp position.
A Press [Change] under Stamp Position.

B Select the desired position, and then press [OK].
To program the user stamp

This function scans an image that is used as a user stamp.
The range of stamp images for readability is 10297 mm (0.4"-11.7") high and 10
432 mm (0.4"-17.0") wide. However, if the value exceeds the maximum value of
the area (5,000 mm2, 7.75 inches2), it is corrected within the range of the area automatically.
AQI036S
113
Copying
2
C Press [Stamp].
D Press [User Stamp].
E Press [Program / Delete Stamp].
F Press [mProgram], and then press the stamp number you want to program.
G Enter the user stamp name (up to ten characters) with the letter keys, and
then press [OK].
H Enter the horizontal size of the stamp with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
I Enter the vertical size of the stamp with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
J Place the original for user stamp on the exposure glass, and then press [Start
Scanning].
The original will be scanned, and the stamp will be registered.
K Press [Exit].
L Press [Exit].
The display returns to the User Tools/Counter/Inquiry screen.
M Press [Exit].
Exits settings and gets ready to copy.
Note
Stamp numbers with m already have settings in them.
If the stamp number is already being used, the machine will ask you if you
want to overwrite it . Press [Yes] or [Stop].
Originals cannot be scanned from the ADF when programming the user
stamp.
114
Copier Functions
To delete the user stamp

Deletes an image registered as a user stamp.
You cannot restore a deleted stamp.
AQI036S
C Press [Stamp].
D Press [User Stamp].
E Press [Program / Delete Stamp].
F Press [Delete], and then press the stamp number you want to delete.
G Select [Yes], and then press [Exit].
H Press [Exit].
The display returns to the User Tools/Counter/Inquiry screen.
I Press [Exit].
Exits settings and gets ready to copy.
115
Copying
Date Stamp
Use this function to print dates on your copies.
AMG062S
You can select from the following styles:

MM/DD/YYYY
MM.DD.YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
DD.MM.YYYY
YYY.MM.DD

The date stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you
AMG063S
Important
116
Copier Functions
2
B Press [Stamp].
C Press [Date Stamp].
D Select the stamp format.
You can change the Stamp color, style and position of the date to be stamped.
You can change the stamp color, format and position of the date to be
stamped.
F After all settings are complete, press [OK].

G Press [OK].
Note
The default color is Black.
Reference
See Date Stamp, General Settings Guide.
117
Copying
To change the date stamp color


To change the format of date

Changes the style of date to be stamped.
A Press [Change Format] under Current Date.
B Select the date format, and then press [OK].

To change the date stamp position
118
Copier Functions
B Select the desired date stamp position, and then press [OK].
Page Numbering
Use this function to print page numbers on your copies.
CP2G0100
There are six types of page numbering.

P1,P2,
1/5,2/5,
-1-,-2-,
P.1,P.2,
1, 2,
1-1,1-2,
119
Copying

The page stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you
GCSTMP8E
Important
B Press [Stamp].
C Press [Page Numbering].
120
Copier Functions
D Select the format.
2
You can specify the stamp color, position, pages to be stamped, and numbering.
E After you specify all desired settings, press [OK].

F Press [OK].
Note
The default color is black.
Reference
See Page Numbering, General Settings Guide.
Changing the stamp color


121
Copying
Changing the stamp position


B Select the desired position, and then press [OK].
Specifying the first printing page and start number (P1,P2..., -1-,-2-..., P.1,P.2...,
1,2...)
Below explains the example when P1, P2 is selected. The steps are the same
for other cases.
A Press [Change] under Change Numbering.
B Press [First Printing Page], enter the original sheet number from which to start
printing, and then press the {q} key.
122
Copier Functions
C Press [First Printing Number], enter the number of page from which to start
numbering with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
The example below shows when the first printing page is 2 and the start
number is 3.
2
GCANPE2J
D Press [Last Number], enter the number of the page at which to stop numbering with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
If you want to number all pages to the end, press [to the End].
E When page designation is complete, press [OK].

F Press [OK] twice.
Note
To change the number entered in steps B-D, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop}
key, and then enter a new number.
123
Copying
Specifying the first printing page and start number (1/5,2/5)

You can enter between 1 and 9999 for the original sheet number from which
to start printing.
C Press [First Printing Number], enter the number of page from which to start
numbering with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
D Press [Last Number], enter the number of page at which to stop numbering
with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
Proceed to step E when not changing.
If you want to number all pages to the end, press [to the End].
The last number is the last page number to print. For example, if Total Pages
is ten, if you want to print up to seven pages and do not want to print from
page 8 on, enter 7 for Last Number. Normally, you do not need to enter the
number.
E Press [Total Pages], enter the total number of original pages with the number
keys, and then press the {q} key.
F When page designation is complete, press [OK].

G Press [OK] twice.
Note
To change the number entered in steps B-E, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop}
To change the settings (the first printing page, the number of page from
which to start numbering, or total number of pages) after pressing [OK] in
step F, press [Change] and then enter the numbers again.
124
Copier Functions
Specifying the first printing page and start number (1-1,1-2)

C Press [First Chapter No.], enter the chapter number from which to start num-
bering with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
You can enter between 1 and 9999 for the chapter number from which to start
numbering.
D Press [First Printing Number], enter the page number from which to start printing with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
E When page designation is complete, press [OK].

F Press [OK] twice.
Note
To change the number entered in steps B-D, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop}
125
Copying
Image Repeat
The original image is copied repeatedly.
There are two ways to specify an image to be repeated.
Whole Area Repeat

Repeatedly copies the entire image.
Specified Area Repeat
Repeatedly copies a specified portion of the image.
Reference
Whole Area Repeat

Repeatedly copies the entire image.
The number of repeated images depends on the original size, copy paper size,
and reproduction ratio. For example, see the following table:
Original: A5K/Copy paper: A4K or Original: A5L/Copy paper A4L, Original:

51/2" 81/2"K/Copy paper: 81/2" 11"K or Original: 51/2" 81/2"L/Copy paper:
81/2" 11"L
4 repeats (65%)
Repeat1
126
16 repeats (32%)
Repeat2
Copier Functions
Original: A5K/Copy paper: A4L or Original: A5L/Copy paper A4K, Original:

51/2" 81/2"K/Copy paper: 81/2" 11"L or Original: 51/2" 81/2"L/Copy paper:
81/2" 11"K
2 repeats (100%)
8 repeats (50%)
32 repeats (25%)
2
Repeat3
Repeat4
Repeat5
A Select the size of copy paper and the reproduction ratio.

C Press [Edit Image].

D Press [Image Repeat].
E Make sure that [Whole Area] is selected, and then press [OK].
F Press [OK].
G Place your original, and then press the {Start} key.
Specified Area Repeat
Repeatedly copies a specified portion of the image.
Determine the location of the area's base point and its length and width.
GCRE032E
Set on the exposure glass
Important
You cannot use this function from the ADF.
127
Copying
A Measure the location of the base point (X1, Y1) and its length and width (X2,
Y2) for the area of the image repeatedly copied.

You can set any value in the range of X1: 0-412 mm (0"-16.2"), X2: 20-432 mm
(0.8"-17.0"), Y1: 0-277 mm (0"-10.8"), and Y2: 20-297 mm (0.8"-11.6").
B Select the size of copy paper and the reproduction ratio.

C Press [Edit / Color].
D Press [Edit Image].
E Press [Image Repeat].
F Press [Specified Area].
G Enter the length of [X1] with number keys, and then press the {q} key.
H Enter the length of [Y1] with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
I Enter the length of [X2] with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
J Enter the length of [Y2] with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
K Press [OK] twice.
L Place the original on the exposure glass, and then press the {Start} key.
128
Copier Functions
Double Copies
One original image is copied twice on one copy as shown.
Important
See the following table for original and copy paper sizes when using a 100%
ratio:
Metric version
AMG015S
Inch version
AMG016S
129
Copying
2
B Press [Edit Image].
C Press [Double Copies].
D Press [OK].
Reference
Centering
You can make copies with the image moved to the center of the copy paper.
GCCNTR0E
Important
The paper sizes and directions for centering are listed below.
130
Copier Functions
Metric version
Original placed on:
Exposure glass
ADF

81/2" 11"KL, 8" 13"L, 8KL, 16KKL
Inch version
Original placed on:
Exposure glass
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
ADF
A3L, A4KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL,

51/2" 81/2"KL, 10" 14"L, 71/4" 101/2"L
A Select the paper size.

C Press [Edit Image].

D Press [Centering].
E Press [OK].
131
Copying
Positive/Negative
Copies an image inverted. If your original is black and white, copy images are
inverted. If your original is color, the density, darkness and brightness of each
color will be reversed and inverted to complimentary colors.
GCHATN1E

C Press [Positive / Negative].
D Press [OK].
132
Copier Functions
Mirror
Copies by reversing the image from left to right, as reflected in a mirror.
GCMILL1J

C Press [Mirror Image].
D Press [OK].
133
Copying
Covers
You can use this function to create cover sheets by adding additional pages of
different paper, or copying existing pages onto different paper.
Important
Before using this function, set the special paper tray for cover sheets.
You cannot select the bypass tray for the copy paper.
The Covers function includes Front Cover and Front/Back Covers.
Front Cover
The first page of your originals is copied on specific paper sheet for covers, or
a cover sheet is inserted before the first copy.
Copy
Blank
134
Copier Functions
Front/Back Covers
The first and last pages of your original are copied on specific paper for use
as covers, or a cover sheet is inserted before the first copy and after the last
copy.
Copy
2
AMF085S
Blank
A Set the tray for the front cover paper.

The cover sheet should be the same size and orientation as the copy paper.
B Press [Cover/Slip Sheet].
C Select [Copy] or [Blank] for the cover sheet, and then press [OK].
D Select the paper tray that contains the sheet paper to copy the originals.
E Place your originals in the ADF, and then press the {Start} key.
Reference
135
Copying
Designate
Use this function to have certain pages of your original copied onto slip sheets
or to insert a slip sheet for each page specified.
Important
Before using this function, set the special paper tray for slip sheets.
The slip sheets should be the same size and orientation as the copy paper.
You cannot place the copy paper in the bypass tray.
A Press [Cover/Slip Sheet].
B Press [Designate / Chapter].

C Select [Designate: Copy] or [Designate: Blank].
D Press the key to select the chapter number.
To select pages 11 to 20 (chapter), press [11-20].
E Enter the page location of the first page of the chapter with the number
F To specify another page location, repeat steps D to E.

Up to 20 pages can be specified.
G Select the paper tray that contains the sheet paper to copy the originals.
H When you finish specifying pages, press [OK] twice.
136
Copier Functions
I Place your originals in the ADF, and then press the {Start} key.
Reference
Chapters
The page locations you specify with this function will appear on the front of copy sheets.
GCSHOWOJ
Important
Before selecting this function, press [Dup./Combine/Series] and select 1 Sided
2 Sided or Combine.
This function can be used only when you use the Duplex (1 Sided2 Sided)
or Combine function.
B Press [Designate / Chapter].

C Press [Chapter].
D Press the key to select the chapter number.
To select chapters 11 to 20, press [11-20].
E Enter the page location of the first page of the chapter with the number
You can specify the pages up to 20.
137
Copying
F To specify another page location, repeat steps D to E.

G Select the paper.
H When page designation is complete, [OK] twice.
I Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Slip Sheets
Every time an original page changes, a slip sheet is inserted. You can also print
on the inserted slip sheet.
Since a slip sheet is inserted for every page, you can protect printed surfaces.
This function is useful in copying OHP transparencies.
Important
If [1 Sided 2 Sided] is set, cancel the setting.
Before using this function, set the special paper tray for slip sheets.
Load the slip sheets in the same size and orientation as the copy paper or the
OHP transparency.
When using OHP transparencies placed in the bypass tray

Copy
Blank
138
Copier Functions
2
B Select [Copy] or [Blank] for the slip sheets, and then press [OK].
C Select the paper tray containing the sheet paper to copy the originals.
When using OHP transparencies, open the bypass tray.

Note
When setting OHP transparencies on the bypass tray, press the {q} key
and select [OHP (Transparency)] in Special Paper.
When copying OHP transparencies set on the bypass tray, if Internal Tray
1 is not selected for the output paper tray, copies are delivered to it.
Reference
See p.37 When Copying onto OHP Transparencies or Thin Paper.
139
Copying
Storing Data in the Document Server

The Document Server enables you to store documents in the memory and print
them as you want.
Important
Data stored in the machine might be lost if some kind of failure occurs. The
manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage that might result from
the loss of data.
B Enter a file name, user name, or password if necessary.
C Press [OK].
D Place the originals.
E Make the scanning settings for the original.
140
Storing Data in the Document Server

Stores scanned originals in memory and makes one set of copies.
Note
To stop scanning, press the {Clear/Stop} key. To resume a paused scanning
job, press [Continue] in the confirmation display. To delete scanned images
and cancel the job, press [Stop]. The originals placed in the ADF are delivered.
When placing an original on the exposure glass, press the {q} key after
all the originals have been scanned.
Data stored in the Document Server is set to be deleted after three days by
the factory default. You can specify the period after which the stored data
is deleted automatically. For details about changing settings, see Administrator Tools, General Settings Guide.
To check if the document has been stored, press the {Document Server} key.
If you want to store another document, do so after copying is complete.
For details about the Document Server, see Document Server.
For details about printing stored documents, see Printing a Stored Document.
For details about setting user name, file name, and password, see Storing
Data.
Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead
of [User Name]. For details about specifying [Access Privileges], consult the
administrator.
Reference
See p.147 Document Server.
See p.152 Using the Document Server.

See p.162 Printing a Stored Document.
See p.152 Storing Data.
141
Copying
Programs
You can store the frequently used copy job settings in the machine memory and
recall them for future use.
You can store up to 10 programs.
Note
When a specified program is registered as the default, its values become the
default settings, which are displayed without pressing the {Program} key,
when modes are cleared or reset, and after the operation switch is turned on.
See Programming Defaults in Initial Display.
Paper settings are stored based on paper size. So if you place more than one
paper tray of the same size, the paper tray prioritized with User Tools (System Settings) will be selected first. See Tray Paper Settings, General Settings
Guide.
Programs are not deleted by turning the power off or by pressing the {Clear
Modes} key.
Reference
See p.146 Programming Defaults in Initial Display.
142
Programs
Storing a Program
Stores a program.
A Edit the copy settings so all functions you want to store in this program are
selected.
B Press the {Program} key.
AQI035S
C Press [Program].
D Press the program number you want to store.

E Enter the program name with the letter keys on the display panel.
You can enter up to 34 characters.
143
Copying
F Press [OK].
The screen returns to the program screen, showing the program number followed by the program name. The screen returns to the initial copy display after a short time.
Note
Program numbers with m against them already have settings made for
them.
Changing a Stored Program

Changes program settings.
A Check the program settings.

B Set the contents of a program.
C Press the {Program} key.
D Press [Program].
E Press the program number you want to change.
F Press [Yes].
G Enter the program name.
You can enter up to 34 characters.
H Press [OK].
The screen returns to the program screen, showing the program number followed by the program name. The screen returns to the initial copy display after a short time.
Note
When you want to check the contents of a program, recall the program.
When it is overwritten, the previous program is deleted.

Reference
See p.145 Recalling a Program.
144
Programs
Deleting a Program
Erases the contents of program.
A Press the {Program} key.

B Press [Delete].
C Press the program number you want to delete.

D Press [Yes].
The program is deleted, and the display returns to the initial copy display.
Recalling a Program
Recalls a stored program to make copies using the stored settings.
A Press the {Program} key.

B Press [Recall].
C Press the program number you want to recall.

The stored settings are displayed.

Note
Only programs with m against them contain a program in step C.
145
Copying
Programming Defaults in Initial Display

This section describes how to program defaults for the initial display when
modes are cleared or reset, or immediately after the operation switch is turned
on.
The default settings you can program are Color Mode, Paper Tray, Original
Type, Density, Special Original, Original Orientation, Cover/Slip Sheet, Edit /
Color, Dup./Combine/Series, Reduce / Enlarge, and Finishing.
A Specify scan settings and any other settings you require in the initial display.
C Press [Program as Defaults].
D Press [Program].
E When a confirmation dialog appears, press [Yes].
The current settings are programmed as defaults. The screen returns to the
initial display.
Note
To restore the factory default settings on the initial display, press [Restore
Factory Defaults].
The default settings can be programmed separately for the normal screen
and simplified display screens.
146
3. Document Server
Using the Document Server enables you to store documents being read with the copy feature
on the hard disk of this machine. Thus you can print them later applying necessary conditions.
Relationship between Document Server

and Other Functions
State of the Document Server varies depending on the function used.
Copier Functions
Storing method: Copy/Document Server
List display: Available
Printing: Available
Transmission: Unavailable
Printer Functions
Storing method: Personal computer
Printing: Available
Transmission: Unavailable
Fax Functions
Storing method: Fax
Printing: Available
Transmission: Available
Transmission is done by use of the stored document transmission of the fax feature.
Scanner Functions
Storing method: Scanner
List display: Unavailable
When documents are stored with the scanner feature, you can confirm
them from the scanner feature screen.
Printing: Unavailable
Transmission: Available
Transmission is done by use of the stored document transmission of the scanner feature.
Reference
See Sending Stored Documents, Facsimile Reference.
See Displaying the List of Stored Files, Scanner Reference.

See Sending a Stored File, Scanner Reference.
147
Document Server
Document Server Display

Following explains the screens and icons displayed in the Document Server
function.
Document Server initial display
AMG064S
1. The operational status or message

is displayed.
2. The currently selected screen's title is displayed.

3. The number of the originals being read with the memory as well as
the number of paper set and copied
are displayed.
148
4. Keys for the operation are displayed.

5. An icon that corresponds to the
storing function and the color mode
selected is displayed.
Relationship between Document Server and Other Functions
The list display of the Document Server shows the following icons depending on
the storing function and the color mode selected:
Function
Copying
Facsimile
Printer
Icons
Color icons
Full color
Black and white
3
Note
All the stored documents may not be displayed depending on the security
function specified.
149
Document Server
Simplified Display
This section explains how to use the Simplified Display and introduces its
keys.
You can view the simplified display from the Document Server's initial screen
by pressing the {Simplified Display} key.
The simplified display contains main functions only.
Characters and keys are enlarged on this screen, making for easier operation.
AQI031S
Simplified Document Server Screen
AMG065S
1. [Key Color]
by changing the color of the keys.
Not available on the Document Server
default display.
Note
Press the {Simplified Display} key again to return to the Document Server default screen.
The simplified display screen does not contain every available key.
150
Relationship between Document Server and Other Functions
Preview Display
Following explains the preview display displaying procedure and the items displayed on this screen.
The Preview Display appears after scanning completes. You can also display
stored documents on the preview display. For details, see Displaying the List
of Stored Files, Scanner Reference.
The preview display denotes the screen that allows confirming contents of the
scanned documents.
Preview Display
AMG066S
1. [][][][]
5. Display Page
Used to move the portion to be displayed.
Used to display the currently opened

page number, total number of pages,
page size and the color mode selected.
2. [Zoom Out], [Zoom In]

Used to scale up or down the document
to be displayed.
3. [Exit]
6. [Switch]
Used to turn the page of the selected document.
Used to exit the preview display.
7. Display Position
4. Display File
When the image is enlarged, the position

on the document is displayed.
Used to display the document name.

[Switch] is displayed on the preview
screen for the stored documents. It is
used to switch the document to be displayed in the preview.
Note
When the preview is already selected from another function, the preview
screen function may become unusable.
The preview display is also not available when the paper size is larger than A3.
Reference
See Displaying the List of Stored Files, Scanner Reference.
151
Document Server
Using the Document Server

Following describes how to use the Document Server.
Storing Data
Following describes the procedure for storing documents on the Document
Server.
Important
Data stored in the machine might be lost if some kind of failure occurs. The
manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage resulting from loss of
data.
When entering your password or recording it to your notebook or like, be

sure to protect it from being seen by others. Care must also be exercised for
safe keeping of its recording paper.
Enter the password in the range of four and eight digits.
It is advisable not to use the same number such as 0000 or continuous numbers such as 1234 for your password. These numbers are imagine fully and
they do not provide sufficient security.
When you have selected a document using a correct password, it remains being selected after the operation is finished. As is, therefore, the document is
left operable to those who don't know the password. After the operation, be
sure to press the {Clear Modes} key to cancel the selected state of the document.
User names registered to the stored documents of the Document Server are
used for identifying the documents' authors and the nature of the documents.
They don't function as a protective means of confidential documents.
When turning on the fax transmission or scanning by the scanner, make sure
that all other operations are ended.
File Name
A document name such as COPY0001 and COPY0002 is automatically attached to the scanned document. You can change the document name.
User Name
You can specify the user name so that the person or department that has
stored the document can be identified. Two approaches are available in specifying the user name. One is specifying the name being registered from the
Address Book Management and the other is entering another name.
Password
You can specify a password for a document to be stored. When a password is
set for a document, you are to enter that password for printing the document.
Above arrangement prevents unauthorized printing of the document. A key
mark will be attached to the document for which a password has been set.
152
AQI037S
B Press [Scan Original].
C Above operation sets up the user name, document name and password.
When not changing a document name, the name will be automatically set.
D Set the original.

E Specify the original scanning conditions.

The original is scanned. The document is saved in the Document Server.
153
Document Server
Note
When interrupting the scan, press the {Clear/Stop} key. Pressing [Continue]
from the confirmation screen resumes the scan. Pressing [Stop] deletes the
scanned images and the original on the automatic document feeder (ADF)
will be ejected.
As a password is set, the key mark will be displayed on the left side of the
document.
As scan of the document is completed, a list will be displayed. If the list
does not appear, press [Scanning Complete].
According to the factory default, the documents stored on the Document
Server are deleted three days (72 hours) after the storing date. You can cancel the automatic document deletion or select other period than three days
for the automatic deletion. See Administrator Tools, General Settings
Guide.
When storing a document, which is not to be automatically deleted, in the
Document Server, specify [Off] for Auto Delete File in Document Server
before storing the document. If you specify [On] for Auto Delete File in
Document Server after that, Auto Delete File in Document Server will be
enabled for the documents being stored after the setting.
When storing a document in the Document Server after storing it from the
copy feature, be sure that its copy is completed.
Reference
See Administrator Tools, General Settings Guide.
To register or change a user name (When using a user name registered to the Address
Book)
Following describes the procedure for registering or changing a user name to be
attached to a stored document.
A Press [Scan Original].

B Press [User Name].
The user name input screen will appear.
154
C Select the user name and then press [OK].
To register or change a user name (When using a user name not registered to the
Address Book)

C Select the user name and then press [Manual Entry].
The user name change screen will appear.
D Enter the user name and then press [OK] twice.

To register or change a user name (When no name is registered to the Address Book)

The user name input screen will appear.
C Press [Manual Entry].

D Enter the user name and then press [OK].
155
Document Server
To change a file name

Following describes the procedure for changing a name to be attached to a
stored document.

B Press [File Name].
The document name change screen will appear.
C Press [Delete All] to delete the document name to be automatically set.

D Enter document name and then press [OK].
Note
In Step C, pressing [Backspace] allows you to delete up to any desired location.
You can enter up to 20 characters for a document name. In the list, however,
up to 16 characters are displayed as the document name. If above limits are
exceeded, the list will display up to 15 characters for the document name.
156
To set or change a password

Following describes the procedure for setting or changing a password to be attached to a stored document.

B Press [Password].
C Enter the password from the number keys and then press [OK].
You can use four to eight digits for specifying the password.
D For double-check, enter the password again and then press [OK].
Changing User Name, File Name or Password of a Stored
Document
Following describes the procedure for changing a user name, document name or
password.

B Select the document whose user name, document name or password is to
be changed.
When a password is set, enter it and then press [OK].

157
Document Server
D Press [Change User Name], [Change File Name] or [Change Password].
E From the respective change screens, enter the new user name, document
name or password and then press [OK].
F Press [OK].
Note
administrator.
Checking the Details of a Stored Document

Following describes the procedure for displaying details of a stored document.

B Select the document whose details are to be displayed.
158
C Press [Details].
Details of the document will be displayed.
3
Note
If you have selected multiple documents, press [U] or [T] to view their information.
Pressing [Exit] restores the document selection screen.
Searching for a Stored Document

Following describes the procedure for searching a stored document from user
name or document name.
You can rearrange the currently chronologically ordered documents in any desired order.
To search by file name

Searches for stored documents by file name.
To search by user name
Searches for stored documents by user name.
Note
Installing DeskTopBinder Lite enables search and reordering of stored documents from PC.
Reference
For details about DeskTopBinder Lite, see Instruction Manual and Help of
DeskTopBinder Lite.
159
Document Server
To search by file name

Following describes the procedure for searching a stored document from the
document name.

C Enter the document name to be searched and then press [OK].

A document name that matches completely from the starting character will
be searched and displayed on the document selection screen.
Note
Pressing [Display All] displays ever stored document.
To search by user name

Following describes the procedure for searching a stored document from the
user name.

C When specifying a registered user name, select the user name.

When using a not-registered user name, proceed to the next step.
160
D When the user name is not registered, press [Manual Entry] and then enter the
user name from the input screen to be displayed. Then press [OK].
3
E Press [OK].
A document name that matches completely from the starting character will
be searched and displayed on the document selection screen.
Note
Pressing [Display All] displays ever stored document.
161
Document Server
Printing a Stored Document

Following describes the procedure for printing a stored document.
Using Web Image Monitor allows you to print a document stored in the Document Server from your PC.

B Select the document to be printed.
C When printing two or more documents at a time, repeat the operation in

step B.
Up to 30 documents can be printed.
D When specifying printing conditions, press [To Printing Screen].

The printing condition screen will appear. User name of the document, document name and the order of printing of this document will be displayed.
E Enter the number of print copies from the number keys.
Up to 999 copies are specifiable.

Printing will be started.
162
Note
You can search the target document using, in step B, [User Name] or [File
Name] situated in the left side of the screen.
Some of the selected documents may not be printed due to the difference
in the size or resolution.
When changing the printing order, cancel the highlight and then specify
the order correctly.
Pressing the {Clear Modes} key cancels every selection.
Pressing [Order] displays the selected documents in the printing order.
The copy and printer features hold the specified printing conditions after
the operation is over and apply them at the next printing. The fax feature
does not have the function of storing the printing conditions.
When two or more documents are specified, the printing conditions are
stored on the first document but not on the succeeding documents.
Following settings are available for the printing conditions. For respective
printing results, see Copier Functions.
Book binding style (2 Sided Top to Top, 2 Sided Top to Bottom, Magazine, Booklet)
Treatment of front cover (Cover/Slip Sheet, Edit / Stamp)
Finish (Sort, Rotate Sort, Stack, Staple, Punch)
When printing two or more copies while selecting the sort function, you
can confirm the finish by printing only one copy.
When printing two or more documents at a time, you can print them as a
single continuous document by specifying the order of their printing.
When printing two or more documents at a time, the printing conditions
set for the first document are applied to all the remaining documents.
When two or more documents are selected, pressing [U][T] allows you to
confirm the user name, document name and printing order of the document selected in step B.
Pressing [Select File] restores the document selection screen.
The Stamp function is not specifiable to the documents being stored from
the fax feature.
Reference
See p.57 Copier Functions
When interrupting printing

Following describes the procedure for interrupting printing work.
A Press the {Clear/Stop} key.

B Press [Stop].
163
Document Server
Changing number of print copies while printing is in progress

Following describes the procedure for changing the number of print copies after
printing is started.
Important
This feature is enabled when the sort function is selected in the printing conditions.

B Press [Change Quantity].
C Enter the number of print copies anew from the number keys.
D Press the {q} key.
E Press [Continue].
Printing will be resumed.

Note
The range of print copies enterable in step C depends on the timing of your
pressing the {Clear/Stop} key.
Sample Print
When print copies are massive, you can print a single copy in advance to check
appropriateness of the printing order of the selected documents and the printing
conditions.
Important
This feature is enabled when the sort function is selected in the printing conditions.
A Select the document to be printed.
B Press the {Sample Copy} key.

Only one copy will be printed.
164
C Press [Continue].
Printing will be resumed.
Note
You can search the target document using, in step A, [User Name] or [File
In the display order field of step A, you can sort the documents by [User
Name], [File Name], or [Date]. Press the item to be used for the sorting.
When canceling the selection in step A, press the highlighted document
again.
When canceling the printing, press [Suspend]. The print screen will appear,
enabling to set another item.
Printing the first page

In order to confirm the print results, you can print the first page alone of the document selected from the document selection screen.
When two or more documents are selected, the first page of the respective documents is printed.
A Select the document to be printed (confirmed).

B Press [Print Specified Page].

C Press [1st Page].

Note
again.
165
Document Server
Printing a specified page

You can print the specified page alone of the document selected from the document selection screen.
When two or more documents are selected, the specified page of the respective
documents is printed.


C Press [Specified Page].
D Specify the page to be printed from the number keys and then press the
{q} key.
E Press the {Start} key.

Note
again.
166
Printing a specified range

You can print the pages in the specified range alone of the document selected
from the document selection screen.
When two or more documents are selected, pages in the specified range of the
respective documents are printed.


C Press [Specify Range].
D Specify the printing start page from the number keys and then press the
{q} key.
E Specify the printing end page from the number keys and then press the
{q} key.

Note
again.
167
Document Server
Deleting a Document
Following describes the procedure for deleting a stored document.
Important
The Document Server can store up to 1000 documents. As the number of
stored documents reaches 1000, storing of a new document becomes unavailable. Thus, you should delete unnecessary documents as much as practicable.

B Select the document to be deleted.
C Press [Delete File].
D Press [Yes].
Note
You can delete the stored documents at a time. See Administrator Tools,
Using Web Image Monitor allows you to print a document stored in the
Document Server from your PC.
It is also possible to select two or more documents and delete them.
You can search the target document using, [File Name] or [User Name] situated in the left side of the screen.
In the display order field, you can sort the documents by [User Name], [File
Name], or [Date]. Press the item to be used for the sorting.
When you could not identify the target document from the document
name, print the first page alone of the document in order to confirm the
print results.
When canceling your selection, press the highlighted document again.
Reference
See Administrator Tools, General Settings Guide.
168
For the Web Image Monitor starting procedure, see p.169 Displaying a
Document in Document Server with Web Image Monitor.
Displaying a Document in Document Server with Web Image

Monitor
Following describes the procedure for confirming contents of a stored document
on the PC screen by use of Web Image Monitor.
A Start a Web browser.

B Enter http:// (IPv4 address of this machine) / to the address.
Top page of Web Image Monitor will be displayed.
C Click [Document Server].

The list of documents in the Document Server will be displayed.
D Click
of the document you want to confirm.

Information of the document will be displayed.
E Confirm contents of the document.

Note
You can change the document list display format in step C. Click the
(Thumbnails),
(Icons), or
(Details).
When you want to enlarge the preview display in step E, click [Enlarge Image].
169
Document Server
Downloading Stored Documents

Following describes the procedure for downloading a stored document to the
PC by use of Web Image Monitor.
Important
When downloading a document stored with the copy feature, you must prepare the extended data conversion board.

B Enter http://(IPv4 address of this machine)/ to the address.
Top page of Web Image Monitor will be displayed.
C Click [Document Server].

The list of documents in the Document Server will be displayed.
D Click of the document you want to download.

E Select [PDF] or [Multi-page TIFF] for the file format.
The data will be downloaded.
F Click [OK].
Note
You can change the document list display format in step C. Click the
(Thumbnails),
(Icons), or
(Details).
In step E, you cannot select [Multi-page TIFF] for a document being stored
with the copy or printer.
When downloading a document with [Multi-page TIFF] in step E, you must
prepare a Printer/Scanner Unit and File Format Converter.
170
4. Appendix
Following describes the copy machine's specifications and the function compatibility.
Function Compatibility
The combination chart given below shows which modes can be used together.
Blank space: These modes can be used together.
: These modes cannot be used together. The first mode selected will be the
mode you are working in.
: These modes cannot be used together. The second mode selected will be the
mode you are working in.
The following shows the combinations of functions:
AQI017S
171
Appendix
AQI018S
*1
*2
When 2 Sided 1 Sided is specified, the combination with the front cover or slip
sheet (Designate) is .
Combination of Staple: Top 1 and Punch: Left is .
Combination of Staple: Left 2 and Punch: Top is .
Combination of Staple: Center and Punch: Left/Punch:Top is .
172
Supplementary Information
Following describes the detailed specifications of the respective functions.
Mixed Size mode

Since small originals may not be correctly aligned with the original guide,
the copy image may be slanted.
You can place originals of two different sizes at a time.
Copying speed and scanning speed will be reduced.
Bypass Tray Copy
The following paper sizes can be selected as the standard sizes:
A3L, A4KL, A5KL, A6L, B4 JISL, B5 JISKL, B6 JISL, 12" 18"L,
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/4" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"L,
71/4" 101/2"KL, 8" 13"L, 81/2" 13"L, 81/4" 13"L, 11" 15"L,
10" 14"L, 8" 10"L, 8KL, 16KKL, 91/2" 41/2"K, 71/2" 37/8"K,
C6 EnvK, C5 EnvK, DL EnvK
When the beeper is turned off, it will not sound if you insert paper into the
bypass tray. See System Settings, General Settings Guide.
Preset Reduce/Enlarge
You can select one of 12 preset ratios (5 enlargement ratios, 7 reduction ratios).
Following shows the relation between the original's size and copied-to paper size at respective scaling factors.
Metric version
400% (Area ratio 16 times):200% (Area ratio 4 times): A5 A3, B6 JIS B4 JIS
141% (Area ratio 2 times): A4 A3, A5 A4, B5 JIS B4 JIS, B6 JIS B5 JIS
122%: A4 B4 JIS, A5 B5 JIS
115%: B4 JIS A3, B5 JIS A4, B6 JIS A5
93%:82%: B4 JIS A4, B5 JIS A5
75%: B4 JISF4, B4 JISF
71% (Area ratio 1/2times): A3 A4, A4 A5, B4 JIS B5 JIS, B5 JIS B6 JIS
65%: A3F
50% (Area ratio 1/4times): A3 A5, B4 JIS B6 JIS
25%:-
173
Appendix
Inch version
400% (Area ratio 16 times): 200% (Area ratio 4 times): 51/2" 81/2"11" 17"
155% (Area ratio 2 times): 51/2" 81/2"81/2" 14"
129%: 81/2" 11"11" 17"
121%: 81/2" 14"11" 17"
93%: 85%: F81/2" 11"
78%: 81/2" 14"81/2" 11"
73%: 11" 15"81/2" 11"
65%: 11" 17"81/2" 11"
50% (Area ratio 1/4times): 11" 17"51/2" 81/2"
25%: You can select a ratio regardless of the size of an original or copy paper.
With some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will
appear on copies.
If a Copy Data Security Unit is installed, you can select the factor from 50
to 400%.
Zoom
The reproduction ratios you can specify are 25-400%. The factor can be
from 50 to 400%, when the machine is equipped with a Copy Data Security
Unit.
You can select a ratio regardless of the size of an original or copy paper.
With some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will
appear on copies.
Size Magnification
If the calculated ratio is over the maximum or under the minimum ratio, it
is automatically adjusted to within available range. However, with some
ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will appear on
copies.
The reproduction ratios you can specify are 25-400%. If the machine is
equipped with a Copy Data Security Unit, the range is from 50 to 400%.
Directional Size Magnification
The reproduction ratio you can specify are 25-400%. If the machine is
When entering a percentage ratio, you can specify any value in the permitted range, regardless of original or copy paper size. However, depending
on settings and other conditions, part of the image may not be copied, or
margins will appear on copies.
When entering a size in mm, if the calculated ratio is over the maximum or
under the minimum ratio, it is automatically adjusted to within available
range. However, with some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied
or margins will appear on copies.
174
Sort, Rotate Sort, Stack

Following shows the stackable paper sizes and the orientation.
SR790
12" 18"L, A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL, 11" 17"L,
81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"L, 71/4" 101/2"KL,
8" 13"L, 81/2" 13"KL, 81/2" 13"L, 8KL, 16KKL
12" 18"L, A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL, B6 JISL,
A6L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"L,
71/4" 101/2"KL, 8" 13"L, 81/2" 13"KL, 81/2" 13"L, 8KL,
16KKL
Finisher SR3030
12" 18"L, A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL, B6 JISL,
A6L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"L,
71/4" 101/2"KL, 8" 13"L, 81/2" 13"KL, 81/2" 13"L, 8KL,
16KKL
Paper sizes and orientations that can be used in the Rotate Sort function are
A4KL, B5 JISKL and 81/2" 11"KL.
The number of copies that can be placed on the tray is as follows. When the
number of copies exceeds capacity, remove copies from the tray.
Internal tray
A4, 81/2" 11" or smaller: 500 sheets
B4 JIS, 81/2" 14" or larger: 250 sheets
Internal tray 2
125 sheets
SR790 (Finisher upper tray)
SR790 (On the Finisher shift tray, stack unstapled paper)
SR790 (On the Finisher shift tray, stack stapled paper)
A4K, 81/2" 11"K: 10 to 50-leaf binding...100 to 20 copies, 2 to 9-leaf
binding...100 copies
A4L, B5 JISL, 81/2" 11"L: 10 to 50-leaf binding...50 to 10 copies, 2 to
9-leaf binding...100 copies
A3L, B4 JISL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 12" 18"L: 10 to 30-leaf binding...50 to 10 copies, 2 to 9-leaf binding...50 copies
Booklet Finisher SR3020 (Finisher tray)
175
Appendix
Booklet Finisher SR3020 (On the Finisher tray 2, stack unstapled paper)
A4K, 81/2" 11"K: 2000 sheets
A3L, A4L, B4 JISL, B5 JISKL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"L, 12" 18"L: 1000 sheets
A5K: 500 sheets
A5L, B6 JISL, 51/2" 81/2"L, A6L: 100 sheets
Booklet Finisher SR3020 (On the Finisher tray 2, stack stapled paper)
A4K, 81/2" 11"K: 13 to 50-leaf binding150 to 40 copies, 2 to 12-leaf
binding150 copies
A4L, B5 JISKL, 81/2" 11"L: 10 to 50-leaf binding100 to 20 copies,
2 to 9-leaf binding100 copies
A3L, B4 JISL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 12" 18"L: 10 to 30-leaf binding100 to 33 copies, 2 to 9-leaf binding100 copies
When using the mixed size mode: 2 to 30-leaf binding50 copies
Booklet Finisher SR3020 (Booklet tray)
12" 18"L, A3L, B4 JISL, A4L, B5 JISL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"L: 2 to 5-leaf binding30 copies, 6 to 10-leaf binding15
copies, 11 to 15-leaf binding10 copies
Finisher SR3030 (Finisher tray)
Finisher SR3030 (On the Finisher tray 2, stack unstapled paper)
A4K, 81/2" 11"K: 3000 sheets
A3L, A4L, B4 JISL, B5 JISKL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"L, 12" 18"L: 1500 sheets
A5K: 500 sheets
A5L, B6 JISL, 51/2" 81/2"L, A6L: 100 sheets
Finisher SR3030 (On the Finisher tray 2, stack stapled paper)
binding150 copies
When using the Rotate Sort or Staple functions, the capacity may be reduced.
Installing the finisher to the internal tray also reduces the number of paper
it can house.
176
Staple
The following type of paper cannot be stapled:
Postcard
Translucent paper
OHP transparencies
Label paper (adhesive labels)
Curled paper
Paper of low stiffness
Paper of mixed sizes
In the following cases, copies will be delivered to the shift tray without stapling:
When the number of sheets for one set is over stapler capacity.
When memory reaches 0% during copying.
When using the Staple function with [1 Sided 1 Sided], [1 Sided 2 Sided],
[2 Sided 1 Sided], [2 Sided 2 Sided], or [Double Copies], select K original
for L and L original for K copy.
When using the Staple function with [1 sided Comb 2 orig], [1 sided 2
sided:TtoB], [1 sided 2 sided:TtoT], or [Double Copies], select K paper for L
original and L for K original.
When using the Staple function [Staple: Left 2] or [Staple: Top 2] with the
Combine function [1 Sided 1 Sided], [1 Sided 2 Sided], [2 Sided 1 Sided],
[2 Sided 2 Sided], or [Double Copies], select K paper for L original and L
paper for K original.
If a finisher is installed, the mixed size mode and the auto paper selection
function become available. These functions make it possible to choose the
paper appropriate for stapling from the mixed sizes. Prior to the operation,
you should set on the feed tray the paper of the size to be used. Following
sizes allow the stapling when mixed with other sizes.
A3L and A4K
B4 JISL and B5 JISK
11" 17"L and 81/2" 11"K
Paper sizes and orientation that can be used in the Staple function and the
stapler capacity are as follows:
SR790
12" 18"L, A3L, B4 JISL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/4" 14"L,
8" 13"L, 81/2" 13"L, 81/4" 13"L, 11" 15"L, 10" 14"L, 8KL: 30
sheets
A4KL, B5 JISKL, 81/2" 11"KL, 71/4" 101/2"KL, 8" 10"L,
16KKL: 50 sheets
177
Appendix

12" 18"L, A3L, B4 JISL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/4" 14"L,
8" 13"L, 81/2" 13"L, 81/4" 13"L, 11" 15"L, 10" 14"L,
8" 10"L, 8KL: 30 sheets
A4KL, B5 JISKL, 81/2" 11"KL, 71/4" 101/2"KL, 16KKL: 50
sheets
When using the mixed size mode: 30 sheets
When stapling center: 12" 18"L, A3L, B4 JISL, A4L, B5 JISL,
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"L: 15 sheets
Finisher SR3030
12" 18"L, A3L, B4 JISL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/4" 14"L,
8" 13"L, 81/2" 13"L, 81/4" 13"L, 11" 15"L, 10" 14"L,
8" 10"L, 8KL: 30 sheets
A4KL, B5 JISKL, 81/2" 11"KL, 71/4" 101/2"KL, 16KKL: 50
sheets
When using the mixed size mode: 30 sheets
When stapling B4 JISL, A3L, Legal 81/2" 14"L, 11" 17"L, 12" 18"L,
be sure to extend the paper support plate of the finisher tray.
When the number of copies exceeds tray capacity, copying stops. If this
happens, remove the copies from the shift tray, and then resume copying.
The tray capacity for the stapled sheets is as follows: (paper weight: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
SR790 (Finisher shift tray)
A4K, 81/2" 11"K: 10 to 50-leaf binding...100 to 20 copies, 2 to 9-leaf
binding...100 copies
A4L, B5 JISL, 81/2" 11"L: 10 to 50-leaf binding...50 to 10 copies, 2 to
9-leaf binding...100 copies
A3L, B4L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 12" 18"L: 10 to 30-leaf binding...50 to 10 copies, 2 to 9-leaf binding...50 copies
binding150 copies
When stapling center: 12" 18"L, A3L, B4 JISL, A4L, B5 JISL,
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"L: 2 to 5-leaf binding30 copies,
6 to 10-leaf binding15 copies, 11 to 15-leaf binding10 copies
Finisher SR3030
binding150 copies
178
You cannot change stapling positions during copying.

When the original image is rotated, the staple orientation changes by 90.
The maximum original image size that can be rotated is as follows: Metric
version: A4, Inch version: 81/2" 11"
When using [Staple: Slant], [Staple: Bottom Slant], [Staple: Left 2], or [Staple: Top
2] with Combine, Double copies or Auto Reduce / Enlarge function,
"Blank part will appear. Check orientation." message may appear depending on the orientation of originals and paper you placed. In
this case, change the paper orientation.
When [Staple: Left 2], or [Staple: Top 2] is selected, the following settings are
useful to rotate images appropriately:
[Auto Reduce / Enlarge] or [Auto Paper Select]
Replace [Auto Tray Switching] with [With Image Rotation] in the User Tool's
If you select [Staple: Center] with the optional booklet finisher, the machine
staples and folds the paper in the center, then delivers the paper folded.
If you select [Staple: Center] from the Booklet or Magazine function, the machine staples the paper, and folds it like a book, then delivers the paper
folded.
Punch
When using Punch and Combine, Double Copies, or Auto Reduce/Enlarge, the message "Blank part will appear. Check orientation."
may appear because of the orientation of the original and the copy paper.
If this occurs, change the orientation of the copy paper.
Since punch holes are made in each copy, the punch hole positions vary
slightly.
Punchable paper sizes are as follows:
2 and 3 holes type (2 holes)
A3L, B4 JISL, A4LK, B5 JISKL, A5KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/4" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL, 71/4" 101/2"KL, 81/2" 13"L,
81/4" 13"L, 8" 13"L, 51/2" 81/2"L, 11" 15"L, 10" 14"L,
8" 10"L, 8KL, 16KKL
2 and 3 holes type (3 holes)
A3L, B4 JISL, A4K, B5 JISK, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 11"K,
71/4" 101/2"K, 11" 15"L, 10" 14"L, 8KL, 16KK
179
Appendix
Duplex
You can use the following copy paper with this function:
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5K, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/4" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL, 71/4" 101/2"KL, 8" 13"L, 81/2" 13"L,
81/4" 13"L, 11" 15"L, 10" 14"L, 8" 10"L, 8KL, 16KKL
You cannot use the following copy paper with this function:
Paper smaller than A5, 51/2" 81/2"
Translucent paper
Label paper (adhesive labels)
OHP transparencies
Paper thicker than 105 g/m2, 28 lb.
Paper thinner than 64 g/m2, 17 lb.
Postcards
When an odd number of originals are placed in the ADF, the back of the
last page of copied paper is blank.
During copying, the image is shifted to allow for the binding margin.
Combine
In this mode, the machine selects the reproduction ratio automatically.
This reproduction ratio depends on copy paper sizes and the number of
originals.
If the calculated ratio is under the minimum ratio, it is automatically adjusted to within available range. However, with some ratios, parts of the
image might not be copied.
You cannot use custom size paper.
If the orientation of originals is different from that of the copy paper, the
machine will automatically rotate the image by 90 to make copies properly.
If the number of originals placed is less than the number specified for combining, the last page segment is left blank as shown.
180
Booklet/Magazine
The machine sets the reproduction ratio automatically to meet the paper
size and copies the originals together onto the paper.
If the calculated ratio is under the minimum ratio, it is automatically adjusted to within available range. However, with some ratios, parts of the
image might not be copied.
If the orientation of originals is different from that of the copy paper, the
machine will automatically rotate the image by 90 to make copies properly.
You cannot copy with originals different in size and orientation.
If the number of originals scanned is less than a multiple of 4, the last page
is copied blank.
In Magazine mode, the copying may take some time after scanning originals.
When the optional Booklet Finisher SR3020 is installed, if you select [Staple:
Center] in Magazine mode, the machine staples and folds the paper in the
center, then delivers the paper folded.
Image Repeat
Depending on the paper size, ratio, and orientation, parts of repeated images may not be copied.
Centering
Though the original is set to a different orientation from the paper loaded,
the machine will not rotate the image by 90 (Rotate copy).
Erase
The width of the erased margin varies depending on the reproduction ratio.
If the size of the original is different from sizes listed in the following chart,
the erased margin might be shifted:
Metric version
Exposure glass : A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL
ADF : A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL
Inch version
Exposure glass: 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
ADF: 11"17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL, 5/2" 81/2"L
The numbers appear to overlap the copied image in some cases.
Margin Adjustment
If you set a binding margin that is too wide, part of the image may not be
copied.
When making copies in Combine mode, the binding margin is added to
the copies after the combination is finished.
181
Appendix
Preset Stamp
You can change the size and density of the stamp with User Tools. Depending on the setting, density may change.
Depending on paper size, if you change the stamp size, parts of the stamp
might not be printed.
Date Stamp
When using Combine mode, the date stamp is printed as follows:
With the Combine function
AMG067S
With the Magazine or Booklet function
AMG068S
Page Numbering
When page numbering is used with Combine mode, page numbers are
printed as follows:
Page Numbering per original:
With 1 Sided/2 Sided using the Combine function
GCANPE0E
With the Magazine or Booklet function
GCANPE1E
182
Page Numbering per copy:

With 1 Sided/2 Sided using the Combine function
GCANPE2E
If you combine this function with the Duplex (Top to Top) function and select [P1,P2...] or [1/5,2/5...], page numbers on the back are printed as follows:
4
GCSTMPBE
A
B
Front
Back
Front Cover, Front/Back Cover

If Blank mode is selected, the cover will not be counted as a copy.
Front and back covers are two-sided copied depending on the settings
made in Display Time in Cover Sheet Tray of User Tools (System Settings).
At Mode Selected Depends on the setting done from Cover Sheet
Tray.
Full Time Depends on the setting done from Paper Type.
Slip Sheet
If you do not copy onto slip sheets, they are excluded from the number of
copies counted.
183
INDEX
Bypass tray, 35, 36
Bypass Tray Copy, 173
1 Sided 16 Pages to Combine 2 Sides, 89
1 Sided 2 Pages to Combine 1 Side, 87
1 Sided to 2 Sided, 83
1 Sided to Booklet, 94
1 Sided to Magazine, 94
2 Sided 1 Page to Combine 1 Side, 87
2 Sided to Booklet, 94
A
Adjust Color, vi, 47
Adjusting Colors Based on Selected Color, 54
Adjusting Copy Image Density, 57
Adjusting the background density, 51
Adjusting the contrast, 50
Adjusting the sharpness/softness, 50
Adjusting the Text/Photo sensitivity, 52
Adjusting the U.C.R., 51
Adjust U.C.R., vii, 48
Administrator Tools, 6
Auto image density, 57
Auto Paper Select, 60, 61
Auto Reduce/Enlarge, 67
184
Background Density, vii, 48

Background Numbering, v, 107, 173
Basic Procedure, 25
Batch mode, 20
Binding margin, 100
Black/White Copy, iii, 40
Booklet, 94
Booklet/Magazine, xii, xvii, 94, 173
Book to 1 Sided, 92
Book to 2 Sided, 94
Border Erase, 101, 102, 103, 105, 106
C
Center, 104, 105, 106
Center/Border Erase, 101, 105, 106
Center Erase, 101, 104
Centering, 130, 173
Changing a Stored Program, 144
Changing the Number of Sets, 75
Changing the order of jobs, 30
Changing the registered contents, 46
Changing User Name, File Name or
Password of a Stored Document, 157
Chapters, 137
Checking Job History, 32
Checking jobs in the print queue, 30
Checking the Details of a Stored Document, 158
Color Background, iii, 43
Color Balance, vi, 44
Color Functions, 40
Combine, 173
Combined auto and
manual image density, 57, 58
Contrast, vii, 48
Convert Colors, iii, 41
Copier Functions, 57, 147
Copying 2-Sided Pages, xviii
Copying 2-Sided Pages onto
1-Sided Pages, xviii
Copying from the Bypass Tray, 33
Copying onto envelopes, 39
Copying onto OHP Transparencies, 37
Copying onto Thick Paper, xviii, 38
Copying onto Thin Paper, 37
Copying originals of various sizes, 22
Copying Originals Such as Books, xvii
Covers, 134
Create Margin function, 64
Creating Colors by
Directly Specifying the Density of
Each Color with Number Keys, 55
Custom size paper, 36
Custom sizes, 24
D
Date, 118
Date Stamp, v, 116, 173
Deleting a Document, 168
Deleting a Program, 145
Deleting jobs, 31
Deleting User colors, 56
Designate, 136
Directional Magnification, 69, 70
Directional Size Magnification (Inch), 71
Display, 4
Displaying a Document in Document
Server with Web Image Monitor, 169
Document Server Display, 148
Double Copies, 129
Downloading Stored Documents, 170
Duplex, ix, 83, 173
E
Edit, 6
Erase, 101, 173
Erase Color, 42
Erase Specified Color, iii
F
Fax Functions, 147
First Printing Number, 122, 124, 125
First Printing Page, 122, 124, 125
Front/Back Covers, 134
Front & Back to 2 Sided, 94
Front Cover, 134
Front Cover, Front/Back Cover, 173
Full Color Copy, iii, 40
Function Compatibility, 171
G
General Features, 6
Generation Copy, 59
I
Image density, 57
Image Repeat, 126, 173
Initial Display, 146
Input / Output, 6
Interrupt Copy, 26
Interrupting Printing, 163
Invert, 132
J
Job List, 28
Job List screen, 29
Job Preset, 27
L
Last Number, 122, 124
Left Original Beeper, 27
M
Magazine, 94
Manual image density, 58
Manual Paper Select, 61
Map, 59
Margin Adjustment, 100, 173
Mirror, 133
Missing image area, 14
Mixed size mode, 22, 173
O
One-Sided Combine, xv, 87
Option, 3
Orientation, 111
Original orientation, 16, 78, 108, 111,
116, 119
Original orientation and completed copies, 83
Originals, 11, 14
Originals and copy orientation, 86
Original size, 23
Holding print jobs, 31

How to fold and
unfold copies to make a booklet, 94
How to fold and
unfold copies to make a magazine, 94
185
P
Page Numbering, v, 119, 121, 122, 124,
125, 173
Pale, 59
Photo, 59
Placing Originals, 11, 15
Placing Originals in the
Placing originals of different sizes, 22
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass, 17
Positive/Negative, 132
Preset Reduce/Enlarge, 63, 173
Preset Stamp, v, 108, 110, 173
Preview Display, 151
Primary Colors, vi
Printer Functions, 147
Printing a List of user colors, 56
Printing a Specified Page, 166
Printing a Stored Document, 162
Printing the First Page, 165
Program, 146
Program Color Balance, 45
Programming Defaults, 146
Programs, 142
Punch, 81
Punch hole positions, 81
R
Recalling a Program, 145
Reflect, 133
Registering the adjusted color balance, 45
Regular sizes, 23
Renaming a Color, 56
Repeat, 126
Reverse, 132
Rotate Sort, 72
S
SADF, 21
SADF mode, 21
Sample Copy, 74
Sample Print, 164
Scanner Functions, 147
Searching for a Stored Document, 159
Selecting a Color Mode, 40
Selecting Copy Paper, 60
Series Copies, 92
Sharp/Soft, vii, 48
Simplified Display, 5, 150
Size Magnification, 68, 173
186
Sizes and Weights of

Recommended Originals, 11
Sizes Detectable, 13
Sizes difficult to detect, 14
Slip Sheets, 138, 173
Sort, 72, 173
Specified Area Repeat, 126, 127
Stack, 76, 173
Stamp, 6
Stamp Color, 110, 113, 118, 121
Stamp density, 110
Stamp position, 108, 110, 111, 113, 116,
118, 119, 122
Stamp size, 110
Staple, 78, 173
Stapling position, 78
Stapling position and original setting, 78
Storing a Program, 143
Storing Data, 152
Storing Data in the Document Server, 140
Symbols, 2
T
Text, 59
Text/Photo, 59
Text/Photo Sensitivity, vii, 48
To change a file name, 156
To change the format of date, 118
To delete the user stamp, 115
To enter the ratio with the number keys, 66, 69
To program the user stamp, 113
To register or change a user name, 154, 155
To search by file name, 160
To search by user name, 160
To set or change a Password, 157
Two-Sided Combine, 89
U
User Color, 53
User Stamp, v, 111, 113, 115
W
What You Can Do with This Machine, iii, ix
Whole Area Repeat, 126
Z
Zoom, 65, 173
EN
USA
B222-7657
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
c means STAND BY.
Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Copyright 2006
Operating Instructions Copy/Document Server Reference

EN USA B222-7657
FAX Option Type C4500

Facsimile Reference
Transmission
Other Transmission Features
Reception
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Storing a Document
Fax via Computer
Appendix
Introduction
Notes
local dealer.
Important
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, WindowsNT and Outlook are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.
Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Note


The product names of the Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:



About This Machine

Troubleshooting
Security Reference
Facsimile Reference
Printer Reference
Scanner Reference
Network Guide
i
Other manuals
UNIX Supplement
Note

dealer.
Product name
General name
DeskTopBinder Lite *1 and DeskTopBinder Professional
DeskTopBinder
ScanRouter EX Professional *1 and ScanRouter EX En- the ScanRouter delivery software

terprise *1
*1
Optional
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTICE ...................................................................................................................1
Important Safety Instructions ...............................................................................3
Caution.......................................................................................................................3
Symbols .....................................................................................................................4
Names of Major Functions .........................................................................................4
Reading the Display...............................................................................................5
Reading the Display Panel and Using Keys...............................................................6
Function List ..........................................................................................................9
1. Transmission
Transmission Modes ...........................................................................................13
Selecting Type of Transmission ...............................................................................14
Memory Transmission..............................................................................................15
Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass.............................................18
Parallel Memory Transmission ..............................................................................19
Automatic Redial ...................................................................................................20
Dual Access...........................................................................................................20
Simultaneous Broadcast........................................................................................20
Immediate Transmission ..........................................................................................21
Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass.............................................23
Displaying Confirmation of Transmission.................................................................24
IP-Fax Functions ..................................................................................................25
Terminology .............................................................................................................27
Notes on Using IP-Fax .............................................................................................28
Functions Not Available for IP-Fax Transmission ....................................................28
Internet Fax Functions ........................................................................................29
Notes on Using Internet Fax ....................................................................................30
Functions Not Available by E-mail Transmission .....................................................31
Functions Not Available by E-mail Reception ..........................................................32
E-mail Subject ..........................................................................................................32
T.37 Full Mode .........................................................................................................33
Placing Originals..................................................................................................34
Setting the Original Orientation ................................................................................36
Scanning Two-Sided Originals.................................................................................37
Acceptable Original Sizes ........................................................................................40
Paper Size and Scanned Area.................................................................................41
Original Sizes Difficult to Detect...............................................................................43
Transmission with Image Rotation ...........................................................................44
Stamp.......................................................................................................................45
iii
Scan Settings .......................................................................................................47

Scan Type ................................................................................................................47
JBIG Transmission ................................................................................................49
Resolution ................................................................................................................49
Scan Size .................................................................................................................51
Auto Detect............................................................................................................52
Regular ..................................................................................................................53
Area .......................................................................................................................54
Mixed Original Sizes..............................................................................................56
Density (Contrast) ....................................................................................................58
Mixing Scan Settings for a Multiple Page Original ...................................................60
Changing the Line Port .......................................................................................61
Simultaneous Broadcast Using Multiple Line Ports .................................................63
Specifying a Destination .....................................................................................64
Sending Over a Fax Line .........................................................................................64
Entering a pause ...................................................................................................65
Entering a tone ......................................................................................................66
Sending by IP-Fax....................................................................................................67
Regarding IP-Fax destinations ..............................................................................69
Sending to an E-mail Address..................................................................................70
Bypassing the SMTP server ..................................................................................73
Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations .....................................................76
Switching the titles in the Address Book................................................................77
Specifying Group Destinations.................................................................................78
Selecting Destinations from Recent Destinations ....................................................79
Programming Destinations in the Address Book .............................................81
Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book ...........................................83
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book ............................................84
Search by Destination Name ...................................................................................85
Search by Fax Number/IP-Fax Destination..............................................................87
Search by E-mail Address........................................................................................90
Search Using Advanced Search ..............................................................................92
Search by Registration Number ...............................................................................95
On Hook Dial ........................................................................................................97
Manual Dial ...........................................................................................................99
Sender Settings..................................................................................................101
PIN Code Transmission .........................................................................................104
Advanced Features............................................................................................ 106
Setting SUB Codes for Transmission.....................................................................106
Setting a password ..............................................................................................109
Setting SEP Codes for Reception ..........................................................................109
Entering a password............................................................................................112
SEP Code RX Reserve Report ..............................................................................112
SEP Code RX Result Report .................................................................................113
Canceling a Transmission ................................................................................ 114
Before the Original Is Scanned ..............................................................................114
While the Original Is Being Scanned......................................................................114
While the Original Is Being Transmitted.................................................................115
Before the Transmission Is Started........................................................................117
Confirming a Transmission .............................................................................. 120
Checking the Storage Result (Memory Storage Report)................................122
iv
2. Other Transmission Features

Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later) ......................................................... 123
Requesting a Reception Notice ........................................................................ 125
Setting an E-mail Destination as a BCC .......................................................... 127
Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail .................................................. 128
Entering the Subject .......................................................................................... 130
Entering the Text................................................................................................133
Transmission Options .......................................................................................135
Standard Message Stamp......................................................................................135
Auto Reduce ..........................................................................................................136
Label Insertion........................................................................................................138
Closed Network......................................................................................................140
SUB Code Transmission........................................................................................141
SEP Code Reception .............................................................................................142
Fax Header Print ....................................................................................................144
3. Reception
Types of Reception............................................................................................ 147
Immediate Reception .............................................................................................147
Memory Reception .................................................................................................148
Substitute Reception ..............................................................................................149
Receiving documents unconditionally .................................................................150
Receiving documents according to parameter-specified settings .......................150
Reception Modes ............................................................................................... 152
Manual Reception ..................................................................................................152
Auto Reception.......................................................................................................152
Switching the Reception Mode...............................................................................153
Receiving Internet Fax Documents ..................................................................154
Auto E-mail Reception ...........................................................................................154
Manual E-mail Reception .......................................................................................155
Received Images ...................................................................................................155
Reception Functions ......................................................................................... 157
Routing Received Documents................................................................................157
Routing received documents with SUB Code......................................................157
Transferring Received Documents.........................................................................158
SUB Code Transfer Report .................................................................................158
Forwarding Received Documents ..........................................................................159
SMTP Reception Using Internet Fax......................................................................160
Routing e-mail received via SMTP ......................................................................161
JBIG Reception ......................................................................................................162
Auto Fax Reception Power-Up...............................................................................162
v
Printing Options.................................................................................................163
Print Completion Beep ...........................................................................................163
Checkered Mark.....................................................................................................163
Center Mark ...........................................................................................................164
Reception Time ......................................................................................................164
Two-Sided Printing.................................................................................................165
180-degree rotation printing ................................................................................166
Multi-Copy Reception.............................................................................................166
Image Rotation.......................................................................................................167
Page Separation and Length Reduction ................................................................168
Page Reduction......................................................................................................169
TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber Identification Print) ..........................................169
If There Is No Paper of the Correct Size ................................................................170
Setting priority trays.............................................................................................170
Just size printing..................................................................................................171
Having incoming documents printed on paper from the bypass tray...................171
Where Incoming Documents Are Delivered - Output Tray.....................................172
Specifying tray for lines .......................................................................................172
Tray Shift .............................................................................................................173
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information

Changing the Settings of Files in Memory ......................................................175
Deleting a Destination from a Simultaneous Broadcast.........................................176
Adding a Destination ..............................................................................................178
Changing the Transmission Time ..........................................................................180
Changing the SMTP Server Setting .......................................................................182
Printing a File from Memory .............................................................................185
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List)..................................... 187
Resending a File ................................................................................................189
Checking the Transmission Result (Transmission File Status) .................... 191
Confirming on Display ............................................................................................191
Confirming by Report .............................................................................................192
Confirming by E-mail..............................................................................................193
Confirming by Report and E-mail ...........................................................................193
Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission) ........................................194
Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission) .......................................194
Communication Failure Report ..............................................................................195
Checking the Reception Result (Reception File Status) ................................196
Confirming on Display ............................................................................................196
Confirming by Report .............................................................................................197
Journal.................................................................................................................197
Print Journal....................................................................................................... 198
Printing the Journal ................................................................................................198
All.........................................................................................................................199
Print per File No...................................................................................................200
Print per User ......................................................................................................201
Journal ...................................................................................................................203
Transmitting Journal by E-mail...............................................................................205
Journal by e-mail .................................................................................................205
vi
Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents

(Print/Delete Stored Reception File) .............................................................. 206
Printing Received and Stored Documents .............................................................207
Deleting Received and Stored Documents ............................................................208
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock .................................................... 209
Personal Boxes ..................................................................................................211
Personal Boxes ......................................................................................................211
Printing Personal Box Documents .........................................................................212
Confidential File Report..........................................................................................213
Information Boxes ............................................................................................. 214
Information Boxes ..................................................................................................214
Storing Documents in Information Boxes...............................................................215
Printing Information Box Documents......................................................................217
Deleting Information Box Documents.....................................................................218
5. Storing a Document
Sending a Stored File ........................................................................................221
Storing a Document ...............................................................................................222
Programming a user name ..................................................................................224
Setting a file name...............................................................................................225
Setting a password ..............................................................................................225
Sending Stored Documents ...................................................................................226
Specifying documents from [File List]...................................................................229
Specifying documents by [User Name]..................................................................229
Specifying documents by [File Name] ...................................................................230
Displaying a preview............................................................................................230
Printing Stored Documents ....................................................................................231
Changing Stored Document Information................................................................233
Changing a user name ........................................................................................235
Changing the file name........................................................................................236
Changing the password.......................................................................................236
Deleting a Stored Document ..................................................................................237
6. Fax via Computer

Sending Fax Documents from Computers ......................................................239
Before Use .............................................................................................................240
Using the Software.................................................................................................240
LAN-Fax Driver....................................................................................................240
Address Book ......................................................................................................241
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor ...............................................................................241
Auto Run program ...............................................................................................242
Installing Individual Applications ............................................................................242
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties.........................................................................243
Setting print properties ........................................................................................244
Making settings for option configuration ..............................................................245
Basic Transmission ................................................................................................246
Specifying a destination using a destination list ..................................................247
Specifying a destination using Address Book......................................................247
Specifying a destination by directly entering a fax number,
Internet Fax destination, or IP-Fax destination..................................................248
vii
Specifying Options .................................................................................................249

To send a fax document at a specific time ..........................................................249
To print a sender stamp.......................................................................................249
To attach a cover sheet .......................................................................................250
To specify two-sided printing ...............................................................................250
To display preview...............................................................................................250
Saving as files .....................................................................................................250
To store the fax document on the Document Server...........................................251
Checking Transmission Using LAN-Fax Driver......................................................252
Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail ..........................................................252
LAN-Fax Result Report ..........................................................................................253
Printing and Saving ................................................................................................254
Editing Address Book.............................................................................................254
Programming new destinations ...........................................................................255
Editing programmed destinations ........................................................................256
Deleting programmed destinations......................................................................256
Using the Machine's Address Book Data in the Destination List of the LAN-Fax....257
Editing Fax Cover Sheets ......................................................................................257
Creating a cover sheet ........................................................................................258
Attaching a created cover sheet ..........................................................................259
Managing Facsimile Functions Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ..................260
LAN-Fax Operation Messages...............................................................................260
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser .............................................261
Viewing, Printing, and Deleting Received Fax Documents Using a Web Image Monitor ....261
Viewing received fax documents using a Web browser ......................................261
Printing fax information using a Web browser .....................................................262
Deleting fax information using a Web browser ....................................................263
Programming Destination Information from Web Browser.....................................263
To edit machine properties already programmed................................................264
To add new receiver ............................................................................................265
Delivering Files Received by Fax ..................................................................... 266
7. Appendix
Checking the Memory Status............................................................................267
Programs ............................................................................................................268
Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs ....................................................268
Registering a priority function using a program ...................................................270
Changing a program name..................................................................................271
Using a Program ....................................................................................................273
Optional Equipment........................................................................................... 274
Expansion Memory (28MB: DIMM) ........................................................................274
Handset..................................................................................................................274
Extra G3 Interface Unit...........................................................................................274
Specifications..................................................................................................... 275
Specifications Required for the Internet Fax Destination Machines.......................277
Maximum Values................................................................................................278
INDEX....................................................................................................... 280
viii
NOTICE
Note to users in the United States of America
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in
a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Notice about the Telephone Consumer Protection Act (Valid in USA only)
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any
person to use a computer or other electronic device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or
individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, you should
complete the following steps: Follow the FAX HEADER programming
procedure in the Programming chapter of the operating instructions to enter the business identification and telephone number of the terminal or
business. This information is transmitted with your document by the FAX
HEADER feature. In addition to the information, be sure to program the
date and time into your machine.
1

Note:
Avertissement:
Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003
du Canada.
2
Important Safety Instructions

Caution
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always
be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl,
kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote
risk of electric shock from lightning.
Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.
Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions.
Save these instructions.
IMPORTANTES MESURES DE SCURIT
Certalnes mesures de scurit doivent tre prises pendant lutilisation de matrial tlphonique afin de rduire les risques dincendle, de choc lectrique et de
blessures. En voici quelquesunes:
Ne pas utiliser lappareil prs de leau, p.ex., prs dune balgnoire, dun lavabo, dun vier de cuisine, dun bac laver, dans un sous-sol humide ou prs
dune piscine.
viter dutiliser le tlphone (sauf sil sagit dun apparell sans fil) pendant un
orage lectrique. Ceci peut prsenter un risque de choc lectrique caus par la
foudre.
Ne pas utiliser lappareil tlphonique pour signaler une fulte de gaz sil est
situ prs de la fuite.
Utiliser seulement le cordon dalimentation et le type de piles indiqus dans
ce manual. Ne pas jeter les piles dans le feu: elles peuvent exploser. Se conformer aux grlements pertinents quant llimination des piles.
Conserver ces instructions.
3

Symbols
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.
Names of Major Functions

This machine's major functions are referred to in this manual as follows:
Internet Fax (by specifying an e-mail address) Internet Fax
Internet Fax (by specifying an IPv4 address) IP-Fax
4
Reading the Display

This section explains how to use control panel and screen-displayed keys.
The display guides you through operations, shows messages, machine status,
and destinations registered in the destination lists.
If you press the {Facsimile} or {Clear Modes} key during operation, the standby
display appears.
Note
This machine automatically returns to standby mode if you do not use the
machine for a certain period of time. You can select the period using the Facsimile Auto Reset Timer in System Settings.
You can have the machine return to standby mode after each transmission using User Parameters (switch 17, bit 3) in the Facsimile Features menu.
To manually return to the standby display, do one of the following:
If you have placed the original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) and
have not pressed the {Start} key, remove the original.
If you have not placed an original, press the {Clear Modes} key.
If you are in User Tools mode, press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
Facsimile Features, General Settings Guide

Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions, General Settings Guide
5
Reading the Display Panel and Using Keys

This section explains key functions and messages that appear on the control panel.
Initial Display
ALV012S
1. Displays the date, time, and ma-
6. Displays the entered number of a
chine status. Displays the name, facsimile number of the destination,

and the size of the original when
transmitting.
destination.
7. Allows you to store documents in
When user authentication is set, a login

user name appears.
8. Press to display various information about communication.
2. Allows you to send or print the
9. Allows you to confirm the trans-
documents stored in the Document

Server.
10. Displays the percentage of free
3. Allows you to set scan settings
memory space.
and original feed types.
11. Allows you to search for a destination by destination name, fax

number, e-mail address or registration number.
4. Displays messages and the machine status.
5. Press this tab to switch the type of

transmission between fax/IP-Fax
and Internet Fax.
When Internet Fax Settings is set to
On in the Facsimile Features menu,
appears.
When [Fax] is selected, you can specify

fax numbers or IP-Fax destinations.
When [Internet Fax] is selected, you can
specify e-mail addresses.
the Document Server.
mission settings.
12. Switches transmission mode to

Immediate Transmission.
When [Immed. TX] is not highlighted, the
machine is in the Memory Transmission
mode.
13. Allows you to set various features for transmission.

14. Allows you to set a sender.
15. Allows you to check the number
of Transmission Standby File(s),
Memory Lock File(s), and RX
Print Standby File(s).
17. Title word keys appear. Allows

you to switch from one page (display) to another on the destination
list.
18. Switches the title word keys.
19. Appears on Destination keys
programmed as a group destination.
16. Displays Quick Operation keys

set for frequently used functions. [TX
File Status] and [RX File Status] are preset.
Note
The display will differ depending on installed optional units.
You can change Internet Fax Settings under Initial Settings in the Facsimile Features menu.
Information about documents sent using the facsimile function cannot be
checked in [Job List]. Use [Change TX / Info].
Reference
p.13 Transmission Modes
p.77 Switching the titles in the Address Book

p.84 Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
p.123 Other Transmission Features
p.175 Changing/Confirming Communication Information
p.221 Storing a Document
p.267 Checking the Memory Status
7
Simplified Display
This section explains how to switch to the simplified display.
When you press the {Simplified Display} key, the screen changes from the initial
display to the simplified display.
Letters and keys are displayed at a larger size, making operations easier.
AQI031S
Example of a simplified display
ALV013S
1. [Key Color]
Press to change the key color and increase the brightness of the display panel.
Note
To return to the initial display, press the {Simplified Display} key again.
Certain keys do not appear on the simplified display.
8
Function List
This section explains various items that can be specified in the Facsimile Features menu.
Press the {User Tools/Counter} key to display the Facsimile Features menu. For
details about the settings, see Facsimile Features, General Settings Guide.
General Settings
Function name
Description
Quick Operation Key
Frequently used functions programmed as

Quick Operation keys are shown on the
menu immediately after the power is turned
on.
Switch Title
Select the title to be shown on the destination

list.
Search Destination
Select a destination list to be used in Search

Destination.
Checks the transmission and reception, and

totals on the display.
Adjust Sound Volume
Adjust the sound volume during On Hook

Mode and Immediate Transmission.
Box Setting
The following functions are for delivery and

transfer of documents: Personal Box, Information Box, and Transfer Box.
You can print a list or the Personal Boxes, Information Boxes, and Transfer Boxes currently programmed.
Use this function to specify a time to cancel

On Hook mode after you transmit using On
Hook dialing.
Scan Settings
Function name
Description
You can program, change, or cancel frequently used scan sizes.
9
Send Settings
Function name
Description
Max. E-mail Size
Specify to limit the size of e-mail messages

that are transmitted, if receivers limit e-mail
size, or you cannot send large size e-mail for
some reason.
Program / Change / Delete Standard Message Program standard messages to be printed at

the top of the first page of the original of the
opposite party.
You can specify whether or not to send to a

selected folder the backup of a file sent by
Reception Settings
Function name
Description
Specify the method for receiving fax documents.
By programming particular receivers as Special Sender in advance, you can have Special
Senders treated differently.
You can print the Special Sender List.
Forwarding
Specify whether or not received fax documents are to be forwarded to a programmed

receiver.
Selects whether received documents are

saved on the hard disk to be printed later or
printed immediately without being saved.
The administrator can be specified for managing documents stored on the machine after
fax documents are received.
This function is available on systems that allow routing of e-mail received via SMTP.
2 Sided Print
Specify whether or not received fax documents are to be printed on both sides of the
paper.
Checkered Mark
Specify whether or not a checkered mark is

to be saved on the hard to be printed on the
first page of received fax documents.
Center Mark
Specify whether or not a center mark is to be

printed halfway down the left side and at the
top center of each page received.
Specify whether or not the received date,

time, and file number are printed at the bottom of received fax documents.
Specify the number of copies to be printed

for each fax document received.
10
Function name
Description
Paper Tray
Use this function to print fax documents received from programmed senders and fax
documents from other senders, using different paper trays.
Specify a paper tray for each line (telephone,

Internet Fax, IP-Fax).
You can set whether the Folder Transfer Result Report is transmitted to the specified email address, when folders are programmed
as the forwarding destinations to which documents are sent from all senders or Special
Senders.
Switches the Memory Lock on or off.
Initial Settings
Function name
Description
Parameter Setting
User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs.
Prints a list to see the current User Parameter

settings.
Register an ID required for Closed Network

communication.
Program a Memory Lock ID to be entered before printing documents when the Memory
Lock Reception function is activated.
You can select to display the Internet Fax

icon or not.
Select Dial / Push Phone
Use this function to select a line type when

the machine is connected to a G3 analog line.
Program information to be shown on the display

of the other machine and printed as a report.
Enable H.323
Specify whether or not H.323 is used for IPFax transmission.
Enable SIP
Specify whether or not SIP is used for IP-Fax

transmission.
H.323 Settings
Set the IPv4 address or host name, and alias

telephone number of the gatekeeper.
SIP Settings
Set the SIP server's IPv4 address or host

name, and SIP user name.
Program / Change / Delete Gateway
Register, change, or delete the gateway used

for transmission to IP-Fax.
Menu Protect
Using Menu Protect, you can prevent unauthenticated users from changing the user
tools.
Reference
11
12
1. Transmission
This section explains basic transmission operations such as specifying a transmission mode or destination.
Transmission Modes
There are two types of transmission:
Memory Transmission
Important
It is recommended that you call the receiver and confirm with them when
sending important documents.
Memory Transmission
Transmission starts automatically after the original is stored in memory. This
is convenient when you are in a hurry and want to take the document away
with you. You can also send the same original to several destinations.
Immediately dials the destination number, and while scanning the original,
sends it. It is very convenient when you want to send an original quickly or
when you want to check the destination you are sending to. When using this
type of transmission, the original is not stored in memory. You can only specify one address.
13
Transmission
Normally the machine is in the Memory Transmission mode. To switch the

mode to Immediate Transmission, press [Immed. TX].
Note
You can set the machine to enter Memory Transmission mode or Immediate
Transmission mode right after the power is turned on or the {Clear Modes} key
is pressed. See Registering a priority function using a program.
Reference
p.19 Parallel Memory Transmission
p.20 Simultaneous Broadcast

p.270 Registering a priority function using a program
Selecting Type of Transmission

You can select the transmission type: standard fax, IP-Fax, or Internet Fax.
Press the tab in the standby display to select the transmission type.
When sending to a standard fax or IP-Fax destination

Make sure that [Fax] is selected.
14
Transmission Modes
When sending to an Internet Fax destination

Press [Internet Fax] to switch the type of transmission to Internet Fax.
Reference
p.25 IP-Fax Functions
p.29 Internet Fax Functions
Memory Transmission
Memory transmission mode has standard fax, Internet Fax and IP-Fax.
Important
If there is a power failure (the main power switch is turned off) or the machine
is unplugged for about one hour, all the documents stored in memory are deleted. As soon as the main power switch is turned on, the Power Failure Report is printed to help you identify deleted files. Simply turning off the power
by pressing the operation switch does not delete stored documents. See
Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function, Troubleshooting.
If memory is full (0% appears in Memory at the upper right of the screen),
Memory Transmission is disabled. Use Immediate Transmission instead.
A Make sure [Immed. TX] is not highlighted.

Normally Memory Transmission mode is selected.
B Place the original.

15
Transmission
C Make the scan settings you require.
D Using the number keys or a Destination key, specify a destination.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter the correct
number.
To select a destination from the Address Book, see Using the Address Book
to Specify Destinations.
E When sending the same original to several destinations (broadcasting),

press [Add] to specify the destinations.
You do not have to press [Add] when adding a destination using the destination list.
16
Transmission Modes
F Specify the next destination.
Press [Fax] or [Internet Fax] to switch the transmission type between fax/IPFax and Internet Fax.
A fax number, e-mail address and IP-Fax destination can be specified simultaneously.
G Press the {Start} key.

Note
If the combined total number of programmed destinations exceeds the
maximum value, only Immediate Transmission is possible.
For the maximum number of destinations you can specify per file, see
Maximum Values.
For the maximum number of destinations you can specify for all files (including files in memory), see Maximum Values.
For the maximum number of documents you can store in memory for
Memory Transmission, see Maximum Values.
For the maximum number of pages you can store in memory (using A4
Standard <ITU-T q1 Chart>), see Maximum Values.
Reference
p.47 Scan Type
p.49 Resolution
p.58 Density (Contrast)
p.64 Sending Over a Fax Line
p.67 Sending by IP-Fax
p.70 Sending to an E-mail Address
p.76 Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations
p.78 Specifying Group Destinations
p.79 Selecting Destinations from Recent Destinations
p.278 Maximum Values
Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function, Troubleshooting
17
Transmission
Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass

Follow these steps to send multiple originals using the exposure glass.
A Make sure [Immed. TX] is not highlighted.

B Place the first page of the original face down on the exposure glass.
C Specify a destination.
D Make the scan settings you require.
The machine starts scanning.
F Place the next original on the exposure glass within 60 seconds after the machine has finished scanning the first original.
G Repeat steps D to F for all originals.

H Place the last original, and then press the {q} key.
The machine dials the destination and starts transmission.
18
Transmission Modes

This function dials while the original is being scanned.
Standard Memory Transmission stores the original in memory, then dials the
destination. However, Parallel Memory Transmission allows you to confirm the
connection status quickly. In addition, this function scans the original faster than
Immediate Transmission. This is useful when you are in a hurry and need to use
the original for another purpose.
Important
Standard Memory Transmission is used instead of Parallel Memory Transmission in the following cases:
When the line is busy and could not be connected to

With Send Later
When you store an original for Memory Transmission while another communication is in progress
When two or more destinations are specified
When an original is placed on the exposure glass, and then sent
When you send documents stored in the Document Server
Note
You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameters (switch 07, bit 2)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
Standard Memory Transmission may be used instead of Parallel Memory

Transmission depending on the optional equipment installed if there is not
enough free memory left.
If you use this function, the Memory Storage Report will not be printed.
If the {Clear/Stop} key is pressed, the original jams or memory runs out, Parallel Memory Transmission will stop. The Communication Result Report is
printed and files are deleted.
When using Parallel Memory Transmission, only the page number is printed
on the header of the fax, the total number of originals is not automatically
printed.
Reference
19
Transmission
Automatic Redial
If a fax document could not be sent because the line was busy or an error occurred during transmission, the line is switched to another at five-minute intervals and redial is attempted up to five times.
If redialing fails after four redials, the machine cancels the transmission and
prints a Communication Result Report or Communication Failure Report.
Note
If there are a large number of files stored in memory, documents might not be
sent in the order they were scanned.
Dual Access
The machine can scan other documents into memory even while sending a fax
document from memory, receiving a document into memory, or automatically
printing a report. Since the machine starts sending the second document immediately after the current transmission ends, the line is used efficiently.
Note
During Immediate Transmission or when in User Tools mode, the machine
cannot scan an original.
Simultaneous Broadcast
Use this function to send the same original to multiple destinations simultaneously.
To specify multiple destinations, specify the first destination, and then specify
the next destination by pressing [Add].
If you dial several destinations for the same document (broadcasting), the documents are sent in the order in which they were dialed. If the fax document could
not be transmitted, the machine redials that destination after the last destination
specified for broadcasting. For example, if you specify four destinations, A
through D, for broadcasting, and if the lines to destinations A and C are busy,
the machine dials the destinations in the following order: A, B, C, D, A, and C.
To check the transmission progress, print the TX file list.
If the optional extra G3 interface unit is installed, you can use the Simultaneous
Broadcast function to send faxes simultaneously on different phone lines.
If you specify a second transmission while broadcasting to several destinations,
faxes are transmitted alternately to each remaining destination in the current
and second broadcast.
For example, if you specify a broadcast to destinations A and B, and then specify
a broadcast to destinations C and D while transmission to destination A is in
progress, the machine sends the faxes in the following order: A, C, B, and then D.
If the previous file and next file are both on standby, these are also sent in the
same order.
20
Transmission Modes
Note
To avoid accidentally pressing the wrong Destination key, you can set the
machine so that each time a destination is added using a Destination key,
[Add] must be pressed. Make the setting in User Parameters (switch 17, bit 2)
Reference
p.63 Simultaneous Broadcast Using Multiple Line Ports
p.187 Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List)
Immediate Transmission is possible with standard fax transmission and IP-Fax
transmission.
Important
Internet Fax is executed in only Memory Transmission that starts transmission automatically after storing documents in memory. If you switch the type
of transmission to Internet Fax while the machine is in the Immediate Transmission mode, the transmission mode is automatically switched to the Memory Transmission mode.
Group cannot be used for Immediate Transmission. You cannot send the
same document to multiple destinations (broadcasting). If you specify broadcast or transmission for a group, the machine changes automatically to Memory Transmission.
A Press [Immed. TX].
21
Transmission
C Select the scan settings you require.
D Using the number keys or a Destination key, specify a destination.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter the correct
number.

The machine dials a destination.
Note
Documents are not stored in memory.
Reference
p.47 Scan Type
p.49 Resolution
p.78 Specifying Group Destinations
22
Transmission Modes
Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass

Follow these steps to send multiple originals using the exposure glass.
A Press [Immed. TX].

B Place the first page face down on the exposure glass.
C Specify a destination.
D Make the scan settings you require.
F Place the next original on the exposure glass within 10 seconds after the ma-
chine has finished scanning the first original.
G Repeat steps D to F for all originals.

H Place the last original, and then press the {q} key.
23
Transmission
Displaying Confirmation of Transmission

On this screen you can check the destination, transmission mode, and other
transmission settings before transmitting.
A Press [Check Modes], and then check the transmission settings.
The following display appears.
B After checking the settings on the display, press [Exit].
24
IP-Fax Functions
IP-Fax Functions
The IP-Fax function sends or receives documents between two facsimiles directly via a TCP/IP network.
This function has the following advantages and is suitable for communication
within the same LAN:
Reducing communication costs
Communicating between IP-Faxes at higher speed than by standard fax
IP-Fax uses SIP and H.323 as the network protocol.
Specify an IPv4 address or host name instead of a fax number for sending. When
using a gatekeeper, specify its alias telephone number. Specify addresses of the
gatekeeper or SIP server (proxy server, register server, redirect server) as appropriate in Initial Settings in the Facsimile Features menu.
When using a SIP server, you can send by specifying SIP user name.
You can also transmit to a G3 facsimile connected to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) via a gateway (T.38-compliant).
You can receive IP-Faxes in the same manner as standard faxes.
25
Transmission
ALT001S
Important
To use IP-Fax functions, this machine must be connected to a LAN and set up
correctly under Initial Settings in the Facsimile Features menu.
The facsimile function of this machine cannot be used with IPv6.

Before using this function, configure the network in the System Settings menu.
Note
IP-Fax supported by this machine is ITU-T Recommendation T.38 compliant.
26
IP-Fax Functions
Reference
p.147 Types of Reception
Connecting the Machine, General Settings Guide

Terminology
The following are words you should know when using IP-Fax:
H.323
A multimedia communication protocol that sends or receives files via one-toone communication over a LAN or the Internet.
SIP
A communication control protocol for Internet telephone that utilizes VoIP
(which converts voice information to IP packets) and is equipped with functions such as creating, modifying, and terminating sessions with one or more
participants.
Gatekeeper (VoIP gatekeeper)
A gatekeeper manages devices connected to an IP network and converts alias
telephone numbers to IPv4 addresses and performs authentication functions.
In addition, a gatekeeper governs band (transmission rate assignment) and
access control.
SIP server
A SIP server mediates connection requests between devices connected to an
IP network and is composed mainly of servers that have the following three
functions:
Proxy server: Receives SIP requests and forwards them on behalf of the requestor.
Register server: Receives information about a device's address within an IP
network and registers them in the database.
Redirect server: Used to inquire the destination address.
Gateway (VoIP gateway)
A gateway connecting a telephone network and IP network, it has functions
such as protocol conversion for connecting these different networks, and also
connects communication devices (telephones, facsimiles, etc.) to a LAN or
other network.
27
Transmission
Notes on Using IP-Fax

The following are notes about using IP-Fax:
You may not be able to send to a firewall-protected network.
You cannot use telephones on a LAN.
If a power outage lasts about an hour, or the machine is disconnected from
the power outlet for about an hour, documents stored in the fax machine's
memory are deleted. If any document is deleted, the Power Failure Report is
automatically printed out when the main power switch is turned on. Use this
report to check which documents were deleted. Simply turning off the power
Reference
Functions Not Available for IP-Fax Transmission

You can use the following functions with standard fax transmission, but not IPFax transmission:
On hook dial
Manual dial
28
Internet Fax Functions

This machine converts scanned document images to e-mail format and transmits
the data over the Internet.
The e-mail sent by this machine can be received by another Internet Fax machine. Instead of dialing the telephone number of the destination you want to
send to, you enter the relevant e-mail address.
You can also print or forward received e-mail messages.
ALT002S
Important
To use Internet Fax functions, this machine must be connected to a LAN and
set up correctly in System Settings.

To send Internet Fax documents, in the Facsimile Features menu, under Initial Settings, set [Internet Fax Settings] to [On]. However, documents can still be
forwarded or delivered to Internet Fax destinations even if [Off] is selected.
To receive Internet Fax documents, in the System Settings menu, in File
Transfer, under [Fax E-mail Account], set [Account] to [Receive].
29
Transmission
Note
The Internet Fax function supported by this machine is compliant with ITUT Recommendation T.37.
You can receive e-mail messages with an attached TIFF-F image from computers.
Though Internet Fax documents are normally sent via an SMTP server, you
can also send Internet Fax documents directly to their destinations without
going through an SMTP server. To do this, set whether or not to bypass the
SMTP server on the standby display.
When sending Internet Fax documents, Subject, Text, Reception Notice, and BCC Transmission can be selected in [TX Mode].
You can limit the size of transmitted e-mail messages in Send Settings of
Facsimile Features.
See Received Images for how e-mail is actually received by the computer.
For details about how to confirm the transmission result, see Checking the
Transmission Result (Transmission File Status).
Reference
p.73 Bypassing the SMTP server
p.125 Requesting a Reception Notice

p.127 Setting an E-mail Destination as a BCC
p.130 Entering the Subject
p.133 Entering the Text
p.155 Received Images
p.191 Checking the Transmission Result (Transmission File Status)
Notes on Using Internet Fax

The following are notes about using Internet Fax:
When using the Internet Fax function, originals are sent at A4 size. Originals
larger than A4 are reduced to A4 size. If the receiver is in compliance with the
T.37 full mode, originals are sent at the size specified in the Address Book.
When using Internet Fax transmission, documents are sent at Detail resolution, even if you specify Super Fine. To send a document at Super Fine,
configure the Full Mode when registering the destinations in the Address
Book.
If a transmission is not successful, this machine usually receives an e-mail error notification. However, e-mail error notifications may not be transmitted
for various reasons. It is recommended that you confirm receipt of important
document by calling the other party.
30
The level of security for Internet communications is low. It is recommended

that you use the telephone network for confidential communications.
Voice communication is not supported over a LAN.
Internet Fax delivery might be delayed due to network congestion. Use Internet Fax transmission that bypasses the SMTP server, a public telephone line
fax, or IP-Fax whenever communication time is a concern.
If a power outage lasts about an hour, or the machine is disconnected from
the power outlet for about an hour, documents stored in the fax machine's
memory are deleted. If any document is deleted, the Power Failure Report is
automatically printed out when the main power switch is turned on. Use this
report to check which documents were deleted. Simply turning off the power
You may not be able to send large files as e-mail, depending on e-mail environment conditions.
When available memory is low, you may not be able to send Internet Fax documents.
Because the machine sends documents as e-mail messages with an attached
TIFF-F image, viewer applications are required in order to view documents
when they are received on a computer.
With a large volume of document, it may take some time before transmission
starts. This is due to the time the machine requires to convert the data in memory.
Reference
p.33 T.37 Full Mode
p.41 Paper Size and Scanned Area

p.73 Bypassing the SMTP server
Functions Not Available by E-mail Transmission

The following functions are supported with standard fax transmission, but not
with Internet Faxing.
Closed Network transmission
SUB Code Transmission
On Hook Dial
Manual Dial
JBIG Transmission
ECM (Error Correction Mode)
31
Transmission
Functions Not Available by E-mail Reception

The following functions are supported with standard fax reception, but not with
Internet Faxing.
SEP Code Reception
Authorized Reception per Sender
Reception File Print Quantity per Sender
E-mail Subject
If you send e-mail without specifying a subject, a subject is automatically inserted. Subjects differ depending on Stamp Sender Name settings.
When Stamp Sender Name is set to on:

From Sender Name(Fax Message NO.xxxx)
When Stamp Sender Name is set to off:
If Own Fax Number and Own Name are programmed:
From Own Fax Number(Own Name)(Fax Message NO.xxxx)
If only Own Fax Number is programmed:
From Own Fax Number(Fax Message NO.xxxx)
If only Own Name is programmed:
From Own Name(Fax Message NO.xxxx)
If neither Own Fax Number nor Own Name are programmed:
Fax Message NO.xxxx
Note
xxxx is the document number that appears in the Journal.
Reference
p.101 Sender Settings
32
T.37 Full Mode

This machine is T.37 full mode compatible. T.37 full mode is an international
standard for Internet Fax transmission. (ITU-T Recommendation, RFC2532)
When an Internet Fax communication is made between T.37 full mode compatible machines, the receiver side sends the return receipt (dispatched) in response
to the reception notice request attached to the sent e-mail. This return receipt includes the receiver's reception capability information (compression type, paper
size, and resolution). When the receiver is programmed in the Address Book as
the full mode destination, the sender side automatically registers the received information in the Address Book. This allows you to send a subsequent Internet
Fax document to that receiver based on this information.
Returning a Return Receipt

When e-mail is received, if the sender requests reception notice, the receiver
sends a return receipt that includes the receiving machine's capability (compression type, paper size, and resolution).
Registering the Received Reception Confirmation Contents
When the sender receives the return receipt that includes the receiver's reception capability, the sender checks that the final recipient address sent is programmed in the Address Book. If it is programmed as a full mode destination,
the sender automatically registers the receiver's reception capability. The registered reception capability is updated each time the sender receives new reception capability information. The sender can send documents to the
receiver based on this information.
If the receiver is programmed as the simple mode machine or not programmed in the Address Book, the receiver's reception capability cannot be
registered.
If you know the receiver's reception capability, you can set it manually.
Requesting a Reception Notice
When the receiver's machine supports T.37 full mode and is programmed as
a full mode machine in the Address Book, the machine requests the reception
notice from the receiver. Then, the machine will receive the return receipt
(sent) that includes the receiver's reception capability.
Note
Use Web Image Monitor to manually program a receiver's reception capability information.
If you use Internet Fax transmission, you can send documents to multiple
destinations at once. However, if you specify full mode destinations, since
each destination may have a different reception capability, transmission is
done one by one in the specified transmission order.
Reference
p.125 Requesting a Reception Notice
p.263 Programming Destination Information from Web Browser
33
Transmission
Placing Originals
Place the original on the exposure glass or the ADF. For details about how to
place originals, see the following:
Placing originals on the exposure glass
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass, Copy/Document Server Reference
Placing originals into the ADF
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder, Copy/Document Server
Reference
Non-compatible originals for the Auto Document Feeder, Copy/Document Server Reference
Note that [Special Original] of the copy function cannot be used with the facsimile
function.
Place the originals according to their paper size.
Original size
Placing on the exposure glass
Placing into the ADF
A4, B4 JIS, A3, 8 1/2"11",

8 1/2"14", 11"17"
A4, B4 JIS, A3, 8 1/2"11",

8 1/2"14", 11"17"
A5, B5 JIS
A5, B5 JIS
Important
If you place A5 size originals on the exposure glass, they are not detected.
Place A5 size originals into the ADF.
Do not lift the ADF while using it to scan originals.
34
Placing Originals
Note
To scan multiple originals using the Auto Document Feeder (ADF), set originals in a stack.
When sending a fax, the image output at the other end depends on the size
and orientation of paper used in the receiver's machine. If the receiver does
not use paper of the same size and orientation as that of the original, the fax
image may be reduced in size, trimmed at both edges, or divided across two
or more sheets. When sending an important original, ask the receiver about
the size and orientation of the paper in their machine.
When sending an original of irregular (i.e. custom) size or part of a large original, you can specify the scan area precisely.
Custom size originals are scanned as regular size originals, so the receiver
may find extra blank margins or edges of images missing. If you specify a
scan area, only that area is scanned regardless of the actual size of the original.
Documents longer than 800 mm (32") must be sent by Memory Transmission
(Immediate Transmission may not be possible).
If an original jams, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then carefully remove the
original.
Make sure that all ink, correcting fluid etc., has completely dried before placing your original. If it is still wet, the exposure glass will become marked and
those marks will appear on the received image.
Generally, place A4, 8 1/2"11" originals in the landscape orientation (L). If
you place an A4, 8 1/2"11" original in the portrait orientation (K), the image
is sent rotated by 90.
You can send the first page from the exposure glass then the remaining pages
from the ADF. You cannot change from the ADF to the exposure glass.
When using the Internet Fax function, originals are sent at A4 size. Originals
larger than A4 are reduced to A4 size. If the receiver's machine is compliant
with the T.37 full mode, originals are sent at the size specified in the Address
Book.
Information about this machine is printed at the destination. This information
is printed on the side of the paper that is to your left when placing the documents on the exposure glass or the ADF. However, the information is also
printed rotated by 90 degrees if an A4, 8 1/2"11" original is placed in the portrait orientation (K).
For acceptable types of originals, see Acceptable Original Sizes, Paper Size
and Scanned Area and Original Sizes Difficult to Detect.
You can set the original feed types that are selected right after the power is
turned on or the {Clear Modes} key is pressed. See Registering a priority function using a program.
35
Transmission
Reference
p.18 Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass
p.23 Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass

p.33 T.37 Full Mode
p.40 Acceptable Original Sizes
p.41 Paper Size and Scanned Area
p.43 Original Sizes Difficult to Detect
p.44 Transmission with Image Rotation
p.51 Scan Size
Placing Originals, Copy/Document Server Reference
Setting the Original Orientation

When you store documents in the Document Server, set Original Orientation.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Original Feed Type].
C Specify the original orientation.

Check the orientation of the placed document, and then press [
36
] or [
].
Placing Originals
D Press [OK].
The selected original orientation appears in Original Feed Type.
E Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Reference
p.221 Storing a Document
Scanning Two-Sided Originals

Use this function to send two-sided originals.
The front and back of the scanned original will be printed in order on separate
sheets at the other end. The orientation of alternate sheets may be reversed at the
other end. If you want to print the original with the same orientation at the other
end, specify the Original position and Page opening orientation.
Important
When using this function, two-sided originals cannot be sent by using just the
exposure glass.
Two-sided originals are only sent with Memory Transmission. Immediate

Transmission is not possible.
37
Transmission
C Specify the original orientation.

Check the orientation of the placed document, and then press [
] or [
].
Make sure that the specified original orientation matches the orientation of
originals loaded in the ADF.
D Press [2 Sided Original].
38
Placing Originals
E Select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom].
F Select [1st Sheet] or [2nd Sheet].

To cancel two-sided transmission, press [1 Sided Original]. The display returns
to that of step D.
Select [2nd Sheet] if you want to send a cover sheet as the first page.
G Press [OK].
2 Sided Original appears above [Original Feed Type].
H Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.

Note
You can confirm whether both sides were properly scanned using the Stamp
function.
You can set the original feed types that are selected right after the power is
turned on or the {Clear Modes} key is pressed. See Registering a priority
function using a program.
Reference
p.45 Stamp
39
Transmission
Acceptable Original Sizes

Acceptable original size
Exposure glass
Up to A3 (297 420 mm),

11" 17" (279 432 mm)
1
ADF, one-sided docu- B6 JIS L to A3 L (up to 1200
ment
mm long)
Maximum
number of
sheets
1
Paper thickness
----
100 sheets
40-128 g/m2
2
(81.4 g/m , 22 lb) (11-34 lb)
51/2" 81/2" K to 11" 17"L

ADF, two-sided docu- A5 L to A3 L (up to 432 mm
ment
long)
100 sheets
52-128 g/m2
2
(81.4 g/m , 22 lb) (14-34 lb)
51/2" 81/2" K to 11" 17"L
Note
The weight range for originals in the Mixed Original Sizes mode is 5281.4 g/m2,
1422 lb.
40
Placing Originals
Paper Size and Scanned Area

Important
If you place an original larger than A3, 11"17" on the exposure glass, only an
A3, 11"17" area is scanned.
Exposure Glass
ADF
AAG019S
Maximum scan area

The following shows the maximum scan area:
Memory Transmission: 297 1200 mm/11" 47" (W L) from the ADF
Immediate Transmission: 297 1200 mm/11" 47" (W L) from the ADF
297 432 mm/11" 17" (W L) (from the exposure glass)
41
Transmission
Note
There may be a difference in the size of the image when it is printed at the destination.
Even if an original is correctly placed on the exposure glass or in the ADF, a

margin of 3 mm (0.1") around each edge of the original may not be sent.
If the receiver uses paper of a smaller width than the original, the image is reduced to fit that paper.
During Immediate Transmission, the length of the scanning range can become narrower than 1200 mm (47"), depending on the resolution as well as
the settings on the destination machine.
The machine detects paper sizes in the following ways:
When you place an original in the ADF, an original wider than about 263
mm (10.4") is scanned as A3, 11"17" size.
An original narrower than about 230 mm (9.1") is sent as A4 or 81/2"14"
size, and an original narrower than about 263 mm (10.4") is scanned as B4
JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard).
Originals up to 1200 mm (47.2") in length can be scanned.
See the following table for sizes the machine can detect when you place an
original on the exposure glass. Because the machine scans custom size documents in a standard size, part of the image may be truncated depending
on the length of the document. For details about how to set custom size
documents, see Scan Size.
Metric Version
Inch Version
- Unable to auto detect

*1 Normally a length of about 420 mm (16.5") can be scanned; however, it is only
possible to specify a scanning size up to 432 mm (17").
42
Placing Originals
Reference
p.51 Scan Size
Original Sizes Difficult to Detect
The machine has difficulty detecting the size of the following kinds of originals.
(When this happens, the receiving machine may not select print paper of the correct size.)
documents placed on the exposure glass of sizes other than those listed in the
following table
originals with index tabs, tags, or protruding parts
transparent originals, such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
dark originals with dense text or drawings
originals that contain areas of solid print
originals that have solid print around their edges
originals with glossy surfaces
bound originals of more than 10 mm (0.3") in thickness, such as books.
The following paper sizes are automatically detected in facsimile mode.
Metric Version
Paper size
where
original is
placed
A3L
8 1/2"13"
(F4)
B4 JISL
A4KL
B5 JISKL
A5KL
Exposure
glass
ADF
- Auto detect
Inch Version
Paper size where
original is placed
11"17"L
Exposure glass
8 1/2"14" L
8 1/2"11" KL
5 1/2"8 1/2" K
ADF
- Auto detect
Note
You can select from 81/2" 13", 81/4" 13", 8" 13" with User Tools (System
Settings). See System Settings, General Settings Guide.
43
Transmission
Reference
Transmission with Image Rotation
Generally, place A4, 81/2"11" originals in the landscape orientation (L). If you
place an A4, 81/2"11" original in the portrait orientation (K), the image is sent
rotated by 90. Providing the receiver has A4, 81/2"11" landscape paper (L),
the document is printed the same size as the original.
Note
This function is unavailable with Immediate Transmission.
When Image Rotation is used, all documents are sent by normal Memory
Transmission.
This function is unavailable when using Mixed Original Sizes.
44
Placing Originals
Stamp
When sending a fax document using the ADF, the machine can stamp a circle
mark at the bottom of the original. When sending a two-sided document, the
document is marked at the bottom of the front page and top of the rear page.
Important
Stamp only works when scanning from the ADF.
C Press [Stamp].
To cancel the stamp, press [Stamp] again before pressing [OK].
D Press [OK].
E Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
45
Transmission
Note
This stamp indicates that the original has been successfully stored in memory
for Memory Transmission, or successfully sent by Immediate Transmission.
When the stamp starts getting lighter, replace the cartridge.

If a multi-page feed or paper jam occurs, the originals are not sent properly
and not stamped. If you find a page that is not stamped, send only that
page again.
You can have the machine select the Stamp function right after the power
is turned on or the {Clear Modes} key is pressed. See Registering a priority
You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the Quick Operation key allows you to omit step B.
A paper jam during Parallel Memory Transmission may cause the transmission to fail even if stamping is performed.
You cannot turn the Stamp function on or off while an original is being
scanned.
Reference

Adding Paper, Toner and Staples, Troubleshooting
46
Scan Settings
Scan Settings
You may want to send many different types of fax documents. Some of these
may be difficult to reproduce at the receiver's end. However, the machine has
three settings that you can adjust to help you transmit the document with the
best possible image quality.
Scan Type:
Text, Text / Line Art, Text / Photo, Photo
Resolution:
Standard, Detail, Super Fine (optional)
Scan Size:
Auto Detect, Regular, Area, Mixed Original Sizes
Density (Contrast):
Auto Density, Manual Density (seven levels), Combined Auto and Manual
Density
Scan Type
If the original contains photographs, illustrations, or diagrams with complex
shading patterns or grays, select the appropriate scan type to optimize image
clarity.
Text
Select [Text] to send high-contrast black-and-white image originals. Use this
setting when you only want to send clearer text, even if the original contains
text and photographs.
Text / Line Art
Select [Text / Line Art] to send high-contrast black-and-white graphic originals
at improved resolution. The [Text] mode gives priority to scanning speed;
[Text / Line Art] mode gives priority to scanning quality.
Text / Photo
Select [Text / Photo] to send an original containing both a high-contrast blackand-white image, such as text, and a halftone image, such as a photograph.
Photo
Select [Photo] to send an original containing a halftone image, such as a photograph or a color original.
47
Transmission
A Press [Scan Settings].
B Make sure that [Scan Type] is selected.
C Select the scan type you require, and then press [OK].
Note
If you select [Text / Line Art], [Text / Photo], or [Photo], the transmission will
take longer than when [Text] is selected.
If you send a fax document with [Text / Line Art], [Text / Photo], or [Photo] and
the background of the received image is dirty, reduce the density setting
and resend the fax.
You can set the scan type that is selected right after the machine is turned
on or the {Clear Modes} key is pressed. See Registering a priority function
using a program.
Reference
48
Scan Settings
JBIG Transmission
If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image experts Group) compression, you can send
originals scanned using [Photo] faster than with other compression methods.
Important
This function is not available with Internet Fax function.
This function requires that the other party's fax machine has both the JBIG
function and ECM function (G3 communication only).
Resolution
This section explains how to set the resolution of the original.
Images and text are scanned into the machine by converting them to a sequence
of dots. The density of the dots determines the quality of the image and how long
it takes to transmit. Therefore, images scanned at high resolution (Super Fine)
have high quality but transmission takes longer. Conversely, low resolution
(Standard) scanning results in lower quality but the original is sent more quickly. Select the setting that matches your needs based upon this trade off between
speed and image clarity.
Standard (8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200 x 100 dpi)

Select for originals containing normal size characters.
Detail (8 x 7.7 lines/mm, 200 x 200 dpi)
Select for originals containing small characters or when you require greater
clarity. This resolution is twice as fine as Standard.
Super Fine (optional expansion memory required: 16 x 15.4 lines/mm, 400 x 400 dpi)
Select for originals with very fine details or when you require the best possible image clarity. This resolution is eight times finer than Standard.
49
Transmission
B Press [Resolution].
C Select the resolution you require, and then press [OK].
50
Scan Settings
Note
If you install the optional expansion memory, Super Fine appears in the
Resolution screen.
If the other party's machine does not support the resolution at which you
are sending, this machine automatically switches to a resolution that is
supported. You can check the resolution at which you actually sent by
printing the Journal.
Sending with Super Fine resolution requires that the machine has the optional expansion memory, and the other party's machine has the capability
to receive fax documents at Super Fine resolution.
The machine supports Standard, Detail, Fine (with the optional expansion
memory), and Super Fine (with the optional expansion memory) resolutions for reception.
You can set the resolution type that is selected right after the machine is
turned on or the {Clear Modes} key is pressed. See Registering a priority
When using Internet Fax transmission, documents are sent at Detail resolution, even if you have specified Super Fine. To send a document at
Super Fine, configure the Full Mode when registering the destinations in
the Address Book.
Reference
p.33 T.37 Full Mode
p.198 Print Journal

Scan Size
Normally, a placed original is scanned according to the automatically detected
size. If a scan area is specified, the original is scanned accordingly. Thus, originals can be sent without extra space or blank margins.
Note
When placing different size originals into the ADF, adjust the document
guide to the largest original.
Small-size originals may be sent at a slight slant since they do not match the
document guide.
Reference
p.43 Original Sizes Difficult to Detect
51
Transmission
Auto Detect
Detects the size of the first page and scans all pages using that size.
If the machine cannot detect the original size, a confirmation message appears.
Place the original again.
A Place the originals.

C Press [Scan Size].
D Make sure that [Auto Detect] is selected.
If it is not, press [Auto Detect].
52
Scan Settings
E Press [OK].
Auto Detect: Same Size appears above [Scan Settings].
F Specify a destination and press the {Start} key.

Regular
The placed original is scanned according to specified size regardless of actual
size.
The sizes that can be specified are A4KL, B4 JISL, A3L, 81/2"11"KL,
81/2"14"L, and 11"17"L.

53
Transmission
D Press the size of the originals to be sent.
81/2"11" indicates LT. 81/2"14" indicates LG. 11"17" indicates DLT.
E Press [OK].
The selected size appears above [Scan Settings].

Note
To cancel the selected scan size, select [Auto Detect].
Area
Program the sizes of the originals to be scanned in advance. Only the area in the
specified size is scanned regardless of the actual size of a placed original.

54
Scan Settings
D Press [Area 1] or [Area 2].
E Press [OK].
The specified size appears above [Scan Settings].

Note
To cancel the selected scan size, select [Auto Detect].
55
Transmission
Mixed Original Sizes

Select this to individually scan the size of originals loaded into the ADF. For example, when A3Land A4Ksize originals are sent together, usually all are sent
using the size of the first original. By selecting Mixed Original Sizes, the machine
scans and sends each original according to its size.

D Press [Mixed Original Sizes].
56
Scan Settings
E Press [OK].
Auto Detect: Mixed Sizes appears above [Scan Settings].

Note
To cancel Mixed Original Sizes, press [Mixed Original Sizes] again before
pressing [OK] in step D.
When using Mixed Original Sizes, the machine sends the originals by
When using Mixed Original Sizes, rotation transmission is disabled.
You can have the machine select Mixed Original Sizes right after the power
is turned on or the {Clear Modes} key is pressed. See Registering a priority
Reference
p.44 Transmission with Image Rotation
57
Transmission
Density (Contrast)
The text and diagrams on originals should stand out clearly from the paper they
are on. If the original has a darker background than normal (for example, a
newspaper clipping), or if the writing is faint, adjust the density.
Auto Density
The appropriate density setting for the original is automatically selected.
Manual Density
Use manual density to set density manually.
You can select one of seven density levels.
A If [Auto Density] is selected, press [Auto Density] to turn it off.
B Press [W] or [V] to adjust the density.
The cursor moves.
58
Scan Settings
Combined Auto and Manual Density

You can only adjust density for photographs, illustrations, or diagrams if the
original has a dark background.
You can select one of seven density levels.
B Press [W] or [V] to adjust the density.
The cursor moves.
Note
Selecting [Text], [Text / Line Art], or [Text / Photo] for the scan type causes [Auto
Density] to be selected.
You can set the density that is selected right after the machine is turned on or
the {Clear Modes} key is pressed. See Registering a priority function using a
program.
Reference
59
Transmission
Mixing Scan Settings for a Multiple Page Original

When sending an original of several pages, you can select a different density,
resolution, and scan type setting for each page.
It is recommended that originals be placed on the exposure glass when mixing
scan settings for a multiple page original.
When placing originals on the exposure glass

A Check which pages you want to scan with different settings.
B Remove the previous page and place the next page that you checked on the
exposure glass.
C Select the density, resolution, and scan type.
You have about 60 seconds (10 seconds for Immediate Transmission) to select density, resolution, and scan type. The time remaining is shown on the
display.
Adjust the settings for each page before you press the {Start} key.
When placing originals in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)

A Check which pages you want to scan with different settings.
B Select the density, resolution, and scan type before the page you want to
change the settings for starts being scanned.
Depending on what time the scan settings are adjusted, the settings may
not be reflected in the resulting operation.
60
Changing the Line Port

Select a line port or protocol to be used for standard fax or IP-Fax transmission.
When the extra G3 interface unit is installed, you can connect to a maximum of
three ports.
Important
To add more fax lines, the optional extra G3 interface unit is required.
G3
G3 is selected after power up or when the machine is reset. If you install the
extra G3 interface unit, you can select G3-1, G3-2, G3-3, or G3 Autodepending on the number of the installed unit.
Multi-port
When the extra G3 interface unit is installed, communications can take place
simultaneously through three lines at once.
The following list shows protocol combinations available for each line type.
Option
Available line types
Available protocol combinations
Without option
PSTN
G3
Extra G3 interface unit
PSTN n PSTN
G3 n G3
Extra G3 interface unit n

Extra G3 interface unit
PSTN n PSTN n PSTN
G3 n G3 n G3
IP-Fax
When sending an IP-Fax, select either SIP or H.323 as the protocol.
To display SIP and H.323 on the screen, make the settings in Initial Settings in the Facsimile Features menu.
Ask your administrator whether you should select SIP or H.323 as the
protocol.
61
Transmission
B Select the line you want to use.

If you select G3 Auto, the machine will use any available line. This increases efficiency.
When one optional extra G3 unit is installed
When two optional extra G3 units are installed
When H.323/SIP are set to On
62
C Press [OK].
Note
When you install the extra G3 interface unit, you can specify the line port
home position. See Registering a priority function using a program.
When sending a fax, you can select the line port if dialing with the number
keys.
A maximum of three simultaneous communications are possible. You cannot perform three Immediate Transmissions simultaneously.
If three communications are in progress, the display shows the first communication that was initiated.
Reference
Simultaneous Broadcast Using Multiple Line Ports

The Standard Broadcast function sends faxes one at a time to multiple destinations in the order of specified destinations.
However, the Simultaneous Broadcast function can simultaneously send faxes
to multiple destinations using different lines.
This results in a shorter overall transmission time.
Important
The optional extra G3 interface unit is required.
Note
A maximum of three simultaneous transmissions (including LAN) are possible.
When using the optional extra G3 interface unit, if you set the line selection
as G3 Auto beforehand, the machine will use whichever G3 line is not busy.
This increases efficiency.
63
Transmission
Specifying a Destination
This section explains how to specify a destination.
Fax numbers, IP-Fax destinations, and e-mail addresses can be specified.
Note
The display shows the percentage of free memory space for storing originals.
Since fax numbers, IP-Fax destinations and e-mail addresses are programmed
in separate memory, dialing fax numbers using the number keys does not
change the percentage on the display.
Sending Over a Fax Line

Enter numbers directly using the number keys on the right side of the control
panel.
A Make sure that [Fax] is selected.

B Enter the fax number using the number keys.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter again.
If the optional extra G3 interface unit is installed, select the line you want to
use before pressing the {Start} key.

The machine starts to scan the original and stores it in memory. When scanning ends, the Communicating indicator lights and transmission starts.
Note
You can insert pauses and tones in a fax number.
Press [Prg. Dest.] after entering the fax number to store the fax number in
the destination list.
For the maximum number of digits for a destination, see Maximum Values.
64
Reference
p.61 Changing the Line Port
p.65 Entering a pause

p.66 Entering a tone
p.83 Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book
Entering a pause
Press [Pause] when dialing or storing a number to insert a pause of about two
seconds.
Note
A pause is shown as a - on the display.
You can also program numbers including pauses in the destination list.
65
Transmission
Entering a tone
This function allows a machine connected to a pulse dialing line to send tonal
signals (for example if you want to use a special service on a tone dialing line).
When you press [Tone], the machine dials the number using tonal signals.
This section explains how to use the tone function with On Hook Dial as an example.
A Press [On Hook].
B Enter the fax number using the number keys.

C Press [Tone].
D Enter the number you want to tone dial using the number keys.
Note
Certain services may be unavailable even when using Tone function.
A tone is shown as a T on the display and the next numbers are dialed
using tonal signals.
66
Sending by IP-Fax
This section explains how to specify a destination using IP-Fax transmission.
When using IP-Fax transmission, specify the IP-Fax destination (IPv4 address,
host name, or alias telephone number) in place of the fax number.
Important
Specify the protocol to be used in [Select Line] in advance.
A Make sure that [Fax] is selected.

B Press [Manual Entry].
C Enter the IP-Fax destination, and then press [OK].
If you enter an incorrect character, press [Backspace] or [Delete All]. Then, reenter the characters correctly.
To change the IP-Fax destination after pressing [OK], press [Edit Dest.], re-enter
an IP-Fax destination, and then press [OK].
67
Transmission
D To add a destination, press [Add].
When you press [Prg. Dest.], you can register an entered destination in the destination list.
E Specify the next destination.
To add another destination, repeat steps D and E.
Note
Depending on security settings, [Manual Entry] may not appear, and you
may be unable to enter the IP-Fax destination.
For a list of gateways (T.38-compliant), gatekeepers, or SIP servers that are

certified as operable with this machine, contact your local reseller or service representative.
Methods of entering a destination vary depending on the network settings
made by the administrator. Ask the machine administrator for details. For
details about entering the IP-Fax destination, see Regarding IP-Fax destinations.
68
Reference
p.25 IP-Fax Functions
p.61 Changing the Line Port

p.69 Regarding IP-Fax destinations
Entering Text, About This Machine
Regarding IP-Fax destinations

Depending on the network to which this machine is connected or this machine's
configuration, enter the IP-Fax destination as follows:
When not using a gatekeeper/SIP server

From IP-Fax to IP-Fax
Specify the IPv4 address or host name of the receiving machine.
Example: 192.168.1.10 (IPv4 address)
Example: IPFAX1 (host name)
From IP-Fax to G3 fax
Specify the G3 fax telephone number of the receiving machine.
Example: 0312345678
When using a gatekeeper server
Specify the alias telephone number of the receiving machine.
Example: 0311119999 (alias telephone number)
Example: 0312345678
When using a SIP server
Specify the SIP user name of the receiving machine.
Example: ABC (SIP user name)
Example: 0312345678
69
Transmission
Note
To send to a G3 fax via a gateway connected to a public telephone line, you
must specify it's the receiver's machine telephone number. For example, if the
receiver's fax number is 0312345678, specify 5678. To send from an IP-Fax
to G3 fax without using gatekeeper or SIP server, you must register the gateway also.
When you specify a destination with IP-Fax, depending on the receiver's network configuration, you may need to specify the IPv4 address and port number of the receiving machine. For example, if the receiver's IPv4 address is
192.168.1.10 and the port number is 2100, specify 192.168.1.10:2100.
Ask the network administrator for details.
When you specify a host name, depending on the receiver's network configuration, you may need to specify the host name and port number of the receiving machine. For example, if the receiver's host name is IPFAX1and the
port number is 2100, specify IPFAX1:2100. Ask the network administrator for details.
An alias telephone number is a number that is registered in the gatekeeper,
and is available only in the network to which the gatekeeper is connected.
Pay attention to the number of telephone number digits set in the gateway/IPv4 address conversion table to avoid transmission error.
Sending to an E-mail Address

This section explains how to specify an e-mail address as a destination.
When using Internet Fax transmission, specify the e-mail address in place of the
fax number.
Important
In the destination list, register senders, specify their e-mail addresses, and set
the User Name as [Sender] in advance using Address Book Management in
System Settings.
Internet Fax is executed in only Memory Transmission that starts transmission automatically after storing documents in memory. If you switch the type
of transmission to Internet Fax while the machine is in the Immediate Transmission mode, the transmission mode is automatically switched to the Memory Transmission mode.
70
A Press [Internet Fax] to switch the type of transmission to Internet Fax.
B Specify the sender.

For details about specifying senders, see Sender Settings.
C Press [Manual Entry].
D Enter the e-mail address destination, and then press [OK].
If you enter an incorrect character, press [Backspace] or [Delete All]. Then, reenter the characters correctly.
To change the e-mail address after pressing [OK], press [Edit Dest.], re-enter an
e-mail address, and then press [OK].
71
Transmission
E To add a destination, press [Add].
When you press [Prg. Dest.], you can register an entered destination in the destination list.
F Specify the next destination.
To add another destination, repeat steps E and F.
Note
Depending on security settings, [Manual Entry] may not appear, and you
may be unable to enter the e-mail address.
For details about canceling a transmission, see Canceling a Transmission.

If Auto Specify Sender Name is set to On in System Settings, the
sender is automatically specified and you can omit the procedure for specifying a sender. If On is selected, the specified e-mail address is printed
at From:. If no e-mail address is specified for the sender, or if the specified e-mail address is not programmed in the destination list, Internet Fax
documents cannot be sent.
72
Reference
p.29 Internet Fax Functions

p.114 Canceling a Transmission
Bypassing the SMTP server

You can send Internet Fax documents directly to their destinations without going through the SMTP server.
Important
To use this function, the following settings must be made. For details about
these settings, see System Settings, General Settings Guide and Special
Operations under Windows, Network Guide.
In System Settings, SMTP in E-mail Communication Port, set the

port number to 25.
To specify the host name of the other party as the domain part of the e-mail
address, program the host name of the other party on the DNS server.
If the other party's IPv4 address is not registered on the DNS server, specify
the IPv4 address at the domain part of the e-mail address.
To use this function, the other party's fax machine must be:
compatible with Internet Fax
connected to the same LAN as this machine
have its reception protocol set to SMTP
SMTP authentication set on the other party's fax machine is disabled when Internet Fax is transmitted using this function.
If an Internet Fax is transmitted from the other party using this function, even
if reception is not successful, an Error Mail Notification is not sent to the sender.
When an Internet Fax is transmitted using this function, even if transmission
is not successful, the error e-mail is not sent from the server.
When using this function, you cannot send Internet Fax documents to the administrator's e-mail address programmed on this machine.
73
Transmission
You can send Internet Fax documents directly to their destinations without going through the SMTP server. Internet Faxes are normally transmitted via the
SMTP server. However, with this feature the domain part of the destination's email address is read as the SMTP server's address and transmissions bypass the
SMTP server. Since this reduces load on the server, you can send faxes without
having to take server to destination transfer time into account.
There are two ways of specifying a destination, as follows:
Specify the other party's host name

Specify a destination's e-mail address by adding the other party's host name
to the domain part of the e-mail address. Specify the address to the right of @
as follows: host name, . (dot), and domain name.
xxxx@host name of the other party.domain name
Example: The other party's e-mail address is abc@defcompany.com and the
host name is HOST; abc@HOST.defcompany.com
Specify the other party's IPv4 address
Specify a destination's e-mail address by changing the domain part of the email address to the other party's IPv4 address.
xxxx@[the other party's IPv4 address]
Example: The other party's e-mail address is abc@defcompany.com and the
IPv4 address is 192.168.1.10; abc@[192.168.1.10]
Follow these steps to bypass the SMTP server.
A Press [SMTP].
B Press [No].
74
C Press [OK].
Note
When you specify destinations directly using the number keys, you can
specify whether or not to use the SMTP server for each destination.
When you select destinations in the destination list, the SMTP server setting specified in the Address Book is enabled.
To send Internet Fax documents from a computer, use the LAN-Fax Driver
to specify whether or not to bypass the SMTP server. When sending with
the [Use device address] check box selected, the SMTP server setting specified on this machine is enabled.
Reference
p.239 Sending Fax Documents from Computers

Special Operations under Windows, Network Guide
75
Transmission
Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations

When destinations are programmed in a destination list, you can specify a destination by selecting a Destination key from the destination list.
The programmed name appears on Destination key.
Press [Fax] or [Internet Fax] to switch the transmission type between fax/IP-Fax
and Internet Fax.
Important
In the destination list, program an individual fax number, IP-Fax destination,
e-mail address and/or groups of destinations.
A Press [Fax] or [Internet Fax] to switch the transmission type to fax/IP-Fax or

Internet Fax.
B Press the title word key where the desired destination is programmed.
For example, if you want to specify NewYork Office programmed in
LMN, press [LMN].
C Press the Destination key programmed with the desired destination.
If the desired Destination key is not shown, press [U] and [T] to look through
the list.
To cancel the selection, press the selected Destination key again. You can also
press the {Clear / Stop} key to cancel the selection.
To select more destinations, repeat steps B and C.
The destination is set and the Destination key is highlighted.
76
Note
To check the contents of Destination keys, print the destination list.
Reference
Switching the titles in the Address Book

There are three types of titles for destination lists; Title 1, Title 2, and Title 3.
The above display shows Title 1.
A Press [Change Title].

B Select the type of the title, and then press [OK].
77
Transmission
Specifying Group Destinations

If you program multiple destinations into a Group, you can send documents to
all destinations in that Group using just a few keystrokes. Destinations programmed in a group are indicated by
.
Important
In the destination list, program an individual fax number, IP-Fax destination,
e-mail address and/or groups of destinations.
Group destination can be used only for Memory Transmission; it cannot be

used for Immediate Transmission. The machine automatically changes to
Memory Transmission when you use group destination.
The total number of destinations programmed in multiple groups should not
exceed the maximum number of destinations you can specify for one file. For
details, see Maximum Values.

Internet Fax.
B Press the Destination key programmed with the desired group.
The destination is set and the Destination key is highlighted.

To select more groups, repeat step B.
78
Note
Destinations programmed in groups can be checked using Print Group
Dial List in System Settings.
If a destination where a fax number, e-mail address, or IP-Fax destination

is not programmed is included in the specified group, the confirmation
message appears. Press [Select] to specify destinations where the fax number, the e-mail address, or IP-Fax destination is programmed. Press [Cancel] to change the destination. You can select the priority order used to
specify an alternative destination if there is no destination of the specified
type. Make this setting with User Parameters (switch 32, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
To cancel any destination(s) among the group, press [Expand Group Dest.] in
[Check Modes]. Then, on the standby display, press [U] and [T] to display
the desired destination, and then press the {Clear/Stop} key. You can also
cancel a transmission by pressing the highlighted Destination key to deselect it.
Reference

Selecting Destinations from Recent Destinations

The machine stores the latest destinations specified for each transmission method. This function saves time when you are sending to the same destination repeatedly, as you do not have to enter the destination again.
Important
The following kinds of destinations are not stored:
Destinations specified using the destination list

Destinations specified as a group destination
Destinations dialed using the optional handset or an external telephone
Destinations selected from Recent Destinations (regarded as already stored
in memory)
Second and later destinations broadcasted to
Destinations specified in the LAN-Fax Driver on the computer
79
Transmission
B Press [Recent].
C Select the destination you want to redial to, and then press [OK].

Note
You can select Internet Fax and IP-Fax destinations from Recent Destinations as well.
When you press [Program Dest.], you can register a selected recipient in the
destination list.
For the maximum number of recent destinations the machine can store, see
Maximum Values.
Reference
80
Programming Destinations in the Address Book
Programming Destinations in the Address

Book
1
You can program fax numbers, e-mail addresses, IP-Fax destinations, and folder
destinations using Address Book Management in Administrator Tools in the
System Settings menu.
APS013S

E Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
For a description of the subsequent procedure, see System Settings, General
Settings Guide.
81
Transmission
Note
You can also register programmed fax numbers, e-mail addresses, IP-Fax
destinations, and folder destinations in a Group.
When the facsimile initial display is shown, after changing the contents of
the Address Book, the Destination list / machine settings are
updated. message appears. Press [Exit] to bring up the facsimile's initial
display.
You can register in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. For details about installation, see Monitoring
and Configuring the Printer, Network Guide, or, for information about
the Address Book, see the relevant Help.
Reference
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer, Network Guide
82
Programming Destinations in the Address Book
Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book

This section explains how to register a directly entered fax number, e-mail address, or IP-Fax destination to the Address Book.
When registering a destination directly entered or displayed on the Recent Destination screen in the Address Book, [Prg. Dest.] appears in the destination field.
A Press [Prg. Dest.].
B Press [Names] and enter any necessary information.
For details about registering destinations, see Registering Addresses and

Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions, General Settings Guide.
C Press [OK].
Note
Depending on security settings, [Prg. Dest.] may not appear, and you may
be unable to register the destination.
When the facsimile initial display is shown, after changing the contents of
the Address Book, the Destination list / machine settings are
updated. message appears. Press [Exit]. The standby display appears.
Reference
83
Transmission
Searching for a Destination in the Address

Book
1
Use this function to search for a destination registered in the destination list or
on the LDAP server.
Important
To search for a destination from an LDAP server, the LDAP server must be
registered in advance. For details about registering LDAP servers, see System Settings, General Settings Guide.
Note
Press [Fax] or [Internet Fax] on the Search Destination screen to switch the
transmission type between fax/IP-Fax and Internet Fax.
The search returns only destinations whose first characters match the entered
characters.
A warning message appears if the search returns more than the maximum
number of destinations you can search for at a time. Press [Exit] and change
the destination name to view fewer destinations.
For the maximum number of destinations you can search at a time, see Maximum Values.
Although one user can program multiple e-mail addresses, only one address
can be retrieved by the search. The address retrieved by the search depends
on the searching method supported by the LDAP server. However, the address programmed first is normally retrieved.
Reference
84
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
Search by Destination Name

Follow these steps to search for a destination registered in the Address Book by
name.
A Press [Search Dest.].
B Select a search destination.

To search through the Address Book, select [Address Book].
To search through an LDAP server, select the relevant LDAP server.
C Press [Fax] or [Internet Fax] to switch the transmission type to fax/IP-Fax or

Internet Fax.
85
Transmission
D Press [Name].
E Enter the destination name you want to search for, and then press [OK].
If you enter a wrong destination name, press [], [], [Backspace], and [Delete
All], and then enter the destination name again.
F Confirm the characters you entered, and then press [Start Search].
When the search is finished, a result appears.
86
G Select a destination.
If the desired destination does not appear, use [U] or [T] to scroll through the
list.
Press [Details] to display the detailed information of the selected destination.
Reference
Search by Fax Number/IP-Fax Destination

fax number or IP-Fax destination.
87
Transmission

C Press [Fax Destination].
D Enter the number you want to search for, and then press [OK].
To search for an IP-Fax destination, enter the IP-Fax destination that you want
to find.
If you enter a wrong number, press [], [], [Backspace], or [Delete All], and
then enter the number again.
88
E Confirm the entered fax numbers, and then press [Start Search].
F Select a destination.
list.
89
Transmission
Search by E-mail Address

Follow these steps to use an e-mail address to search for a destination registered
in the destination list.

C Press [Internet Fax] to switch the type of transmission to Internet Fax.
90
D Press [E-mail Address].
E Enter the e-mail address you want to search for, and then press [OK].
If you enter a wrong e-mail address, press [], [], [Backspace], or [Delete All],
and then enter the e-mail address again.
F Confirm the entered characters, and then press [Start Search].
91
Transmission
list.
Search Using Advanced Search

specifying search criteria.

92
C Press [Fax] or [Internet Fax] to switch the transmission type to fax/IP-Fax or

Internet Fax.
D Press [Advanced Search].
E Press the key for each condition, and then enter a partial string.
The following conditions can be specified for Address Book searches: Name,
Fax Destination, E-mail Address, and Folder Name.
The following conditions can be specified for LDAP server searches: Name,
Fax Destination, E-mail Address, Company Name, and Department Name.
93
Transmission
F Select search criteria for each condition.
The meanings of the search criteria are as follows:

[Beginning Word]: Search for strings that start with the specified character.
Example: When searching for ABC, enter A.
[End Word]: Search for strings that end with the specified character.
Example: When searching for ABC, enter C.
[Exact Match]: Search for strings that fully match the specified character.
Example: When searching for ABC, enter ABC.
[Include one Word]: Search for strings that include the specified character.
Example: When searching for ABC, enter A, B, or C.
[Exclude Words]: Search for strings that do not include the specified character.
Example: When searching for ABC, enter D.
[Fuzzy Search]: Perform a fuzzy search.
This item appears when selecting an LDAP server in step B. The performance of fuzzy search depends on the search method supported by the
LDAP server.
G Press [OK].
H Press [Start Search].
When the search is finished, the search result appears.
I Select a destination.
If the required destination does not appear, press [U] or [T] to display it.
94
Note
You can add one additional search condition for LDAP servers by specifying the Search Options under Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server
under System Settings. For details about setting Search Options, see System Settings, General Settings Guide.
The string you enter in the [Name] condition field is read as the first or last
name, depending on the administrator's setting. For example, to search for
the name John Smith, ask the system administrator whether you should
enter John or Smith.
Reference
Search by Registration Number

Follow these steps to search for a destination by specifying a registration number stored in the destination list.

Internet Fax.
B Press [Reg. No.].

The registration number entry display appears.
95
Transmission
C Enter a registration number using the number keys, and then press [#].
While usually a registration number is displayed in the five-digit format, you

do not need to enter the first zeros of a registration number.
D Press [OK].
The corresponding destination appears.
Note
If the Cannot find the specified Registration No. message appears, the specified registration number or selected type of transmission is
wrong or does not exist. Press [Exit], check the registration number again,
and then follow the procedure from step B.
96
On Hook Dial
On Hook Dial
The On Hook Dial function allows you to dial while listening to the tone from
the internal speaker. You can send a fax checking the connection.
Important
This function is not available for the optional extra G3 interface unit, Internet
Fax and IP-Fax.
B Press [On Hook].
You will hear a low tone from the internal speaker.

If you want to cancel this operation, press [On Hook] again.
C Dial.
The machine immediately dials the destination.

If you make a mistake, press [On Hook] or the {Clear Modes} key, and then try
again.
97
Transmission
D When the line is connected and you hear a high-pitched tone, press the
{Start} key.
The transmission starts.
If you want to cancel a transmission, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then remove the originals.
After transmission, the standby display appears.
Note
This function is unavailable in some countries.
Press [Vol...] to display the Adjust Sound Volume screen, and then press
[Louder] or [Lower] to adjust the volume of the on-hook sound. The volume
can also be preprogrammed in the Facsimile Features menu.
If you have the optional handset or an external telephone on the fax machine, you can speak with the other party when you hear a voice. If you
hear a voice before pressing the {Start} key, pick up the optional handset
or the handset of the external telephone and tell the receiver you want to
send a fax document (ask them to switch to facsimile mode).
For details about On Hook Mode Release Time, see Facsimile Features,
Reference
98
Manual Dial
Manual Dial
Pick up the optional handset or the handset of the external telephone and dial.
When the line is connected and you hear a high-pitched tone, press the {Start}
key to send your fax document. If, on the other hand, you hear a voice at the other end, continue conversation as normal.
Important
The optional handset or an external telephone is required.
This function is not available for the optional extra G3 interface unit, Internet
Fax and IP-Fax.
If Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission) is printed, the result of a transmission with Manual Dial is not mentioned in the report.
B Pick up the handset.
You will hear a dial tone.
C Dial.
The machine immediately dials the destination.

If you make a mistake, replace the handset, and then try again from step B.
D When the line is connected and you hear a high-pitched tone, press the
{Start} key to send your fax document.
If you hear a voice, tell the receiver that you want to send them a fax document (ask them to switch to facsimile mode).
The transmission starts.
E Replace the handset.

If you want to cancel a transmission, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then remove the originals.
After transmission, the standby display appears.
99
Transmission
Note
When the operation switch is off, even if the main power switch is on, you
cannot operate this machine using only the optional handset or the handset of the external telephone. You must first press the operation switch to
turn on the machine.
Reference
100
Sender Settings
Sender Settings
Use this function to set sender information.
If the sender's e-mail address is registered in the destination list, the sender can
receive transmission results by e-mail.
Also, if you enable the Stamp Sender Name, the registered sender's name (user
name) appears on the receiver's sheet, lists, and report.
Important
In the destination list, register senders, specify their e-mail addresses, and set
the User Name as [Sender] in advance using Address Book Management in
System Settings.
If user authentication is set, the user logged in is set as sender. The transmission result is sent to the logged-in user's e-mail address.
B Press [Sender Name].
C Select a sender.
To select a sender by specifying the registration number registered in the Address Book, press [Registration No.].
To search for a sender from the Address Book, press [Search].
If a destination protection code is set, the entry screen appears. Enter the protection code for destination using the number keys, and then press [OK].
101
Transmission
D Confirm the selected sender, and then press [OK].
E To print the sender's name on the receiver's sheet, press [Stamp Sender Name]
to highlight it.
If you enable this function, the sender's name (user name) appears on the receiver's sheet, lists, and report.
F To confirm the transmission results by e-mail notification, press [E-mail TX

Results] to highlight it.
If the sender's e-mail address is registered, you can send the transmission result to the registered e-mail address.
G Press [OK].
To check the settings, press [Sender Name].
H Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.

102
Sender Settings
Note
You can confirm transmission results by using both the E-mail TX Results
function, which sends the results by e-mail, and the Communication Result Report printed by the machine. You can set whether to use both of
these together in User Parameters (switch 10, bit 6) in the Facsimile Features menu.
You can use Communication Result Report, etc. to check usage status by
specified users. If user authentication is set, you can check usage by
logged-in users. If User Code is set to sender, you can count the number of
uses by each user.
To cancel the Sender Name, cancel the transmission. See Canceling a
Transmission.
Reference

103
Transmission
PIN Code Transmission

A PIN (Personal Identification Number) Code is a number used for identifying
the sender.
PIN Code Transmission uses the PABX (Private Automatic Branch eXchange)
system to prevent unauthorized users sending faxes and to manage charges according to user.
A PIN Code is added to the end of the fax number, and this is identified by the
PABX. The PIN Code cannot be revealed or leaked over public telephone lines.
To utilize PIN Codes, your PABX must be equipped with the PIN Code function.
Depending on the PABX system you are using, you might have to enter a PIN
Code every time you want to send a fax.
If you want to use PIN Code Transmission, ask the PABX administrator if the
PABX you are connected to supports the PIN Code function, and if it does, contact your service representative for information about setting up.
Important
Program the PIN Code TX function to a Quick Operation key beforehand.
This function is not available with IP-Fax and Internet Fax.

When you specify a group destination, a PIN Code is added only to those fax
destinations included in the group.
B Specify the fax number of a destination.
C Press [PIN Code TX].
104
Sender Settings
D Enter the PIN Code, and then press [OK].


Note
For the maximum number of digits you can use in a PIN Code, see Maximum Values.
You can enter numbers, p, q, and pauses.

PIN Codes are not printed in lists and reports.
You can set the machine so that a PIN Code must be entered after the fax
number before you can send a fax. For details, contact your service representative.
Reference
105
Transmission
Advanced Features
This section describes how to specify a destination using advanced features.
Setting SUB Codes for Transmission

Follow these steps to send a document with a SUB Code as a confidential transmission.
A SUB Code is an ID consisting of numbers, q, p, and spaces. Document transmitted with a SUB Code is stored in the other party's memory, and not printed
automatically. The other party inputs the SUB Code to print the received document. Privacy can be mutually protected when transmitting a confidential document intended for a particular receiver, since only a person who knows the
SUB Code can print the document.
Documents can also be sent via facsimiles that have the Transfer Station function.
This function helps you save costs when you send the same document to more
than one place in a distant area, and saves time since many documents can be
sent in a single operation.
Important
Documents can be sent to facsimiles that have the Personal Box function.
A SUB Code cannot be used with Internet Fax.

To use this function, set [SUB Code Transmission] to on.
Obtain the SUB Code of the other party in advance.
When sending a confidential document, inform the other party of the SUB
Code in advance.
B Press [TX Mode].
106
Advanced Features
C Press [Option Setting].
D Press [SUB Code Transmission].
E Press [OK] twice.

F Enter the fax number of a destination or an IP-Fax destination.

G Press [Adv.Features].
H Make sure that [SUB Code] is selected.

I Press [Transmission SUB Code].
107
Transmission
J Enter a SUB Code, and then press [OK].
K When a password is required, press [Password (SID)], enter the password

with the number keys, and then press [OK].
L Press [OK].
M Press the {Start} key.
If you use Immediate Transmission and the fax machine at the destination
does not support the SUB Code function, a message will appear on the display
to inform you of this. When this happens, press [Exit] to cancel the transmission.
Note
Make sure the number of digits in the SUB Code matches the specification
of the machine to which you are sending. For the maximum number of digits for the SUB Code of this machine, see Maximum Values.
You can store SUB Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destination list and Keystroke Programs.
When a SUB Code is stored in the destination list, the SUB Code can be
modified or deleted after selecting a destination using the Destination
keys.
The SUB Code is printed on lists and reports.
Reference
p.141 SUB Code Transmission
p.158 Transferring Received Documents

p.268 Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs
108
Advanced Features
Setting a password
There are times when you may want to use an SID (Sender ID) when sending
confidential faxes with the SUB Code function. When you use a Transfer Box
that has a password, enter the SID Code as the password.
Note
For the maximum number of digits for the SID Code, see Maximum Values.
You can enter numbers, p, q, and spaces.

You can store SID Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destination
list and Keystroke Programs.
The SID Code is printed on lists and reports.
Reference

Setting SEP Codes for Reception

Follow these steps to enter a SEP Code to request the destination to transmit a
document.
You can receive a document stored in the destination's memory if the document
has the same SEP Code as the SEP Code you entered.
This function enables the machine to utilize services that use the polling function
or receive documents from multiple destinations.
Important
Documents can be received from facsimiles that have Information Boxes and
the SUB Code Transmission function.
A SEP Code cannot be used with Internet Fax.

To use this function, set [SEP Code Reception] to on.
A Press [TX Mode].
109
Transmission
B Press [Option Setting].
C Press [SEP Code Reception].
D Press [OK] twice.

E Enter the fax number of a destination or an IP-Fax destination.

F Press [Adv.Features].
G Make sure that [SEP Code] is selected.

H Press [Reception SEP Code].
110
Advanced Features
I Enter a SEP Code, and then press [OK].
J When a password is required, press [Password (PWD)], enter the password

using the number keys, and then press [OK].
K Press [OK].
L Press the {Start} key.
Note
Make sure the number of digits in the SEP Code matches the specification
of the machine from which you are receiving. For the maximum number
of digits for the SEP Code of this machine, see Maximum Values.

You can store SEP Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destination list and Keystroke Programs.
When a SEP Code is stored in the destination list, the SEP Code can be
modified or deleted after selecting a destination using the Destination
keys.
The SEP Code is printed on lists and reports.
Reference
p.142 SEP Code Reception

111
Transmission
Entering a password
There are times you may want to use a password when receiving faxes by SEP
Code Reception.
Note
For the maximum number of digits for the PWD Code, see Maximum Values.

You can store PWD Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destination list and Keystroke Programs.
The PWD Code is printed on lists and reports.
Reference

SEP Code RX Reserve Report

This report is printed after SEP Code Reception is set up. You can use this report
to check the reservations for SEP Code Reception.
Note
You can have a destination displayed with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 4)
You can display a sender name with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 5) in
the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
112
Advanced Features
SEP Code RX Result Report

This report is printed after each SEP Code Reception is completed and shows its
result.
If E-mail TX Results is programmed in a Quick Operation key, you can select
whether a report e-mail is sent after reception.
Note
You can also check the result of a SEP Code Reception with the Journal.
To view the report without text disruption, select a font of even character
width in your e-mail application's settings.
You can display a destination with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 4) in
Reference
p.203 Journal
113
Transmission
Canceling a Transmission
This section explains how to cancel a fax transmission.
Important
Remember that the Communicating indicator turns off almost immediately
when an Internet Fax is being sent.
Before the Original Is Scanned

Use this procedure to cancel a transmission before pressing the {Start} key.
A Press the {Clear Modes} key.
APS008S
Note
When originals are placed into the ADF, you can cancel transmission simply by removing them.
While the Original Is Being Scanned

Use this procedure to cancel a transmission while the originals are being
scanned after the {Start} key has been pressed.
APS009S
The machine stops scanning.
114
Note
Scanning may be completed while you are performing the cancel operation.
While the Original Is Being Transmitted
Follow these steps to cancel a transmission while the Communicating indicator

is lit.
APS009S
You can also cancel a Memory Transmission by pressing [Change TX / Info].
B Select the file you want to cancel.
If the desired file is not shown, press [U] or [T] to find it.
There are cases when a destination may not be selected as the destination appears as p, depending on the security settings.
C Press [Stop Transmission].
115
Transmission
D Press [OK].
To cancel another file, repeat steps B and D.

To cancel stopping transmission, press [Cancel].
E Press [Exit].

Note
If you cancel a document while it is being sent, the transmission is halted
as soon as you finish the cancellation procedure. However, some pages of
the document may already have been sent and received at the other end.
If the transmission finishes while you are carrying out this procedure, it
will not be canceled.
If multiple destinations were specified, only one destination number appears.
116
Before the Transmission Is Started

Use this procedure to cancel a transmission after the original is scanned.
This function is useful to cancel a transmission when you notice a mistake in destination or with the originals after storing. To cancel Memory Transmission,
search for the file to be canceled among the files stored in memory, and then delete it.
You can cancel transmission of a file while the file is being sent, stored in memory, or fails to transmit. All the scanned data is deleted from memory.
Important
This function is unavailable with Immediate Transmission.
A Press [Change TX / Info].
B Press [Check / Stop Transmission File].
The list of stored files being transmitted or waiting for transmission appears.
To display only the files being sent, press [Files under TX].
117
Transmission
C Select the file you want to cancel.
If the desired file is not shown, press [U] or [T] to find it.
D Press [Stop Transmission].
E Press [OK].
To cancel another file, repeat steps C and E.

To cancel stopping transmission, press [Cancel].
118
F Press [Exit] twice.

Note
To delete some destinations from a broadcast, see Deleting a Destination
from a Simultaneous Broadcast.
If you cancel a transmission while the file is being sent, some pages of your
file may have already been sent and is received at the other end.
If the transmission finishes while you are carrying out this procedure,
transmission cannot be canceled.
If multiple destinations were specified, only the number of the destinations that have not received the document you sent is shown.
If multiple destinations were specified, only one destination number appears. To display all destinations, press [Check / Change Settings].
Reference
p.176 Deleting a Destination from a Simultaneous Broadcast
119
Transmission
Confirming a Transmission
C Select a file to check.
If multiple destinations were specified, only the name of the destination you
specify first and only the number of destinations that have not received the
document you sent are shown.
120
Confirming a Transmission
D Press [Check / Change Settings].
E Confirm a transmission, and then press [Exit].

121
Transmission
Checking the Storage Result (Memory

Storage Report)
1
This report is printed after an original is stored in memory. It helps you review
the contents and the destinations of stored originals.
Important
If you use Parallel Memory Transmission, the Memory Storage Report is not
printed.
Note
You can turn this report on and off with the User Parameters (switch 03, bit 2)
Even if the machine is set up not to print this report, it is still printed if an original could not be stored.
You can select whether to include part of the original image on the report with
the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu.
You can select whether to display a destination with the User Parameters
(switch 04, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
122
2. Other Transmission Features

This section explains the features of [TX Mode], which you can use to apply transmission functions.
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)

Using this function, you can instruct the machine to delay transmission of your
fax document until a specified later time. This allows you to take advantage of
off-peak telephone charges without having to be by the machine at the time.
Important
If the machine is switched off for about one hour, all fax documents stored in
memory are lost. If documents are lost for this reason, a Power Failure Report
is automatically printed when the operation switch is turned on. Use this report to identify lost documents. For details, see Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function, Troubleshooting.
This function is unavailable with Immediate Transmission. Use Memory

Transmission.
B Press [TX Mode].
C Press [Send Later].
123
D Enter the time using the number keys and select [AM] or [PM]. Then press
[OK].
When entering numbers smaller than 10, add a zero at the beginning.
To cancel Send Later, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step C.
The specified time is shown above the highlighted [Send Later].
E Press [OK].
To check the settings, press [TX Mode].
F Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.

Note
You can specify a time within 24 hours of the current time.
If the current time shown is not correct, change it.

You can cancel the transmission setup for Send Later. See Canceling a
Transmission.
Reference

124

You can confirm sent documents were properly received using e-mail or the
Journal.
The receiver sends back a reception notice message. Once the reception notice
message is received, OK appears in the Result column of the Journal, allowing
the originator to verify the transmission was received.
Important
The Reception Notice feature is only available if the receiver supports MDN
(Message Disposition Notification).
B Press [TX Mode].
C Press [Reception Notice] to highlight it.
D Press [OK].
125
Note
If the fax is not received normally, Error appears in the Result column.
Only the last 50 communications appear in the Journal. If you do not receive a reception notice message before the last 50 communications are finished, OK might not be printed in the Journal's Result column. This may
happen even if the mail is received normally at the other end.
If you specify mailing list addresses, do not set for Reception Notice. Otherwise, you will receive multiple reception notice messages from e-mail recipients, and the Result column will be overwritten each time a new notice
message is received. However, if you receive a reception notice message
indicating an error, Error appears in the Result column and will not be
overwritten, even if you subsequently receive a reception notice message
as OK following the error message.
Reception notice results are only shown in the Journal. The Result column
in all other files, lists, and transmission reports show - -.
Reception notice messages themselves are not recorded in the Journal.
You can select whether or not to print the Reception Notice. This can be set
with User Parameters (switch 21, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
You cannot broadcast e-mail using Reception Notice. The documents are
sent to the destinations in the order in which they were specified.
Reference
126
Setting an E-mail Destination as a BCC
Setting an E-mail Destination as a BCC

E-mail is sent to all specified destinations as bcc.
B Press [TX Mode].
C Press [BCC Transmission] to highlight it.
D Press [OK].

Note
Reference
127
Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail

Use this function to confirm the transmission results by sending an e-mail notification to the specified destination.
Important
Register the e-mail address of the destination for e-mail notification in the
destination list in advance.
B Press [TX Mode].
C Press [E-mail TX Results].
128
D Select the destination of notification, and then press [OK].
2
If you make a mistake, before pressing [OK], press [Clear] or press the selected
Destination key again to turn the highlight off.
[E-mail TX Results] gets highlighted and the destination of notification selected
appears.
E Press [OK].

Note
Reference
129
Entering the Subject

Allows you to enter a subject for the e-mail document you want to send.
B Press [TX Mode].
C Press [Subject].
D Enter the subject.
130
Entering the Subject
E To enter the character strings programmed in the machine, press [User Text],
and then select the character strings you want to enter.
F Press [OK].
The entered subject appears in the Subject field.
G Press [OK].
H Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.

Note
For convenience, program frequently-used subjects in advance in Program / Change / Delete User Text in System Settings.
If you send e-mail without setting a subject, a subject is automatically inserted. For details about how the subject is automatically inserted, see Email Subject and Received Images.
You cannot send a subject only as e-mail without an original.
For the maximum number of characters for an e-mail subject, see Maximum Values.
131
Reference
p.32 E-mail Subject
p.155 Received Images

132
Entering the Text
Entering the Text

Allows you to enter the text for the e-mail document you want to send.
Important
Program text strings in advance in Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message in System Settings.
B Press [TX Mode].
C Press [Text].
D Select a text, and then press [OK].
E Press [OK].
133

Note
You cannot send text only without an original.
Reference
134
Transmission Options
This section describes various functions that you can switch on and off for any
particular transmission, following the procedures given here.
Standard Message Stamp
Use this function to stamp a standard message at the top of the first original sent.
There are four types of standard messages: Confidential, Urgent, Please
phone, and Copy to corres. section
You can also program other messages.
Important
While this function is in use, the third line of the Label Insertion is not printed.
When there is an image around the area where the standard message is to be
stamped, that image is deleted.
Program a standard message in Program / Change / Delete Standard Message in the Facsimile Features menu. See Facsimile Features, General Settings Guide.
A Place the originals, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [TX Mode].
C Press [Option Setting].

D Press [Standard Message].
135
E Select the standard message to be stamped, and then press [OK].
2
The selected standard message is shown above the highlighted [Standard Message].
F Press [OK] twice.

G Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
The machine cannot stamp multiple standard messages.
Note
function. Using the Quick Operation key allows you to omit step B and
step C.
Reference
p.138 Label Insertion
Auto Reduce
When this function is turned on, if the receiver's paper is smaller than the size of
the original you are sending, the document is automatically reduced to fit onto
the paper available at the other end.
136
Important
If you turn this function off, the scale of the original is maintained and some
parts of the image may be deleted when printed at the other end.
2
B Press [TX Mode].
C Select [Option Setting].

D Make sure that [Auto Reduce] is highlighted.
To cancel an Auto Reduce, press [Auto Reduce] to turn the highlight off.
E Press [OK] twice.

F Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
137
Label Insertion
With this function you can have the receiver's name printed on the document
that is received at the other end.
Important
To use this function, set Label Insertion to [On] when registering fax destinations in the Address Book, and also set Label Insertion to on when sending
fax documents.
When there is an image around the area where the Label is to be printed, that
image is deleted.
The receiver's name is printed as follows:
Receiver's name: printed at the top of the page and preceded by To:.
Standard message: the programmed message is printed within the next two
lines.
Set this function as follows:
Set Label Insertion to [On] when programming fax destinations.
Set Label Insertion to on when sending fax documents.
On the Standard Message screen, select the standard message you want to
print.
B Press [TX Mode].
138
D Press [Label Insertion] to highlight it.
2
To cancel Label Insertion, press [Label Insertion] again.
E Press [OK] twice.

Note
step C.
To print a standard message that is not programmed as a default, program

it in advance in Program / Change / Delete Standard Message in the
Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
p.135 Standard Message Stamp
139
Closed Network
If you turn this function on, transmission will only take place if the destination's
Closed Network Code is the same as yours. This function can stop you accidentally sending information to the wrong place.
Important
You need to register a Closed Network Code beforehand in the Facsimile Features menu.
B Press [TX Mode].

D Press [Closed Network] to highlight it.
To cancel a Closed Network transmission, press [Closed Network] again.
E Press [OK] twice.

Note
You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function.
Using the Quick Operation key allows you to omit step B and step C.
140
Reference
SUB Code Transmission

Enable this function to perform SUB Code Transmission.
Important
To perform SUB Code Transmission, a SUB Code must be set in [Adv.Features],

the Address Book, or Keystroke Programs in advance. Even though SUB
Code Transmission is set to on, if the SUB Code is not appended to the specified destination, transmission is in standard fax mode.
When you select a destination that has a registered SUB Code from the Address Book, if SUB Code Transmission is set to off, the SUB Code is not appended and transmission is in standard fax mode.
B Press [TX Mode].

D Press [SUB Code Transmission] to highlight it.
To cancel a SUB Code Transmission, press [SUB Code Transmission] again.
E Press [OK] twice.

141
Note
step C.
Reference
p.106 Setting SUB Codes for Transmission
p.268 Programs
SEP Code Reception

Enable this function to perform SEP Code Reception.
Important
To perform SEP Code Reception, a SEP Code must be set in [Adv.Features], the
Address Book, or Keystroke Programs in advance. Otherwise, even if SEP
Code Reception is set to on, reception is not performed. If the other party's
fax machine has a polling transmission function, the machine performs polling reception.
When you select a destination that has a registered SEP Code from the Address Book, if SEP Code Reception is set to off, the SEP Code is not appended and transmission is in standard fax mode.
B Press [TX Mode].
142
D Press [SEP Code Reception] to highlight it.
2
To cancel SEP Code Reception, press [SEP Code Reception] again.
E Press [OK] twice.

Note
step C.
Reference
p.109 Setting SEP Codes for Reception
p.268 Programs
143
Fax Header Print

When the Fax Header is set to on, the stored name is printed on the receiver's
paper.
You can store two Fax Headers; First Name and Second Name.
For example, if you store your department name in one and your organization
name in the other, you could use the first when sending internal faxes and the
second for external faxes.
Important
In the USA, the Fax Header must contain the telephone number of the line
your machine is connected to. It will be printed on the header of every page
you send. Required in the USA.
B Press [TX Mode].

D Make sure that [Fax Header Print] is highlighted.
E Press [OK] twice.

144
Note
You can program fax header names using the Program Fax Information
function in the Facsimile Features menu.
You can select whether or not dates, fax header names, file numbers, or
page numbers are printed by changing their respective User Parameters
(switch 18, bit 3, 2, 1, 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
If you used the number keys to specify the receiver, the first header name
is printed on the receiver's paper. To print the second header name, contact
step C.
In the USA, law requires that your fax number be included in the Fax
Header. Register the fax number and switch on Fax Header Print with User
Parameters (switch 18, bit 1) in the Facsimile Features menu. See Facsimile Features, General Settings Guide.
Reference
145
146
3. Reception
This section explains reception and reception functions such as printing received
documents or routing received documents to other fax machines.
Types of Reception
This section explains different ways of receiving fax documents.
Immediate Reception
Each page of a fax document is printed as soon as it is received. This method is
used for standard fax documents.
Important
When receiving important fax documents, it is recommended that you confirm the contents of the received documents with the senders.
The machine may not be able to receive fax documents when free memory
space is low.
If free memory reaches 0% during Immediate Reception, any further reception becomes impossible and the current communication is terminated.
Note
Normally this machine receives documents by Immediate Reception. But
Memory Reception is used when Multi-copy Reception or 2 Sided Print
is set to on.
If the Substitute Reception is used, a fax document is not printed: it is stored

in memory.
This machine supports Standard, Detail, Fine (with the optional expansion
memory), and Super Fine (with the optional expansion memory) resolutions
for reception. If you do not have the optional expansion memory, faxes sent
at Super Fine resolution is printed on your machine at Detail resolution. This
may differ from the sender's intended resolution.
147
Reception
Reference
p.49 Resolution
p.148 Memory Reception

p.149 Substitute Reception
p.163 Printing Options
Memory Reception
The machine waits until all pages of the document have been received into memory before printing it.
Important
About one hour after the machine is turned off, all fax documents stored in
memory are lost. If any documents are lost in this way, a Power Failure Report is automatically printed when the operation switch is turned on. Use this
report to identify lost documents. See Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function, Troubleshooting.
The machine may not be able to receive large numbers of documents or documents with high data content. In such cases, it is recommended that you
switch off multi-copy and 2 sided printing, or install the optional expansion
memory.
The machine may not be able to receive fax documents when free memory
space is low.
If free memory reaches 0% during Memory Reception, any further reception
becomes impossible and the current communication is terminated.
Note
Normally this machine receives documents by Immediate Reception. But
Memory Reception is used when Multi-copy Reception or 2 Sided Print
is set to on.
If you have selected Store for Reception File Setting, received document is
saved on the hard disk and will not be printed. You can print those documents by operating the machine or a connected computer, as necessary.
148
Types of Reception
Reference
Substitute Reception
Substitute Reception is used when the machine cannot print any fax documents.
In Substitute Reception, a received fax document is stored in memory instead of
being printed. Fax documents received using Substitute Reception are automatically printed when the condition which caused the machine to use Substitute
Reception is rectified.
Depending on why the machine cannot print, Substitute Reception might be
used for all fax documents received, or for only those documents that match a
condition specified in the User Parameters in the Facsimile Features menu.
The Receive File indicator lights to let you know when fax documents have been
received using Substitute Reception.
APS011S
Important
Reception may not take place if there is not enough free memory.
If free memory reaches 0% during Substitute Reception, any further reception

becomes impossible and the current communication is terminated.
Note
When a fax document is received after Store is selected for Reception File Setting in the Facsimile Features menu, the Receive File indicator lights.
The Receive File indicator may light even when receiving documents using
Immediate Reception.
Reference
149
Reception
Receiving documents unconditionally

If one of the conditions in the following list occurs, the machine receives all fax
documents using Substitute Reception.
Problems
Causes
Solutions
The machine is printing

with a different function.
The machine is busy print- The document is automatically

ing with a different funcprinted after the current job finishes.
tion.
The message Output
The output tray is full.
Remove paper from the output tray.
The cover is open.
Close the cover shown in the display.
Tray is full. Remove paper. appears.
h is lit.
Receiving documents according to parameter-specified settings

If one of the conditions in the following list occurs, the machine receives only
those documents that match the conditions specified in the User Parameters
(switch 05, bit 2, 1) in the Facsimile Features menu.
Problems
Causes
Solutions
h is lit.
Paper is jammed.
Remove the jammed paper.

For details about removing the paper, see Clearing Misfeeds, Troubleshooting.
h is lit.
All trays are out of paper.
Add paper.
For details about adding paper, see
Adding Paper, Toner and Staples,
Troubleshooting.
h is lit.
Toner is empty.
Replace the toner cartridge.

For details about replacing the toner
cartridge, see Adding Paper, Toner
and Staples, Troubleshooting.
The message This
tray is out of order. appears.
150
All trays are out of action.
Call your service representative.
Types of Reception
You can specify the following conditions with the User Parameters (switch 05,
bit 2, 1) in the Facsimile Features menu.
When Own Name or Own Fax Number is received
The machine switches to Substitute Reception only when the sender has programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number. If the power is switched off
for more than an hour, all the documents stored in memory are deleted. In
this case, the Journal can be used to identify the senders of the deleted documents, so you can ask them to resend.
If a sender has not programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number, the
machine may fail to receive an important fax document. It is recommended
that you ask important senders to program an Own Name or Own Fax Number in advance.
Free
The machine switches to Substitute Reception regardless of whether or not
the sender has programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number.
Closed Network Code match
The machine switches to Substitute Reception only when the programmed
Closed Network Code of the other end matches the Closed Network Code of
this machine.
Disable
The machine does not receive any documents.
Reference
Adding Paper, Toner and Staples, Troubleshooting

Clearing Misfeeds, Troubleshooting
151
Reception
Reception Modes
There are two ways you can set up the machine to handle incoming calls:
Manual Reception (the optional handset or an external telephone required)
Auto Reception
You can change the reception mode only if a standard G3 line is used.
You cannot change the reception mode when a line other than the standard G3
line (G3-2 or G3-3) is used.
Note
The optional handset or an external telephone is required to use this machine
as a telephone.
Manual Reception
When a telephone call comes in, the machine rings. If the call is a fax document,
you must switch manually to facsimile mode.
A When the machine rings, pick up the optional handset or the handset of the
external telephone.
B If you hear beeps, press the {Start} key, or hold the {Facsimile} key down for
a few seconds. (The {Start} key is only available in facsimile mode when an
original is not placed.)
C Replace the optional handset or the handset of the external telephone. The
machine will start receiving.
Note
When the operation switch is off, even if the main power switch is on, you
cannot operate this machine using only the optional handset or the handset of the external telephone. You must first press the operation switch to
turn on the machine.
Auto Reception
When a telephone call comes in, the machine automatically receives it as a fax
document. Use this setting on a dedicated fax line.
152
Reception Modes
Switching the Reception Mode

You can switch reception modes using Reception Settings in the Facsimile Features menu.
If you program a Quick Operation key with Switch Reception Mode, you can
switch the reception mode quickly.
A Press [Switch RX Mode].
B Select the reception mode, and then press [OK].

To cancel the selection, press [Cancel].
Reference
153
Reception
Receiving Internet Fax Documents

You can receive e-mail documents by Internet Fax.
There are two methods of receiving e-mail: Auto E-mail Reception and Manual
E-mail Reception.
Important
E-mail with attachments other than TIFF-F format files cannot be received.
Senders receive an Error Mail Notification if their e-mail contains attachments. You can select whether or not the machine sends this message with
User Parameters (switch 21, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu. However,
TIFF-F documents created by the Saving function of DeskTopBinder can be
received.
If [Require Secure Password Authentication (SPA) for all client connections] is selected in Windows Server 2003, reception is not possible.
Note
When Reception Protocol is set to POP3 or IMAP4, you can set the machine
to retain incoming e-mail or delete it from the server in System Settings.
With User Parameters (switch 21, bit 1) in the Facsimile Features menu, you
can have the machine send the return receipt in response to the reception notice request attached to the sent e-mail.
Reference
Auto E-mail Reception

When this function is turned on, the machine periodically checks the e-mail
server for incoming e-mail and downloads it as necessary.
Note
If memory runs out, e-mail will not be received at the specified intervals. Reception will resume when sufficient memory becomes available.
E-mail auto-reception should be set in System Settings. When you select

auto-reception, set the reception interval in minutes.
E-mail can be received manually.
Reference
p.155 Manual E-mail Reception
154
Receiving Internet Fax Documents
Manual E-mail Reception

Follow these steps to receive a fax by accessing the e-mail server manually.
Important
Program the Manual E-mail RX function to a Quick Operation key beforehand.
A Press [Manual E-mail RX].
The machine accesses the server to check for e-mail and receives any new e-mail.
B Check the message, and then press [Exit].

Reference
Received Images
Here is an example of an Internet Fax document sent from this machine and received on a computer using the Outlook Express e-mail application.
The received image varies according to the e-mail application.
Important
When Internet Fax e-mail is sent to computer, the following information is always inserted in the e-mail text: This E-mail was sent from Host
Name (product name) Queries to: Administrator's e-mail address To check the host name and e-mail address, see System Settings,
155
Reception
ALV011S
1. E-mail transmitted without speci-
6. Subject
fying a subject in TX Mode.
Shows the subject specified in TX

Mode at the time of transmission. If no
subject is specified, one is automatically
assigned in the format shown in 1 above.
2. E-mail transmitted with a subject

specified in TX Mode.
3. From
The name (e-mail address) of the sender
4. Date
The date and time of e-mail transmission
5. To
7. The message is inserted in all email. xxxx is the machine name.

8. Attachment File
Any document included by the sender is
displayed as an attached document.
The e-mail address of the recipient
Note
The display format of the sender name differs according to that of the Stamp
Sender Name setting and other functions.
The display format of the subject varies according to Stamp Sender Name and
other settings.
Reference
p.32 E-mail Subject
156
Reception Functions
Reception Functions
This section explains useful functions for receiving fax documents.
Routing Received Documents

This section describes how to route received documents using SUB Codes.
Important
Documents cannot be routed to folders using this function.
Routing received documents with SUB Code

This machine can route received documents using SUB Codes.
When a document is received, its SUB Code is compared to SUB Codes programmed in Personal Boxes, and if a match is found, the document is routed to
the destination whose SUB Code is specified.
ALT003S
Important
You must set the Personal Box and register a delivery destination beforehand.
Personal Boxes can be programmed in Box Setting in the Facsimile Features
menu.
This function is not available when you set received documents to be delivered to the network delivery server. Delivery of received documents can be
set in System Settings.
Note
If the destination specified is an e-mail address, the received document is
routed to that destination as e-mail.
You can route documents received from any fax machine, regardless of manufacturer.
Reference

157
Reception
Transferring Received Documents

The machine can transfer received documents by using SUB Codes.
Originals sent with a SUB Code that matches the SUB Code programmed as a
Transfer Box are received then relayed to the programmed receiver.
Important
Transfer Boxes and Receiving Stations must be set up in order to transfer received documents. Transfer Boxes can be programmed in Box Setting in the
Note
When e-mail addresses are programmed as receivers, received documents
are sent in an e-mail format to the receivers.
Transfer results are not sent back to the requesting party.

You can transfer data received from any fax machine, regardless of manufacturer.
Reference
SUB Code Transfer Report

You can check the results of transmission to Receiving Stations. The machine
prints this report when it has finished transmitting to Receiving Stations.
Note
You can select whether the SUB Code Transfer Report be automatically printed using the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 1) in the Facsimile Features
menu.
You can set whether a portion of the original image is printed on the report
with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu.
Unprogrammed indicates the document could not be sent because the end
receiver is not programmed.
-- indicates that the Internet Fax document was sent to the mail server programmed in this machine.
For the maximum number of destinations you can program in a group, see
Maximum Values.
Reference
158
Reception Functions
Forwarding Received Documents

This machine can forward received documents to other destinations programmed in this machine.
ALT004S
Note
A fax number, Internet Fax address, IP-Fax destination, or folder address can
be set as a forwarding destination.
If an e-mail address is programmed as the destination, documents received

are forwarded as e-mail.
You need to specify the forwarding destination in advance. Forwarding can
be set under Reception Settings, in the Facsimile Features menu.
If you would like the machine to forward received documents to a particular
destination according to the sender, specify the Forwarding destination for
each sender under Facsimile Features, Reception Settings, Program Special
Sender. Documents from other senders are forwarded to the default Forwarding destination specified for this function.
You can select whether the machine prints out the documents it forwards
with User Parameters (switch 11, bit 6) in the Facsimile Features menu.
You can set whether or not the Folder Transfer Result Report is transmitted
to the specified e-mail address if folders are programmed as the forwarding
destinations to which documents are sent from all senders or Special Senders.
For details, see Facsimile Features, General Settings Guide.
Maximum Values.
159
Reception
Reference
SMTP Reception Using Internet Fax

You can receive a document sent by Internet Fax using SMTP reception.
With SMTP reception, e-mail is received as soon as it is sent to the e-mail address
set by the machine.
ALT005S
Important
Set this machine beforehand using the MX record of the DNS server to enable
SMTP reception.
Set the reception protocol to SMTP under System Settings.

Note
You can route received e-mail to other Internet Fax machines as well.
Even if SMTP reception is enabled on the DNS server, e-mail sent from the
SMTP server will not be received and the machine reports an error if SMTP
reception is not set under System Settings. Also, the SMTP server sends an
error notification to the originator.
If an error occurs while receiving e-mail, reception is aborted, the e-mail is deleted, and Error Report is printed. Also, the SMTP server will send an error
notification to the originator.
When the SMTP server attempts to route received documents to this machine
while the machine is transmitting e-mail, the machine will respond to the
SMTP server with a busy signal. Then, the SMTP server usually tries resending the documents until the set timeout.
Reference
p.154 Auto E-mail Reception
160
Reception Functions
Routing e-mail received via SMTP

E-mail received via SMTP can be routed to other fax machines.
ALT006S
Important
Before routing e-mail received via SMTP, you first must set SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings to On in the Facsimile Features menu.
Depending on security settings, this function may not be available.

The originator can request transfer of e-mail sent to another fax machine by specifying the e-mail address as follows:
Fax Number
fax=destination fax number@host name of this machine.domain name
Example: to transfer to fax number 212-123-4567:
fax=2121234567@abc.company.com
Single destination programmed in the destination list
fax=qregistration number of 5 digits or less@host name of this machine.domain name
Example: to transfer to the destination number 00001:
fax=q00001@abc.company.com
Group destination programmed in the destination list
fax=qppregistration number of 5 digits or less@host name of this machine.domain name
Example: to transfer to the destination programmed under Group number
00004:
fax=qpp00004@abc.company.com
161
Reception
Note
E-mail received via SMTP can also be routed to single or group destinations
programmed in the destination list.
If an e-mail transfer request is received when the SMTP RX File Delivery Settings is Off in the Facsimile Features menu, this machine responds with an
error message to the SMTP server.
You can make settings that limit transfer to specified originators.
Using this function, you can also send documents from your e-mail application to e-mail addresses and G3 fax machines' destinations through this machine simultaneously.
Maximum Values.
Reference
JBIG Reception
If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group) compression, you can send
photographic originals faster than with other methods of compression. It allows
you to receive documents sent in the JBIG format through JBIG Transmission.
Important
This function is not available with Internet Fax function.
Auto Fax Reception Power-Up

This machine can be set to shut down automatically if no one has used it for a
while. In these situations, even though the operation switch is off, the machine
can still receive incoming documents as long as the main power switch is on.
Important
Reception is not possible if both the operation switch and main power switch
are turned off.
Note
You can set whether documents are printed as soon as they are received (Immediate Reception) with the User Parameters (switch 14, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
You can also have fax documents received by Memory Reception (Substitute
Reception) printed after the machine is turned on.
Reference
162
Printing Options
Printing Options
This section explains useful functions for printing received documents.
Print Completion Beep

When this function is turned on, the machine beeps to let you know when a received document is printed.
Note
You can alter the volume of the beep or turn it off completely using Adjust
Sound Volume in the Facsimile Features menu (set the volume to the minimum level).
Reference
Checkered Mark
When this function is turned on, a Checkered Mark is printed on the first page
of fax documents to help you separate them.
Note
You can turn this function on or off using Checkered Mark in the Facsimile
Features menu.
Reference
163
Reception
Center Mark
When this function is enabled, marks are printed halfway down the left side and
at the top center of each page received.
This makes it easy for you to position a hole puncher correctly when you file received documents.
Note
The Center Mark may deviate a little from the exact center of the edge.
You can enable or disable this function using Center Mark in the Facsimile
Features menu.
Reference
Reception Time
You can have the date, time, and file number printed at the bottom of the document when it is received.
Note
You can turn this function on or off using Print Reception Time in the Facsimile Features menu.
When a received document is printed on two or more sheets, the reception

time is printed on the last page.
The time when the document was printed can also be recorded on the document. If you need this function, contact your service representative.
Reference
164
Printing Options
Two-Sided Printing
You can have a received document printed on both sides of a sheet.
Important
To use this function, all pages of the received document must be of the same
size-inform the sending party of this beforehand if necessary. You must also
have paper set in the machine of the same size as that sent by the sending party. In Two-Sided Printing, this machine will correctly receive in A3L, B4 JIS
(Japanese Industrial Standard)L, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL(11"17"L,
81/2"14"L, 81/2"11"KL). The following table shows the results that can be
achieved when receiving with this machine.
APS001S
This function works only when all pages are of the same width and received
into memory.
165
Reception
Note
You can turn this function on or off using 2 Sided Print in the Facsimile Features menu.
Printouts may vary depending on how the sender sets the originals.
You can select to have documents only from selected senders printed in this
way.
Stored documents of the same size are printed on the same paper. Some
stored documents may be unavailable for this printing option.
Reference
180-degree rotation printing

When printing on both sides of the paper, this machine rotates images as shown
in the diagram.
CP2B02E0
Multi-Copy Reception
If you switch this function on, multiple copies of each incoming fax document is
printed.
You can also select to have multiple copies made of documents from particular
senders.
166
Printing Options
Note
The maximum number of copies that can be made for each document is 10.
When using the Multi-copy function with specified senders, the maximum
number of copies is 10.
You can turn this function on or off using Reception File Print Quantity in the
The machine will use Memory Reception for Multi-copy Reception.
Reference
Image Rotation
If you have set paper in the standard tray K, incoming fax documents are automatically rotated to fit onto the paper.
Note
If you specified a tray for Paper Tray in the Facsimile Features menu, the
paper loaded in the specified tray is selected.
167
Reception
Page Separation and Length Reduction

If the size of a received document is longer than the paper loaded in the machine,
each page of the document can be split and printed on several sheets, or reduced
and printed on a single sheet.
For example, this function splits the document if the document length is 20 mm
(0.79") or longer than the paper used. The document is reduced if it is less than
20 mm (0.79"). When a document is split, an asterisk (p) is inserted at the split
position and about 10 mm (0.39") of the split area is duplicated on the top of the
second sheet.
Note
Your service representative can customize this function with the following
settings:
Reduction
Print split mark
Overprinting
Overprinting length
Guideline for split
You can adjust the overprinting and reduction lengths within the following
ranges:
Overprinting length: 4 mm (0.16"), 10 mm (0.39"), 15 mm (0.59")
Guideline for split: 5-155 mm (5 mm steps)/0.2-6.1" (0.2" steps)
168
Printing Options
Page Reduction
If you receive a document that is longer than the paper in the tray, the machine
usually prints it on two pages. If you turn this function on, the machine reduces
the width and length of the received image so that it will fit on one page.
If A4L paper is loaded and a document of B4 JISL size is received, the machine
will reduce the document to a single A4L sheet.
Note
When this function is used, the printing quality may not be as good as usual.
Reference
p.168 Page Separation and Length Reduction
TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber Identification Print)

Usually the sender's Fax Header is printed on received documents. When you
receive an Internet Fax document, the e-mail address of the sender is printed. If
the sender has not programmed their Fax Header, you will not be able to identify them. However, if you turn this function on, the sender's Own Name or Own
Fax Number is printed instead so you can find out where the document came
from.
Note
You can turn this function on or off in the User Parameters (switch 02, bit 3)
Reference
169
Reception
If There Is No Paper of the Correct Size

If there is no paper in the machine that matches the size of a received document,
the machine will choose a paper size based on the paper available.
Page reduction
Disabled
Reduction in Sub-scan Direction
Enabled
Page Separation Threshold
20 mm (0.79")
Width or Length Priority
Width
Note
The document is split over two sheets of paper depending on the paper size.
Paper placed in the bypass tray is not usually selected for printing a received
document. However, you can use this tray if you select the bypass tray as the
main paper tray using Reception with Specified Senders.
Widths that this machine can receive are A4, B4 JIS, LT (81/2"11") and A3.
Any documents narrower than A4 or LT (81/2"11") are received at A4 or LT
(81/2"11") width. The length of documents depends on the document.
The paper size used to print a received document may be different from the
size of the sent original.
Reference
p.167 Image Rotation
p.168 Page Separation and Length Reduction

p.169 Page Reduction
Setting priority trays

With the same size of paper loaded into multiple trays, you can make the machine use one tray for one function and another tray for another function.
For example, you may load white A4 paper into tray 1 to use when making copies, and yellow A4 paper into tray 2 to use when printing received faxes. You can
then easily identify for which purpose paper has been output. You can perform
this setting in Paper Tray Priority: Facsimile in System Settings.
Note
When a different size of document from the priority tray is received, the tray
containing the same size of paper as the received document is used.
Reference
170
Printing Options
Just size printing

If you enable this function, received documents are printed on the sheet that has
the highest priority.
This function is enabled with User Parameters (switch 05, bit 5) in the Facsimile
Features menu.
If the paper tray is not stocked with paper of a suitable size to print a received
document, a message appears on the display prompting you to load paper of the
required size. When you have loaded new paper, press [Exit] to print the document.
Note
After pressing [Exit], procedure varies depending on machine status when the
message occurred.
If any received documents or reports were being printed automatically, the

printer automatically continues printing from where it left off.
If any documents or reports were being printed manually, the printer does
not resume printing. Perform the operation from the beginning again.
Reference
Having incoming documents printed on paper from the bypass tray

You can print documents sent from Specified Senders on paper from the bypass
tray.
Set as follows:
Program a special sender and select the Bypass Tray for the paper tray type.
In Program Special Sender in the Facsimile Features menu, turn on the
Special Reception Function in Initial Set Up.
171
Reception
Note
You can load a maximum of 100 sheets of standard paper in the bypass tray.
You can use a size of paper not loaded in the paper tray(s) in the bypass tray.
The machine can detect A6L, A5L, A4L, A3L (51/2"81/2"L, 81/2"11"L,
11"17"L) paper sizes. When you load any other size, specify the paper size.
However, if the specified paper size and size of paper set in the bypass tray
do not match, paper jams may occur, or the image may be shortened.
Documents printed on paper smaller than A4 may be shortened, or split
across sheets.
Paper longer than 600 mm may be creased, not sent, or jam.
Print area depends on optional expansion memory, resolution, and vertical
length of originals.
If you use this function, Image Rotation and 180-degree rotating printing are
not possible.
Reference
Where Incoming Documents Are Delivered - Output Tray

You can specify the output tray or output position to facilitate separation of received documents.
Specifying tray for lines

Use this function to specify the output tray for each line port.
You can specify the document feeding tray for each port (telephone, Internet
Fax, IP-Fax). For example, you can specify documents received through the G31 port to be fed to the Internal Tray 1 and documents received through the G32 port to be fed to the Internal Tray 2, facilitating separation of files. You can
also set the machine to output Internet Fax documents and ordinary faxes onto
different trays.
Important
The optional extra G3 interface unit is required to use the extra G3 line.
Note
To use this function, specify the port and destination using [Specify Tray for
Lines] in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
172
Printing Options
Tray Shift
Use this function to shift the output position for each document, so you can separate received documents easily.
Important
The optional finisher or shift sort tray unit is required.
When the optional finisher unit is selected for fax output, you can use the Tray
Shift function whenever a fax or report is printed.
This is useful for separating faxes stacked in the finisher output tray. For example, if the previous incoming fax was output to the left, the next incoming fax
will be output to the right and vice-versa.
Note
Reference
173
Reception
174
4. Changing/Confirming
Communication Information
This section explains the features of [Change TX / Info], which you can use to confirm communication results on the screen or printed reports.
Changing the Settings of Files in Memory

After you have pressed the {Start} key (after scanning originals), you can check
and edit the destination or settings of Memory Transmission. You can also cancel a transmission, change the settings of a transmission, print a stored file, print
a list of stored files, and resend a file which the machine failed to transmit.
Note
If the No transmission files found. message appears on the screen after you press [Check / Stop Transmission File], no files are being stored or sent
by Memory Transmission.
You cannot check or edit a file being sent. Also a SUB Code Transmission file
or stored file to be printed as a report cannot be checked or edited.
175
Deleting a Destination from a Simultaneous Broadcast

You can delete selected broadcasting destinations.
Important
If you delete a destination that is the only destination for a transmission, the
transmission is canceled.
C Select the file from which you want to delete a destination.
176
E Press [Change] for the destination you want to delete.
F Press the {Clear/Stop} key to delete the destination, and then press [OK].
APS009S
Pressing the {Clear/Stop} key deletes by single digits the fax number or IP-Fax
address. The Internet Fax address can be entirely deleted at once by pressing
the {Clear/Stop} key.
G Press [Exit].
To delete another destination, repeat from step C.
H Press [Exit] twice.
177
Adding a Destination
You can add a destination for broadcasting.
4
C Select the file to which you want to add a destination.
178
E Press [Add Destination].
F Specify the destination using the number keys or Destination keys, and
then press [OK].
You can switch the transmission type between fax/IP-Fax and Internet Fax by
pressing [Fax] or [Internet Fax].
To add an e-mail address, switch the type of transmission to Internet Fax by
pressing [Internet Fax]. Then, press [Manual Entry] and enter the e-mail address.
You can also program a SUB Code or SEP Code by pressing [Adv.Features].
G Press [Exit].
Repeat from step C, if you want to add another destination.
179
Changing the Transmission Time

You can change the transmission time specified with Send Later.
You can also delete the transmission time. If the transmission time is deleted, the
file is transmitted immediately.
4
C Select the file for which you want to change or cancel the transmission
time.
180
E Press [Change TX Time].
F Press [Clear], re-enter the transmission time using the number keys, and
then press [OK].
If you press [Transmit Now], the file is transmitted immediately. However, if

there is a file on standby, that file is sent first.
G Press [Exit].
Repeat from step C, if you want to change another transmission time.
181
Changing the SMTP Server Setting

You can change the settings for whether or not to bypass the SMTP server.
4
C Select a file whose SMTP server setting you want to change.
182
E Press [Change].
F Press [SMTP].
G Select [Yes] or [No], and then press [OK].
183
H Press [OK].
I Press [Exit].
Repeat from step C to change the SMTP server settings of other recipients.
J Press [Exit] twice.
184
Printing a File from Memory
Printing a File from Memory

If you want to check the contents of a file that is stored in memory and not yet
sent, use this procedure to print it out.
4
C Select the file you want to print.
If multiple destinations were specified, only the number of the destinations

that have not received the document you sent is shown.
185
D Press [Print].
If you want two-sided printing, press [Print on 2 Sides].

To cancel printing, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step C.
To cancel printing after pressing the {Start} key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step C.
Repeat from step C, if you want to print another file.

Note
You can also print files that have not been successfully transmitted.
186
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List)
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX

File List)
Print this list if you want to find out which files are stored in memory and what
their file numbers are. Knowing the file number can be useful (for example when
erasing files).
C Press [Print List].
To cancel printing before pressing the {Start} key, press [Cancel]. The screen
returns to that displayed before pressing [Print List].
187

To cancel printing after pressing the {Start} key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step C.
E Press [Exit] twice.

Note
The contents of a file stored in memory can also be printed.
You can set whether or not to display a sender name with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
188
Resending a File
Resending a File
Machine memory stores documents that could not be successfully transmitted
using Memory Transmission. Use this procedure to resend these documents.
Important
Set Store documents in memory that could not be transmitted to On in
User Parameters (switch 24, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
C Select the file you want to resend.

TX failed is displayed for files that could not be sent.
If multiple destinations were specified, only the name of the destination you
specify first and only the number of destinations that have not received the
document you sent are shown.
189
D Press [Transmit Failed File].
To add a destination, press [Add Destination], and then specify the destination.
E Press [OK].
Repeat from step C to resend another file.

To cancel transmissions, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step D.

Transmission starts.
Note
Files that could not be transmitted are kept for either 24 or 72 hours, depending on the setting you make in User Parameters (switch 24, bit 1) in
Reference
190
Checking the Transmission Result (Transmission File Status)
Checking the Transmission Result

(Transmission File Status)
You can confirm transmission by the display, report, or e-mail.
Confirming on Display
Follow these steps to display the transmission results.
B Select [Transmission File Status].

C Check the transmission results.
Transmission results are displayed, from the latest result down, in groups of
nine.
When a fax is sent, Destination shows the Own Fax Number or Fax Header
information of the receiver. When an Internet Fax is sent, the e-mail address
and name programmed in the destination list appears. For a transmission
from a computer, -- LAN-Fax --> is shown.
Depending on security settings, the destination may appear as p.

191
Note
Only the transmission results of the latest communications are displayed.
For the maximum number of communication results you can check on this
machine, see Maximum Values.
You can view sent fax documents and their lists, using a Web Image Monitor
on a network computer. For details, see the Web Image Monitor's Help.
If a transmission is completed while you are using this function, the result will not
appear. To view the latest result, exit Transmission File Status, and then try again.
function. Using the key allows you to omit step A.
When documents are transmitted from the computer to the machine, --LAN-Fax -->
appears. To check if the documents are sent to the receiver, confirm the same File No.
Reference
Confirming by Report
Print reports for confirmation.
Memory Transmission
If a document cannot be sent, a Communication Failure Report is automatically printed. Or, you
can use the Communication Result Report to check each transmission result regardless of status.
This report is printed each time a Memory Transmission is completed if
turned on with User Parameters (switch 03, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
You can also print the report by programming the TX Status Report to a Quick
Operation key and pressing this when specifying a destination.
If you turn the Communication Result Report on, the Communication Failure
Report is not printed.
You can confirm the result with an Immediate TX Result Report.
Select to print this report in User Parameters (switch 03, bit 5) in the Facsimile
Features menu. A report is printed after every Immediate Transmission is completed.
You can also print the report by programming the TX Status Report to a Quick
Operation key and pressing this when specifying a destination.
Reference
p.194 Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)
p.194 Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)

p.195 Communication Failure Report
192
Confirming by E-mail
Use the E-mail TX Results function to send reports by e-mail to a computer, and
then confirm them on the computer.
The available reports are:
Communication Result Report.
Immediate TX Result Report.
Polling with SEP Rx Result.
Important
You must first register the e-mail addresses of the destinations the report is to
be sent to on the destination list.
Note
By programming the E-mail TX Results to a Quick Operation key in advance,
you can send transmission results by e-mail after each transmission is completed. Select the destination for notification from the Internet Fax destinations in the destination list.
When using the Sender Name function to select the sender, the transmission
results are sent to senders' e-mail addresses that have been registered. Select
the sender from the Internet Fax destinations in the destination list.
If you send fax documents from a computer, use LAN-Fax Driver to specify
whether or not the LAN-Fax Result Report is sent to the computer.
Reference
p.109 Setting SEP Codes for Reception

p.194 Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)
p.198 Print Journal
Confirming by Report and E-mail

You can confirm transmission results using both the E-mail TX Results function,
which sends the results by e-mail, and the Communication Result Report printed by the machine.
You can set whether to use both of these together in User Parameters (switch 10,
bit 6) in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
193
Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)

This report is printed when a Memory Transmission is completed, so you can
check the result of the transmission.
Note
whether a report e-mail is sent after transmission.
If two or more destinations are specified, this report is printed after the fax
document is sent to all the destinations.
If the machine is set up not to print this report and the fax document could
not be successfully transmitted, a Communication Failure Report is printed.
You can set whether or not to display a destination with the User Parameters
The Pg(s) column gives the total number of pages. The Page Not Sent column
gives the number of pages that could not be sent successfully.
-- indicates that the Internet Fax document was sent to the mail server programmed in this machine. (However, this does not mean the e-mail was delivered.)
Reference
p.195 Communication Failure Report
Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)

If you turn this report on, a report is printed after every Immediate Transmission
so you have a record of whether the transmission was successful or not.
If the machine is set up not to print this report and the fax document could not
be successfully transmitted, the Error Report is printed instead.
194
Note
whether a report e-mail is sent after transmission.
You can switch this report on or off in the User Parameters (switch 03, bit 5)
You can set whether or not to display a destination with the User Parameters
If the page was sent successfully, the Page column gives the total number of
pages sent successfully.
Reference
Communication Failure Report

This report is printed when a document could not be successfully transmitted
with Memory Transmission.
If the machine is set up to print a Communication Result Report, this report is
not printed. Use it to keep a record of failed transmissions so you can send them
again.
Note
You can select whether the Communication Failure Report is automatically
printed using the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 1) in the Facsimile Features
menu.
This report is only printed if the Communication Result Report is turned off
and a document could not be successfully transmitted with Memory Transmission.
You can display a destination with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 4) in
The Pg(s) column gives the total number of pages. The Page Not Sent column
gives the number of pages that could not be sent successfully.
Unprogrammed indicates that the document could not be sent because the
forwarding destination is not programmed.
-- indicates that the Internet Fax document was sent to the mail server programmed in this machine. (However, this does not mean the e-mail was delivered.)
Reference
195
Checking the Reception Result

(Reception File Status)
Confirm the reception result on the screen or in a report.
Confirming on Display
Follow these steps to display the reception result.
B Press [Reception File Status].

C Check the reception results.
Reception results are displayed, from the latest result, in groups of nine.
When a fax or IP-Fax is received, Sender shows the Own Fax Number or
Fax Header information. When an Internet Fax is received, the sender's e-mail
address appears.

196
Checking the Reception Result (Reception File Status)
Note
Only the reception results of the latest communications are displayed. For
the maximum number of communication results you can check on this machine, see Maximum Values.
You can view received fax documents and their lists, using a Web Image
Monitor on a network computer. For details, see the Web Image Monitor's
Help.
If a document is received while you are using this function, the result will
not appear. To view the latest result, exit Reception File Status, and then
try again.
function. Using the key allows you to omit step A.
Reference
Confirming by Report
Print a report to confirm reception results.
Journal
Print the Journal to confirm the latest reception results. For details, see Journal.
Reference
p.203 Journal
197
Print Journal
You can print the Journal manually.
Important
The contents of a Journal printed automatically are deleted after printing.
Keep the journal if you require a record of transmissions and receptions.
Printing the Journal

To print the Journal manually, select the printing method: All, Print per File
No., or Print per User.
Note
You can set whether the Journal is automatically printed after every 50 communications in User Parameters (switch 03, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features
menu.
Depending on security settings, the Journal is not automatically printed.
If the optional extra G3 interface unit is installed, you can set whether the
Journal is printed by line type with the User Parameters (switch 19, bit 1) in
function. Using the key allows you to omit the step where you press [Change
TX / Info].
Depending on security settings, the destination may not appear.
For the maximum number of communication results printed in the Journal,
see Maximum Values.
Reference
198
Print Journal
All
Prints the results of communications in the order made.
4
B Press [Print Journal].
C Select [All].

To cancel a file printing, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of
step C.
199
Print per File No.

Prints only the results of communications specified by file number.
4
C Select [Print per File No.].
D Enter a 4-digit file number.

To cancel a file printing, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step C.
200
Print Journal
Print per User

Prints the results of communications by individual senders.
4
C Select [Print per User].
D Select a user.
Press [Cancel] if the user is not registered. The display returns to that of step C.
E Press [OK] after checking the user name shown on the display.
Press [Cancel] if a wrong user name is selected. The display returns to that of
step C.
201

To cancel a file printing, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of
step C.
G Press [Exit] twice.
202
Print Journal
Journal
This section explains the items printed in the Journal.
ALV014S
1. Printing date
5. Other end
Shows the date and time the report was

printed.
For fax destinations

Shows the name (for display) programmed by the other end.
Shows the programmed fax number if
the name (for display) was not programmed.
If neither name nor fax number was
programmed by the other end, an entered
fax number or a name programmed in a
destination list is shown for transmissions.
2. Programmed Fax Header

Shows the sender name programmed for
printing.
3. Date
Shows the transmission or reception
date.
4. Time
Shows the transmission or reception start
time.
203
For Internet Fax destinations

At time of transmission, it shows the
e-mail address or name programmed
in the destination list. At time of reception, it shows the e-mail address of
the sender.
At time of broadcasting transmission,
it shows the number of destinations
after the e-mail addresses or names of
destination.
When documents are transmitted
from the computer to the machine, -LAN-Fax --> appears. To check if the
documents are sent to the receiver,
confirm the same File No.
For IP-Fax destinations
Shows the IP-Fax destination or name
programmed in the destination list.
The fax destination details appear on
the reception report.
For Folder destinations
Shows the name programmed in the
destination list.
6. Communication mode
For fax transmissions and receptions
After the line type, T for outgoing
faxes or R for incoming faxes, and
the communication mode appear in
alphabetical letters or symbols. If the
optional extra G3 interface unit is installed, G3-1, G3-2, or G3-3 appears.
For Internet Fax transmissions and receptions
After
, T for outgoing e-mail or
R for incoming e-mail, and the communication mode appear in alphabetical letters or symbols. A Q
indicates outgoing e-mail for which a
Reception Notice is set in TX Mode,
whereas an A indicates reception
notice e-mail.
For IP-Fax transmissions and receptions

After
, T for outgoing faxes or
R for incoming faxes, and the communication mode appear in alphabetical letters or symbols.
For forwarding to the folder destinations
After
(folder mark) and T for
outgoing faxes, the communication
mode appears in alphabetical letters
or symbols.
7. Communication time
Shows time taken for transmissions or receptions.
8. Number of pages
Shows the number of pages transmitted
or received.
9. Communication result
Shows the result of transmissions or receptions.
OK: All pages were properly transmitted
or received. When Reception Notice is activated using TX Mode, receipt of Reception Notice is shown. The results of
received documents that were routed are
preceded by n.
--: The Internet Fax document was sent to
the mail server programmed in this machine. (However, this does not mean the
e-mail was delivered.) When using LANFax, the results of communication from a
computer to this machine are shown.
Error: A communication error occurred.
D: Power was disconnected during communication. Not all fax documents were
transmitted.
10. User name

Shows the sender's name.
11. File number

Shows file management numbers.
Note
To prioritize a fax number or name programmed in the destination list, contact your service representative.
204
Print Journal
Transmitting Journal by E-mail

Use this function to send the Journal to the administrator's e-mail address.
The Journal is sent automatically after every 50 communications. A CSV format
Journal is attached to the e-mail.
Important
To transmit the Journal by e-mail, it is necessary to make settings with User
Parameters (switch 21, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu.
This machine does not store sent CSV files. It is recommended that you double-check the e-mail address of an administrator before the Journal is transmitted. If the e-mail address of the administrator is not correct, your
important Journal may be lost. Sent CSV files are not left on the fax machine.
Note
If the administrator's address is wrong, you may not be able to acquire the
Journal.
If the Journal fails to be transmitted in e-mail format, the Journal is printed

out.
The name of an attached CSV file is JOURNALnyear, month, date, hours,
minutes. For example, the file name transmitted in 14:40 on 20th, December,
2006 is JOURNAL200612201440.csv.
The subject of a Journal sent by e-mail begins with Journal.
Reference
Journal by e-mail
If the setting is made so that the Journal is transmitted as e-mail, it is transmitted
to the e-mail address of an administrator.
Note
To transmit the Journal, it is necessary to make settings with the User Parameters (switch 21, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu.
To set the administrator e-mail address, see System Settings, General Settings Guide.
Depending on security settings, the Destination/Sender name may not appear.
Reference
205
Printing/Deleting Received and Stored

Documents (Print/Delete Stored
Reception File)
You can print documents that are received and stored on the hard disk. You can
also delete unwanted documents.
Important
Make the settings for received and stored documents in Reception File Setting in the Facsimile Features menu before using this function.
Note
If you have selected to store received documents and specified an e-mail address for notification of receipt, fax reception notification can be sent to that
e-mail address.
For the maximum number of received documents you can store on the machine's hard disk, see Maximum Values.
You can view and print received and stored documents using a Web Image
Monitor or DeskTopBinder.
Reference
p.261 Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser

DeskTopBinder's manuals and Help
206
Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete Stored Reception File)
Printing Received and Stored Documents

Use the following procedure to print documents saved on the hard disk.
4
B Press [Print / Delete Stored Reception File].
C Select a file to be printed, and then press [Print].
To cancel printing, press [Cancel].

To delete the document after printing, press [Delete File after Printing].
To perform two-sided printing, press [Print on 2 Sides] before pressing the {Start} key.

To stop printing after pressing the {Start} key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step C.

Note
This function allows you to print only received and stored documents.
You cannot print and delete received documents using the Document Server function.
function. Using the Quick Operation key allows you to omit step A.
You can specify and print multiple documents. For the maximum number
of documents you can specify at a time, see Maximum Values.
207
Reference
Deleting Received and Stored Documents

Use the following procedure to delete documents stored on the hard disk.
B Press [Print / Delete Stored Reception File].

C Select a file to be deleted, and then press [Delete].
D Press [Yes].
To cancel a deletion, press [No]. The display returns to that of step C.

Note
You cannot delete a document while another person is previewing or
printing it using a Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder.
You can specify and delete multiple documents. For the maximum number
of documents you can specify at one time, see Maximum Values.
208
Reference
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock

This is a security function designed to prevent unauthorized users from reading
your documents. If Memory Lock Reception is switched on, all received documents are stored in memory and are not automatically printed. To print the documents, you have to enter the Memory Lock ID. When your machine has
received a document with Memory Lock Reception, the Confidential File (i)
indicator blinks.
Before using this function, the following preparations are required in the Facsimile Features menu.
Program your Memory Lock ID.
Set Memory Lock Reception to On.
Important
If the main power switch is turned off for about an hour, all documents protected by Memory Lock Reception are deleted. When this happens, the Power
Failure Report is printed so you can confirm which documents have been deleted. For details, see Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function,
Troubleshooting.
A Confirm that the Confidential File indicator is blinking.
APS010S
B Press [Change TX / Info].
C Press [Print Memory Lock].

If no documents were received while Memory Lock Reception was switched
on, the message No reception file. is shown. Press [Exit] .
209
D Enter a 4-digit Memory Lock ID with the number keys, and then press the
{Start} key.
To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
If the Memory Lock ID does not match, the Specified code does not
correspond to programmed Memory Lock ID. message appears. Press
[Exit] and retry after checking the Memory Lock ID.
E Press [Exit].
Note
If Memory Lock Reception and received document storage are both set to
on, Memory Lock Reception is unavailable and received documents become stored documents.
Even when Memory Lock Reception is available, if free memory is insufficient, reception is not possible.
You can also apply a Memory Lock Reception to documents that come
only from certain senders.
Documents received by SEP Code Reception are automatically printed
even if this function is switched on.
function. Using the key allows you to omit step B.
If you print a Memory Lock File, it is deleted.
Reference
p.206 Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete
Stored Reception File)

210
Personal Boxes
Personal Boxes
You can receive confidential documents to Personal Boxes.
Important
Before using this function, set the Personal Box in advance.
Personal Boxes
Storing your documents in a Personal Box prevents unauthorized users reading
them.
When you specify a receiver for the Personal Box, incoming documents are forwarded directly to the destination you specify. You can specify a fax number, email address, or IP-Fax destination as the receiver.
To be able to receive documents into a Personal Box, you must inform the sender
of the SUB Code programmed for that Personal Box and ask them to send the
document using SUB Code Transmission with that SUB Code. When your machine has received a confidential document, the Confidential File (i) indicator
lights.
Important
If the main power switch is turned off for about an hour, all documents received
into Personal Boxes are deleted. When this happens, the Power Failure Report
is printed so you can confirm which documents have been deleted. For details,
see Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function, Troubleshooting.
Documents delivered to registered destinations are deleted from Personal

Boxes.
Note
If a receiver is not assigned, you can print the received documents on this machine. See Printing Personal Box Documents.
Reference
p.212 Printing Personal Box Documents
p.213 Confidential File Report

211
Printing Personal Box Documents

Follow these steps to print a document received into a Personal Box.
A Make sure that the Confidential File indicator is lit.
APS010S
B Press [Change TX / Info].
C Press [Print Personal Box File].

D Select the box with the document you want to print.
212
Personal Boxes
E If a password has been set for the box, enter the password, and then press [OK].
To cancel entering a password, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of
step D.
To stop printing, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step D.
To print a document in another Personal Box, repeat from step D.

Note
If you print a Personal Box document, it is deleted.
The passwords for Personal Boxes can be programmed under Box Setting in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
Confidential File Report

You can check whether a document was received to a Personal Box.
Note
Reference
213
Information Boxes
This section describes how to use Information Boxes.
Important
Before using this function, set the Information Box in advance.
Information Boxes
Use the Information Box function to set up the machine as a document server.
Program a document into an Information Box for others to pick up. When a request
is made by another party, the SEP Code they specify is matched against the SEP
Codes programmed in that Information Box. If a code matches the document
stored in the Information Box the document is sent to the other party automatically.
Other parties can receive these documents whenever they request them.
Important
If the main power switch is turned off for about an hour, all documents stored
in Information Boxes are deleted. When this happens, the Power Failure Report
is printed so you can confirm which documents have been deleted. For details,
see Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function, Troubleshooting.
For other parties to be able to retrieve a document programmed in an Information

Box, you need to inform the of the SEP Code assigned to that Information Box.
Note
For details about storing documents in the Information Boxes, see Storing
Documents in Information Boxes.
You can set a password for Information Boxes in advance. A password can be
set in Box Setting in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
p.215 Storing Documents in Information Boxes

214
Information Boxes
Storing Documents in Information Boxes

Follow these steps to store a document in an Information Box.
4
B Press [Store / Delete / Print Information Box File].
C Select the box in which you want to store the file.
When there are pre-programmed files, a file mark appears to the left of the box name.
A message is displayed if you select a box with a file stored in it. Press [Yes]
when changing the file. The stored original file is overwritten.
D If a password has been set for the box, enter the password, and then press [OK].
To cancel entering a password, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step C.
215
E Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
You can also select the following settings:

Original Settings
Stamp

The machine starts to scan the original.
To stop scanning, press [Stop]. The display returns to that of step C.
To store a document in another Information Box, repeat from step C.

Note
One Information Box stores one file.
The stored file is not deleted automatically. If you want to delete a stored
file, see Deleting Information Box Documents.
Reference
p.218 Deleting Information Box Documents
216
Information Boxes
Printing Information Box Documents

Follow these steps to print a document stored in an Information Box.
4
C Press [Print].
D Select the box that contains the stored file you want to print.
You cannot select a box that has no stored file.
step D.
217

If you want two-sided printing, press [Print on 2 Sides] before pressing the
{Start} key.
To stop printing before pressing the {Start} key, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step D.
To stop printing after pressing the {Start} key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step D.
Repeat from step D to print another stored file in the box.
Deleting Information Box Documents

Follow these steps to delete a file stored in an Information Box.

C Press [Delete].
D Select the box that contains the stored file you want to delete.
218
Information Boxes
step D.
F Press [Yes].
To stop deleting, press [No]. The display returns to that of step D.

Repeat from step D to delete another stored file in another box.
219
220
5. Storing a Document
This section explains storing and managing documents in the Document Server.
Sending a Stored File

This section describes how to store and manage fax documents in the Document
Server.
The Document Server can store documents from various applications.
The documents that are stored using the facsimile function are available to transmit by facsimile.
Storing in the Document Server enables the following:
Once stored, a document can be sent out as many times as you want, just by
selecting it.
Storing a document does not use facsimile memory.
You can send and print multiple stored documents as a single document, and
also send them with scanned originals at the same time. Follow the instructions
under [Select Stored File] when sending or printing stored documents.
Important
Data stored in the machine can be lost if there is an error on the machine's
hard disk. The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage that might result from the loss of data.
221
Storing a Document
Note
Stored documents are not deleted even if there is a power failure, or the main
power switch is turned off.
You can specify whether or not the machine automatically deletes documents
from the Document Server after a certain number of days. You can change
this setting using Auto Delete File in Document Server under System Settings . See System Settings, General Settings Guide.
You cannot check received and stored documents through the Document
Server.
Documents in the Document Server can be sent, printed, or deleted, and their
information can be changed using the Web Image Monitor.
Using the DeskTopBinder or Web Image Monitor, documents you stored in
the Document Server can be downloaded and managed on the computer. See
Document Server, Copy/Document Server Reference.
For the maximum values of the following items, see Maximum Values.
Number of documents you can store in the Document Server using the facsimile function
Number of pages per document you can store in the Document Server
Number of pages you can store in the Document Server (in total copy
function, facsimile function, printer function, and scanner function)
Reference
Utilizing Stored Documents, About This Machine

Document Server, Copy/Document Server Reference
Storing a Document
You can store and send a document at the same time. You can also just store a
document.
File names
Scanned documents are automatically assigned names like FAX0001 or
FAX0002.
User Names
You can set this function if necessary to know who and what departments
stored documents in the machine.
Password
You can set this function so as not to send to unspecified people.
222
Set Original Orientation correctly. If you do not, the top/bottom orientation of the original will not be displayed correctly in the preview.
B Press [Store File].
C Select [Send & Store] or [Store Only].
Select [Send & Store] to send documents after they are stored.
Select [Store Only] to store documents.
D Set the user name, file name, and password as necessary.
If you are not setting a user name, file name, or password, proceed to step E.
You cannot change multiple documents at once.
E Press [OK].
The file name appears to the left of [Store File].
223
Storing a Document
F If you have selected [Send & Store], specify the receiver.

If you have selected [Store Only], proceed to step G.
Note
You can change file names and user names.
Reference
p.36 Setting the Original Orientation
Programming a user name
A Press [User Name].
B Press the user name to be programmed.
Press the title key to switch between titles.

To set a non-programmed user name, press [Manual Entry], and then enter the
name. User names entered by pressing [Manual Entry] are not programmed
into the user code.
C Press [OK].
Note
Depending on the security settings, [Access Privileges] might be displayed
instead of [User Name]. For details about setting [Access Privileges], ask the
administrator.
224
Reference
Setting a file name
A Press [File Name].
B Enter the file name.
C Press [OK].
Reference
Setting a password
A Press [Password].
225
Storing a Document
B Enter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
[OK], and then reenter your password.
You can enter up to four to eight digits.
C Enter the password again, and then press [OK].
Sending Stored Documents

The machine sends documents stored in the Document Server.
The documents stored in the Document Server can be sent again and again until
they are deleted. Once sent, documents are stored in the Document Server.
Therefore, you can send them in just one operation without having to set your
originals again.
Important
Store the documents to be sent in advance. You can program a password for
this function. You can change the user names, file names, and passwords of
stored documents.
You cannot use the following transmission methods:

On Hook Dial
Manual Dial
226
B Select the documents to be sent.
When multiple documents are selected, they are sent in the order of selection.
Press [Queue] to arrange the order of the documents to be sent.
Press [File Name] to place the documents in alphabetical order.
Press [User Name] to place the documents in order by programmed user
name.
Press [Date] to place the documents in order of programmed date.
To view details about stored documents, press [Details].
Press the Thumbnails key to switch the screen to thumbnail display.
C If you select a document with a password, enter the password, and then
press [OK].
If the document does not have a password, proceed to step D.
227
Storing a Document
D When you want to add your originals to stored documents and send them
all at once, press [Original n Stored File] or [Stored file n Original].
When sending only stored documents, proceed to step E.

When [Original n Stored File] is pressed, the machine sends the originals, and
then stored files. When [Stored file n Original] is pressed, the machine sends
the stored files, and then originals.
E Press [OK].
To add an original to stored documents, place the original, and then select
any scan settings you require.
The added originals are not stored.
Note
You can send only documents saved with the facsimile function in the Document Server. You cannot send documents stored in the Document Server
using the copy, printer, or scanner functions.
The specified documents are sent with the scan settings made when they
were stored.
To see details of the selected document, press [Details]. To return to the display in step B, press [Exit].
For the maximum number of stored documents you can specify at a time,
see Maximum Values.
For the maximum number of stored pages you can send in one operation,
see Maximum Values.
Reference
228
Specifying documents from [File List]
A Press [U] or [T] to display the documents to be sent.

B Select the file.
Specifying documents by [User Name]
A Select [User Name].
B Select the user name of the programmed document, and then press [OK].
To search by directly entering a user name, press [Manual Entry], and then enter
the user name. Forward matching is used when searching for a user name.
C Select the file to be sent.
229
Storing a Document
Specifying documents by [File Name]
A Select [File Name].
B Enter the name of the document to be sent, and then press [OK].
Forward matching is used when searching for a file name.
C Select the file to be sent.

Displaying a preview
A Select the document you want to send.

Press the Thumbnail key to switch the screen to thumbnail display.
B Press [Preview].
230
C Check the preview.
Press [Zoom Out] or [Zoom In] to reduce or enlarge the preview image.
Press [][][][] to scroll the preview image.
Press [Switch] for Display File to display another selected file.
Press [Switch] for Display Page to change the displayed page.
D Press [Exit].
Note
If image files are corrupt or are larger than A3, they are not displayed on
the preview window.
If the image file is corrupt, store it again.

If you stored originals that had multiple mixed-size pages without using
the Mixed Original Sizes function, the displayed size might differ from the
actual size for pages after the first page.
Printing Stored Documents

Use this function to print documents stored in the Document Server.
Important
When [Print 1st Page] is selected, originals larger than A4 size are printed after
they are reduced to A4 size.
231
Storing a Document
B Select the document to be printed.
Press the Thumbnail key to switch the screen to thumbnail display.
C If you select a document with a password, enter the password, and then
press [OK].
If the document does not have a password, proceed to step D.
D Press [Print File] or [Print 1st Page].
When [Print File] is pressed, the machine prints all the pages. When [Print 1st
Page] is pressed, the machine prints only the first page.
To print both sides, press [Print 2 Sides]. When multiple files are specified they
are printed per file.
To cancel printing, press [Stop Printing].

When only the first page is printed, the file name is printed at the top of the
paper.
To cancel printing after pressing the {Start} key, press [Stop Printing].
F Press [Cancel].
232
Note
Only documents stored using the facsimile function can be printed.
When printing originals that were not stored using the Mixed Original Sizes function, paper sizes might differ according to whether printing is
through the facsimile function or the Document Server.
You can also print the first page only to check the content of the original.
You can specify and print multiple documents at one time.
For the maximum number of stored documents you can print at a time using [Print 1st Page], see Maximum Values.
For the maximum number of stored pages you can print at a time, see
Maximum Values.
Reference
Changing Stored Document Information

You can change the file name, user name, and password of stored documents.
To change a stored document, delete the document you no longer need, and then
reprogram the new document.
A Select [Select Stored File].
B Select [Manage / Delete File], and then press the document to be changed.
233
Storing a Document
C If you select a document for which a password is set, enter the password,
When a selected file does not have a password, proceed to step D.
D Change the desired information of the stored document.

Press the keys for the items you want to change.
E Press [Exit].
234
Changing a user name
A Press [Change User Name].
B Press [Clear].
The user name is deleted.
C Enter the new user name, and then press [OK].

Press the title word keys to switch between titles.
To set a non-programmed user name, press [Manual Entry], and then enter the
name.
User names entered by pressing [Manual Entry] are not programmed into the
user code.
Note
Depending on the security settings, [Change Access Priv.] might be displayed instead of [Change User Name]. For details about setting [Change Access Priv.], ask the administrator.
Reference
235
Storing a Document
Changing the file name
A Press [Change File Name].
B Press [Backspace] or [Delete All], and then re-enter the file name.
C Press [OK].
Reference
Entering Text About This Machine
Changing the password
A Press [Change Password].
236
B Enter a new password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
C Enter the password again, and then press [OK].
Deleting a Stored Document

Use this function to delete stored documents.
237
Storing a Document
B Press [Manage / Delete File].
C Select the document you want to delete.
You can also delete multiple documents at once.
D Enter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
E Press [Delete File].

F Press [Yes].
If you do not want to delete the document, press [No].
G Press [Exit].
238
6. Fax via Computer

This section explains how to use this machine's facsimile function from a computer via a network.
Sending Fax Documents from Computers

You can send a document created with a Windows application from a computer
connected to the machine to another fax machine.
Connect computers to the machine via parallel port, LAN, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), or USB 2.0.
To send a fax, simply select [Print] from the Windows application, then select
LAN-Fax as the printer, and then specify a destination. LAN-Fax enables paperless faxing from your computer to the other destinations.
In addition to sending faxes, the LAN-Fax Driver allows this machine to be
used for printing out documents prepared on a computer for proof checking.
To use the LAN-Fax Driver, connect this machine to a LAN and make the necessary network settings, and then install the LAN-Fax Driver and the related
utilities on your computer.
ALT007S
Important
Errors occurring when the machine is used as a LAN-Fax will not be displayed on the computer. Check for errors by using a Web Image Monitor. See
Web Image Monitor help.
USB connection is not available when using the LAN-Fax function on Windows 98.
239
Fax via Computer
Note
It is recommended that you use a Web Image Monitor running under the
Before Use
To use these features, a LAN-Fax Driver must be installed on your computer.
Use the LAN-Fax Driver included on the scanner CD-ROM. You must also make
the required computer to fax network settings on the machine, according to the
type of connection.
Note
When a personal computer and the machine are connected in parallel: See
Preparing the Machine, Printer Reference.
When using Ethernet, IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), or IEEE 802.11b (wireless
LAN): See Connecting the Machine, General Settings Guide.
Reference

Preparing the Machine, Printer Reference
Using the Software

This section provides information about LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor.
LAN-Fax Driver
This driver allows you to use LAN-Fax functions.
Important
All operations cannot be guaranteed depending on the system environment.
When you use Windows NT, LAN-Fax Driver will not work in an RISC base
processor (MIPS R series, Alpha AXP, PowerPC) environment.
Location of the file

The following folders are on the CD-ROM:
LAN-Fax Driver for Windows 98/Me
\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\WIN9X_ME
LAN-Fax Driver for Windows NT 4.0
\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\NT4
LAN-Fax Driver for Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003
\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\WIN2K_XP
240
Operating environment
Computer
PC/AT compatible
Operating systems
Display
VGA 640480 pixels or more
Note
Before beginning installation, exit all other applications.
Address Book
Address Book helps you edit LAN-Fax transmission destinations.
Operating systems
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor

LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor helps you edit LAN-Fax cover sheets.
Operating systems
241
Fax via Computer
Auto Run program

The installers for various drivers and utilities launch automatically as Auto Run
programs when you insert the CD-ROM.
LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor can be installed by Auto Run.
Important
If the plug and play function starts, click [Cancel] in the [New Hardware Found],
[Device Driver Wizard], or [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, and then insert the CD-ROM. The [New Hardware Found], [Device Driver Wizard], or [Found
New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears depending on the system version of
Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT
4.0.
Auto Run might not work automatically with certain OS settings. If this is the
case, double-click Setup.exe, located on the CD-ROM root directory.
If you want to cancel Auto Run, hold down the {SHIFT} key (when your system is Windows 2000/Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, hold down the
left {SHIFT} key) while inserting the CD-ROM. Keep the {SHIFT} key held
down until the computer stops reading the CD-ROM.
Clicking [Cancel] during installation aborts the installation. If you cancel the
installation, restart your computer and install the rest of the software or printer driver.
Note
If your operating system is Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 or Windows NT 4.0, installing a printer driver using Auto Run requires Administrator permissions. When you install LAN-Fax Driver using Auto Run, log on
using an account that has Administrator permissions.
Installing Individual Applications

You need to install a LAN-Fax Driver on your computer before using the LAN-Fax
functions. The LAN-Fax Driver is on the CD-ROM included with this machine.
Address Book and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor are installed with the LAN-Fax
Driver. Address Book helps you edit LAN-Fax transmission destinations. LANFax Cover Sheet Editor helps you edit LAN-Fax cover sheets.
Use the following procedure to install LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor at one time.
Important
Before installing the above applications, install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
242
A Quit all applications currently running.

B Insert the CD-ROM included with this machine into the CD-ROM drive of
your computer.
The installer launches automatically, and the language selection window appears.
Depending on your operating system settings, the installer may not launch
automatically. If it does not, double-click Setup.exe in the CD-ROM root directory to launch the installer.
C Select the interface language of the software, and then click [OK].
D Click [LAN-Fax Driver].
The software license agreement window appears.
E Read all of the terms and, if you agree, select [I accept the agreement.], and
then click [Next].
If you select [I don't accept the agreement.], you cannot complete the installation.
F Select the [LAN-Fax Driver] check box, and then click [Next].
G Confirm that the [Printer Name:<LAN-Fax M8>] check box is selected, and then
click [Continue].
Select the desired port.
H Click [Finish].
The installation completion dialog box appears.
I Click [Finish].
J Click [Exit].
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties
This section explains how to set properties required for using the LAN-Fax Driver.
Note
If your operating system is Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000/XP, or Windows
Server 2003, log on using an account that has Administrator rights.
243
Fax via Computer
Setting print properties

This section explains how to make settings such as paper size or resolution.

With Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003, select [Printers and
Faxes] on the [Start] menu.
With Windows XP Home Edition, select [Control Panel] on the [Start] menu.
Next select [Printers and Other Hardware], and then [Printers and Faxes].
B Select to highlight [LAN-Fax M8], then click [Properties] on the [File] menu.
With Windows NT, click [Document Defaults...] on the [File] menu.
C When using Windows 98/Me, click the [Paper] tab to set the following properties.
Paper Size
Orientation
Tray
Resolution
Gray Scale
Print as Graphics
D When using Windows NT 4.0, set the following properties.
Paper Size
Orientation
Tray
Resolution
E When using Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server 2003, click the [Printing
Preferences...] button to set the following properties.
Paper Size
Orientation
Tray
Resolution
F Click [OK].
244
Making settings for option configuration

Make settings for optional units installed in this machine.

With Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003, select [Printers and
Faxes] on the [Start] menu.
With Windows XP Home Edition, select [Control Panel] on the [Start] menu.
Next select [Printers and Other Hardware], and then [Printers and Faxes].
B Select to highlight [LAN-Fax M8], then click [Properties] on the [File] menu.
C Click the [Accessories] tab, and then make the settings for the option configuration.
D When the machine is connected to a network, option configuration is automatically performed. If the settings do not match the installed optional
units, click [Load from Device].
E When this machine is connected locally to your computer, select the check
boxes for the installed optional units.
F Click [Apply].
Option configuration settings are complete.
G Click [OK].
[Accessories] tab
The [Accessories] tab contains the following items besides option configuration items.
Prohibit manual destination entry
Check this option to inhibit direct destination specification.
Enable E-mail
Check this when using Internet Fax with the LAN-Fax function.
IP-Fax
Check this option when using IP-Fax.
After checking this option, select a protocol by clicking an appropriate radio button.
Note
If the options on this machine are not configured as instructed, LAN-Fax
functions may fail.
When this machine is connected to a network and the port is set via the
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port, option configuration is automatically performed. For details about automatic option configuration, see
LAN-Fax Deriver's Help.
245
Fax via Computer
Basic Transmission
This section explains how to send fax documents created using Windows applications.
To send a fax, simply select [Print...] from the Windows application, then select
[LAN-Fax M8] as the printer, and then specify a destination in the [LAN-Fax] dialog box.
Open the application document you want to send or create a new document, and
then perform the following procedure.
For details, see LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
Important
When using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, you cannot send documents to
this machine using more than one LAN-Fax at the same time.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].

B Select [LAN-Fax M8] in the [Name:] list.
C Click [OK].
The LAN-Fax dialog box appears.
The setting method may differ depending on the application you are using.
In all cases, select [LAN-Fax M8] for the printer.
D Specify the destination.

For details about specifying a destination, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
When user authentication is used with this machine, click [User Settings...].
E Specify necessary options.

F Click [Send].
When you click [Send & Print], the fax is sent to the destination and your machine prints a copy of the document you sent.
Note
The machine can retain documents sent from a LAN-Fax Driver as files to be sent. For
the maximum number of documents the machine can retain, see Maximum Values.
For the maximum number of destinations you can specify per file, see Maximum Values.
Reference
p.247 Specifying a destination using a destination list
246
p.247 Specifying a destination using Address Book

p.248 Specifying a destination by directly entering a fax number, Internet
Fax destination, or IP-Fax destination
p.249 Specifying Options
p.252 Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail
p.254 Editing Address Book
Specifying a destination using a destination list
A Click the [Address Book] or [Specify Destination] tab.

The [Address Book] or [Specify Destination] tab appears.
B Select the [Device Address] (or [Use device address]) check box.
C The address is displayed in the [Device Address] field on the [Address Book]
tab. On the [Specify Destination] tab, enter the registration number of the Destination key in the [Device Address] box.
D Click [Set as Destination].

The entered destination is added and appears in the [List of Destination:] box.
If you add a destination by mistake, click the wrong destination, and then
click [Delete from List].
E To specify more destinations, repeat steps C and D.

Specifying a destination using Address Book
Important
In order to use this method, you need to register destinations in the address
list using Address Book.
A Click the [Address Book] tab.

The [Address Book] tab appears.
B Select a CSV file containing the desired destination list, from the [Address
Book:] dropdown menu.
Up to the three most recently used files appear in the dropdown menu. To use
a destination list that did not appear, click [Browse...], and then select the file.
C Select [Contact] or [Group] in the [Name:] dropdown menu as the display format.
Destination list contents change as follows, depending on the option selected:
Contact: Individual name, company name, department name, fax number
Group: Group name
If you selected [Group], proceed to step E.
D If you selected [Contact] in step C, select the type of fax from the [Type:]
dropdown menu.
To send by standard fax or IP-Fax, select [Fax]. To send by Internet Fax, select
[E-mail].
247
Fax via Computer
E Click the destination in the destination list to highlight it, and then click
[Set as Destination].
The selected destination is added and appears in the [List of Destination:] box.
In the Address Book list box, directly enter the name you want to search for.
You can then jump to the name you entered.
F To specify more destinations, repeat steps B through E.

Note
Destination list contents can be narrowed down by selecting the first letter
of a contact name, company name or group name in the [Search] dropdown
menu.
Specifying a destination by directly entering a fax number, Internet Fax destination, or

IP-Fax destination
A Click the [Specify Destination] tab.
The [Specify Destination] tab appears.
B Select the type of fax from the [Type:] dropdown menu.

To send by standard fax or IP-Fax, select [Fax]. To send by Internet Fax, select
[E-mail].
After you select the fax type, the items corresponding to the selected type appear.
C Specify the destination.

Specify the destination depending on the selected fax type as follows:
If you selected [Fax]: enter the fax number. To send by IP-Fax, enter the IPFax destination.
If you selected [E-mail]: enter the e-mail address.
To enter a pause in the fax number, click [Pause]. If you selected [E-mail] in step
B, [Pause] is not available.
D Specify settings according to the type of fax transmission.
Specify settings according to the type of fax transmission selected in step B,

as follows:
If you selected [Fax], select a line or a protocol in the [Line:] list.
If you selected [E-mail], select the [Do not use SMTP server] check box if you
want to bypass the SMTP server.
E Click [Set as Destination].

248
The entered destination is added and appears in the [List of Destination:] box.
F To specify more destinations, repeat steps B through E.

Note
Reference

p.70 Sending to an E-mail Address
Specifying Options
You can specify the following transmission options when sending a fax.
For details about transmission options, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
Sending at specific time
Print Fax Header
Attach a Cover Sheet
2 sided printing
Preview
Save as file
Document Server
To send a fax document at a specific time
A Click [Send Options].

The [Send Options] tab appears.
B Select the [Sending at specific time] check box, and then specify a transmission
time.
To print a sender stamp

B Select the [Print Fax Header] check box.
249
Fax via Computer
To attach a cover sheet

B Select the [Attach a Cover Sheet] check box.

A cover sheet is added to the first page of a transmission file.
Click [Edit Cover Sheet...] to edit the cover sheet.
Reference
p.257 Editing Fax Cover Sheets
To specify two-sided printing

B Select the [2 sided printing] check box.
To display preview
Selecting the [Preview] check box allows you to check how the fax document will
be output at the destination.

B Select the [Preview] check box.

C Click [Send] or [Send & Print].
The [Preview] window appears.
D Click [Next] or [Previous] to check the image.

To close the [Preview] window, click [Cancel].
Saving as files
You can save the fax document in TIFF format (TIFF-F).

250
B Select the [Save as file] check box.

C Click [Save to...].
D Select a folder on the folder tree.
E Select a method of file naming.

To enter a file name manually, select the [Specify file name when saving] check
box. To have the file assigned a name and saved automatically, select the [Automatically create a new file] check box.
F Click [OK].
G Click [Save] or [Save & Send].
If you select [Automatically create a new file], the image file is assigned a name
and saved under the specified folder.
The file name will be RicHHMMSS.tif (HH: hours, MM: minutes, SS: seconds).
H Enter a file name.

You can also change the folder in this step.
I Click [Save].
The image file is saved in the specified folder.
Note
Single-page documents are saved as single TIFF files, and multiple-page
documents are saved as multiple TIFF files.
To store the fax document on the Document Server

Important
If [Hard Disk Unit] is not selected in [Accessories] on the printer properties dialog box, you cannot select [Document Server].

B Select the [Send to Document Server] check box, and then enter a user name,
file name, and password.
251
Fax via Computer
Checking Transmission Using LAN-Fax Driver

From SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, or
Web Image Monitor, you can check information about files sent using LAN-Fax
Driver. For the maximum number of transmission results you can check, see
Maximum Values.
Also, you can save the contents of the Journal in a personal computer as a CSV
file using [Load Fax Journal] in SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Note
When data is transmitted from the LAN-Fax Driver via the SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client port, the Data-transmission complete. message appears on the
computer's display, so you can easily ascertain the communication progress.
However, if the volume of communication data from the LAN-Fax to this machine
increases, the message may appear during the operation, due to the differences
in memory capacity between this machine and SmartDeviceMonitor for Client. For more accurate fax transmission results, use E-mail TX results.
The job history may differ from the machine's transmission results. In that
case, refer to the machine's transmission results.
See the relevant Help for details.
Reference

After communicating in the LAN-Fax mode, this function transmits the communication results with the computer by e-mail.
When you have done [Send] or [Send & Print] using the LAN-Fax, and when the
communication was successful, it transmits e-mail of the transmission result.
Result notification e-mail is sent when printing is complete, or if an error occurs
during communication between this machine and a computer.
A Click the [E-mail Settings] tab.

B Select the [Notify] check box under [E-mail TX results].
C Enter the destination.
When entering the e-mail address directly, click the [Specify destinations] radio
button, and then enter the e-mail address in the [Specify destinations] field.
When entering the machine's programmed address, click the [Device Address]
radio button, and then enter the registration number of the Destination key in
the [Device Address] box.
The [Device Address] box is unavailable when the [Specify destinations] is selected, and you cannot enter anything in the text box.
252
D Click [Send] or [Send & Print].
Note
You can confirm transmission results using the E-mail TX Results function
and the Communication Result Report. You can set whether to use both of
these together in User Parameters (switch 10, bit 6) in the Facsimile Features menu.
If there be any insufficient configurations in the e-mail menu on this machine, or if Auto Specify Sender Name is set to Off, the LAN-Fax result
notification e-mail is not transmitted, and the LAN-Fax Result Report is
printed. See System Settings, General Settings Guide for the e-mail settings, and see LAN-Fax Result Report for the LAN-Fax Result Report.
Reference
p.253 LAN-Fax Result Report

LAN-Fax Result Report
This section explains the LAN-Fax Result Report.

If E-mail TX results is set to Notify, if there be any insufficient configurations in the e-mail menu on this machine, or if Auto Specify Sender Name is
set to Off, the LAN-Fax result notification e-mail is not transmitted, and the
LAN-Fax Result Report is printed. If the E-mail TX Results of Sender Name
has not been set to on, the LAN-Fax Result Report is printed.
Note
Whether or not the LAN-Fax Result Report is printed, can be configured with
User Parameters (Switch 20, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
When executing [Send] or [Send & Print] with the LAN-Fax Driver, and when
the E-mail TX Result Report has not arrived, the Communication Result Report is printed.
Reference
253
Fax via Computer
Printing and Saving

You can print documents created using Windows applications.
Open the application document you want to print or create a new document,
and then perform the following procedure.
For details about printing the fax image, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.

B Select [LAN-Fax M8] in the [Name:] list, and then click [OK].
The [LAN-Fax] dialog box appears.
The setting method may differ depending on the application you are using.
In all cases, select [LAN-Fax M8] for the printer.
C Click [Print] or [Send & Print].

You can save the fax image in a file. See Specifying Options.
Note
You can also save documents in TIFF format. For details about saving in
TIFF format, see Saving as files.
You can select the length of time the machine keeps document data in
memory if print fails due to problems such as a paper shortage or paper
jams. Make this setting with User Parameters (switch 20, bit 2, 3, 4, 5) in the
Facsimile Features menu. Date is deleted when the specified length of time
elapses.
Reference
p.249 Specifying Options
p.250 Saving as files

Editing Address Book

You can program and edit destinations in the address list using the Address
Book.
For details about the Address Book, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
Note
You can use files created in CSV format as Address Book data. For this purpose, create CSV files that conform to a certain format. For more information,
see Help.
254
Programming new destinations
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click [Address Book].
The [Address Book] dialog box appears.
If LAN-Fax Driver has already started up, click [Edit Address Book...].
B Click [New/Browse...], and then select the CSV file containing the address list
to be edited.
C Enter the destination and name.

You can enter a contact name, company name, department name, fax number, e-mail address, and IP-Fax address. The name and destination (Fax Number, E-mail address or IP-Fax address) cannot be omitted.
D Click [Add].
The destination is added to the destination list.
E Click [Close].
F If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To
save the changes, click [Yes].

If you do not want to save the changes and want to quit editing, click [No].
To return to the editing display, click [Cancel].
The confirmation dialog box does not appear when you have not made any
changes after starting Address Book.
Note
To program the contents of the destination list of this machine to the Address Book, select the [Use device address] check box, then enter the Destination key's registration number in the [Device Address] field.
For [Line:] under [Fax Number:], the following line types are selectable; G3,
G3-2, G3-3, G4, G3 Dir. Auto, G3 PABX Auto, or I-G3. However, this machine does not support G4 and G3 PABX Auto.
For [Protocol:] under [IP-Fax address:], select [H.323] or [SIP].
To bypass the SMTP server, under the [E-mail address:] box, select the [Do
not use SMTP server] check box.
255
Fax via Computer
Editing programmed destinations
to be edited.
C Select the destination you want to edit so it is highlighted in the list.

D Edit the data.
E Click [Update].
F Click [Close].
G If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To
Deleting programmed destinations
to be edited.
C Select the destination you want to delete so it is highlighted in the list.

D Click [Delete].
E Click [Yes].
F Click [Close].
256
G If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To

Using the Machine's Address Book Data in the Destination List of

the LAN-Fax
You can save information about fax destinations registered to this machine in a
personal computer as a CSV file using Address Management Tool in SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. Saved CSV files can be inserted into the destination
table of the LAN-Fax Driver by selecting [New/Browse...] in Address Book. Save
the file again for the LAN-Fax Driver.
Note
When destinations registered in groups by this machine are inserted into Address Book, each person's destination is determined according to the following order of priority (check before inserting and changing the order of
priority, if necessary): IP-Fax destination Fax number Mail address
Depending on the machine type, you may not be able to use the machine
when it is updating the Address Book using CSV files (retrieved using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin) that contain user codes.
For details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Editing Fax Cover Sheets

LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor allows you to edit the format for fax cover sheets.
Important
It is necessary to create a cover sheet file before attaching a cover sheet to fax
document using LAN-Fax Driver.
257
Fax via Computer
Creating a cover sheet

Use the following procedure to create a fax cover sheet.
You can edit the following items using LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor.
Company name as destination information
Department name as destination information
Person name as destination information
Company name as sender information
Department name as sender information
Person name as sender information
Telephone number as sender information
Fax number as sender information
Date
Message
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click
[LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor].
The [LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor] dialog box appears.
B Edit the cover sheet.

For details about operations, see Help.
C Click [Save as...] on the [File] menu.

D Select a folder, and then enter a file name.
E Click [Save].
Note
Cover sheet data is stored in its own format (using fcp as its extension).
258
Attaching a created cover sheet

Use the following procedure to attach a created cover sheet file to a fax document.

B Select [LAN-Fax M8] in the [Name:] list, and then click [OK].
The [LAN-Fax] dialog box appears.
C Click [Edit Cover Sheet...].

The [Cover Sheet] dialog box appears.
D Select a cover sheet file from the dropdown list or after clicking [Browse...]
in [Select Cover Sheet].

The selection made in [Select Cover Sheet] is not canceled unless you select another file. If you want to change only destination information, omit this step
and proceed to step E.
E Select the type of information from [To:].
You can select [Use Address Book], [To Whom It May Concern], [Edit Names], or
[(None)]. Selecting [Edit Names] allows you to enter company, department, and
contact names.
F To print the date, select the [With a Date] check box.

G Enter the sender information.
You can enter company, department, and contact names, and telephone and
fax numbers.
To add a message, select the [With a Message] check box, and then enter a message.
H Click [OK].
I Specify a destination.
J Click the [Send Options] tab, and then select the [Attach a Cover Sheet] check
box.
K Click [Send] or [Send & Print].
259
Fax via Computer
Managing Facsimile Functions Using SmartDeviceMonitor for

Admin
You can check information about this machine's fax functions using a computer
and save files on a computer using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Note
For details about SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin and its installation, see
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer, Network Guide.
For details, see Network Guide and SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Reference
LAN-Fax Operation Messages

This section explains typical operation error messages displayed on the computer when using the LAN-Fax Driver, and solutions to those messages.
Message
Causes and Solutions
Cannot connect to the device.
Check the network connection.
The number of entries in

Destinations exceed the
limits. Up to 500 entries
can be entered.
The number of destinations specified exceeds the

maximum possible. The maximum number of destinations that can be specified at one time is 500.
LAN-Fax has already been
The [LAN-Fax] dialog box is already open. Quit LANFax once, and then start it up again.
launched. Cannot launch it

again.
Check that the power is turned on.
Failed to allocate memory. Available memory on the computer is insufficient.

Quit applications currently not in use.
260
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web

Browser
You can view received fax documents and their lists or print these documents
using a Web Image Monitor on a network computer.
Note
It is recommended that you use a Web Image Monitor running under the
You need to select Store as the Reception File Setting in the Facsimile Features menu.
You can also check and manage the documents using DeskTopBinder.
Reference

DeskTopBinder's manual and Help
6
Viewing, Printing, and Deleting Received Fax Documents Using a
Web Image Monitor
Use the following procedure to view and/or print received fax documents using
a Web Image Monitor.
Viewing received fax documents using a Web browser

B Enter the machine's IPv4 address in the [Address] field.
C Click [Fax Received File] in the left pane.
D If you have programmed a user code for the stored reception file, enter the
code, and then press [OK].

A list of the received fax documents appears.
If the programmed user code was deleted using the Address Book Management function under System Settings, a message indicating incorrect user
code entry appears. If this is the case, reprogram a user code.
E Click
of the desired fax document.

When viewing a list of the fax documents, you can select the thumbnail display, icon display, or detail display. Click , , or .
261
Fax via Computer
F View the content of the fax document.

To enlarge the preview image, click [Enlarge Image]. Enlargement cannot be
performed without Acrobat Reader installed. For more information, see Help
on the Web Image Monitor.
G To download the received fax document, click [PDF] or [Multi-page TIFF], and
then click [Download].
A downloading confirmation dialog box appears.
When you select [PDF], make the necessary PDF File Security Settings before clicking [Download]. Acrobat Reader starts and the selected document is
displayed.
Note
If your computer cannot be connected to Web Image Monitor, see Network
Guide.
To download the document data on the list of received fax documents,

click [TIFF] or [PDF]. For details about downloading, see the Web Image
Monitor Help.
The method for downloading differs depending on the selected format.
For more information, see Help on the Web Image Monitor.
Reference
Network Guide
Printing fax information using a Web browser

The list of received fax documents appears.
D Select the check box of the fax document to be printed.

When viewing a list of the fax documents, you can select the thumbnail display, icon display, or detail display. Click , , or .
E Click [Print].
F Click [Print].
To cancel printing, press [Cancel] before clicking [Print].
You can change the printing order of selected multiple documents. You can
also have documents printed on both sides of the paper. For more information, see Help on the Web Image Monitor.
G Click [OK].
262
The display returns to that of step E.
Deleting fax information using a Web browser

The list of received fax documents appears.
D Select the check box of the fax document to be deleted.

To view a list of the fax documents, select the thumbnail display, icon display,
or detail display. Click , , or .
E Click [Delete].
F Click [Delete File(s)].
To cancel deletion, press [Cancel] before clicking [Delete File(s)].
After selecting multiple documents, you can also cancel deletion of some of
the selected documents. For more information, see Help on the Web Image
Monitor.
G Click [OK].
The display returns to that of step E.
Programming Destination Information from Web Browser

If the receiving machine is compliant with T.37 full mode Internet Fax, you can
program the receiver's properties from Web Image Monitor. You can program
the following properties:
Compression Type
Paper size
Resolution
Note
For a detailed description, see Help for Web Image Monitor.
When a receiver that is programmed as full mode in the Address Book returns a Reception Notice e-mail, the contents of the newly received e-mail
overwrite the existing information.
Reference
p.33 T.37 Full Mode
263
Fax via Computer
To edit machine properties already programmed

Follow these steps to use Web Image Monitor to edit information about the destination machine registered in the Address Book.
A Start the Web browser.

B Enter the IPv4 address of the machine you want to monitor after http:// in
the address field.
The top screen is displayed.
C Click [Login], and then enter the Administrator's name and password.
D Click [Address Book] in the left pane.
The Address Book is displayed.
E Click the radio button to the left of the machine you want to modify, and
then click [Change].
The [Change User] page appears.
F Set the properties for Internet Fax data format other than the mode selection.
If you change the mode to Simple Mode, you cannot set machine properties.
G Click [OK] at the upper-left of the screen.

To cancel the setting, click [Cancel] in the upper-left of the screen.
H Close the Web browser.
264
To add new receiver

Follow these steps to use Web Image Monitor to add a new destination to the
Address Book.
A Start the Web browser.

B Enter the IPv4 address of the machine you want to monitor after http:// in
the address field.
The top screen is displayed.
C Click [Login], and then enter the Administrator's name and password.
D Click [Address Book] in the left pane.
E Click [Add User].

The [Add User] page appears.
F Enter the registration number, name, and e-mail address, then set the necessary properties.
You can set the Internet Fax data format after entering the e-mail address.
G Click [Full Mode] under [Internet Fax Data Format], and set the properties ac-
cording to the receiver's properties.

If you change the mode to Simple Mode, you cannot set machine properties.
H Click [OK] in the upper-left of the screen.

To cancel the setting, click [Cancel] in the upper-left of the screen.
I Close the Web browser.
265
Fax via Computer
Delivering Files Received by Fax

Documents received by the machine can be viewed on or downloaded to a computer using the network delivery server ScanRouter delivery software. This is a
useful function, enabling you to view and store documents on your computer
without printing them.
Important
The ScanRouter delivery software is required as a delivery server. DeskTopBinder must be installed on your computer.
Using the delivery server, you can eliminate the task of retrieving and delivering
documents.
Functions
Delivery server provides the following functions:
Use the delivery server to associate incoming documents (SUB Code, Own
Name, and Own Fax Number) with receivers, so documents are delivered
to the intended receivers.
You can select the delivery method for incoming documents: Save in the
delivery server inbox, Send as an e-mail attachment, or Save in the
designated folder on the computer. Incoming documents with no SUB
Code, Own Name, or Own Fax Number are saved in the delivery server
inbox. You can also set it so that the received documents are stored in the
specified delivery server inbox according to the line used for reception.
You can check or download received documents stored in the delivery
server inbox using DeskTopBinder.
Note
Documents received in Personal Boxes are also forwarded to the delivery
server.
To view or download documents stored in the delivery server inbox, you

need to install DeskTopBinder on your computer.
To send received documents to your computer as e-mail attachments, your
computer must have an e-mail application that is compatible with the ScanRouter delivery software.
To create a network using the delivery server, settings must be specified in
the User Tools of the machine. Settings must also be specified on the delivery
server.
For details about the delivery server (ScanRouter delivery software), see the
ScanRouter delivery software's Help or instructions.
For information about DeskTopBinder, see DeskTopBinder's manual and
Help.
Reference
266
DeskTopBinder's manual and Help
7. Appendix
This section explains features and specifications of the facsimile function.
Checking the Memory Status

Use this function to display a summary of current memory usage.
On the standby display you can check the percentage of free memory space. In
addition, in [System Status] you can check the number of Transmission Standby
File(s), Memory Lock File(s), and RX Print Standby File(s). Others shows the
total number of documents registered in Information Boxes and received in Personal Boxes. See When the Machine Dose Not Operate as Wanted, Troubleshooting.
Note
If you set the Reception File Setting in the Facsimile Features menu to
Store, you can check the number of received documents using RX Print
Standby File(s).
Reference
p.6 Reading the Display Panel and Using Keys
p.211 Personal Boxes

p.214 Information Boxes
When the Machine Dose Not Operate as Wanted, Troubleshooting
267
Appendix
Programs
If you regularly send documents to a particular destination or transmit using the
same functions, you can save repetitive number keys operations by registering
this information in a Keystroke Program. Programs can be recalled by just pressing a programmed key.
Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs

The following procedure can be used to program a new Keystroke Program or
overwrite an old one.
You can register the following items in Keystroke Programs:
Memory Transmission, Immediate Transmission, type of transmission, destinations, Scan Type, Resolution, Scan Size, Mixed Original Sizes, Auto Density, Manual Density, Original Orientation, Original Settings, Stamp, Select
Line, SUB/SID/SEP/PWD Code entry, Send Later, Reception Notice, BCC
Transmission, E-mail TX Results, Text, Standard Message, Auto Reduce, Label Insertion, Closed Network, SUB Code Transmission, SEP Code Reception,
Fax Header Print, TX Status Report, Store File, PIN Code TX
Program name
A Make the settings you want to register in the program.
The procedure for programming differs depending on the items you want to
register.
Press the {Clear Modes} key to cancel programming.
To register a program using Send Later with the fax number 0123456789,
press {0}, {1}, {2}, {3}, {4}, {5}, {6}, {7}, {8}, {9} using the number keys, and
then continue doing the Send Later setting until the standby display appears
when you press [OK].
B Make sure that the machine is in facsimile mode and the standby display
is shown.
If the standby display is not shown, press the {Facsimile} key.
APS012S
268
Programs
D Press [Program].
When no programs are registered, proceed to step E.
E Select a program number in which Not Programmed is shown.
If you make a mistake, press [Cancel] and select a program number again.
When you change a Keystroke Program, press [Yes] after pressing the program
number you want to change. If you make a mistake, press [No] and try again.
F Enter the program name, and then press [OK].

If the program name is already registered, the name is displayed. To change
the program name, press [Backspace] or [Delete All], and then try again.
You should register the program name.
To cancel a program, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step E.
Note
Use the same procedure to register and change programs. In step E, select
the program number you want to change.
For the maximum number of Keystroke Programs you can register, see
Maximum Values.
For the maximum number of characters you can enter for a program name,
see Maximum Values.
For the maximum number of destinations you can register to a Keystroke
Program, see Maximum Values.
The method of registering or changing programs for the copy function is
different from that of the fax function.
269
Appendix
Reference
p.123 Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)

Registering a priority function using a program

Set the functions registered in a program as priority functions, so you can have
the machine select these functions right after the power is turned on or the {Clear
Modes} key is pressed.
To set the priority functions, register the desired settings to a program. Then, recall the registered program, and then press [Program as Defaults] on the Program
screen. The recalled settings are registered as priority functions.
7
Important
Destinations and SUB/SID/SEP/PWD Code entries cannot be registered as
priority functions.
Reference
270
Programs
Changing a program name

Follow these steps to change a program name.
A Make sure that the machine is in facsimile mode and the standby display
is shown.
APS012S
C Press [Change Name].
D Select the program number of the name you want to change.
E Enter a new program name, and then press [OK].

Press [Cancel] to cancel the change.
271
Appendix
Deleting a Program
Follow these steps to delete an unnecessary program:
is shown.
APS012S
C Press [Delete].
D Select the program number you want to delete.
E Press [Yes].
Press [No] not to delete the program. The display returns to that of step D.
272
Programs
Using a Program
Follow these steps to recall and use a registered program:
is shown.

APS012S
D Confirm that [Recall] is selected, and press the registered program number.

The programmed fax number appears and the registered settings are recalled.

The machine starts to scan the original.
Then, transmission starts with the recalled transmission settings.
Note
Using the program causes the previous settings to be cleared.
If you have no programmed destinations or scan settings as programs, select the program number, and then enter the fax number of the destination
and select the scan settings you require.
273
Appendix
Optional Equipment
This section explains the functions of options.
Expansion Memory (28MB: DIMM)

This allows you to send fax documents at high resolution (Super Fine). This also
allows you to receive fax documents at high resolution (Fine or Super Fine). If
you require this option, consult your service representative.
Reference
Handset
You can make or receive calls by installing the optional handset and dialing
manually.
Reference
p.226 Manual Dial
Extra G3 Interface Unit
This option provides one extra G3 line connection.

A maximum of two G3 interface units can be installed.
274
Specifications
Specifications
Fax Transmission and Reception
Standard
G3
Resolution
G3:
8 3.85/mm, 200 100 dpi (Standard character),
8 7.7/mm, 200 200 dpi (Detail character),
8 15.4/mm (Fine character: optional),
16 15.4/mm, 400 400 dpi (Super Fine character: optional)
Transmission time
G3: 3 seconds at 28,800 bps, Standard resolution

(JBIG transmission: 2 seconds)
Data compression method
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Maximum original size
Standard size: A3L, 11" 17"

Custom size: 297 1200 mm/11" 47"
Maximum scanning size
297 1200 mm/11" 47"
Print process
Printing on standard paper using a laser
Transmission speed
G3:
33,600 / 31,200 / 28,800 / 26,400 / 24,000 / 21,600 / 19,200 /
16,800 / 14,400 / 12,000 / 9,600 / 7,200 / 4,800 / 2,400bps
(auto shift down system)
Power Consumption
approx. 190 W
Memory Transmission
approx. 180 W
Memory Reception
approx. 180 W
Reception
approx. 640 W
IP-Fax Transmission and Reception

Network
LAN: Local Area Network

Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX, IEEE1394 (IPv4 over 1394),
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Scan line density
8 3.85 mm, 200 100 dpi (Standard character),

8 7.7 mm, 200 200 dpi (Detail character),
8 15.4 mm (Fine character: optional),
16 15.4 mm, 400 400 dpi (Super Fine character: optional)
Maximum original size
Standard size: A3L, 11" 17"

Custom size: 297 1200 mm/11" 47"
Maximum scanning size
297 mm 1200 mm
Transmission protocol
Recommendation: T.38, TCP, UDP/IP communication, SIP

(RFC 3261 compliant), H.323 v2
275
Appendix
Compatible machines
IP-Fax compatible machines
IP-Fax transmission function
Specify an IPv4 address and send faxes to an IP-Fax compatible fax through a network.
Also capable of sending faxes to a G3 fax connected to a telephone line via a VoIP gateway.
IP-Fax reception function
Receive faxes sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a network.

Also capable of receiving faxes from a G3 fax connected to a
telephone line via a VoIP gateway.
Internet Fax Transmission and Reception

Network
LAN : Local Area Network

Ethernet/10Base-T, 100Base-TX, IEEE1394 (IPv4 over 1394),
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Transmit function
E-mail
Scan line density
200 100 dpi (Standard character), 200 200 dpi (Detail character), 200 400 dpi (Fine character: optional) *1 , 400 400 dpi
(Super Fine character: optional) *1
Original size : Scanning width
A3 *1 , B4 JIS *1 , A4
Communication Protocols
Transmission
SMTP, TCP/IP
Reception
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
E-mail format
Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion

Attached file forms: TIFF-F (MH, MR *1 , MMR *1 compression)
Authentication method
SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP
Internet communication
Send and receive e-mail with a computer that has an e-mail address
E-mail send functions
Automatic conversion of sent documents to e-mail format and

e-mail transmission. Memory transmission only.
E-mail receive functions
Automatic detection and printing of appended TIFF-F (MH)

files and ASCII text. Memory reception only.
*1
Full mode
276
Specifications
Specifications Required for the Internet Fax Destination

Machines
This machine can communicate with Internet Fax machines that satisfy the following specification requirements.
When communicating with full mode compatible machines, you can take advantage of higher specifications for coding, original size, and resolution. For details about the specifications available in full mode, see Internet Fax
Transmission and Reception in Specifications.
Communication protocols
Transmission
SMTP
Reception
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4
E-mail format
Format
MIME, Base64
Content-Type
Image/tiff
Multipart/mixed (text/plain, Image/tiff (attached file
forms))
Data format
Profile
TIFF Profile S
Coding
MH
Original size
A4
Resolution (dpi)
200100/200200, 20498/204196
Reference
p.275 Specifications
277
Appendix
Maximum Values
The following list contains the maximum value for each item.
Item
Standard
Expansion memory
(Optional)
Memory
4 MB
28 MB
Number of documents you can store in memory

for Memory Transmission
400
400
Number of pages you can store in memory (using

A4 Standard <ITU-T q1 Chart>)
Approx. 320
Approx. 2,240
Number of destinations you can register in the

destination list
2000
2000
Number of groups you can register
100
100
Number of destinations you can register in a

group
500
500
Number of destinations you can specify per file
500
500
Number of destinations you can specify for all

files (including files in memory)
500
500
Number of destinations you can search at a time

using [Search Dest.]
100
100
Number of recent destinations the machine can

store
10
10
Number of digits for a destination
128
128
Number of digits for a SEP/SUB/PWD/SID

Code
20
20
Number of digits in a PIN Code
20
20
Number of characters you can enter in the e-mail

subject line
128
128
Number of communication results you can check

on this machine
200
200
Number of communication results printed in the

Journal
50
50
Number of special senders you can register
30
30
Number of LAN-Fax Driver transmission results 70

you can check from a network computer SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, DeskTopBinder,
or Web Image Monitor.
70
Number of documents sent from a LAN-Fax

Driver that the machine can retain as files to be
sent
400
400
Number of destinations you can register into a

Keystroke Program
500
500
278
Maximum Values
Item
Standard
Expansion memory
(Optional)
Number of Keystroke Programs you can register 100
100
Number of characters you can enter for a program name
20
20
Number of received documents you can store on

the machine's hard disk
400
400
Number of documents you can print at a time in

[Print / Delete Stored Reception File]
30
30
Number of documents you can delete at a time in

[Print / Delete Stored Reception File]
30
30
Number of stored documents you can specify at

a time in [Select Stored File]
30
30
Number of stored pages you can send in one op- 1,000

eration in [Select Stored File]
1,000
Number of stored documents you can print at a

time using [Print 1st Page]
30
30
Number of stored documents you can print at a

time using [Print File]
30
30
Number of documents you can store in the Document Server using the facsimile function
2,000
2,000
Number of pages per document you can store in

the Document Server
1,000
1,000
Number of pages you can store in the Document Approx. 9,000

Server (in total copy function, facsimile function, printer function, and scanner function) (Using ITU-T q4 Chart)
Approx. 9,000
Note
The maximum number of pages that can be stored or transmitted may decrease depending on the contents of documents.
279
INDEX
C
180-degree rotation printing, 166
1st Sheet, 37
2nd Sheet, 37
2 Sided Original, 37
2 Sided Print, 9
2 sided printing, 250
A
Acceptable original sizes, 40
Add, 20
Add Destination, 178
Adding a destination, 178
Address Book, 241, 254
Add User, 265
Adjust Sound Volume, 9
Advanced Features, 106
Advanced Search, 92
Adv.Features, 106
All, 199
Area, 54
Area 1, 54
Area 2, 54
Attach a Cover Sheet, 250
Attaching a created cover sheet, 259
Authorized Reception per Sender, 9
Auto Density, 58
Auto Detect, 52
Auto e-mail reception, 154
Auto fax reception power-up, 162
Automatic Redial, 20
Auto Reception, 152
Auto Reduce, 136
Auto Run program, 242
B
Backup File TX Setting, 9
Basic Transmission, 246
BCC Transmission, 127
Before use, 240
Box Setting, 9
Box Setting: Print List, 9
Broadcasting sequence, 20
Bypassing the SMTP server, 73
280
Canceling a Memory Transmission, 114

Canceling an Immediate Transmission, 114
Canceling a transmission, 114
Canceling a transmission before the
original is scanned, 114
Canceling a transmission before the
transmission is started, 117
Canceling a transmission of an
Internet Fax, 114
Canceling a transmission while the
original is being scanned, 114
Canceling a transmission while the
original is being transmitted, 115
Caution, 3
Center Mark, 9, 164
Change File Name, 236
Change Name, 271
Change Password, 236
Change / Stop Transmission File, 120
Change Title, 77
Change TX / Info, 175, 185, 187
Change User Name, 235
Changing a program name, 271
Changing Keystroke Programs, 268
Changing Stored Document Information, 233
Changing the line port, 61
Changing the settings of files in memory, 175
Changing the SMTP server setting, 182
Changing the transmission time, 180
Check / Change
Settings, 120, 176, 178, 180, 182
Checkered Mark, 9, 163
Checking a transmission file, 175
Checking files stored in memory, 187
Checking the memory status, 267
Checking the reception result, 196
Checking the result of the
communication, 194
Checking the result of the
Immediate Transmission, 194
Checking the storage result, 122
Checking the transmission result, 191
Checking transmission using
LAN-Fax Driver, 252
Check Modes, 24
Check / Stop Transmission File, 117, 175
Clear Modes key, 5, 114
Clear/Stop key, 114, 115
Closed Network, 140
Closed Network Code, 140, 150
Combined Auto and Manual Density, 58

Communicating indicator, 115
Communication Failure Report, 195
Communication Page Count, 9
Communication Result Report, 194
Compatible machines, 277
Confidential File indicator, 209
Confidential File Report, 213
Confirming a transmission, 120
Confirming by e-mail, 193
Confirming by report, 192, 197
Confirming by report and e-mail, 193
Confirming on display, 191, 196
Confirming the reservations for
SEP Code Reception, 112
Confirming the result of a
SEP Code Reception, 113
Confirming the results of transfer, 158
Confirming transmission results by
e-mail, 128, 252
Creating a cover sheet, 258
CSI - Own Fax Number, 150
D
Delete, 208, 218, 272
Delete File, 237
Deleting a destination from a
Simultaneous Broadcast, 176
Deleting a program, 272
Deleting a stored document, 237
Deleting fax information using a
Web browser, 263
Deleting Information Box documents, 218
Deleting programmed destinations, 256
Deleting received and
stored documents, 206, 208
Delivering files received by fax, 266
Density (contrast), 58
Destination key, 76, 78
Detail, 49
Displaying a preview, 230
Displaying confirmation of transmission, 24
Dual Access, 20
E
Edit Cover Sheet..., 259
Edit Dest., 67, 70
Editing Address Book, 254
Editing fax cover sheets, 257
Editing programmed destinations, 256
E-mail Address, 90
E-mail subject, 32
E-mail text, 155
E-mail TX Results, 101, 128, 193
E-mail TX results, 252
Enable H.323, 9
Enable SIP, 9
Entering an e-mail address, 70
Entering an IP-Fax destination, 67
Entering a pause, 65
Entering a tone, 66
Entering numbers using the number keys, 64
Expansion memory, 274
External telephone, 99, 152
Extra G3 interface unit, 274
F
Facsimile Features, 9
Facsimile key, 5, 152
Fax, 14
Fax Destination, 87
Fax Header Print, 144
Fax via computer, 239
File List, 229
File Name, 225
First Name, 144
Folder Transfer Result Report, 9
Forwarding, 9
Forwarding destination, 159
Forwarding received documents, 159
Full mode, 33, 263
Function list, 9
Functions not available by
e-mail reception, 32
Functions not available by
e-mail transmission, 31
Functions not available for
IP-Fax transmission, 28
G
G3, 61
G3 Auto, 61
Gatekeeper (VoIP gatekeeper), 27
Gateway (VoIP gateway), 27
General Settings, 9
281
H
H.323, 27
H.323 Settings, 9
Handset, 99, 152, 274
Having incoming documents printed on
paper from the bypass tray, 171
I
If there is no paper of the correct size, 170
Image Rotation, 167
Immediate Reception, 147
Immediate Transmission, 13, 21
Immediate TX Result Report, 194
Important Safety Instructions, 3
Information Box, 214
Initial display, 6
Initial Settings, 9
Installing individual applications, 242
Internet Fax, 14
Internet Fax functions, 29
Internet Fax Settings, 9
IP-Fax functions, 25
J
JBIG reception, 162
JBIG transmission, 49
Journal, 197, 203
Journal by e-mail, 205
Just size printing, 171
K
Key Color, 8
Keystroke Programs, 268
L
Label Insertion, 138
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor, 241, 257
LAN-Fax Driver, 239, 240
LAN-Fax operation messages, 260
LAN-Fax Result Report, 253
LDAP server, 84
Louder, 97
Lower, 97
282
M
Making settings for option configuration, 245
Manage / Delete File, 233, 237
Managing facsimile functions using
Manual Density, 58
Manual Dial, 99
Manual e-mail reception, 155
Manual E-mail RX, 155
Manual Entry, 67, 70, 224, 229
Manual Reception, 152
Max. E-mail Size, 9
Maximum values, 278
MDN, 125
Memory, 267
Memory Lock Reception, 9
Memory Reception, 148
Memory Storage Report, 122
Memory Transmission, 13, 15
Memory Transmission sequence, 20
Menu Protect, 9
Mixed Original Sizes, 56
Mixing scan settings for a
multiple page original, 60
Multi-copy reception, 166
Multi-port, 61
N
Name, 85
Names, 83
Names of major functions, 4
Notes on using Internet Fax, 30
Notes on using IP-Fax, 28
NOTICE, 1
O
On Hook, 97
On Hook Dial, 97
On Hook Mode Release Time, 9
Operation switch, 162
Optional equipment, 274
Option Setting, 135
Original Feed Type, 36, 37
Original size, 34, 40
Original sizes detected automatically, 43
Original sizes difficult to detect, 43
Original + Stored File, 226
P
Page reduction, 169
Page separation and length reduction, 168
Paper size and scanned area, 41
Paper Tray, 9
Parallel Memory Transmission, 13, 19
Parameter Setting, 9
Parameter Setting: Print List, 9
Password, 225
Password (PWD), 112
Password (SID), 109
Pause, 65
Personal Box, 157, 211
Photo, 47
PIN Code Transmission, 104
PIN Code TX, 104
Placing into the ADF, 34
Placing on the exposure glass, 34
Placing originals, 34
Preview, 230, 250
Prg. Dest., 83
Print, 185, 207
Print 1st Page, 231
Print completion beep, 163
Print / Delete Stored Reception File, 207, 208
Print Fax Header, 249
Print File, 231
Printing a file from memory, 185
Printing a file received with
Memory Lock, 209
Printing a list of files in memory, 187
Printing and saving, 254
Printing fax information using a
Web browser, 262
Printing Information Box documents, 217
Printing on both sides, 165
Printing options, 163
Printing Personal Box documents, 212
Printing received and
stored documents, 206, 207
Printing stored documents, 231
Printing the Journal, 198
Print Journal, 198
Print List, 187
Print Memory Lock, 209
Print per File No., 200
Print Personal Box File, 212
Print per User, 201
Print Reception Time, 9
Program, 268
Program as Defaults, 270
Program / Change / Delete Gateway, 9
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size, 9
Program / Change / Delete

Standard Message, 9
Program Closed Network Code, 9
Program Dest., 79
Program Fax Information, 9
Program key, 268
Program Memory Lock ID, 9
Programming a user name, 224
Programming destination information
from Web browser, 263
Programming destinations in the
Address Book, 81
Programming new destinations, 255
Programs, 268
Program Special Sender, 9
Program Special Sender: Print List, 9
Properties, 243
PWD Code, 112
Q
Quick Operation Key, 9
R
Reading the display, 5
Reading the display panel and using keys, 6
Recall, 273
Received images, 155
Receive File indicator, 149
Receiving documents according to
parameter-specified settings, 150
Receiving documents unconditionally, 150
Receiving Internet Fax documents, 154
Recent, 79
Reception File Print Quantity, 9
Reception File Setting, 9
Reception File Status, 196
Reception functions, 157
Reception modes, 152
Reception Notice, 125
Reception notice message, 125
Reception SEP Code, 109
Reception Settings, 9
Reception time, 164
Regarding IP-Fax destinations, 69
Registering a priority function using a
program, 270
Registering entered destinations to the
Address Book, 83
Registering Keystroke Programs, 268
Reg. No., 95
Regular, 53
Report, 112, 113, 122, 158, 187, 194, 195,
203, 213, 253
283
Resending a file, 189

Resolution, 49
Returning the machine to the
standby mode, 5
Routing e-mail received via SMTP, 161
Routing received documents, 157
Routing received documents with
SUB Code, 157
RTI - Own Name, 150
S
Saving as files, 250
Scanning Two-Sided Originals, 37
Scan Settings, 9, 47
Scan Size, 51
Scan Type, 47
Search by destination name, 85
Search by e-mail address, 90
Search by fax number, 87
Search by IP-Fax destination, 87
Search by registration number, 95
Search criteria, 92
Search Dest., 84
Search Destination, 9
Searching for a destination in the
Address Book, 84
Searching through an LDAP server, 84
Search using Advanced Search, 92
Second Name, 144
Select Dial / Push Phone, 9
Selecting a protocol, 61
Selecting destinations from
Recent Destinations, 79
Selecting type of transmission, 14
Select Line, 61
Select Stored File, 226, 231, 233
Sender Name, 101
Sender settings, 101
Sending a stored file, 221
Sending at a specific time, 123
Sending at specific time, 249
Sending by Internet Fax, 70
Sending by IP-Fax, 67
Sending fax documents from computers, 239
Sending multiple originals using the
exposure glass, 18, 23
Sending over a fax line, 64
Sending stored documents, 226
Sending to an e-mail address, 70
Send Later, 123
Send Settings, 9
Send & Store, 222
SEP Code, 109, 142
284
SEP Code Reception, 109, 142

SEP Code RX Reserve Report, 112
SEP Code RX Result Report, 113
Setting an e-mail destination as a BCC, 127
Setting LAN-Fax Driver properties, 243
Setting print properties, 244
Setting priority trays, 170
Setting the Original Orientation, 36
SID Code, 109
Simplified display, 8
Simplified Display key, 8
Simultaneous Broadcast, 20
Simultaneous Broadcast using
multiple line ports, 63
SIP, 27
SIP server, 27
SIP Settings, 9
SMTP, 73, 182
SMTP reception using Internet Fax, 160
SMTP RX File Delivery Settings, 9
Specifications, 275
Specifying a destination, 64
Specifying a destination by
directly entering, 248
Specifying a destination using
Address Book, 247
Specifying a destination using a
destination list, 247
Specifying a host name, 69
Specifying an alias telephone number, 69
Specifying an IPv4 address, 67
Specifying a SIP user name, 69
Specifying documents by File Name, 230
Specifying documents by User Name, 229
Specifying documents from File List, 229
Specifying group destinations, 78
Specifying options, 249
Specifying tray for lines, 172
Specify Tray for Lines, 9
Stamp Sender Name, 101
Standard, 49
Standard Message Stamp, 135
Stop Transmission, 115, 117
Store / Delete / Print
Information Box File, 215, 217, 218
Stored file + Original, 226
Stored Reception File User Setting, 9
Store File, 222
Store Only, 222
Storing a document, 221, 222
Storing documents in Information Boxes, 215
SUB Code, 106, 141, 157, 158, 211
SUB Code Transfer Report, 158
SUB Code Transmission, 106, 141
Subject, 130
Substitute Reception, 149
Super Fine, 49
Switching between Memory and
Immediate Transmission, 13
Switching the reception mode, 153
Switching the titles in the Address Book, 77
Switch Reception Mode, 9
Switch RX Mode, 152, 153
Switch Title, 9
Symbols, 4
System Status, 267
T
T.37 full mode, 33, 263
Terminology, 27
Text, 47, 133
Text / Line Art, 47
Text / Photo, 47
TIFF-F format, 29
Title 1, 77
Title 2, 77
Title 3, 77
Title word key, 6
To add new receiver, 265
To edit machine properties
already programmed, 264
Tone, 66
Top to Bottom, 37
Top to Top, 37
Transfer Box, 158
Transferring received documents, 158
Transmission, 15, 21
Transmission File Status, 191
Transmission modes, 13
Transmission SUB Code, 106
Transmission with Image Rotation, 44
Transmit Failed File, 189
Transmit Stored File only, 226
Transmitting Journal by e-mail, 205
Tray Shift, 173
TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber
Identification Print), 169
TSI - Transmitting Subscriber
Identification, 169
Two-Sided Printing, 165
TX File List, 187
TX Mode, 123, 125, 127, 128, 130, 133
Types of reception, 147
U
User Name, 224
User Text, 130
User Tools/Counter key, 9
Using a program, 273
Using the Address Book to
specify destinations, 76
Using the Document Server, 221
Using the machine's Address Book
data in the destination
list of the LAN-Fax, 257
Using the software, 240
V
Viewing fax information using a
Web browser, 261
Viewing received fax documents using a
Web browser, 261
Vol..., 97
W
Web Image Monitor, 261
Where incoming documents are
delivered - output tray, 172
285
286
EN
USA
B771-8510
USA
FCC Requirements
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA.
On the cover of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the
telephone company.
2. This equipment uses the RJ11C USOC jack.
3. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network
must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A
compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be
connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for
detail.
4. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs,
contact the local telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier
that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without
a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3).
5. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you
in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is
not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will
be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
6. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company
will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
7. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact
RICOH CORP. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DEPT. at 1-800-FASTFIX. If the equipment is causing
harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the
equipment until the problem is resolved.
8. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication),
refer to the solving problems section in this manual.
9. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.
10. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the
installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions
about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO

EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging
up.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.
CANADA
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
Copyright 2006
FAX Option Type C4500 Operating Instructions Facsimile Reference
EN USA B771-8510
Printer Reference
Preparing the Machine
Setting Up the Printer Driver
Other Print Operations
Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)
Saving and Printing Using the Document Server
The Functions and Settings of the Machine
Appendix
Introduction
Important
Caution:
Trademarks
Adobe, PostScript, Acrobat, PageMaker and Adobe Type Manager are registered trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Macintosh, Mac OS and True Type are trademarks of Apple Computer,
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
BonjourTM is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
IPS-PRINTTM Printer Language Emulation Copyright 2000, Oak Technology, Inc., All Rights Reserved.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through
X/Open Company Limited.
The product name of Windows 2000 are as follows:
The product name of Windows XP are as follows:
The product name of Windows NT 4.0 are as follows:
Notes
local dealer.

About This Machine

Trouble Shooting
Security Reference
Facsimile Reference
Printer Reference
Scanner Reference
Network Guide
i
Other manuals
Safety Information
Quick Reference Copy Guide
Quick Reference Fax Guide
Quick Reference Printer Guide
Quick Reference Scanner Guide
UNIX Supplement
Note

dealer.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Display Panel..........................................................................................................2
Initial Display ..............................................................................................................2
Job List ................................................................................................................... 4
Job List screen ...........................................................................................................4
Checking jobs in the print queue................................................................................5
Changing the order of jobs.........................................................................................6
Holding print jobs .......................................................................................................7
Deleting jobs ..............................................................................................................7
Checking Job History .................................................................................................7
Printer Features Menu ...........................................................................................8
Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray...................................................................... 12
Setting the Paper Size Using the Control Panel ......................................................13
Setting Custom Size Paper Using the Control Panel ...............................................14
Setting Thick Paper or OHP Transparencies Using the Control Panel ....................15
1. Preparing the Machine

Confirming the Connection Method...................................................................17
Network Connection.................................................................................................17
Local Connection .....................................................................................................20
Installing the Printer Driver................................................................................. 21
Quick Install..............................................................................................................21
Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port .....................................................22
Using as a Windows Network Printer ................................................................32
Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer ...........................................34
Form Feed................................................................................................................36
Banner Page ............................................................................................................36
Printing after Resetting the Printer ...........................................................................36
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB .............................................................37
Windows Me - USB ..................................................................................................37
Windows 2000 - USB ...............................................................................................39
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB .............................................................40
Printing with Parallel Connection.......................................................................42
Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)...............................44
Windows 2000..........................................................................................................44
Printing with Bluetooth Connection...................................................................48
Supported Profiles....................................................................................................48
Printing with Bluetooth Connection .......................................................................... 49
Configuring Security Mode Settings.........................................................................50
Printing in the Security Mode ...................................................................................50
Making Option Settings for the Printer ..............................................................51
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication ............................................................ 51
If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled..............................................................53
iii
Installing Font Manager 2000..............................................................................54

Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0 ..............................................55
2. Setting Up the Printer Driver

PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties.............................................................57
Windows 95 / 98 / Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ........................................57
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ...................................................58
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties .................60
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................61
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties ..........................................................64
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ...................................................66
3. Other Print Operations

Printing a PDF File Directly................................................................................. 73
Printing Method ........................................................................................................73
Using DeskTopBinder Lite .......................................................................................73
Using commands .....................................................................................................77
Unauthorized Copy Control ................................................................................ 78
Using [Data security for copying] .................................................................................78
Using [ Mask type:].....................................................................................................80
Important Notice.......................................................................................................81
Using the Print Job Function..............................................................................82
Selecting the Initial Print Job List ............................................................................. 85
Printing from the Print Job Screen ....................................................................86
Sample Print.............................................................................................................86
Locked Print .............................................................................................................90
Hold Print .................................................................................................................94
Stored Print ..............................................................................................................97
Printing from the Jobs Per User ID Screen .....................................................101
Printing the Selected Print Job...............................................................................101
Printing All Print Jobs .............................................................................................103
Form Feed...........................................................................................................105
Printing from a Selected Tray.................................................................................105
Canceling a Print Job .............................................................................................106
Canceling a Print Job ........................................................................................107
Canceling a Print Job Using the Control Panel ......................................................107
Windows - Canceling a Print Job from the computer .............................................108
Checking the Error Log .....................................................................................109
Spool Printing .................................................................................................... 111
User Defined Pages ...........................................................................................112
Printing with the Finisher..................................................................................113
Staple ..................................................................................................................... 114
Punch ..................................................................................................................... 116
Collate ....................................................................................................................118
Covers.................................................................................................................121
iv
Chaptering ..........................................................................................................125
No slip sheets.........................................................................................................125
Inserting chapter slip sheets ..................................................................................126
Slip Sheet............................................................................................................127
4. Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)

What is PictBridge? ...........................................................................................128
PictBridge Printing ............................................................................................129
What Can Be Done on This Machine................................................................131
Index Printing .........................................................................................................132
Trimming ................................................................................................................133
Date and File Name Printing ..................................................................................133
Paper Size..............................................................................................................134
Image Print Size.....................................................................................................135
Multi-Image-Layout ................................................................................................136
Printing Quality....................................................................................................... 137
Color Matching ....................................................................................................... 137
Paper type specification ......................................................................................... 137
Form Printing..........................................................................................................138
Camera Memo Printing ..........................................................................................138
Exiting PictBridge ..............................................................................................139
Other Reference Information ............................................................................140
5. Saving and Printing Using the Document Server

Accessing the Document Server......................................................................142
6. The Functions and Settings of the Machine

Mainframe ...........................................................................................................144
Functions................................................................................................................144
Interface .................................................................................................................144
List of the Setting Items ....................................................................................145
Web Image Monitor................................................................................................145
telnet ......................................................................................................................149
Settings that can be used with PostScript 3...........................................................150
7. Appendix
Specifications.....................................................................................................152
Options...................................................................................................................153
INDEX....................................................................................................... 156
v
vi

Symbols
[]
{}
1
Display Panel
This section describes configuration using the display panel when the printer
function is selected.
Initial Display
Important
The machine switches to offline when you make settings when the machine
is online. After you complete the setting, the machine switches to online automatically.
If you make a setting when the machine is offline, it will stay offline afterwards.
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify
an item by pressing it lightly.
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it becomes highlighted.
Keys dimmed (for example,
) cannot be used.
3
4
7
AQGE001S
1. Operational status or messages
3. [Form Feed]
Displays current machine status, such as

Ready, Offline, and Printing.... Information about the print job (user ID
and document name) appears in this section.
Press to print all the data left in the machine's input buffer.
2. [fOnline] / [ Offline]
When you press these keys, the machine
switches between online and offline.
When the machine is online, it can receive data from the computer.
When the machine is offline, it cannot receive data from the computer.
2
When the machine is online, the status

appears dimly.
This function is not available with the
RPCS printer language.
4. [Job Reset]
Press to cancel the current print job.
If you press it when the machine is offline
and Hex Dump is selected, Hex Dump is
canceled.
5. [Print Jobs]
7. [Spooling Job List]
Press to display print jobs sent from a

computer.
Press to display spooled jobs.
6. [Error Log]
The paper tray settings appear.
8. Paper Tray Status indicators
Press to display the error logs of print

jobs sent from a computer.
Note
When the power is turned on, the copier display is shown. This is a factory
default. This initial setting can be changed. See System Settings, General
Settings Guide.
Simplified Display
When you press {Simplified Display}, the screen changes from the initial display
to the simplified display. Letters and keys are displayed at a larger size, making
operations easier.
AQI032S
Example of a simplified display
Note
To return to the initial display, press {Simplified Display} again.
3
Job List
Jobs printed using Copy, Document Server or Printer mode are temporarily
stored in the machine, and then executed in order. Using the Job List function
allows you to manage these jobs. For example, you can cancel incorrect job settings or print an urgent document.
Note
You cannot use the Job List function when Interrupt Copy is active.
Documents that were printed using the Facsimile function are not displayed
in the job list.
Job List screen

This section explains displays and icons that appear in the Job List screen.
The Job List screen varies depending on whether [Job Order] is selected with
Print Priority for the System Settings. For the setting procedure, see "Print Priority", General Settings Guide.
When [Job Order] is not selected:

The job list is displayed for each of the functions.
1
3
AQGE003S
4
When [Job Order] is selected:

The job list is displayed for all functions in the order of print jobs.
2
3
AQGE004S
A
B
C
D
E
Switches between job lists for each function.

Switches between [Current / Waiting Job List] and [Job History].
Displays the Job List screen.
Reserved job numbers are displayed.
Functions that printed jobs are displayed.
: Job printed using copy function.
: Job printed using printer function.
: Job printed using Document Server function.
: Job printed using DeskTopBinder.
: Job printed using Web Image Monitor.
Checking jobs in the print queue

You can check the contents of jobs in the print queue.
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job you want to check.
C Press [Details], and then check the contents.

D Press [Exit].
5
Changing the order of jobs

You can change the order in which print jobs in the job list are served:
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job whose order you want to change.
C Press [Change Order].

D Change the order using [Top], [Previous], or [Next].
The order of the job list is changed.
E Press [OK].
6
Holding print jobs

The machine holds a job currently printing or jobs in the print queue:
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job(s) to hold.
C Press [Suspend Printing].

Deleting jobs
You can delete a job currently printing or jobs in the print queue.
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job to be deleted.
To delete multiple print jobs, select all print jobs you want to delete.
C Press [Delete Reservation].

D Press [Yes].
Checking Job History
You can view the history contents of printed jobs.
A Press [Job List].

B Press [Job History].
A list of completed print jobs appears.
C Select the job you want to check.

D Press [Details] to check the contents of displayed jobs.
E Press [Exit].
Printer Features Menu

The following explains settings and meanings of functions on Printer Feature.
Select [Printer Feature]after you press the {User Tools/Counter} key. For details, see
Printer Features, General Settings Guide.
List / Test Print

Menu
Description
Multiple Lists
You can print the configuration page and error

log.
Configuration Page
You can print the machine's current configuration values.
Error Log
You can print error logs listing all errors that

occurred during printing.
Menu List
You can print a Menu List showing the machine's function menus.
PCL Configuration / Font Page
You can print the current configuration and

installed PCL font list.
PS Configuration / Font Page

installed PostScript font list.
PDF Configuration / Font Page

installed PDF font list.
Hex Dump
You can print in the Hex Dump mode.
Maintenance
Menu
Menu Protect
Description
This function lets you protect menu settings
from accidental change. It makes it impossible to change menu settings with normal
procedures unless you perform the required
key operations.
In a network environment, only administrators can make changes to menu settings.
You can lock the [List / Test Print] menu.
You can delete all print jobs temporarily

stored in the machine.
You can delete all print jobs stored in the machine.
4 Color Graphic Mode
You can adjust the image density.
8
System
Menu
Description
Print Error Report
You can print an error report when a printer

or memory error occurs.
Auto Continue
You can select this to enable Auto Continue.

When it is On, printing continues after a system error occurs.
Memory Overflow
Select this to have a memory overflow error

report printed.
Job Separation
You can enable Job Separation.

This menu can be selected only when a finisher (optional) is installed.
You can select to automatically delete print

jobs temporarily stored in the machine.
You can select to automatically delete print

jobs stored in the machine.
You can set the default Printer screen when

you press [Print Jobs].
Memory Usage
You can select the amount of memory used

in Font Priority or Frame Priority, according
to paper size or resolution.
Duplex
You can select to have print on both sides of

each page.
Copies
You can specify the number of print sets.

This setting is disabled if the number of pages to print has been specified with the printer
driver or another command.
Blank Page Print
You can select whether or not to print blank

pages.
You can specify how long the machine waits

to receive a print job before allowing other
functions such as the copier and scanner
functions to interrupt it.
Printer Language
You can specify the printer language.
Sub Paper Size
You can enable the Auto Substitute Paper

Size (A4LT) feature.
Page Size
You can select the default paper size.
Letterhead Setting
You can rotate original images when printing.

When printing, original images are always
rotated by 180 degrees. Therefore, output
might not be as expected when printing onto
letterhead or preprinted paper requiring orientation. Using this function, you can specify
image rotation.
You can specify which of the two options,

(Printer) Driver / Command or Machine Settings, has priority for determining the paper
size for the bypass tray.
Menu
Description
Edge to Edge Print
You can select whether or not to print on the

entire sheet.
You can set the default printer language if

the machine cannot find the printer language
automatically.
Tray Switching
You can set to switch the paper tray.
Host Interface
Menu
Description
I/O Buffer
You can set the size of the I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change this setting.
I/O Timeout
You can set how many seconds the machine

should wait before ending a print job. If data
from another port usually arrives in the middle of a print job, you should increase this
timeout period.
PCL Menu
Menu
Description
Orientation
You can set the page orientation.
Form Lines
You can set the number of lines per page.
Font Source
You can set the storage location of the default font.
Font Number
You can set the ID of the default font you

want to use.
Point Size
You can set the point size you want to use for
the selected font.
Font Pitch
You can set the number of characters per

inch for the selected font.
Symbol Set
You can specify the set of print characters for

the selected font. The available options are as
follows:
Courier Font
You can select a courier font type.
Extend A4 Width
You can extend the printing area width

when printing on A4 sheet with PCL.
Append CR to LF
When set to On, a carriage return will follow

each line feed: CR=CR, LF=CRLF, FF=CR
FF.
Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per

inch.
10
PS Menu (optional)
Menu
Description
Data Format
You can select a data format.
Resolution

inch.
Color Setting
Color Profile
PDF Menu (optional)

Menu
Description
Change PDF Password
You can set the password for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
PDF Group Password
You can set the group password already

specified with DeskTopBinder Lite.
Resolution

inch.
Color Setting
Color Profile
Note
Some options do not appear depending optional units or selected printer languages.
Some options cannot be set depending on security settings.

Reference
For details, see Printer Features, General Settings Guide.
For more information about copier features and system settings, see Copy
Reference and General Settings Guide.
11
Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray

This section gives instructions for setting paper on the bypass tray.
For details about paper size and paper type, see Paper Size and Paper Type,
About This Machine.
Important
The following functions are disabled when printing from the bypass tray:
Duplex/Booklet printing
Auto Tray Select
Auto Tray Switching
Rotating Collate
Staple (when the optional Finisher SR3030, Booklet Finisher SR3020 or
SR790 is installed)
Punch (when the optional Finisher SR3030 or Booklet Finisher SR3020 is installed)
A Open the bypass tray.
AQF070S
B Gently insert paper face down into the bypass tray until the beeper sounds,
and then adjust the paper guides to the paper size by pinching the clip.
If the paper size of the paper guide and the paper do not match, skewing and
misfeeds might occur.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark, otherwise a skewed image or misfeeds might occur.
Open out the extender to support paper sizes larger than A4 L, 81/2 11 L.
Fan the paper to get air between the sheets to avoid a multi-sheet feed.
AQF071S
12
1. Extender
2. Paper Guide
3. Clip
C Set the paper size using the printer driver or the control panel.
The following procedures are not required if you select [Driver / Command]
from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features]. In that case,
set the paper size using the printer driver.
Note
Paper sizes that can be loaded onto the bypass tray are 90 - 305 mm (3.6 12 in.) vertical, and 148 - 600 mm (5.9 - 23.7 in.) horizontal.
When loading OHP transparencies or thick paper, set paper size and paper type.
The number of sheets that can be loaded in the bypass tray depends on the
paper type.
Reference
When loading letterhead paper, pay attention to its orientation. See General Settings Guide.
For printer driver settings, see the printer driver Help.
Setting the Paper Size Using the Control Panel

Follow the procedure below to set the machine using the control panel when
loading standard size paper onto the bypass tray.
Important
from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features] (see Printer
Features, General Settings Guide). In that case, set the paper size using the
printer driver.
Under [Printer Features], [System Setting], if you set [Bypass Tray Setting Priority]
to [Driver/Command] , paper size settings made on the printer driver must
match those made on the control panel. If they do not match, an error message
appears and printing stops if [Printer Features], [System,], [Auto Continue] is not
set. For details about [Printer Features] settings, see General Settings Guide.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key on the control panel.

C Press the [Tray Paper Settings] tab.
D Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size].
13

F Press [OK].
The initial screen appears.
Note
When loading OHP transparencies or thick paper, set paper size and paper
type.
[Auto Detect] is the default setting for [Printer Bypass Paper Size].
Reference
Setting Custom Size Paper Using the Control Panel

loading custom size paper onto the bypass tray.
Important
printer driver.
If you select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of
[Printer Features] (see Printer Features, General Settings Guide), the settings
made using the control panel have priority over the printer driver settings.
If the printer driver is not used, select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features] (see Printer Features, General Settings Guide). Set paper size using the control panel.

D Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size].
E Press [Custom Size].
If a custom size is already set, press [Change Size].
14
F Press [Vertical], enter the vertical size of the paper using the number keys,
and then press the {q} key.
G Press [Horizontal], enter the horizontal size of the paper using the number
H Press [OK].
The paper sizes entered are displayed.

Note
Paper loaded on the bypass tray must be between the following dimensions;
Vertical: 90 - 305 mm (3.6 - 12 in.) Horizontal: 148 - 600 mm (5.9 - 23.7 in.) .
When loading OHP transparencies or thick paper, set paper size and paper
type.
Setting Thick Paper or OHP Transparencies Using the Control Panel

loading thick paper or OHP transparencies onto the bypass tray.
Important
printer driver.
If you select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of
[Printer Features] (see Printer Features, General Settings Guide), the settings
made using the control panel have priority over the printer driver settings.
If the printer driver is not used, select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features] (see Printer Features, General Settings Guide). Set the paper size using the control panel.

D Press [TNext] to scroll through the list.
E Press [Paper Type: Bypass Tray].
15
F Press [OHP (Transparency)] on the [Paper Type] area when loading OHP transparencies. Press [No Display] on the [Paper Type] area, and then press [Thick Paper 1], [Thick Paper 2], or [Thick Paper 3] on the [Paper Thickness] area when
loading thick paper.
G Press [OK].
The paper type selected is displayed.

Note
The settings made will remain valid until they are reset again. After printing on OHP transparencies or thick paper, make sure to clear settings for
the next user.
16
1. Preparing the Machine

Confirming the Connection Method
This machine supports network and local connection.
Before installing the printer driver, check how the machine is connected. Follow
the driver installation procedure that is appropriate to the connection method.
Network Connection
This machine can be used as a Windows printing port or network printer.
Using This Machine as the Windows Printing port

Network connections can be established through Ethernet, IEEE 802.11b, and
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394).
Available ports are determined based on the combination of Windows operating
system version and connection method used.
ZZZ035S
Windows 95 / 98
Connection Method
Available Ports
Ethernet / IEEE 802.11b
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
None
17
Windows Me
Connection Method
Available Ports
Windows 2000
Connection Method
Available Ports

Standard TCP/IP
LPR port
None
Windows XP
Connection Method
Available Ports

Standard TCP/IP
LPR port

Standard TCP/IP
Windows Server 2003

Connection Method
Available Ports

Standard TCP/IP
LPR port

Standard TCP/IP
Windows NT 4.0
Connection Method
Available Ports

LPR port
None
Reference
See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each type of
port. For the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port, see p.22 Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port.
For the Standard TCP/IP port, see p.28 Using the Standard TCP/IP Port.
For the LPR port, see p.30 Using the LPR Port.
18
Confirming the Connection Method
Using as a network printer

This machine can be used as the Windows network printer, the NetWare print
server, or the NetWare remote printer.
ZZZ036S
Note
In an IPv6 environment, NetWare servers cannot be used.
Reference
See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each type of
network printer.
For the Windows network printer, see p.32 Using as a Windows Network
Printer.
For the NetWare print server and remote printer, see p.34 Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer.
19
Local Connection
Local connections can be established via parallel, USB, IEEE 1394 (SCSI print),
and Bluetooth connections.
Windows operating system version determines the available connection methods.
Windows 95:
Parallel connections
Windows 98:
Windows 98 SE / Me:
USB and Parallel connections
Windows 2000:
USB, Parallel, IEEE 1394 (SCSI print), and Bluetooth connections
Windows XP:
Windows Server 2003:
Windows NT 4.0:
Reference
See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each method of
connection.
For the USB connection, see p.37 Installing the Printer Driver Using USB.
For the parallel connection, see p.42 Printing with Parallel Connection.
For the IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) connection, see p.44 Installing the Printer
Driver Using IEEE 1394 (SCSI print).
For the Bluetooth connection, see p.48 Printing with Bluetooth Connection.
20
Installing the Printer Driver

This section explains how to install the printer driver. There are two ways to install the printer driver: using Quick Install, which installs the settings at once, or
installing the appropriate driver according to the port you want to use.
Quick Install
Windows 95 / 98 / Me / 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0
users can easily install this software using the supplied CD-ROM.
Using Quick Install, the PCL printer driver and/or RPCS printer driver, DeskTopBinder Lite and SmartDeviceMonitor for Client are installed under network
environment, and the TCP/IP port will be set.
Important
To install printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
If you connect using USB, refer to p.37 Installing the Printer Driver Using
USB and install the printer driver.

B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch Setup.exe on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].

The default interface language is English.
D Click [Quick Install].

The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
E After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click
[Next >].
F Select the machine model you want to use in the [Select Printer] dialog box.
For network connection via TCP/IP, select the machine whose IP address is
displayed in [Connect To].
For parallel connection, select the machine whose printer port is displayed in
[Connect To].
G Click [Install].
The printer driver installation starts.
21
H Click [Finish].
A message about restarting the computer appears. Restart the computer to
complete installation.
I Click [Exit] in the first dialog box of the installer, and then take out the CD-
ROM.
Note
To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
Select a machine to whose IP address is displayed in [Connect To] to install
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client when using TCP/IP.
Reference
Quick Install is not available unless bidirectional communication between
the machine and computer is enabled via parallel connection. See p.53 If
Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled for details about bidirectional
communication between the machine and computer.
Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port

Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port
Important
To install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client under Windows 2000 / XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client before installing the printer driver

when using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client


D Click [DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client].

E Select an interface language, and then click [Next >].
22
F The message to quit all other applications appears. Quit all applications,
and then click [Next >].
G The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box. After reading through its contents, click [Yes].
H Click [Full install] or [Custom Install].

[Full install] installs all required applications: DeskTopBinder Lite and SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
[Custom Install] installs selected applications.
I Follow the instructions on the display and click [Next >] to proceed to the
next step.
J After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
computer either now or later, and click [Complete].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
Changing the Port Settings for SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Follow the procedure below to change the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as TCP/IP timeout, recovery/parallel printing, and printer groups.
Windows 95 / 98:
A Open the [Printers] window from the [Start] menu.

B In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Port Settings].

The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
Windows 2000 / Windows NT 4.0:
A Open [Printers] window from [Start] menu.

C On the [Ports] tab, click [Configure Port].

The [Configuration] dialog box appears.
23
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003:
A Open the [Printers and Faxes] window from the [Start] menu.
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the machine you want to use. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties]. The printer properties appear.
C Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].

The [Port Configuration] dialog box appears.
Note
For TCP/IP, timeout setting can be configured.
User, proxy, and timeout settings can be configured for IPP.

If no settings on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab are available, follow the
procedure below.
A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box.
B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the tasktray.
C Point to [Properties], and then click [Extended Features Settings].
D Select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each port] check box.
E Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box.
Reference
For information about these settings, see Using SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client, Network Guide, or SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (TCP/IP)

Important
To install this printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has
Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users
group member.


D Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].

E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
24
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
F Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
G Click [Next >].

H Select the machine model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
I Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, and port.
J Click [Port:], and then click [Add].

K Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK].
L Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.
M Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a machine not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the IP address
or host name of the machine.
N Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].

O Set a user code, if necessary.
Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. No alphabetic character or symbol
can be entered.
P Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
Q Click [Continue].
Installation starts.
R After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
computer either now or later, and then click [Finish].
Note
Setting a user code allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check statistics about the number of sheets which each user
prints. For details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Under Windows 95 / 98 / Me, you cannot add an IP address partially similar to the one already used. For example, if 192.168.0.2 is in use,
192.168.0.2xx cannot be used. Similarly, if 192.168.0.20 is in use,
192.168.0.2 cannot be used.
25
Reference
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If
you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See When a Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver, Trouble Shooting.
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (IPP)

Important
To install printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.



F Select a printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
G Select the machine model you want to use.

H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

I Click [Port:], and then click [Add].

J Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK].
K Click [IPP].
L In the [Printer URL] box, enter http://printer's address/printer as the print-
26
er's address.
If the server authentication is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted
communication), enter https://printer's address/printer (Internet Explorer 5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter http://printer's address/ipp as the printer's address.
M Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box becomes the IPP port name.
N Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.

For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
O Click [OK].
P Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
Q Set a user code, if necessary.
Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. No alphabetic characters or symbols can be entered.
R Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
S Click [Continue].
Installation starts.
T After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
Note
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch Setup.exe on the CD-ROM root directory.
Setting a user code allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check the number of sheets each user prints. For details, see
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Reference
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run.
If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See When a
Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver, Trouble
Shooting.
27
Using the Standard TCP/IP Port

This describes how to install the PCL or RPCS printer driver using the TCP/IP
port.
Important
To install this printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional, and
Windows Server 2003, you must have an account that has Manage Printers
permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
In an IPv6 environment, you cannot use the Standard TCP/IP Port. Use the
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver



G Click [Next >].

H Select the machine model you want to use.


K Click [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [OK].
Configure the Standard TCP/IP port settings, and then see Windows Help if
[Standard TCP/IP Port] does not appear.
L Click [Next >] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
28
M Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box.
The [Port Name] text box automatically obtains a port name. Change this name
if necessary.
When the device selection appears, select RICOH NetworkPrinter Driver C
Model.
N Click [Next >].

O Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
The installation start dialog box reappears.
P Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].

Q Configure the default printer as necessary.
R Click [Continue].
S After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
Note
Reference
Shooting.
29
Using the LPR Port

This describes how to install the PCL or RPCS printer driver using the LPR port.
Important
group member.



G Select the machine model you want to use.

H Click [Next >].


K Click [LPR Port], and then click [OK].
If [LPR Port] does not appear, see Windows Help and install it.
L Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd]
box.
M Enter lp in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and then click
[OK].
The port is added.
30

O Configure the default printer as necessary.
P Click [Continue].
Q After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
Note
Reference
Shooting.
31
Using as a Windows Network Printer

This describes how to install the PCL or RPCS printer driver when using the
printer as a Windows network printer.
To use the print server, install the printer driver by selecting Network printer
server, and then select the Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 shared printer.
This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communicate
with a Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 print
server. Do not begin the following procedure before the client is set up and configured correctly.
Important
To install the printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has
group member.
If you print with a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDeviceMonitor port, Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing cannot be used
from the client.
If you print with a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 print server, notification functions of SmartDeviceMonitor may not be used with the client.
If you print with a Windows NT 4.0 print server, install the printer driver before you connect the print server to the printer.



G Click [Next >].

32
Using as a Windows Network Printer
H Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer models you want to use.

K Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
L Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
[Browse for Printer] window.
M Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
O Configure the user code as necessary.
For an RPCS printer driver, a user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.
P Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
Q Click [Continue].
R After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
Note
Reference
Shooting.
33
Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote

Printer
1
This describes how to set up the Windows computer used as the NetWare client.
Important
group member.
In an IPv6 environment, Netware servers cannot be used.

The following explanation assumes NetWare Client is installed on the client
computer and the NetWare server environment is correctly set up. Install all necessary client applications before following this procedure.
Set up the printer driver while logging on to the NetWare file server.
The following values are used in the example:
Operating system: Windows 98
NetWare version: 4.1
File server name: CAREE
Queue name: R-QUEUE

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that case,
launch Setup.exe on the CD-ROM root directory.
B Select an interface language, and then click [OK].

C Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].

D The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
E Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
F Click [Next >].

G Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model you want to use.
34
Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

I Click [Port:], and then click [Add].

J Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
K Double-click the name of the NetWare file server on the network tree.
The created queue is displayed.
L Select the print queue, and then click [OK].

M Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
N Click [Continue].
O Click [Finish] in the [Select Program] dialog box.

P After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
Q After restarting the computer, launch the [Printers] window, and then open
the printer properties.
Under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, open the printer properties
from the [Printers and Faxes] window.
R On the [Printer Settings] tab, clear the [Form Feed] and [Enable Banner] check
boxes.
Under Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, click
the [NetWare setting] tab.
Do not select these check boxes since they are automatically selected by the
printer driver. If you select the check boxes, the printer may not print correctly.
S Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.

Note
The protocol is set to inactive as default. Enable it using SmartDeviceMonitor or Telnet.
35
Form Feed
Do not use NetWare to configure form feed. Form feed is controlled by the printer driver on Windows. If NetWare form feed is configured, the printer may not
print properly.
Follow the procedure below to disable form feed according to the operating system used:
Under Windows 95 / 98 / Me, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [Printer
Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
Under Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, clear
the [Form feed] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties
dialog box.
Banner Page
Do not use NetWare to configure a banner page.
Follow the procedure below to disable banner pages according to the operating
system used:
Under Windows 95 / 98 / Me, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [Printer Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
Under Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, clear
the [Enable banner] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
Printing after Resetting the Printer

Printer to print server connection requires 30 - 40 seconds to resume after the
printer is reset. During this period, jobs may be accepted (depending on NetWare specifications) but not printed.
To print after resetting the printer as the remote printer, check on the print server
that the remote printer is disconnected, or wait for two minutes before trying to
print.
36
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB

This section explains how to install printer drivers using USB.
Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the computer and no print jobs are in progress.
The printer drivers can be installed from the supplied CD-ROM provided with
this machine.
Windows Me - USB
Important
Installation via USB is not possible under Windows 95 / 98. Upgrade to Windows Me or later.
Download USB Printing Support for Windows Me from the supplier's Web
site.
When USB is first used, the plug and play function starts and the [New Hardware
Found], [Device Driver Wizard], or [Add New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, depending on the operating system.
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the
icon of the printer connected to the USB port is added to the [Printers] window.
A Download USB Printing Support from the supplier's Web site.

Use a search to find the model name, and then download USB Printing Support from the supplier's Web site.
Save it where you can locate it easily.
B Connect the machine to the computer using the USB cable.

Connect the USB cable firmly.
C In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver
for my device [recommended]], and then click [Next >].
D Select the [Specify a location:] check box, and then click [Browse...].
The [Browse for Folder] dialog box appears.
E Specify the location where USB Printing Support is located, and then click
[Next >].
F Check the location, and then click [Next >].

USB Printing Support is installed.
G Click [Finish].
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and
the icon of the printer connected to the USB001 port is added to the [Printers]
window.
37
H Insert the printer driver. Click [Search for the best driver for your device. [Recommended]], and then click [Next >].
I Select the [Specify a location:] check box, and then click [Browse...].
J Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

Note
When Auto Run starts, click [Exit].
To disable Auto Run, press the {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from
the CD-ROM.
K Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver are stored,
RPCS
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
PCL 5c (for color printing)
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
PCL 5e (for B & W printing)
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
PCL 6
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
PostScript 3 (Scanner Driver and Utilities CD-ROM)
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
L Check the location, and then click [Next >].

Add Printer Wizard starts.
M Click [Finish].
Installation is complete. If installation is successful, the icon of the printer
connected to the USB001 port is added to the [Printers] window.
Note
The number after USB varies depending on the number of printers connected.
It is not necessary to reinstall USB Printing Support when connecting a different machine via USB interface when USB Printing Support is installed.
After installing USB Printing Support, if the printer driver is not installed,
follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer.
38
Windows 2000 - USB

Important
Installing a printer driver requires Administrator permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrator permission.
When USB is first used, Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing
Support is installed automatically.
If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the
printer to install it from the supplied CD-ROM.
A Connect the machine to the computer using the USB cable.

B In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver
C Select the [Specify location] check box, and then click [Next >].
D Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
To disable Auto Run, press the left {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
the CD-ROM.
E Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver are stored.
RPCS
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
PCL 6
F Check the printer driver location, and then click [OK].

G Click [Next >].
39
H Click [Finish].
the icon of the printer connected to the USB001 port is added to the [Printers]
window.
Note
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB

Important
Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
When USB is first used, Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing
Support is installed automatically.
this machine.
printer to install it from the supplied CD-ROM.
A Connect the machine to the computer using the USB cable.

B In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver
C Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

If Auto Run starts, click [Cancel], and then [Exit].
the CD-ROM.
40
D Select the [Include this location in the search] check box under [Search for the best
driver in these location], and then click [Browse] to select the printer driver location.
RPCS
PCL 6
E Check the printer driver location, and then click [Next >].
F Click [Continue].
G Click [Finish].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the USB001
port is added to the [Printers and Faxes] window.
Note
41
Printing with Parallel Connection

This describes how to install the PCL or RPCS printer driver when using the parallel port.
To use a machine connected using a parallel interface, click [LPT1] when installing the printer driver.
Important
group member.



G Click [Next >].

H Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model you want to use.

J Check that [LPT1:] is shown in [Port:].

K Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
L Click [Finish].
42
M After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
Note
Reference
Shooting.
43
Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394

(SCSI print)
1
this machine.
Important
Quit all applications currently running, and do not print during installation.
Do not connect IEEE 1394 or USB devices to the computer or turn on another
printers during installation.
Before uninstalling the printer driver, check that the IEEE 1394 interface cable
is disconnected from the computer.
SCSI print must be set to active from the control panel. For details, see Network Guide.
Note
This machine can receive print data from one computer at a time only. A message may appear if print jobs from different computers collide.
If jobs collide, the first received job is printed first.

When the printer driver is properly installed, connecting or disconnecting the
optional IEEE 1394 cable causes the printer icon to change.
Windows 2000
This describes how to install the printer driver to the computer with Windows
2000 installed, using IEEE 1394 (SCSI print).
Important
If [Found New Hardware Wizard] appears every time the computer is started or
the cable is connected, disable the device. To install another printer driver after setting the 1394_00n port, click [1394_00] as a port during the printer
driver installation.
Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
The optional 1394 interface unit can be used only with Service Pack 1 (SP1) or
higher.
A Connect the machine to the computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
B Click [Next >] in the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box.
C When the message This wizard will complete the installation for this Device: Unknown appears, click [Specify a location], and then click [Next >].
D When the message Locate Driver Files appears, select the [Optional search
locations.] check box, and then click [Specify a location], and then click [Next >].
44
Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)
E Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

the CD-ROM.
F Click [Browse].
G Select the printer driver you want to use.
RPCS
PCL 6
H Click [Open].
I Click [OK].
J Follow the on-screen instructions.
When installation is complete, the printer connected to 1394_00n appears
in the [Printers] window: (n shows the number of printers connected.)
If the printer driver has already been installed, the printer icon is added to the
[Printers] window. In this case, printer driver installation is not necessary.
If printing does not work properly after the installation, delete the port and
reinstall the printer driver. For details, see Trouble Shooting
Note
If you do not want to install the printer when Found New Hardware Wizard starts under an operating system that supports SCSI print, disable the
device by following the procedure below.
A When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, click [Next >].
B When the message This wizard will complete the installation for this
Device: Unknown appears, select the [Search for a suitable driver for my
device [recommended]] check box, and then click [Next >].
C When the message Please choose your search and installation option.
appears, clear all check boxes from [Search for the best driver in these locations.], and then click [Next >].
D When the message Driver Files Search Results appears, select the [Disable the device. The Add/Remove Hardware Wizard in the control Panel can be
able to complete the driver installations.] check box, and then click [Finish].
45

This describes how to install the printer driver to the computer with Windows
XP or Windows Server 2003 installed, using IEEE 1394 (SCSI print).
Important
SCSI print must be set to active from the control panel. For details, see Network Guide.
A Connect the machine to the computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, check that [This wizard helps you install software for: (Unknown)] is displayed.
B Select the [Install from a list on specific location (Advanced)] check box, and then
click [Next >].
C When the message Please choose your search and installation option. appears, select the [Search for the best driver in these locations.] check box, select
the [Include this location in the search:] check box, and then select the [Include
this location in the search:] check box.
D Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

the CD-ROM.
E Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver are stored,

RPCS
PCL 6
When installation is complete, the printer connected to 1394_00n appears in
the [Printers and Faxes] window. (n shows the number of printers connected.)
46
F Follow the on-screen instructions.

If the printer driver has already been installed, the printer icon is added to the
[Printers and Faxes] window. In this case, printer driver installation is not necessary.
Even if the printer driver is already installed, the message Found New Hardware Wizard may appear when the machine is connected to the computer
using the IEEE 1394 interface cable for the first time. In that case, install the
printer driver.
Note
This machine can receive print data from one computer at a time only. If a
print job from a computer collides with other data, a message may appear
on the computer.
To install another printer driver after setting the 1394_00n port, click
[1394_00] as a port during the printer driver installation.
When the printer driver is properly installed, connecting or disconnecting
the optional IEEE 1394 cable causes the printer icon to change.
reinstall the printer driver. For details, see Trouble Shooting.
If you do not want to install the printer when Found New Hardware Wizard starts under an operating system that supports SCSI print, disable the
device by following the procedure below:
A When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, check that
[This wizard helps you install software for: Unknown] is displayed, select the
[Install from a list on specific location (Advanced)] check box, and then click
[Next >].
B When the message Please choose your search and installation option.
appears, clear all check boxes from [Search for the best driver in these locations.], and then click [Next >].
C When the message The wizard could not find the software on your
computer for.. appears, click [OK].
D When the message Cannot Install this Hardware appears, select the
[Don't prompt again to install the software] check box, and then click [Finish].
47
Printing with Bluetooth Connection

This describes how to print with Bluetooth devices.
Supported Profiles
Refer to following supported profiles for Bluetooth connection.
SPP, HCRP
A maximum of two Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computers
can be connected at the same time using the Bluetooth interface: one by
SPP, one by HCRP.
When connecting more than one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped
computer at the same time, the first device that establishes connection is selected. When selecting the connection between the other devices, cancel
the first established connection.
SPP connection does not support bidirectional communications.
HCRP connection supports bidirectional communications.
BIP
For BIP connection, a module including PostScript 3 must be installed in
the machine.
Only one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer can be connected via BIP.
Only JPEG images can be printed using BIP.
User codes are disabled for BIP.
You cannot print if print functions are restricted.
Some printers do not support BIP.
Note
Instructions in this manual relate to printing via SPP. To print using HCRP or
BIP, see the Help supplied with the Bluetooth adapter you use.
48

To install the printer driver, follow the procedure used to install parallel interface.
Important
To install the printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional or Windows Server 2003, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
A Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.

B Check that the printer you want to use appears in 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.
C On the [Tool] menu, click [COM port].

D Check that the message Bluetooth Serial Client (COMx) appears under
Client Ports. (X indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth.)
E Click [Close].
F On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
G Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

H On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
I Click the [Ports] tab.
J Under [Port], select the [COMx:] check box. X indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth.
K Click [OK].
Close the [Printers] window.
Note
To always use the same printer, select the [Always use for this connection]
check box.
System requirements vary depending on the Bluetooth standard and specifications. For details, see the manuals supplied with each product.
For information about setting up Bluetooth under other operating systems
or using it with different utilities, see the manuals supplied with those operating systems or utilities.
If a dialog box appears while transmitting a print job, reestablish network
connection as follows:
A Select the printer you want to use in the [Printers and Faxes] box.
B Click [Connect].
Reference
For details, see the manuals supplied with the Bluetooth adaptor or computer equipped with Bluetooth.
49
Configuring Security Mode Settings

This describes how to configure the security mode settings.

B On the [Tools] menu, click [Security Mode].
The [Security Mode] dialog box appears.
C Select the security mode in the [Security Mode:] list.

If you click [High], or [Custom], and specify [Link] in the [Custom Settings] dialog
box, enter the Bluetooth password. For information about entering the password, see p.50 Printing in the Security Mode.
For all other security modes and custom settings, no password is required.
For information about each mode, see the manuals supplied with the utility.
D Click [OK].
Close the [Security Mode] dialog box.
Reference
For details about the security mode, see 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager Help. For details about the password entry which is required to transmit print jobs, see p.50 Printing in the Security Mode.
Printing in the Security Mode

This describes how to print in the security mode.
A Send the print job to the printer in use.

Depending on the computer configuration, the [Connect] dialog box may appear. If it does, use it to establish the network connection.
B The [Authentication] dialog box appears.

C Enter the Bluetooth password, and then click [OK].
As the Bluetooth password, enter the last four digits of the machine's serial
number. You can find the serial number on the label attached to the back of
the machine. For example, if the serial number is 00A0-001234, the Bluetooth
password is 1234.
D The print job is sent.

Note
The Bluetooth password differs for each machine and cannot be changed.
50
Making Option Settings for the Printer

Make option settings for the machine using the printer driver when bidirectional
communication is disabled.
Reference
For details about making option settings for the printer, see p.53 If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled.
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication

Bidirectional communication allows information about paper size and feed direction settings to be automatically sent to the printer. You can check machine
status from your computer.
Bidirectional communication is supported by Windows 95 / 98 / Me / 2000
/ XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.
If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional communication is enabled under Windows 2000, the [Change Accessories] tab is unavailable.
Note
The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional communications and updates
the machine status automatically.
The PCL printer driver supports bidirectional communications. You can update the machine status manually.
To support bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:
When connected with parallel cables

The computer must support bidirectional communication.
The machine must support bidirectional communication.
The interface cable must support bidirectional communication.
The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cables and parallel connectors.
Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and
[Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Ports] tab with the RPCS
printer driver.
51
When connected with the network

The machine must support bidirectional communication.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and TCP/IP must be used.
Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and
[Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Ports] tab with the RPCS
printer driver.
In addition to the above, one of the following conditions must also be met:
The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port and the TCP/IP protocol must
be used.
The standard TCP/IP port must be used without changing the default
port name (for Windows 2000 / XP and Windows Server 2003).
Microsoft TCP/IP print IP address must be specified for use (for Windows NT 4.0).
IPP port name must include the IP address when using the IPP protocol.
When connected with IEEE 1394

The machine must be connected to the IEEE 1394 connector of a computer
using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
[Activate] must be selected in the SCSI print of IEEE 1394 and [Activate] must
be selected in the Bidi-SCSI print.
Under Windows 2000 / XP or Windows Server 2003, [Enable bidirectional
support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected
on the [Ports] tab with RPCS printer driver.
When connected with USB
The machine must be connected to the computer's USB port using the USB interface cable.
Note
Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client from the supplied CD-ROM.
52
If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled

Set up option settings when bidirectional communications are disabled.
Important
Under Windows 2000 / XP and Windows Server 2003, Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer properties in the [Printers] folder.
Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
Under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control permission is required to change the

printer properties in the [Printers] (Windows 2000) or [Printers and Faxes] (Windows XP / Windows Server 2003) folder. Log on as an Administrators or
Power Users group member.

When using Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, point to [Settings] on the
[Start] menu, and then click [Printers and Faxes]. The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
D Click the [Change Accessories] tab.
If options in the [Change Accessories] tab are disabled, bidirectional connection
is enabled. In this case, no change is necessary for option settings.
If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click the [Change Accessories] tab.
E Select options installed from the [Options] area, and then make the necessary settings.
F Select the total amount of the memory in [Total memory:] when the optional
SDRAM module is added.
G Under [Paper source tray settings:], click and highlight the tray to be used, and
then select the appropriate size, position, and type for the tray. Select the
[Do not use Auto Tray Select] check box to exclude the tray from the targets of
automatic tray selection.
H Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
53
Installing Font Manager 2000

Important
Under Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, installing applications by Auto Run requires administrator permission. To install a printer driver by Auto Run, log on using an account that has
administrator permission.

C Click [Font Manager 2000].

D Follow the instructions on the screen.
54
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5,

or 7.0
1
Under Windows 95 / 98 / Me / 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows

NT 4.0 with Adobe PageMaker, you need to copy PPD files to the PageMaker
folder.
PPD files have the .ppd extension in the folder DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME
\(Language)\DISK1 on the CD-ROM.
The WIN9X_ME folder inside the PS folder is for Windows 95 / 98 / Me. Use
the folder that is appropriate for the operating system you are currently using.
The third folder (Language) may be substituted by an appropriate language
name.
Copy the .ppd file to the PageMaker folder.
For PageMaker 6.0 default installation
The directory is C:\PM6\RSRC\PPD4.
The directory is C:\PM65\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4.
The USENGLISH may vary depending on your language selection.
The directory is C:\PM7\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4.
The USENGLISH may vary depending on your language selection.
Note
If the driver is not set correctly after copying the .ppd file, printing may not
be performed properly.
When using PageMaker, the optional features that can be selected by the
printer driver will not be active. The following procedure describes how to
activate the optional printer features.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print Document] dialog box appears.
B Make the necessary settings in the [Features] box.
55
56
2. Setting Up the Printer Driver

PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows 95 / 98 / Me - Accessing the Printer Properties
There are two methods to open the printer properties dialog box.
Making Printer Default Settings

To make the printer default settings, open the printer properties dialog box from
the [Printers] window.
Important
You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.


D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the
application's own default settings are applied.
Reference
Making Printer Settings from an Application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings
for the NotePad application provided with Windows 95 / 98 / Me.

The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].

57
D Click [OK] to start printing.

Note
The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.
Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box
of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing
from this application.
Reference
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making Printer Default Settings - The Printer Properties
Important
To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the
Administrator and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by
default.



Note
Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Reference
58
Making Printer Default Settings - Printing Preferences

Important

C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.

Note
Reference

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences]
for the NotePad application provided with Windows 2000.

B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply] to start printing.
Note
The procedure to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the
application you use.
application only.
Reference
59
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Important
Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission
by default.



Note
Reference

Important



Note
60
Reference

for the NotePad application provided with Windows XP.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list, and then click
[Preferences].
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK] to start printing.
Note
application only.
Reference
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Important
log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups
have Full Control permission by default.


61

Note
Reference
Making Printer Default Settings - Default

Important


C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults].
The [Default] dialog box appears.

Note
Reference

for the NotePad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.

62

Note
application only.
Reference
63
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties

There are two dialog box types of the printer properties dialog box.
Multi-tab is used as an example in this manual. For details about changing the
dialog box types, see the printer driver Help.
Multi-tab
This dialog box type is designed for users who often change print settings to
perform various printing operations.
Custom Setting
This dialog box type is designed for users who rarely change print settings.
This type of dialog box may vary depending on the installed options.
Making Printer Default Settings
Important


When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the
RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [OK], the
printer properties dialog box appears.

Note
Reference
64

for the NotePad application provided with Windows 95 / 98 / Me.

Note
application only.
Reference
65
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties

This describes how to launch printer driver's properties.

Important
by default.



Note
Reference

Important


66

Note
Reference

for the NotePad application provided with Windows 2000.

Note
application only.
Reference
67
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer

Properties
Important
by default.



Note
Reference

Important


68

Note
Reference

for the NotePad application provided with Windows XP.

Note
application only.
Reference
69

Important



Note
Reference
Making Printer Default Settings - Default

Important


70
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults...].


Note
Reference

for the NotePad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.


Note
application only.
Reference
71
72
3. Other Print Operations

Printing a PDF File Directly
You can send PDF files directly to the machine for printing, without having to
open a PDF application.
Important
This function is possible only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
This function is possible for genuine Adobe PDF files only.

Version 1.3, 1.4, and 1.5 PDF files are compatible.
Transparency and JBIG2 (functions of PDF version 1.4) are not compatible.
PDF version 1.5 exclusive functions are not compatible.
High Compression PDF files created using the machine's scanner function
cannot be printed directly.
Note
Paper size errors may occur when printing on custom size paper.
Printing Method
The following are the two methods of printing the PDF files directly, either using
the DeskTopBinder Lite, or entering commands.
Using DeskTopBinder Lite

Installing DeskTopBinder Lite
Follow the procedure below to install DeskTopBinder Lite

Auto Run may not work under certain operating system settings. In this case,
launch Setup.exe located on the CD-ROM root directory.

D Click [DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client] , and then click [Next >].
E Follow the instructions on the display to install DeskTopBinder Lite.
If you are required to restart the computer after installing DeskTopBinder
Lite, restart the computer and continue the configuration.
73
DeskTopBinder Lite Enhancements

Follow the DeskTopBinder Lite enhancement procedure to print PDF files directly.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and [Extended Features

Wizard].
B When [Extended Features Wizard] appears, select [Start], and then click [Next>]
repeatedly until the [Printing Function2] screen appears.
C On the [Printing Function2] screen, click [Add...] to display [PDF Direct Print Prop-
erties].
D Select Driver for This Machine, click [OK], and then click [Next>] repeatedly
until [Finish] is displayed.
Click [Finish].
Function Palette
The Function palette contains buttons for functions that are already configured
through DeskTopBinder Lite enhancement. Using these buttons, you can print
Windows files, preview printouts, convert images, and register scanners for documents without having to open DeskTopBinder Lite. You can also use these
functions simply by dragging a target file to the button corresponding to the required function and dropping it there.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and [Function Palette].

An icon for the Function palette is added to the task tray displayed at the bottom right of the screen.
B Right-click the icon that is added to the task tray, and then click [Properties]
to display the Properties screen.
C Click the [Contents] tab, select the [PDF Direct Print] check box at the center,
and then click [OK].

The [Properties] screen closes and the [PDF Direct Print] icon is added to the palette.
PDF Direct Printing

Use the method below to print PDF files directly.
A Drag the PDF file you want to print to the PDF Direct Printing icon in the
palette and drop it there.
B [Output File List-PDF Direct Print] is displayed.

74
Highlight the PDF you want to print, and then click [OK].
The PDF file is printed.
Printing PDF Password-Protected Documents

Follow the procedure below to print password-protected PDF files.
A In the Windows [Start] menu, click [Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and [Extended

Features Wizard].
B When [Extended Features Wizard] appears, select [Start], and then click [Next>]
repeatedly until the [Printing Function2] screen appears.
C On the [Printing Function2] screen, click [Properties] to display [PDF Direct Print
Properties].
D Select the [Use PDF Password] check box at the bottom right of the screen, and
then click [OK].
Click [Next] repeatedly until [Finish] appears.
Click [Finish] to close the [Extended Features Wizard] screen.
E Move the PDF file you want to print to the PDF Direct Printing icon on the
palette using a drag-and-drop operation.
F [Output File List-PDF Direct Print] is displayed.

Select the PDF file you want to output to make it reverse video, and then click
[OK].
G The [PDF Direct Print Properties] screen opens.

Enter the password for the PDF file you want to print in the [PDF Password]
field at the bottom right of the screen, and then click [OK].
The password-protected PDF file is printed.
Note
Before printing a password-protected PDF file, perform one of the following:
Enter the PDF password in the PDF Direct Printing Properties screen
Specify a PDF password by selecting [Change PDF Password] in the [PDF
Menu] menu on the control panel of this machine.
If a [PDF Group Password] for the [PDF Menu] menu is assigned to either
DeskTopBinder Lite or the control panel of this machine, the same group
password needs to be assigned to the other.
75
PDF Direct Print Properties
9
2
3
4
10
11
12
6
7
14
16
13
15
17
8
AMU010S
1. Setting name:
12. Range
Displays the plug-in configuration name

(up to 63 single byte characters)
Specifies which paper to print.
2. Change Icon...
Specify the paper size you want copies to

be printed onto.
Changes the icon displayed on the tool

bar.
3. Printer:
Displays a list of RPCS drivers that support PDF direct printing.
4. Duplex
Prints on both sides of sheets.
5. Layout
Prints multiple pages on a single sheet.
6. Punch
Punch holes in printed sheets.
7. Staple
Staple together printed sheets.
8. Display this dialog box before

printing
Appears in PDF direct printing mode if
this check box is selected.
9. Orientation
Specify the original's orientation.
10. Number of copies

Specify the number of copies to print.
11. Collate
76
Sorts printed sheets.
13. Printout paper size

14. Color/Black and White:
Specify color or black-and-white printing.
15. Resolution:
Specify a print resolution.
16. PDF password:

Enter the password for password-protected PDF files. A password-protected
PDF file cannot be printed unless its password is entered here.
17. Group password:

If a group password is assigned to DeskTopBinder Lite and this machine, enter
the group password in this field. The
group password must be entered for
printing to start.
Using commands
You can print PDF files directly, using commands such as ftp sftpand lpr.
Reference
For details about UNIX commands, see Network Guide.
77
Unauthorized Copy Control

You can embed patterns and text under printed text to prevent unauthorized
copying of the document. Unauthorized Copy Control consists of two functions:
[Data security for copying] and [ Mask type:].
Important
This function is designed to discourage copying of confidential documents; it
does not prevent unauthorized use of information.
Opening the Unauthorized Copy Control Window
A In the RPCS printer driver, open the [Printing Preference] window.

B Click [Add/Change Custom Settings...].
C Select the [Unauthorized copy...] check box.
D Click [Control Settings...].
The Unauthorized Copy Control window appears.
Note
Using [Data security for copying]

You can embed a print pattern by setting it in the printer driver.
Setting [Data security for copying] in the printer driver

Select the [Data security for copying] checkbox. You can also enter the text in
the [ Text:] box.
You cannot select the [ Mask type:] checkbox at the same time.
To print a document protected by gray overprint, the machine must be set
up correctly. Consult your administrator.
78
Printing a document using [Data security for copying]
AJL030S
1. The pattern and text you have set
3. The document is blanked by gray
is printed.
overprint.
2. The document is copied or stored

in copiers / multifunction machines
which the optional Copy Data Security unit is installed.
Note
When printing a document that is set with [Data security for copying], the machine does not require the optional Copy Data Security unit to be installed.
The Copy Data Security unit is required when copying or storing a document
protected by gray overprint.
Only the RPCS printer driver is supported.

Printing at 200 200 dpi is not possible.
You cannot partially embed a pattern and text in a document.
To make the embedded pattern clear, set the character size at least 50 pt (preferably 70 to 80 pt) and character angle to between 30 and 40 degrees.
Use 182 257 mm (71/4 101/2 in.) or larger paper.
Use ordinary or recycled paper of at least 70% whiteness.
Duplex printing may interfere with this function as a result of text and patterns being visible through the paper.
Reference
For details about setting [Data security for copying], see the printer driver Help.
79
Using [ Mask type:]

You can embed patterns and text in a document by setting in the printer driver
to prevent unauthorized copying.
3
Setting [ Mask type:] in the printer driver
Select a pattern from [ Mask type:], and then enter text in the [Text:] box.
You can select overprint color from [Black], [Cyan], or [Magenta] in the [ Color:]
list.
Note
You can set only [ Text:], but [ Mask type:] and [ Text:] must be set together.
Printing a document using [ Mask type:]
AJL031S
is printed palely.
appear clearly.
2. The document is copied, scanned,

or stored in copiers / multifunction
machines.
80
Note
Only the RPCS printer driver is supported.
Printing at 200 200 dpi is not possible.

You cannot partially embed patterns and text strings in a document.
To make the embedded pattern clear, set the character size at least 50 pt (preferably 70 to 80 pt) and character angle to between 30 and 40 degrees.
Due to the effects of the settings, the results of copying, scanning, and saving
documents in the document server may vary depending on the machine
model and setting conditions.
Printing with background patterns and text may be slower than normal printing.
Reference
For details about setting [ Mask type:], see the printer driver Help.
Important Notice
The supplier does not provide warranty regarding the appearance of print
patterns and other copy protection features. The appearance of the print patterns and the performance of Unauthorized Copy Control may vary depending on the quality of paper used and the machine model and settings.
The supplier takes no responsibility for any damages sustained in connection
with use of or inability to make use of Unauthorized Copy Control print patterns.
81
Using the Print Job Function

This describes how to print files stored in the machine.
The following types of printing can be selected using the printer driver: Sample
Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print.
You can print or delete the print jobs saved in the machine which is sent from
computers.
If you select Sample Print, Locked Print, and Hold Print, the print files saved in
the machine are deleted after printing is completed. If you select Stored Print,
the files remain in the machine even after printing is finished.
If you press [Print Jobs] on the Printer screen, the Complete List or the List Per
User ID screen appears depending on which list type you select from [Initial Print
Job List].
Complete List
If you select [Complete List] from [Initial Print Job List], the following screen appears:
16
15
14
1
13
12
2
3
4
5
6
7
11
10
9
8
AQG016S
A
B
C
D
82
Jobs Per User ID

Displays List Per User ID.
Complete List
Displays all files stored in the machine.
Locked Print Job List
Displays only Locked Print files stored in the machine.
Sample Print Job List
Displays only Sample Print files stored in the machine.

E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Hold Print Job List

Displays only Hold Print files stored in the machine.
Stored Print Job List
Displays only Stored Print files stored in the machine.
Details
Displays details about a selected file.
[UPrevious] / [TNext]
If the list of files does not fit on the screen, scroll down to view the list.
[Delete]
Deletes a selected file.
[Print]
Prints a selected file.
[Change Password]
Changes or deletes the password of a file if a password is set. To change
the password, press [Change Password], enter the current password, and
then enter the new password on the confirmation screen. To delete the
password, press [Change Password], leave the entering/confirming a new
password box blank, and then press the [OK] key.
You can also set passwords to the Stored Print files that do not currently
have passwords.
[Clear All]
Clears all selections.
[Select All Jobs]
Selects all files stored in the machine.
Selected:
Displays number of the files selected.
[Exit]
Returns to the Printer screen.
User ID, Date / Time, and File Name display
Displays the time when the instruction to print the stored files was entered,
the User IDs, and the file names.
83
List Per User ID

If you select [List Per User ID] from [Initial Print Job List], the following screen appears:
1
2
3
4
5
3
7
AQG017S
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
User ID
Displays the User IDs who sent files to the machine.
[Clear]
Deselects a selection.
[Exit]
Returns to the Printer screen.
[Complete List]
Displays all print jobs.
[List Per User ID]
Displays the print job list of each ID.
[Print All Jobs]
Prints all selected type of files sent by the user ID.
[UPrevious] / [TNext]
If the list of files does not fit on the screen, scroll down to view the list.
Note
Multiple files can be selected on the Print Jobs screen. To clear selection, press
the selected print jobs again.
The display is not updated if a new file is stored while the list of stored files
is displayed. To update the display, press [Exit] to return to the Printer screen,
and then press [Print Jobs] again.
If a large number of print jobs is stored in the machine, processing may slow
temporarily, depending on which functions are used.
If you press [List Per User ID] in the Complete List screen, the screen switches
to the List Per User ID screen where [Back] appears at the bottom right. Press
[Back] to switch to the Complete List screen.
Reference
p.86 Sample Print
84
p.90 Locked Print

p.94 Hold Print
p.97 Stored Print
Selecting the Initial Print Job List

Follow the procedure below to set the initial Print Jobs screen, and to show it.
Selecting the Initial Print Job List

The Printer Features menu appears
C On the [System] tab, press [Initial Print Job List].

D Select either [Complete List] or [List Per User ID].
After configuring the settings, the selected type of print job list is displayed.
Displaying a Print Job List
A Press [Print Jobs].
Either the Complete List or List Per User ID screen appears.
85
Printing from the Print Job Screen

Explains Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print.
Sample Print
Use this function to print only the first set of a multiple-set print job. After you
have checked the result, remaining sets can be printed or canceled using the machine's control panel. This can reduce misprints due to mistakes in content or
settings.
Important
A Sample Print file cannot be stored if:
the total number of Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored
Print files in the machine is over 100. (The maximum number varies depending on the volume of data in files.)
the file contains over 1,000 pages.
sent or stored files in the machine contain over 9,000 pages in total.
Note
If a Sample Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the
display panel.
Even after you turn off the machine, stored documents in the machine remain. However, the [Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] or [Auto Delete Stored Print
Jobs] settings are applied first.
If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before sending a print job. By default, Sample Print jobs are automatically collated by the
printer driver. If a collate option is selected from the application's [Print] dialog box, more prints than intended may be produced.
If the first set of the Sample Print files is not as you expected and you do not
want to print remaining sets, delete the Sample Print file using the display
panel. If you print the remaining sets of the Sample Print file, the job in the
machine is deleted automatically.
Reference
For details about the error log on the display panel, see p.109 Checking the
Error Log.
For details about the [Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] and [Auto Delete Stored
Print Jobs], see Printer Features, General Settings Guide.
86
Printing a Sample Print File

The following procedure describes how to print a Sample Print file with the PCL
6 / 5c and the RPCS printer driver. For information about how to print a Sample
Print file with the PostScript 3 printer driver, see PostScript 3 Supplement included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM.
Important
Applications with their own drivers, such as PageMaker, do not support this
function.
If you are using Mac OS X, you need Mac OS X v10.2 or higher to use this
function.
A Configure Sample Print in the printer driver's properties.

For details about configuring the printer drivers, see the relevant Help files.
B Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

Make sure to set more than two copies.
The Sample Print job is sent to the machine, and the first set is printed.
C On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the Printer
screen.
D Press [Print Jobs].
A list of print files stored in the machine appears.
E Press[Sample Print Job List].
A list of Sample Print files stored in the machine appears.

Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.
87
F Select the file you want to print, and press [Print].
G Enter the new number of sets using the number keys.
You can enter up to 999 sets.

Press the {Clear/Stop} key to correct any entry mistakes.
H Press [Yes].
The remaining sets are printed.
Press [No] to cancel printing.
Note
If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be printed.
If you select multiple documents and do not specify the number of sets on
the confirmation screen, one set less than the number specified on the computer is printed for every selected document. If the number of sets specified on the computer is 1, one set each is printed for every document.
When printing accumulated sample print documents, you cannot change
the numbers of sets.
When printing is completed, the stored file will be deleted.
To stop printing after printing has started, press [Exit] until the Printer
screen appears, and then press [Job Reset]. The file will be deleted.
88
Deleting Sample Print Files

If you are not satisfied with the sample printout, you can delete the Sample Print
file, revise it and print it again until the settings are suitable.
A Press the {Printer} key to display the Printer screen.

A list of the print files stored in the machine appears.
C Press [Sample Print Job List].
A list of Sample Print files stored in the machine appears.

D Select the file you want to delete, and then press [Delete].
The delete confirmation screen appears.
E Press [Yes] to delete the file.

The selected file is deleted.
Note
If you do not want to delete the file, press [No].
If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be deleted.
89
Locked Print
Use this function to maintain privacy when printing confidential documents on
the machine over a shared network. Usually, it is possible to print data using the
display panel once it is stored in this machine. When using Locked Print, it is not
possible to print unless a password is entered on the machine's display panel.
Your confidential documents will be safe from being viewed by other people.
Important
A Locked Print file cannot be stored if:
Note
If a Locked Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the
display panel.
Even after you turn off the machine, stored documents remain. However, the
[Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] or [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs] settings are
applied first.
If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before sending a print job. Locked Print jobs are automatically collated by the printer
driver as default. If a collate option is selected in the application print dialog
box, more sets than intended may be printed.
After the Locked Print file is printed, the job is automatically deleted.
Reference
Error Log.
90
Printing a Locked Print File

The following procedure describes how to print a Locked Print file with the PCL
6/5c and the RPCS printer driver. For information about how to print a Locked
Print file with the PostScript 3 printer driver, see PostScript 3 Supplement included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM.
Important
function.
function.
A Configure the Locked Print in the printer driver's properties.

For details about configuring the printer drivers, see the corresponding Help
files.
B Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

The Locked Print job is sent to the machine.
C On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the Printer
screen.
D Press [Print Jobs].
E Press [Locked Print Job List].
A list of Locked Print files stored in the machine appears.

91
F Select the file you want to print, and then press [Print].
The password screen appears.
G Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
The print confirmation screen appears.

A confirmation screen will appear if the password is not entered correctly.
Press [Exit] to enter the password again.
If multiple print files are selected, the machine prints files that correspond to
the entered password. The number of files to be printed is displayed on the
confirmation screen.
If you forgot your password, ask your network administrator for help.
H Press [Yes].
The locked file is printed.
Note
When printing is completed, the stored file will be deleted.
92
Deleting Locked Print Files

A list of Locked Print files stored appears.
The password screen is displayed.
E Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
Press [Exit] to enter the password again.
If you forget your password, ask your network administrator for help.
F Press [Yes].
Note
If multiple print files are selected, the machine deletes files that correspond
to the entered password. The number of files to be deleted is displayed on
the confirmation screen.
93
Hold Print
Use this function to temporarily hold a file in the machine, and print it from the
computer or the machine's control panel later.
Important
A Hold Print file cannot be stored if:
Note
If a Hold Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the display panel.
Even after you turn off the machine, stored documents in the machine remain. However, the [Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] or [Auto Delete Stored Print
Jobs] settings are applied first.
If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before sending a print job. By default, Hold Print jobs are automatically collated by the
printer driver. If a collate option is selected from the application's Print dialog
box, more prints than intended may be produced.
Reference
Error Log.
Printing a Hold Print File

The following procedure describes how to print a Hold Print file with the PCL
6/5c and the RPCS printer driver. For information about how to print a Hold
Print file with the PostScript 3 printer driver, see Postscript 3 Supplement included as a PDF file in the supplied CD-ROM.
Important
function.
function.
A Configure Hold Print in the printer drivers properties.

94
B Click [Details...], and then enter a User ID in the [User ID:] box.
C Start printing from the applications [Print] dialog box.

The Hold Print job is sent to the machine and stored.
D On the machines control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the printer
screen.
E Press [Print Jobs].
F Press [Hold Print Job List].
A list of a print files stored in the machine appears.

G Select the file you want to print, and press [Print].
The confirmation screen appears.
H Press [Yes].
The Hold Print file is printed.
95
Note
When printing is completed, the stored file is deleted.
Reference
For details about setting printer drivers, see the printer driver Help. You
can also print or delete a Hold Print file from Web Image Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.
Deleting Hold Print Files

C Press [Hold Print Job List].

A list of a Hold Print files stored in the machine appears.

Note
96
Stored Print
Use this function to store a file in the machine, and then print it from the computer or the machine's control panel later.
Jobs are not deleted after they are printed, so the same job need not be re-sent in
order to print multiple copies.
Important
A Stored Print file cannot be stored if:
Note
If a Stored Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the
display panel.
Even after you turn off the machine, stored documents remain. However, the
[Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] or [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs] settings are
applied first (see Printer Features, General Settings Guide).
If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before sending a print job. By default, Stored Print jobs are automatically collated by the
printer driver. If a collate option is selected from the application's Print dialog
box, more prints than intended may be produced.
You can optionally set a document title and a password of a Stored Print file.
For details about a password setting, see the printer driver Help.
Reference
Error Log.
Printing a Stored Print File

The following procedure describes how to print a Stored Print file with the PCL
6/5c and the RPCS printer driver. For information about how to print a Stored
Print file with the PostScript 3 printer driver, see Postscript 3 Supplement included as a PDF file on the supplied CD-ROM.
Important
function.
function.
97
A Configure Stored Print in the printer drivers properties.

You can select two methods of Stored Print:
[Stored Print]
Stores the file in the printer and print it later using the display panel.
[Store and Normal Print]
Prints the file at once and also stores the file in the machine.
B Click [Details...], and then enter a User ID in the [User ID:] box.
You can also set a password. The same password must be entered when printing or deleting.
C Start printing from the applications [Print] dialog box.

The Stored Print job is sent to the machine and stored.
D On the machines control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the Printer
screen.
E Press [Print Jobs].
F Press [Stored Print Job List].
A list of Stored Print files stored in the machine appears.
98
G Select the file you want to print, and press [Print].

If you set a password in the printer driver, a password confirmation screen
appears. Enter the password.
If multiple print files are selected, and some of these require a password, the
machine prints files that correspond to the entered password and files that do
not require a password. The number of files to be printed is displayed on the
confirmation screen.
H Enter the number of sets using the number keys.

Press the {Clear/Stop} to correct any entry mistakes.
I Press [Yes].
The Stored Print file is printed.
Note
If you select multiple documents, set numbers are determined based on the
smallest set number specified for a selected document.
When printing accumulated stored print documents, you cannot change
the numbers of sets.
screen appears, and then press [Job Reset]. A Stored Print file is not deleted
even if [Job Reset] is pressed.
99
Stored Print files that are sent to the machine are deleted only if you select
[Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs] or select them for deletion (see Printer Features , General Settings Guide).
Reference
For details about setting printer drivers, see the printer driver Help. You
can also print or delete a Stored Print file from Web Image Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.
Deleting Stored Print Files

C Press [Stored Print Job List].

A list of Stored Print files stored in the machine appears.
D Select the file you want to delete, and press [Delete].

If you set the password in the printer driver, enter the password to delete.
If multiple print files are selected, and some of these require a password, the
machine deletes files correspond to the entered password and files that do not
require a password. The number of files to be deleted is displayed on the confirmation screen.

Note
100
Printing from the Jobs Per User ID Screen

This describes how to print the files saved in the machine from the User ID
screen.
Printing the Selected Print Job

The Printer screen appears.
B On the Printer screen, press [Print Jobs].
A list of user IDs whose files are stored in the machine appears.
C Press the user ID whose file you want to print.
You cannot select multiple user IDs at the same time.

Press [UPrevious] or [TNext] to scroll through the list.
Press [Clear] to cancel a selection.
101
D Press [List Per User ID].
The print job list of the selected user ID appears.
E Select the desired print jobs.
To cancel a selection, press the highlighted print job again. To clear all selections, press [Clear All].
F Press [Print].
G Press [Yes].
The selected files are printed.
Note
102
Printing All Print Jobs

B On the Printer screen, press [Print Jobs].
A list of user IDs whose files are stored in the machine appears.
C Press the user ID whose file you want to print.
You cannot select multiple user IDs at the same time.

Press [UPrevious] or [TNext] to scroll through the list.
Press [Clear] to cancel a selection.
D Press [Print All Jobs].
If the selected user ID has multiple types of print jobs, the selection screen of
the print job type appears.
103
E Select the desired print job type, and then press [OK].

The confirmation screen does not appear if the selected ID has only one type
of print jobs.
F Press [Yes].
The selected files are printed.
Note
After printing is completed, Sample Print, Locked Print, and Hold Print
files are deleted.
You cannot select a print job that is not stored under the selected user ID.
If you select multiple Sample Print files and do not specify the number of
sets on the confirmation screen, one set less than the number specified on
the computer is printed for every selected document. If the number of sets
specified on the computer is 1, one set each is printed for every document.
If you select Stored Print, the number you set on the confirmation screen is
applied to all files of the selected print job type. If you do not set a quantity,
the minimum number is applied to all files.
If you select Locked Print, enter the correct password. If there are multiple
passwords, the machine prints only files that correspond to the entered
password.
If you select Stored Print files, and some of these require a password, the
machine prints files that correspond to the entered password and files that
do not require a password.
The confirmation screen displays the total number of files that have the selected user ID to be printed.
104
Form Feed
Form Feed
This section gives instructions for operating the machine when there is no tray
for the selected paper size or type, or when paper loaded in the machine has run
out.
Important
The tray cannot be changed if the following functions are set:
Staple
Punch
Duplex Print to a tray that does not support duplex printing
Cover Sheet
Front and Back Covers
Slip Sheet
Chaptering
Chapter Slip Sheets
Note
If form feed is selected for a tray with the following settings, you can change
the tray by canceling the settings:
Staple
Punch
Duplex Print to a tray that does not support duplex printing
If Auto Continue is selected, form fed paper is printed after a set interval. See
Printer Features, General Settings Guide.
Printing from a Selected Tray

If the machine does not have a tray for the selected paper size or paper type, or
if the selected paper loaded in the machine has run out, a caution message appears. If this message appears, do the following procedure.

B Select the tray for form feed from those that appear on the display panel.
If you want to print after adding paper to the tray, select the tray after loading
the correct paper.
C Press [Continue].
The machine prints using the selected tray.
Note
If a tray with a smaller paper size is selected, the print job may be cut short,
or other problems may occur.
105
Canceling a Print Job

Follow the procedure below to cancel a print job if the message prompting form
feed appears.

B Press [Job Reset] or the {Clear/Stop}key.

Delete the stored print jobs, and then cancel form feed.
C Press [Reset the Job] to cancel the current print job, or [Reset All Jobs] to cancel
all jobs.
D Press [Yes] to cancel the print job.

Press [No] to return to the previous display.
Note
To resume printing print jobs, press [Resume Printing]
If the machine is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
Under Windows, if the machine is connected to the computer using a parallel cable, sent print jobs may be canceled if [Reset All Jobs] is pressed
while Waiting... is on the display panel. After the interval set in [I/O Timeout] in Printer Features has passed, the next print job can be sent. A print
job sent from a different client computer will not be canceled in this case.
You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed. For this
reason, printing may continue for a few pages after you press [Job Reset] or
the {Clear/Stop} key.
A print job containing a large volume of data may take considerable time
to stop.
Reference
For details, see p.107 Canceling a Print Job.
106

This section gives instruction to stop printing from the computer or the display
panel.
Canceling a Print Job Using the Control Panel

B Press [Job Reset].
C Press [Reset the Job] or [Reset All Jobs].
[Reset the Job]: cancels the print job currently being processed.
[Reset All Jobs]: cancels all jobs in the print queue.
[Resume Printing]: resumes printing print jobs.
D Press [Yes] to cancel the print job.

Press [No] to return to the previous display.
107
Windows - Canceling a Print Job from the computer

You can cancel a print job from the computer if transferring print jobs is not completed.
A Double-click the printer icon on the Windows task tray.

A window appears, showing all print jobs currently queued for printing.
Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.
B Select the name of the job you want to cancel.

C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel].
D Press the {Printer} key on the machine's control panel.
Note
If the machine is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
If the machine is connected to the computer using a parallel cable, sent

print jobs may be canceled if [Reset All Jobs] is pressed while Waiting...
is on the display panel. After the interval set in [I/O Timeout] in Printer Features has passed, the next print job can be sent. A print job sent from a different client computer will not be canceled in this case.
Under Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, click [Cancel] on the [Document] menu.
Under Windows 95 / 98 / Me / 2000 or Windows NT 4.0, you can also
open the print job queue window by double-clicking the machine icon in
the [Printers] machine window (the [Printers and Faxes] window under Windows XP and Windows Server 2003).
You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed. For this
reason, printing may continue for a few pages after you press [Job Reset].
A print job containing a large volume of data may take considerable time
to stop.
108

If files could not be stored due to printing errors, identify the cause of the errors
by checking the error log on the control panel.
Important
The most recent 30 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added
when there are 30 errors already stored, the oldest error is deleted. However,
if the oldest error belongs to one of the following print jobs, it is not deleted.
The error is stored separately until the number of those errors reaches 30. You
can check any of these print jobs for error log information.
Sample Print
Locked Print
Hold Print
Stored Print
If the main power switch is turned off, the error log is deleted.

B Press [Error Log].
An error log list appears.

Depending on the security settings, certain errors may not be displayed.
C Press the desired job list.
You can select job list from [Complete List], [Locked Print Job List], [Sample Print
Job List], [Hold Print Job List], or [Stored Print Job List].
D Select the print file you want to check, and then press [Details].
A detailed error log appears.
Press [UPrevious] or [TNext] to scroll the error files.
Note
Press [Exit] after checking the log.
Press [Back to List] to return to the error log list.
To print files that appear in the error log, resend them after stored files
have been printed or deleted.
109
[Error Log] is not available in simplified display mode. To view the error log,
you must first switch to normal display mode by pressing {Simplified Display}
to turn into the normal display mode.
110
Spool Printing
Spool Printing
Spool Printing allows print jobs transferred from a computer to be temporarily
stored, and then prints them after they are transferred. This shortens printing
time as it maximizes printer efficiency.
Important
During Spool Printing, the hard disk is accessed and the Data In indicator
blinks. Turning off the computer or machine during Spool Printing can damage the hard disk. Also, if the computer or machine is turned off during Spool
Printing, spooled jobs will be deleted. Therefore, do not turn the power of the
computer or machine off during Spool Printing.
If data is sent to the machine using other protocols besides diprint, lpr, ipp,
ftp, sftp, and smb, Spool Printing cannot be performed.
Setting Spool Printing

Spool Printing can be set using telnet or Web Image Monitor.
Using Web Image Monitor
See Network Guide or Help for more information.
Using telnet
Type in spoolsw spool on to set Spool Printing.
See Network Guide for more information about telnet.
Viewing a list of spool jobs on the display panel
If Spool Printing is set, a list of spooled jobs can be viewed on the display panel screen.
Press the {Printer} key, and then press [Spooling Job List]. A list of spooled jobs
appears.
Deleting jobs
Select files to be deleted, and then press [Delete].
Viewing/Deleting spool jobs in Web Image Monitor
Start Web Image Monitor and enter the machine's IP address in the address
bar. This displays the top page.
For more information, see Network Guide.
Note
Up to a maximum of 150 jobs at once can be spool printed.
If Spool Printing is not set, you cannot select [Spooling Job List].
Printing the first page with Spool Printing will be slow.
The computer requires less print processing time when large amounts of data
are spooled.
Stored spool jobs can be viewed or deleted using Web Image Monitor.
111
User Defined Pages

Using this function, you can specify the page numbers for each input tray.
Important
This function is available with the PCL 6/5c printer driver only.
If [Document Server] is selected under [Job Type:], User Defined Page cannot be
used.
If [User Defined Pages] is selected under [Paper Selection:] on the [Paper] tab,
[Layout:] cannot be selected.
AEV044S
Reference
For printing methods, see the printer driver Help.
112
Printing with the Finisher

You can collate, staple, or punch holes in printed paper by installing the optional
finisher. Make sure you read the following precautions when using the optional
finisher.
Important
Make option settings for the machine using the printer driver when bidirectional communication is disabled.
Be sure to set the paper size and paper orientation in the printer driver when
using duplex printing, booklet printing, combined printing (layout), staple
and punch functions.
The machine can have only one of the following installed at any one time:
SR790, Booklet Finisher SR3020, or Finisher SR3030.
Note
Depending on the application, print settings may not be enabled and printed
output may not be as expected.
When setting Staple or Collate in the printer driver, make sure that the Collate
check box is cleared in the application's [Print] dialog box. If Collate is enabled
in the application, printing will not be as intended.
When printing restarts after removing jammed paper, the printing position
may be different, depending on the location of the jam.
If the paper jam occurred in the optional finisher, printing will restart from
the top page of the data currently being printed, or from the page where
the paper jam occurred.
If the paper jam occurred in the machine, printing will restart from the
page where the paper jam occurred.
Even if the paper jam occurred in the machine, the error will not be cleared
unless the cover of the finisher is opened and closed.
Reference
For details about duplex printing, booklet printing, or combined printing
(layout), see the printer driver Help.
For information about optional finishers, see General Settings Guide.

To remove paper misfeeds, see Trouble Shooting.
113
Staple
With the optional Finisher SR3030, Booklet Finisher SR3020 or Finisher SR790 installed, sets can be stapled individually when printing multiple sets.
Staple Position
The specified staple position varies depending on paper size, type, quantity and
feed orientation. The following table shows staple positions:
3
SR790
Finisher SR3030
AQG041S
Note
Stapling might not be in the specified position if combine (layout) and duplex
printing are both selected. After setting the staple position, use the printer
driver's preview icon to check the position before printing.
Reference
For paper sizes and maximum numbers of sheets available for stapling, see
Specifications, General Settings Guide.
114
Stapling Precautions
Important
Stapling can be done only with the optional finisher installed.
Staple printing will be canceled under the following conditions:

If the number of pages to staple exceeds maximum.
If a paper size that cannot be stapled is selected.
If a paper type that cannot be stapled is selected.
If positions other than those fixed for stapling are specified.
If there are inconsistencies between the orientation in the duplex mode and
the staple position.
If there are inconsistencies between the orientation in letterhead mode and
the staple position.
If paper sizes are mixed when a different paper size is specified during a
print job (only when the optional SR790 installed).
If the paper contains sheets of differing lengths but same widths (like A4
L and A3 K), and the paper sizes are mixed on a single job (Only when
the optional Finisher SR3030 or Booklet Finisher SR3020 installed).
When feeding paper from the bypass tray.
When staples have run out and Auto Continue is set (Printing will continue without stapling after the message has been displayed).
When only 1 page is printed.
When staples have run out.
Note
When the stapling is cancelled, BD: Staple has been cancelled. appears.
If Staple or Shift Collate is selected with the optional Finisher SR3030, Booklet
Finisher SR3020, or SR790 installed, the paper will be output to the finisher
shift tray irrespective of the setting.
When printing on letterhead, stapling may not be at the specified position.
If you cannot make staple settings even with Finisher SR3030, Booklet Finisher SR3020, or SR790 installed, options may not be set correctly in the printer
driver. Correct option settings in the printer driver. For details, see the printer
driver Help.
When the finisher is being used for another function's job (for example, a copy
job), printing will start after that job ends.
Be sure to set paper size and orientation in the printer driver when stapling.
When duplex printing is selected, adjust staple positions to the binding orientation.
Depending on the software you are using, print settings may not be saved
and the printed result may not be as expected.
When setting Staple in the printer driver settings, make sure that a collate option is not selected in the print settings of the application. If a collate option is
selected in the application, printing will not be as intended.
115
Punch
With the optional Finisher SR3030 or Booklet Finisher SR3020 installed, holes
can be punched into printed output.
Punch Position
The specified punch position varies depending on paper feed and print data orientation. The following table shows punch positions:
ANV101S
Note
Punch positions will vary slightly from page to page as holes are punched
into each sheet individually.
Reference
For information about paper sizes that can be punched, see Supplementary
Informations, Copy/ Document Server Reference.
116
Punching Precautions
Follow these precautions when using the punch function.
Important
To use this function, the optional Finisher SR3030 or Booklet Finisher SR3020
must be installed on the printer.
Punch printing will be canceled under the following conditions:

When a paper type that cannot be punched is selected.
When a paper size that cannot be punched is selected.
If positions other than those fixed for punching are specified.
If there are inconsistencies between the orientation in duplex mode and the
punch position.
If there are inconsistencies between the orientation in letterhead mode and
the punch position.
When feeding paper from the bypass tray.
When the punch receptacle has become full and Auto Continue is set
(Printing will continue without punching after the message appears).
If there are inconsistencies between the staple position and the punch position, when using with staple function.
Note
When punching is cancelled, BE: Punch has been cancelled. appears.
Punching might not be in the specified position when printing on letterhead

paper.
If you cannot make punch settings even with the optional finisher installed,
options may not be set correctly in the printer driver. Correct option settings
in the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver Help.
When duplex print is selected, adjust the punch position to the binding direction.
Be sure to set the punch position the same as the staple position when using
it with the staple function.
Be sure to set paper size and orientation in the printer driver when punching.
Depending on the application, print settings may not be enabled and printed
output may not be as expected.
When setting Punch in the printer driver settings, make sure that a collate option is not selected in the print settings of the application.
If a collate option is selected in the application, printing will not be as intended.
117
Collate
When printing multiple documents such as handouts for meetings, you can separate sets into order. This function is known as Collate. Collate stores data
transmitted from a computer to the printer memory or hard disk drive. The following are the three types of Collate:
Important
If Auto Continue occurs on the first set, Collate will be canceled.
If forced printing occurs on the first set, Collate will be canceled.

When setting Collate in the printer driver settings, make sure that a collate
option is not selected in the application's print settings. If a collate option is
selected, printing will not be as intended.
Note
Set Collate and Rotating collate when using the RPCS printer driver.
Follow the procedure below when using a printer driver other than the RPCS:
Set Collate and Rotating Collate in the printer driver.
If you cannot make Shift Collate even with the optional finisher installed,
options may not be set up correctly in the printer driver. Correct the printer
driver's option settings.
Collate
Printed output is assembled as sets in sequential order.
AEU016S
118
Rotating Collate
Every other print set is rotated by 90 degrees.
AEU017S
Important
The Rotating Collate function requires two paper trays containing same size
paper but in different orientations.
If the output tray has shift function, Shift Collate will be applied even if Rotating Collate is selected.
When Rotate Collate is cancelled

If the following functions are selected, Collate or Shift Collate will be applied
even if Rotating Collate is selected:
When combined with staple function.
When combined with punch function.
If jobs containing pages of various sizes are set.
When output tray is specified.
When combined with covers function.
When combined with slip sheet function.
When combined with chaptering function.
If custom size paper is set.
Note
When Rotating Collate has been selected, printing speed will be slower than
with other collate functions.
119
Shift Collate
The optional finisher is required for this function.
The finisher shift tray moves backward or forward when a job or set is output,
causing the next to shift, so you can separate them.
AEU018S
120
Covers
Covers
Using this function, you can insert cover and back sheets fed from a different
tray to that of the main paper, and print on them.
Important
To use this function, Collate must be set. Rotating Collate cannot be set.
The cover sheets should be the same size and orientation as the body of the
paper.
Cover sheet
Prints the first page of the document on the sheet for the cover page.
Print on one side
Prints on one side of the cover sheet only, even when duplex printing is selected.
AEV016S
Print on both sides

Prints on both sides of the cover sheet when duplex printing is selected.
Cover sheet printed on both sides
AEV017S
Cover sheet printed on one side
AEV032S
121
Blank
When printing one side
AEV018S
When printing both sides
AEV033S
Front and Back Cover Sheet

Prints the first and last page of the document as the cover and back cover pages.
Print on one side
Prints on one side of the cover sheets only, even when duplex printing is
selected.
Back cover page face inside
AEV034S
Print on both sides

Prints on both sides of the cover sheets when duplex printing is selected.
Cover sheet printed on both sides, back cover page face inside, and the
number of pages is odd
AEV037S
122
Covers
Cover sheet printed on one side, back cover page face inside, and the
number of pages is even
1
AEV038S
Cover sheet printed on one side, back cover page face inside, and the
number of pages is odd
AGP009S
You can not print on the outside of back cover page.

Blank
When printing one side
AEV040S
When printing both sides
AEV041S
123
Note
If Auto Tray Select is set as the paper feed tray for the body paper, the paper
will be delivered from a tray containing paper in the K orientation. Therefore, if the cover paper is set to the L orientation, the orientation of cover and
body will be different.
Reference
124
Chaptering
Chaptering
The specified page is printed on the same side as the first page, like a book. Also,
you can insert chapter slip sheets before specified pages, and select whether or
not to print on the slip sheets.
No slip sheets
The specified page is always printed on the same side as the first page.
AJO025S
Note
This function is only valid with duplex printing.
Up to 20 pages can be specified as the front pages of chapters using the printer
driver.
This function can be used together with combine (layout) printing.
Reference
125
Inserting chapter slip sheets

Insert chapter slip sheets before the specified page.
Print
Prints on the chapter slip sheets. When duplex printing is selected, both sides
of the slip sheets are printed on.
AJO023S
Blank
AJO024S
Note
Up to 20 pages can be specified as the front pages of chapters using the printer
driver.
The slip sheet should be the same size and orientation as the body of the paper.
If Auto Tray Select has been set as the paper feed tray for the body paper,
the paper will be delivered from a tray containing paper in the K orientation.
Therefore, when the cover paper has been set to the L orientation, the orientation of the output cover paper and body paper will be different.
The same paper feed tray cannot be set for the body of the document and the
slip sheet.
Reference
126
Slip Sheet
Slip Sheet
Inserting a slip sheet between each page
Print
AEV019S
Blank
AEU023S
Inserting a slip sheet between OHP transparencies

Print
AEV020S
Blank
AEU024S
Note
Collate cannot be set when using slip sheets.
When the duplex printing or cover printing is set, you cannot insert slip sheets.
The slip sheet should be the same size and orientation as the main paper.
If Auto Tray Select has been set as the paper feed tray for the body paper,
the paper will be delivered from a tray containing paper in K orientation.
Therefore, when the cover paper has been set to L orientation, the orientation of the output cover paper and body paper will be different.
The same paper feed tray cannot be set for the main paper and slip sheets.
127
4. Direct Printing from a Digital

Camera (PictBridge)
What is PictBridge?
You can connect a PictBridge-compatible digital camera to this machine using a
USB cable. This allows you to print photographs taken using the digital camera
directly by operating the digital camera.
AMT014S
Before you can use this function, the machine requires the following options:
USB host interface board
Camera direct print card
Note
Check your digital camera is PictBridge-compatible.
Up to 999 images can be sent from the digital camera to the machine during
one print transaction. If an attempt is made to send more images, an error
message is sent to the camera and printing fails.
Since printing conditions are specified on the digital camera, specifiable parameters depend on the particular digital camera. For details, see your digital
camera's manual.
This function is compatible with USB 1.1.
128
PictBridge Printing
Follow the procedure below to start PictBridge printing on this machine.
Important
Do not disconnect the USB cable while data is being sent. If you do, printing
will fail.
The USB host interface board is supplied with a USB cable and a hook onto
which you can roll up and hang the cable.
A Attach the hook on the back of the machine near the USB connection slot.
Attach the hook where it will not interfere with machine operation and access.
B Check the machine and the digital camera are both switched on.
C Connect a USB cable between the optional USB host interface board in-
stalled on the machine and the digital camera.

The Data In indicator on the machine blinks for several seconds and PctBrdg is displayed on the machine. This indicates the machine recognizes the
digital camera as a PictBridge device.
AQF072S
D Secure the USB cable using the hook.
AQF073S
E On your digital camera, select the images you want to print, and specify the
printing conditions.
129
PictBridge Printing
F The machine receives settings from the digital camera and starts printing.
Note
Since printing conditions are specified on the digital camera, specifiable
parameters depend on the particular digital camera. For details, see your
digital camera's manual.
Some digital cameras require settings for manual PictBridge operation. For
details, see your digital camera's manual.
130
What Can Be Done on This Machine

This machine can perform the following functions using its PictBridge feature.
The settings available for these functions are as follows:
Single image printing
Selected image printing
All image printing
Index printing
Trimming
Date and file name printing
Paper size
Image print size
Multi-Image-Layout
Printing quality
Color matching
Paper type specification
Form printing
Camera memo printing
Note
This machine does not support the following settings:
DPOF printing
Margin-less printing
The setting parameters and their names may vary depending on the digital
camera. For details, see your digital camera's manual.
131
Index Printing
A3 (297 420)
Horizontal images vertical images (in)
Paper orientation
12 16
16 12
A4 (210 497)
Paper orientation
8 12
12 8
A5 (148 210)
Paper orientation
58
85
Letter (81/2 11)

Paper orientation
8 10
10 8
B4 (257 367)
Paper orientation
10 14
14 10
Note
Index printouts vary depending on the orientation of the paper placed on the
specified size tray.
Depending on the digital camera, a form feed may be inserted after one set of
images belonging to one type ends.
The number of images in each size of paper is fixed.
132
Trimming
Use this function to print only the inside of the trimming area specified on the
digital camera.
4
AGZ007S
*1
-- Trimming area
Date and File Name Printing

Use this function to print the date and/or file name under the image.
AGZ005S
In the above figure, aaaaa indicates the file name and bbbbb indicates the
date.
133
Paper Size
Use this function to print on paper with the size specified on the digital camera.
Paper size name
Actual size
2L (5 7)
178 mm 127 mm (5 in. 7 in.)
Postcard
148 mm 100 mm
100 mm 150 mm
150 mm 100 mm
4 6
152.4 mm 101.6 mm (4 in. 6 in.)
8 10
254 mm 203.2 mm (8 in. 10 in.)
Letter (8 1/2 11)
279.4 mm 216 mm (8 1/2 11)
11 17
431.8 mm 279.4 mm (11in. 17in.)
A3
420 mm 297 mm
A4
297 mm 210 mm
A5
210 mm 148 mm
A6
148 mm 105 mm
B4
364 mm 257 mm
B5
257 mm 182 mm
B6
182 mm 128 mm
Note
Specify Undefined Size for the 2L (5 7), 100 mm 150 mm, 4 6, 8
10, A6, B5, and B6 sizes.
134
Image Print Size

Use this function to print images with the size specified on the digital camera.
AGZ008S
-- indicates the image size specified on the camera.

You can specify the following image print sizes:
Fixed size
3.25 2.5
5 2.5
6 4
7 5
10 8
254 mm 178 mm
110 mm 74 mm
89 mm 55 mm
148 mm 100 mm
8 cm 6 cm
10 cm 7 cm
13 cm 9 cm
15 cm 10 cm
18 cm 13 cm
21 cm 15 cm
24 cm 18 cm
Note
An error occurs if the specified size is larger than the actual paper size.
135
Multi-Image-Layout
Use this function to print multiple images on the specified paper.
AGZ002S
The number of images that can be printed on one page are as follows:
Paper size
Number of images that can be specified
2L (5 7)
2, 4, 8, 9
Postcard
2, 4
100 mm 150 mm
2, 4
4 6
2, 4, 8, 9
8 10
2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32
Letter (81/2 11)
2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32
11 17
2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32, 49, 64
A3
2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32, 49, 64
A4
2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32
A5
2, 4, 8, 9, 16
A6
2, 4, 8
B4
2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32, 49
B5
2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25
B6
2, 4, 8, 9
The number and arrangement of images that can be specified are as follows:
Number of images
Vertical images horizontal

images
Paper orientation
21
22
42
33
16
44
136

Number of images
Vertical images horizontal

images
Paper orientation
25
55
32
84
36
66
49
77
64
88
Note
A form feed may be inserted between images depending on the digital camera in use.
Printing in the specified way may not be possible depending on the specification for the number of images to be printed.
Printing Quality
Use this function to print images at the selected printing quality.
If you select [Default] or [Normal], the machine prints at 600 dpi 600 dpi (2 bit);
if you select [Fine], the machine prints at 600 dpi 600 dpi (4 bit).
Color Matching
Use this function to optimize colors when printing images.
If you select [Default] or [OFF], the machine prioritizes gradation for color matching, if you select [ON], the machine prioritizes saturation.
Paper type specification

This function sends the machine's paper type information to the digital camera.
The names of paper types displayed on the digital camera's screen are different
to the names displayed on the machine. Use the table below to match the paper
types.
To display a paper type name on the digital camera's screen, use the machine's
display panel to set the paper type of the machine correctly.
The paper type detected by the digital camera
The paper type of the machine
Default
All type of paper
Plain Paper
Plain or recycled paper
137
Form Printing
Use this function to print images in a predetermined layout format.
AGZ009S
Camera Memo Printing

Use this function to print text data together with an image if it is attached to the
image.
138
Exiting PictBridge
Follow the procedure below to quit the PictBridge mode.
Important
Do not disconnect the USB cable while data is being sent to the machine. If
you do, printing will fail.
A Check the display panel of this machine is displaying the Ready state.
B Disconnect the USB cable from the machine.
139
Other Reference Information
Other Reference Information

For further details about printing on this machine, see the following:
Reference
Fore details about paper size, paper type, or tray settings, see General Settings
Guide.
140
141
5. Saving and Printing Using

the Document Server
Accessing the Document Server
The Document Server enables you to store documents on the machine's hard
disk, allowing you to edit and print them as necessary.
Important
function.
Note
When you use the Document Server, the following functions can be selected
using the machine's control panel:
Copies
Collate
Duplex
Staple
Paper selection: Paper source tray, paper type, paper output tray.
Functions related to paper selection: Cover Sheet, Slip Sheet.
The above items are dimmed, so you cannot set them from the printer properties dialog box when the Document Server is selected.
You must enter a user ID, using up to eight alphanumeric characters.
You should enter a Password and File Name to distinguish the job from others.
Up to 1,000 files can be stored in the Document Server. No new files can be
stored after 1,000 is reached. Even if less than 1,000 files are stored, new files
cannot be stored when
a file to be stored contains more than 1,000 pages,
the total number of pages contained in files stored exceeds 9,000,
the hard disk is full.
The Document Server also stores files scanned using the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) or exposure glass. You should delete unnecessary stored
files once in a while so as not to exceed the capacity of the hard disk. For details about deleting stored files, see General Settings Guide.
When using the hard disk for functions other than those of Document Server,
you may not be able to store new files in the Document Server, even if there
are less than 1,000 files stored.
Reference
For more information about Document Server functions, see General Settings
Guide.
For information about how to access Document Server from a client, see the
printer driver Help.
142
Saving and Printing Using the Document Server
143
6. The Functions and Settings

of the Machine
Mainframe
Network Guide, PostScript 3 Supplement, and UNIX Supplement cover all models, and explain all necessary functions and settings. This chapter describes the
functions and settings used for configuring the model you are using.
Reference
For details about functions and setting items, see Network Guide, PostScript
3 Supplement and UNIX Supplement.
Functions
The following functions are available with the machine:
Copy
Printer
Scanner
Fax
Document Server
Note
The machine must be equipped with the Printer/Scanner Unit in order to use
the printer or scanner function.
Interface
The following interfaces are available with the machine:
Ethernet (100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T)
USB (2.0)
USB Host (1.1) (Optional)
IEEE 1284 (Parallel) (Optional)
IEEE 1394 (Optional)
IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) (Optional)
Bluetooth (Optional)
Note
To use the IEEE 1284, IEEE 1394, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), USB Host (Optional) or Bluetooth interface, the machine must be equipped with the corresponding unit for that interface.
The IEEE 1284, IEEE 1394, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), and Bluetooth interfaces cannot be installed together only one such interface can be installed.
144
List of the Setting Items

Web Image Monitor
The following tables show Web Image Monitor items that can be viewed or modified depending on the selected mode on the Web browser.
Select one of the following modes to log on Web Image Monitor:
User mode: logged on as a user
Administrator mode: logged on as an administrator
Home
Status
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Toner
Read
Read
Input Tray
Read
Read
Output Tray
Read
Read
Device Info
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Function
Read
Read
System
Read
Read
Version
Read
Read
Printer Language
Read
Read
Counter
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Copier
Read
Read
Printer
Read
Read
Fax
Read
Read
Send/TX Total
Read
Read
Fax Transmission
Read
Read
Scanner Send
Read
Read
Other Function(s)
Read
Read
Inquiry
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Machine Maintenance/Repair
Read
Read
Sales Representative
Read
Read
145
Document Server
Document Server
User mode
Administrator mode
Read/Modify
Read/Modify
Fax Received File

Fax Received File
User mode
Administrator mode
Read/Modify
None
Printer: Print Jobs

Print Job List
User mode
Administrator mode
Read/Modify
Read/Modify
Job
Job List
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Current/Waiting Jobs
Read
Read/Modify
Job History
Read
Read
Printer
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Spool Printing
Read
Read
Job History
Read
Read
Error Log
Read
Read
Fax History
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Transmission
Read
Read
Reception
Read
Read
LAN-Fax
Read
Read
Document Server
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Print Job History
Read
Read
Fax Remote Send History
Read
Read
Scanner Remote Send History
Read
Read
146
Address Book
Address List
Menu
Address Book
User mode
None
Administrator mode
Read/Modify
Configuration
Device Settings
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
System
Read
Read/Modify
Paper
Read
Read/Modify
Date/Time
Read
Read/Modify
Timer
Read
Read/Modify
Logs
None
Read/Modify
E-mail
Read
Read/Modify
None
Read/Modify
On-demand E-mail Notification
None
Read/Modify
File Transfer
None
Read/Modify
None
Read/Modify
None
Read/Modify
Program/Change Adminis- None

trator
Read/Modify
LDAP Server
None
Read/Modify
ROM Update
None
Read/Modify
Printer
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Basic Settings
Read
Read/Modify
Tray Parameters (PCL)
None
Read/Modify
Tray Parameters (PS)
None
Read/Modify
PDF Temporary Password
Modify
None
PDF Group Password
None
Modify
PDF Fixed Password
None
Modify
147
Fax
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Environment Settings
None
Read/Modify
Send / Reception Settings
None
Read/Modify
IP-Fax Settings
None
Read/Modify
IP-Fax Gateway Settings
None
Read/Modify
Parameter Settings
None
Read/Modify
Interface
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Interface Settings
Read
Read/Modify
Wireless LAN Settings
Read
Read/Modify
Network
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
IPv4
Read
Read/Modify
IPv6
Read
Read/Modify
NetWare
Read
Read/Modify
AppleTalk
Read
Read/Modify
SMB
Read
Read/Modify
SNMP
None
Read/Modify
SNMPv3
None
Read/Modify
SSDP
None
Read/Modify
Bonjour
Read
Read/Modify
System Log
Read
Read
Security
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Network Security
None
Read/Modify
Access Control
None
Read/Modify
IPP Authentication
None
Read/Modify
SSL/TLS
None
Read/Modify
ssh
None
Read/Modify
Site Certificate
None
Read/Modify
Device Certificate
None
Read/Modify
148
RC Gate
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Setup RC Gate
None
Read/Modify
Update RC Gate Firmware
None
Read/Modify
RC Gate Proxy Server
None
Read/Modify
Webpage
Menu
Webpage
User mode
Read/Modify
Administrator mode
Read/Modify
Extended Feature Settings

Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Startup Setting
None
Read/Modify
Extended Feature Info
None
Read
Install
None
Read/Modify
Uninstall
None
Read/Modify
Change Allocation
None
Read/Modify
Administrator Tools
None
Read/Modify
Copy Extended Features
None
Read/Modify
Copy Card Save Data
None
Read/Modify
Note
Some items are not displayed depending on the security settings.
telnet
The following telnet can be used with the machine:
access, appletalk, authfree, autonet, bonjour (rendezvous), btconfig, devicename, dhcp, diprint, dns, domainname, help, hostname, ifconfig, info, ipp, ipv6,
lpr, netware, passwd, prnlog, route, set, show, slp, smb, snmp, sntp, spoolsw,
sprint, ssdp, ssh, status, syslog, upnp, web, wiconfig, wins
149
Settings that can be used with PostScript 3

The following PostScript 3 settings can be used with the machine:
Note
Depending on a type of printer drivers, different items may be displayed.
Settings
Selectable Items
Collate:
Off, On
Dithering:
Auto, Photographic, Text, User Setting
Duplex:
Off, Open to Left, Open to Top
Fit to Print Size:
Prompt User, Nearest Size and Scale, Nearest Size and Crop
Image Smoothing:
Off, On, Auto, Less than 90 ppi, Less than 150 ppi, Less than
200 ppi, Less than 300 ppi
Input Tray:
AutoSelect Tray, Bypass Tray, Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4
Output Tray:
Printer Default, Internal Tray 1, Internal Tray 2, Internal Shift

Tray, Finisher SR3030 Upper Tray, Finisher SR3030 Shift Tray,
Booklet Finisher SR3020 Shift Tray, Booklet Finisher SR3020
Booklet Tray, Finisher SR790 Upper Tray, Finisher SR790 Shift
Tray
Resolution
600 dpi
Size:
See General Setting Guide.
Staple:
Off, Top Left, Top Right, 2 at Left, 2 at Right, 2 at Top, 2 at Center
Toner Saving
On, Off
Type:
See General Setting Guide.
Paper Selection
Same Paper for All Pages, Different Paper for First Page, Use
Slip Sheet, Chaptering
Punch:
Off, 2 at Left, 2 at Right, 2 at Top, 4 at Left, 4 at Right, 4 at Top
150
151
7. Appendix
Specifications
This section contains the machine's electrical and hardware specifications, including information about its options.
Component
Specifications
Resolution
600 600 dpi
Printing speed
Type 1:
Color: 35 ppm
B&W: 35 ppm
Type 2:
Color: 40 ppm
B&W: 45 ppm
(A4K, 81/2 11 K plain paper)
Printing speeds depend on the machine. Check which type of machine you have. See General Settings Guide.
Interface
Standard:
Ethernet interface (100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T)
USB 2.0 interface
Option:
IEEE 1284 parallel interface
Use a standard 36-pin printer cable not longer than 3 meters (10
feet).
IEEE 1394 interface
IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN interface
Bluetooth interface
USB Host interface
Network protocol
IPv4, IPv6, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
Printer language
Standard: PCL 6/5c, RPCS

Option: PostScript 3, PDF Direct, PictBridge
Fonts
PCL 6/5c:
Monotype Imaging 35 Intellifonts, 10 TrueType fonts, 13 International fonts, and 1 Bitmap font.
PostScript 3 :
136 fonts (Type 2:24, Type 14:112)
Memory
1024 MB
Hard disk
Storage capacity : 80 GB
Network cable
100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T shielded twisted-pair (STP, Category/

Type5) cable.
152
Appendix
Component
Specifications
USB Interface (Standard)
Supported Operating System:

Windows Me / 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, MacOS 10.3.3
or later
Transmission spec.
USB 2.0 Standard
Connectable Device:
Devices corresponding to USB 2.0 Standard
Note
When using MacOS, use only the standard USB Interface. The optional USB
interface board is not supported.
When using the USB Interface (Standard) with Mac OS 10.3.3, USB2.0 is supported.
When using the USB Interface (Standard) with Windows Me, install USB
Printing Support. Windows Me only supports USB 1.1 speed.
Options
Important
Only one optional interface board can be installed in the machine at a time.
Therefore, the optional IEEE 1394 interface board, the IEEE 802.11b interface
unit, the IEEE 1284 interface board, and Bluetooth interface unit cannot be installed concurrently.
IEEE 1394 Interface Board Type B

Transmission spec.:
IEEE 1394
Interface:
IEEE std 1394-1995 compliant
IEEE std 1394a-2000 compliant
Device class:
SCSI print (Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003)
IP over 1394 (Windows Me / XP, Windows Server 2003)
Protocol:
SBP-2 (SCSI print)
TCP/IP (IP over 1394)
Interface connector:
IEEE 1394 (6 pin 2)
153
Specifications
Required cable:
1394 interface cable (6 pin 4 pin, 6 pin 6 pin)
Note
You cannot plug devices together to create loops.
Do not use cable that is more than 4.5 meters in length.
Data transfer speed:

Maximum 400 Mbps
Connectable number of devices on a bus:
Maximum 63
Allowed cable hops on a bus:
Maximum 16
Power supply:
Non external power supply
Cable Power repeated (IEEE 1394a-2000 compliant)
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A
Transmission spec.:
IEEE 1284
Required cable:
Standard IEEE 1284 compliant Micro Centronics 36 pin cable
IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit Type H
Transmission spec.:
Based on IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
Protocol:
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
Note
SmartDeviceMonitor and Web Image Monitor are supported.
Data transfer speed:

Auto select from below speed
1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 11 Mbps
Frequency range:
Inch version:
2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11 channels)
Metric version:
2412 - 2472 MHz (1 - 13 channels)
154
Appendix
Transmittable distance:
1 Mbps 400 m
2 Mbps 270 m
5.5 Mbps 200 m
11 Mbps 140 m
Note
These figures are a guideline for outdoor use. In general, the transmittable
distance indoors is 10 - 100 m, depending on environment.
Transmission mode:
Ad hoc, and infrastructure mode
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245
Supported Profiles:
SPP (Serial Port Profile)
HCRP (Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile)
BIP (Basic Imaging Profile)
Frequency Range:
2.45 GHz ISM band
Data Transmission Speed:
723 kbps
Note
The transmission speed is adjusted according to factors such as the distance and obstacles between the devices, radio signal condition and Bluetooth adaptor.
Maximum Range:
10 m
USB Host Interface Unit Type A
Interface Connector:
USB 1.1 host interface A type
Data Transmission Speed:
12 Mbps (Full speed)
Distance Between Devices:
2.5 m
155
INDEX
B
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245, 155

Bypass tray, 12
Custom size paper using the control
panel, 14
setting the paper size using the control
panel, 13
C
Canceling a job
Windows, 107
Changing the order of jobs, 6
Chaptering, 125
Checking Job History, 7
Checking jobs in the print queue, 5
Collate, 118
Control panel
hold print, 94
locked print, 90
printer features, 8
sample print, 86
stored print, 97
Covers, 121
Custom size paper
printing, bypass tray, 12
D
Deleting jobs, 7
Direct Printing from a Digital Camera, 128
Display panel, 2
E
Error log, 109
F
Finisher, 113
Font Manager 2000, 54
Fonts, 152
Hard disk, 152

Holding print jobs, 7
Hold print
deleting, 96
printing, 94
I
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A, 154
IEEE 1394 Interface Board Type B, 153
IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit Type H, 154
Initial Display, 2
Inserting chapter slip sheets, 126
Installing the printer driver
Quick Install, 21
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB, 37
Interface, 152
J
Job List, 4
Job List screen, 4
L
List Per User ID
printing all print jobs, 101, 103
printing the desired print job, 101
Locked print
deleting, 93
printing, 91
M
Memory, 152
N
Network cable, 152
Network protocol, 152
No slip sheets, 125
156
O
OHP Transparencies
Operating system, 152
Options, 153
P
PageMaker, 55
PDF Direct Print, 73
PictBridge, 128
Camera Memo Printing, 138
Color Matching, 137
Date and File Name Printing, 133
Exiting PictBridge, 139
Form Printing, 138
Image Print Size, 135
Index Printing, 132
MultiImageLayout, 136
Other Reference Information, 140
Paper Size, 134
Paper type specification, 137
PictBridge Printing, 129
Printing Quality, 137
Trimming, 133
What Can Be Done on This Machine, 131
What is PictBridge?, 128
Printer Features Menu, 8
Printer language, 152
Printing a PDF file directly
PDF direct print, 73
Printing Method
PDF direct print, 73
Printing speed, 152
Windows, 48
Windows 2000, 42
Punch, 116
R
Resolution, 152
Rotating collate, 119
157
S
Sample print
deleting, 89
printing, 87
Shift collate, 120
Slip Sheet, 127
Specifications, 152
Spool printing, 111
Staple, 114
Stored print
deleting, 100
printing, 97
T
Thick Paper
U
Unauthorized copy control, 78
data security for copying, 78
mask type, 80
USB Host Interface Unit Type A, 155
Using commands, 77
Using the Print Job Function, 82
W
Windows
canceling a job, 107
Windows 2000
printer properties, PCL, 58
printer properties, RPCS, 66
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0
document defaults, PCL, 62
document defaults, RPCS, 70
Windows Server 2003
Windows XP
EN
USA
B224-7507

Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Printer/Scanner Controller + Copy Machine
Model Number:
C3535/DSc535/LD435c/Aficio MP C3500
C4540g/DSc545g/Aficio MP C4500G
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
1. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to a host
computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.
2. An AC adapter with a ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
Note:
Avertissement:
Copyright 2006
Operating Instructions Printer Reference
EN USA B224-7507
Scanner Reference
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Sending Scan Files to Folders
Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
Delivering Scan Files
Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner
Various Scan Settings
Appendix
Introduction
Important
Trademarks
Adobe, PostScript, and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, inc.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.





About This Machine

Troubleshooting
Security Reference
Facsimile Reference
Printer Reference
Scanner Reference
Network Guide
i
Other manuals
Safety Information
UNIX Supplement
Note

For "UNIX Supplement", please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
"PostScript3 Supplement" and "UNIX Supplement" include descriptions of
Product name
General name
DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder Professional *
DeskTopBinder
ScanRouter EX Professional * and ScanRouter

EX Enterprise *
the ScanRouter delivery software
*Optional
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
About the Scanner Functions...............................................................................2
Display Panel..........................................................................................................3
Confirmation Displays ................................................................................................5
Scanner Features...................................................................................................9
1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

Before Sending Scan Files by E-mail.................................................................11
Outline of Sending Scan Files by E-mail..................................................................11
Preparation for Sending by E-mail ...........................................................................12
Registering E-mail Addresses in the Address Book.................................................12
E-mail Screen...........................................................................................................13
Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail...........................................14
Switching to the E-mail Screen ..........................................................................17
Specifying E-mail Destinations ..........................................................................18
Selecting the Destination from the Machines Address Book...................................18
Entering an E-mail Address Manually ......................................................................22
Selecting Destinations by Searching an LDAP Server.............................................23
Registering a Directly-Entered Destination in the Address Book .............................26
Specifying the E-mail Sender .............................................................................27
Selecting a Sender from the List ..............................................................................27
Using a Registration Number to Specify a Sender Name ........................................28
Selecting the Sender by Searching the Machines Address Book ...........................29
Specifying the E-mail Subject.............................................................................31
Specifying the E-mail Message ..........................................................................32
Selecting a Message from the List ...........................................................................32
Manual Entry of a Message .....................................................................................33
Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail .................................................34
Sending the URL by E-mail......................................................................................35
2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

Before Sending Files by Scan to Folder ............................................................37
Outline of Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder.....................................................37
Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder ..............................................................40
Registering Destination Folders in the Address Book..............................................41
Scan to Folder Screen .............................................................................................42
Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder..................................................43
Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen ............................................................45
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations ............................................................46
Selecting the Destination from the Machines Address Book...................................46
Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder ..............................................................50
Sending Files to an FTP Server ...............................................................................53
Sending Files to an NDS Tree or NetWare Server ..................................................55
Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book ...................59
iii
Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder ...................................60
3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function

Before Storing Files.............................................................................................62
Outline of File Storage under the Scanner Function ................................................62
Basic Operation for Storing Scan Files .............................................................64
Specifying File Information for a Stored File ....................................................66
Specifying a User Name ..........................................................................................66
Specifying a File Name ............................................................................................67
Specifying a Password.............................................................................................68
Displaying the List of Stored Files .....................................................................69
List of Stored Files ...................................................................................................69
Searching the List of Stored Files ............................................................................70
Checking Stored Files .........................................................................................72
Checking a Stored File Selected from the List .........................................................72
Checking Stored Files from a Client Computer........................................................74
Sending a Stored File ..........................................................................................75
Sending Stored Files................................................................................................75
Managing Stored Files.........................................................................................77
Deleting a Stored File...............................................................................................77
Changing Data for a Stored File...............................................................................78
4. Delivering Scan Files

Before Delivering Files ........................................................................................83
Outline of Scan File Delivery....................................................................................83
Preparing to Deliver a File........................................................................................84
Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM .....................................85
Network Delivery Scanner Screen ...........................................................................86
Basic Operation for Delivering Files ..................................................................87
Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner Screen.........................................90
Specifying Delivery Destinations .......................................................................91
Selecting Destinations Registered in the Delivery Servers Address Book..............91
Specifying the Sender .........................................................................................95
Selecting a Sender from the Sender List in the Delivery Servers Destination List....95
Selecting the Sender by Entering the Registration Number.....................................96
Selecting a Sender by Searching the Delivery Servers Destination List .................97
Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be Transmitted via the Delivery Server....99
Simultaneous Storage and Delivery.................................................................100
5. Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner

Before Using the Network TWAIN Scanner .....................................................101
Outline of the Network TWAIN Scanner.................................................................102
Preparing to Use the Network TWAIN Scanner .....................................................103
Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM.......................................104
Basic Network TWAIN Scanner Operation ......................................................105
iv
6. Various Scan Settings

Scan Settings ..................................................................................................... 107
Items for Specifying Scan Settings..................................................................108
Scan Type ..............................................................................................................108
Resolution ..............................................................................................................109
Scan Size ...............................................................................................................109
Edit .........................................................................................................................117
Adjusting Image Density ................................................................................... 118
Setting of Original Feed Type ...........................................................................119
Original Orientation ................................................................................................119
Original Settings.....................................................................................................121
Stamp.....................................................................................................................123
Batch, SADF ..........................................................................................................124
Divide .....................................................................................................................125
Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File ......................................... 126
Setting File Type and File Name....................................................................... 128
Setting File Type ....................................................................................................128
Setting File Name...................................................................................................130
Security Settings to PDF Files ...............................................................................132
Programs ............................................................................................................136
Registering Frequently Used Setting .....................................................................137
Recalling a Registered Content .............................................................................138
Changing a Registered Program............................................................................139
Changing the Registered Program Name ..............................................................140
Registering Initial Values for Initial Display ............................................................141
Scan Settings When Using Twain Scanner .....................................................142
Setting Original Orientation on the TWAIN Scanner ..............................................142
When Scanning Originals of Mixed Sizes Using TWAIN Scanner .........................144
7. Appendix
Relationship between Resolution and Original Size ...................................... 145
When Using E-mail, Folder Sending, Storing or Network Delivery Function .........146
When Using as a TWAIN Scanner.........................................................................147
Relationship between File Type Specified for Scanning and File Types
for Sending E-mail and Folder........................................................................ 149
Software Supplied on CD-ROM ........................................................................ 151
Quick Install............................................................................................................151
TWAIN Driver .........................................................................................................151
DeskTopBinder Lite................................................................................................152
Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/Storage/Delivery Function....154
Transmission Function ...........................................................................................154
Storage Function....................................................................................................156
Network Delivery Function .....................................................................................157
Specifications..................................................................................................... 158
INDEX....................................................................................................... 159
v
vi

Symbols
[]
{}
1
About the Scanner Functions

This section describes functions you can use in the scanner mode.
For details about each function, see respective chapters.
Sending scanned files

There are several methods you can use to send captured data as files to computers.
Sending scan files by e-mail
For details, see chapter 1 "Sending Scan Files by E-mail".
Sending scan files to a shared folder
For details, see chapter 2 "Sending Scan Files to Folders".
Sending scan files to an FTP server
Sending scan files to a NetWare server
Delivering scan files using the delivery server
For details, see chapter 4 "Delivering Scan Files".
Scanning originals using the TWAIN driver
Use the TWAIN driver to specify the machine where originals will be scanned
from a client computer. For details, see chapter 5 "Scanning Originals with the
Network TWAIN Scanner".
Storing files
You can store scan files on the machine's hard disk. Stored files can be sent
later. For details, see chapter 3 "Storing Files Using the Scanner Function".
Reference
p.11 Sending Scan Files by E-mail
p.37 Sending Scan Files to Folders

p.83 Delivering Scan Files
p.101 Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner
p.61 Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
2
Display Panel
This section explains the simplified display and three confirmation screens:
Check Modes, Preview, and Transmission File Status.
You can find explanations about the E-mail screen, Scan to Folder screen, List of
Stored Files screen, or Network Delivery Scanner screen in this manual. For details, see "E-mail Screen", "Scan to Folder Screen", "List of Stored Files", and "Network Delivery Scanner Screen".
Reference
p.13 E-mail Screen
p.42 Scan to Folder Screen

p.69 List of Stored Files
p.86 Network Delivery Scanner Screen
3
Simplified Display
When you press {Simplified Display}, the screen changes from the initial display
to the simplified display.
Letters and keys are displayed at a larger size, making operations easier.
AQI031S
Example of Simplified Display
ALQ010S
1. [Key Color]
Press to change the key color and increase the brightness of the display panel.
This does not apply to the initial scanner

screen.
Note
To return to the initial screen, press {Simplified Display} again.
4
Confirmation Displays
This section explains three confirmation displays: Check Modes, Preview and
Transmission File Status.
Check Modes
This section explains items that are displayed and how to display the Check
Modes screen.
Use the Check Modes screen to check scanning and transmission settings.
Pressing [Check Modes] switches the screen from the initial scanner screen to the
Check Modes screen.
Check Modes
ARE017S
1. Original
4. Send
Displays Scan Settings, Original Feed

Type, and other scanning settings.
Displays transmission settings such as

Sender and Subject.
2. Transmission function icon
5. [Expand Group Dest.]
Displays the icon of the transmission

function in use.
Press to display the members of the group,

when a group is specified as the destination.
3. Sender and Destination

Displays the sender and transmission or
delivery destinations.
Preview
This section explains items that are displayed and how to display the Preview screen.
Use the Preview screen to check that of originals have been scanned correctly.
You can display the Preview screen when sending files by e-mail or Scan to Folder, delivering files, or simultaneously sending and delivering files.
To display the Preview screen, press [Preview], and then start scanning while
[Preview] is still selected.
Preview
AMW006S
1. [Zoom Out] and [Zoom In]
5. Display File
Press to reduce or enlarge the displayed

preview.
Displays a file's name and size.
2. [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Displays the number of the currently displayed page, total number of pages, page
size, and color mode.
Press to shift the displayed area.
3. [Cancel TX]
Press to close a preview and interrupt a
transmission.
4. [Continue TX]
Press to close a preview and continue a
transmission.
6. Display Page
7. [Switch]
Press to change the page of the selected
file that is displayed.
8. Display Position
Displays the position of an image when
enlarged.
Note
Preview is not available if a file is stored using [Store Only].
Preview is not available when sending a stored file.
You can view a stored file using the Preview screen displayed from the list of
stored files. For details about viewing a stored file, see "Checking a Stored File
Selected from the List".
Preview is not available if you select High Compression PDF as the file type.
Preview might not be displayed if scanning failed or the image file is corrupted. If this is the case, scan the original again.
Reference
p.72 Checking a Stored File Selected from the List
Transmission File Status

This section explains items that are displayed and how to display the Transmission File Status screen.
Use the Transmission File Status screen to check e-mail transmission, Scan to
Folder, and delivery results.
Press [Scanned Files Status] to display the Transmission File Status screen.
Up to 9 transmission or delivery results are displayed at the same time. Press [U]
or [T] to switch between results.
7
Transmission File Status
ARE018S
1. Date/Time
4. Sender
Displays the time and date transmission

was specified by this machine or the time
and date when Completed, Error, or Cancelled was confirmed.
Displays the sender name.
5. File Name
2. Transmission function icon
Displays the stored file name of files that

are simultaneously sent and stored, or of
stored files that are sent.
Displays the icon of the transmission

function used.
6. Status
3. Destination
Displays the transmission destination.
If you have selected multiple destinations, the first selected destination is displayed.
Other destinations appear as + 2. (X indicates the number of destinations.)
Displays one of the following transmission statuses: Completed, Trnsmtg.,

Waiting..., Error, or Cancelled.
7. [Stop TX]
To cancel transmission, select a file
whose status is [Waiting...], and then press
[Stop TX].
8. [Print List]
Press to print transmission results.
Note
You cannot check scanner function transmission results by pressing [Job List]
at the bottom of the screen. To check transmission results, press [Scanned Files
Status], and then display the Transmission File Status screen.
Depending on security settings, some transmission results might not be displayed.
8
Scanner Features
This section explains Scanner Features settings.
To display the Scanner Features screen, press {User Tools / Counter}. For detailed
setting method, see General Settings Guide.
General Settings
Items
Description
Switch Title
Sets index to use when the list of destinations of this

machine is displayed.
Allows you to update the delivery server's destination

list by pressing [Update Delivery Server Destination List].
To use this function, under [System Settings], set [Delivery Option] to [On].
Search Destination
Specify the default search destination list from the machine's address book or the LDAP server. To search
through an LDAP server, under [System Settings], register the LDAP server, and then set [LDAP Search] to [On].
TWAIN Standby Time
Select the machine's response if a client computer tries to

use the TWAIN scanner while scanning is in progress.
Select the default destination list from the machine's

destination list or from the Destination List managed
by the delivery server.
Select whether to prioritize the e-mail destination list

or the folder destination list.
Specify the machine's response of the maximum number of scanner journals is exceeded.
Allows you to print the scanner journal. The scanner

journal is then deleted.
Allows you to delete the scanner journal without

printing it.
Scan Settings
Items
Description
A.C.S. Sensitivity Level
Allows you to set the sensitivity level for judging color/black and white for scanning originals when [Scan
Type] is set to [Auto Color Select].
Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure

Glass
Set which operation the machine performs while waiting for additional originals after scanning from the exposure glass.
Wait Time for Next Original(s):

SADF
Sets the operation of this machine on the queue for additional originals after scanning the originals with Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).
Background Density of ADS (Full

Color)
Corrects scanning density to improve resolution of paper types such as non-white paper like newspaper or
transparent originals.
9
Send Settings
Items
Description
Specify a compression method for files scanned in

black and white.
Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color) specify a compression method for files scanned in
gray scale or full color.
Specify the data compression method for High Compression PDF files.
Max. E-mail Size
Select whether or not to limit the size of e-mail that has

attachments.
Select whether or not to divide files that exceed the

size specified in [Max. E-mail Size] and send them as
multiple e-mails.
Select the language in which document information

such as the title, date, and administrator's name is
sent.
Set the number of digits in serial numbers used for single-page file names.
Sets the default for whether to attach a file or send

URL Link when sending stored files by e-mail.
Initial Settings
Items
Description
Menu Protect
Set the default access level for functions whose settings can be changed by users other than the administrator.
10
1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

You can attach scan files to e-mails and send them via connections such as LAN
and the Internet.
Before Sending Scan Files by E-mail

This section explains the necessary preparations and the procedure for sending
scan files by e-mail.
Outline of Sending Scan Files by E-mail

This section outlines the function for sending scan files by e-mail.
ZZZ508S
1. This machine
3. Client computer
A scan file can be attached to an e-mail

and sent to a mail server.
Use e-mail client software to receive email messages and scan file attachments
that are generated by this machine.
2. SMTP server
You need to have an access to an e-mail
server that supports SMTP (Simple Mail
Transfer Protocol), to send scan files by email. However, it is not essential to have
an e-mail server inside the LAN where
this machine belongs. It transfers a received e-mail to a specified destination
through a LAN or the Internet.
4. LDAP Server
Use this server for administering e-mail
accounts, searching the network, and authenticating the computers that access
the machine. Using the LDAP server, you
can search for destinations from the machine.
11
Preparation for Sending by E-mail

This section explains the preparation and settings for sending scan files by email.
A Connect the machine to the network.

Connect the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable or IEEE 1394 cable, or wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b).
B Make the necessary network setting in [System Settings].

If you have connected the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable,
make the following settings. For details, see General Settings Guide.
Specify the machines IPv4 address and subnet mask.
Specify the IPv4 gateway address.
In [Effective Protocol], enable [IPv4].
Specify the SMTP server.
C If necessary, change settings in [Send Settings] under [Scanner Features].

Note
To connect the machine to the network using an IEEE 1394 cable or wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b), an extended 1394 board or extended wireless
LAN board is required respectively. For details, see Network Guide.
Items to set up in [System Settings] vary depending on the network environment. For more information about network settings, see General Settings
Guide.
For more information about [Scanner Features], see General Settings Guide.
Registering E-mail Addresses in the Address Book

You can register frequently used e-mail addresses in the address book.
Register e-mail addresses in [Address Book Management] under [Administrator
Tools] from [System Settings]. Addresses can also be registered as groups.
Note
For details about registering e-mail addresses in the address book, see General Settings Guide.
You can also register e-mail addresses in the address book using Web Image
Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. For details about how to install
these applications, see Network Guide. For details about registering addresses in the address book, see Help of respective applications.
when it is updating the address book using CSV files (retrieved using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin) that contain user codes.
12
Before Sending Scan Files by E-mail
E-mail Screen
This section explains the screen layout when sending scan files by e-mail.
item by pressing it.
[
]. Keys that cannot be selected appear like [
].
ZZZ015S
1. Destination field
5. [Reg. No.]
The specified destination appears. If

more than one destination has been specified, press [U] or [T] to scroll through the
destinations.
Press this key to specify the destination

using a 5-digit registration number.
2. E-mail / Folder
Press these tabs to switch between the Email screen and Scan to Folder screen.
Switch the screen also when sending the
same files by both e-mail and Scan to
Folder.
3. E-mail icon
Indicates that the E-mail screen is displayed.
4. [Manual Entry]
6. Destination List
The list of destinations registered in the
machine appears. If all of the destinations
cannot be displayed, press [U]or [T] to
switch the screen.
Group destinations are denoted by this
symbol ( ).
7. [Text][Subject][Sender Name][Recept.
Notice]
Enter the message and specify the subject, sender, and whether or not to use
Message Disposition Notification.
To specify destinations not registered in

the address book, press this key, and then
enter the e-mail addresses using the soft
keyboard that appears.
13
Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail

This section describes the basic operation for sending scan files by e-mail.
A Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press {Clear Modes}.
B If the network delivery scanner screen or Scan to Folder screen appears,

switch to the E-mail screen.
For details, see "Switching to the E-mail Screen".
C Place originals.
D If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as resolution and scan size.
For details, see "Various Scan Settings".
E If necessary, specify the scanning density.

For details, see "Adjusting Image Density".
F If necessary, press [Original Feed Type] to specify settings such as original orientation.
For details, see "Setting of Original Feed Type".
G If necessary, press [File Name / Type] to specify settings such as file name and
file format.
For details, see "Setting File Type and File Name".
14
Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail
H Specify the destination.

You can specify multiple destinations.
For details, see "Specifying E-mail Destinations".
I If necessary, press [Text] to enter the e-mail message.
For details, see "Specifying the E-mail Message"
J If necessary, press [Subject] to specify the e-mail subject.

For details, see "Specifying the E-mail Subject".
K To specify the e-mail sender, press [Sender Name].

For details, see "Specifying the E-mail Sender".
L To use Message Disposition Notification, press [Recept. Notice].

If you select [Recept. Notice], the selected e-mail sender will receive e-mail notification when the e-mail recipient has opened the e-mail.
M Press {Start}.
If you are scanning batches, place the next originals.
Note
If you have selected two or more destinations, the destinations can be
made to appear one by one by pressing [U] or [T] next to the destination
field.
To cancel a selected destination, display the destination in the destination

field, and then press {Clear / Stop}. You can cancel a destination selected
from the destination list by pressing the selected destination again.
In [System Settings], you can specify the administrators e-mail address as
the default sender name. This lets you send e-mail without entering anything for [Sender Name]. For details, see General Settings Guide.
Depending on the security setting, the logged-on user may be specified as
[Sender Name].
To use Message Disposition Notification, log on to the machine as a user
and specify the sender. Note, however, that the [Recept. Notice] notification
e-mail may not be transmitted if the e-mail software of the recipient does
not support Message Disposition Notification.
By pressing {Check Modes}, you can switch from the initial scanner screen
to the Check Modes screen so you can check the settings. For details, see
"Check Modes".
If you press [Preview], and then scan a document, the Preview screen appears. For details, see "Preview".
To cancel scanning, press {Clear / Stop}.
You can also store a scan file and simultaneously send it by e-mail. For details, see "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail".
15
Reference
p.17 Switching to the E-mail Screen
p.107 Various Scan Settings

p.118 Adjusting Image Density
p.119 Setting of Original Feed Type
p.128 Setting File Type and File Name
p.18 Specifying E-mail Destinations
p.32 Specifying the E-mail Message
p.31 Specifying the E-mail Subject
p.27 Specifying the E-mail Sender
p.5 Check Modes
p.6 Preview
p.34 Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail
16
Switching to the E-mail Screen
Switching to the E-mail Screen

This section explains how to switch the screen to the E-mail screen.
If the Scan to Folder screen is being displayed, press [E-mail] to switch to the Email screen.
If the network delivery scanner screen is being displayed, switch to the E-mail
screen as follows:
A Press [Delivery Dest.].
The E-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen appears.
B If the Scan to Folder screen appears, press [E-mail].
The E-mail screen appears.

Note
You cannot switch from the network delivery scanner screen while delivery destinations are being specified. To clear the specified destination, display the destination in the destination field of the network delivery
scanner screen, and then press {Clear / Stop}.
17
Specifying E-mail Destinations

This section explains how to specify e-mail destinations.
You can specify e-mail destinations by any of the following methods:
Select the destination from the machines address book
Enter the e-mail address directly
Search the LDAP server for the destination and select it
Before you select destinations, make sure you have selected [To]. If necessary,
press [Cc] or [Bcc], and then select destinations.
Selecting the Destination from the Machines Address Book

This section explains how to select the destination from the machines address
book.
Important
To use this function, you must register the destinations in [System Settings] in
advance. For details, see General Settings Guide.
You can use the following methods to select destinations registered in the machine's address book:
Select a destination from the list
Select a destination by entering the registration number
Select a destination by searching the machine's address book
Selecting a destination from the list

Select the destination from the destination list.
A In the destination list, press the key including the destination name.
The key of the selected destination is highlighted, and the destination appears
in the destination field at the top of the screen.
18
If the target destination does not appear, take one of the following steps:
Display the destination by selecting its initial letter from the title
Display the destination by pressing [U] or [T]
Note
Depending on the security setting, some destinations may not appear in
Selecting destinations by entering the registration numbers

Select the destination from the machines address book using its registration
number.
A Press [Reg. No.].
B Using the number keys, enter the five-digit registration number assigned
to the required destination folder.
If the entered number is less than five digits, press {q} after the last number.
Example: To enter 00003 Press {3}, and then press {q}.
C Press [OK].
By pressing [Change], you can change the selected destination.
19
Searching the machines address book for the destination and selecting it
This section explains how to search the machines address book for the destination and select it.
B To search by destination name, press [Name].

To search by e-mail address, press [E-mail Address].
The soft keyboard appears.
You can also search by combining [Name] and [E-mail Address].
C Enter part of the destination name.

To search by e-mail address, enter part of the address.
D Press [OK].
E If necessary, press [Advanced Search], and then specify the detailed search
criteria.
By pressing [Advanced Search], you can search using criteria such as [Name], [Email Address], and [Folder Name]. You can also search by combining the [Beginning Word] or [End Word] criteria with the other criteria.
The illustrated screen is an example. The items that actually appear on the
screen may differ.
20
F Press [Start Search].

Destinations that match the search criteria are displayed.
H Select [To], [Cc], or [Bcc].
I Press [OK].
Note
If [LDAP Search] is set to [On] in [System Settings], check that [Address Book]
in the upper part on the screen has been selected before executing the
search.
Search criteria that appear in [Advanced Search], such as [Name], [E-mail Address], and [Folder Name], are registered in the machines address book. For
details, see General Setting Guide.
By pressing [Details], you can view details about the selected destinations.
Up to 100 destinations can be displayed as search results.
By pressing [Advanced Search], the following criteria appear:
[Beginning Word]: The names which start with the entered character or characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A".
[End Word]: The names which end with the entered character or characters
are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "C".
[Exact Match]: The names which correspond to an entered character or characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "ABC".
[Include one Word]: The names which contain an entered character or characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A", "B", or "C".
[Exclude Words]: The names which do not contain an entered character or
characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "D".
21
Entering an E-mail Address Manually

This section explains how to enter an e-mail address manually.
A Press [Manual Entry].
The soft keyboard appears so you can enter the e-mail address.
B Enter the e-mail address.

C Press [OK].
Note
Depending on the security settings, [Manual Entry] may not be displayed.
To change a registered destination e-mail address, press [Edit] to the left of

the destination field to display the soft keyboard, use the soft keyboard to
enter the new address, and then click [OK].
The e-mail address that is entered directly can be registered in the machines address book. For details, see "Registering a Directly-Entered Destination in the Address Book".
Reference
p.26 Registering a Directly-Entered Destination in the Address Book
22
Selecting Destinations by Searching an LDAP Server

By accessing an LDAP server, you can search for destinations and select them.
Important
To use this function, an LDAP server must be connected to the network. In
addition, under [System Settings], the server must be registered and [LDAP
Search] must be set to [On]. For details, see General Settings Guide.
B Select the LDAP server that appears next to [Address Book].

Register the LDAP server in advance in [System Settings].
If authentication is required to access the selected server, the authentication

screen appears. To authenticate, enter the user name and password.
C To search by destination name, press [Name].

You can also search by combining [Name] and [E-mail Address]. If you search
by [Name], whether the search is based on surname or first name depends on
how the administrator has configured searching.
23
D Enter part of the destination name.

To search by e-mail address, enter part of the destination address.
E Press [OK].
F If necessary, press [Advanced Search], and then specify the detailed search
criteria.
By pressing [Advanced Search], you can search using criteria such as [Name], [Email Address], [Company Name], [Department Name], and [Search Options]. You can
also search by combining the [Beginning Word] or [End Word] criteria with the
other criteria.
screen may differ.
G Press [Start Search].

H Select the destination.

I Select [To], [Cc], or [Bcc].
J Press [OK].
Note
The [Fax Destination], [Company Name], [Department Name], and [Search Options] search criteria that appear in [Advanced Search] are registered in the
LDAP server. [Search Options] can be registered in [System Settings]. For details, see General Settings Guide.
If an e-mail address returned by the LDAP server is too long, it will be impossible to specify it as the destination. For details about the number of
characters that can be specified, see "Sending E-mail".
It is possible for more than one e-mail address to be registered for a destination. However, only one e-mail address per destination will appear in
the search results. It depends on the LDAP server which e-mail address
will be displayed. Usually, it is the e-mail address registered first.
24

are targeted.
[Fuzzy Search]: a vague search (The function of this vague search depends
on the system supported by the LDAP server.)
Reference
p.154 Sending E-mail
25
Registering a Directly-Entered Destination in the Address Book

This section explains how to register a directly-entered destination in the machines address book. You can also register a destination selected from the LDAP
server.
A In the destination field, display the destination you want to register.
B Press [Prg. Dest.].
C Press [Names], and then specify the name and other information to be registered.
For details about specifying the information to be registered, see General Settings Guide.
D Press [OK].
Note
Depending on the security setting, [Prg. Dest.] may not appear. In such case,
you cannot complete the registration.
To register in the machines address book a destination searched for and

selected from the LDAP server, display the destination, and then press
[Prg. Dest.].
26
Specifying the E-mail Sender

This section explains how to specify the e-mail sender.
To send e-mail, you must specify the name of the sender.
You can specify the e-mail sender by any of the following methods:
Select the sender from the machines sender list
Select the sender by entering the registration number
Select the sender by searching the machines address book
Note
Senders must be registered in advance under [System Settings]. For details, see
In [System Settings], you can specify the administrators e-mail address as the
default sender name. This lets you send e-mail without entering anything for
[Sender Name]. For detail, see General Settings Guide.
Depending on the security setting, the logged-on user may be specified as
[Sender Name].
When a protection code has been set, a screen for entering the protection code
appears after selecting the sender. Enter the protection code, and then press
[OK]. If the protection code you entered is correct, the sender name is displayed.
Selecting a Sender from the List

This section explains how to select the sender from the machines sender list.
A Press [Sender Name].
B Select the sender.

C Press [OK].
27
Using a Registration Number to Specify a Sender Name

Select the sender from the destination list according to the registration number.
B Press [Registration No.].

C Using the number keys, enter the five-digit registration number assigned
Example: To enter 00006
Press {6}, and then press {q}.
D Press [OK] twice.

28
Selecting the Sender by Searching the Machines Address Book

This section explains how to select the sender by searching the machines address book.
B Press [Search].
C To search by user name, press [Name].
The soft keyboard appears so you can specify a name or e-mail address to
search by.
You can also search by combining [Name] and [E-mail Address].
D Enter the part of the senders name you want to search for.
To search by e-mail address, enter part of the address.
E Press [OK].
criteria.
By pressing [Advanced Search], you can search using criteria such as [Name], [Email Address], and [Folder Name].
You can also search by combining the [Beginning Word] or [End Word] criteria
with the other criteria.
screen may differ.
29

H Select the sender.

I Press [OK].
Note
If [LDAP Search] is set to [On] in [System Settings], check that [Address Book]
in the upper part on the screen has been selected before executing the
search.
Search criteria that appear in [Advanced Search], such as [Name], [E-mail Address], and [Folder Name], are registered in the machines address book. For
details, see General Setting Guide.
By pressing [Details], you can view details about the selected sender.
are targeted.
30
Specifying the E-mail Subject
Specifying the E-mail Subject

This section explains how to specify the e-mail subject.
A Press [Subject].
B Enter the subject.

C Press [OK].
31
Specifying the E-mail Message

This section explains how to specify the e-mail message.
The message can be created in the following ways:
Select the e-mail message from the list
Enter the message directly
Selecting a Message from the List

You can select a message from the list.
Important
The messages that can be selected from the list must be registered in [System
Settings] in advance.
A Press [Text].
B Select a message.
C Press [OK].
32
Specifying the E-mail Message
Manual Entry of a Message

You can enter the message manually.
A Press [Text].
B Press [Manual Entry].

The soft keyboard appears so you can enter the message.
C Enter the message.

D Press [OK] twice.
33

This section explains how to store a file and simultaneously send it by e-mail.
B Make sure [Send & Store] is selected.

C If necessary, specify file data, such as [User Name], [File Name], and [Password].
For details, see "Specifying File Information for a Store File".
D Press [OK].
E Specify the setting for sending the file by e-mail, and then send the file.
For details about sending a file by e-mail, see "Basic Operation for Sending
Scan Files by E-mail".
Note
If you simultaneously store scan files and send them by e-mail, the files
cannot be retransmitted from the E-mail screen. To retransmit the files, select the file on the screen for selecting stored files, and then send them. For
details, see "Sending a Stored File".
Reference
p.66 Specifying File Information for a Stored File
p.14 Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail

p.75 Sending a Stored File
34
Sending the URL by E-mail

This section explains how to send the URL of the stored file by e-mail.
Important
To send the URL of the stored file by e-mail without sending the file itself, you
must specify the setting in [Scanner Features]. For details, see General Settings
Guide.
You can send the URL when you send a stored file by e-mail, and when you store
a file and simultaneously send it by e-mail.
With the transmitted URL, the recipient can view, download, or delete the file
indicated by the URL over the network using Web Image Monitor. Even if you
cannot send a file by e-mail because of network limitations, you can still send the
URL of the file.
A In [Scanner Features], select [Send URL Link] under [Stored File E-mail Method].
For details about specifying the setting, see General Settings Guide.
B Send a stored file by e-mail. Alternatively, store a file and simultaneously

send it by e-mail.
For details about sending a stored file by e-mail, see "Sending a Stored File".
For details about storing a file and simultaneously sending it by e-mail, see
"Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail".
An e-mail such as the one shown below will be sent to the destination.
C In the e-mail destination, click the URL.

Web Image Monitor starts.
D View, delete, or download the file over the network using Web Image Monitor.
Note
It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor on the same network
environment. For details about settings for using Web Image Monitor, see
Network Guide.
Depending on the environment, even if you click the URL in the file sent
by e-mail, the browser may not start and you may not be able to view the
file. If this happens, click the same URL again, or manually enter the URL
in the browser's address bar.
35
For details about the functions for displaying and downloading stored files
using Web Image Monitor, see Copy/ Document Server Reference.
To display details about the functions for managing stored files using Web
Image Monitor, click [Help] on the upper right of each Web browser's window.
You can send the URL by e-mail and simultaneously send it by Scan to
Folder. In this case, the file is sent to the Scan to Folder destination, not the
URL.
36
2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

Using the Scan to Folder function, you can send scan files over the network to
shared folders, FTP server folders, or NetWare folders.
Before Sending Files by Scan to Folder

This section describes the preparations and procedure for sending files by Scan
to Folder.
Outline of Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder

This section outlines the function for sending scan files by Scan to Folder.
Sending files to shared folders
ZZZ509S
1. This machine
2. Computer with a shared folder
You can send scan files to shared network folders. To send scan files to shared
network folders, use the SMB protocol.
To use this function, it is necessary to create a shared folder in advance. You can
specify a shared folder to save scan files.
3. Client computer
You can also browse scanned files saved
to a shared folder from a client computer.
37
Sending files to an FTP server
ZZZ510S
1. This machine
3. Client computer
You can send scan files to FTP server folders. To send scan files to FTP server folders, use the FTP protocol.
You can browse scanned files saved to an

FTP server from a client computer. You
need to have an FTP client program on
the computer to connect to an FTP server.
2. FTP server
The FTP server is a server that provides
file transfer services among computers on
the same network. Transferred files are
stored on this server. It is essential to have
the FTP server inside the LAN/WAN
where this machine belongs. It is not possible to access an FTP server via a proxy
server.
38
Sending files to a NetWare server
ZZZ511S
1. This machine
3. Client computer
You can send scan files to NetWare folders. To send scan files to NetWare folders,
use the NCP protocol.
To download files, a computer must be

running the NetWare client and be logged
onto the server.
2. NetWare Server
You can use this server to share files over
the network via NetWare. By sending image data to the server, files can be stored
on the server.
39
Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder

This section describes the preparations and settings for sending scan files by
Scan to Folder.
Important
Files can be sent to shared folders on client computers.
Files can also be sent to FTP servers if any exist on the network.
Files can also be sent to NetWare servers if any exist on the network.

Connect the machine to the network using an Ethernet or IEEE 1394 cable, or
wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b).
B Make the necessary network settings in [System Settings].

Specify the machines IPv4 address and subnet mask.
Specify the IPv4 gateway address.
In [Effective Protocol], enable [IPv4].
To send files to shared folders, enable [SMB] in [Effective Protocol]. To send
files to NetWare folders, enable [NetWare] in [Effective Protocol].

Note
Items to set up in [System Settings] vary depending on the network environment. For more information about network settings, see General Settings
Guide.
For details about [Scanner Features], see General Settings Guide.
Sending files using SMB is available only under a NetBIOS over TCP/IP
environment. Sending files using SMB is not available under a NetBEUI
environment.
Even when settings made with the control panel, Web Image Monitor, Telnet, or other methods do not permit the use of SMB and FTP, sending files
is still possible.
40
Registering Destination Folders in the Address Book

You can register the addresses of frequently-used destination folders in the address book. Register the folder addresses in [Address Book Management] under
[Administrator Tools] from [System Settings]. These addresses can also be registered
as groups.
Note
For details about registering the address of a destination folder in the address
book, see General Settings Guide.
You can register entries in the address book using Web Image Monitor or
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. For details about installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see "Monitoring and Configuring the Printer", Network
Guide. For details about registering addresses, see each applications Help.
when it is updating the address book using CSV files (retrieved using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin) that contain user codes.
41
Scan to Folder Screen

This section describes the screen layout when sending scan files by Scan to Folder.
item by pressing it. When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is
highlighted like [
].
ALQ007S
1. Destination field
5. [Reg. No.]

destinations.
Press to specify a destination using a fivedigit registration number.
2. E-mail/ Folder
Press to switch between the Scan to Folder screen and E-mail screen.
Also switch the screen when sending a
file simultaneously by both Scan to Folder and e-mail.
3. Scan to Folder icon

Shows that the Scan to Folder screen is
displayed.
4. [Manual Entry]
To specify destinations not registered in
the address book, press this button to display the soft keyboard, and then enter the
address of the destination folder.
42
Reference
p.11 Sending Scan Files by E-mail
6. Destination List
machine appears.
If all of the destinations cannot be displayed, press [U] or [T] to switch the screen.
Group destinations are denoted by this
symbol ( ).
7. [Text][Subject][Sender Name][Recept.
Notice]
You can enter the message and specify the
subject, sender, and whether or not to use
Message Disposition Notification. The entries will be used for e-mail transmission
when sending files simultaneously by
Scan to Folder and e-mail. For details, see
"Sending Scan Files by E-mail".
Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder
Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder

This section describes the basic operations involved in using Scan to Folder.

B If the network delivery scanner screen or E-mail screen appears, switch to
the Scan to Folder screen.

For details, see "Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen".
C Place originals.

G If necessary, press [File Name / Type] to specify settings such as file name and
file format.
For details, see "Setting File Type and File Name".
43
H Specify the destination.

For details, see "Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations".
I Press {Start}.
Note
If you have selected more than one destination, you can press [U] or [T]
next to the destination field to scroll through the destinations.

from the address book by pressing the selected destination again.
"Check Modes".
If you press [Preview], and then scan a document, the Preview screen appears. For details, see "Preview".
You can also store a file and simultaneously send it by Scan to Folder. For
details, see "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder".
Reference
p.45 Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen

p.46 Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations
p.5 Check Modes
p.6 Preview
p.60 Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder
44
Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen
Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen

This section explains how to switch to the Scan to Folder screen.
If the E-mail screen is being displayed, press [Folder] to switch to the Scan to
Folder screen.
If the network delivery scanner screen is being displayed, switch to the Scan to
Folder screen as follows:
The E-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen appears.
B If the E-mail screen appears, press [Folder].
The Scan to Folder screen appears.

Note
You cannot switch from the network delivery scanner screen while delivery
destinations are being specified. To clear the specified destination, display
the destination in the destination field of the network delivery scanner
screen, and then press {Clear / Stop}.
45
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations

This section explains how to specify Scan to Folder destinations.
You can send a file by Scan to Folder by any of the following methods:
Select a destination registered in the machines address book
Send a file to a shared network folder
Send a file to an FTP server
Send a file to an NDS tree or a NetWare server
Selecting the Destination from the Machines Address Book

This section explains how to select the destination from the machines address
book.
Important
To use this function, you must register the destinations in [System Settings] in
advance.
You can select a destination registered in the machines address book by any of
the following methods:
Select the destination from the destination list
Select the destination by entering its registration number
Select the destination by searching the machines address book
Note
If you have specified the address protection code for accessing the address
book, the screen for entering the address protection code appears.
Depending on the security setting, some destinations may not appear in the
destination list.
46
Selecting a destination registered in the destination list

Select the destination from the destination list.
The key of the selected destination is highlighted, and the destination appears
in the destination field at the top of the screen.
If the target destination does not appear, take one of the following steps:
Display the destination by selecting its initial letter from the title
Display the destination by pressing [U] or [T]
Note
Selecting destinations by entering the registration numbers

Select the destination from the machines address book using its registration
number.
A Press [Reg. No.].
B Enter the five-digit registration number that has been assigned to a destination folder using the number keys.
47
C Press [OK].
Searching the machines address book for the destination and selecting it
This section explains how to search the machines address book for the destination and select it.

To search by path, press [Folder Name].
The soft keyboard appears so you can enter the name or path.
You can also search by combining [Name] and [Folder Name].

To search by path, enter part of the path.
D Press [OK].
48
criteria.
By pressing [Advanced Search], you can search using criteria such as [Name], [Email Address], and [Folder Name].
You can also search by combining the [Beginning Word] or [End Word] criteria
with the other criteria.
screen may differ.

Destinations that match the search criterion are displayed.
G Select the destination folder.

H Press [OK].
Note
Search criteria that appear in [Advanced Search], such as [Name], [E-mail Address], and [Folder], are registered in the machines address book. For details, see General Setting Guide.
are targeted.
49
Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder

This section explains how to specify the destination when sending files to a
shared network folder.
Important
The shared folder must have been created on the client computer in advance.
Depending on the operating system of the client computer, access to the shared
folder may require authentication.
You can send a file to a shared folder over the network by any of the following
methods:
Enter the path to the destination directly
Specify the path by browsing the network for the destination
Entering the path to the destination manually

You can enter the path to the destination folder manually.
B Press [SMB].
C Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the path field.
D Enter the path for the folder.

The following is an example of a path where the folder name is "user" and the
computer name is "desk01": \\desk01\user.
Instead of specifying the destination using its path, you can also use its IPv4
address.
E Press [OK].
50
F Depending on the destination setting, enter the user name for logging on
to the client computer.
Press [Manual Entry] to the right of the user name field to display the soft keyboard.
G Depending on the destination setting, enter the password for logging on to

the client computer.
Press [Manual Entry] for the password to display the soft keyboard.
H Press [Connection Test].

A connection test is performed to check whether the specified shared folder
exists.
I Check the connection test result, and then press [Exit].

J Press [OK].
Note
If authentication is required to access the folder, the login screen appears.
Enter the user name and password.
If you change the protocol after entering the path name, user name, or password, a confirmation message appears.
IPv4 address entry is supported by Windows98/Me/2000/XP, Windows
NT4.0, and Windows Server 2003.
Computer and shared folder names containing more than 12 characters
cannot be displayed.
To change the path for the folder that has been entered, press [Change] on
the left side of the destination field. Enter the correct path for the folder,
The connection test may take time.
You may not be able to press [Connection Test] right after pressing [Cancel]
during a connection test.
Even if the connection test was successful, the machine may fail to transfer
the file if you do not have write privileges for the file or there is not enough
free hard disk space.
You can register the path to the destination in the machines address book.
For details, see "Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book".
Reference
p.59 Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address
Book
51
Specifying the path by browsing the network for destinations

You can browse computers on the network for the destination folder, and then
specify the path.
B Press [SMB].
C Press [Browse Network] under the path name field.
Domains or workgroups on the network appear.
D Select the domain or workgroup in which the destination folder is located.

E Select the client computer that has the destination folder.
If you cannot find the computer you are looking for, press [Up One Level] and
browse that level.
If authentication is required to access the selected computer, the authentication screen appears. To authenticate, enter the user name and password.
F Select the destination folder.

When the selected folder has sub-folders, the sub-folders list appears.
If you cannot find the destination folder, press [Up One Level], and then search
for the folder at that level.
G Press [OK] twice.

52
Note
If authentication is required to access the folder, the login screen appears.
Enter the user name and password.
If you change the protocol after entering the path name, user name, or
password, a confirmation message appears.
Computer and shared folder names containing more than 12 characters
cannot be displayed.
Up to 100 computers or shared folders can be displayed.
The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have the write privileges for the shared folder or there is not enough free hard disk space.
Reference
Book
Sending Files to an FTP Server

This section explains how to specify destinations when sending files to an FTP
server.
Entering the path to an FTP server manually

You can enter the path to an FTP server manually.
B Press [FTP].
C Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the server name field.
D Enter a server name.

Instead of specifying the destination using its path, you can also use its IPv4
address.
53
E Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the path field.

F Enter the path for the folder.
The following is an example of a path where the folder name is "user" and the
subfolder name is "lib": user\lib.
G Press [OK].
H Enter the user name according to the setting at the destination.
Press [Manual Entry] to the right of the user name field to display the soft keyboard.
I Enter the password according to the setting at the destination.

Press [Manual Entry] next to the password field to make the soft keyboard appear.
J To change the port number which is set in [System Settings], press [Change]
on the right side of the port number field. Enter a port number using the
number keys, and then press {q}.
K Press [Connection Test].

A connection test is performed to check whether the specified folder exists.
L Check the connection test result, and then press [Exit].

M Press [OK].
Note

To change the registered path to a destination folder, press [Edit] to the left
of the destination field to display the soft keyboard, enter the new path,
The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have write privileges
for the folder or there is not enough free hard disk space.
Reference
Book
54
Sending Files to an NDS Tree or NetWare Server

This section explains how to specify destinations when sending files to an NDS
tree or NetWare server.
You can send a file to an NDS tree or NetWare server by any of the following
methods:
Enter the path to the NDS tree or NetWare server directly
Specify the path by browsing the NDS tree or NetWare server for the destination
Reference
p.46 Selecting the Destination from the Machines Address Book
Entering the path to an NDS tree or NetWare server manually

You can enter the path to an NDS tree or NetWare server manually.
B Press [NCP].
C Select the connection type. Press [NDS] to specify the folder in the NDS tree.
Press [Bindery] to specify the folder on the NetWare server.
D Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the path field.
55
E Enter the path for the folder.

If you set the connection type to [NDS], the NDS tree name is "tree", the name
of the context including the volume is "context", the volume name is "volume", and the folder name is "folder", the path will be \\tree\volume.context\folder".
If you set the connection type to [Bindery], the NetWare server name is "server", the volume name is "volume", and the folder name is "folder", the path
will be "\\server\volume\folder".
F Press [OK].
G Enter the user name for logging on to the NDS tree or NetWare server.
Press [Manual Entry] to the right of the user name field. The soft keyboard appears.
If you press [NDS] for [Connection Type], enter the user name, and then enter
the name of the context containing the user object. If the user name is "user"
and the name of the Context is "context", the user name will be "user.context".
H If a password is specified for the log on user, enter it.

Press [Manual Entry] to the right of the password field. The soft keyboard appears.
I Press [Connection Test].

A connection test is performed to check whether the specified share folder exists.
J Check the connection test result, and then press [Exit].

K Press [OK].
56
Note
If you change the protocol after entering the path name, user name, or password, a confirmation message appears.
To change a registered path to a destination folder, press [Edit] to the left to
the destination field to display the soft keyboard, enter the correct path to
the folder, and then press [OK].
You can connect only to folders that you have the read privileges for.
Even if the connection test was successful, the machine may fail to transfer
the file if you do not have write privileges for the file or there is not enough
free hard disk space.
Reference
Book
Specifying the path to a destination folder in an NDS tree or on a NetWare server by

browsing the network
You can browse the network and specify the path to a destination folder in an
NDS tree or on a NetWare server.

B Press [NCP].
C Select the connection type. Press [NDS] to browse the NDS tree. Press [Bind-
ery] to browse the NetWare server.
D Press [Browse Network] under the path name field.
If you selected [NDS] under [Connection Type], the NDS tree list appears.
If you selected [Bindery] under [Connection Type], the NetWare server list appears.
E Search for the destination folder in the NDS tree or NetWare server.
If you cannot find the destination folder, press [Up One Level], and then search
for the folder at that level.
F Select the destination folder.

G Press [OK] twice.
Note
Only folders that you have the read privileges for are displayed.
If the language used for the NDS tree or by the NetWare server differs from
that used by the machine, file names in the NDS tree or on the NetWare
server might appear garbled.
Up to 100 items can be displayed.
57
If the selected NDS tree or NetWare server requires authentication, a login

screen appears. Enter a user name and password for logging on to the NDS
tree or NetWare server. If you log on to the NDS tree, enter a user name,
and then enter the name of the context containing the user object. If the
user name is "user" and the name of the Context is "context", the user name
will be "user.context".
The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have write privileges
for the folder or there is not enough free hard disk space.
Reference
Book
58
Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book

This section explains how to register folder paths you have entered manually or
specified by browsing the network to the machine's address book.
A In the destination field, display the destination you want to register.
B Press [Prg. Dest.].
C Press [Names], and then specify the name and other information to be registered.
For details about specifying the information to be registered, see General Settings Guide.
D Press [OK].
Note
Depending on the security setting, [Prg. Dest.] may not appear.
59
Simultaneous Storage and Sending by

Scan to Folder
This section explains how to store a file and simultaneously send it by Scan to
Folder.
B Make sure that [Send & Store] is selected.

For details, see "Specifying File Information for a Stored File".
D Press [OK].
E Specify the setting for sending the file by Scan to Folder, and then send the
file.
For details about sending a file by Scan to Folder, see "Basic Operations When
Using Scan to Folder".
Note
administrator.
If you simultaneously store scan files and send them by Scan to Folder, the
files cannot be retransmitted from the Scan to Folder screen. To retransmit
the files, select the files on the Select Stored File screen, and then send
them. For details, see "Sending a Stored File".
Reference
p.43 Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder

60
3. Storing Files Using the Scanner

Function
Using the scanner function, you can store scan files in the machine and then send
the stored files by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
61
Before Storing Files

This section outlines file storage under the scanner function and provides related cautions.
Outline of File Storage under the Scanner Function

This section outlines storing files under the scanner function.
Important
You can specify a password for each stored file. Files that are not passwordprotected can be accessed by other users on the same local area network using
DeskTopBinder. It is recommended that you protect stored files from unauthorized access by specifying passwords.
Scan file stored in the machine may be lost if some kind of failure occurs. We
advise against using the hard disk to store important files. The supplier shall
not be responsible for any damage that may result from the loss of files. For
long-term storage of files, we recommend the use of DeskTopBinder. For details, contact your local dealer.
ZZZ512S
1. This Machine
2. Client Computer
You can store scan files on the machines

hard disk. The stored files can be sent by
e-mail, Scan to Folder, or the network delivery scanner.
Using DeskTopBinder, you can, over the

network, view, copy, or delete files stored
in the machine. Using Web Image Monitor, you can, over the network, view,
download, or delete files stored in the
machine. For details about DeskTopBinder Lite, see DeskTopBinder Literelated
manuals. For details about Web Image
Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
62
Before Storing Files
Note
Stored files will be deleted after a set period. For details about specifying the
period, see General Settings Guide.
Files stored under the scanner function cannot be printed from the machines
control panel. Print the files from a client computer after receiving them on
the computer.
You can also store a file and simultaneously send it by e-mail or Scan to Folder, or store it and simultaneously deliver it. For details, see "Simultaneous
Storage and Sending by E-mail", "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan
to Folder", and "Simultaneous Storage and Delivery".
Reference

p.100 Simultaneous Storage and Delivery
63
Basic Operation for Storing Scan Files

This section describes the basic operation for storing scan files.

B Place originals.
C If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as resolution and scan size.
D If necessary, specify the scanning density.

E If necessary, press [Original Feed Type] to specify settings such as original orientation.
F Press [Store File].
G Press [Store Only].

H If necessary, specify file information, such as [User Name], [File Name], and
[Password].
64
Basic Operation for Storing Scan Files
I Press [OK].
J Press {Start}.
Note
administrator.
By pressing [Send & Store], you can simultaneously store scan files and send
them. For details, see "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail", "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder", and "Simultaneous
Storage and Delivery".
If a destination or sender has been selected, you cannot press [Store Only].
Reference

65
Specifying File Information for a Stored File

You can specify data for a stored file, such as user name, file name, and password.
By specifying data for a stored file, you can search for the file by user name or
file name, or protect the file with a password to prevent other people from accessing the file.
Specifying a User Name
You can specify a user name for the stored file.
The Store File screen appears.

A list of user names appears.
C Press the user name you want to specify.

The user names shown here are names that were registered on the [Administrator Tools] tab in [System Settings]. To specify a name not shown here, press
[Manual Entry], and then enter the user name.
D Press [OK] twice.

Note
administrator.
66
Specifying File Information for a Stored File
Specifying a File Name

This section explains how to change the name of a stored file.
A stored file is allocated a name starting with "SCAN" followed by a 4-digit
number.
Example: SCAN0001
You can change this file name.

C Change the file name.

D Press [OK] twice.
Note
For details about entering the text, see About This Machine.
67
Specifying a Password
You can specify a password for the stored file.
Important
Do not forget the password. If you forget it, consult the system administrator
of the machine.
By specifying a password, you can ensure that only the people who know the
password can view the file.
B Press [Password].
C Using the number keys, enter a four to eight-digit number.
D Press [OK].
E Enter the same number again using the number keys.
F Press [OK] twice.
68
Displaying the List of Stored Files

This section describes the list of stored files.
Using the list of stored files, you can delete stored files or change the file data.
List of Stored Files

This section describes how the list of stored files is displayed.
To display the list of stored files, press [Select Stored File] on the initial scanner
screen.
The list of stored files appears as follows:
highlighted like [
].
ALQ008S
1. Keys for searching for files
4. [Manage / Delete File]
Press to switch to the screens for searching for a file by user name or file name, or
to the screen for displaying all files.
Press this to delete stored files or change

the file data.
2. List/ Thumbnails
Press to sort the files using the selected

item. Select the same item once more for
a reverse sort. However, the files cannot
be sorted in reverse delivery.
You can select whether to display stored

files as a list or as thumbnails.
3. [Send]
Press this to deliver or send a stored file
by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
5. Keys for sorting files
6. [Details]
Press this to display details about the selected file.
69
7. [Preview]
8. List of stored files
Press this to display a preview of the selected file. For Detail, see "Checking a
Stored File Selected from the List".
Displays the list of stored files.

If the selected file does not appear, press
[U] or [T] to scroll the screen. If a password has been specified for a file, a key
icon appears to the left of the user name
for the file.
Note
Depending on the security setting, some files may not appear in the list.
Files stored under functions other than the scanner function do not appear on
this screen.
Reference
p.72 Checking a Stored File Selected from the List
Searching the List of Stored Files

You can search for files from the stored files using the user name or file name.
You can search the list of stored files by either of the following methods:
Search by user name
Search by file name
Searching by user name

You can search for a stored file by its user name.
Press [Select Stored File].

C Select the user name to be used for the search.
The user names shown here are names that were registered on the [Administrator Tools] tab in [System Settings]. To change a user name not shown here,
press [Manual Entry], and then enter the user name.
D Press [OK].
70
The search begins, and then files belonging to the specified user appear.
Searching by file name

You can search for a stored file by its file name.
3
B
Press [File Name].

C Enter the file name.

For information about how to enter characters, see About This Machine.
D Press [OK].
The search starts, and files whose name starts with the entered string appear.
71
Checking Stored Files

You can display the Preview screen and check a stored file on the machine or
from the client computer.
Checking a Stored File Selected from the List

This section explains how to preview a file selected from the list of stored files.
The list of stored files appears.

For details about the list of stored files, see "List of Stored Files".
B From the list of stored files, select the file you want to check.
You can select more than one file.
C Press [Preview].
A preview of the selected stored file appears.
Reference
p.69 List of Stored Files
72
Checking Stored Files
Stored File Preview Screen
ALQ022S
1. [Zoom Out], [Zoom In]
5. Display File
In previewing, you can reduce or enlarge

the file image.
The name and size of the selected file appear.
2. [ ][ ][ ][ ]
6. Display Page
You can scroll the preview screen.
The page number of the previewed page,

total number of pages, page size, and color mode appear.
3. [Switch]
You can switch to a preview of another
page.
4. [Switch]
You can switch to a preview of another
file.
7. Display Position
When the preview is enlarged, the location of the part of the page displayed on
the preview screen is indicated.
73
Checking Stored Files from a Client Computer

Using DeskTopBinder Lite or Web Image Monitor, you can also display the list
of files stored in the machine on a client computer.
Important
To view stored files from a client computer, the IPv4 address of the machine
must be specified.
You can also check files stored under the copier, Document Server, and printer
functions.
Displaying the List of Stored Files with DeskTopBinder Lite

The stored files are displayed and can be checked on a client computer using
DeskTopBinder Lite.
Note
You can also transfer the stored files to the client computer.
For details about DeskTopBinder, see the DeskTopBinder-related manuals.

For details about installing DeskTopBinder Lite, see "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM".
Reference
p.85 Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM
Using Web Image Monitor to Display Stored Files

The stored files are displayed and can be checked also on a client computer using
Web Image Monitor.
When you enter http:// (machine IPv4 address)/ in the address bar of the Web
browser on a client computer, the top page of Web Image Monitor appears.
Note
You can also download the stored files.
It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor only within your local
area network.
For details about displaying or downloading stored files using Web Image
Monitor, see Copy/ Document Server Reference.
For details about making settings for using Web Image Monitor, see Network
Guide.
For details about functions for managing stored files using Web Image Monitor, click [Help] on the upper-right corner of the displayed screen.
74

You can either send the selected file or the URL of the file location.
This section mainly explains how to select the files you want to send by e-mail or
Scan to Folder, or deliver using the network delivery scanner. For details about
operating procedures for individual functions, see the appropriate chapters.
Sending Stored Files
This section explains how to send a stored file.
B Select the file you want to send.

To select more than one file, repeat this step.
If you select more than one file, the files are sent or delivered in the selected
order.
By pressing [Queue], only the files selected here will be displayed in order of
sending.
C Press [OK].
The E-mail screen, Scan to Folder screen, or network delivery scanner screen
appears.
D If necessary, switch the screen.

E Specify the settings for sending files by e-mail or Scan to Folder, or using
the network delivery scanner.

For details about how to send a file by e-mail or Scan to Folder, or how to deliver a file, see "Basic Operation for Sending Files by E-mail", "Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder", or "Basic Operation for Delivering Files".
F Press {Start}.
The selected files are sent by e-mail or Scan to Folder, or using the network
delivery scanner.
75
Note
If you choose a file protected by a password, a screen to enter the password
appears. To select the file, enter the correct password, and then press [OK].
When you send a stored file by e-mail, either the file can be attached to the
e-mail or the URL of the file location can be sent. This setting must be made
in advance in [Scanner Features]. For details, see General Settings Guide.
Reference
p.14 Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail
p.43 Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder

p.87 Basic Operation for Delivering Files
76
Managing Stored Files

This section explains how to delete stored files and how to change the data for
stored files.
Deleting a Stored File

This section explains how to delete a stored file.
The [Manage / Delete File] screen appears.
C Select the file you want to delete.

D Press [Delete File].
A confirmation message about deleting the file appears.
E Press [Yes].
Note
Files waiting for delivery cannot be deleted.
You can also delete files stored in the machine by accessing the machine
from a client computer using Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder. For
detail about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help. For details
about DeskTopBinder, see the manuals supplied with DeskTopBinder.
77
Changing Data for a Stored File

You can change data for a stored file, such as [User Name], [File Name], and [Password].
Note
Information for files waiting for delivery cannot be changed.
Changing a user name
You can change the user name for a stored file.
C Select the file containing the file information you want to change.
If you select a password-protected file, a screen for entering the password appears. Enter the password, and then press [OK].
D Press [Change User Name].

E Enter a new user name.
The user names shown here are names that were registered on the [Administrator Tools] tab in [System Settings]. To change a user name not shown here,
press [Manual Entry], and then enter the user name.
78
F Press [OK].
G Make sure that the user name was changed as necessary, and press [Exit].
Note
Using Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder, you can also change the user
name of a file stored in the machine from the client computer. For details
about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help. For details about
DeskTopBinder, see the manuals supplied with DeskTopBinder.
Depending on the security setting, [Change Access Priv.] may appear instead
of [Change User Name]. For details about specifying [Change Access Priv.], consult the administrator.
79
Changing a file name

You can change the file name of a stored file.
3
D Press [Change File Name].

E Change the file name.
F Press [OK].
G Make sure that the file information was changed as necessary, and press
[Exit].
Note
For information about how to enter characters, see About This Machine.
Using Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder, you can also change the name
of a file stored in the machine from the client computer. For details about
Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help. For details about DeskTopBinder, see the manuals supplied with DeskTopBinder.
80
Changing a password
Enter the password for accessing the stored file.
Important
Be sure not to forget the password. If you forget it, consult the system administrator of the machine.

D Press [Change Password].

E Using the number keys, enter a new four to eight-digit password.
F Press [OK].
G Enter the same number again using the number keys.
H Press [OK].
Note
Using Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder, you can also change the password of a file stored in the machine from the client computer. For details
about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help. For details about
DeskTopBinder, see the manuals supplied with DeskTopBinder.
81
82
4. Delivering Scan Files

Using the ScanRouter delivery software, you can deliver by various methods
scan files produced by the machine.
Before Delivering Files

This section describes the necessary preparations and the procedure for using
the network delivery scanner.
Important
To use the network delivery scanner function, you need a delivery server on
which the optional the ScanRouter delivery software is installed. You also
need to register data about destinations and senders in the delivery server.
Outline of Scan File Delivery

This section outlines the function for delivering files using the network delivery
scanner.
ZZZ513S
1. This machine
You can send scan files to the delivery server.
2. Delivery server
Install the ScanRouter delivery software on
this computer to use it as the delivery server.
After receiving a scan file, the delivery
server delivers the file according to the
setting specified for the destination. The
delivery settings are as follows:
Storing the file in an in-tray
Delivering the file by e-mail
Storing the file in a selected folder
For details about the ScanRouter delivery

software, see the manuals supplied with
the ScanRouter delivery software.
3. Client Computer
How to check a file from the client computer depends on the delivery method.
For example, you can check a file by one
of the following methods:
Use DeskTopBinder to view a file delivered to the in-tray.
Use e-mail software to receive e-mail
with an attached file.
Browse a folder for a stored file.
83
Preparing to Deliver a File

This section describes the preparations and settings for delivering scan files.
Important
To use the network delivery scanner, you need a delivery server on which an
application such as the optional the ScanRouter delivery software is installed.
For details about the ScanRouter delivery software, see the manuals supplied
with the ScanRouter delivery software.
To view files delivered to an in-tray, DeskTopBinder must be installed on the

client computer.
Connect the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable or IEEE 1394 cable, or wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b).

Specify the machines IPv4 address and subnet mask
In [Effective Protocol], enable [IPv4]
Set [Delivery Option] to [On]

D Using the ScanRouter delivery software, register this machine as an I/O device. In addition, specify register destinations and specify such settings as
the delivery type and sender.
For details, see the manuals supplied with the ScanRouter delivery software.
Note
Items to set up in [System Settings] vary depending on the network environment. For details about the network settings, see General Settings Guide.
For details about installing DeskTopBinder Lite, see "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM".
Reference
84
Before Delivering Files
Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM

This section explains how to install DeskTopBinder Lite on a client computer
from the supplied "Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities" CD-ROM.
To view or receive files delivered to the in-trays, you must install DeskTopBinder Lite on the client computer.
A Make sure Windowsis running on the client computer, and then insert the
"Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM
drive.
The installer is automatically started and the [Scanner/PostScript Drivers and
Utilities] dialog box appears.
B Click [DeskTopBinder Lite].
The [DeskTopBinder Lite Setup] dialog box appears.

For the subsequent installation steps, see the Setup Guide displayed from the
[DeskTopBinder Lite Setup] dialog box.
Note
Before you start the installation, check the system requirements for DeskTopBinder Lite. For details, see "Software Supplied on CD-ROM".
You can install the software using the auto-run program. For details about
the auto-run program, see "Quick Install".
Reference
p.151 Software Supplied on CD-ROM
p.151 Quick Install
85
Network Delivery Scanner Screen

This section describes the screen layout when using the network delivery scanner.
highlighted like [
].
ALQ009S
1. Destination Field
5. Destination List

destinations.

delivery server appears. If all of the destinations cannot be displayed, press [U] or
[U] to switch the screen. Group destinations are denoted by this symbol ( ).
2. Network delivery scanner icon

Indicates that the network delivery scanner screen is displayed.
3. [Reg. No.]
Press this key to specify the destination
using a 3-digit registration number.
4. [Manual Entry]
86
To send a file by e-mail via the delivery

server to a destination not registered in
the delivery servers Destination List,
press this key to display the soft keyboard. Then use the soft keyboard to enter the e-mail address. For details about
how to send a file by e-mail via the delivery server, see the ScanRouter delivery
software manual.
6. [Subject][Sender Name][Recept. Notice]

Specify the subject, sender, and whether
or not to enable Message Disposition Notification for the file to be transmitted.
Basic Operation for Delivering Files

This section describes the basic operation for delivering scan files using the network delivery scanner.
Important
You must register destinations and senders in advance using the ScanRouter
delivery software installed on the delivery server.

B If the E-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen appears, switch to the network
delivery scanner screen.
For details, see "Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner Screen".
C Place originals.

87
G Specify the destination.

For details, see "Specifying Delivery Destinations".
H If necessary, press [Subject] to specify the e-mail subject.

For details, see "Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be Transmitted via the
Delivery Server".
I If necessary, press [Sender Name] to specify the sender.

If you specify the sender, data about the sender will be attached to the delivered file. Select the sender from those registered in the delivery server. For details, see "Specifying the Sender".
J Press {Start}.

Note
By pressing [Manual Entry] on the network delivery scanner screen, you can
send a file by e-mail via the delivery servers network. For details about entering the e-mail address directly, see "Entering an E-mail Address Manually".
If you have selected more than one destination, press [U] or [T] next to the
destination field to scroll through the destinations.
from the address book by pressing the selected destination again.
You can use the Message Disposition Notification function when sending
e-mail via delivery server. An e-mail is sent to the sender selected in step
9, notifying him/her that the recipient has read his/her e-mail. To specify
this setting, press [Recept. Notice].
To enable Message Disposition Notification, you must specify the ScanRouter delivery software setting for sending e-mail by SMTP. For details
about specifying this setting, see the ScanRouter delivery software manual. Note, however, that if the e-mail software used at the destination does
not support Message Disposition Notification, e-mail notification that the
e-mail has been opened may not be sent.
Register the senders e-mail address using the ScanRouter delivery software in advance.
"Check Modes".
If you press [Preview], and then scan a document, the Preview screen appears. For details, see "Preview"
You can also store a scan file and simultaneously deliver it. For details, see
"Simultaneous Storage and Delivery".
88
Reference
p.90 Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner Screen

p.91 Specifying Delivery Destinations
p.99 Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be Transmitted via the Delivery Server
p.95 Specifying the Sender
p.22 Entering an E-mail Address Manually
p.5 Check Modes
p.6 Preview
89
Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner

Screen
This section explains how to switch the screen to the network delivery scanner
screen.
If the E-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen is being displayed, switch to the network delivery scanner screen.
The network delivery scanner screen appears.

Note
You cannot switch from the E-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen while
destinations or senders are being specified. To clear a specified destination,
display the destination in the destination field of the E-mail screen or Scan
to Folder screen, and then press {Clear / Stop}.
90
Specifying Delivery Destinations

This section explains how to specify delivery destinations.
Selecting Destinations Registered in the Delivery Servers

Address Book
This section explains how to select destinations registered in the delivery servers address book
You can select a delivery destination registered in Destination List of the delivery server by any of the following methods:
Select the destination from the delivery destination list
Select the destination by entering the registration number
Select the destination by searching in the delivery server
Selecting a destination from the Destination List

From the destination list, select a destination.
The selected destination is highlighted and also is displayed in the destination field at the top of the screen.
Destinations are registered in the delivery server under captions. The destination list is updated automatically.
Note
If the target destination does not appear, press [U] or [T] to scroll through
the destinations until it does.

91
Selecting destinations by entering their registration numbers

Select a destination by entering its Short ID number (registered using the ScanRouter delivery software). For details about how to set Short IDs, see the manuals supplied with the ScanRouter delivery software.
A Press [Reg. No.].
4
B Using the number keys, enter the three-digit registration number, and then
press {q}.
You can also enter a registration number of fewer than three digits.
C Press [OK].
Note
To cancel a selected destination, press [U] or [T] next to the destination
field to scroll through the destinations until the one you want to cancel appears, and then press {Clear / Stop}.
92
Selecting destinations by searching the delivery servers Destination List

In the delivery servers Destination List, you can search for destinations and select them.
4
To search by comment, press [Comment].
The soft keyboard appears so you can enter the name or comment.
You can also search by combining [Name] and [Comment].

To search by comment, enter part of the comment.
D Press [OK].
criteria.
By pressing [Advanced Search], you can search by [Name] and [Comment]. You
can also search by combining the [Beginning Word] or [End Word] criteria with
the other criteria.

G Select the destination.

H Press [OK].
93
Note
The Comment search function searches for destinations by comment information, which is a registration item required by the ScanRouter delivery
software.
are targeted.
94
Specifying the Sender

This section explains how to specify the e-mail sender when sending a file by email via the delivery server.
You can specify the sender by any of the following methods:
Select the sender from the sender list in the delivery servers Destination List
Select the sender by entering the registration number
Select the sender by searching the delivery servers Destination List
Selecting a Sender from the Sender List in the Delivery Servers

Destination List
This section explains how to select a sender from the destination list.
B Select the sender.

C Press [OK].
95
Selecting the Sender by Entering the Registration Number

You can select the sender by entering the registration number.
4
B Press [Registration No.].
C Using the number keys, enter the three-digit registration number assigned

D Press [OK].
Note
For details about specifying [Short ID], see the manuals supplied with the
ScanRouter delivery software.
96
Selecting a Sender by Searching the Delivery Servers Destination List

This section explains how to select a sender by searching the delivery servers
Destination List.
4
B Press [Search].
C To search by destination name, press [Name].

To search by comment, press [Comment].
The soft keyboard appears so you can enter the name or comment.
You can also search by combining [Name] and [Comment].
D Enter part of the sender's name.

To search by comment, enter part of the comment.
E Press [OK].
97
criteria.
By pressing [Advanced Search], you can search by [Name] and [Comment]. You
can also search by combining the [Beginning Word] or [End Word] criteria with
the other criteria.

H Select the sender.

I Press [OK].
Note
The Comment search function searches for destinations by comment information, which is a registration item required by the ScanRouter delivery
software.
Up to 100 items can be displayed as the search results.
are targeted.
98
Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be Transmitted via the Delivery Server
Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be

Transmitted via the Delivery Server
This section explains how to specify the e-mail subject when sending a file by email via the delivery server.
A Press [Subject].
4
B Enter the subject.

C Press [OK].
99
Simultaneous Storage and Delivery

This section explains how to store a file and simultaneously deliver it.
4
B Make sure that [Send & Store] is selected.
D Press [OK].
E Specify the setting for delivering the file, and then send the file.
For details about delivering a file, see "Basic Operation for Delivering Files".
Note
A file which is simultaneously stored and delivered cannot be resent from
the network delivery scanner screen. To resend the file, select it on the Select Stored File screen, and then send it. For details, see "Sending a Stored
File".
Reference
p.87 Basic Operation for Delivering Files

100
5. Scanning Originals with the

Network TWAIN Scanner
Using the machine, you can scan originals into a client computer over the network.
Before Using the Network TWAIN Scanner

This section describes the preparations and procedure for using the network
TWAIN scanner.
Important
To use the network TWAIN scanner, you must install the TWAIN driver,
which is on the supplied CD-ROM. For details about installing the TWAIN
driver, see "Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM".
To use the network TWAIN scanner, a TWAIN-compliant application, such

as DeskTopBinder, must be installed on the client computer. DeskTopBinder
Lite is on the supplied CD-ROM. For details about installing DeskTopBinder
Lite, see "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM".
Reference
p.104 Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM
101
Outline of the Network TWAIN Scanner

This section outlines the network TWAIN scanner function.
In the TWAIN scanner mode, you can share this machine among multiple computers. Therefore, you don't have to prepare a special computer for scanner or
reconnect the scanner and each computer every time you need to use it.
5
ZZZ514S
1. This Machine
2. Client Computer
Scans an original after receiving a scan

instruction from a client computer, and
then sends the scan file over the network
to the client computer.
Specifies the scanner settings and controls the scanner using an application,
such as DeskTopBinder Lite, that supports the network TWAIN scanner. Receives the files scanned by the machine
and displays them using an application
that supports the network TWAIN scanner.
Note
When using the machine as a network TWAIN scanner, you do not need to
press {Scanner} on the machines control panel. The screen switches automatically when you scan an original from a client computer using the TWAIN
driver.
To use functions other than the network TWAIN scanner, press [Exit].
102
Before Using the Network TWAIN Scanner
Preparing to Use the Network TWAIN Scanner

This section describes the preparations and settings for using the machine as a
network TWAIN scanner.
Important
To use the network TWAIN scanner, an application that supports the scanner, such as DeskTopBinder Lite, must be installed on the computer. DeskTopBinder Lite is on the supplied CD-ROM. For details about installing
DeskTopBinder Lite, see "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied
CD-ROM".

Connect the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable or IEEE 1394 cable, or Wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b).
Specify the machines IPv4 address and subnet mask
In [Effective Protocol], enable [IPv4]
C Install the TWAIN driver on a client computer.

For details about installing the TWAIN driver, see "Installing the TWAIN
Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM".
Note
To connect the machine to network using an IEEE 1394 cable or wireless
LAN (IEEE 802.11b), an extended 1394 board or extended wireless LAN
board is required respectively. For details, see Network Guide.
For details about [System Settings], see General Settings Guide.

Items to set up in [System Settings] vary depending on the network environment. For details about the network settings, see General Settings Guide.
Reference
p.104 Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM
103
Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM

This section explains how to install the TWAIN driver on a client computer from
the supplied "Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities" CD-ROM.
To use the network TWAIN scanner, you must install the TWAIN driver on a client computer.
A Start Windows, and then insert the CD-ROM labeled "Scanner/PostScript

Drivers and Utilities" into the CD-ROM drive of the client computer.
The installer is automatically started and the [Scanner/PostScript Drivers and
Utilities] dialog box appears.
B Click [TWAIN Driver].

C The installer of the TWAIN Driver starts. Follow the instructions.
Note
Before you start the installation, check the system requirements for the
TWAIN driver. For details about the system requirements, see "Software
Supplied on CD-ROM".
You can install the software using the auto-run program. For details about
the auto-run program, see "Quick Install".
If the installer does not start automatically, see "Quick Install".
When the installation is complete, a message about restarting the client
computer may appear. In this case, restart the client computer.
After the installation is complete, a folder with the name of the machine in
use is added in [Program] on the [Start] menu. Help can be displayed from
here.
Notes on using the network TWAIN scanner are provided in "Readme.txt".
Be sure to read them before use.
Reference
p.151 Software Supplied on CD-ROM
p.151 Quick Install
104
Basic Network TWAIN Scanner Operation
Basic Network TWAIN Scanner Operation

This section describes the basic operation for scanning with the network TWAIN
scanner.
Important
To use the network TWAIN scanner, a TWAIN-compliant application, such
as DeskTopBinder and the TWAIN driver must be installed on the client computer.
The following procedure uses Windows XP and DeskTopBinder Lite by way of

example.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Program], point to [DeskTopBinder], and then click
[DeskTopBinder].
B On the [Tools] menu, click [Scanner Settings...].

C Click [Select Scanner Driver...].
D Select the name of the machine you want to use in the list, and then click
[Select...].
E Click [OK].
F Place originals.
G On the [File] menu, point to [Add Document], and then click [Scan...] to display
the Scanner Control dialog box.

A dialog box that is used to control a scanner using the TWAIN driver is referred to as the Scanner Control dialog box.
H Make settings according to such factors as the type of original, type of scanning, and orientation of the original.
For details, see the TWAIN driver Help.
I In the Scanner Control dialog box, click [Scan...].

Depending on the security setting, if you press [Scan...], a dialog box for entering the user name and password may appear.
If there are more originals to be scanned, place the next original, and then
click [Scan...].
If there are no more originals to be scanned, click [Complete].
J On the [File] menu, click [Exit].

K Enter the file name, and then click [OK].
The DeskTopBinder viewer closes and the image is stored in DeskTopBinder
Lite.
105
Note
If you have already selected a scanner, you do not need to select the scanner unless you want to change it.
Using DeskTopBinder, you can edit and print scan files. For more information about DeskTopBinder, see DeskTopBinder manuals.
The model name of the connected scanner appears in the title bar of the
Scanner Control dialog box. If there is more than one scanner of the same
model on the network, make sure you have selected the correct scanner. If
you have not, click [Select Scanner Driver...], and then select the scanner
again. If the correct scanner does not appear in the list, check that the scanner is correctly connected to the network and that its IPv4 address has been
specified. If the correct scanner still does not appear, consult the network
administrator.
106
6. Various Scan Settings

This section describes various scan settings.
Scan Settings
This section explains how to make Scan settings.
B Specify resolution, scan size, and other settings, as required.
C Press [OK].
107
Items for Specifying Scan Settings

This section describes the items for Scan Settings.
Scan Type
Select a scan type that is appropriate for your original.
[Black & White: Text]

Appropriate to increase OCR readability using an OCR-compliant application.
[Dropout Color]
You can select not to scan the following colors: [Chromatic Color], [Red],
[Green], and [Blue]. When you select a color to leave out of the scan, specify
its level of coverage. There are five levels. Press [Narrow] to leave out colors
that are closest to the specified color. Press [Wide] to broaden the coverage
of the specified color and not scan those colors.
[B & W: Text / Line Art]
Standard black and white originals containing mainly characters. Creates
scanned images suitable for printing.
[B & W: Text / Photo]

Originals containing a mixture of photographs, pictures and characters (twovalue). Creates scanned images suitable for printing.
[Black & White: Photo]
Originals containing photographs and other pictures (two-value). Creates
scanned images suitable for printing.
[Gray Scale]
Originals containing photographs and other pictures (multi-value). Creates
scanned images suitable for displaying on a computer screen.
[Full Color: Text / Photo]
Originals for color printing mainly consisting of characters.
[Full Color: Glossy Photo]
Originals of silver salt photographs and other color pictures.
[Auto Color Select]
Scans originals by automatically judging the colors of the originals.
Note
[Dropout Color] can be set when [Black & White: Text] is selected for [Scan Type].
108
If [Auto Color Select] is selected, the machine may fail to correctly judge colors
depending on the scanning condition or the contents of originals.
IF [High Compression PDF] is selected as the file type, you can select only [Gray
Scale], [Full Color: Text / Photo], or [Full Color: Glossy Photo] for Scan Type.
Resolution
Select resolution for scanning originals.
Select [100 dpi], [200 dpi], [300 dpi], [400 dpi], or [600 dpi] as the scanning resolution.
Note
If [High Compression PDF] is selected as the file type, you cannot select [100 dpi]
and [600 dpi]. For details about file types, see "Setting File Type and File
Name".
Reference
Scan Size
Select the size of the original to be scanned.
The following items and sizes can be selected:
[Auto Detect]
Scans original sizes using the automatic size detect function.
[Mixed Sizes]
Scans a batch of originals of the same width by different length by detecting
the length of each.
Template size
11 17L, 81/2 14L, 81/2 13L, 81/2 11K, 81/2 11L, 51/2 81/2K,
51/2 81/2L, A3L, A4K, A4L, A5K, A5L, B4 JISL, B5 JISK, B5 JISL
[Custom Size]
Scans in a specified size.
You can specify the dimensions (width and height) of the scan area in inch.
Note
You can specify original sizes of 5.5 inch or larger in [Custom Size].
When scanning originals of the same width but different length at the same
time, place them correctly by referring to the chart below.
AMW012S
109
Relationship of original of mixed sizes and scan size

This section explains differences you need to be aware of when scanning originals of the same width but different length (such as 11" 17" & 11" 8 1/2") using the original position setting and size.
If you select [Mixed Sizes], the machine detects the length of same width originals and scans them.
You can place combinations of the following original sizes:
11" 17"L & 81/2" 11"K, 81/2" 11"L & 51/2" 81/2"K, A3L & A4K.
If a template size is selected, the machine scans originals at the selected size
regardless of the actual size of originals. If an original is smaller than the selected size, the machine applies margins to the scan area.
If [Auto Detect] is selected for scanning originals from the exposure glass, the
machine detects the size of individual originals and scans accordingly.
If only [Auto Detect] is selected for scanning originals from the ADF, the machine detects the size of the largest original and scans all the other originals
based on that size.
Setting procedure of custom size when scanning an entire original
This section explains how to set a custom size for scanning an entire original.
To scan the entire area of an original, measure its dimensions on the surface of
the original, and enter them under Original Size (X1 and Y1) and Scan Area (X3
and Y3).
The example below explains scanning an original of the following size.
ARE012S
You do not need to specify a Start Position (X2 and Y2). Specify it as 0 inch.
For Scan Size, enter the same value as Original Size.

B Press [Scan Size].
110
D Specify Original Size (X1 and Y1) using the number keys, and then press
{q}.
For example, set X1 to 17.0 inch and Y1 to 8.0 inch.
E Set Start Position (X2 and Y2) to 0 inch, and then press {q}.
For example, set X2 and Y2 to 0 inch, and press {q}.
F Specify Scan Area (X3 and Y3) using the number keys, and then press {q}.
G Press [OK].
H Check Scan Area (X3 and Y3) displayed above [Custom Size], and then press
[OK].
111
Note
You can specify original sizes (X1 and Y1) of 5.5 inch or larger.
To scan an original that is smaller than 5.5 inch, make settings as though
you were scanning a section of an original that is larger than 5.5 inch. For
example, to scan a CD label on the exposure glass, specify a size according
to the chart below. For details about scanning procedures, see Setting procedure of custom size when scanning part of an original.
ARE013S
Reference
p.113 Setting procedure of custom size when scanning part of an original
112
Setting procedure of custom size when scanning part of an original

This section explains how to set a custom size for scanning an area within an
original.
To scan a section of an original, measure Original Size (X1 and Y1), Start Position
(X2 and Y2), and Scan Area (X3 and Y3) on the surface of the original, and then
enter those values in the same order. Measuring methods differ depending on
the originals orientation and the position it is set in. Examples 1 to 3 below show
how to measure the size in order to scan the section marked R. Refer to the following examples to measure each size correctly.
Example 1
Original is placed in the
orientation on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
ARE014S
Example 2
orientation on the exposure glass.
ARE015S
113
Example 3
orientation in the ADF
ARE016S
Examples 1 and 2 (above) explain the procedure for scanning the "R" area of the
original.

B Press [Scan Size].
D Specify Original Size (X1 and Y1) using the number keys, and then press {q}.
114
E Specify Start Position (X2 and Y2) using the number keys, and then press
{q}.
F Specify Scan Area (X3 and Y3) using the number keys, and then press {q}.
For example, set X3 and Y3 to 3.0 inch.
G Press [OK].
H Check Scan Area (X3 and Y3) displayed above [Custom Size], and then press
[OK].
6
Note
To scan an original that is smaller than 5.5 inch, make settings as though
you were scanning a section of an original that is larger than 5.5 inch.
115
How to set originals to scan them by custom size

This section explains how to place originals you want to scan at Custom size.
Original orientation setting

Under [Original Orientation], select [ ] or [ ] according to the orientation of
your original. To display [Original Orientation], on the initial scanner screen,
press [Original Feed Type]. For details, see "Setting of Original Feed Type".
Placing an original
Place originals face up in the ADF; face down on the exposure glass.
Original Orientation is [
Placing an original in the ADF
ALQ017S
Placing an original on the exposure glass

Align the original, turn it rightward or leftward, and then place it face down on the exposure glass.
ALQ018S
Original Orientation is [
Placing an original in the ADF
ALQ019S
Placing an original on the exposure glass

Turn the original over, place it face down on
the exposure glass, and then align it with the
top left corner of the exposure glass.
ALQ020S
Reference
116
Edit
Make editing settings.
[Erase Border]
Deletes the borders of the scanned original according to the specified width.
If you select [Same Width], you can specify, in inch, a uniform width for deletion all around the original (top, bottom, left, and right sides). If you select
[Different Width], you can specify in inch a different width for deletion for each
side.
117
Adjusting Image Density

This section explains how to adjust image density.
To adjust image density, press [W] or [V], at the left and right of [Auto Density].
These buttons increase or decrease the image density in single increments up to 7.
Selecting [Auto Density] corrects scanning density to improve resolution of paper
types such as non-white paper like newspaper or transparent originals. To adjust image density when [Auto Density] is selected, under [Scanner Features], select
[Background Density of ADS (Full Color)]. For details, see General Settings Guide.
Note
If you select [Black & White: Text], [B & W: Text / Line Art], or [B & W: Text / Photo]
for [Scan Type] under [Scan Settings], [Auto Density] is automatically selected.
118
Setting of Original Feed Type

This section explains Original Feed Type settings such as orientation and scan
sides of originals.
This section explains how to correctly display the top/bottom orientation of
scanned originals on a client computer screen.
A Press [Original Feed Type].

B Press [ ] or [ ] to select the same orientation as that of original.
6
C Press [OK].
Placing Originals
To correctly display the top/bottom orientation of the scanned original on a client computer, the placement of the original and the settings made on the control
panel must match.
Place originals correctly by referring to the following table:
Exposure Glass
Original orientation
Control Panel Key
top edge touches top left corner of exposure

glass
top edge touches rear of exposure glass
119
ADF
Original orientation
Control Panel Key
top edge placed first
top edge touches rear of ADF
Note
Originals are normally rectangular ( ) or horizontally long ( ). However, the
table above uses squares to make original orientation easier to understand.
Even if the actual shape of the original is different, the combination of original
orientation and the orientation specified on the scanner driver does not
change.
When you specify Full Color, Gray Scale, or Auto Color Select for Scan Type,
and single page TIFF/JPEG or multi-page TIFF is selected as the file type, refer to the table below for how to place originals. Originals placed in orientations that are not recommended in the table might appear incorrectly
top/bottom oriented on client computer displays.
Placing an Original on the Exposure

Glass
Placing an Original in the ADF
120
Original Settings
This section explains the settings for the scanning the sides of originals.
One-sided original
This section explains the settings for scanning only one side of originals.

B In [Original Settings], select [1 Sided Original].
6
C Press [OK].
121
Two-sided original
This section explains the settings for scanning both sides of originals.

B In [Original Settings], select [2 Sided Original].
C In [Page Opening Orientation], select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom] according to
the binding orientation of the originals.
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
D If the last page of the last original is blank, in [Last Page], select [1 Side] or [2
Sides].
To skip the last page, select [1 Side].
To scan the last page as blank page, select [2 Sides].
E Press [OK].
Note
If you selected [Divide], the setting made here is applied to the last page of
each batch of divided originals.
122
Stamp
This section explains the procedure for stamping originals that are scanned from
the ADF. The stamp indicates the originals have been scanned.
When scanning a document using ADF, the machine can stamp a circle mark at
the bottom of the original. When scanning a two-sided document, the document
is marked at the bottom of the front page and top of the rear page.
This function is very useful when you want to distinguish scanned originals.
Important
To enable stamping, you must install the stamp cartridge.

B Press [Stamp].
C Press [OK].
Note
Last pages are stamped even if you selected not to scan the last page.
Stamping may continue if scanning is interrupted, depending on the cause

of interruption.
Replace the stamp cartridge when Stamp begins to fade. For details, see
Troubleshooting.
123
Batch, SADF
This section explains settings for scanning multiple originals in several batches.
To scan the originals as a single file, select [Batch].
To have the ADF scan the originals individually, select [SADF].
If you select [Batch], scanning starts as soon as you place the additional originals and press {Start}. When all the originals have been scanned, press {q}.
If you select [Batch], regardless of the default settings, the machine waits until
additional originals are placed.
If [SADF] is selected, scanning starts as soon as you place additional originals
in the ADF. Select which operation the machine performs while waiting for
additional originals in [Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF] under [Scanner Features]. For details about [Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF], see General Settings Guide "Scan Settings".

B Select [Batch] or [SADF].
C Press [OK].
Note
If [SADF] is selected, scanning starts as soon as you place additional originals in the ADF. However, in the following cases you must press {Start} to
start scanning additional originals.
After scanning additional originals using the exposure glass

After changing settings while waiting for additional originals
After opening/closing the ADF
Reference
p.126 Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File
124
Divide
This section explains settings for dividing multiple originals by a specified number of pages and then sending them.

B Press [Divide].
C Press [Change], and then use the number keys to enter the number of pages
you want to divide the job into sets of.
D Press {q}.
E If necessary, press [Division Check].
When you select [Division Check], if the originals were not scanned in order
due to a paper jam or multi-sheet feed, a screen for stopping or continuing
scanning appears at the end of the scan.
F Press [OK] twice.

The current settings are displayed.
Note
If the last page of a batch of divided originals is blank, you can skip that
page. To skip scanning, in [Last Page] under [2 Sided Original], select [1 Side].
To scan the last page as a blank page, select [2 Sides]. For details, see "Twosided original".
Reference
p.122 Two-sided original
125
Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as

One File
This section explains the procedure for sending multiple originals as a multipage file or storing them as a single stored file.
Important
To send multiple originals as a multi-page file, in [File Name / Type], select a
multi-page file type. For details about file types, see "Setting File Type".

B Select [Batch] or [SADF].
To scan originals using the exposure glass, select [Batch]. To scan originals using
the ADF, select [SADF]. For detail about [Batch] and [SADF], see "Batch, SADF".
C Press [OK].
D Place originals.
E Make settings for sending by e-mail or Scan to Folder, delivering, or storing.
F Press {Start} to scan originals.
If [Batch] is selected, place additional originals, and then press {Start}.
If [SADF] is selected, scanning starts automatically when you place additional
originals.
Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
G After all originals are scanned, press {q}.

Storing or transmission starts.
126
Note
If [Batch] is selected, originals can be scanned using the ADF.
When scanning originals using the exposure glass, depending on the settings for [Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass] under [Scanner Features], the
machine can wait for additional originals even if [Batch] is not selected in
[Original Feed Type]. For details about [Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass],
see General Settings Guide.
Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File
If, under [Scanner Features], [Set Wait Time] is set for [Wait Time for Next Orig.:
Exposure Glass] or [Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF], place additional originals within the specified time. When the countdown ends, transmission or
storage starts automatically. To start transmission or storage before the
countdown is completed, press {q}. Countdown is canceled if Scan Settings or other settings are changed in the meantime. Place additional originals, and then press {Start}. The machine scans the originals and the
countdown is resumed. For details about [Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure
Glass] and [Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF], see General Settings Guide.
If [SADF] is selected, scanning from the exposure glass is enabled after scanning from the ADF. If this happens, you must press {Start} to start scanning.
Reference
p.124 Batch, SADF
p.128 Setting File Type
127
Setting File Type and File Name

This section explains the procedure for setting file type, file name, and security
for PDF files.
Setting File Type

This section explains the procedure for setting the file type of a file you want to
send. File types can be specified when sending files by e-mail or Scan to Folder,
and sending stored files by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
Important
To deliver files, set the file type using the delivery server computer. For details, see the manuals supplied with the ScanRouter delivery software.
Files are stored in TIFF or JPEG format. If [Store Only] is selected for [Store File],
file type cannot be specified. If [Send & Store] is selected for [Store File], files can
be sent by e-mail or Scan to Folder in a specified format. However, files are
not stored in the specified file type. Specify the file type for stored files when
sending them.
Selectable file types differ depending on scan and other settings. For details, see
"Relationship between File Type Specified for Scanning and File Types for Sending E-mail and Folder".
You can select one of the following file types:
For Single Page
[TIFF / JPEG], [PDF], or [High Compression PDF]
For Multi-page
[TIFF], [PDF], or [High Compression PDF]
A Press [File Name / Type].
128
B Select a file type.
C Press [OK].
Note
Converting a file type into High Compression PDF reduces the file's data
volume without loss of character readability.
High Compression PDF can be selected when sending files by e-mail or

Scan to Folder. It cannot be selected when sending and storing files simultaneously.
Adobe Acrobat Reader/ Adobe Reader 5.0 and later versions support High
Compression PDF.
High Compression PDF files created by this machine cannot be printed using PDF Direct Print function.
High Compression PDF files cannot be displayed correctly using DeskTopBinder Easy Viewer.
High Compression PDF cannot be selected when using capture function.
To select High Compression PDF, make the following Scan Type and Resolution settings:
Scan Type: Full color or Gray Scale
Resolution: 200 dpi, 300 dpi, or 400 dpi
Preview: Not selected
Reference
p.149 Relationship between File Type Specified for Scanning and File
Types for Sending E-mail and Folder
129
Setting File Name

This section explains the procedure for setting a file name.
Scanned file will be given a file name consisting of the time and date of scanning,
4-digit page number, etc.
Single-page and divided multi-page files are assigned file names that contain
the date and time of scanning and a four-digit page number. An underscore
is inserted between the date and time and the four-digit page number.
(Example: For a file scanned in single-page TIFF at 10 ms, 15 sec., 15:30 hours
on Dec. 31, 2020, the file name will be 20201231153015010_0001.tif)
Multi-page files are given file names that contain the time and date of scanning.
(Example: For a file scanned in multi-page TIFF at 10 ms, 15 sec., 15:30 hours
on Dec. 31, 2020, the file name will be 20201231153015010.tif)
If necessary, you can change the file name.
C Enter a file name.

D Press [OK] twice.
130
Changing the starting digit of file name serial numbers

A single-page file is assigned a serial number after the file name. The starting
number of this serial number can be changed as follows:
B Press [Change] to the right of the entry box.
C Using the number keys, enter the starting digit of the serial number.
D Press {q}.
E Press [OK].
Note
You can change the starting digit only if other than [Single Page] is selected
as the file type.
You can change the number of digits in the serial number. Change the number under [Scanner Features], [No. of Digits for Single Page Files]. You can select
4 or 8. For details, see "Send Settings", General Settings Guide.
131
Security Settings to PDF Files

This section explains security settings for PDF files.
Use security settings to prevent unauthorized access to PDF files.
Important
Security settings can be made for PDF and High Compression PDF files only.
Encrypting PDF files

Set a password to protect and encrypt a PDF file . Only users who have the password can open and decrypt the PDF file.
Important
Encryption is possible only for scan files sent by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
You cannot open an encrypted file without a password. Make sure you do not
forget a file's password.
B Check that [PDF] or [High Compression PDF] is selected.

C Press [Security Settings].
D Select [Encryption].
E In [Encrypt Document], select [On].
132
F In [Password], press [Enter].
G Enter a password, and then press [OK].

The password entered here will be required to open the PDF file.
H Enter the password again, and then press [OK].

I In [Encryption Level], select [40 bit] or [128 bit].
J Press [OK] twice.
Note
A document password cannot be the same as the Master password.
You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for a document password.

PDF files created under the [128 bit] Encryption Level cannot be viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 and 4.0.
133
Changing security permissions for PDF files

Set a Master Password to restrict unauthorized printing, changing, copying, or
extracting of a PDF file's content. Only users who have the Master Password can
reset or change these restrictions.
Important
Encryption is possible only for scan files sent by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
You cannot reset or change a file's restriction setting without the Master Password. Make a note of the Master Password in a secure place.
6
B Check that [PDF] or [High Compression PDF] is selected.
C Press [Security Settings].
D Select [Permissions].
E In [Master Password], select [Set].
134
F In [Password], press [Enter].
G Enter a password, and then press [OK].

The password entered here will be required to change the security settings of
the PDF file.
H Enter then password again, and then press [OK].

I Select the security permission setting.
You can specify the following security settings:
Print permission: [Prohibit], [Allow], or [Low Resolution Only]
Editing permission: [Prohibit] or [Allow]
Copying or extracting content permission: [Prohibit] or [Allow]
J Press [OK] twice.

Note
The [Password] and [Master Password] cannot be the same.
You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for a Master Password.

If [40 bit] is selected as the PDF encryption level, you cannot select [Low Resolution Only] as the print permission.
135
Programs
You can register frequently used settings in the machine memory and recall
them for future use.
Note
You can register up to 10 programs for the scanner mode.
Programs are not deleted by turning the power off or by pressing {Clear Modes}
unless the content is deleted or newly registered.
The following settings can be registered to programs: Scan Settings, 1 Sided
/2 Sided Original, Top to Top/Top to Bottom, skip scanning back side of the
last page, Divide, Original Orientation, File Type, Batch / SADF, Stamp, Store
File, Preview, and Reception Notice.
Setting made on the simplified display cannot be registered to a program.
136
Programs
Registering Frequently Used Setting

To register frequently used settings in a program:
A On the initial scanner screen, make the settings you want to register in a
program.
B Press {Program}.
ARE011S
C Press [Program].
D Select the number of the program in which you want to register the settings.
Program numbers with malready have settings in them.
E Enter the program name.

F Press [OK].
The Program screen reappears. When the settings are successfully registered,
m appears on the left side of the registered program number and the program name appears on the right side. The initial screen reappears after a moment.
137
Recalling a Registered Content

To recall settings registered in a program and use them for scanning:
A Press {Program}.
B Press [Recall].
C Press the number of the program you want to recall.

Settings registered in the program are recalled and the initial scanner screen
reappears.
Settings are not registered in numbers that appear without m.
D Place originals, and then press {Start}.
138
Programs
Changing a Registered Program

To change the settings registered to a program:
A Press {Program}.
B Press [Recall].
C Press the number of the program you want to change.
D Change settings of the program.
E Press the number of the program you want to recall.
F Press {Program}.
G Press the number of the program whose settings you changed or the number
of a different program in which you want to register the changed settings.
H If you select a program that is already registered, a confirmation message
appears. To overwrite the program, press [Yes].

If you select a new program number, you can omit this step. Proceed to the
next step.
I Enter a program name.

J Press [OK].
If overwritten, the registered program is deleted.
The new program name appears briefly, and then the initial screen reappears
after a moment.
139
Deleting a Program
To delete a registered program:
A Press {Program}.
B Press [Delete].
C Press the number of the program you want to delete.

D Press [Yes].
The program is deleted, and the initial screen reappears after a moment.
Changing the Registered Program Name

To change the name of a registered program:
A Press {Program}.
B Press [Change Name].
C Press the number of the program whose name you want to change.
D Enter a new program name.
E Press [OK].
The new program name appears briefly, and then the initial screen reappears.
140
Programs
Registering Initial Values for Initial Display

This section explains how to set defaults for the initial screen, which appears
when the machine is turned on or when settings are cleared or reset.
The following settings can be registered as defaults: Scan Settings, 1 Sided /2
Sided Original, Top to Top/Top to Bottom, skip scanning back side of the last
page, Divide, Original Orientation, File Type, Batch / SADF, Stamp, Store File,
Preview, and Reception Notice.
A Make the necessary scan settings on the initial screen.

B Press {Program}.
ARE011S
C Press [Program as Defaults].
D Press {Program}.
E A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].
The current settings are registered as defaults, and then the initial screen reappears.
Note
To restore the initial screen's original default settings, press [Restore Factory
Defaults].
Default settings for the initial screen can be registered for normal screens
and simplified displays respectively.
141
Scan Settings When Using Twain Scanner

This section explains how to specify original orientation and scan setting for a
bundle of mixed size originals when using the TWAIN scanner.
Setting Original Orientation on the TWAIN Scanner

To correctly display the top/bottom orientation of the scanned original on a client computer, the placement of the original and the settings made in the Scanner
Control dialog box must match.
A Open the Scanner Control dialog box.

For details about how to open the Scanner Control dialog box, see "Basic Network TWAIN Scanner Operation".
B In the [Original Scan Method:] list, select the place where the original is placed.
C In the [Orig.Orientn.:] list, select [
] or [
].
D In the [Orientation:] list, select [
/
], [
/
],
], or [
].
E If an original is placed in the ADF, from the drop down menu of [Scan Settings], select [1 Sided], [2 Sided(Top to Top)], or [2 Sided(Top to Bottom)].
Reference
p.105 Basic Network TWAIN Scanner Operation
142
Scan Settings When Using Twain Scanner
Placing Originals
The following table shows the relationship between the original orientation and
the Scanner Properties dialog box settings:
Exposure Glass
TWAIN Scanner Control Dialog Box Key
top edge touches top left of exposure glass

This orientation is the TWAIN driver's standard setting. Place originals in this orientation
normally.
top edge touches rear of exposure glass
6
ADF
TWAIN Scanner Control Dialog Box Key
top edge of original placed first
top edge touches rear of ADF
Note
Originals are normally rectangular ( ) or horizontally long ( ). However, the
table above uses squares to make original orientation easier to understand.
Even if the actual shape of the original is different, the combination of original
orientation and the orientation specified on the scanner driver does not
change.
For details about the Scanner Control dialog box, see the TWAIN driver Help.
Depending on the settings, originals of different sizes are scanned differently.
143
When Scanning Originals of Mixed Sizes Using TWAIN Scanner

This section explains the differences between scanning mixed-size originals using the TWAIN scanner and normal scanning.
If [Auto detect(Mixed-size)] is selected in the [Original Size:] list, the machine detects the length of each same-width original and then scans them.
If [Auto detect(Uni-size)] is selected in the [Original Size:] list, the machine detects
the size of the first original of the batch and scans all subsequent originals at
that size.
144
7. Appendix
The appendix details specifications of the scanner function and explains supplementary settings.
Relationship between Resolution and

Original Size
This section explains the relationship between resolution and original size.
Resolution and original size are inversely related. The higher the resolution (dpi)
is set, the smaller the area that can be scanned. Conversely, the larger the scan
area, the lower the resolution that can be set.
The relationship between the scanning resolution and the original size is shown
below. If the combination is unreadable, "Exceeded max. data capacity. Check
the scanning resolution, then press Start again." appears on the machine's
control panel display. Change the condition until scanning is enabled.
Note
Image compression level can limit Maximum image size.
145
Appendix
When Using E-mail, Folder Sending, Storing or Network Delivery

Function
This section explains the relationship between resolution and scan size when using the e-mail, Scan to Folder, storing, or network delivery scanner function.
If [Black & White: Text], [B & W: Text / Line Art], [B & W: Text / Photo],[Gray Scale],
or [Black & White: Photo] is selected for Scan Type
All combinations up to A3 and 600 dpi can be scanned.
If [Full Color: Text / Photo] or [Full Color: Glossy Photo] is selected as Scan Type
The originals can be scanned using combinations marked with in the table.
100 dpi
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
A7
11 17
Legal (81/2 14)
81/2 13
Letter (81/2 11)
51/2 81/2
Note
Enter B6, A6, and A7 sizes directly.
B6 (5.0 inch 7.1 inch)

A6 (4.1 inch 5.8 inch)
A7 (2.9 inch 4.1 inch)
146
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Relationship between Resolution and Original Size
When Using as a TWAIN Scanner

This section explains the relationship between resolution and scan size when using the machine as a TWAIN scanner.
To specify the scan area or resolution on the machine you are using as a network
TWAIN scanner directly, see the TWAIN driver Help.
If [Binary(Text)], [Binary(Photo)], [Gray Scale], [8 Colors], or [8 Colors(Photo)] is

selected in [Col./ Grad.:]
The originals can be scanned using combinations marked with
in the table
if Original Orientation is L.
100
dpi
200
dpi
300
dpi
400
dpi
500
dpi
600
dpi
700
dpi
800
dpi
900
dpi
1000 1100 1200

dpi dpi dpi
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
A7
11 17
Legal (81/214)
81/2 13
Letter (81/211)
51/2 81/2
147
Appendix
If [16770K colors] is selected in [Col./ Grad.:]

The originals can be scanned using combinations marked with
if Original Orientation is L.
100
dpi
200
dpi
300
dpi
400
dpi
500
dpi
600
dpi
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
A7
11 17
Legal (81/214)
81/2 13
Letter (81/211)
51/2 81/2
Note
Enter A7 sizes (2.9 inch 4.1 inch) directly.
148
700
dpi
800
dpi
900
dpi
in the table
1000 1100 1200

dpi dpi dpi
Relationship between File Type Specified for Scanning and File Types for Sending E-mail and Folder
Relationship between File Type Specified

for Scanning and File Types for Sending
E-mail and Folder
This section explains the relationship between the file type specified for scanning originals and the file type to which files are converted when sent by e-mail
or Scan to Folder.
Single page file type

Scan Setting
TIFF/JPEG specified
PDF or High Compression PDF specified
Black and white
TIFF
PDF
Full color or gray scale
TIFF (uncompressed) / JPEG (compressed)
PDF / High Compression

PDF
Scan Setting
TIFF specified
PDF or High Compression PDF specified
Black and white
TIFF
PDF
Full color or gray scale
TIFF (uncompressed)
PDF / High Compression

PDF
Multi-page file type
Note
If a full color or gray scale original is scanned to a single-page TIFF/JPEG file,
depending on the [Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)] setting under [Scanner
Features] the file type changes as follows:
[On]...JPEG
[Off]...TIFF
When you set [Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)] to [On] under [Scanner Features], if you specify full color, gray scale or [Auto Color Select] in [Scan Type]
under [Scan Settings], you cannot select multi-page TIFF as the file type.
You cannot specify High Compression PDF if [Scan Type] is set to [Black &
White: Text], [B & W: Text / Line Art], [B & W: Text / Photo], or [Black & White: Photo].
Files are stored in single-page format. When sending files by e-mail or Scan
to Folder, you can select single-page or multi-page format.
JPEG format files cannot be sent as a multi-page TIFF file even if you specify
to send it as a multi-page TIFF. The file is sent in a default format other than
multi-page TIFF.
149
Appendix
When you specify Full Color, Gray Scale, or Auto Color Select for Scan Type,
and single page TIFF/JPEG or multi-page TIFF is selected as the file type, refer to the table below for how to place originals. Originals placed in orientations that are not recommended in the table might appear incorrectly
top/bottom oriented on client computer displays.
Placing an Original on the Exposure
Glass
Placing an Original in the ADF
150
Software Supplied on CD-ROM

This section explains the applications on the supplied CD-ROM.
Quick Install
This section explains the auto-run program.
When the CD-ROM is inserted into a client computer running Windows
95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, the installer
starts up automatically (auto run) to install various software.
Note
For installation under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, log on as an Administrators group member.
If plug and play function is in operation, [New Hardware Found] will be displayed when starting Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server 2003. When
starting Windows NT 4.0, [Found New Hardware Wizard] will be displayed.
When starting Windows 95/98/Me, [New Hardware] or [Device Driver Wizard]
will be displayed depending on the system version. If this screen appears,
click [Cancel], insert the CD-ROM attached to this machine into the CD-ROM
drive of the client computer, and then install by auto-run.
Quick Install may not automatically work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, start "Setup.exe" on the CD-ROM root directory.
To disable auto-run, set CD-ROM while pressing Shift key. Keep the Shift
key pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.
If [Cancel] is pressed during installation, the installation of all the software
thereafter will be stopped. If cancelled, reinstall the remaining software after
restarting the client computer.
TWAIN Driver
This section tells you the file path to the TWAIN driver and the TWAIN driver's
system requirements.
You must install this driver if you want to scan originals or use the machine as a
network TWAIN scanner.
File path
The TWAIN driver is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM:
\DRIVERS\TWAIN
System requirements
Computer hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the operating system properly
This driver cannot be used in RISC-based processor (MIPS R series, Alpha
AXP, or PowerPC) Windows NT environments.
151
Appendix
Operating system
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
Display resolution
800 600 pixels, 256 colors or higher
DeskTopBinder Lite
This section tells you the file path to DeskTopBinder Lite, the DeskTopBinder
Lite system requirements, and the applications that are installed with DeskTopBinder Lite.
DeskTopBinder is installed on the client computers to integrate and manage various kinds of files such as scan files, files created with applications, and existing
scan files. This software allows you to use various functions for stored scan files
such as viewing stored files. Also, with the ScanRouter delivery software, you
can view the files stored in in-trays of the delivery server or use other functions
for stored files. For details about DeskTopBinder Lite, see DeskTopBinder Lite
manuals or DeskTopBinder Lite Help.
File path
DeskTopBinder Lite is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM provided with this machine:
\UTILITY\DESKV2
System requirements
Computer hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the following operating system
properly
Operating system
When installing all functions of DeskTopBinder Microsoft Windows
98SE/Me/2000 Professional SP1 or later/2000 Server SP1 or later/ 2000
Advanced Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP Home Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition
When installing only SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Microsoft Windows 95 SP1/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional SP1 or later/2000 Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Display resolution
800 600 pixels, 64K colors or higher
152
Software installed with DeskTopBinder Lite

Auto Document Link
Auto Document Link on the client computer monitors in-trays of the delivery server periodically, retrieves files delivered to in-trays, and notifies the
user of delivery.
RFWriter
Instead of printing files created with an application, the RFWriter converts
those files into TIFF or BMP image files and registers them in a work folder
of the DeskTopBinder. For details, see DeskTopBinder Help.
Function Palette
Function Palette allows you to use DeskTopBinder functions such as Scan
using TWAIN scanner, Print or Send by Fax without starting DeskTopBinder. To use these functions from Function Palette, you must first configure them using DeskTopBinder Extended Features. For details about
Function Palette, see DeskTopBinder manuals.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client provides functions for continuous device
status monitoring on the network via TCP/IP or IPX/SPX.
153
Appendix
Values of Various Set Items for

Transmission/Storage/Delivery Function
This section explains the values of various transmission/storage/delivery function settings.
Note
Depending on the type or settings of the file or original, you may not be able
to specify the destination or enter the maximum number of characters stated
below.
Transmission Function
This section explains the values of transmission function settings.
Sending E-mail
The following table tells you the maximum values of the e-mail sending function
settings.
Item
Maximum value
Comments
Number of subject line characters
128 alphanumeric characters
Number of e-mail message

characters
This is the total number of characters selected from the list and
the number of characters entered directly from text.
Number of e-mail address char- 128 alphanumeric characacters

ters
E-mail addresses found via

LDAP server search cannot be
selected if they contain more
than 128 characters.
Number of addresses you can

specify at the same time
500 addresses
You can specify 100 destinations by direct entry, including

LDAP search. Select the remaining 400 destinations from registered addresses.
Sendable file size
725.3 MB per file
Sendable number of pages
1000 pages per file
154
Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/Storage/Delivery Function
Folder transmission
The following table tells you the maximum values of the Scan to Folder function
settings.
Item
Maximum value
Comments
Number of path name characters on SMB
Number of user name characters on SMB
Number of password characters on SMB
Number of server name charac- 64 alphanumeric characters on FTP

ters
Number of path name characters on FTP
Number of user name characters on FTP
Number of password characters on FTP
Number of path name characters on NCP
Number of user name characters on NCP
Number of password characters on NCP

50 addresses
Sendable file size
2000 MB per file
You can specify a maximum of

50 directly entered destinations.
-
Simultaneous Transmission
The following table tells you the maximum values of settings for using the Email and Scan to Folder functions simultaneously.
Item
Maximum value
Comments
Number of destinations you can 550 addresses

select for E-mail and Scan to
Folder

select for sending by e-mail
You can specify a maximum of

100 directly entered destinations, including LDAP searchretrieved destinations.

set for sending by Scan to Folder
155
Appendix
Storage Function
The following table tells you the maximum values of the storage function settings.
Item
Maximum value
Comments
Number of file name characters 64 alphanumeric characters
On the control panel, the first 16

characters are displayed. When
viewing the stored files from a
client computer using DeskTopBinder, all the entered characters can be viewed.
Number of user name characters
On the control panel, the first 16

characters are displayed. When
viewing the stored files from a
client computer using DeskTopBinder, all the entered characters can be viewed.
Number of password characters
4-8 digit number
Number of stored files you can

select at the same time
30 files
Storable number of files
2000 files
This is the total number of files

stored under the scanner, copier, document server, and printer functions.
Storable number of pages
9000 pages
This is the total number of files

stored under the scanner, copier, document server, and printer functions.
Storable number of pages per

file
1,000 pages
Storable size
2,000 MB per file
156
Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/Storage/Delivery Function
Network Delivery Function

The following table tells you the values of setting items for the network delivery
scanner function.
Item
Maximum value
Comments
Number of subject line characters
This is the total number of characters selected from the list and
the number of characters entered directly from text.
Number of e-mail address char- 128 alphanumeric characacters

ters
500 addresses
You can specify 65 destinations

by direct entry, including
LDAP search. Select the remaining 435 destinations from registered addresses.
The maximum number of destinations you can specify differs
depending on which ScanRouter delivery application you are
using. For details, see the manuals supplied with the ScanRouter delivery application.
Sendable file size
2,000 MB per file
157
Appendix
Specifications
The following table tells you the specifications of the scanner.
Scan method
Flatbed scanning
Scan speed
When using the E-mail/Scan to Folder/Network Delivery Scanner function:

Black and white: 63 page/min
(Original size: A4K, Scan Type: Text , Resolution: 200 dpi, Compression (Black & White):
On, ITU-T No1 Chart, 1-side scanning)
When using the E-mail/Scan to Folder/Network Delivery Scanner function:
Full Color: 38 page/min
(Original size: A4K, Scan Type: Text / Line
Art, Resolution: 200 dpi, Compression (Gray
Scale/Full Color): Compression Level 3,
Original Chart, 1-side scanning)
Scanning speed differs depending on the following; operating environment of the machine
and computer, scan settings, and the content of
originals (denser images require more time).
Image sensor type
CCD Image Sensor
Scan type
Sheet, book
Interface
Ethernet interface (10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX),

IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394) (optional), IEEE
802.11b (wireless LAN) (optional)
Original sizes that can be scanned
Length (51/2" 11") width (51/2" 17")
Scan sizes automatically detectable from the

exposure glass
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"K, 81/2" 11"L
Scan sizes automatically detectable from the

ADF
A3L, A4K, A4L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,

81/2" 11"K, 81/2" 11"L, 51/2" 81/2"K,
51/2" 81/2"L, 10" 14"L, 71/4" 101/2"L,
Basic scanning resolution
600 dpi (24-bit full color)
Selectable scanning resolutions when using

the E-mail/Scan to Folder/Network delivery
scanner function
100 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi
Selectable scanning resolution when using

TWAIN scanner
100 dpi to 1200 dpi
Sendable file formats
TIFF, JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF
Image compression type for black and white

(two-value)
TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)
Image compression type for gray scale/full color JPEG
158
Network protocol
IPv4, IPX
Protocol for sending e-mail
SMTP, POP3
Protocol for Scan to Folder
SMB, FTP, NCP
INDEX
E-mail address, 12
E-mail destination, 18
Address Book, 18
Destination list, 18
registration numbers, 19
E-mail message, 32
E-mail screen, 13, 17
Entering an e-mail address, 22
Entering registration numbers, 92
Entering the path, 50
Erase border, 117
Ethernet, 12, 40, 103
Exposure glass, 116, 119, 142
A
Address Book, 12, 41, 48
ADF, 116, 119, 142
Adjusting image density, 118
Advanced search, 20, 23, 29, 48
Auto Color Select, 108
Auto density, 118
Auto-run program, 151
B
Batch, 124
Bindery, 55, 57
Black & White, 108
C
CD-ROM, 151
Change, 77, 78
Changing a password, 81
Changing a user name, 78
Checking a stored file selected
from the list, 72
Check modes, 13
Confirmation displays, 5
check modes, 5
Preview, 6
transmission file status, 7
CSV file, 12, 41
Custom size, 109, 110, 113, 116
File information, 66, 67, 68

File name, 66, 67, 80, 128
File type, 128
Folder sending, 146
FTP, 38
FTP server, 53
Full Color, 108
Functions, 2
G
General settings, 9
Gray Scale, 108
D
Delete, 77
Deleting a stored file, 77
Delivery server, 83, 91
DeskTopBinder Lite, 74, 83, 85, 152
Destination list, 18, 47
Display
confirmation displays, 5
Display panel, 3
Divide, 125
Dropout Color, 108
E
Edit, 117
Effective Protocol, 40
E-mail, 146
High Compression PDF, 108, 109, 128
I
IEEE1394, 12, 40, 103
Initial settings, 9
Install, 85, 104
I/O device, 83
J
JPEG, 149
L
LDAP, 11
LDAP server, 23
Line Art, 108
List of stored files, 69, 75
159
M
Managing stored files, 77, 78, 80, 81
Manual entry, 22, 33, 50
Mixed sizes, 110, 144
Multi-pages, 149
N
NCP, 55, 57
NDS, 55, 57
NetWare, 39, 55, 57
Network delivery, 146
O
One sided original, 121
Operation for delivering files, 87
Original feed type, 119, 121
Original settings, 121
P
Password, 66, 68, 81
PDF, 128, 149
changing security permissions, 134
encrypting, 132
Photo, 108
Placing an original, 116
Preparation, 84
sending by e-mail, 12
Program as Defaults, 141
Programs, 136, 141
changing registered program, 139
changing the name, 140
deleting, 140
recalling, 138
registering, 137
Q
Quick install, 151
R
Registering a destination, 26
Registering in the address book, 26
Registering the path, 59
Registration numbers, 19, 28, 47, 92, 96
Resolution, 109
Resolution and file size, 145, 147
Restore Factory Defaults, 141
Result of sending, 7
Return receipt, 87
160
S
SADF, 124
Scanner Features, 9
Scanning multiple pages, 126
ScanRouter delivery software, 83
Scan settings, 9, 107
Scan size, 109
Scan to Folder, 37, 43
Scan Type, 108, 146
Screen, 69, 86
Scan to Folder, 42
Search by comment, 93
Searching by file name, 71, 80
Searching by user name, 70, 97
Searching the delivery servers
destination list, 93
Searching the list of stored files, 70
Searching the machines address book, 20
Security settings, 132
Selecting a destination, 23, 91, 93
machines address book, 46
Selecting a sender, 27
Sender, 27, 28, 29, 95
Sender name, 27, 28, 29, 95, 96, 97
Sending by Scan to Folder, 40
Sending files
FTP, 53
shared network folder, 50
Sending scan files, 37
Sending scan files by e-mail, 11, 14
Sending the URL by e-mail, 35
Send Settings, 9
Serial number, 131
Setting file name, 130
Setting file type, 128
Simultaneous storage and delivery, 100
Simultaneous storage and sending
by e-mail, 34
Simultaneous storage and sending
by Scan to Folder, 60
Single page, 149
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, 12, 41
SMB, 37, 52
SMTP, 11
Specifications, 158
Specifying destinations, 46
Specifying the message, 32
Specifying the path, 52
Specifying the sender, 27, 95
Specifying the subject, 31
Stamp, 123
Storage, 34, 60, 100
Store only, 64
Storing, 62, 146

Storing scan files, 34, 60, 64, 100
Subject, 99
Subject/Text, 31, 32, 33
Switching screen, 17
network delivery scanner screen, 90
Scan to Folder, 45
Symbol, 1
T
Template size, 109
Text, 108
TIFF, 149
TIFF/JPEG, 128
Transmission function
folder transmission, 155
sending e-mail, 154
simultaneous transmission, 155
TWAIN Driver, 104, 105, 151
TWAIN scanner, 101, 102, 105, 142, 144, 147
setting original orientation, 142
Two sided original, 122
U
User name, 66, 78
User Tools / Counter, 9
V
Values of various set items, 154
network delivery function, 157
storage function, 156
transmission function, 154
W
Web Image Monitor, 12, 41, 62, 74
Wireless LAN, 12, 40, 103
161
162
EN
USA
B224-7700
Note:
Avertissement:
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Printer/Scanner Controller + Copy Machine
Model Number:
C4540g/DSc545g/Aficio MP C4500G
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Copyright 2006
Operating Instructions Scanner Reference
EN USA B224-7700
Network Guide
Using a Printer Server
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Special Operations under Windows
Appendix
Introduction
Important
Software Version Conventions Used in This Manual
NetWare 3.x means NetWare 3.12 and 3.2.

NetWare 4.x means NetWare 4.1, 4.11, 4.2 and IntranetWare.
Trademarks
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Macintosh, Mac OS , and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer,
Inc, registered in the United States and other countries.
BonjourTM is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc.
Netscape and Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation.
Novell, NetWare, NDS and NDPS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
Citrix and MetaFrame are registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.
UPnP is a trademark of the UPnP Implementers Corporation.
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Web Edition
RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm
Copyright 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing this software
or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified
as derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided as is without express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.

About This Machine

Trouble Shooting
paper, toner or print cartridge, and other consumables.
Security Reference
Copy Reference
Explains Copier functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
Facsimile Reference
Printer Reference
Scanner Reference
i
Network Guide
Other manuals
Safety Information
PostScript 3 Supplement
UNIX Supplement
Note

ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Setting Up the Machine on a Network..................................................................2
Initial Settings Overview.............................................................................................2
Initial Settings.............................................................................................................5
1. Using a Printer Server

Preparing Printer Server .....................................................................................23
Printing notification via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ............................................24
Using NetWare .....................................................................................................25
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x) .............................................................26
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5) .....................................27
Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5 / 5.1 or 6 / 6.5 Environment................................... 28
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 3.x) ........................................................30
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5) ................................ 32
2. Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Using Web Image Monitor...................................................................................35
Displaying Top Page ................................................................................................37
When user authentication is set ...............................................................................38
About Menu and Mode.............................................................................................39
Access in the Administrator Mode............................................................................41
Displaying Web Image Monitor Help........................................................................41
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ...............................................................42
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin .................................................................43
Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration.............................................. 43
Locking the Menus on the Machine's Control Panel ................................................44
Changing the Paper Type ........................................................................................ 45
Managing User Information......................................................................................45
Configuring the Energy Saver Mode ........................................................................48
Setting a Password ..................................................................................................48
Checking the Machine Status ..................................................................................49
Changing Names and Comments ............................................................................49
Load Fax Journal .....................................................................................................50
Viewing and Deleting Spool Print Jobs ....................................................................51
Managing Address Information ................................................................................51
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ................................................................52
Monitoring Printers ...................................................................................................52
Checking the Machine Status ..................................................................................52
When Using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .............................................. 53
Printer Status Notification by E-Mail..................................................................54
Auto E-mail Notification............................................................................................55
On-demand E-mail Notification ................................................................................56
Mail authentication ...................................................................................................56
On-demand E-mail Notification ................................................................................57
iii
Remote Maintenance by telnet ...........................................................................59

Using telnet ..............................................................................................................59
access ......................................................................................................................60
appletalk...................................................................................................................61
authfree .................................................................................................................... 61
autonet .....................................................................................................................61
bonjour(rendezvous) ................................................................................................62
btconfig.....................................................................................................................63
devicename..............................................................................................................63
dhcp .........................................................................................................................64
diprint ....................................................................................................................... 65
dns ...........................................................................................................................65
domainname ............................................................................................................67
help ..........................................................................................................................67
hostname .................................................................................................................67
ifconfig......................................................................................................................68
info ...........................................................................................................................69
ipp ............................................................................................................................69
ipv6........................................................................................................................... 70
lpr .............................................................................................................................70
netware .................................................................................................................... 70
passwd .....................................................................................................................71
prnlog ....................................................................................................................... 71
route .........................................................................................................................71
set ............................................................................................................................72
show.........................................................................................................................74
slp.............................................................................................................................74
smb ..........................................................................................................................74
snmp ........................................................................................................................75
sntp ..........................................................................................................................77
spoolsw .................................................................................................................... 78
sprint ........................................................................................................................78
ssdp..........................................................................................................................78
ssh............................................................................................................................79
status........................................................................................................................79
syslog ....................................................................................................................... 79
upnp .........................................................................................................................79
web...........................................................................................................................80
wiconfig .................................................................................................................... 81
wins ..........................................................................................................................84
SNMP.....................................................................................................................85
Getting Printer Information over the Network...................................................86
Current Printer Status ..............................................................................................86
Printer configuration .................................................................................................95
Understanding the Displayed Information ........................................................96
Print Job Information ................................................................................................96
Print Log Information................................................................................................97
Configuring the Network Interface Board .................................................................98
Message List ......................................................................................................105
System Log Information ......................................................................................... 105
iv
3. Special Operations under Windows

Printing Files Directly from Windows ..............................................................113
Setup......................................................................................................................113
Using a Host Name Instead of an IPv4 Address....................................................113
Printing Commands................................................................................................115
4. Appendix
When Using Windows Terminal Service / MetaFrame.................................... 117
Operating Environment ..........................................................................................117
Supported Printer Drivers.......................................................................................117
Limitations ..............................................................................................................117
Using DHCP........................................................................................................119
Using AutoNet ........................................................................................................120
Precautions ........................................................................................................121
Connecting a Dial-Up Router to a Network ............................................................121
NetWare Printing.................................................................................................... 123
When the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit Is Installed ...................................123
Information about Installed Applications ........................................................125
RSA BSAFE .........................................................................................................125
Specifications.....................................................................................................126
INDEX....................................................................................................... 128
v
vi

Symbols
[]
{}
1
Setting Up the Machine on a Network

This section describes the network settings you can change with User Tools (System Settings). Make settings according to functions you want to use and the interface to be connected.
Important
These settings should be made by the systems administrator, or after consulting with the systems administrator.
Initial Settings Overview

Interface Settings
Menu
Description
Specifies the machine IPv4 address and subnet mask in the network environment.
Configure the gateway address for the router or host computer used as a gateway.
Specifies the machine IPv6 address and subnet mask in the network environment.
Configure the gateway address for the router

or host computer used as a gateway.
Specifies the automatic configuration of the

IPv6 Stateless Address.
DNS Configuration
Make settings for the DNS server.
DDNS Configuration
Specifies the DDNS settings.
Domain Name
Specifies the domain name.
WINS Configuration
Specifies the WINS server settings.
Effective Protocol
Select the protocol to use in the network.
Select the protocol for NCP delivery:
NW Frame Type
Select the frame type when you use NetWare.
LAN Type
Select interface, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)

or Ethernet when you have installed the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit.
Ethernet Speed
Set the access speed for networks.
Ping Command
Check the network connection with ping

command using given IP address.
SMB Computer Name
Specifies the SMB computer name.
SMB Work Group
Specifies the SMB work group.
Set the encrypted communication of SNMP v3.
Set the encrypted communication of

SSL/TLS.
Host Name
2
Machine Name
Specify the machine name.
IPv4 over 1394
Specifies when you use the function of the

IEEE 1394 interface to connect the machine to
the network, or you print from computer
with the IP over 1394 driver.
SCSI print (SBP-2)
Specifies when you print using the SCSI

print client function supported by Windows
2000/XP, or Windows Server 2003.
Specifies the printer's response mode etc. for

status requests when using the IEEE 1394 interface.
Communication Mode
Specifies the communication mode of the

wireless LAN.
SSID Setting
Specifies SSID to distinguish the access point

in infrastructure mode or 802.11 ad hoc mode.
Channel
Specifies a channel when you select 802.11b

ad hoc mode or ad hoc mode.
WEP (Encryption) Key
Specifies the encryption of the IEEE 802.11b

(wirelessLAN).
Transmission Speed
Specifies the communication speed of the

IEEE 802.11b (wirelessLAN).
Restore Factory Defaults
Return the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) settings to their defaults.
3
File Transfer Settings

Menu
Description
SMTP Server
Specifies the SMTP server name.
SMTP Authentication
Configures SMTP authentication (PLAIN,

LOGIN, CRAM-MD5, DIGEST-MD5
POP before SMTP
Configures POP authentication (POP before

SMTP).
Reception Protocol
Specifies Reception Protocol for receiving

Internet faxes.
Specify the POP3 or IMAP4 server name for

receiving Internet faxes.
This appears as the senders address on emailed scanned documents, if the sender is
not specified .
Specifies the [POP3], [IMAP4], and [SMTP]

port numbers for receiving Internet faxes.
Specify, in minutes, the time limit for receiving Internet faxes via POP3 or IMAP4 server.
Specifies the [Max. Reception E-mail Size] for

Specifies whether or not to store received Internet fax e-mails on the POP3 or IMAP4 server.
Specify the user name and password required when sending scan file directly to a
shared folder on a computer running Windows, or to an FTP server.
Specifies the user name and password required when sending scan file directly to a
shared folder on a computer running Windows, or to an FTP server.
Program / Change / Delete Subject
Program, change, or delete the subject used

when sending an Internet fax or scan file as
an attachment.
Fax E-mail Account
Specify [E-mail Address],[User Name] , and

[Password] for receiving Internet faxes.
Specifies the interval the machine waits before resending scan file, if they cannot be
sent to the delivery server or mail server.
Sets a maximum number of times scan file is

resent to the delivery server or mail server
4
Initial Settings
Printer/LAN-Fax (IPv6 cannnot be used on LAN-Fax.)
Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

IPv4 address
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
NW Frame Type
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
SMB Computer Name
SMB Work Group
Host Name
Machine Name
IEEE 1394
(IPv4 over 1394)
Interface Settings/
IEEE 1394
IPv4 address
DDNS Configuration
Host Name
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
IPv4 over 1394
SCSI print (SBP-2)
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
Effective Protocol
5
Interface
IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN)
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

IPv4 address
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
NW Frame Type
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
SMB Computer Name
SMB Work Group
Host Name
Machine Name
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
SSID Setting
Channel
Security Method
Wireless LAN Signal
Transmission Speed
6
Internet Fax (IPv6 cannnot be used on this function.)

Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
Host Name
File Transfer
Delivery Option
SMTP Server
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol
Message
Default User Name / Password
(Send)
Fax E-mail Account
7
Interface
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over
1394)
Settings
Interface Settings/
IEEE 1394
IPv4 address
IPv4 over 1394
DDNS Configuration
WINS Configuration
Host Name
Domain Name
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
Effective Protocol
File Transfer
SMTP Server
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol
Message
Fax E-mail Account
8
Interface
IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN)
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
WINS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
Host Name
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
SSID Setting
Channel
Transmission Speed
File Transfer
SMTP Server
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol
Message
Fax E-mail Account
9
IP-Fax (IPv6 cannnot be used on this function.)

Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
Host Name
IEEE 1394
(IPv4 over 1394)
Interface Settings/
IEEE 1394
IPv4 address
IPv4 over 1394
DDNS Configuration
WINS Configuration
Host Name
Domain Name
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
Effective Protocol
10
Interface
IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN)
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
WINS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
Host Name
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
SSID Setting
Channel
Transmission Speed
11
E-mail (IPv6 cannnot be used on this function.)

Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
Host Name
File Transfer
SMTP Server
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol
Message
12
Interface
IEEE 1394
(IPv4 over 1394)
Settings
Interface Settings/
IEEE 1394
IPv4 address
IPv4 over 1394
DDNS Configuration
WINS Configuration
Host Name
Domain Name
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
Effective Protocol
File Transfer
SMTP Server
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol
Reception Protocol
Message
13
Interface
IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN)
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
Host Name
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
SSID Setting
Channel
Transmission Speed
File Transfer
SMTP Server
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol
Message
14
Scan to Folder (IPv6 cannnot be used on this function.)

Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
Host Name
File Transfer

(Send)
IEEE 1394
(IPv4 over 1394)
Interface Settings/
IEEE 1394
IPv4 address
IPv4 over 1394
DDNS Configuration
WINS Configuration
Host Name
Domain Name
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
Effective Protocol
File Transfer

(Send)
15
Interface
IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN)
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
Host Name
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
SSID Setting
Channel
Transmission Speed
File Transfer

16
Network Delivery Scanner (IPv6 cannnot be used on this function.)

Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
Host Name
File Transfer
Delivery Option
IEEE 1394
(IPv4 over 1394)
Interface Settings/
IEEE 1394
IPv4 address
IPv4 over 1394
DDNS Configuration
WINS Configuration
Host Name
Domain Name
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
Effective Protocol
File Transfer
Delivery Option
17
Interface
IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN)
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
Host Name
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
SSID Setting
Channel
Transmission Speed
File Transfer
Delivery Option
18
Network TWAIN Scanner (IPv6 cannnot be used on this function.)

Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
Host Name
IEEE 1394
(IPv4 over 1394)
Interface Settings/
IEEE 1394
IPv4 address
IPv4 over 1394
DDNS Configuration
WINS Configuration
Host Name
Domain Name
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
Effective Protocol
19
Interface
IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN)
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
Host Name
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
SSID Setting
Channel
Transmission Speed
Document Server (IPv6 cannnot be used on this function.)

Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
Host Name
20
Interface
IEEE 1394
(IPv4 over 1394)
Settings
Interface Settings/
IEEE 1394
IPv4 address
IPv4 over 1394
DDNS Configuration
WINS Configuration
Host Name
Domain Name
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
Effective Protocol
IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN)
Interface Settings/
Network

DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
LAN Type
Ethernet Speed
Effective Protocol
Host Name
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
SSID Setting
Channel
Transmission Speed
Note
Depending on which optional units you have installed or the printer language you have selected, some options are not displayed.
Depending on the security settings, you might not be able to set certain options.
Reference
For details, see System Settings, General Settings Guide.
For details about copier features and system settings, see Copy Reference and
21
22
1. Using a Printer Server

Preparing Printer Server
This section explains how to configure the machine as a Windows network printer. The machine is
configured to enabling network clients to use it. When the network
printer is connected via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, you can set the
printing notification function to notify clients of the results of their print
jobs.
D To share the machine with users
using a different version of Windows, click [Additional Drivers...].

If you have installed an alternative
driver by selecting [Share As: ] during the printer driver installation,
this step can be ignored.
E Click
[OK], and then close the

printer properties.
Important
Under Windows 2000, Windows
XP Professional, or Windows Server 2003, to change printer properties in the [Printer] folder, you need
Printer Management access authentication; under Windows NT
4.0, Full Control access authentication. Log on to the file server as an
Administrator or member of the
PowerUsers group.
A Open the [Printers] window from

the [Start] menu.
Under Windows XP or Windows
Server 2003, [Printer and Fax] window appears.
B Click the icon of the machine you

want to use. On the [File] menu,
click [Properties]. The printer
properties appear.
C On the [Sharing] tab, click [Shared As: ].
23
Printing notification via

Follow the procedure below to configure the machine to use the printing
notification function of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
Setting the print server

Important
Under Windows 2000, Windows
XP Professional, or Windows Server 2003, to change printer properties in the [Printer] folder, you need
Printer Management access authentication; under Windows NT
4.0, Full Control access authentication. Log on to the file server as an
Administrator or member of the
PowerUsers group.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs], [DeskTopBinder], [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client], and then
click [Print Server Setting].
The print server setting dialog box
appears.
B Select the [Notify client PCs of print-
out/data-transmission ] check box,

After print server setting is made, a
dialog box appears. Confirm the
dialog box content, and click [OK].
Click [Cancel] to interrupt the procedure.
A dialog box appears for client setting.
24
C Click [OK].
The print server setting is completed. Each client must be set to receive print notification.
Note
Current printing jobs restart
from the beginning after the
spooler pauses briefly.
When the expansion function is

not used, the function is automatically set as available.
If you log on using an account
that does not have Administrator privileges, the client may not
be notified.
Setting a Client
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Pro-
gram], [DeskTopBinder], [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client], and then

click [Extended Features Settings].
A dialog box for setting the expansion function appears.
B Select
the [Notify of printout/datatransmission when using print server]

check box.
C Click [OK].
The client setting is completed.
Note
Set the printing notification
function on the printer driver as
well as on SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client.
Using NetWare
Using NetWare
This section describes the setting procedure for network printers in the
NetWare environment. In the NetWare environment, you can connect
the machine as a print server or remote printer.
Important
IPv6 cannnot be used on this function.
Setting procedure
When using the machine as a
print server
A Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
B Setting the network interface
board.
C Turning the machine off and
then back on.
When using the machine as a
remote printer
A Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B Setting the network interface
board.
C Setting NetWare.
D Starting the print server.
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

To use the machine in a NetWare
environment, use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin to set the NetWare printing environment.
Note
The NetWare Client provided
by Novell is required to set the
printing environment using
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin under the following environments:
NDS mode in Windows 95/

98/Me
NDS or Bindery mode in Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0
Reference
p.43 Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
Printers listed by SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

lists printers connected to the network. If you cannot identify the
machine you want to configure,
print configuration page, and then
check the machine name.
Note
This procedure assumes an environment is already prepared for
normal NetWare running the
printing service setting.
The procedure is explained with

the following example settings:
File servers name CAREE
Print servers name PSERV
Printers name R-PRN
Queue name R-QUEUE
25
Setting Up as a Print Server

(NetWare 3.x)
Follow the procedure below to connect the machine as a print server using NetWare 3.x.
A Log on to the file server as a supervisor or supervisor equivalent.
B Start
NIB Setup Tool from the

[Start] menu.
C Click [Wizard], and then click [OK].

D Select the printer you want to con-
figure, and then click [Next].

A dialog box prompting you to
perform the remaining configuration tasks in the Web browser appears. Click [OK], and then wait
until Web Image Monitor starts automatically.
E Cick [Login].
A dialog box for entering the login
user name and password appears.
F Enter
the login user name and

password, and then click [Login].
For details about the login user
name and password, consult your
G Click [Configuration] in the left ar-
ea, and then click [NetWare].

Print Server Name: Enter the
NetWare print server name. To
use the interface board as a
print server, enter the name of a
print server that is not active on
the file server. Use up to 47
characters.
Logon Mode: Specify whether
to designate a file server or NDS
tree when logging on to NetWare.
26
File Server Name: When a file

server name is entered here,
only the specified file server is
searched for. This item is mandatory. Use up to 47 characters.
NDS Tree: To enable NDS mode,
enter the name of the NDS tree
you want to log on to. Use up to
32 alphanumeric characters.
NDS Context Name: To enable
NDS mode, enter the print server
context. Use up to 127 characters.
Operation Mode: Specify whether to use the interface board as a
print server or a remote printer.
Remote Printer No.: This item is
effective when the interface
board is specified as a remote
printer. Enter the same number
as the number of the printer to
be created on the print server (0
to 254 characters).
Job Timeout: When the interface
board is used as a NetWare remote printer, the printer cannot
detect when a print job ends.
Therefore, the printer terminates printing when a certain
period of time has elapsed since
it last received print data (i.e.,
when it has not received print
data for a certain period of
time). Specify here this period
of time (3 to 255 seconds). The
initial value is 15 (seconds).
Frame Type: Select the frame type
from the drop-down menu.
Print Server Protocol: Select the
protocol for NetWare from the
drop-down menu.
NCP Delivery Protocol: Select
the protocol for NCP delivery.
Using NetWare
H Confirm
the settings, and then

click [OK].
Configuration is now complete.
Wait several before restarting Web
Image Monitor.
I Click [Logout].
Note
To check the configuration is
correct, enter the following
from the command prompt:
F:> USERLIST
If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as a connected user.
If you cannot identify the printer you want to configure, check
the printer name against the
configuration page printed
from the printer. For details
about printing a configuration
page, see Printer Reference.
If no printer names appear in
the list, match the frame types
of IPX/SPXs for the computer
and printer. Use the [Network]
dialog box of Windows to
change the frame type of the
computer.
Setting Up as a Print Server

(NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5)
Follow the procedure below to connect the machine as a print server using NetWare 4.x, NetWare 5 / 5.1, or
NetWare 6 / 6.5.
Important
When using the printer as a print
server in NetWare 4.x, NetWare 5
/ 5.1, or NetWare 6 / 6.5, set it to
the NDS mode.
When using NetWare 5 / 5.1 or

NetWare 6 / 6.5, set the printer as
a print server.
A Log on to the file server as an ad-
ministrator or administrator
equivalent.
B Start

[Start] menu.
C Click [Wizard], and then click [OK].


E Click [Login].
A dialog box for entering the login
F Enter the login user name and pass-
word, and then click [Login].

G Click [Configuration] in the left area, and then click [NetWare].
27
H Confirm

click [OK].
Wait several minutes before restarting Web Image Monitor.
I Click [Logout].
Reference
p.26 Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x)
Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5

/ 5.1 or 6 / 6.5 Environment
Follow the procedure below to connect the machine as a print server in a
pure IP environment of NetWare 5 /
5.1 or NetWare 6 / 6.5.
Important
When creating a queued print server in a pure IP environment of NetWare 5 / 5.1 or NetWare 6 / 6.5,
create a print queue on the file server using NetWare Administrator.
This printer is not available as a remote printer for use in a pure IP

environment.
To use the printer in a pure IP environment, set it to IPv4.
Setting up using NWadmin
A From Windows, start NWadmin.

For details about NWadmin, see
the NetWare manuals.
B Select the object in which the print

queue is located in the directory
tree, and then click [Create] on the
[Object] menu.
C In the [Class of new object] box, click

[Print Queue], and then click [OK].
D In the [Print Queue Name] box, enter

the name of the print queue.
E In
the [Print Queue Volume] box,

click [Browse].
F In the [Available objects] box, click the

volume in which the print queue is
created, and then click [OK].
G Check the settings, and then click

[Create].
28
Using NetWare
H Select
the object in which the

printer is located, and then click
[Create] on the [Object] menu.
I In
the [Class of new object] box,

click [Printer], and then click [OK].
For NetWare 5, click [Printer (Non
NDPS)].
J In the [Printer name] box, enter the

printer name.
K Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click
[Create].
L Click [Assignments], and then click

[Add] in the [Assignments] area.
M In the [Available objects] box, click
the queue you created, and then

click [OK].
N Click [Configuration], click [Parallel]

in the [Printer type] list, and then
click [Communication].
O Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] area, and then click
[OK].
P Check the settings, and then click

[OK].
Q Select
a context specified using

NIB Setup Tool, and then click
[Create] on the [Object] menu.
R In

click [Print Server], and then click
[OK]. For NetWare 5, click [Print
Sever (Non NDPS)].
S In the [Print Server Name] box, enter

the print server name.
Use the same print server name
specified using NIB Setup Tool.
U Click [Assignments], and then click

[Add] in the [Assignments] area.
V In the [Available objects] box, click

click [OK].
W Check the settings, and then click

[OK].
Setting up using NIB Setup Tool
A Log on to the file server as an ad-
ministrator or administrator
equivalent.
B Start NIB Setup Tool from the [Start]

menu.
C Click [Property Sheet], and then click

[OK].

E Click [Login].
A dialog box for entering the [Login
User Name] and [Login Password] appears.
F Enter
the user login user name

and password, and then click
[Login].
For details about the login name
and password, consult your network administrator.
T Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click
[Create].
29
H Confirm

click [OK].
I Click [Logout].
Reference
Setting Up as a Remote Printer

(NetWare 3.x)
Follow the procedure below to use
the machine as a remote printer under NetWare 3.x.
Setting up using PCONSOLE
A Enter PCONSOLE from the

command prompt.
F:> PCONSOLE
B Create a print queue.

When using the existing print
queue, go to the procedure for creating a printer.
C From the [Available Options] menu,

select [Print Queue Information], and
then press the {Enter} key.
D Press {Insert} key, and then enter a

print queue name.
E Press {Esc} key to return to the

[Available Options] menu.
F Set up the network connection to

a printer.
G On
the [Available Options] menu,

click [Print Server Information], and
then press the {Enter} key.
H To create a new print server, press

the {Insert} key, and then enter a
print server name.
For a currently defined print server, select a print server in the [Print
Server] list.
Use the same printer name specified using NIB Setup Tool.
I From
the [Print Server Information]

menu, select [Print Server Configuration].
30
Using NetWare
J From the [Print Server Configuration]

menu, select [Printer Configuration].
K Select the printer indicated as [Not
Installed].
Use the same printer number specified as the remote printer number
using NIB Setup Tool.
L To change the printer name, enter
a new name.
A name printer x is assigned to
the printer. The x stands for the
number of the selected printer.
M As type, select [Remote Parallel, LPT1].

The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form,
and Queue service mode are automatically configured.
N Press
the {Esc} key, and then

click [Yes] on the confirmation
message.
V Start the print server by entering
the following from the console of

the NetWare server.
If the print server is in operation,
quit and restart it.
To quit
CAREE: unload pserver
To start
CAREE: load pserver
print_server_name
Note
If the printer works as configured, the message "Waiting for
job" appears.
A Log on to the file server as a su-
pervisor or supervisor equivalent.
O Press the {Esc} key to return to
B Start
P Assign print queues to the created
C Click
Q From
[Print Server Configuration Menu].
printer.
[Print Server Configuration

Menu], select [Queues Serviced By
Printer].
R Select the printer created.

S Press the {Insert} key to select a
queue serviced by the printer.
You can select several queues.
T Follow
the instructions on the

screen to make other necessary
settings.
Following these steps, check that
the queues are assigned.
U Press the {Esc} key until "Exit?"

appears, and then select [Yes] to
exit PCONSOLE.

[Start] menu.
[Property Sheet], and then
click [OK].

E Click [Login].
F Enter

31
H Confirm

click [OK].
I Click [Logout].
Reference
Setting Up as a Remote Printer

(NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5)
the printer as a remote printer under
NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1 and 6 / 6.5.
Important
To use the printer as a remote
printer under NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1,
6 / 6.5, set it to NDS mode.
Do not use the printer as a remote

printer when Pure IP is used.
Setting up using NWadmin
A From Windows, start NWadmin.

For details about NWadmin, see
the NetWare manuals.
B Set up the network connection to
a print queue. Select the object in

which the print queue is located
in the directory tree, and then
click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
C In

click [Print Queue], and then click
[OK].
D In the [Print Queue Name] box, enter

the name of the print queue.
E In
the [Print Queue Volume] box,

click [Browse].
F In the [Available objects] box, click
the volume in which the print

queue is created, and then click
[OK].
G Check the settings, and then click

[Create].
32
Using NetWare
H Set up the network connection to

a printer. Select the object in
which the printer is located, and
then click [Create] on the [Object]
menu.
I In

click [Printer], and then click [OK].
For NetWare 5, click [Printer (Non
NDPS)].
J In the [Printer name] box, enter the

printer name
K Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click
[Create].
L Assign print queues to the created

printer. Click [Assignments], and
then click [Add] in the [Assignments] area.
M In the [Available objects] box, click

click [OK].
N Click [Configuration], click [Parallel]

in the [Printer type] list, and then
click [Communication].
O Click [Manual load] in the [Commu-
nication type] area, and then click

[OK]. Check the settings, and then
click [OK].
P Set up the network connection to
a print server. Select a context

specified using NIB Setup Tool,
and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
Q In

click [Print Server], and then click
[OK]. For NetWare 5, click [Print
Sever (Non NDPS)].
S Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click
[Create].
T Assign the printer to the created
print server. Click [Assignments],

and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] area.
U In the [Available objects] box, click

click [OK].
V In
the [Printers] area, click the

printer you assigned, and then
click [Printer Number]
W Enter
the printer number, and

then click [OK]. Check the settings, and then click [OK].
Use the same printer number specified as the remote printer number
using NIB Setup Tool.
X Start the print server by entering
the following from the console of

the NetWare server.
If the print server is in operation,
quit and restart it.
To exit
CAREE: unload pserver
To start
CAREE: load pserver
print_server_name
Y Enter the printer server name as

the context name, and then press
the {Enter} key.
Z Select
the printer name on the

context menu, and then press the
{Enter} key.
R In the [Print Server Name:] box, enter the print server name.
Use the same print server name
specified using NIB Setup Tool.
33
A Log on to the file server as an administrator or administrator

equivalent.
B Start

[Start] menu.
C Click
[Property Sheet], and then

click [OK].

E Click [Login].
F Enter
the user login name and

H Confirm

click [OK].
I Click [Logout].
Reference
34
2. Monitoring and Configuring

the Printer
Using Web Image Monitor, you can check the machine status and change settings.
Available operations
The following operations can be remotely performed using Web Image Monitor from a client computer.
Displaying machine status or settings
Checking the print job status or history
Checking, modifying, printing, or deleting print jobs stored in the Document Server
Interrupting currently printing jobs
Resetting the printer
Managing the Address Book
Making machine settings
Making network protocol settings
Making security settings
Configuring the machine
To perform the operations from Web Image Monitor, TCP/IP is required. After the machine is configured to use TCP/IP, operations from Web Image
Monitor become available.
Recommended Web browser
Windows:
Internet Explorer 5.5 SP1 or higher
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or higher
Mac OS:
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or higher
Safari 1.0 or higher
35
Note
To use Netscape Navigator with Secured Sockets Layer (SSL: an encryption
protocol), use Netscape Navigator 7.0 or higher.
Use Netscape Navigator 7.0 or higher with IPv6.

Safari cannot be used on Mac OS X 10.4.1.
If the previous versions of the Web browser above are used or JavaScript and
cookies are not enabled with the Web browser used, display and operation
problems may occur.
If you are using a proxy server, change the Web browser settings. Contact
your network administrator for information about the settings.
The previous page may not appear even after the back button of a Web
browser is clicked. If this happens, click the refresh button of a Web browser.
Updating the machine information is not automatically performed. Click
[Refresh] in the display area to update the machine information.
We recommend using Web Image Monitor in the same network.
You cannot access to the machine from outside the firewall.
When using the machine under DHCP, the IP address may be automatically
changed by the DHCP server settings. Enable DDNS setting on the machine,
and then connect using the machine's host name. Alternatively, set a static IP
address to the DHCP server.
If the HTTP port is disabled, connection to the machine using the machine's
URL cannot be established. SSL setting must be enabled on this machine. For
details, consult your network administrator.
When using the SSL encryption protocol, enter https://(printer's address)/. Internet Explorer must be installed on your computer. Use the most
recent available version. We recommend Internet Explorer 6.0 or later.
36
Displaying Top Page

This section explains the Top Page and how to display Web Image Monitor.
A Start your Web browser.

B Enter http: //(machine's address)/ in the address bar of a Web browser.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.

If the machine's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server,
you can enter it.
When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment
which server authentication is issued , enter "https://(machine's address)/".
Every Web Image Monitor page is divided into the following areas:
ZZZ040S
1. Menu area
If you select menu, it's content will be
shown on the work area, or the sub area.
2. Tab area
Details about each menu appears.
3. Header area
The dialog box for switching to the
user mode and administrator mode
appears, and each mode's menu will
be displayed.
The link to help and dialog box for
keyword search appears.
4. Display area
Displays the contents of the item selected in the menu area.
Machine information in the display
area is not automatically updated.
Click [Refresh] at the upper right in the
display area to update the machine information. Click the Web browser's
[Refresh] button to refresh the entire
browser screen.
5. Help
Use Help to view or download Help
file contents.
37
Note
When using a host name under Windows Server 2003 with IPv6 protocol,
perform host name resolution using an exrernal DNS server. The host file
cannot be used.
When user authentication is set
Log Off (using Web Image Monitor)

Click [Logout] to log off.
Login (using Web Image Monitor)

Follow the procedure below to log on
when user authentication is set.
A Click [Login].
B Enter a login user name and pass-
word, and then click [Login].

Note
For user code authentication,
enter a user code in [User Name],
The procedure may differ depending on the Web browser

used.
38
Note
When you log on and made the
setting, always click [Logout].
About Menu and Mode

There are two modes available with Web Image Monitor: user mode and administrator mode.
Displayed Items may differ depending on the machine type.
About User Mode

In the user mode, machine status, settings, and print job status can be viewed,
but the machine settings cannot be changed.
ZZZ041S
1. Home
The [Status], [Configuration], [Counter],
and [Inquiry] tab are displayed. Details
of the tab menu are displayed on the
work area.
2. Document Server
Display files stored in the Document
Server.
3. Fax Received File
4. Printer: Print Jobs

Allows you to display list of Sample
Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and
Stored Print jobs.
5. Job
Display all print files.
6. Configuration
Display current machine and network
settings.
Display received fax files.
39
Administrator Mode
In the administrator mode, you can configure various machine settings.
ZZZ042S
1. Home
The [Status], [Configuration], [Counter],
and [Inquiry] tab are displayed. Details
of the tab menu are displayed on the
work area.
2. Document Server
Display files stored in the Document
Server.
3. Printer: Print Jobs

Allows you to display list of Locked
Print, Sample Print, Hold Print, and
Stored Print jobs.
4. Job
Display all print files.
40
5. Address Book
User information can be registered,
displayed, changed, and deleted.
6. Configuration
Make system settings for the machine,
interface settings, and security.
7. Reset Device
Click to reset the printer. If a print job
is being processed, the printer will be
reset after the print job is completed.
This button is located on Top Page.
8. Reset Printer Job

Click to reset current print jobs and
print jobs in queue. This button is located on Top Page.
Access in the Administrator Mode

Follow the procedure below to access
Web Image Monitor in the administrator mode.
A On Top Page, click [Login].

The window for entering the login
B Enter your login user name and

Displaying Web Image Monitor Help

When using Help for the first time,
clicking either [Help] in the header area
or the icon marked "?" in the display
area makes the following screen appear, in which you can view Help in
two different ways, as shown below:
Viewing Help on our Web site

Downloading Help to your computer
Downloading and Checking Help
You can download Help to your
computer. As the Help URL, you
can specify the path to the local file
to view the Help without connecting to the Internet.
Note
By clicking [Help] in the header area, the contents of Help appear.
By clicking "?", the Help icon in the

display area, Help for the setting
items in the display area appears.
Downloading Help
A In the [OS] list, select the operating system.
B In
the [Language] list, select the

language.
C Click [Download].
D Download Help by following the
instructions on the screen.
E Store the downloaded compressed
file in a location, and then decompress the file.

To view the downloaded Web Image Monitor Help, set the path to the
location of the decompressed file.
Linking the URL of the Help File to the

[Help] Button.
You can link the URL of the help file
on a computer or Web server to the
[Help] button.
A Log on to Web Image Monitor in

the administrator mode.
B In the menu area, click [Configuration].
C Click [Webpage].
D In the [Set Help URL Target] box, en-
ter the URL of the help file.

If you saved the help file to
"C:\HELP\EN", enter "file://C:/HELP/".
For example, if you saved the file to a Web
server, and the URL of the index file is "http:// a.b.c.d/HELP/EN/index.html", enter "http://a.b.c.d/HELP/".
E Click [OK].
41

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can monitor the network
printers. Also, you can change the
configuration of the network interface board using TCP/IP or IPX/SPX.
Important
IPv6 cannnot be used on this function.
Protocol stack provided with Operating System

Windows 95/98/Me
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
NetWare
NetWare Client32 for Windows 95
IntraNetWare Client for Windows 95
Novell Client for Windows
95/98/Me
Windows 2000
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
NetWare
NT/2000/XP
Windows Server 2003
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Windows XP
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
NT/2000/XP
Windows NT 4.0
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Client Service for NetWare
NetWare Client32 for Windows NT
IntraNetWare Client for Windows NT
NT/2000/XP
42
Available operations
The following functions are available:
Limits settings done from the
control panel, and disables
changes made to certain items.
Enables selection of paper type
loaded in the machine.
Switches to, and comes out of
Energy Saver mode.
Checks information about printing, paper quantity, etc.
Simultaneously monitors multiple printers. When there are
many printers, you can create
groups and classify printers to
facilitate management.
Checks the machine's network
settings and detailed device information.
Enables you to change the machine's network settings.
You can check details of print
jobs sent from a computer.
Allows you to check job histories of printed, faxed (LANFax), scanned, and photocopied
documents identified by user
codes.
Allows selection of functions
such as printing and scanning
for each user code.
Fax numbers and e-mail addresses stored in the machine can be
changed and saved by computer.
You can check each fax job history entry.
You can make settings for and
display the status changes of
group devices.
Using Address Management Tool,

you can manage LAN-Fax numbers, user names for Scan to Folder, and addresses for sending and
The e-mail senders name and
folder can be protected.
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor
for Admin
Follow the procedure below to install

B Insert the CD-ROM into the CDROM drive.
C Select an interface language, and
then click [OK].

The following languages are available: Czech, Danish, German, English, Spanish, French, Italian,
Hungarian, Dutch, Norwegian,
Polish, Portuguese , Finnish,
Swedish, Chinese Simple and Chinese Traditional.
D Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin].

E Click [Next >].
The software license agreement
appears in the [License Agreement]
dialog box.
F After reading through its contents,

click [Next >].
G Follow the instructions on the screen.

A message appears when the installation is completed.
H Click [OK].
A message about restarting the
computer may appear. Restart the
computer to complete installation.
Note
Auto Run may not work under
certain operating system settings. In this case, launch Setup.exe located on the CDROM root directory.
If you are required to restart the

computer after installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, restart the computer and continue
the configuration.
Changing the Network

Interface Board Configuration
Follow the procedure below to
change the network interface board
configuration using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B On the [Group:] menu, point to
[Search Device], and then click
[TCP/IP], [IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP SNMPv3].
A list of machines using the selected protocol appears.
Select the protocol of the machine
whose configuration you want to
change.
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3,
enter the user authentication.
C In the list, select a machine whose

configuration you want to change.
43
D On the [Tools] menu, click [NIB Set-
up Tool].
A Web browser opens and the
window for entering the login user
name and password for the Web
Image Monitor administrator appears.
NIB Setup Tool starts when the
network interface board is default.
Click [Web Browser], and then click
[OK].
E Enter

F Configure settings using Web Image Monitor.
G Quit Web Image Monitor.

H Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Reference
p.35 Using Web Image Monitor
Locking the Menus on the

Machine's Control Panel
Follow the procedure below to lock
the menus on the machine's control
panel.

change.
C Select a machine.
D On the [Tools] menu, point to [De-
vice Settings], and then click [Lock

Operation Panel Menu].
E Enter

For details about the user name
The [System] page of Web Image
Monitor appears. Enter required
setting items.
F Quit Web Image Monitor.

G Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
44
Note
For details about setting items,
see Help in the [General Settings]
on [Configuration] page.
Changing the Paper Type
Managing User Information

change the paper type.
Follow the procedure below to manage the user's information using

Prints jobs can be managed and functions restricted by user codes.

change.
configuration you want to

change.
D On the [Tools] menu, point to [De-
vice Settings], and then click [Select

Paper Type].
A Web browser opens and the window for entering the login user
name and password for the Web Image Monitor administrator appears.
E Enter

The [Paper] page appears.
Select a paper type in the [Paper
Type] list for each tray.Enter required setting items.
F Quit Web Image Monitor.

G Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Note
For details about setting items,
see Help in the [General Settings]
on [Configuration] page.
Starting User Management Tool

Follow the procedure below to start
User Management Tool.

change.
C In the list, select a machine you

want to manage.
D On the [Tools] menu, click [User Management Tool].

The dialog box for entering the
login user name and password appears.
E Enter
the user name and password, and then click [OK].

User Management Tool starts.
Note
For details about User Management Tool, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
45
Displaying the Number of Sheets Printed
Resetting the number of pages printed to 0.
Follow the procedure below to display the number of sheets printed under each user code.
Follow the procedure below to reset

the number of pages printed under
each user code to 0.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
min User Management Tool.
B Click the [User Counter Information]
tab of User Management Tool.

The number of pages printed under each user code appears.
C Click [Exit] on the [Files] menu to

quit User Management Tool.
min User Information Management Tool.

C Click the user whose information

you want to reset.
D On
the [Edit] menu, click [Reset

User Counters].
Exporting the information about the

number of pages printed
E Select the check box of the items
Follow the procedure below to export

the information of the number of pages printed under each user code as a
.csv file.
F Click [OK].
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin User Management Tool.
you want to reset, and then click

[OK].
The number of pages printed is reset to 0.
G On the [Edit] menu, click [Apply Set-
C On the [Files] menu, click [Export
tings].
Changes are applied to information on the [User Counter Information] tab.
D Specify the save location and file
H Click [Exit] on the [Files] menu to
User Statistics List].
name, and then click [Save].
E Click [Exit] on the [Files] menu to

46
Restricting Functions
Setting Applicable Functions to New Users
Follow the procedure below to restrict use of individual functions.
Follow the procedure below to add

new users and set functions applicable to them.
A Start
SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin User Management Tool.

C Click
the user whose functions

you want to restrict.
D On the [Edit] menu of User Management Tool, click [Restrict Access To Device].
E Select the check box of the functions you want to restrict.
F Click [OK].
G Click [Yes].
The settings are applied.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin User Management Tool.
B Click the [Access Control List:] tab

of User Management Tool.
C On the [Edit] menu, click [Adds New

User].
D Enter the user code and user name.

E Select the check box of the functions applicable to the new user.
If the check boxes are unavailable,
there is no restriction to use that
function.
F Click [OK].
The new user is added.
G On
the [Edit] menu, click [Apply

Settings].
The settings are applied.
H Click [Exit] on the [Files] menu to

Note
For details about setting restrictions, see SmartDeviceMonitor
for Admin Help.
47
Configuring the Energy Saver

Mode
Follow the procedure below to configure Energy Saver mode.

[Yes], and then click [TCP/IP],

[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP SNMPv3].
change.
C Select
the machine whose settings you want to make.

To make settings for all machines
in the selected group, select no machine.
D On the [Group:] menu, point to [En-
ergy Saver Mode], point to [Set Individually] to make the settings for
only the selected machine or
point to [Set By Group] to make the
settings for all machines in the selected group, and then click [On]
or [Off].
E Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

Note
For details about the setting for
Energy Saver mode, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
Help.
Setting a Password
Follow the procedure below to set a
password.

change.

configuration you want to
change.
D On the [Tools] menu, click [NIB Set-
up Tool].
A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the login user
NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Follow the instructions on the screen.
E Enter

F Click [Configuration].
G Click [Program / Change Administrator] on the [Device Settings] area,
and then change the settings.
H Quit Web Image Monitor.

I Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
48
Checking the Machine Status
Changing Names and Comments
Follow the procedure below to check

machine status.

change the names and comments of
the machine.

change.
C To obtain status details, select the
machine in the list, and then click

[Open] on the [Device] menu.
The machine status appears in the
dialog box.
D Click [System] or [Printer].

dialog box.
E Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

Note
For details about items in the dialog box, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.


change.
Select a machine in the list, and

then click [NIB Setup Tool] on the
[Tools] menu.
NIB Setup Tool starts when the
network interface board is default.
Follow the instructions on the
screen.
49
D Enter

E Click [Configuration].
F Click [System] on the [Device Set-
tings] area., and then change the

settings.
G Quit Web Image Monitor.

H Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Note
In the [Device Name] box, enter a
device name on the machine using up to 31 characters.
In the [Comment] box, enter a

comment on the machine using
up to 31 characters.
Load Fax Journal

change.
C Select a machine in the list, and
then click [Load Fax Journal] on the

[Tools] menu.
D Enter

Load Fax Journal area appears in
the Web Image Monitor.
E Quit Web Image Monitor.

F Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Note
For details, see Help in [Load Fax
Journal] area.
50
Viewing and Deleting Spool

Print Jobs

change.
then click [Spool Printing Job

List(Printer)] on the [Tools] menu.
A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the login user
D Enter

Spool Printing Job List appears in
the Web Image Monitor.
To delete the Spool Printing Job,
select the document you want to
delete and then click [Delete].
Managing Address Information

IPX/SPX or [TCP/IP SNMPv3].
change.

then click [Address Management
Tool]on the [Tools] menu.
The dialog box for entering the
login user name and password appears.
D Enter

password, and then click [OK].
Address Management Tool starts.
Note
For details, see Address Management Tool Help.
Note
To display Spool Printing Job
List, spool must be set to [Enable] on Web Image Monitor in
advance.
For details, see Help in theSpool

Printing Job List area.
51
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

To view the status of machines using
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, configure SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
beforehand.
Monitoring Printers
Follow the procedure below to monitor the machine using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
A Right-click the SmartDeviceMon-
itor for Client icon, point to [Properties], and then click [Option...].
The [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Options] dialog box appears.
B Select
the machine you want to

monitor, and then select the [To Be
Monitored] check box in the Monitoring Information Settings area.
To display the machine status in
the task tray using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon, select
the [Displayed on Task Bar] check
box.
C Click [OK].
The dialog box closes and the configured machine is monitored.
Note
For details about status icons,
see SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client Help.
52
Checking the Machine Status

Follow the procedure below to check
machine status using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
A For status details, right-click the

icon, and then click the machine.
dialog box.
Note
For details about items in the dialog box, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
When Using IPP with

When using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, note the following:
The network printer can only receive one print job from SmartDeviceMonitor for Client at a time.
While the network printer is printing, another user cannot access it
until the job is finished. In this
case, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client tries to access the network
printer until the retry interval expires.
If SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
cannot access the network printer
and times out, it will stop sending
the print job. In this case, you
should cancel the paused status
from the print queue window.
will resume access to the network
printer. You can delete the print
job from the print queue window,
but canceling a print job printed by
the network printer might cause
the next job sent from another user
to be incorrectly printed.
If a print job sent from SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is interrupted and the network printer cancels
the job because something went
wrong, send the print job again.
Print jobs sent from another computer do not appear in the print
queue window, regardless of protocol.
If various users send print jobs using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
to network printers, the printing
order might not be the same as that
in which the jobs were sent.
An IP address cannot be used for

the IPP port name because the IP
address is used for the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port name.
When setting SSL, a protocol for
encrypted communication, under
environment which server authentication is issued, enter "https://(machine's address)/".
Internet Explorer must be installed
on your computer. Use the highest
version. Internet Explorer 6.0 or
higher is recommended.
If the [Security Alert] dialog box appears when accessing the machine
using IPP to create or configure an
IPP port, or when printing, install
the certificate. To select the certificate store location when using Certificate Import Wizard, click [Place
all certificates in the following store],
and then click [Local Computer] under [Trusted Root Certification Authorities].
Note
For details about SSL settings,
consult your network administrator.
53
Printer Status Notification by E-Mail

Whenever a paper tray becomes empty or paper is jammed, an e-mail alert
is issued to the registered addresses
to notify the printer status.
For this notification, you can make
the e-mail notification settings.
Notification timing and e-mail content can be set.
You can be notified of the following
events:
Service call.
Toner cartridge is empty.
Toner cartridge is nearly empty.
Waste toner bottle (waste toner ink
tank) is full.
Waste toner bottle (waste toner ink
tank) is nearly full.
Stapler has no staples.
Punch dust is full
Paper has jammed.
Open door is detected.
The paper tray is empty.
The paper tray is nearly empty.
A paper tray error occurred.
Output paper tray is full.
Unit connection error.
Duplex unit error.
Hard disk drive is full.
Note
When the service call is set, follwing call results can be sent.
Failure automatic call success

Failure automatic call out of time
Failure automatic call failure
Consumable automatic call
success
Consumable automatic call
success
Remote machine check failure
Firmware update confirmed
Other call results can be displayed, depending on the machine type.
For details about the service
call, contact your service or
sales representative.
A On the [Administrator Tools] menu,

set [Notify Machine Status] to [On] using the control panel.
The default is [On].
B Open
a Web browser, and then

enter http://(machine's address)/ in the address bar.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor
appears.
When setting SSL, a protocol for
encrypted communication, under
environment which server authentication is issued , enter https://(machine's address)/.
C Click [Login] on Top Page of Web

Image Monitor.
The window for entering the login
54
D Enter

password, and then click Login.
E In the menu area, click [Configuration].
F Click
[E-mail] on the [Device Settings] area.
G Make the following settings:

Items in the Reception column:
Make the necessary settings for
sending and receiving e-mail.
Items in the SMTP column:
Configure the SMTP server.
Check your mailing environment, and then specify the necessary items. You can also
perform mail authentication for
the SMTP server.
Items in the POP before SMTP
column: Configure the POP
server. Check your mailing environment, and then specify the
necessary items. You can also
perform mail authentication for
the POP server.
Items in the POP3/IMAP4 column: Configure the POP3 or
IMAP4 server. Check your
mailing environment, and then
specify the necessary items.
Items in the E-mail Reception
Port column: Configure the port
to be used for access to the mail
server.
Items in the E-mail Notification
column: Items in the E-Mail Notification Account column:
Specify these items if you want
to use on-demand e-mail notification.
A Click [Configuration] in the menu area, and then click [Auto E-mail Notification] on the [Device Settings] area.
The dialog box for making notification settings appears.
B Make the following settings:

Items in Notification Message
column: You can set this according to your needs, for example,
the machine's location, service
representative contact information.
Items in the Groups to Notify
column: E-mail notification addresses can be grouped as required.
Items in the Select Groups/Items
to Notify column: Select groups
for each notification type, such as
machine status and error.
To make detailed settings for
these items, click [Edit] next to
[Detailed Settings of Each Item].
C Click [OK].
D Click [Logout].
H Click [OK].
55
Mail authentication
A Click [Configuration] in the menu
You can configure mail authentication to prevent illegal use of the mail
server.
area, and then click [On-demand Email Notification] on the [Device Settings] area.
The dialog box for making notification settings appears.

Notification Subject: Enter a text
string to be added to the subject
line of return e-mails.
Items in Notification Message
column: You can set this according to your needs, for example,
the machine's location, service
representative contact information.
Items in the Access Restriction
to Information column: Select
whether to restrict accesses
based on a specific category of
information.
Items in the Receivable E-mail
Address/Domain Name Settings column: Enter an e-mail
address or domain name to use
for requesting information by email and to receive its return email.
C Click [OK].
D Click [Logout].
56
SMTP Authentication
Specify SMTP authentication.
When mail is sent to the SMTP
server, authentication is performed using the SMTP AUTH
protocol by prompting the mail
originator to enter the user name
and password.This prevents illegal use of the SMTP server.
A In the menu area, click [E-mail]
SMTP Authentication: Enable or disable SMTP authentication.
SMTP Auth. E-mail Address:
Enter the e-mail address.
SMTP Auth. User Name: Enter the SMTP account name.
SMTP Auth. Password: To
set or change the password
for SMTP AUTH.
SMTP Auth. Encryption: Select whether to encrypt the
password or not.
[Encryption]-[Auto Select]: If
the authentication method is
P L A I N , LO G I N , C R A M MD5, or DIGEST-MD5.
[Encryption]-[Enable]: If the
authentication method is
CRAM-MD5 or DIGESTMD5.
[Encryption]-[Disable]: If the
authentication method is
PLAIN or LOGIN.
C Click [OK]
D Click [Logout].
POP before SMTP Authentication

Select whether to log on to the
POP3 server before sending email.
A In the menu area, click [E-mail].
POP before SMTP: Enable or
disable POP before SMTP.
POP E-mail Address: Enter
the e-mail address.
POP User Name: Enter the
POP account name.
POP Password: To set or
change the POP password.
Timeout setting after POP
Auth.: Enter the time available before connecting to the
SMTP server after logging on
to the POP server.
C Click [OK].
D Click [Logout].

To use on-demand e-mail notification, perform the following configuration tasks in Web Image Monitor.
A In the menu area, click [E-mail].
E-mail Notification E-mail Address: Enter the address using
alphanumeric characters.
Receive E-mail Notification:
Specify whether to use on-demand e-mail notification.
E-mail Notification User Name:
Enter the administrator's user
name as the mail originator name.
E-mail Notification Password:
Enter the password of the mail
notification user.
C Click [OK].
D Click [Logout].
Format of on-demand e-mail messages

To use mail notification, you need
to send an on-demand e-mail message to this machine.
Using your mail software, enter
the following:
Item
Description
Subject (Referred
to as Subject)
Enter a request regarding the device.For details,

see thetable below.
From (Referred to
as From)
Specify a valid
mail address. Thedevice information willbe sent to
the address specified here.
Note
A mail message must be within
1 MB in size.
E-mail may be incomplete if sent

immediately after power on.
57
Subject field
Format: devicestatus?parametername=parameter[&=parameter][&=parameter]...
Note
The Subject field is case-insensitive.
Parameter names can be written

in any order.
Subject field coding examples

Coding example
Action
devicestatus?request=sysconfig&format=text&l
ang=en
The device's system configurationinformation will be

sentin an English
text format.
devicestatus?request=sysconfig
The device's system configurationinformation will be

sentin a preset format and language.
Parameters
Parameter
Meaning
Default
request
Information to be
obtained
Mandatory
format
Mail format Mail will be

sent in the
format presetfor each
mail address.
lang
Language
for mail
body
58
Mail will be
sent in the
languagepreset for
each mail
address.
Parameters specifying the

information to be obtained
Information to be
obtained
Parameter
System configuration information
sysconfig
Network configuration information
netconfig
Printer configuration information
prtconfig
Supplies information
supply
Device status information
status
Parameters specifying the mail

format
Mail format
Parameter
Text
text
HTML
html
XML
xml
Note
HTML and XML can be seleceted for subject field, but output is
text only.
Parameters that specify the

language for mail bodies
Language
Parameter
Japanese
ja
English
en
Remote Maintenance by telnet

Important
Remote Maintenance should be
password-protected so that access
is allowed to administrators only.
The password is the same as the

one of Web Image Monitor administrator. When the password is
changed using "mshell", other
passwords change also.
Some command cannot be set depending on the model type.
Using telnet
telnet.
Important
Only one user at a time can log on
to perform remote maintenance.
A Use
the IP address or the host

name of the machine to start telnet.
% telnet IP_address
B Enter your user name and pass-
word.
For user authentication, enter a
login user name and password.
For user code authentication, enter
a user code in User Name.
C Enter a command.
D Quit telnet.
msh> logout
The configuration message about
saving the changes appears.
E Enter "yes" to save the changes,
and then press the {Enter} key.

If you do not want to save the
changes, enter "no", and then press
the {Enter} key. To make further
changes, enter "return" at the command line, and then press the {Enter} key.
Note
If the message "Can not write
NVRAM information" appears,
the changes are not saved. Repeat the procedure above.
When the changes are saved,

the network interface board is
reset automatically with that
changes.
When the network interface
board resets, the print job in
print process will be printed.
However, print jobs in queue
will be canceled.
59
access
Use the access command to view
and configure access control. You can
also specify two or more access ranges.
View settings
msh> access
IPv4 Configuration
msh> access
range
start-address end-address
The star mark represents a target number between 1 and 5.
(Up to five access ranges can be
registered and selected.)
Example: to specify accessible IPv4
addresses between 192.168.0.10
and 192.168.0.20:
msh> access 1 range 192.168.
0.10 192.168.0.20
IPv6 Configuration
msh> access
range6
start-address end-address
addresses between 2001:DB8::100
and 2001:DB8::200.
msh> access 1 range6
2001:DB8::100
2001:DB8::200
60
IPv6 access mask Configuration

msh> access
mask6 baseaddress prefixlen
addresses to 2001:DB8::/32
msh> access 1 mask6 2001:
DB8:: 32
Access control initialization
msh> access flush
Use the "flush" command to restore the default settings so that
all access ranges become
"0.0.0.0" for IPv4, and "::" for
IPv6.
Note
The access range restricts computers from use of the machine by IP
address. If you do not need to restrict printing, make the setting
"0.0.0.0" for IPv4, and "::" for IPv6.
Valid ranges must be from lower

(start address) to higher (end address).
If you are running IPv4 or IPv6, up
to five access ranges can be registered and selected.
IPv6 can register and select the
range and the mask for each access
ranges.
IPv6 mask ranges between 1 - 128
can be selected.
Up to five access ranges can be
specified. The entry is invalid if the
target number is omitted.
You cannot send print jobs, or access Web Image Monitor and
diprint from a restricted IP address.
appletalk
Use the appletalk command to
view and configure Appletalk parameters.
View settings
msh> appletalk
[2] means "active" and [0]
means "inactive".
The default is [2].
Changing PAP timeout configuration
msh> appletalk ptimeout
value > 0
Timeout value becomes effective.
msh> appletalk ptimeout
value = 0
Timeout value becomes ineffective.
authfree
Use the msh> set bonjour command to display and configure authentication exclusion control
settings.
View Settings
msh> authfree
If print job authentication exclusion is not set, authentication exclusion control cannot be
displayed.
IPv4 address settings
msh> authfree "ID" range_
addr1 range_addr2
IPv6 address mask settings

msh> authfree "ID" mask6_
addr1 masklen
Parallel/USB settings
msh> authfree [parallel|
usb] [on|off]
To enable authfree, set to "on". To
disable authfree, set to "off".
Always specify the interface.
Authentication exclusion control initialization

msh> authfree flush
Note
For IPv4 and IPv6, up to five access
ranges can be registered and selected.
autonet
Use the autonet command to configure AutoNet parameters.
View settings
The following command displays
the current AutoNet settings:
msh> autonet
Configuration
You can configure AutoNet settings.
msh> autonet {on|off}
{on} means "active" and {off}
means "inactive".
Current interface priority configuration display
msh> autonet priority
IPv6 address settings

msh> authfree "ID" range6_
addr1 range6_addr2
61
Interface priority configuration

msh> autonet priority
interface_name
You can give interface's AutoNet parameter priority.
Priority settings are available
when multiple interfaces are installed.
ip1394 can be specified only
when the IEEE 1394 interface is
installed.
wlan can be specified only
when the IEEE 802.11b interface
is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
Note
If an interface is not selected, the
current interface connection settings remain in effect.
For details about AutoNet, refer to

autonet parameters.
bonjour(rendezvous)
Use the bonjour(rendezvous) command to display bonjour(rendezvous)-related settings.
View settings
Bonjour settings are displayed.
msh> bonjour
Bonjour service name setting
You can specify the bonjour service name.
msh> bonjour cname computer name
The computer name can be entered using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
Bonjour Installation location information setting
You can enter information about
the location where the printer is installed.
msh> bonjour location location
Information about location can
be entered using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Setting order of priority for each protocol
diprint
msh> bonjour diprint [0
99]
lpr
msh> bonjour lpr [099]
ipp
msh> bonjour ipp [099]
You can specify the order of priority for diprint, lpr, and ipp.
Smaller numbers indicate higher
priority.
62
IP TTL setting
msh> bonjour ip ttl {1-255}
You can specify the IP TTL (the
number of routers a packet can
pass through).
Note
The default is 255.
Resetting the computer name and location information

You can reset the computer name
and location information.
msh> bonjour clear {cname
| location}
cname
Reset the computer name. The
default computer name will be
displayed when the computer is
restarted.
location
Reset the location information.
The previous location information will be deleted.
Interface configuration
msh> bonjour linklocal
interface_name
If many types of interface are installed, configure the interface
that communicates with linklocal address.
If you do not specify an interface, the Ethernet interface is
automatically selected.
ip1394 can be specified only when
the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.
wlan can be specified only when the
IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
wlan
btconfig
Use the "btconfig" command to make
Bluetooth settings.
View settings
Bluetooth settings are displayed.
msh> btconfig
Mode settings
You can set the Bluetooth operation mode to {private} or {public}.
msh> btconfig {private |
public}
The default is {public}.
devicename
Use the "devicename" command to
display and change the printer name.
View settings
msh> devicename
Printer name configuration
msh> devicename name
string
Enter a printer name using up
to 31 alphanumeric characters.
Set single names for each printer.
Printer name initialization
msh> devicename clear name
Reset the printer name to its default.
63
dhcp
Use the "dhcp" command to configure DHCP settings.
View settings
the current DHCP settings.
msh> dhcp
Configuration
You can configure DHCP.
msh> dhcp interface_name
{on|off}
Click {on} to enable dhcp. Click
{off} to disable DHCP.
If the DNS server address and
domain name are obtained from
DHCP, be sure to click {on}.
installed.
when the IEEE 802.11 interface
is installed.
Interface name
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11 interface
Current interface priority configuration display

msh> dhcp priority
Interface priority configuration
msh> dhcp priority interface
_name
You can select which interface
has DHCP parameter priority.
Priority settings are available
when multiple interfaces are installed.
64
DNS server address selection

msh> dhcp dnsaddr {dhcp |
static}
Specify whether to obtain the
DNS server address from the
DHCP server or use the address
set by a user.
To obtain the DNS server address
from the DHCP server, specify
"dhcp". To use the address set by
a user, specify "static".
Domain name selection
msh> dhcp domainname {dhcp
| static}
Specify whether to obtain the
domain name from the DNS
server or use the domain name
set by a user.
To obtain the domain name from
the DHCP server, specify "dhcp".
To use the domain name set by a
user, specify "static".
Reference
p.119 Using DHCP
p.65 dns
p.67 domainname
diprint
dns
The direct printing port enables direct

printing from a network-connected
computer.
Use the diprint command to
change direct printing port settings.
Use the dns command to configure

or display DNS (Domain Name System) settings.
View settings
The following command displays the
current direct printing port settings:
msh> diprint
Example output:
port 9100
timeout=300(sec)
bidirect on
con multi
apl async
The port specifies the port
number of the direct printing
port.
The bidirect setting indicates
whether the direct printing port
is bidirectional or not.
Setting timeout
msh> diprint timeout [30~
65535]
You can specify the timeout interval to use when the printer is
expecting data from the network.
The default is 300 seconds.
Specifying the number of concurrent
connections
msh> diprint con {multi |
single}
The above command specifies
the number of concurrent
diprint connections. Specify
multi for multiple connections or single for a single
connection.
The default is multi.
View settings
current DNS settings:
msh> dns
IPv4 DNS server configuration

The following command enables
or disables the IPv4 DNS server
address:
msh> dns number server
server address
a configuration using the IP address 192.168.15.16 on a DNS 1
server:
msh> dns 1 server 192.168.
15.16
You can register IPv4 DNS Server address.
You can register up to three
IPv4 DNS server numbers.
You cannot use 255.255.255.255
as the DNS server address.
IPv6 DNS server configuration
The following command enables
or disables the IPv4 DNS server
address:
msh> dns number server6
server address
You can register IPv6 DNS Server address.
You can register up to three
IPv6 DNS server numbers.
65
Dynamic DNS function setting

msh> dns interface_name
ddns {on|off}
You can set the dynamic DNS
function "active" or "inactive".
means "inactive".
installed.
is installed.
Interface name
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
wlan
Specifying the record overlap operation

msh> dns overlap {update|add}
You can specify operations performed when records overlap.
update
To delete old records and register new records.
add
To add new records and store
the old records.
When CNAME overlaps, it is always changed, irrespective of
settings.
66
CNAME registration
msh> dns cname {on|off}
You can specify whether to register CNAME.
means "inactive".
The CNAME registered is the
default name beginning with
rnp. CNAME cannot be
changed.
A records registration
msh> dns arecord {dhcp|own}
{dhcp}
You can specify the method of
registering an A record when
the dynamic DNS function is
enabled and DHCP is used.
{own}
To register an A record using
the printer as the DNS client.
The DNS server address and the
domain name already designated are used for the registration.
Record updating interval settings
msh> dns interval time
You can specify the interval after which records are updated
when using the dynamic DNS
function.
The updating interval is specified hourly. It can be entered between 1 and 255 hours.
The default is 24 hours.
domainname
help
Use the "domainname" command to

display or configure the domain
name settings.
You can configure the Ethernet interface, IEEE 1394 interface, or IEEE
802.11b interface.
Use the "help" command to display

the available command list and the
procedures for using those commands.
View settings
the current domain name:
msh> domainname
Interface domain configuration
msh> domainname
interface_name
Setting the Domain Name
msh> domainname interface
_name name domain name
A domain name can be entered
using up to 63 alphanumeric
characters.
The Ethernet interface and IEEE
802.11b interface will have the
same domain name.
installed.
is installed.
Interface
Interface set
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
wlan
Command list display

msh> help
Display of procedure for using commands

msh> help command_name
hostname
Use the hostname command to
change the printer name.
View settings
msh> hostname
IPv4 Configuration
msh> hostname interface
_name printer_name
Enter the printer name using up
You cannot use a printer name
beginning RNP (in either upper or lower case).
The Ethernet interface and IEEE
802.11b interface will have the
same printer name.
installed.
Deleting the Domain Name

msh> domainname interface
_name clear name
67

is installed.

is installed.
Interface name
Interface name
ether
Ethernet interface
ether
Ethernet Interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
ip1394
wlan
IEEE 1394 Interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b Interface
Initializing the printer name for each

interface
msh>hostname interface
_name clear name
ifconfig
Use the "ifconfig" command to view
and configure TCP/IP (IP address,
subnet mask, broadcast address, default gateway address) for the printer.
View settings
msh> ifconfig
IPv4 Configuration
msh> ifconfig interface
_name parameter address
If you did not enter an interface
name, it is automatically set to
the Ethernet interface.
installed.
The following explains how to

configure an IPv4 address
192.168.15.16 on Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether 192.168.
15.16
IPv6 Configuration
msh> ifconfig ether inet6
interface_name printer
_name
The following explains how to
configure a IPv6 address to
2001:DB8::100 with prefix length
64 on the Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether inet6
2001:DB8::100 64
Netmask configuration
_name netmask address
The following explains how to configure a subnet mask 255.255.255.0
on Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether netmask 255.255.255.0
Broadcast address configuration
_name broadcast address
68
Changing the Interface

msh> ifconfig interface up
You can specify either the Ethernet interface or IEEE 802.11b
interface when using the optional IEEE 802.11b interface
unit.
You cannot specify the IEEE
1394 interface.
Note
To get the above addresses, contact
your network administrator.
Use the default configuration if you

cannot obtain setting addresses.
The IP address, subnet mask and
broadcast address are the same as
that for the ethernet interface and
IEEE 802.11b interface.
When installing the optional 1394
Interface board, set the IP address
and subnet mask so that it does not
overlap with the ethernet interface
or the IEEE 1394 interface.
TCP/IP configuration is the same
for both Ethernet and IEEE 802.11
interface. If interfaces are changed,
the new interface inherits the configuration.
Use "0x" as the initial two letters of
a hexadecimal address.
info
Use the "info" command to display
printer information such as paper
tray, output tray, and printer language.
Printer information display

msh> info
Reference
p.86 Getting Printer Information
over the Network
ipp
Use the ipp command to view and
configure IPP settings.
Viewing settings
the current IPP settings:
msh> ipp
IPP timeout configuration

Specify how many seconds the
computer waits before canceling
an interrupted print job. The time
can be entered between 30 to 65535
seconds.
msh> ipp timeout [30 - 65535]
IPP user authorization configuration
Use IPP user authorization to restrict users to print with IPP. The
default is off.
msh> ipp auth {basic|digest|off}
User authorization settings are
basic and digest.
If user authorization is specified, register a user name. You
can register up to 10 users.
IPP user configuration
Configure IPP users according to
the following messages:
msh> ipp user
The following message appears:
msh> Input user number (1
to 10):
Enter the number, user name, and
password.
msh> IPP user name:user1
msh> IPP password:*******
After configuring the settings, the
following message appears:
User configuration changed.
69
ipv6
Remote Printer Number

msh> netware rnum {0254}
Use the ipv6 command to display

and configure IPv6 settings.
Timeout
msh> netware timeout {3255}
View Setting
msh> ipv6
IPv6 stateless address

msh> ipv6 stateless {on|off}
lpr
Use the lpr command to view and
configure LPR settings.
View Setting
msh> lpr
Checking host name when deleting
the job
msh> lpr chkhost {on|off}
Printer server mode

msh> netware mode pserver
msh> netware mode ps
Remote printer mode
msh> netware mode rprinter
msh> netware mode rp
NDS context name
msh> netware context character string
SAP interval
msh> netware sap_interval
Setting login mode for file server
msh> netware login server
netware
Setting login mode for NDS tree

msh> netware login tree
Use the netware command to view

and configure the NetWare settings
such as the print server name or file
server name.
Setting login mode for NDS tree name

msh> netware tree NDS
name
Netware Printer Server Names

msh> netware pname character string
Enter the NetWare print server
name using up to 47 characters.
File transfer protocol

msh> netware trans {ipv4pri|
ipxpri|ipv4|ipx}
If you do not specify the protocol, the current setting is displayed.
Netware File Server Names

msh> netware fname character string
Enter the NetWare file server
name using up to 47 characters.
Encap type
msh> netware encap {802.3|
802.2|snap|ethernet2|auto}
70
Protocol
Set Protocol
ipv4pri
IPv4+IPX(IPv4)
ipxpri
IPv4+IPX(IPX)
ipv4
IPv4
ipx
IPX
passwd
route
Use the passwd command to change

the remote maintenance password.
Use the route command to view

and control the routing table.
Changing the Password

msh> passwd
Enter the current password.
Enter the new password.
Renter the new password to
confirm it.
Specified route information display

msh> route get destination
Specify the IPv4 address to destination.
0.0.0.0 cannot be specified as
destination address.
Changing the Password of the administrators using the Supervisor

msh> passwd {Administrator ID}
Enter the new password.
Renter the new password to
confirm it.
Enabling/disabling specified IPv4

destination
msh> route active {host|net}
destination {on | off}
You can turn the specified destination on or off. Host becomes
the default setting.
Note
Be sure not to forget or lose the
password.
Adding IPv4 Routing Table

msh> route add {host|net}
destination gateway
Adds a host or network route to
destination, and a gateway
address to gateway in the table.
Specify the IPv4 address to destination and gateway.
Host becomes the default setting.
The password can be entered using

up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Passwords are case-sensitive. For
example, "R" is not the same as "r".
prnlog
Use the prnlog command to obtain
printer log information.
Print logs display

msh> prnlog
Display previous print jobs.
msh> prnlog ID Number
Specify the ID number of the
displayed print log information
to display additional details
about a print job.
Reference
p.86 Getting Printer Information
over the Network.
Setting the Default IPv4 Gateway

msh> route add default
gateway
Deleting specified IPv4 destination
from Routing Table
msh> route delete {host|net}
destination
Host becomes the default setting.
IPv4 address of destination can
be specified.
71
Setting IPv6 Default Gateway

msh> route add6 default
gateway
Adding a specified IPv6 destination to
Routing Table
msh> route add6 {destination} prefixlen gateway
Deleting a specified IPv6 destination

from Routing Table
msh> route delete6 {destination} prefixlen
Display information about a specified
IPv6 route information
msh> route get6 {destination}
Enabling/disabling a specified IPv6
destination
msh> route active6 {destination} prefixlen {on |
off}
Route initialization
msh> route flush
Note
The maximum number of IPv4
routing tables is 16.
72
The maximum number of IPv6

routing tables is 2.
Set a gateway address when communicating with devices on an external network.
The same gateway address is
shared by all interfaces.
Prefixlen is a number between 1
and 128.
set
Use the "set" command to set the protocol information display "active" or
"inactive".
View settings
protocol information (active/inactive).
msh> set ipv4
msh> set ipv6
msh> set appletalk
msh> set netware
msh> set smb
msh> set scsiprint
scsiprint is available when the
optional IEEE 1394 interface
board is installed.
msh> set ip1394
ip1394 is available when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board
is installed.
msh> set protocol
When protocol is specified, information about TCP/IP, AppleTalk, Netware, SCSI print,
IPv4 over 1394, PictBridge and
SMB appears.
msh> set lpr
msh> set lpr6
msh> set ftp
msh> set ftp6
msh> set rsh
msh> set rsh6
msh> set diprint
msh> set diprint6
msh> set web
msh> set snmp
msh> set ssl
msh> set ssl6
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
nrs
rfu
rfu6
ipp
ipp6
http
http6
bonjour
nbt
ssdp
ssh
sftp
sftp6
Configuration
Enter upto enable protocol,
and enter down to disable
protocol.
You can set the protocol to "active"
or "inactive".
msh> set ipv4 {up | down}
If you disable IPv4, you cannot
use remote access after logging
off. If you did this by mistake,
you can use the control panel to
enable remote access via IPv4.
Disabling IPv4 also disables
ip1394, lpr, ftp, rsh, diprint,
web, snmp, ssl, ipp, http, bonjour, and sftp
msh> set ipv6 {up | down}
If you disable IPv6, you cannot
use remote access after logging
off. If you did this by mistake,
you can use the control panel to
enable remote access via IPv6.
Disabling IPv6 also disables
lpr6, ftp6, rsh6, diprint6, ssl6,
ipp6, http6, and sftp6.
msh> set appletalk {up | down}
msh> set netware {up | down}
msh> set smb {up | down}
msh> set lpr {up | down}

msh> set lpr6 {up | down}
msh> set ftp {up | down}
msh> set ftp6 {up | down}
msh> set rsh {up | down}
msh> set rsh6 {up | down}
msh> set diprint {up | down}
msh> set diprint6 {up | down}
msh> set web {up | down}
msh> set snmp {up | down}
msh> set ssl {up | down}
msh> set ssl6 {up | down}
If Secured Sockets Layer (SSL,
an encryption protocol) function is not available for the
printer, you cannot use the
function by enabling it.
msh> set nrs {up | down}
msh> set rfu {up | down}
msh> set rfu6 {up | down}
msh> set ipp {up | down}
msh> set ipp6 {up | down}
msh> set http {up | down}
msh> set http6 {up | down}
msh> set bonjour {up |
down}
msh> set ssh {up | down}
msh> set ssdp {up | down}
msh> set nbt {up | down}
msh> set sftp {up | down}
msh> set sftp6 {up | down}
73
show
smb
Use the "show" command to display

network interface board configuration settings.
Use the smb command to configure

or delete the computer or workgroup
name for SMB.
View settings
msh> show
If "-p" is added, you can view
settings one by one.
Computer Name settings

msh> smb comp computer
name
Set computer name using up to
15 characters. Names beginning
with "RNP" or "rnp" cannot be
entered.
Reference
p.98 Configuring the Network Interface Board
slp
Use slp command to view and configure SLP settings.
msh> slp ttl ttl_val
You can search the NetWare server
using SLP in the PureIP environment of NetWare 5/5.1. Using the
"slp" command, you can configure
the value of TTL which can be used
by SLP multicast packet.
The default value of TTL is 1. A
search is executed only within a local segment. If the router does not
support multicast, the settings are
not available even if the TTL value
is increased.
The acceptable TTL value is between 1 and 255.
Working Group Name settings

msh> smb group work group
name
Set workgroup name using up
to 15 characters
Comment settings
msh> smb comment comment
Set comment using up to 31
characters.
Notify print job completion
msh> smb notif {on | off}
To notify print job completion,
specify on. Otherwise, specify
off
Deleting Computer Name
msh> smb clear comp
Deleting Group Name
msh> smb clear group
Deleting Comment
msh> smb clear comment
View Protocol
msh> smb protocol
74
snmp
Use the snmp command to display
and edit SNMP configuration settings
such as the community name.
View settings
msh> snmp
Default access settings 1 is as
follows:
Community name:public
IPv4 address:0.0.0.0
IPv6 address:::
IPX
address:00000000:000000000000
Access type:read-only
Effective
Protocol:IPv4/IPv6/IPX
Default access settings 2 is as
follows:
Community name:admin
IPv4 address:0.0.0.0
IPv6 address:::
IPX
address:00000000:000000000000
Access type:read-write
Effective
Protocol:IPv4/IPv6/IPX
If "-p" is added, you can view
settings one by one.
To display the current community, specify its registration
number.
Community name configuration

msh> snmp number name
community_name
You can configure ten SNMP
access settings numbered 1-10.
The printer cannot be accessed
from SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin or SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client if public is not registered in numbers 1-10. When
changing the community name,
use SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin and SNMP Setup Tool
to correspond with printer settings.
The community name can be
entered using up to 15 characters.
Deleting community name

msh> snmp number clear name
Access type configuration
msh> snmp number type
access_type
Access type
Type of access permission
no
not accessible
read
read only
write
read and write
trap
user is notified of
trapmessages
Display
msh> snmp ?
75
Protocol configuration
msh> snmp {ipv4|ipv6|ipx}
{on|off}
Use the following command to
set protocols "active" or "inactive": If you set a protocol "inactive", all access settings for that
protocol are disabled.
Specify "ipv4" for IPv4, "ipv6"
for IPv6, or "ipx" for IPX/SPX.
means "inactive".
Only IPv4 supports the IEEE
1394 interface.
All protocols cannot be turned
off concurrently.
Configuration of protocol for each

registration number
msh> snmp number active
{ipv4|ipv6|ipx} {on|off}
To change the protocol of access
settings, use the following command. However, if you have
disabled a protocol with the
above command, activating it
here has no effect.
Access configuration
msh> snmp number {ipv4|
ipv6|ipx} address
You can configure a host address according to the protocol
used.
The network interface board accepts requests only from hosts
that have IPv4, IPv6, and IPX
addresses with access types of
"read-only" or "read-write". Enter 0 to have network interface board accept requests from
any host without requiring a
specific type of access.
Enter a host address to deliver
"trap" access type information to.
76
To specify IPv4 or IPv6, enter

"ipv4" or "ipv6" followed by a
space, and then the IPv4 or IPv6
address.
To specify IPX/SPX, enter "ipx"
followed by a space, the IPX address followed by a decimal,
and then the MAC address of
the network interface board.
sysLocation configuration
msh> snmp location
Deleting sysLocation
msh> snmp clear location
sysContact setting
msh> snmp contact
Deleting sysContact
msh> snmp clear contact
SNMP v1v2 function configuration
msh> snmp v1v2 {on|off}
Specify "on" to enable, and "off"
to disable.
SNMP v3 function configuration
msh> snmp v3 {on|off}
to disable.
SNMP TRAP configuration
msh> snmp trap {v1|v2|v3}
{on|off}
to disable.
Remote Configuration Authorization
configuration
msh> snmp remote {on|off}
to disable the SNMP v1v2 setting.
SNMP v3 TRAP configuration display

msh> snmp v3trap
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5}
If a number from 1-5 is entered,
settings are displayed for that
number only.
Configuring a sending address for
SNMP v3 TRAP
{ipv4|ipv6|ipx} address
Configuring a sending protocol for
SNMP v3 TRAP
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} active {ipv4|ipv6|ipx}
{on|off}
Configuring a user account for SNMP
v3 TRAP
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} account account_name
Enter an account name using up
Deleting an SNMP v3 TRAP user account
clear account
Configuring an SNMP v3 encryption
algorithm
msh> snmp v3auth {md5|sha1}
Configuring SNMP v3 encryption
msh> snmp v3priv {auto|on}
Set "auto" for automatic encryption configuration
Set "on" for mandatory encryption configuration.
sntp
The printer clock can be synchronized
with a NTP server clock using Simple
Network Time Protocol (SNTP). Use
the "sntp" command to change SNTP
settings.
View settings
msh> sntp
NTP server address configuration
You can specify the IP address of
the NTP server.
msh> sntp server IP_address
Interval configuration
msh> sntp interval polling
_time
You can specify the interval at
which the printer synchronizes
with the operator-specified
NTP server. The default is 60
minutes.
The interval can be entered
from 0, or between 16 and
10,080 minutes.
If you set 0, the printer synchronizes with the NTP server only
when you turn the printer on. After that, the printer does not synchronize with the NTP server.
Time-zone configuration
msh> sntp timezone +/hour_time
You can specify the time difference between the printer clock
and NTP server clock. The values are between 12:00 and
+13:00.
77
spoolsw
sprint
Use the spoolsw command to view

and configure Job Spool settings.
You can only specify diprint, trap, lpr,
ipp, ftp, sftp, and smb(TCP/IP) protocol.
The spoolsw command for configuring Job Spool settings is available only when the optional hard
disk is installed.
Use the sprint command to view

and configure IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)
settings.
View settings
The Job Spool setting appears.
msh> spoolsw
Job Spool setting
msh> spoolsw spool {on|off}
Note
Specify "on" to enable Job Spool,
or "off" to disable it.
View settings
IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) settings are
displayed.
msh> sprint
Bidirectional configuration for IEEE
1394 (SCSI print)
Use this setting to set IEEE 1394
(SCSI print) bidirectional.
The default is on.
msh> sprint bidi {on | off}
ssdp
Use the ssdp command to view and
configure SSDP settings.
Resetting Job spool setting

msh> spoolsw clear job
{on|off}
When the printer power is cut
during job spooling, this determines whether to reprint the
spooled job.
View settings
msh> ssdp
Protocol configuration
msh> spoolsw diprint
{on|off}
msh> spoolsw lpr {on|off}
msh> spoolsw ipp {on|off}
msh> spoolsw smb {on|off}
msh> spoolsw ftp {on|off}
msh> spoolsw sftp {on|off}
You can specify the settings for
diprint, lpr, ipp, ftp, sftp, and
smb.
Advertise packet TTL settings

msh> ssdp ttl {1255}
The default is 4.
78
Setting effective time

msh> ssdp profile {1801
86400}
The default is 10800 seconds.
ssh
status
Use the ssh command to view and

configure SSH settings.
Use the status command to display

the printer status.
View settings
msh> ssh
view messages
msh> status
Data compression communication

settings
msh> ssh compression
{on|off}
The default is "on".
SSH/SFTP communication port setting
msh> ssh port {22, 1024
65535}
The default is 22.
SSH/SFTP communication timeout
setting
msh> ssh timeout {065535}
The default is 300.
SSH/SFTP communication login timeout setting
msh> ssh logintimeout {0
65535}
The default is 300.
Setting an open key for SSH/SFTP
msh> ssh genkey {512|768|
1024} "character string"
Create an open key for SSH/SFTP
communication.
Usable characters are ASCII 0x200x7e (32 bytes) other than "0".
The default key length is 1024, and
the character string is blank.
Deleting open key for ssh/sftp communication
msh> ssh delkey
Reference
p.86 Current Printer Status
syslog
Use the syslog command to display
the information stored in the printer's
system log.
View message
msh> syslog
Reference
p.105 System Log Information
upnp
Use the "upnp" command to display
and configure the universal plug and
play.
Public URL display

msh> upnp url
Public URL configuration
msh> upnp url "string"
Enter the URL string in the character string.
Deleting Public URL
msh> upnp clear url
Note
If you do not specify a character
string, current setting is displayed.
79
web
Use the web command to display
and configure parameters on Web
Image Monitor.
View Settings
msh> web
URL Configuration
You can set URLs linked by clicking [URL] on Web Image Monitor.
Specify "1" or "2" for x as the
number corresponding to the URL.
Up to two URLs can be registered
and specified.
msh> web url http://The
URL or IP address you want
to register/
Resetting URLs registered as link
destinations
msh> web x clear url
Specify "1" or "2" for x as the corresponding number to the URL.
80
Link name configuration

You can enter the name for URL
that appears on Web Image Monitor.
Specify "1" or "2" for x as the corresponding number to the link
name.
msh> web name Name you
want to display
Resetting URL names registered as
link destinations
msh> web x clear name
Specify "1" or "2" for x as the
number corresponding to the link
name.
Help URL Configuration
You can set URLs linked by clicking [Help] or [?] on Web Image
Monitor.
msh> web help http://Help
URL or IP address/help/
Resetting Help URL
msh> web clear help
wiconfig
Use the "wiconfig" command to make
settings for IEEE 802.11b.
Parameter
Value configured
channel frequency
channelno.
You can enable or

disable the WEP
function. To enable
the WEP function,
specify [on]; to disable it, specify [off].
View settings
msh> wiconfig
View IEEE 802.11b settings
msh> wiconfig cardinfo
If IEEE 802.11b is not working
correctly, its information is not
displayed.
Configuration
msh> wiconfig parameter
Parameter
Value configured
mode [ap|adhoc|802.11adhoc]
You can set the infrastructure

mode(ap) , the
802.11 Adhoc
mode
(802.11adhoc), or
the ad hoc mode
(adhoc).
The default is ad
hoc mode.
ssid IDvalue
You can make settings for the SSID

in the infrastructure mode.
Usable characters
are ASCII 0x200x7e (32 bytes).
An SSID value is
set automatically
to the nearest access point if no setting is made.
If no setting is
made for the
802.11 ad hoc
mode, the samevalue as for the infrastructure mode
or an ASSID value
is automatically
set. The default is
blank.
To start the WEP

function, enter the
correct WEP key.
The default is 11.
key [ key value ]
val [1|2|3|4]
You can specify

the WEP key when
entering in hexadecimal.
With a 64-bit WEP,
you can use 10 digit
hexadecimals.
With a 128-bit
WEP, you can use
26 digit hexadecimals.
Up to four WEP
keys can be registered. Specify the
number to be registered with val.
When a WEP is
specified by key,
the WEP specified
by key phrase is
overwritten.
To use this function, set the same
key number and
WEP key for all
ports that transmit
data to each other.
Put 0xon the
front of WEP key.
You can omit the
numbers with
val. The key
number is set to 1
when making
these omissions.
The default is
blank.
81

Parameter
Value configured
Parameter
Value configured
keyphrase
[ phrase ] val
[1|2|3|4]
You can specify

the WEP key when
entering in ASCII.
rate [auto|11m|
5.5m|2m|1m]
You can set the

IEEE 802.11b transmitting speed.
With a 64-bit WEP,

you can use 10 digit
hexadecimals.
With a 128-bit
WEP, you can use
26 digit hexadecimals.
The speed you

specify here is the
speed at which
data is sent. You
can receive data at
any speed.
auto: automatically set (default)
Up to four WEP
keys can be registered. Specify the
number to be registered with val.
When a WEP is
specified by key
phrase, the WEP
specified by key is
overwritten.
11m: 11 Mbps
fixed
5.5m: 5.5 Mbps
fixed
2m:2 Mbps fixed
1m: 1 Mbps fixed
security
{none|wep|wpa}
To use this function, set the same

key number and
WEP key for all
ports that transmit
data to each other.
You can omit the
numbers with
val. The key
number is set to1
when making
these omissions.
The default is
blank.
encval [1|2|3|4]
wepauth
[open|shared]
You can specify

which of the four
WEP keys is used
for packet encoding. 1 is set if a
number is not
specified.
You can set an authorization mode
when using WEP.
The specified value
and authorized
mode are as follows:
open: open system
authorized (default)
82
shared: shared key

authorized rate
You can specify

the security mode.
none: No encryption(default)S
wep: WEP encryption
wpa: WPA encryption
wpaenc {tkip|ccmp} You can specify

WPA encryption
key when using
WPA encryption.
tkip: TKIP (default)
ccmp: CCMP
(AES)
wpaauth
{wpapsk|wpa}
You can specify

the WPA authentication mode when
using WPA encryption.
wpapsk: WPAPSK authentication(default)
wpa: WPA(802.1X)
authentication

Parameter
Value configured
Parameter
Value configured
psk "character
string"
You can specify the

Pre-Shared key.
username2 "character string"
You can specify

the phase 2 username for EAPTTLS/PEAP phase
2 authentication.
Usable characters:
ASCII 0x20-0x7e (8
to 63 bytes).
Usable characters:
ASCII 0x20-0x7e
(31 bytes) other
than"@". The default is blank.
The default is
blank.
eap
{tls|ttls|leap|pea
p}{chap|mschap|mschapv2|p
ap|md5|tls}
You can specify

the EAP authentication type.
tls: EAP-TLS (default)
domain "character
string"
ttls: EAP-TTLS
leap: LEAP
password "character string"
If you select PEAP,

you can select
mschapv2 or tls.
username "character string"
You can specify

the login user
name for the Radius server.
Usable characters:
ASCII 0x200x7e(31 bytes) other than"@". The default is blank.
You can specify

the login password
for the Radius
server.
Usable characters:
ASCII 0x200x7e(128 bytes).
The default is
blank.
Do not make these

settings when using other EAP authentication types.
If you select EAPTTLS, you can select chap, mschap,
mschapv2, pap, or
md5.
You can specify

the login domain
name for the Radius server.
Usable characters:
ASCII0x20-0x7e
(31 bytes) other
than"@". The default is blank.
peap: PEAP
chap, mschap,
mschapv2, pap,
md5, or tls are settings forthe phase
2 method, and
must be set when
using EAP-TTLS
orPEAP.
srvcert {on|off}
You can set the

server certificate.The default is
"off".
imca {on|off}
You can enable or

disable the certificate when the intermediate
certificate authority is present. The
default is "off".
srvid "character
string"
You can set the

server ID and subdomain of the certificate server.
83
Do not use 255.255.255.255 as

the IP address.
wins
Use the "wins" command to configure
WINS server settings.
Viewing settings
msh> wins
If the IPv4 address obtained
from DHCP differs from the
WINS IPv4 address, the DHCP
address is the valid address.
Configuration
msh> wins interface_name
{on | off}
means "inactive".
Be sure to specify the interface.
installed.
is installed.
Interface name
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
wlan
Address configuration
Use the following command to
configure a WINS server IP address:
{primary|secondary} IP
address
Use the primary command to
configure a primary WINS server IP address.
Use the "secondary" command
to configure a secondary WINS
server IP address.
84
NBT (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) Scope ID

Selection
You can specify the NBT scope ID.
scope scope ID
The scope ID can be entered using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
Be sure to specify the interface.
installed.
is installed.
Interface name
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
wlan
SNMP
SNMP
The SNMP agent operating on UDP
and IPX is incorporated into the builtin Ethernet board and optional IEEE
802.11b interface unit of this printer.
Also, the SNMP agent operating on
UDP is incorporated in the optional
IEEE 1394 interface board.
Using the SNMP manager, you can
get information about the printer.
Important
If you changed the machine's community name, change the configuration of the connected computer
accordingly, using SNMP Setup
Tool. For details, see SNMP Setup
Tool Help.
The default community names are

[public] and [admin]. You can get MIB
information using these community
names.
Supported MIBs(SNMPv1/v2)
MIB-II
PrinterMIB
HostResourceMIB
RicohPrivateMIB
Supported MIBs(SNMPv3)
MIB-II
PrinterMIB
HostResourceMIB
RicohPrivateMIB
SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB
SNMP-TARGET-MIB
SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB
SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB
SNMP-VIEW-BASED-ACMMIB
Start SNMP Setup Tool

Windows 95/98/Me, Windows
2000, Windows NT 4.0:
Click the [Start] button.
Point to [SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin] on the [Programs] menu.
Click [SNMP Setup Tool].
Windows XP:
Click the [Start] button.
Point to [SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin] on the [All Programs]
menu.
Click [SNMP Setup Tool].
85
Getting Printer Information over the Network

This section explains details of each item displayed in the printer status and information.
This manual covers all models, and therefore contains functions and settings
that may not be available for your model.
2
Current Printer Status
The printer status can be checked using the following commands:
UNIX: Use the "lpq" command and "rsh", "rcp", ftp, and "sftp" parameters.
mshell: Use the "status" command.
Messages
86
Description
1-Sheet Bypass Error: No Select
The one sheet bypass tray is open but printing from

another tray was selected.
1-Sheet Bypass Error: Not Open
The one sheet bypass tray is closed but printing from

the one sheet bypass tray was selected.
1-Sheet Output Error: No Select
The one sheet bypass tray is open but printing from

another tray was selected.
1-Sheet Output Error: Not Open
The one sheet bypass tray is closed but printing from

the one sheet bypass tray was selected.
Access Restricted
The job was canceled because user have no authority.
Add staples (Booklet: Back)
The staple of booklet finisher (back) is exhausted.
Add staples (Booklet: Both)
The staple of booklet finisher is exhausted.
Add staples (Booklet: Front)
The staple of booklet finisher (front) is exhausted.
Adjusting...
The machine is initializing or calibrating.
Alert at Printer: Yellow LED
An error has occurred.
Call Service Center
There is a malfunction in the machine.
Canceled
The job is reset.
Canceling Job...
The job is being reset.
Card/Counter not inserted
The machine is waiting for prepaid card or key.
Coin or amount not inserted
The machine is waiting for coin to be inserted.
Coin/Key Counter not inserted
The machine is waiting for coin or key counter.
Configuring...
Setting is being changed.
Cooling Down Fusing Unit...
The fusing unit is cooling down.
Copy Tray
Internal tray is full.
Cover Open: ADF
The document feeder is open.
Cover Open: Bridge Unit Left
The cover of the left bridge unit is open.
Cover Open: Bridge Unit Center
The cover of the middle bridge unit is open.

Messages
Description
Cover Open: Duplex Unit Left
The cover of the left duplex unit is open.
Cover Open: Duplex Unit Right
The cover of the right duplex unit is open.
Cover Open: Fin. Front Left
A front left cover of Finisher is open.
Cover Open: Fin. Front Right
A front right cover of Finisher is open.
Cover Open: Bridge Unit Right
The cover of the right bridge unit is open.
Cover Open: Duplex Unit
The cover of the duplex unit is open.
Cover Open: Finisher
The cover of Finisher is open.
Cover Open: Finisher Cover
The cover of Finisher is open.
Cover Open: Finisher Front
The front cover of Finisher is open.
Cover Open: Finisher Rear
The cover of the rear finisher is open.
Cover Open: Finisher Upper
The upper cover of Finisher is open.
Cover Open: Finisher Upper-L
A upper left cover of Finisher is open.
Cover Open: Finisher Upper-R
A upper right cover of Finisher is open.
Cover Open: Front Cover
The front cover is open.
Cover Open: Fusing Unit Cover
The cover of the fusing unit is open.
Cover Open: Interposer Tray Low
The lower cover of the interposer unit is open.
Cover Open: Interposer Tray Up
The upper cover of the interposer unit is open.
Cover Open: LCT Front Cover
The front cover of the Large Capacity tray is open.
Cover Open: Lower Left Cover
The lower left cover is open.
Cover Open: Lower Right Cover
The lower right cover is open.
Cover Open: Mailbox
A cover of Mailbox is open.
Cover Open: Mid-Covers
Covers for anti jamming are open.
Cover Open: Z-folding Upper
An upper cover of Z fold unit is open.
Cover Open: Right Cover
The right cover is open.
Cover Open: Shift Tray Cover
The shift tray cover is open.
Cover Open: Upper Cover
The upper cover is open.
Cover Open: Upper Left Cover
The upper left cover is open
Cover Open: Upper Right Cover
The upper right cover is open.
Data Size Error
The data size error occurred.
Empty: Black Toner
The black toner cartridge is almost empty.
Empty: Cyan Toner
The cyan toner cartridge is almost empty.
Empty: Magenta Toner
The magenta toner cartridge is almost empty.
Empty: One of Toner Bottles
One of the toner bottles is empty.
Empty: Toner
The toner cartridge is almost empty.
Empty: Yellow Toner
The yellow toner cartridge is almost empty.
87

Messages
Description
Energy Saver Mode
The machine is in Energy Saver Mode.
Envelope Setting Error: None
Printing paper type other than envelope is instructed

when B2 lever is down.
Envelope Setting Error: Others
Printing envelope is instructed when B2 lever is down.
Error
Error at Printer: Red LED
Error in Printer
Error: Address Book
An error has occurred in the data of the address book.
Error: Command Transmission
An error has occurred in the machine.
Error: DIMM Value
A memory error occurred.
Error: Ethernet Board
An Ethernet board error has occurred.
Error: HDD Board
A hard disk drive board error has occurred.
Error: IEEE1394 Board
An IEEE 1394 interface board error has occurred.
Error: Media Link Board
An error has occurred on the media link board.
Error: Memory Switch
A memory switch error has occurred.
Error: Optional Font
An error has occurred in the font file of the machine.
Error: Optional RAM
An error has occurred in the optional memory unit.
Error: Parallel I/F Board
An error has occurred in the parallel interface.
Error: PDL
An error has occurred in the page description language.
Error: Rem. Certificate Renewal
An error has occurred in the remote sever renewal.
Error: USB Board
An error has occurred in theUSB interface board.
Error: USB Interface
An error has occurred in the USB interface.
Error: Wireless Card
Wireless card is not inserted during start up, or the

IEEE 802.11b interface unit or the wireless card is taken out after start up .
Error: Wireless Card or Board
An error has occurred in the IEEE 802.11b interface unit.
Exceed Booklet Stapling Limit
The printing has exceeded the stapling limit of the

booklet finisher.
Full: 1-Sheet Output
The one sheet output tray is full.
Full: Copy Tray
The output paper tray is full.
Full: Finisher
Finisher tray is full.
Full: Finisher Booklet Tray
Booklet tray of Finisher is full.
Full: Finisher Shift Tray
Shift tray of Finisher is full.
Full: Finisher Shift Tray 1, 2
The shift tray 1 and 2 of Finisher are full.
Full: Finisher Tray
Finisher Tray is full.
Full: Finisher Upper Tray
Finisher's upper tray is full.
Full: Front Collector Bottle
Front waste toner bottle is full.
88

Messages
Description
Full: Hole Punch Receptacle
Punch Chip receptacle for hole punch is full.
Full: Internal Shift Tray
The internal shift tray is full.
Full: Internal Tray 1
Internal tray 1 is full.
Full: Internal Tray 2
Internal tray 2 is full.
Full: Mailbox Tray 1
Mailbox Tray 1 is full.
Mailbox Tray 2 is full. Full:
Full: Mailbox 6
Full: Waste Staples
Waste Staples.
Full: Waste Toner
Waste toner is full.
Full: Waste Toner Bottle
Waste toner bottle is full.
Hex Dump Mode
It is a hex dump mode.
Immed. Trans. not connected
It did not connect directly with the other party of the

transmission.
Immediate Transmission Failed
An error has occurred while transmitting directly.
In Use: Copier
The copier is being used.
In Use: Fax
The fax is being used.
In Use: Finisher
Other functions is using Finisher.
In Use: Input Tray
Other functions is using the input tray.
In Use: Staple Unit
Other functions is using the staple unit.
Independent-supplier Toner
Toner that is not recommended is set.
Key Card not inserted
The machine is waiting for key card to be inserted.
Key Card/Counter not inserted
The machine is waiting for key card or key counter to

be inserted.
Key Counter not inserted
The machine is waiting for key counter to be left in it.
Loading Toner...
Toner is being supplied.
Low: Black Toner
The black toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner

is almost running out.
Low: Cyan Toner
The cyan toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is

almost running out.
Low: Magenta Toner
The magenta toner cartridge is not set correctly, or

toner is almost running out.
89

Messages
Description
Low: Toner
The toner cartridge is not set correctly,or toner is almost running out.
Low: Yellow Toner
The yellow toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner

is almost running out.
Malfunction: Booklet Stapler
There is a problem with booklet finisher.
Malfunction: Booklet Processor
There is a problem with booklet finisher.
Malfunction: Duplex Unit
There is a problem with the duplex unit.
Malfunction: Ext. Charge Unit
There is a problem with the external charge unit.
Malfunction: Finisher
There is a problem with the finisher.
Malfunction: Interposer
There is a problem with the interposer.
Malfunction: LCT
There is a problem with the large capacity tray.
Malfunction: Multi-hole Punch GPC
There is a problem with the multi hole punching unit.
Malfunction: Output Tray
There is a problem with the output tray.
Malfunction: Staple Unit
There is a problem with the staple unit.
Malfunction: Tray 1
There is a problem with tray 1.
Malfunction: Tray 2
Malfunction: Tray 3
Malfunction: Tray 3 (LCT)
There is a problem with tray 3 (LCT).
Malfunction: Tray 4
Malfunction: Tray 5
Malfunction: Tray 6
Malfunction: Tray 7
Memory Low: Copy
Memory shortage has occurred while the copy was

operating.
Memory Low: Data Storage
Memory shortage has occurred while the document

was being accumulated.
Memory Low: Fax Scanning
Memory shortage has occurred while transmitting the fax.
Memory Low: Scanning
Memory shortage has occurred while the scanner was working.
Miscellaneous Error
Other error has occurred.
Mismatch: Paper Size
Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of selected size.
Mismatch: Paper Size and Type
Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of selected size and type.
Mismatch: Paper Type
Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of selected type.
Near Replacing: Black PCU
Prepare the new black photoconductor unit.
Near Replacing: Cleaning Unit
Prepare the new cleaning unit.
Near Replacing: Color Dev. Unit
Prepare the new color development unit.
Near Replacing: Color PCU
Prepare the new color photoconductor unit.
90

Messages
Description
Near Replacing: Develop. Unit C
Prepare the new development unit (cyan).
Near Replacing: Develop. Unit K
Prepare the new development unit (black).
Near Replacing: Develop. Unit M
Prepare the new development unit (magenta).
Near Replacing: Develop. Unit Y
Prepare the new development unit (yellow).
Near Replacing: Fusing Unit
Prepare the new fusing unit.
Near Replacing: Maintenance Kit
Prepare the new maintenance kit.
Near Replacing: Transfer Unit
Prepare the new transfer unit.
Nearly Full: Collector Bottle
Waste toner bottle is nearly full.
Nearly Full: Waste Toner
Nearly Full:Front CollectBottle
Front collector bottle is nearly full.
Nearly Full:Sucked Toner Bottle
Need more Booklet Staples
Stapler has almost run out of staples.
No Paper: 1-Sheet Bypass
There is no paper in 1-sheet bypass tray.
No Paper: Interposer Tray
There is no paper in interposer unit.
No Paper: Selected Tray
There is no paper in specified tray.
No Paper: Tray 1
There is no paper in tray 1.
No Paper: Tray 1 (LCT)
There is no paper in the large capacity tray (tray 1).
No Paper: Tray 2
No Paper: Tray 3
No Paper: Tray 3 (LCT)
There is no paper in tray 3 (Large Capacity tray).
No Paper: Tray 4
No Paper: Tray 5
No Paper: Tray 6
No Paper: Tray 7
Not Detected: B2 Lever
B2 lever is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Black Toner
Black toner is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Charger
Charger is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Cleaning Unit
The cleaning unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Cyan Toner
Cyan toner is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Develop. Unit (C)
The development unit (cyan) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Develop. Unit (K)
The development unit (black) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Develop. Unit (M)
The development unit (magenta) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Develop. Unit (Y)
The development unit (yellow) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Duplex Feed Unit
The duplex unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Duplex Unit
The duplex feed unit is not correctly set.
91

Messages
92
Description
Not Detected: Finisher
Finisher is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Fusing Unit
The fusing unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Input Tray
The paper feed tray is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Interposer
Interposer unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: LCT
A large amount of paper feed tray is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Magenta Toner
Magenta toner is not correctly set.
Not Detected: PCU
The photoconductor unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: PCU (C)
The photoconductor unit (cyan) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: PCU (K)
The photoconductor unit (black) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: PCU (M)
The photoconductor unit (magenta) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: PCU (Y)
The photoconductor unit (yellow) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Transfer Roller
The transfer roller is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Transfer Unit
The transfer unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Tray 1
Tray 1 is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Tray 1 (LCT)
The large capacity tray (tray 1) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Tray 3 (LCT)
The large capacity tray (tray 3) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: WasteToner Bottle
Waste toner bottle is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Yellow Toner
Yellow toner is not correctly set.
Not Reached, Data Deleted
Unreached job is deleted.
Offline
Printer is offline.
Original on Exposure Glass
The original remains on the exposure glass.
Operating Thermo-range Error
The machine is operating outside the permissible temperature range.
Panel Off Mode
The machine is in Panel-Off mode.
Panel Off Mode>>Printing ava.
The machine is in Control Panel-Off mode.
Paper in Duplex Unit
The paper remains in the duplex unit.
Paper in Finisher
The paper remains in Finisher.
Paper Misfeed: ADF
The paper has jammed in Document Feeder.
Paper Misfeed: BookletProcessor
The paper has jammed in booklet finisher.
Paper Misfeed: Duplex Unit
The paper has jammed in the duplex unit.

Messages
Description
Paper Misfeed: Finisher
The paper has jammed in Finisher.
Paper Misfeed: Input Tray
The paper has jammed in the input tray.
Paper Misfeed: Internal Path
The paper has jammed inside the machine.
Paper Misfeed: Internal/Output
The paper has jammed inside the machine.
Paper Misfeed: Interposer
The paper has jammed in interposer unit.
Paper Misfeed: Mailbox
The paper has jammed in the mailbox.
Paper Misfeed: Z-folding unit
The paper has jammed in Z fold unit.
Paper Misfeed:Booklet Processor
The paper has jammed in booklet finisher.
Paper on Finisher Shift Tray 2
The paper remains in Finisher Shift Tray 2.
Paper on FinisherShiftTray1, 2
The paper remains in Finisher Shift Tray 1 and 2.
Paper on Paper Bypass
The paper remains in the bypass tray.
Prepaid Card not inserted
The machine is waiting for prepaid card to be inserted.
Print Complete
The print was completed.
Printing...
Printing is in progress.
Processing
Data is being processed.
Proxy Address / Port Incorrect
The proxy address and port setting is incorrect.
Proxy User / Password Incorrect
The proxy user name and password setting is incorrect.
RC Gate Connection Error
Failed connection with RC Gate.
Ready
The machine is ready to print.
Remove seal strip on: Black
The seal strip on the new development unit (black) is

still attached.
Remove seal strip on: Cyan
The seal strip on new development unit (cyan) is still

attached.
Remove seal strip on: Magenta
The seal strip on new development unit (magenta) is

still attached.
Remove seal strip on: Yellow
The seal strip on new development unit (yellow) is

still attached.
Renewing Remote Certificate
The remote certificate is being renewed.
Replace Charger Unit
It is time to replace the charger unit.
Replace Black PCU
It is time to replace the black photoconductor unit.
Replace Charger Kit
It is time to replace the charger kit.
Replace Cleaning Web
It is time to replace the Cleaning Web.
Replace Color PCU
It is time to replace the photoconductor unit (color).
Replace Develop. Unit
It is time to replace the development unit.
Replace Develop. Unit (Black)
It is time to replace the development unit (black).
Replace Develop. Unit (Color)
It is time to replace the development unit (color).
Replace Develop. Unit (Cyan)
It is time to replace the development unit (cyan).
93

Messages
Description
Replace Develop. Unit (Magenta)
It is time to replace the development unit (magenta).
Replace Develop. Unit (Yellow)
It is exchange time of the development unit (yellow).
Replace Feed Belt
It is time to replace the feed belt.
Replace Feed Roller
It is time to replace the transfer roller.
Replace Fuser Oil Unit
It is time to replace the fuser oil unit.
Replace Fusing Unit
It is time to replace the fusing unit.
Replace PCU
It is time to replace the photoconductor unit.
Replace PCU(Color)
It is time to replace the photoconductor unit(Color).
Replace Sustainer Unit
It is time to replace the sustainer unit.
Replace Toner Suction Motor
It is time to replace the toner suction motor.
Replace Transfer Belt
It is time to replace the transfer belt.
Replace Transfer Cleaning Unit
It is time to replace the transfer cleaning unit.
Retarding...
Printing has stopped momentarily to allow printed

sheets to dry.
SD Card Authentication failed
SD card authentication failed.
Setting Remotely
The RDS setting is being processed.
Shift Tray
Internal output tray is full.
Skipped due to Error
Skipped the error.
Storage Complete
The storage is complete.
Storage Failed
The storage has failed.
Supplies Order Call failed
The supply order call has failed.
Suspend / Resume Key Error
Finisher stop button was pressed.
Transmission Aborted
The transmission was interrupted.
Transmission Complete
The transmission completion was completed.
Transmission Failed
The transmission has failed.
Tray Error: Chaptering
The paper feed tray specification error has occurred

because chaptering as well as the normal paper use
the same tray for printing.
Tray Error: Duplex Printing
Selected paper tray cannot be used for duplex printing.
Unit Left Open: ADF
Document feeder is opened.
Waiting for Job Suspension
The machine is waiting for Job Suspension.
Warming Up...
The machine is warming up.
Note
For details about UNIX commands, see UNIX Supplement.
Check the error contents that may be printed in the configuration page. For
details about printing a configuration page, see Printer Reference.
94
Printer configuration
You can check the printer configuration using telnet.
This section explains the checking procedure for input/output tray and printer
language.
UNIX: Use the "info" command and "rsh", "rcp", ftp, and "sftp" parameters.
mshell: Use the "info" command.
Input Tray
Item
Description
No.
ID number of the paper tray
Name
Name of the paper tray
PaperSize
Size of paper loaded in the paper tray
Status
Current status of the paper tray

Normal: Normal
NoInputTray: No tray
PaperEnd: No paper
Output Tray
Item
Description
No.
ID number of the output tray
Name
Name of the output tray
Status
Current status of the output tray

Normal: Normal
PaperExist: Paper exist
OverFlow: Paper is full
Error: Other errors
Printer Language
Item
Description
No.
ID number of the printer language used by the

printer
Name
Name of the printer language used in the

printer
Version
Version of the printer language
Note
For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.
95
Understanding the Displayed Information

This section explains how to read status information returned by the network interface board.
Print Job Information
Use the following command to display print job information:

UNIX: Use the "info" command and "rsh", "rcp", ftp, and "sftp" parameters.
mshell: Use the "info" command.
Item
Description
Rank
Print job status.

Active
Printing or preparing for printing.
Waiting
Waiting to be transferred to the printer.
Owner
Print request user name.
Job
Print request number.
Files
The name of the document.
Total Size
The size of the data (spooled).

The default is 0 bytes.
Note
96
Print Log Information

This is a record of the most recent jobs printed.
Use the following command to display print log information:
UNIX: Use the "prnlog" command and "rsh", "rcp", "ftp", and "sftp" parameters.
telnet : Use the prnlog comman
Item
Description
ID
Print request ID.
User
Print request user name.
Page
Number of pages printed
Result
Print Request Result
Communication Result
OK
Print was completed normally. However, the print resultmay
not be as required due to printer problems.
NG
Printing was not completed normally.
Canceled
An "rcp", "rsh", or "lpr" command print request was canceled,possibly due to the printing application. Not applicable
to the "ftp" or "rprinter"command.
Time
Time the print requested was received.

Time of print request reception
User ID
Printer driver-configured User ID.

Appears when the print request ID is specified.
JobName
Name of the document for printing

Appears when the print request ID is specified.
Note
97
Configuring the Network Interface Board

Use the following command to display network interface board settings:
telnet : Use the show command.
Item
Description
Common
Mode
Protocol Up/Down
Protocol Settings
AppleTalk
IPv4
IPv6
TCP/IP
Netware
SMB
IPv4 over1394
SCSI print
PictBridge
Device Up/Down
Device Settings
Parallel
USB
Bluetooth
Ethernet interface
Syslog priority
NVRAM version
Device name
Comment
Location
Contact
Soft switch
AppleTalk
Mode
Net
Object
Type
Zone
98
AppleTalk settings

Item
Description
TCP/IP
TCP/IP settings
Mode(IPv4)
Mode(IPv6)
ftp
lpr
rsh
telnet
diprint
web
http
ftpc
snmp
ipp
autonet
bonjour
ssl
nrs
rfu
nbt
ssdp
ssh
sftp
IPv4
DHCP
Address
Netmask
Broadcast
Gateway
IPv6
Stateless
Manual
Gateway
EncapType
Host name
DNS Domain
99

Item
Description
Access Control
IPv4
Access Control settings

X can be set between 1 and 5.
Access Entry[X]
IPv6
Access Entry[X]
Time server

Time settings
Time Zone
Time server polling time
SYSLOG server
Home page URL1
Home page linkname1
Home page URL2
Home page linkname2
Help page URL
Netware
EncapType
RPRINTER number
Print server name
File server name
Context name
Switch
Mode
NDS/Bindery
Packet negotiation
Login Mode
Print job timeout
Protocol
SAP interval time
NDS Tree Name
Transfer Protocol
100
Websys settings

Item
Description
SMB
SMB settings
Switch
Mode
Direct print
Notification
Workgroup name
Computer name
Comment
Share name [1]
Protocol
IPv4 over 1394
IPv4 over 1394 settings
Host name
DHCP
Address
Netmask
Broadcast
DNS Domain
SCSI print
Bidi
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b settings
Host Name
Communication mode
SSID
Channel range
Channel
TX Rate
Security
WEP Authentication
WEP Encryption key number
WEP encryption
WEP Encryption keys [X]
WPA Encryption
WPA Authentication
Pre-Shared Key
User name
101

Item
Description
Domain name
EAP Type
Password
Phase 2 username
Phase 2 Method TTLS
Phase 2 Method PEAP

Server cert
Intermediate CA
Server ID
DNS
DNS settings
IPv4
Server[X]
Selected IPv4 DNS Server

IPv6
Server[X]
Domain Name
ether
wlan
ip1394
DDNS
ether
wlan
ip1394
WINS
WINS settings
ether
Primary WINS
Secondary WINS
wlan
Primary WINS
Secondary WINS
ip1394
Primary WINS
Secondary WINS
Bluetooth
Bluetooth mode
102
Bluetooth settings
Bluetooth connection mode

Item
Description
SSDP
SSDP settings
UUID
Profile
TTL
UPnP
UPnP settings
URL
Bonjour
Bonjour (Redezvous) settings
Computer Name (cname)

Local Hostname<ether>
Local Hostname<ip1394>
Local Hostname<wlan>
Location
Priority <diprint>
Priority <lpr>
Priority <ipp>
IP TTL
LinkLocal Route for MultiI/F
SNMP
SNMP settings
SNMPv1v2
SNMPv3
protocol
v1Trap
v2Trap
v3Trap
SNMPv1v2 Remote Setting
SNMPv3 Privacy
ssh
ssh settings
Compression
Port
TimeOut
Login TimeOut
103

Item
Description
AuthFree
Authfree settings
IPv4
AuthFreeEntry[X]
IPv6
AuthFreeEntry[X]
X can be set between 1 and 5
Parallel
USB
LPR
lprm check host
Certificate
Verification
Shell mode
104
Remote maintenance tool mode
Message List
Message List
This is a list of messages that appear in the machine's system log. The system log
can be viewed using the "syslog" command.
System Log Information
Use the following command to display the system log information:

UNIX: Use the "syslog" command and "rsh", "rcp", ftp, and "sftp" parameters.
telnet : Use the syslog command.
Message
Problem and solutions
Access to NetWare server <file server name>

denied. Either there is no account for this print
server on the NetWare server or the password
was incorrect.
(In the print server mode) Login to the file

server failed.Make sure that the print server is
registered on the file server. If a password is
specified for the print server, delete it.
account is unavailable:
User account is disabled. This could be because it use the same account name as the administrator account.
Same account name be used.

The authentication password is not set up.
encryption is impossible.
User account is disabled. This could be because the authentication password is not set,
and only the encryption account is set.
Encryption is not possible and account is disabled. This could be because:
Security option is not installed.
Encryption password has not been specified.
add_sess_IPv4: bad trap <IPv4 address>community <community name>
The IPv4 address (0.0.0.0.) is unavailable when

the community access type is TRAP. Specify
the host IPv4 address for the TRAP destination.
add_sess_IPv6: bad trap <IPv6 address>community <community name>
The IPv6 address [::] is unavailable when the

community access type is TRAP. Specify the
host IPv6 address for the TRAP destination.
add_sess_IPv4: community<community
name> already defined.
The same community name already exists.

Use another community name.
add_sess_IPv6: community <community

name> already defined.

add_sess_IPX: bad trap<IPX address>commu- The IPX address (00:00:00:00:00:00) is unavailnity <community name>
able when the community access type is
TRAP. Specify the host IPX address for the
TRAP destination.
add_sess_ipx: community <communityname> already defined.

Attach FileServer= <file servername>
Connection to the file server as the nearest

server has been established.
105
Message
Attach to print queue <print queue name>
(In the print server mode) Attached to the

print queue.
Authentication mode mismatch< SSID >
Authentication mode is different to the AP. The

required SSID is the SSID of the access point
connected to when in infrastructure mode.
btd is disabled.
Communication via Bluetooth is unavailable

because btd is disabled in the security mode.
Enable the btd in the security mode.
centrod is disabled.
Communication via parallel connection is unavailable because centrod is disabled in the security mode.
Enable centrod in the security mode.
Cannot create service connection
(In the remote printer mode) Connection to the

file server has not been established. The
number of file server users may have exceeded
the maximum capacity of the file server.
Cannot find rprinter (<print server

name>/<printer number>)
The printer with the number displayed on the

print server does not exist. Make sure that the
printer number is registered on the print server.
Change IP address from DHCP Server.
The IP address changes when DHCP lease is renewed. To always assign the same IP address,
set a static IP address to the DHCP server.
child process exec error! (process name)
The network service failed to start. Turn the

printer off and then on. If this does not work,
contact your service or sales representative.
Client password rejected
The client's password was rejected. Check the

client password.
Client tls certificate rejected
The client's TLS certificate was rejected. Check

the certificate.
Connected DHCP Server(<DHCP serveraddress>).
The IP address was successfully received from

the DHCPserver.
Could not attach to FileServer<error number> (In the remote printer mode) Connection to the
file server has not been established. The file
server has refused the connection. Check the
file server configuration.
Could not attach to PServer<print server>

print server has not been established. The
print server has refused the connection. Check
the print server configuration.
Current Interface Speed:xxxMbps
Speed of the network (10Mbps, 100 Mbps, or

1Gbps).
Current IP address <currentIP address>
Current IPv4 address.
Current IPX address<IPX address>
Current IPX address
106
Message List
Message
DHCP lease time expired.
DHCP lease time has expired.The printer tries

to discover the DHCP server again. The IP address until now becomes invalid.
DHCP server not found.
The DHCP server was not found. Make sure

that the DHCP is on the network.
dhcpcd start.
The DHCPCD service (dhcp client service) has

started.
dpsd is disabled.
Communication via PictBridge is unavailable

because PictBridge is disabled in the security
mode. Enable PictBridge in the security mode.
Duplicate IP=<IP address>(from<MAC address>).
The same IP address (IPv,or IPv6 address) was

used. Each IP address (IPv, or IPv6 address)
must be unique. Check the address of the device indicated in [MAC address].
Established SPX Connection with PServer,(RPSocket=<socketnumber>, connID=<connectionID>)

print server has been established.
exiting
The lpd service has ended and the system is

exiting the process.
Exit pserver
(In the print server mode) The print server

function is disabled because the necessary
print server settings have not been made.
Frametype =<frame typename>
The frame type name is configured to be used

on NetWare.
httpd start.
The httpd service has started.
IEEE 802.11b <communication mode> mode
Displays IEEE 802.11b communication mode.
inetd start.
The inetd service has started.
Interface (interface name): Duplicate IP Address (IP address).
The same IP (IPv4 or IPv6) address was used.

Each IP address must be unique. Check the address of the device indicated in [IP address].
< Interface > started with IP: < IP address >
IP address (IPv4, or IPv4 address) has been set

for the interface and is operating..
< Interface >: Subnet overlap.
The same IP address (IPv, orIPv6 address) and

the subnet mask is used with other device.
IPP cancel-job: permission denied.
The printer could not authenticate the name of

the user attempting to cancel a job.
ipp disable.
Printing with ipp is disabled.
ipp enable.
Printing with ipp is enabled.
IPP job canceled. jobid=%d.
The spooled job was canceled due to error or

user request.
LeaseTime=<lease time>(sec), RenewTime=<renewtime>(sec).
The resource lease time received from the

DHCP server is displayed in [lease time] in
seconds. The renewal time is displayed in [renewtime] in seconds.
107

Message
Login to fileserver <file server name>

(<IPX|IPv4|IPv6>,<NDS|BINDERY|NDS|BINDERY>)
(In the print server mode) Login to the file

server is in the NDS or BINDERY mode.
Memory allocate error.
Data cannot be obtained.

Disconnect the USB cable, and then connect it.
Name registration success. WINS Server=<WINS server address> NetBIOS

Name=<NetBIOSname>
Name registration of <NetBIOS Name> to

<WINS serveraddress> was successful.
Name registration success in Broadcast

name=<NetBIOS Name>
Name registration by Broadcast name of <NetBIOS Name>was successful.
Name registration failed. name=<NetBIOS

name>
Name registration of <NetBIOSName> failed.

Change to different NetBIOS name.
nbtd start.
The nbtd service has started.
nprinter start (Netware)
(In the remote printer mode) The NetWare

service has started.
nwstart start. (NetWare)
The service for NetWare protocol stack setting

has started.
Open log file <file name>
(In the print server mode)The specified log file

has been opened.
phy release file open failed.
Replacing the network interface board is required.

Contact your sales or service representative.
Print queue <print queue name> cannot be

serviced by printer 0, <print servername>
(In the print server mode) The print queue

cannot be established. Make sure that print
queue exists on the specified file server.
Print server <print servername>has no printer. (In the print server mode) The printer is not assigned to the print server. Using NWadmin,
assign the printer, and then restart it.
print session full
No more print jobs can be accepted.
Printer <printer name> has no queue
(In the print server mode) The print queue is

not assigned to the printer. Using NWadmin,
assign the print queue to the printer, and then
restart it.
pserver start. (NetWare)
(In the print server mode) The NetWare service has started.
Required file server (<file servername>) not

found
The required file server is not found.
received EAP Failure
EAP reception failed.
restarted.
The lpd service has started.
sap enable, saptype=<SAP type>, sapname=<SAP name>
The SAP function has started.The SAP packet

is issued to advertise the service on the SAP table on the NetWare server.
server identity invalid
The server ID is disabled. Check the server authentication.
108
Message List
Message
session IPv4 <community name> not defined. The requested community name is not defined.
session IPv6 <community name> not defined. The requested community name is not defined.
session <community name> already defined.
The requested community name is not defined.
session_ipx <community name> not defined.
The requested community name is not defined.
Set context to <NDS contextname>
An NDS context name has been set.
smbd start. (NETBIOS)
The smbd service has started.
SMTPC: failed to get smtp server ip-address.
The SMTP server IP address could not be obtained. This could be because:
The specified DNS server could not be found.

No connection to the network has been established.
The specified DNS server could not be found.
An incorrect DNS server is specified.
The specified SMTP server IP address
could not be found in the DNS server.
SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server. timeout.
Connection to the SMTP server failed due to

timeout. This could be because the specified
SMTP server name is incorrect, or no connection to the network has been established, or the
network configuration is incorrect, so there is
no response from the SMTP server. Check the
SMTP server name,or the network connection
and configuration.
SMTPC: refused connect by smtp server.
Connection to the SMTP server is denied. This

could be because server other than the SMTP
server has been specified, or the specified
SMTP server port number is incorrect. Check
the SMTP server name, port number, or the
SMTP server port number.
SMTPC: no smtp server. connection close.
Connection to the SMTP server failed due to

no response from SMTP. This could be because a server other than the SMTP server has
been specified, or the specified SMTP server
port number is incorrect. Check the SMTP
server name, port number, or the SMTP server
port number.
109

Message
SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server.
Connection to the SMTP server failed. This

could be because no connection to the network
has been established, or the network configuration is incorrect, so there is no response from
the SMTP server, or the specified SMTP server
name is incorrect, or the specified SMTP server
IP address could not be found in the DNS server, or a server other than the SMTP server has
been specified, or the specified SMTP server
port number is incorrect. Check the DNS Server's IP address and SMTP server's IP address,
or the SMTP servername and SMTP port
number, or the SMTP server's SMTP port
number, or the network connection and configuration.
SMTPC: username or password wasn't correct. Connection to the SMTP server failed, because
[response code] (information)
the specified SMTP user name is incorrect, or
the specified SMTP password is incorrect.Check the SMTP user name and password.
Snmp over IPv4 is ready
Communication over IPv4 with snmp is available.
Snmp over IPv6 is ready.
Communication over IPv6 with snmp is available.
Snmp over IPv4 over 1394 is ready.
Communication over IPv4 over 1394 with

snmp is available.
Snmp over ipx is ready.
Communication over IPX with snmp is available.
snmpd start.
The snmpd service has started.
started.
The direct print service has started.
Started.
The bonjour (rendezvous) function is enabled.
terminated.
The bonjour (rendezvous) function is disabled.
The print server received error <error

number> during attempt to log in to the network. Access to the network was denied. Verify that the print server name and password
are correct.
Login to the file server failed.The print server

is not registered or a password is specified.
Register the print server without specifying a
password.
too many pictures.
PictBridge printing failed because too many

image are sent during one print transacation.
Reduce images at one print transaction.
trap account is unavailable.
v3Trap cannot be sent. This could be because

the Trap destination account is different from
the account specified by the printer.
usbd is disable.
Plug and Play function and printing is disabled

because usbd is disabled in the security mode.
Enable usbd in the security mode.
WINS name registration: No response to serv- There was no response from the WINS server.
er<WINS server address>
Check the correct WINS server address is entered. Alternatively,check the WINS server is
functioning properly.
110
Message List
Message
WINS wrong scopeID=<Scope ID>
An invalid scope ID was used.Use a valid

scope ID.
wpa authentication Failed
WPA authentication failed. Check the WPA

configuration.
wpa authentication started
WPA authentication has started.
wpa IEEE802.1X started
WPA authentication has started.
wpa connecting to authenticator
WPA is connecting to authenticator.
wpa link up
WPA key exchange has finished, and communication has been terminated.
wpa probe response doesn't have IE.
WPA probe response does not have IE.
wpa success authenticated
WPA authentication was successful.
wpa success key received
WPA key reception was successful.
wpa waiting for key
Waiting for WPA key.
wpasupd start
wpasupd has started.
wpasupd stop
wpasupd has ended.
Note
111
112
3. Special Operations under

Windows
Printing Files Directly from Windows
You can print files directly using
Windows commands. For example,
you can print PostScript files for PostScript 3.
Windows 95/98/Me
ftp or sftp command.
Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server
2003, Windows NT 4.0
lpr, rcp ftp or sftp command.
Setup
Using a Host Name Instead of

an IPv4 Address
When a host name is defined, you can
specify a printer by host name instead
of IP address. The host names vary
depending on the network environment.
When using DNS

Use the host name set to the data file
on the DNS server.
Follow the procedure below to make

network environment settings.
When setting the IPv4 address of a

printer using DHCP
A Enable
Use the printer name on the configuration page as the host name.
TCP/IP with the control

panel, and then set up the printers network environment about
TCP/IP including IP addresses.
TCP/IP of the printer is set as default.
B Install
a TCP/IP in Windows to
set up the network environment.
Consult the network administrator
for the local setting information.
C To print under Windows 2000/XP,
Windows Server 2003, install

Printing service for UNIX as the
network application. To print under Windows NT 4.0, install Microsoft TCP/IP printing as the
network application.
Note
For details about printing a configuration page, see General Setting
Guide.
In other cases
Add the IP address and host name of
the network printer to the hosts file
on the computer used for printing.
Methods of addition vary depending
on operating systems.
Reference
p.119 Using DHCP
113
Windows 95/98/Me
A Copy \WINDOWS\HOSTS.SAM
to the same directory and name it

HOSTS with no extension.
B Open the "\WINDOWS\HOSTS"
file created using memo pad files,

for instance.
C Add an IP address and host name
to the hosts file using the following format:

192.168.15.16 host # NP
"192.168.15.16" is the IP address,
"host" is the printer's host name,
and "#NP" is replaced by comments. Insert a space or tab between
"192.168.15.16" and "host", between
"host" and "#NP" respectively, using one line for this format.
D Save the file.

Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server
2003, Windows NT 4.0
A Open the hosts file using memo
pad files, for instance.

The hosts file is in the following
folder:
\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS\ETC\HOSTS
"\WINNT" is the directory of the
installation destination for Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server
2003, and Windows NT 4.0.
114
B Add an IPv4 or IPv6address and
host name to the hosts file using

the following format:
192.168.15.16 host # NP
"192.168.15.16" is the IPv4 address,
and "#NP" is replaced by comments. Insert a space or tab between "192.168.15.16" and "host",
between "host" and "#NP" respectively, using one line for this format.
2001:DB::100 host # NP
"2001:DB::100" is the IPv6 address,
and "#NP" is replaced by comments. Insert a space or tab between
"2001:DB::100" and "host", between
"host" and "#NP" respectively, using one line for this format.
C Save the file.

Note
When using a host name under
Windows Server 2003 with IPv6
protocol, perform host name
resolution using an exrernal
DNS server. The host file cannot
be used.
Printing Files Directly from Windows
Printing Commands
The following explains printing operations using the lpr, rcp, and
ftp commands.
Enter commands using the command
prompt window. The location of the
command prompts varies depending
on operating systems:
Windows 95/98
[Start] - [Programs] - [MS-DOS
Prompt]
Windows Me
[Start] - [Programs] - [Accessories] [MS-DOS Prompt]
Windows 2000
[Start] - [Programs] - [Accessories] [Command Prompt]
[Start] - [All Programs] - [Accessories] - [Command Prompt]
Windows NT 4.0
[Start] - [Programs] - [Command
Prompt]
Note
Match the data format of the file to
be printed with the emulation
mode of the printer.
The option specified in a command is an intrinsic printer option

and its syntax is similar to printing
from UNIX. For details, see UNIX
Supplement.
lpr
When specifying a printer by IP address
c:> lpr -Sprinter's IP address [-Poption] [-ol]
\pass name\file name
When using a host name instead of an

IP address
c:> lpr -Sprinter's host
name [-Poption] [-ol]
\pass name\file name
When printing a binary file, add
the "-ol" option (lowercase O, and
lowercase L).
When using a printer with the host
name "host" to print a PostScript file
named "file 1" located in the
"C:\PRINT" directory, the command
line is as follows:
c:> lpr -Shost -Pfiletype=RPS -ol C:\PRINT\file1
If the message "print requests full"

appears, no print jobs can be accepted. Try again when sessions
end. For each command, the
amount of possible sessions is indicated as follows:
lpr: 5(When the spool printing
function is available: 10)
rcp, rsh: 5
ftp: 3
sftp: 3
Enter the file name in a format including the path from the directory executing commands.
115
rcp
First, register the printer's host name
in the hosts file.
c:> rcp [-b] \pass name\file
name [pass name\file name...]
printer's host name:[option]
Note
In file names, "*" and "?" can be
used as wild cards.
When printing a binary file, add

the -b option.
When using a printer with the host
name "host" to print a PostScript file
named "file 1" or "file 2" located in the
"C:\PRINT" directory, the command
line is as follows:
c:> rcp -b C:\PRINT\file1
C:\PRINT\file2 host:filetype=RPS
Reference
p.113 Using a Host Name Instead
of an IPv4 Address
ftp/sftp
Use the "put" or "mput" command according to the number of files to be printed.
When one file is printed

ftp> put \pass name\file
name [option]
When multiple files are printed
ftp> mput \pass name\file
name [\pass name\file
name...] [option]
Follow the procedure below to print
using the "ftp" command.
A Formulate the printer's IP address
116
or the host name of the hosts file

printer as an argument and use
the "ftp" or sftp command.
% ftp printer's IP address
B Enter
the user name and password, and then press the {# Enter}
key.
User:
Password:
When user authentication is set,
enter a login user name and password.
C When printing a binary file, set
the file mode to binary.

ftp> bin
When printing a binary file in ASCII mode, print may not come out
correctly.
D Specify files to be printed.

The following shows the examples
of printing a PostScript file named
"file 1" in the "C:\PRINT" directory
and printing file 1 and file 2.
ftp> put C:\PRINT\file1
filetype=RPS
ftp> mput C:\PRINT\file1
C:\PRINT\file2
E Quit ftp.
ftp> bye
Note
=, ,, _, and ;cannot be
used for filenames. File names
will be read as option strings.
For mput command, option

can not be defined.
For mput command, * and
? can be used as wild cards in
file names.
When printing a binary file in
ASCII mode, print may not
come out correctly.
4. Appendix
When Using Windows Terminal Service /
MetaFrame
The following explains how to use
Windows Terminal Service and
Maintenance.
Operating Environment
The following operating systems and
MetaFrame versions are supported.
Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal

Server Edition
MetaFrame 1.8 SP3 / FR1+SP3 /
SP4
MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1 / SP2 /
FR1
Windows 2000 Server / Advanced
Server
MetaFrame 1.8 SP3 / FR1+SP3 /
SP4
MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1 / SP2 /
SP3 / FR1 / FR2 / FR3
MetaFrame Presentation Server
3.0
Citrix Presentation Server 4.0
Supported Printer Drivers

When Windows Terminal Service is
operating
PCL drivers
PostScript 3
RPCS drivers
Note
Some RPCS printer driver functions do not work if Windows Terminal Service is installed.
Limitations
The following limitations apply to the
Windows Terminal Service environment.
These limitations are built in Windows Terminal Service or MetaFrame.
Windows 2003 Server

MetaFrame XP 1.0 FR3
MetaFrame Presentation Server
3.0
Citrix Presentation Server 4.0
117
Appendix
Windows Terminal Service

In the Windows Terminal Service
environment, some of the printer
drivers functions is unavailable.
In an environment where Windows Terminal Service is installed,
some of the printer drivers functions is unavailable, even if any
function of Windows Terminal
Service is not used. When you install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client in an environment where the
Terminal Service is running on a
Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal
Server Edition or the Windows
2000 Server family computer, be
sure to install it using the install
mode. The following are the two
methods of installation using the
install mode:
A Use [Add/Remove Programs] in
[Control Panel] to install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
B Enter the following command
in the MS-DOS command
prompt:
To quit the install mode, enter the
following command in the MSDOS command prompt.
MetaFrame's [Auto-creating client

printers]
Using [Auto-creating client printers]
can select a logical printer created
by copying the client's local printer
data to the MetaFrame server. We
strongly recommend testing this
function in your network environment before using it for your work.
The settings for optional equipment will not be stored in the
server after the equipment is
disconnected. The settings for
optional equipment will be restored to its defaults each time
the client computer logs on to
the server.
118
When printing a large number

of bitmap images or using the
server in a WAN environment
over dial-up lines such as ISDN,
printing may not be possible or
errors may occur, depending on
data transfer rates.
When using MetaFrame XP 1.0
or higher versions, we recommend making settings in [Client
Printer bandwidth] under [Citrix
Management Console] according
to the environment.
If a print error occurs on the
server and the print job or a
printer created in [Auto-creating
client printers] cannot be deleted,
we recommend the following:
MetaFrame 1.8 SP3, MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/FR1
Make settings in [Delete unfinished print jobs] in the registry.
For details, see the Readme file
provided with MetaFrame.
MetaFrame XP 1.0 FR2
Make settings in [Delete pending
print jobs at logout] under [Printer Properties Management] of Citrix Management Console.
MetaFrame's [Printer driver replication]

Using [Printer driver replication] can
distribute printer drivers across all
servers in a server farm. We
strongly recommend testing this
function in your network environment before using it for your work.
If the printer drivers are not
properly copied, install them directly onto each server.
Using DHCP
Using DHCP
You can use the printer in a DHCP environment. You can also register the
printer NetBIOS name on a WINS
server when it is running.
If you connect an Ethernet interface
and IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394) interface simultaneously, pay attention to
the following:
When a static IPv4 address is set for

both interfaces
IPv4 Address: If interface IPv4
addresses overlap, the Ethernet
interface is selected.
Subnet Mask: If interface subnet
masks overlap, the Ethernet interface is selected.
Gateway Address: The selected
value is applied. Make the gateway address setting inside the
subnet set in the interface. If a
value is beyond the range of the
subnet selected by the interface,
the machine operates using
"0.0.0.0".
When obtaining addresses from the
DHCP server
IP Address, Subnet Mask: you
can configure addresses assigned by a DHCP server. If IP
addresses overlap or the same
subnet IP addresses are selected, the effective value is assigned only to the prioritized
interface. Ethernet has default
interface priority.
AutoNet: A temporary IPv4 address starting with 169.254 and
not used on the network, is assigned to the prioritized interface.
Default interface priority is
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394).
Gateway Address, DNS Server

Address, and Domain Name:
You can configure the addresses
assigned by DHCP to the prioritized interface.
If the gateway address is beyond the range of the subnet selected for the interface, the
machine operates using
"0.0.0.0".
Ethernet has default interface
priority.
When there are static IP addresses

and addresses assigned by DHCP
IPv4 Address and subnet mask:
if a static IPv4 address is the
same as an address assigned by
DHCP, or the static subnet
mask address and the subnet
mask address assigned by
DHCP overlap, the machine
uses the static IPv4 address interface. The interface with the
DHCP setting is set by default.
Gateway Address: operates using
the address entered manually.
If a static address is not selected,
or is set to 0.0.0.0, the interface
using the address assigned by
DHCP is used.
Note
Printers that register the printer
NetBIOS name on a WINS server
must be configured for the WINS
server.
Supported DHCP servers are Microsoft DHCP Server included

with Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003, and Windows
NT 4.0, and the DHCP server included with NetWare and UNIX.
119
Appendix
If you do not use the WINS server,

reserve the printer's IP address in
the DHCP server so the same IP
address is assigned every time.
To use the WINS server, change
the WINS server setting to active
using the control panel.
Using the WINS server, you can
configure the host name via the remote network printer port.
DHCP relay-agent is not supported. If you use DHCP relay-agent
on a network via ISDN, it will result in increased line charges. This
is because your computer connects
to the ISDN line whenever a packet
is transferred from the printer.
If there is more than one DHCP
server, use the same setting for all
servers. The machine operates using data from the DHCP server
that responds first.
120
Using AutoNet
If the printer IPv4 address is not automatically assigned by the DHCP server, a temporary IP address starting
with 169.254 and not used on the network can be automatically selected by
the printer.
Note
The IP address assigned by the
DHCP server is given priority over
that selected by AutoNet.
You can confirm the current IPv4

address on the configuration page.
For more information about the
configuration page, see General
Settings Guide.
When AutoNet is running, the
NetBIOS name is not registered on
the WINS server.
The machine cannot communicate
with devices that do not have the
AutoNet function. However, this
machine can communicate with
Macintosh computers running
Mac OS X 10.2.3. or higher.
Precautions
Precautions
Please pay attention to the following
when using the network interface
board. When configuration is necessary, follow the appropriate procedures below.
Connecting a Dial-Up Router

to a Network
When using NetWare (file server)
If the NetWare file server and printer
are on opposite sides of a router,
packets are sent back and forth continuously, possibly incurring communications charges. Because packet
transmission is a feature of NetWare,
you need to change the configuration
of the router. If the network you are
using does not allow you to configure
the router, configure the machine instead.
Configuring the router

Filter packets so they do not pass
over the dial-up router.
Configuring the printer with

NetWare
A Following the setup method described earlier in this manual,

configure the file server.
B Set
the frame type for NetWare

environment.
Reference
For more information about selecting a frame type, see the
Configuring the printer without

NetWare
A When not printing, the network

interface board sends packets
over the network. Set NetWare to
inactive.
Reference
For more information about selecting a protocol, see General
Settings Guide.
Note
The MAC address of the filtering printer is printed on the
printer configuration page. For
more information about printing a configuration page, see
Printer Reference.
For more information about

configuring the printer if the
router cannot be configured, see
the following instructions.
121
Appendix
When Using Network Utility

If the machine is connected to a network, observe the following points
when setting up the machine or
changing settings:
For more details, see the operating instructions and Help for ScanRouter
V2 Professional and DeskTopBinder
Lite/Professional.
When a dial-up router is connected in

a network environment
The settings for the delivery server
to be connected must be made appropriately for the machine with
ScanRouter V2 Professional, Auto
Document Link, or DeskTopBinder Lite/Professional. In addition,
set up connected devices using the
I/O settings of ScanRouter V2 Administration Utility.
If the network environment changes, make the necessary changes for
the delivery server using the machine, the administration utility of
client computers, Auto Document
Link, and DeskTopBinder Lite/Professional. Also, set the correct information for the connected devices
using the I/O settings of ScanRouter V2 Administration Utility.
Important
If the machine is set up to connect to the delivery server via a
dial-up router, the router will
dial and go online whenever a
connection to the delivery server is made. Telephone charges
may be incurred.
122
When connected to a computer that

uses dial-up access
Do not install ScanRouter V2
Professional on a computer
which uses dial-up access.
When using ScanRouter V2 Professional, DeskTopBinder
Lite/Professional, Auto Document Link, or a TWAIN driver
on a computer with dial-up access, a dial-up connection may
be performed when connecting
to the delivery server and other
equipment, depending on the
setup. If the computer is set up
to connect to the Internet automatically, the confirmation dialog box will not appear, and
telephone charges may be incurred without your being
aware of it. To prevent unnecessary connections, the computer
should be set up so the confirmation dialog box always appears before establishing a
connection. Do not make unnecessary connections when using
the above listed software.
Precautions
NetWare Printing
Form feed
You should not configure form feed
on NetWare. Form feed is controlled
by the printer driver on Windows. If
NetWare form feed is configured, the
printer might not work properly. If
you want to change form feed settings, always configure them using
Windows.
Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear
the [Form feed] check box on the
[Printer Settings] tab in the printer
properties dialog box.
Under Windows 2000/XP and
Windows Server 2003, clear the
[Form feed] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer
Under Windows NT 4.0, clear the
[Form feed] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer
Banner page
You should not configure a banner
page on NetWare. If you want to
change the banner page setting, always configure it using Windows.
Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear
the [Enable banner] check box on the
[Printer Settings] tab in the printer
Under Windows 2000/XP and
Windows Server 2003, clear the
[Enable banner] check box on the
[NetWare Settings] tab in the printer
Under Windows NT 4.0, clear the
[Enable banner] check box on the
[NetWare Settings] tab in the printer
Printing after resetting the machine

After resetting the remote printer, the
connection from the print server will
be cut off for about 30-40 seconds before re-connecting. Depending on the
NetWare specification, print jobs may
be accepted, but they will not be
printed during this interval.
When using the machine as a remote
printer, wait about two minutes after
resetting before attempting to print.
When the optional IEEE

802.11b interface unit Is
Installed
When using the wireless LAN interface
on the network, note the following:
When moving the machine

Detach the antennas when relocating the machine locally.
After moving the machine, reattach the antennas, ensuring that:
The antennas are positioned
clear of obstacles.
There is 40 to 60 mm between
the antennas, so that they do not
touch.
The exposure glass cover and the
Auto Document Feeder (ADF)
do not knock the antennas.
123
Appendix
If the network area provides poor radio environment

Where radio wave conditions are
bad, the network may not function
due to interrupted or failed connections. When checking the wireless LAN signal and the access
point, follow the procedure below
to improve the situation:
Position the access point nearer
to the machine.
Clear the space between access
point and machine of obstructions.
Move radio wave generating
appliances, such as microwaves, away from the machine
and access point.
Note
For information about how to
check radio wave status, see the
For more information about access

point radio wave conditions, refer
to the access point manual.
124
Information about Installed Applications
Information about Installed Applications

RSA BSAFE
This product includes RSA

BSAFE cryptographic or security
protocol software from RSA Security Inc.
RSA is a registered trademark and
BSAFE is a registered trademark of
RSA Security Inc.in the United
States and/or other countries.
RSA Security Inc. All rights reserved.
125
Appendix
Specifications
Interface
100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), IEEE 802.11b
Frame type
EthernetII, IEEE 802.2, IEEE 802.3, SNAP
Printer (LAN-Fax)
IPv4
LPR
RSH
RCP
DIPRINT
FTP
IPP
IPX/SPX (NetWare)
AppleTalk
SMB
Internet Fax
IPv4
SMTP
POP3
IMAP4
Network Scanner
IPv4
RSH
FTP
SMTP
POP3
SMB
NCP
Document Server
IPv4
FTP
HTTP
Management Function
IPv4
RSH
RCP
FTP
SNMP
HTTP
TELNET (mshell)
NBT
DHCP
DNS
LDAP
SNMP v1/v2
126
MIB-II, PrinterMIB, HostResourceMIB, RicohPrivateMIB
Specifications
SNMP v3
MIB-II, PrinterMIB, HostResourceMIB, RicohPrivateMIB, SNMPFRAMEWORK-MIB, SNMP-TARGET-MIB, SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB, SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB, SNMP-VIEWBASED-ACM-MIB
The optional IEEE 1394 interface board supports only IPv4 over 1394.
To use IPP and SMB, use the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.
To use IPP under Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, use the Standard IPP
port. To use IPP under Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows NT, use SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
Appletalk can be used when the PostScript 3 module is installed.
127
INDEX
A
Access Control, 60
appletalk, 61
authfree, 61
Auto E-mail Notification, 55
AutoNet, 120
Autonet, 61
B
Bluetooth, 63
Bonjour, 62
C
Changing the Network Interface Board
Configuration, 43
Changing the Paper Type, 45
Configuring the Energy Saver Mode, 48
D
DHCP, 64, 119
dial-up router, 121
Displaying Web Image Monitor Help, 41
DNS, 65
dns, 65
Domain Name, 67
G
Getting Printer Information over the
Network, 86
Going to the Top Page, 37
H
Host Name, 67
J
Job Spool, 78
L
Locking the Menus on the machine's
Control Panel, 44
lpr, 70
M
Mail authentication, 56
Managing User Information, 45
message, 105
MIB, 85
N
netware, 70
NetWare 5/5.1, 27, 28
NetWare 6/6.5, 27, 28
Notify by e-mail function, 54
O
On-demand E-mail Notification, 57
P
passwd, 71
Password, 71
precautions, 121
Printer Status Notification by E-mail, 54
Printing Commands, 115
Printing Files Directly from Windows, 113
prnlog, 71
Pure IP, 28
R
remote printer, setup, 32
route, 71
I
IEEE 802.11b, 81
ifconfig, 68
info, 69
information, 74, 96, 97, 98, 105
Installing, 43
IPP, 69
ipv6, 70
128
S
set, 72
Setting a Password, 48
Setting Up as a Print Server, 26, 27, 28
Setting Up as a Remote Printer, 30, 32
Setup, 113
show, 74
slp, 74
smb, 74
SNMP, 85
snmp, 75
sntp, 77
specifications, 126
spoolsw, 78
status, 79
syslog, 79
T
TCP/IP address, 68
telnet, 59, 61, 84
Types of Menu Configuration and Mode, 39
U
Using a Host Name Instead of an IP
Address, 113
W
Web Image Monitor, 35
WINS, 84
129
130
GB
GB
EN
USA
AE
AE
B229-8558
Copyright 2005
Network Guide
GB GB
EN USA
AE AE B229-8558
Windows Configuration
Mac OS Configuration
Using PostScript 3
Introduction
Important
Trademarks
Adobe and PostScript are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Macintosh, Mac OS and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer,
Inc, registered in the U.S. and other countries.
BonjourTM is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.




Notes:

About This Machine

Trouble Shooting
Security Reference
Copy Reference
Facsimile Reference
Printer Reference
Scanner Reference
i
Network Guide
Other manuals
Safety Information
UNIX Supplement
Note

ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
1. Windows Configuration
Using the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port.......................3
Installing DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .........................................3
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me - TCP/IP)................4
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me - IPP) .....................5
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - TCP/IP)...........................7
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - IPP) ................................8
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003 - TCP/IP)............................................................................10
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003 - IPP)..................................................................................11
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - TCP/IP)......................12
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - IPP)............................14
Changing the Port Settings for DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .....15
Using the Standard TCP/IP Port .........................................................................17
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) .......................................17
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) .....18
Using the LPR Port ..............................................................................................20
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0).....................................22
Using as the Windows Network Printer .............................................................23
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me) ............................23
Using as the NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer........................................27
When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver..............................................................27
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB .............................................................28
Windows 98 SE / Me - USB .....................................................................................28
Windows 2000 - USB ...............................................................................................30
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB .............................................................31
Troubleshooting for using USB ................................................................................32
Printing with Parallel Connection.......................................................................33
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me) ............................33
Installing the PostScript 3 printer driver (Windows 2000) ........................................34
Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)...............................37
Windows 2000..........................................................................................................37
Printing with Bluetooth Connection...................................................................41
Supported Profiles....................................................................................................41
Printing with Bluetooth Connection .......................................................................... 42
iii
If a Message Appears during Installation ..........................................................44

Making Option Settings for the Printer ..............................................................45
Setting Up the Printer Driver...............................................................................46
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer ....................................................................48
2. Mac OS Configuration
Mac OS..................................................................................................................55
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and PPD File ............................................55
Setting Up PPD Files ...............................................................................................56
Setting Up Options ...................................................................................................56
Installing Adobe Type Manager ...............................................................................57
Installing Screen fonts..............................................................................................57
Changing to EtherTalk .............................................................................................58
Mac OS X ..............................................................................................................59
Installing the PPD Files ............................................................................................59
Setting Up the PPD File ........................................................................................... 59
Setting Up Options ...................................................................................................60
Using USB Interface.................................................................................................60
Using Bonjour (Rendezvous) ...................................................................................61
Changing to EtherTalk .............................................................................................62
Configuring the Printer........................................................................................63
3. Using PostScript 3
Setting Up Options ..............................................................................................65
Printing a Document............................................................................................67
Job Type ..................................................................................................................68
User Code ................................................................................................................89
Paper Selection........................................................................................................90
Paper Size................................................................................................................90
Fit to Paper...............................................................................................................90
Input Slot ..................................................................................................................91
Resolution ................................................................................................................91
Orientation Override.................................................................................................92
Gradation .................................................................................................................92
Toner Saving / Level Color.......................................................................................93
Duplex Printing......................................................................................................... 93
Collate ......................................................................................................................95
Paper Type...............................................................................................................96
Destination Tray .......................................................................................................96
Staple ....................................................................................................................... 97
Punch ....................................................................................................................... 97
Z-fold ........................................................................................................................98
Watermark................................................................................................................98
Watermark Text........................................................................................................98
Watermark Font .......................................................................................................99
Watermark Size........................................................................................................99
Watermark Angle .....................................................................................................99
Watermark Style.....................................................................................................100
iv
Color Mode.............................................................................................................100
Color Setting ..........................................................................................................101
Color Profile ...........................................................................................................102
Black Over Print .....................................................................................................103
Gray Reproduction .................................................................................................103
Dithering.................................................................................................................104
CMYK Simulation Profile........................................................................................105
Image Smoothing ...................................................................................................105
Separate into CMYK ..............................................................................................106
Color Control ..........................................................................................................106
4. Printer Utility for Mac

Installing Printer Utility for Mac........................................................................107
Starting Printer Utility for Mac ..........................................................................108
Mac OS .................................................................................................................. 108
Mac OS X...............................................................................................................108
Printer Utility for Mac Functions ......................................................................109
Downloading PS Fonts...........................................................................................110
Displaying Printer's Fonts.......................................................................................110
Deleting Fonts ........................................................................................................111
Initializing the Printer Disk...................................................................................... 111
Page Setup ............................................................................................................112
Printing Fonts Catalog............................................................................................112
Printing Fonts Sample............................................................................................112
Renaming the Printer .............................................................................................112
Restarting the Printer .............................................................................................113
Downloading PostScript Files ................................................................................114
Selecting the Zone .................................................................................................114
Displaying the Printer Status..................................................................................115
Launching the Dialogue Console ........................................................................... 115
INDEX....................................................................................................... 117
v
vi

Symbols
[]
{}
1
2
1. Windows Configuration
Using the DeskTop BinderSmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port
Installing DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Important
To install DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client under Windows
2000 / XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you
must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
Install DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client before installing the printer driver when using the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.


D Click [DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client].

E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box. After reading through its contents, click [I accept the agreement.], and
then click [Next >].
F Click the [DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client] checkbox, and then

click [Next >].
The DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client installer starts.
G Follow the instructions on the display to install DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
H Click [Finish].
If you are required to restart the computer after installing DeskTop BinderSmartDeviceMonitor for Client, restart the computer.
Note
3
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me TCP/IP)


The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].

E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next >].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next >].
H In the [Available ports:] box, click [Printer Port], and then click [Next >].
I Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
J Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
K On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
L Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
M On the [Details] tab, click [Add Port].

N Click [DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor] in the [Other] list, and then click
[OK].
O Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].

4
Using the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port
P Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
a machine not listed here, click [Specify Address], enter the IP address or host
name of the machine, and then click [OK].
You cannot add an IP address partially similar to the one already used. For
example, if 192.168.0.2 is in use, 192.168.0.2xx cannot be used. Similarly,
if 192.168.0.20 is in use, 192.168.0.2 cannot be used.
Q Check that the selected port is highlighted in [Print to the following port], and
then click [OK].
R Restart the computer to complete installation.

Note
A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me - IPP)



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next >].
click [Next >].
5
K On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
L Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
M On the [Details] tab, click [Add Port].

N Click [DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor] in the [Other] list, and then click
[OK].
O Click [IPP].
P In the [Printer URL] box, enter http://(printer's address)/printer as the print-
er's address.
If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL ( a protocol for encrypted
communication), enter https://(printer's address)/printer (Internet Explorer 5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
http://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter "http://printer's address/ipp" as the printer's address.
Q Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.
R Click [Detailed Settings] to configure proxy server, IPP user name, and other
settings. Make these settings, and then click [OK].
S Click [OK].
T Check that the selected port is highlighted in [Print to the following port], and
then click [OK] .
U Restart the computer to complete installation.

Note
6
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - TCP/IP)

Important



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Create a new port:].
H Click [DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next >].
I Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
J Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
K Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
L Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
M Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
N Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
O Click [Finish].
7
Note
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - IPP)

Important



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local printer attached to this computer], and then click [Next >].
I Click [IPP].
J In the [Printer URL] box, enter http://(printer's address)/printer as the printer's address.
If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted
http://192.168.15.16/printer
8
K Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name different from the name of any existing port.
L Click [Detailed Settings] to configure proxy server, the IPP user name and other settings. Specify the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
For information about the settings, see DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client Help.
M Click [OK].
N Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
O Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
P Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
Q Click [Finish].
Note
9
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows

Server 2003 - TCP/IP)
Important



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local printer attached to this computer.], and then click [Next >].
I Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
J Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
M Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
N Click [Finish].
Note
case, launch Setup.exeon the CD-ROM root directory.
10

Server 2003 - IPP)
Important



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local printer attached to this computer.], and then click [Next >].
I Click [IPP].
J In the [Printer URL] box, enter http://(printer's address)/printer as the printer's address.
http://192.168.15.16/printer
K Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.
11
L Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.

for Client Help.
M Click [OK].
N Check that the name of the printer driver you want to install is selected, and
then click [Next >].
O Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next >].
Q Click [Finish].
Note
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - TCP/IP)

Important



12
E Select [My Computer], and then click [Next >].

F Click [Add Port...].
G Click [DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [New Port...].
H Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].

A list of printers using [TCP/IP] appears.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
J Click [Close] to close the [Printer Port] dialog box.

K Click [Next >].
L Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
M Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
N Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
O Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
P Restart the computer to complete installation if necessary.

Note
A user code can be set after the printer driver installation . For information
13
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - IPP)

Important




G Click [DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [New Port...].
H Click [IPP].
I In the [Printer URL] box, enter http://(printer's address)/printeras the printer's address.
http://192.168.15.16/printer
J Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.
K Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.

for Client Help.
14
L Click [OK].
M Click [Close] to close the [Printer Port] dialog box.
N Click [Next >].
O Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is se-
lected, and then click [Next >].
P Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Q Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
R Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
S Restart the computer to complete installation if necessary.

Note
Changing the Port Settings for DeskTop BinderSmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Follow the procedure below to change the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client settings, such as TCP/IP timeout, recovery/parallel printing, and printer groups.
Windows 95 / 98:

Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Port Settings].

The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
15
Windows 2000 / Windows NT 4.0:

C On the [Ports] tab, click [Configure Port]

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003:
A Open the [Printers and Faxes] window from the [Start] menu.
B Click the icon of the machine you want to use. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties]. The printer properties appear.
Click the [Port] tab, and then click [Configure Port].

For TCP/IP, timeout setting can be configured.
User, proxy, and timeout settings can be configured for IPP.
Reference
For information about these settings, see DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
How to enable Recovery/Parallel Printing

If no settings on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab are available, follow the procedure below.
A Start DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click

the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the taskbar.
B Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel
Printing for each port] check box.
C Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box
16

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)
Important
DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor port.



E Click [Next >].

H Click [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [Next >].
I Click [Next >] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
J Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box.
if necessary.
When screen for Device selection appears, select "RICOH NetworkPrinter
Driver C Model".
K Click [Next >]

L Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
M Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
17
N Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
O Click [Next >].

Q Click [Finish].

Note
A user code can be set after the printer driver installation . For information

Server 2003)
Important
DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor port.



18
E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local printer attached to this printer], and then click [Next >].
H Click [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Create a new port], and then click [Next >].
I Click [Next >] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
J Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box.
if necessary.
When screen for Device selection appears, select "RICOH NetworkPrinter
Driver C Model".
K Click [Next >]

L Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
M Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
N Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
O Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
P Click [Finish].
Note
19
Using the LPR Port

Important



E Click [Next >].

H Click [LPR Port], and then click [Next >].
I Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box.
J Enter lp in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and then click [OK].
M Click [Next >].

O Click [Finish].
20
Note
Using the LPR Port

Server 2003)
Important
In an IPv6 environment, you cannot use the LPR Port. Use the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor port.




F Click [Local Printer attached to this computer.], and then click [Next >].
H Click [LPR Port] in [Create a new port], and then click [Next >].
I Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box.
J Enter lp in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server box], and then click [OK].
M Click [Next >].

O Click [Finish].
Note
case, launch Setup.exe on the CD-ROM root directory."
21
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)

Important




G Select [LPR Port], and then click [New Port...].
H Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box.
I Enter lp in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server:] box, and then click [OK].
J Click [Close] to close the [Printer Port] dialog box.
K Click [Next >].
L Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
M Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
N Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
O Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
P Restart the computer to complete installation.
22
Note
Using as the Windows Network Printer

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me)
Important
If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the DeskTop
Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing
and Parallel Printing.



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Network printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Browse].
H Click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the [Browse for
Printer] window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
J Check the location of the selected printer is shown, and then click [Next >].
K Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
L Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
M Restart the computer.
Note
23

Important



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Network printer], and then click [Next >].
G Select the location method from the [Locate Your Printer] screen, and then
click [Next >].
H Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
[Shared printers] window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next >].
J The printer driver installation starts.
K Click [Next >].
L Click [Finish].
Note
24

Server 2003)
Important
If you print with a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 print server, DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor notification functions may not be possible
for the client.



E Click [Next >].

F Click [A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer] and then click [Next >].
G Select [Browse for a printer], and then click [Next >].
H Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next >].
J The printer driver installation starts.
K Click [Next >].
L Click [Finish].
Note
25

Important
To print from a Windows NT 4.0 print server, install the printer driver before
you connect the print server to the printer.



E Click [Network printer server], and then click [Next >].

F Click [Next >].
G Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
H Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next >].
I Check the location of the selected printer is shown, and then click [Next >].
J Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
K Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
Note
26
Using as the NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer
Using as the NetWare Print Server / Remote

Printer
1
When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

Important
In an IPv6 environment, Netware servers cannot be used.
Follow the procedure below to set up the PostScript 3 printer driver.
A In the [Printers] or [Printers and Faxes] window, open the printer properties.
B Click the [PostScript] tab.
When using Windows 2000 / XP or Windows NT 4.0, click the [Device Settings] tab, and then proceed to step to clear the check box.
C Click [Advanced].
D Clear the [Send CTRL+D before job] and [Send CTRL+D after job] check boxes, and
then click [OK].
E Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
27

This section explains how to install printer drivers using USB.
Important
Make sure that machine is connected to the computer's USB ports using the
USB interface cable.
Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the computer and no print jobs are in progress.
The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this machine.
Windows 98 SE / Me - USB
Important
Installation via USB is not possible under Windows 95 / 98. Upgrade to Windows 98 SE / Me.
icon of the printer connected to the "USB" port is added to the [Printers] window.
A Turn off the power of the machine.

C Turn on the power of the machine.

The plug and play function starts and the [New Hardware Found], [Device Driver
Wizard], or [Add New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, depending on the operating system.
D Click [Next >].

E Click [Search for the best driver for your device. {Recommended}.], and then click [Next >].
F Select the [Specify a location:] check box, and then click [Browse...].
G Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

H Specify the location where USB Printing Support is located, and then click [Next >].
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of USB Printing Support are stored
in the following location:
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME
I Check the location, and then click [Next >].

USB Printing Support is installed.
28
J Click [Finish].
the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers]
window.
K Click [Next >].

L Click [Search for the best driver for your device. {Recommended}.], and then click [Next >].
M Select the [Specify a location:], check box, and then click [Browse...].
N Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

O Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored,
PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
P Check the location, and then click [Next >].

Q Click [Finish].
Installation is complete. If installation is successful, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers] window.
Note
To disable Auto Run, press the {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
the CD-ROM.
The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers connected.
It is not necessary to reinstall USB Printing Support when connecting a different machine via USB interface when USB Printing Support is installed.
After installing USB Printing Support, if the printer driver is not installed,
follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer.
Install the printer driver from the CD-ROM provided with the printer.
29
Windows 2000 - USB

Important
printer to install it from the CD-ROM provided.
A Check that the power of the printer is off.


Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed
automatically.
D Click [Next >] in the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box.
E Select the [Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)] check box,
F Select the [Specify location] check box, and then click [Next >].
G Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
H Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
I Check the printer driver location, and then click [OK].

J Click [Next >].
K Click [Finish].
icon of the printer connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers] window.
Note
30
the CD-ROM.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB

Important
printer to install it from the CD-ROM provided.
A Turn off the power of the machine.


Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed
automatically.
D In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver
for my device [recommended] ], and then click [Next >].
E To disable Auto Run, press the left {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
the CD-ROM.
F Select the [Include this location in the search] check box under [Search for the best
driver in these location], and then click [Browse] to select the printer driver location.
PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
G Check the printer driver location, and then click [Next >].
H Click [Continue].
I Click [Finish].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001"
port is added to the [Printers] window.
Note
31
Troubleshooting for using USB

Problems
Solutions
The machine is not automatically rec- Turn off the power of the machine, reconnect the USB
ognized.
cable, and then turn it on again.
Windows has already configured the
USB settings.
Open Windows' Device Manager, and then, under [Universal Serial Bus controllers], remove any conflicting devices. Conflicting devices have a yellow [!] or [?] icon by
them. Take care not to accidentally remove required devices. For details, see Windows Help.
Note
When using Windows 2000 / XP or Windows Server
2003, an erroneous device is displayed under [USB
Controller] in the [Device Manager] dialog box.
32

To use a machine connected using a parallel interface, click [LPT1] when installing the printer driver.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me)



E Click [Next >].

G Select the name of the machine whose printer driver you want to install,
K Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
33
Installing the PostScript 3 printer driver (Windows 2000)

Important



E Click [Next >].

G Select [LPT1] at the [Printer Port] dialog box, and then click [Next >].
H Select whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
I Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next >].
J Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
K Restart the computer to complete installation if necessary.

Note
34

Server 2003)
Important



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local printer attached to this computer], and then click [Next >].
G Select the port you want to use, and then click [Next >].
H Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next >].
I Click [Close] to close the [Printer Port] dialog box.

J Click [Next >].
K Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
L Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
M Restart the computer to complete installation.

Note
35

Important




F Select the port you want to use, and then click [Next >].
click [Next >].
H Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
I Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
K Restart the computer to complete installation if necessary.

Note
36
Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394

(SCSI print)
1
Important
Quit all applications currently running, and do not print during installation.
Do not connect IEEE 1394 or USB devices to the computer or turn on another
printers during installation.
Before uninstalling the printer driver, check that the IEEE 1394 interface cable
is disconnected from the computer.
SCSI print must be set to "active" from the control panel. For details, see Network Guide.
This machine can receive print data from one computer at a time only. An
message may appear if jobs from different computers collide.
If jobs collide, the first received is printed first.
Windows 2000
Important
The optional 1394 interface unit can be used only with Service Pack 1 (SP1) or
higher.
A Connect the machine and computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
B Click [Next >] in the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box.
C When the message "This wizard will complete the installation for this Device: Unknown" appears, click [Specify a location], and then click [Next >].
D When the message "Locate Driver Files" appears, select the [Optional search
locations.] check box, and then click [Specify a location], and then click [Next >].
E To disable Auto Run, press the left {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
the CD-ROM.
F Click [Browse].
37
G Select the printer driver you want to use.

PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1\
H Click [Open].
I Click [OK].
J Follow the instructions.
When installation is complete, the printer connected to "1394_00n" appears in
the [Printers] window. ("n" shows the number of printers connected.)
Note
If [Found New Hardware Wizard] appears every time the computer is started
or the cable is connected, disable the device. To install another printer driver after setting the "1394_00n" port, click [1394_00] as a port during the
printer driver installation.
If the printer driver has already been installed, the printer icon is added to
the [Printers] window. In this case, printer driver installation is not necessary.
reinstall the printer driver. For details, see "When You Cannot Print", Trouble Shooting.
Disable the device

If you do not want to install the printer when Found New Hardware Wizard
starts under an operating system that supports SCSI print, disable the device by
following the procedure below.
A When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, click [Next >].
B When the message "This wizard will complete the installation for this Device: Unknown" appears, select the [Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended] check box, and then click [Next >].
C When the message "Please choose your search and installation option." ap-
pears, clear all check boxes from [Search for the best driver in these locations.],
D When the message "Driver Files Search Results" appears, select the [Disable
the device. The Add/Remove Hardware Wizard in the control Panel can be able to complete the driver installations.] check box, and then click [Finish]."
38

Important
SCSI print must be set to "active" from the control panel. For details, see Network Guide.
A Connect the machine and computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, check that [This wizard helps you install software for: (Unknown)] is displayed.
B Select the [Install from a list on specific location (Advanced)] check box, and then
click [Next >].
C When the message "Please choose your search and installation option." ap-
pears, select the [Search for the best driver in these locations.] check box, select
the [Include this location in the search:] check box, and then select the [Include
this location in the search:] check box.
D To disable Auto Run, press the left {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
the CD-ROM.
E Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored,

PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1\
When installation is complete, the printer connected to "1394_00n" appears in
the [Printers and Faxes] window. ("n" shows the number of printers connected.)
39
F Follow the instructions.

Note
This machine can receive print data from one computer at a time only. If a
job from a computer collides with other data, a message may appear on the
computer.
To install another printer driver after setting the "1394_00n" port, click
[1394_00] as a port during the printer driver installation.
If the printer driver has already been installed, the printer icon is added to
the [Printers and Faxes] window. In this case, printer driver installation is
not necessary.
Even if the printer driver is already installed, the message " Found New
Hardware Wizard" may appear when the machine and the computer are
connected using the IEEE 1394 interface cable for the first time. If it does,
install the printer driver.
reinstall the printer driver. For details, see "When You Cannot Print", Trouble Shooting.
Disable the device

If you do not want to install the printer when Found New Hardware Wizard
starts under an operating system that supports SCSI print, disable the device by
following the procedure below
A When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, check that [This
wizard helps you install software for: Unknown] displayed, select [Install from a list
on specific location (Advanced)] check box, and then click [Next >].
B When the message "Please choose your search and installation option." ap-
pears, clear all check boxes from [Search for the best driver in these locations.],
C When the message "The wizard could not find the software on your computer for.." appears, click [OK].
D When the message "Cannot Install this Hardware" appears, select the [Don't
prompt again to install the software] check box, and then click [Finish].
40

Supported Profiles
SPP, HCRP
A maximum of two Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computers
can be connected at the same time using the Bluetooth interface: one by
SPP, one by HCRP.
When connecting more than one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped
computer at the same time, the first device that establishes connection is selected. When selecting the connection between the other devices, cancel
the first established connection.
Conditions for bidirectional communications
SPP connection does not support bidirectional communications.
HCRP connection supports bidirectional communications.
BIP
For BIP connection, a module including PostScript 3 must be installed in
the machine.
Only one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer can be connected via BIP.
Only JPEG images that can be printed using BIP.
User codes are disabled for BIP.
You cannot print if print functions are restricted.
Some printers do not support BIP.
41

To install the printer driver, follow the procedure used to install parallel interface.
Important
To install the printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional or Windows Server 2003, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator or Power Users group member.
Note
System requirements vary depending on the Bluetooth standard and specifications. For details, see the manuals provided with each product.
For information about setting up Bluetooth under other operating systems or

using it with different utilities, see the manuals provided with those operating systems or utilities.

B Check that the printer you want to use appears in 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.
C On the [Tool] menu, click [COM port].

D Check that the message "Bluetooth Serial Client (COMx) " appears under
Client Ports. (X indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth.)
E Click [Close].
F On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
G Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

H On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
I Click the [Ports] tab.
J Under [Port], select the [COMx:] check box.
number used by Bluetooth.
K Click [OK].
Close the [Printers] window.
42
X indicates the COM port
If a dialog box appears while transmitting a print job, reestablish network

connection as follows:
A Select the printer you want to use in the [Printers and Fax] box.
B Click [Connect].
Note
To always use the same printer, select the [Always use for this connection] check box.
Reference
For details, see the manuals provided with the Bluetooth adaptor or computer equipped with Bluetooth.
Configuring Security Mode Settings

B On the [Tools] menu, click [Security Mode].
The [Security Mode] dialog box appears.
C Select the security mode in the [Security Mode:] list.
If you click [High], or [Custom], and specify [Link] in the [Custom Settings] dialog
box, enter the Bluetooth password. For information about entering the password, see p.43 Printing in the Security Mode
For all other security modes and custom settings, no password is required.
For information about each mode, see the manuals provided with the utility.
D Click [OK].
Close the [Security Mode] dialog box.

Reference
For details about the security mode, see 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager Help. For details about the password entry which is required to transmit print jobs, see p.43 Printing in the Security Mode.
Printing in the Security Mode
A Send the print job to the printer in use.
Depending on the computer configuration, the [Connect] dialog box may appear. If it does, use it to establish the network connection.
B The [Authentication] dialog box appears.

C Enter the Bluetooth password, and then click [OK].
As the Bluetooth password, enter the last four digits of the machine's serial
number. You can find the serial number on the label on the back of the machine.
For example, if the serial number is 00A0-001234, the Bluetooth password is 1234.
D The print job is sent.

Note
The Bluetooth password differs for each machine and cannot be changed.
43
If a Message Appears during Installation

Message number 58 or 34 indicates the printer driver cannot be installed using
Auto Run. Install the printer driver using [Add Printer] or [Install Printer].
For Windows 95 / 98 / Me, Windows 2000 and Windows NT 4.0:

Note
If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the PostScript 3 printer
driver is either D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1,
D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1, or D:\DRIVERS\PS3\NT4\(Language)\DISK1. If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003:

B Click [Add a printer].
Note
If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver is D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1. If the installer
starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
For Windows XP Home Editions:
A On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].

B Click [Printers and Other Hardware].
C Click [Printers and Faxes].
D Click [Install Printer].
E Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
Note
If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver is D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1. If the installer
starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
44

Make option settings for the machine using the printer driver when bidirectional
communication is disabled.
Set up option settings when bidirectional communications are disabled.
Important
Under Windows 2000 / XP and Windows Server 2003, Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer properties in the [Printers] folder.
Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
Under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control permission is required to change the

printer properties in the [Printers] folder. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.


D Click the [Accessories] tab.
Under Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003 and Windows NT 4.0, click
the [Device Settings] tab.
E Select options installed from the [Options] area, and then make the neces-
sary settings.
Under Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003 and Windows NT 4.0, click
the [Installable Options] area.
F Click [Aplly], and then click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
Reference
For details about making option settings for the printer, see p.65 Setting
Up Options.
45

There are two methods to open the printer properties dialog box.
Making printer default settings

Important



E Click [OK].
Note
Reference
46
Making printer settings from an application

for the WordPad application provided with Windows 95/98/Me.


Note
application only.
Reference
47
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer

Making printer default settings - the printer properties
Important
by default.



Note
Do not make a setting for [Form to Tray Assignment].
Reference
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences

Important



Note
48
Reference

for the WordPad application provided with Windows 2000.
On the [File] menu, click [Print...].

C On the [Preferences] tab, make the necessary settings, and then click [Print]
to start printing.
Note
application only.
Reference
49
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Important
To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log
on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default.



Note
Reference
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences

Important



Note
Reference
50

for the WordPad application provided with Windows XP.
On the [File] menu, click [Print...].

C On the [Preference] tab, make the necessary settings, and then click [Print] to
start printing.
Note
application only.
Reference
51

Important

The [Printers] window appears .


Note

Reference
Making printer default settings - Default

Important


C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults...].
52

Note
Reference

for the WordPad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.


Note
application only.
Reference
53
54
2. Mac OS Configuration
Mac OS
This section explains how to configure a Mac OS to use EtherTalk and USB.
The following explains how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you are not using Mac
OS 9.1, see the manual of the Mac OS you are using for details
Important
For Mac OS 8.6 and higher. (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.)
Note
The PostScript 3 printer driver is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM.
Mac OS 8 and 9:PS Driver:(language):Disk1
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and PPD File

It is necessary to install a printer driver and PostScript Printer Description (PPD)
files to print from a Mac OS.
Follow the procedure below to install a printer driver and a PPD file into a Mac
OS using Mac OS 8.6 and higher.
PostScript 3 Printer Driver

B Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
C Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
D Double-click the [PS Driver] folder.
E Double-click the folder of the language you use.
F Open [Disk1], and then double-click the installer icon.
PPD Files
A Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.

B Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
C Double-click the [Printer Descriptions] folder.
D Double-click the folder of the language you are using.
E Open the [DISK1] folder.
55
F Drag the PPD file and the plugin file into [Printer Descriptions] in [Extensions]
under [System Folder].
G Restart the Mac OS.

Setting Up PPD Files
Important
Make sure that the printers are connected to an AppleTalk network before
performing the following procedure.
A On the [Apple] menu, click [Chooser].

B Click the Adobe PS icon.
C In the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list, click the name of the printer you want to use.
D Click [Create].
E Click the printer you want to use, and then click [Setup].
A PPD file is set up and the Adobe PS icon appears at the left of the printer
name in the list. Follow the procedure on p.56 Setting Up Options to make
option settings; otherwise close the [Chooser] dialog box.
Setting Up Options
A On the [Apple] menu, click [Chooser].

B Click the Adobe PS icon.
C In the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list, click the name of the printer you want
to use, and then click [Setup].
D Click [Configure].
A list of options appears.
E Select the option you want to set up, and then select an appropriate setting for it.
F Click [OK].
The list of options closes.
G Click [OK].
The [Chooser] dialog box appears.
H Close the [Chooser] dialog box.

Note
If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set
up correctly. To complete the setup, check the name of the PPD file displayed in the dialog box.
56
Mac OS
Installing Adobe Type Manager

Important
Quit all applications currently running before installation. Install ATM after
you restart the computer.
A Start a Mac OS.

C Double-click the CD-ROM drive con.
D Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
E Double-click the [ATM] folder.
F Double-click the ATM 4.6.2 installer icon.
H When the procedure is complete, restart the computer. ATM will be com-
pletely installed only after restarting.
I On the [Apple] menu, open [Control Panel], and then click [~ATM].
J The ATM control panel opens.
Note
For details about installation, see the operating instructions in the ATM folder.
Installing Screen fonts

Follow the procedure below to install screen fonts.
The screen fonts described below can be found in the [Fonts] folder on the CD-ROM.
A Start a Mac OS.

The CD-ROM drive icon appears.
C Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.

The contents of the CD-ROM appear.
D Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.

E Double-click the [Fonts] folder.
F Double-click the [Screen font] folder.
G Double-click the [TrueType] or [Type1] folder.
Select the font type you want to use.
57
H Copy the fonts you want to install in [System Folder].

I Click [OK].
The fonts are installed.
J Restart the Mac OS.
Changing to EtherTalk
Follow the procedure below to configure to a Mac OS to use EtherTalk.
A Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the AppleTalk icon.

B On the [Connect via:] pop-up menu, click [Ethernet].
C If you change zones, select a name on the [Current zone:] pop-up menu.
D Close the AppleTalk control panel.
E Restart the computer.
Note
The procedures used to configure Mac OS may vary depending on the Mac
OS version. The following describes how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you
are using a different version of Mac OS, use the following procedures as a
reference and see the manuals for your Mac OS version.
Confirm the Connection to the Printer with TCP/IP
Reference
For information about installing applications required for EtherTalk, see
the Mac OS manuals.
58
Mac OS X
Mac OS X
This section explains how to configure a Mac OS X to use EtherTalk, USB and
TCP/IP.
Follow the procedure below to configure Mac OS X 10.3.8. If you are not using
Mac OS X 10.3.8, see the manual of the Mac OS X you are using for details.
Important
For Mac OS X 10.1 or higher.
Note
The PPD files are stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM.
Mac OS X:PPD Installer
Installing the PPD Files

Follow the procedure below to install a PPD file to print from Mac OS X.
Important
You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, consult your network administrator.

B Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
C Double-click the [Mac OS X] folder.
D Double-click the [MacOSX PPD Installer] folder.
E Double-click the installer icon.
F Follow the instructions on the screen.
Setting Up the PPD File
A Start Printer Setup Utility.

B Click [Add].
Mac OS X 10.4 or later
Click a printer that has "AppleTalk" indicated in the "Connection" column.
If the zone is set, click [More Printers...], and then select the zone from the
second pop-up menu.
Other Mac OS X
Click [AppleTalk] on the first pop-up menu.
If the zone is set, select the zone from the second pop-up menu.
59
C Select the printer, and then select its manufacturer from the [Printer Model:]
pop-up menu.
Under Mac OS X 10.4 or later, you are using from the [Print Using] popup
menu.
A list of printer types appears.
D Select the PPD file for the model you are using, and then click [Add].
E Quit Printer Setup Utility.
Setting Up Options
A Start System Preferences.

B Click [Print & Fax].
C In the [Printer] list, click the name of the printer you want to use, and then
click [Printer Setup...].
D Select the option you want to set up, and then select an appropriate setting
for it.
E Click [Apply Changes].

Note
If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set
up correctly. To complete the setup, check the name of the PPD file displayed in the dialog box.
Using USB Interface

Follow the procedure below to set up USB connection.

B Click [Add].
Click a printer that has "USB" indicated in the "Connection" column.
Other Mac OS X
Click [USB] on the pop-up menu.
The connected printer appears.
C Select the printer, and then select its manufacturer from the [Printer Model:]
pop-up menu.
Under Mac OS X 10.4 or later, you are using from the [Print Using] pop-up menu.
A list of printer types appears.
60
Mac OS X
D Select the connected printer from the list of printer models, and then click
[Add].
E Quit Printer Setup Utility.

Note
When printing with a USB connection to a Macintosh computer, printer
language does not change automatically. Use the control panel on this
printer to change printer language to [Auto Detect] or [PS] before printing.
USB2.0 can be used only with Mac OS X 10.3.3 or higher.
Using Bonjour (Rendezvous)

Follow the procedure below to print using Bonjour (Rendezvous) under Mac OS
X 10.2.3 or higher. Ethernet, wireless LAN and IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) connections can also be used.

B Click [Add].
Click a printer that has "Bonjour" indicated in the "Connection" column.
If the zone is set, click [More Printers...], and then select the zone from the
second pop-up menu.
Other Mac OS X
Click [Rendezvous] on the pop-up menu.
If the zone is set, select the zone from the second pop-up menu.
C Select the name of the connected printer from the list of printer models, and
then click [Add].

Under Mac OS X 10.4 or later, Installable Options window appears. Select the
option you want to set up, and then select an appropriate setting for it, and
then [Continue].
D Quit Printer Setup Utility.

Note
When printing with a Rendezvous connection to a Macintosh computer,
printer language does not change automatically. Use the control panel on
this printer to change printer language to [Auto Detect] or [PS] before printing.
61
Changing to EtherTalk
Follow the procedure below to configure a Mac OS X to use EtherTalk.
Important
You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, consult your network administrator
A Open [System Preference], and then click the Network icon.

B Click [Built-in Ethernet] in the [Show:] list box.
C Click the [AppleTalk] tab.
D Select the [Make AppleTalk Active] check box.
E To change AppleTalk zones, select a name from the [AppleTalk Zone:] pop-up
menu.
F When the settings are made, click [Apple Now].

Reference
For information about installing applications required for EtherTalk, see
the Mac OS manuals.
62
Configuring the Printer
Configuring the Printer

Use the control panel to enable AppleTalk. (The default is active.)
63
64
3. Using PostScript 3
Setting Up Options
To use installed options correctly, first set up the printer driver. If the options are
not recognized, you cannot use them, even though they are physically installed.
The procedure to set up a printer driver varies depending on the operating system.
Windows
Important
If your system is Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional, or Windows
Server 2003, changing printer driver settings requires Manage Printers
permission. Members of Administrators and Power Users groups have
Manage Printers permission by default. When you change printer driver
settings, log on with an account that has Manage Printers permission.
If your system is Windows NT 4.0, changing printer driver settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of Administrators, Server
Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control
permission by default. When you change printer driver settings, log on
with an account that has Full Control permission.
If you are using Adobe Page Maker 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0 with Windows 95 / 98 /
Me / 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, you have to
set up options in the Adobe PageMaker's print dialog box.
You can set up any of the options using the following tabs:
[Options] on the [Accessories] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows

Server 2003
[Installable Options] on the [Device Settings] tab.
Windows NT 4.0
[Installable Options] on the [Device Settings] tab in the

Properties dialog box.
Mac OS
For ethernet, [Chooser] on the Apple Menu. For USB,

[Change Setup] from the [Printing] menu to open the
Desktop printer.
Mac OS X
[Printer Setup...] in [Print & Fax] to open the System Preferences.
Note
To set up options, access the printer driver from Windows. You cannot set
up options if you access the printer driver from an application.
65
Using PostScript 3
Mac OS
Important
If you are using Mac OS X, this functions cannot be used.
You can set up all options using the [Chooser] dialog box.
Reference
See p.45 Making Option Settings for the Printer, p.56 Setting Up Options
or p.60 Setting Up Options for the installation method appropriate to your
printing environment.
66
Printing a Document
Printing a Document
This documentation describes the specific printer functions and menus that are
added by installing the PPD file. For more information about the functions and
menus of the Windows 95 / 98 / Me PostScript printer driver, see the printer
driver's Help.
Important
On a Macintosh, Mac OS 8.6 or higher (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.), or Mac OS X 10.1 or higher is required.
If you are using Mac OS X 10.1.x, the following functions cannot be used:
Sample Print
Locked Print
Hold Print
Stored Print
Store and Print
Document Server
User Code
Applications, such as PageMaker, that have their own drivers do not support
the following functions:
Sample Print
Locked Print
Hold Print
Stored Print
Store and Print
Document Server
Note
If you are using Mac OS X 10.2.x or higher, the Job Type function can be used.
Mac OS X in the tables below refers to Mac OS X 10.2.3. Depending on the

version, [Features x] is displayed as [Set x] (x is a number). Make adjustments
according to the version you use.
67
Using PostScript 3
Job Type
Use this to select the type of print job.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
[Job Type:] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Job Type:] on the [Job Log] tab in the Printing Preferences
er 2003
dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Job Type:] on the [Job Log] tab in the Document Defaults

dialog box.
Mac OS
[Job Type:] on [Job Log] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Job Type:] on [Job Log] in the print dialog box.
You can select the following items:
Normal Print
Select this for normal printing. The print job starts immediately after the print
command is given.
Note
Under Windows 95 / 98 / Me, if you want to use an User ID, click the [Details...] button.
Sample Print
Use this function to print only one set of a multiple print jobs.
The other sets are saved in the machine. The saved job can be printed from the
machine's control panel. You can also delete the saved job.
Note
The User ID can contain up to eight alphanumeric (a- z, A- Z, 0- 9) characters.
Entering the User ID helps you distinguish your print job from others.
Reference
For details about how to use Sample Print, see p.70 How to Use Sample
Print.
Locked Print
Use this function to save documents in the machine memory with a password, and then edit and print them as you want.
Note
The User ID can contain to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
The Password must be 4-8 digits.
Reference
For details about how to use Locked Print, see p.74 How to Use Locked
Print.
68
Printing a Document
Hold Print
Use this function to temporarily hold a file in the machine, and print it from
the computer or the machine's control panel later.
Note
The User ID can contain up to eight alphanumeric (a- z, A- Z, 0- 9) characters.
The File Name can contain to 16 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
Reference
For details about how to use Hold Print, see p.79 How to Use Hold Print.
Stored Print
Use this function to store a file in the machine, and then print it from the computer or the machine's control panel later.
Note
The User ID can contain up to eight alphanumeric (a- z, A- Z, 0- 9) characters. The Password must be 4-8 digits.
You can assign a password to a saved document, but password assignment
is not mandatory.
Reference
For details about how to use Stored Print, see p.83 How to Use Stored
Print/Store and Print.
Store and Print

Use this function to prints the file at once and also stores the file in the printer.
Note
The User ID can contain up to eight alphanumeric (a- z, A- Z, 0- 9) characters. The Password must be 4-8 digits.
You can assign a password to a saved document, but password assignment
is not mandatory.
Reference
For details about how to use Stored Print, see p.83 How to Use Stored
Print/Store and Print.
69
Using PostScript 3
Document Server
Use this function to store hard disk documents that you want to print as well
as documents you might want to later combine or process for printing.
Note
Reference
For details about the Document Server function, see "Accessing the Document Server", Printer Reference.
How to Use Sample Print

Follow the procedure below to print a document using the Sample Print function.
A In the application, on the [File] menu, click [Print].

B Select the printer, and then click [Properties].

C Click the [Setup] tab.
D In the [Job Type:] list, click [Sample Print].
E Click [Details...].
F In the [User ID:] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, AZ, 0-9) characters.
The user ID associates the user with his / her jobs.
G Click [OK].
I Set the number of copies to two or more, and then start the printing from
the application's [Print] dialog box.
The sample print job is sent to the machine and one set is printed.
J Check the printed output to make sure the settings are correct.
If the settings are correct, perform the following steps.
If you want to delete a saved job, see p.74 Deleting a Sample Print File.
K On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the printer screen.
L Press [Print Jobs].
70
Printing a Document
M Press [Sample Print Job List].

A list of sample print files stored in the machine appears.
User ID, Date / Time and File Name also appear.
N Select the file you want to print by pressing it.

O Press [Print] to change the number of sets to be printed.

P Enter the new number of sets using the number keys.
If you do not want to change the set quantity, perform the following step.
Press {Clear/Stop} to correct any entry mistakes.
When multiple files are selected without setting a quantity, 1 page less than
the minimum number of all settings is applied.
Q Press [Yes].
Note
Press [Stop] to cancel printing.
When printing finishes, the stored file is deleted.

To cancel printing, press [Exit]. Then, press [Job Reset]. After it has started,
the file is deleted.
If there is a print job outstanding, this is printed before the sample print job.
If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before
sending a print job. The printer driver automatically collates Sample Print
jobs by default. If the collate option is selected in the application's [Print] dialog box, there may be more prints than required.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0

B Right-click the printer icon, and then click [Printing Preference] on the command menu.
If you are using Windows 2000, select the printer, and then perform the following steps.
If you are using Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, select the printer, and
then click [Preferences].
C Click the [Job Log] tab.

D In the [Job Type:] list, click [Sample Print].
E In the [User ID:] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, AZ, 0-9) characters.
71
Using PostScript 3
F Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.

If you are using Windows 2000, perform the following steps.
G Set the number of copies to two or more, and then start the printing from
the application's [Print] dialog box.
The sample print job is sent to the machine, and one set is printed.
H Check the printed output to make sure the settings are correct.
If the settings are correct, perform the following steps to print the remaining sets.
I On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the printer screen.
J Press [Print Jobs].
K Press [Sample Print Job List].
L Select the file you want to print by pressing it.

M Press [Print] to change the number of sets to be printed.

N Enter the new number of sets using the number keys.
If you do not want to change the set quantity, perform the following steps.
O Press [Yes].
Note

If there is a print job outstanding, this will be printed before the sample
print job.
sending a print job. The printer driver automatically collates Sample Print
72
Printing a Document
Mac OS / Mac OS X

B Set the number of copies to two or more.

The sample print job is sent to the machine, and one set is printed.
C In the pop-up menu, click [Job Log].

D On the [Job Type:] pop-up menu, select [Sample Print].
E In the [User ID:] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-
Z, 0-9) characters.
F Check the printed output to make sure the settings are correct.
If the settings are correct, perform the following steps to print the remaining sets.
G On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the printer screen.
H Press [Print Jobs].
I Press [Sample Print Job List].
J Select the file you want to print by pressing it.

K Press [Print] to change the number of sets to be printed.

L Enter the new number of sets using the number keys.
If you do not want to change the set quantity, perform the following steps.
M Press [Yes].
Note
If there is a print job outstanding, this is printed before the sample print job.
73
Using PostScript 3
Deleting a Sample Print File

If a printed document is not as required, you can delete the Sample Print file.
A On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the printer screen.

D Select the file you want to delete by pressing it.

To cancel a selection, press the highlighted jobs again.
Only one file can be selected at a time.
E Press [Delete].
A confirmation screen appears.
F Press [Yes] to delete the file.

After the file is deleted the printer screen reappears.
Press [No] to cancel the delete request.
How to Use Locked Print

Follow the procedure below to print a document using the Locked Print function.
A In the application, click [Print] on the [File] menu.


D In the [Job Type:] list, click [Locked Print].
F In the [User ID:] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, AZ, 0-9) characters, and then enter a 4-8 digit password in the [Password:] box.
G Click [OK].
74
Printing a Document
I After making the necessary settings, click [OK] to close the [Print] dialog box.
The document file is saved in the machine.
To print the document, perform the following steps.
To delete the document, see p.78 Deleting a Locked Print File.
J On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the printer screen.
K Press [Print Jobs].
L Press [Locked Print Job List].
A list of locked print files stored in the machine appears.

M Select the file you want to print by pressing it.

N Press [Print].
O Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
Press [OK] to enter the password again.
When multiple print files are selected, the machine prints only files that correspond to the entered password. The number of files is displayed on the confirmation screen.
P Press [Yes].
A locked file is printed.
Note
sending a print job. The printer driver automatically collates Locked Print
75
Using PostScript 3

B Right-click the printer icon, and then click [Printing Preference] on the com-
mand menu.

D In the [Job Type:] list, click [Locked Print].
E In the [User ID:] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, AZ, 0-9) characters, and then enter a 4-8 digit password in the [Password:] box.
The user ID associates user with his / her jobs.

G Start the printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

H On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the printer screen.
I Press [Print Jobs].
J Press [Locked Print Job List].

K Select the file you want to print by pressing it.

L Press [Print].
76
Printing a Document
M Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
N Press [Yes].
Note
sending a print job. The printer driver automatically collates Locked Print
Mac OS / Mac OS X

B In the pop-up menu, click [Job Log].

C On the [Job Type:] pop-up menu, click [Locked Print].
D In the [User ID:] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, AZ, 0-9) characters, and then enter a 4-8 digit password in the [Password:] box.
E After making the necessary settings, click [Print].

F On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the printer screen.
G Press [Print Jobs].
H Press [Locked Print Job List].

77
Using PostScript 3
I Select the file you want to print by pressing it.

J Press [Print].
K Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
L Press [Yes].
Note
Deleting a Locked Print File

If a printed document is not as required, you can delete the Locked Print file.


To cancel a selection, press the highlighted job again.
Only one file can be selected at a time.
E Press [Delete].
A password screen appears.
F Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
78

A confirmation screen will reappear if the password was entered incorrectly.
When multiple files are selected, the machine deletes only files that correspond to the entered password. The number of files to be deleted is displayed
on the confirmation screen.
Printing a Document
G Press [Yes].
After the file is deleted, the printer screen reappears.
Note
How to Use Hold Print

Follow the procedure below to print a document using the Hold Print function.


D In the [Job Type:] list, click [Hold Print].
F In the [User ID:] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, AZ, 0-9) characters. File Name can also be set.
G Click [OK].
To delete the document, see p.82 Deleting a Hold Print File.
L Press [Hold Print Job List].

A list of hold print files stored in the machine appears.

79
Using PostScript 3
N Press [Print].
O Press [Yes].
The hold print file is printed.
Note
When printing is finished, the stored file is deleted.
sending a print job. The printer driver automatically collates Hold Print
jobs by default. If a collate option is selected from the application's Print dialog box, there may be more prints than required.

mand menu.

D In the [Job Type:] list, click [Hold Print].
E In the [User ID:] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, AZ, 0-9) characters. File Name can also be set.


80
Printing a Document

J Press [Hold Print Job List].


L Press [Print].
M Press [Yes].
Note
sending a print job. The printer driver automatically collates Hold Print
files by default. If a collate option is selected from the application's Print
dialog box, there may be more prints than required.
Mac OS / Mac OS X
A From an application, on the [File] menu, click [Print].


C On the [Job Type:] pop-up menu, click [Hold Print].
D In the [User ID:] box, enter the user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z,
A-Z, 0-9) characters. File Name can also be set.

81
Using PostScript 3

H Press [Hold Print Job List].


J Press [Print].
K Press [Yes].
Note
When printing is completed, the stored file is deleted.
Deleting a Hold Print File

If a printed document is not as required, you can delete the Hold Print file.
C Press [Hold Print Job List].

A list of Hold Print files stored in the machine appears.

E Press [Delete].
F Press [Yes].
Note
82
Printing a Document
How to Use Stored Print/Store and Print

Follow the procedure below to print a document using the Stored Print function.


D In the [Job Type:] list, click [Stored Print] or [Store and Print].
[Stored Print]
Stores the file in the printer and print it later using the control panel.
[Store and Print]
Prints the file at once and also stores the file in the printer.
F In the [User ID:] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, AZ, 0-9) characters, and then enter a 4-8 digit password in the [Password:] box.
File Name can also be set.
You can assign a password to a saved document, but password assignment is
not mandatory.
The same password must be entered when printing or deleting.
G Click [OK].
To delete the document, see p.87 Deleting a Stored Print File.
L Press [Stored Print Job List].

A list of stored print files stored in the machine appears.
83
Using PostScript 3

N Press [Print].
If you have already set a password, proceed to the following step.
O Enter a password using the number keys on the password screen, and then
press [OK]
If you have not set the password, proceed to the following step.
P Press [Yes].
The stored print file is printed.
Note
The Stored Print files sent to the machine are not deleted unless you delete
them in the machine or select [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs] (see "System",
Printer Reference). For details, see p.87 Deleting a Stored Print File.
If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before sending a print job. The printer driver collates the Stored Print files by default. If
a collate option is selected from the application's Print dialog box, there may
be more prints than required.

mand menu.

D In the [Job Type:] list, click [Stored Print] or [Store and Print].
84
[Stored Print]
[Store and Print]
Printing a Document
E In the [User ID:] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, AZ, 0-9) characters, and then enter a 4-8 digit password in the [Password:] box.
The user ID associates the user with his / her job.
not mandatory.
The same password must be entered when printing or deleting.


J Press [Stored Print Job List].


L Press [Print].
M Enter a password using the number keys on the password screen, and then
press [OK]
85
Using PostScript 3
N Press [Yes].
The stored file is printed.
Note
Stored Print files sent to the machine are not deleted unless you delete
them in the machine or select [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs] (see "System",
Printer Reference). For details, see p.87 Deleting a Stored Print File.
sending a print job. The printer driver automatically collate Stored Print
files by default. If a collate option is selected from the application's Print
dialog box, there may be more prints than required.
Mac OS / Mac OS X


C On the [Job Type:] pop-up menu, click [Stored Print] or [Store and Print].
[Stored Print]
[Store and Print]
D In the [User ID:] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, AZ, 0-9) characters, and then enter a 4-8 digit password in the [Password:] box.
not mandatory.
The password must be entered when printing or deleting.

86
Printing a Document
H Press [Stored Print Job List].


J Press [Print].
K Enter a password using the number keys on the password screen, and then
press [OK]
L Press [Yes].
The stored file is printed.
Note
Stored Print files sent to the machine is not deleted unless you delete them
in the machine or select [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs] (see "System", Printer
Reference). For details, see p.87 Deleting a Stored Print File.
Deleting a Stored Print File

If a printed document is not as required, you can delete the stored print file.


To cancel a selection, press the highlighted job again.
E Press [Delete].
87
Using PostScript 3
F Press [Yes].
Note
If you have already set a password in the printer driver, enter it to delete.
How to Use Document Server

Follow the procedure below to print a document using the Document Server function.
Important
An optional hard disk drive is required to use the Document Server function.


D In the [Job Type:] list, click [Document Server].
F Enter a user ID, file name, and password in the dialog box that appears. The
file name and password are optional.
G Click [OK].
H Start the printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

mand menu.
88

D In the [Job Type:] list, click [Document Server].
Printing a Document
E Enter a user ID, file name, and password in the dialog box that appears. The
F Click [OK].

Mac OS / Mac OS X
Important
If you are using Mac OS X 10.1.x, this function cannot be used.
If you are using Mac OS X 10.2.x or higher, the Job Type function can be used.


C On the [Job Type:] pop-up menu, click [Document Server].
D Enter a user ID, file name, and password in the dialog box that appears. The
E Start the printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

User Code
Use this to set a user code for print logging.
Enter a user code using up to eight digits. A user code identifies a group of users
and allows you to check the number of sheets printed under each code with
[User Code] on the [Statistics] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [User ID:] on the [Job Log] tab in the Printing Preferences
er 2003
dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[User ID:] on the [Job Log] tab in the Document Defaults

dialog box.
Mac OS
Select the [Enable User Code] check box, and then enter a
user code in the [User Code] box on [Job Log] in the print
dialog box.
Mac OS X
Select the [Enable User Code] check box, and then enter a
user code in the [User Code] box on [Job Log] in the print
dialog box.
Reference
For details about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see Help.
89
Using PostScript 3
Paper Selection
All Pages and Destination Tabs
Use this to select the media type and input tray.
Important
This function is for Windows 95 / 98 / Me only.
Reference
For details about the [All Pages] and [Destination] tabs. See the printer driver's Help.
Paper Size
Use this to select the size of paper you want to use.
[Size:] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Paper Size:] on [Paper/Output] on [Advanced...] on the [Paer 2003
per/Quality] tab in the Printing Preference dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Paper Size:] on the [Page Setup] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Paper:] on the [Page Attributes] tab in the Page Setup dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Paper Size:] in the Page Setup dialog box.
Reference
For details about the paper sizes supported by this machine, see General Setting Guide.
Fit to Paper
When the size of the document and paper size differ, set whether or not to print
according to paper size.
[Fit to Print Size:] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Fit to Print Size:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options]
er 2003
on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing
Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Fit to Paper] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab

in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Fit to Paper:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog

box.
Mac OS X
[Fit to Paper:] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in

the print dialog box.
90
Printing a Document
Prompt User
Print is performed with the size of document to be printed unchanged.
Nearest Size and Scale
If the paper size is smaller than the selected paper size, the driver reduces the
print size.
If the paper size is larger than the size of document to be printed, print is not
to fit the paper size.
Nearest Size and Crop
When the paper size is smaller than the size of document to be printed, print
is adjusted to meet the paper size.
Input Slot
Use this to select the paper sources.
[Input Tray:] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Paper Source] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing
er 2003
Windows NT 4.0
[Paper Source] on the [Page Setup] tab in the Document

Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Paper Source:] on [General] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Paper Feed] in the print dialog box.
Reference
For details about the paper sources, see Printer Reference.
Resolution
Use this to set the resolution types.
[Resolution] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Resolution] on [Graphic] on the [Paper/Quality] or [Layout]
er 2003
tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Graphic] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults

dialog box.
Mac OS
[Resolution] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog

box.
Mac OS X
[Resolution] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in

Reference
For more information about the resolution types, see Printer Reference.
91
Using PostScript 3
Orientation Override
Use this to set the paper orientation.
[Orientation:] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Orientation Override] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...]
er 2003
on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Orientation Override] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Orientation Override] on [Printer Specific Options] in the

print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Orientation Override] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box.

Off
Landscape
Portrait
Gradation
Use this to select a type of gradation based on your purpose.
[Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab
er 2003
in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document

Mac OS
[Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Gradation] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in

Reference
For details about the gradation types, see Printer Reference.
92
Printing a Document
Toner Saving / Level Color

Use this function to reduce the amount of toner used when printing.
[Toner Saving] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Toner Saving] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the
er 2003
[Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Toner Saving] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options]

on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog
box.
Mac OS
[Toner Saving] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Toner Saving] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in

Reference
For details about this function, see Printer Reference.
Duplex Printing
Use this function to select duplex printing.
Important
To use this function, the optional duplex unit must be installed on the machine.
[Duplex:] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Print on Both Sides] on the [Layout] tab in the Printing
er 2003
Windows NT 4.0
[Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing)] on the [Page Setup] tab

in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Print on Both Sides] on [Layout] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
10.3 or higher
The [Two Sided Printing] check box on [Layout] in the
print dialog box.
Other Mac OS X
The [Print on both Sides] check box on [Duplex] in the
print dialog box.
The following items may vary depending on the operating system you are using.
93
Using PostScript 3
Off
Disables Duplex Printing.
Open to Left
Prints output so that you can open it to the left.
Open to Top
Prints output so that you can open it to the top.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, Mac OS

None
Flip on Short Edge
Prints output so that you can open it to the short edge when bound along the
short edge.
Flip on Long Edge
Prints output so that you can open it to the long edge when bound along the
long edge.
Note
If you are using a Mac OS, click to select the button that means Flip on Long
Edge or Flip on Short Edge.
Windows NT 4.0
None
Short Side
short edge.
Long Side
long edge.
94
Printing a Document
Mac OS X
The following functions are selectable under Mac OS X 10.3 or higher (for Mac OS
X 10.2 or earlier, see p.94 Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, Mac OS):
Off
Long-Edge Binding
long edge.
Short-Edge Binding
short edge.
Collate
Use this function to enable collation. With this feature, the machine can efficiently print collated sets of multiple-page documents.
Important
To use this function, a memory unit of at least 192 MB or hard disk drive must
be installed on the machine.
If you are using Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS or Mac OS X, make
sure that the following check boxes have not been selected.
Windows 2000
The [Collate] check box on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/
Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows XP
The [Collate] check box on [Paper/Output] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/ Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Mac OS
The [Collate] check box in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
The [Collate] check box on [Copies & Pages] in the printer dialog box.
[Collate:]on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Collate:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Collate:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the

[Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Collate:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog

box.
Mac OS X
[Collate:] on the [Feature 1] tab on [Printer Feature] in the

printer dialog box.
95
Using PostScript 3
Paper Type
Use this to select the paper type.
[Type:] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Media:] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preferer 2003
ence dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Paper/Output] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Paper Type:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog

box.
Mac OS X
[Paper Type] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in

Reference
For details about the media type supported by this machine, see General Setting Guide.
Destination Tray
Use this to select the destination tray.
The following table shows where you can select this function.
[Output Tray:] in the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Destination] in [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paer 2003
per/Quality] or [Layout] tab.
Windows NT 4.0
[Destination] in [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on

the [Advanced] tab.
Mac OS
[Destination] in [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog

box.
Mac OS X
[Destination]on the [Features x] tab in [Printer Features] in

Reference
For details about the destination tray supported by this machine, see \General Setting Guide.
96
Printing a Document
Staple
Use this function to staple sheets of printed paper together.
Important
When stapling, use the finisher option. See General Setting Guide or Printer
Reference.
[Staple:] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Staple:] in [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paer 2003
Windows NT 4.0
[Staple:] in [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the

[Advanced] tab.
Mac OS
[Staple:] in [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Staple:] on the [Features x] tab in [Printer Features] in the

print dialog box.
Note
The stapling location might differ depending on the orientation of the machine set in the printer and the orientation of the data to be printed. For details, see Printer Reference.
Punch
Use this function to punch holes in the printed documents.
Important
When punching holes, use the finisher option. See Printer Reference.
[Punch:] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Punch:] in [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paer 2003
Windows NT 4.0
[Punch:] in [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the

[Advanced] tab.
Mac OS
[Punch:] in [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Punch:] on the [Features x] tab in[Printer Features] in the

print dialog box.
Note
Punch positions and the number of punch holes that are available will change
depending on the type of finisher, the original's orientation, and the printing
paper size and orientation. For details, see Printer Reference.
97
Using PostScript 3
Z-fold
Use this function to select the Z-fold type in the printed documents.
Important
When Z-fold, use the finisher option. See Printer Reference.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Z-fold] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Z-fold] in [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paer 2003
Windows NT 4.0
[Z-fold] in [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the

[Advanced] tab.
Mac OS
[Z-fold] in [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Z-Fold] on the [Features x] tab in[Printer Features] in the

print dialog box.
Watermark
Set the Watermark function.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Watermark:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the
er 2003
[Paper/Quality] or [Layout] tab in the Printing Preferences
dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Watermark:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on

the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Note
When using this function under Windows 95 / 98 / Me, Mac OS, or Mac OS
X, see the printer driver Help. The following explains the procedure for Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.
Watermark Text
Select the Watermark Text type.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Watermark Text:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on
er 2003
the [Paper/Quality] or [Layout] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
98
[Watermark Text:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Note
Printing a Document
Watermark Font
Select the Watermark Font type.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Watermark Font:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on
er 2003
Windows NT 4.0
[Watermark Font:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Note
Watermark Size
Select the Watermark Size size.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Watermark Size:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on
er 2003
Windows NT 4.0
[Watermark Size:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Note
Watermark Angle
Select the Watermark angle.
Important
This item is only for portrait, not for landscape.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Watermark Angle:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on
er 2003
Windows NT 4.0
[Watermark Angle:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Note
99
Using PostScript 3
Watermark Style
Select the Watermark style.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Watermark Style:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on
er 2003
Windows NT 4.0
[Watermark Style:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Note
Color Mode
Use this to select whether the document is printed in color or black and white.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Color/ Black and White:] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Color Mode] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the
er 2003
Windows NT 4.0
[Color Mode] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on

Mac OS
[Color Mode] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Color Mode] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in

Color
Prints color documents in full color.
Note
Color images will be printed using CMYK toner, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow
and Black. CMYK are three primary subtractive colors.
If you want to adjust the print color, adjust the settings in the Advanced
dialog box accessed from the Advanced button on the [Paper/Quality] tab.
Black and White

Prints everything, including color documents, in black and white. Black and
White printing is faster than Color printing. To stop black and white areas being printed with CMYK toner, select [Black and White] in the printer driver as
well as in the application.
100
Note
If you use Windows 95/98/Me, this mode is called Color/ Black and
White:.
Printing a Document
Color Setting
Use this to select the correction method used for color conversion.
Important
If you use Windows 95/98/Me, you can configure [Color Setting:] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual] from the [Color] setting. [Automatic] sets the printer to Super Fine.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Color Setting:] on the [Advanced]window displayed when

clicking [Advanced...] after selecting [Manual] on [Color] on
the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Color Setting:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the
er 2003
Windows NT 4.0
[Color Setting:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on

Mac OS
[Color Setting:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Color Setting:] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features]

in the print dialog box.
Off
No modification to the color setting.
Fine
Select this setting to perform color matching based on one of the printer's
builtin color rendering dictionaries and perform CMYK conversion. This
setting performs the printing which output target is Monitor = 1.8.
Super Fine
Select this setting to use a color rendering dictionary as in the Fine setting but
produce output that is more vivid. Use this setting to emphasize light colors.
This setting performs the printing which output target is Monitor = 2.2.
Note
The color rendering dictionary that is selected in the Color Profile setting is used.
Use this to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to
color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document
you are printing. The selected CRD is also referred to when [Fine] or [Super
Fine] is selected for Color Setting:. The following items are available: [Auto],[Photographic], [Presentation] and [Solid Color].
101
Using PostScript 3
Color Profile
Use this to select the color profile pattern.
Important
If you use Windows 95/98/Me, you can configure [Color Profile:] in [Advanced] by
selecting [Manual] from the[Color] setting. [Automatic] sets the printer to Auto.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Color Profile:] in the [Advanced]dialog box displayed

when you click [Advanced...], after selecting [Manual] from
[Color] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Color Profile] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the
er 2003
Windows NT 4.0
[Color Profile] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on

Mac OS
[Color Profile] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Color Profile] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in

Auto
Use this setting to configure the best color profile pattern automatically depending on the appearance of the document to be printed.
Photographic
Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of photos and graphics that include midtones.
Presentation
Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of documents that contain text
and graphics. This CRD is best for printing colored charts, graphs, presentation materials and so on. If you use this CRD for printing photographs, the
color or gradations might not be reproduced well.
Solid Color
Use this setting to print specific colors, logos and so on.
User Setting
Use this setting to print images with downloaded CRD from your application.
CLP Simulation1
Use this setting to print blue color more brightly and vividly.
CLP Simulation2
Use this setting to print blue color more brightly and vividly. Print results are
lighter than those of CLP Simulation1.
102
Printing a Document
Note
Use this to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to
color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document
you are printing. The selected CRD is also referred to when [Fine] or [Super
Fine] is selected for Color Setting:. The following items are available: [Auto],[Photographic], [Presentation] and [Solid Color].
Black Over Print

Select whether or not to apply a black color over any other colors when printing.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Black Over Print] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual] from

the [Color] setting.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Black Over Print] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the
er 2003
Windows NT 4.0
[Black Over Print] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Black Over Print] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print

dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Black Over Print] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features]

in the print dialog box.
Gray Reproduction
Use this to select the Black Color mode for text and line art.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Gray Reproduction (Text/Line Art):] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual] from the [Color] setting. [Automatic] sets the
printer to Pure Black Text.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Gray Reproduction (Text/Line Art):] on [Printer Features] on
er 2003
[Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Gray Reproduction (Text/Line Art):] on [Printer Features] on

[Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document
Mac OS
[Gray Reproduction (Text/Line Art):] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Gray Reproduction (Text/Line Art):] on the [Features x] tab on

[Printer Features] in the print dialog box.
Black by K
Prints using black toner
103
Using PostScript 3
Black/Gray by K
Prints black using gray.
CMY + K
Prints using all toner colors.
Black/Gray by K (Text only)
Prints black text in gray.
Black by K (Text only)
Prints text using black toner.
Dithering
Use this to set the Image Rendering mode.
[Dithering:] in the [Advanced]dialog box displayed when

you click [Advanced...], after selecting [Manual] from
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Dithering:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paer 2003
per/Quality] or [Layout] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Dithering:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on

Mac OS
[Dithering:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Dithering:] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in

Auto
Use this setting to configure the best dithering method automatically depending on the appearance of the document to be printed.
Photographic
Performs dithering using an appropriate pattern for photographs.
Text
Performs dithering using an appropriate pattern for text.
User Setting
Use this setting to print images set in half tone in your application.
104
Printing a Document
CMYK Simulation Profile

You can simulate the color tone of the printing ink.
You can select the printing ink from US OffsetPrint, Euroscale and JapanColor.
Windows 95/98/Me
[CMYK Simulation Profile:] in the [Advanced]dialog box displayed when you click [Advanced...], after selecting [Manual] from [Color] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [CMYK Simulation Profile:] on [Printer Features] on [Ader 2003
vanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[CMYK Simulation Profile:] on [Printer Features] on [Document

Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults
dialog box.
Mac OS
[CMYK Simulation Profile:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the

print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[CMYK Simulation Profile:] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer

Features] in the print dialog box.
Image Smoothing
Use this to select the image smoothing type.
[Image Smoothing:] in the [Advanced]dialog box displayed

when you click [Advanced...], after selecting [Manual] from
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Image Smoothing:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on
er 2003
the [Paper/Quality] or [Layout]tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Image Smoothing:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options]

on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Image Smoothing:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print

dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Image Smoothing:] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box.
Off
Disables image smoothing.
On
Performs image smoothing unconditionally.
Auto
Performs image smoothing automatically for images that have a resolution
less than 25% of supported printer resolution.
105
Using PostScript 3
Less than 90 ppi - Less than 300 ppi

Performs image smoothing only when the image has an image resolution
(pixels per inch) less than the respective value you have selected in the list.
Note
When [Auto] is selected, data processing may take a long time.
When Image Smoothing: is used for a mask image, this function may have an
undesired effect on the print result.
Separate into CMYK
Use this to select the print separation type.

You can separate the printing data into CMYK to specify a specific color combination.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Separate into CMYK:] in the [Advanced]dialog box displayed when you click [Advanced...], after selecting [Manual] from [Color] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Separate into CMYK:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on
er 2003
the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Separate into CMYK:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options]

on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Separate into CMYK:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the

print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Separate into CMYK:] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box.
Color Control
Use this to select whether or not you want the colors in the documents to be adjusted
before printing so that the printed page matches closer to the colors on the screen.
Windows 95/98/Me
The [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Graphic] on [Advanced] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the
er 2003
Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
This function is not available.
Mac OS
[Color] on the [Color Matching] tab in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
This function is not available.
Image Color Control

Display the Image Color Matching dialog box, click this button to specify exactly how you want the colors on your screen adjusted before printing.
Note
If you use Windows 2000 / XP or Windows Server 2003, this function is called
Image Color Management.
If you use Windows NT 4.0, this function can not be configured.
106 If you use Mac OS, this function is called Color Matching.
4. Printer Utility for Mac

By using Printer Utility for Mac, you can download fonts, change the name of
the printer and so on.
Installing Printer Utility for Mac

Follow these steps to install Printer Utility for Mac on the machine.
Important
If a Macintosh and printer are connected by USB, you cannot use Printer Utility for Mac.
A Start the Mac OS.

The CD-ROM icon appears.
C Double-click the CD-ROM icon.

The contents of the CD-ROM appear.
D Double-click the [Mac OS] folder.

Under Mac OS X, double-click the [Mac OS X] folder.
E Double-click the [PS Utility] folder on the CD-ROM, and then drag the [Printer Utility for Mac] file, and then drop it into the Macintosh hard disk.
F Drag the CD-ROM icon and drop it into [Trash] to eject the CD-ROM.
Printer Utility for Mac is installed.
Note
Printer Utility for Mac is included on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities.
Printer Utility for Mac requires Mac OS 8.1 or higher. (Mac OS X Classic
environment is supported.)
Printer Utility for Mac cannot use Mac OS X (native mode).
107
Starting Printer Utility for Mac

The following instructions describe how to start Printer Utility for Mac.
Mac OS
Important
Before starting Printer Utility for Mac, make sure the printer is selected in
[Chooser] on the Apple menu.
A Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon.

The [Printer Utility for Mac] dialog box appears.
B Click [OK].
Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.
Mac OS X
A Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon.

The [Printer Utility for Mac] dialog box appears.
B Click [OK].
C In the [Available Printers:] box, select the printer you want to use.
If you change zones, select a name from [Available Network Zones:].
Click [Choose Printer...] on the Printer Utility for Mac menu if you want to
change the printer.
D Select the printer you want to use.

Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.
E Click [Choose].
108
Printer Utility for Mac Functions

Printer Utility for Mac functions are described below.
File menu
[Download PS Fonts...]
Download fonts (PostScript Type 1) to the printer. See p.110 Downloading PS Fonts.
[Display Printer's Fonts...]
Display and delete the fonts in printer memory and the printer's hard disk
drive. See p.110 Displaying Printer's Fonts.
[Initialize Printer's Disk...]
Initialize the printer's hard disk drive. See p.111 Initializing the Printer
Disk.
[Page Setup...]
Set up the paper size to print Printer Font Catalog and Printer Font
Sample. See p.112 Page Setup.
[Print Fonts Catalog...]
Print the names of available fonts. See p.112 Printing Fonts Catalog.
[Print Fonts Sample...]
Print a sample of fonts. See p.112 Printing Fonts Sample.
[Rename Printer...]
Change the printer's name when viewed via Appletalk. See p.112 Renaming the Printer.
[Restart Printer]
Restart the printer. See p.113 Restarting the Printer.
Utility menu
[Download PostScript File...]
Download a PostScript file. See p.114 Downloading PostScript Files.
[Select Zone...]
Change the zone to which the printer belongs to via Appletalk. See p.114
Selecting the Zone.
[Display Printer Status...]
Display the status of the printer. See p.115 Displaying the Printer Status.
[Launch Dialogue Console...]
Create and edit a PostScript file, and then download it to the printer. See
p.115 Launching the Dialogue Console.
109
Downloading PS Fonts
You can download the PS fonts to the printer's memory or hard disk drive.
Important
The following procedures to download the fonts assume that you are a system
administrator. If you are not, be sure to consult your system administrator.
If the printer restarts, all the printer settings return to their defaults.
Confirm that a Mac OS and the printer are connected with Appletalk.
During the download, do not turn off the power switch, operate the panel or
open or close the cover.
A Select [Download PS Fonts...] on the [File] menu.

B Click [Add to list].
The dialog box to select fonts appears.
C Click to select the desired font files, and then click [Open].
The list of selectable font names appears.
D After adding all the fonts you want to download, click [OK].
The dialog box of selected fonts to download appears.
E Click [Download].
The fonts begin to download, and the download status is shown.
F When the completion message appears, click [OK].

G Click [Cancel].
Note
Some fonts cannot be downloaded.
Before downloading, read the documentation about the fonts you want to use.
Displaying Printer's Fonts

You can display the available fonts currently downloaded to the printer. Fonts
in the printer's memory and hard disk drive can be displayed.
A Select [Display Printer's Fonts...] on the [File] menu.

A dialog box appears.
B Select [Printer's memory] or [Printer's disk].

C Click [OK].
110
Note
The fonts displayed in italics are the default fonts.
Deleting Fonts
You can delete fonts from the printer's memory or hard disk drive.
Important
You cannot delete the fonts displayed in italic.
A Select [Display Printer's fonts] on the [File] menu.

A dialog box appears.
B Select [Printer's memory] or [Printer's disk].

C Select the fonts you want to delete.
D Click [Delete].
E Confirm the fonts you want to delete and the printer name from which you
want to delete the fonts.
F Click [Continue], and then click [OK].

G Click [OK].
Initializing the Printer Disk
When initializing the printer's hard disk drive, all the fonts downloaded to the
printer's hard disk drive are deleted. Before initializing, be sure to check the
fonts on the hard disk drive.
Important
When initializing the printer's hard disk drive from the operation panel, all of
the data on the printer's hard disk drive is deleted. Before initializing, be sure
to check the data on the hard disk drive.
Do not turn off the power switch until initializing is completed, otherwise the
hard disk drive might be damaged.
A Select [Initialize Printer's Disk...] on the [File] menu.

The confirmation message appears.
To cancel initialization, click [Cancel].
B Click [Execute].
Initializing starts.
C When the completion message appears, click [OK].

111
Page Setup
You can set the paper size on which to print Print Fonts Catalogue and Prints
Fonts Sample.
A Select [Page Setup...] on the [File] menu.

B Choose the paper size.
Printing Fonts Catalog
Print the names of fonts available on the printer.
A Select [Print Fonts Catalogue] on the [File] menu.

B Click [Print].
Note
The paper selected under [Page Setup] is used.
Printing Fonts Sample

You can print samples of fonts downloaded to the hard disk drive or memory.
A Select [Print Fonts Sample...] on the [File] menu.

B Click [Print].
Note
Print by using the paper selected on [Page Setup].
Renaming the Printer

You can change the printer name displayed under Appletalk. If you connect several printers on the network, assign different names so you can identify them. If
several printers have the same name, a digit appears next to the printer name in
[Chooser].
Important
You can enter up to 31 digits and letters.
Do not use symbols, for example *, :, =, @, ~.
112
Mac OS
A On the [File] menu, click [Rename Printer...].

B In the [New Name:] filed enter a new name.
C Click [Rename].
The printer name is changed.
D Click [OK].
E On the Apple menu, click [Chooser].
F Click the [AdobePS] icon.
G Select the printer whose name you changed, and then close the [Chooser] di-
alog box.
If there are several Appletalk zones, select the zone the machine belongs to.
Mac OS X
A On the [File] menu, click [Rename Printer...].

B In the [New Name:] filed enter a new name.
C Click [Rename].
The printer name is changed.
D Click [OK].
E On the [Printer Utility for Mac] menu, click [Choose Printer...].
F In the [Available Network Zones:] list, select the zone for the Macintosh in use.
G In the [Available Printers:] list, select the printer whose name you changed,
and then click [Choose].
Restarting the Printer

You can restart the printer.
A Select [Restart Printer] on the [File] menu.

B Confirm the message that appears on the screen, and then click [Restart].
The printer restarts.
The fonts that you downloaded in the printer's memory will be deleted.
If the printer restarts, all the printer settings return to their defaults.
113
Downloading PostScript Files

You can download a Postscript file to the printer.
A Select [Download PostScript File...] on the [Utility] menu.

B Select the file name to download and click the file name, and then click
[Open].
C Type the log file name, and then click [Save...].

The selected file is downloaded.
Errors are recorded in the log file.
Selecting the Zone

You can change the zone to which the printer belongs under Appletalk.
Important
Confirm that a Macintosh and printer are connected with Appletalk.
Mac OS
A On the [Utility] menu, click [Select Zone...].

The zone to which the printer belongs and the available zone list appear.
B Select the zone in which you want to locate the printer, and then click
[Change].
C Click [Continue].
D Click [OK].
E On the Apple menu, click [Chooser].
F Click the [AdobePS] icon.
G In the [Appletalk zone:] list, select the zone you changed.
H In the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list, select the printer you want to use.
I Close the [Chooser] dialog box.
114
Mac OS X
A On the [Utility] menu, click [Select Zone...].

The zone to which the printer belongs and the available zone list appear.
B Select the zone which you want to locate the printer in, and then click
[Change].
C Click [Continue].
D Click [OK].
E On the [Printer Utility for Mac] menu, click [Choose Printer...].
F In the [Available Network Zones:] list, select the zone you changed.
G In the [Available Printers:] list, select the model of printer in use, and then
click [Choose].
Displaying the Printer Status

You can display and confirm the current status of the printer.
A Select [Display Printer Status...] on the [Utility] menu.

The current status of the printer appears.
B Confirm the current status of the printer.

You can confirm the memory capacity, the VM (Virtual Memory) space, the
hard disk drive status and available space on the hard disk drive. You can
also confirm the zone to which the printer belongs to.
C Click [OK].
Launching the Dialogue Console
You can create and edit a PostScript file for printing, and then download it to the printer.
Important
Launch Dialogue Console is recommended for users with an understanding of PostScript.
Do not download any file other than PostScript files to the printer.
Launch Dialogue Console must be used at your own responsibility.
A Select [Launch Dialogue Console...] on the [Utility] menu.

Open the editing screen. The Dialogue Console menu bar appears.
115
B Type the PostScript command in the editor screen.

To edit a PostScript file, select [Open] on the [File] menu to open it.
You can search or replace a character string by using the [Search] menu.
C After editing the PostScript file, select [Download Top Window] on [Console]
menu to start printing.
The PostScript file is sent to the printer.
The [Reply from Printer] box opens, depending on the PostScript file you sent.
D Select [Return To Main Menu] on the [Console] menu to close the PostScript file.
116
INDEX
B
Black Over Print, 103
C
Changing to EtherTalk, 58, 62
CMYK Simulation Profile, 105
Collate, 95
Color Control, 106
Color Mode, 100
Color Profile, 102
Color Setting, 101
D
Deleting a Hold Print File, 82
Deleting a Locked Print File, 78
Deleting a Sample Print File, 74
Deleting a Stored Print File, 87
Deleting Fonts, 111
Destination Tray, 96
Displaying Printer's Fonts, 110
Displaying the Printer Status, 115
Dithering, 104
Document Server, 88
Downloading PostScript Files, 114
Downloading PS Fonts, 110
Duplex Printing, 93
F
Fit to Paper, 90
Functions
Printer Utility for Mac, 109
G
Gradation, 92
Gray Reproduction, 103
H
I
Image Smoothing, 105
Initializing Printer Disk, 111
Input Slot, 91
Installing, 107
Printer Utility for Mac, 107
Installing Adobe Type Manager
Mac OS, 57
Installing Screen fonts
Mac OS, 57
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver
and PPD File
Mac OS, 55
Installing the PPD Files
Mac OS X, 59
Windows 2000, 28
J
Job Type, 68
L
Launching the Dialogue Console, 115
Level Color, 93
M
Mac OS, 55
Mac OS X, 59
P
Page Setup, 112
Paper Selection, 90
Paper Size, 90
Paper Type, 96
Printer Utility for Mac, 107, 112, 114
Functions, 109
Printing Fonts Catalog, 112
Printing Fonts Sample, 112
Windows, 41
Windows 2000, 33
Punch, 97
117
R
Renaming the Printer, 112
Resolution, 91
Restarting the Printer, 113
S
Selecting the Zone, 114
Separate into CMYK, 106
Setting Up Options, 65
Mac OS, 56
Mac OS X, 60
Setting Up PPD Files
Mac OS, 56
Setting Up the PPD File
Mac OS X, 59
Staple, 97
T
Toner Saving, 93
U
User Code, 89
Using Bonjour
Mac OS X, 61
Using USB Interface
Mac OS X, 60
W
Watermark, 98
Watermark Angle, 99
Watermark Font, 99
Watermark Size, 99
Watermark Style, 100
Watermark Text, 98
Windows 2000
printer properties, PostScript 3,
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0
document defaults, PostScript 3,
Windows Server 2003
Windows XP
48
46
52
52
50
50
Z
Z-Fold, 98
118
EN
USA
GB
GB
AE
AE
B229-8559
Copyright 2005
EN USA
GB GB
AE AE B229-8559
UNIX Supplement
Introduction
Important
Notes
This manual covers all models, and therefore contains functions and settings that may not be available
for your model.
Functions and supported operating systems may differ from those of your model.
Trademarks
Sun, SunOS and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the
United States and other countries.
HP-UX is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
LINUX is a trademark of Linus Torvalds.
RED HAT is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine .....................................................................................1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................3
1. UNIX Configuration
Before Setup...........................................................................................................5
Using the lp / lpr commands.......................................................................................5
Using the rsh / rcp / ftp commands ............................................................................5
Using the Installation Shell Script........................................................................6
Assigning the IP Address ...........................................................................................7
Executing the Installation Shell Script ........................................................................8
After Executing the Installation Shell Script .............................................................11
Printing Method....................................................................................................16
Printing with lpr, lp....................................................................................................16
Printing with rsh, rcp, ftp...........................................................................................17
Printer Status .......................................................................................................19
Viewing the Print Job Status with lpq and lpstat ......................................................19
Viewing the Printer Status with rsh and ftp ..............................................................20
Copying Information to a File ...................................................................................20
Specifying the Device Option .............................................................................21
Configuring the Device Option .................................................................................21
Printer Language......................................................................................................24
Text Printing .............................................................................................................24
Input Tray .................................................................................................................25
Paper Size................................................................................................................26
Paper Type...............................................................................................................27
Output Tray ..............................................................................................................29
Copies ......................................................................................................................29
Collating ...................................................................................................................30
Duplex Printing.........................................................................................................30
Binding .....................................................................................................................31
Orientation................................................................................................................32
Resolution ................................................................................................................32
Z-Fold.......................................................................................................................33
Staple .......................................................................................................................34
Punch, Punchhole ....................................................................................................35
Symbol Set...............................................................................................................36
INDEX......................................................................................................... 38
i
ii

About This Machine

Trouble Shooting
Security Reference
Copy Reference
Facsimile Reference
Printer Reference
Scanner Reference
1
Network Guide
Other manuals
Safety Information
UNIX Supplement
Note

Post Script 3 Supplement and UNIX Supplement include descriptions of
2

Symbols
[]
{}
3
4
1. UNIX Configuration
This section explains how to set up a network printer and check print status using UNIX.
Before Setup
Important
To print from a UNIX workstation, use a file that the printer supports.
Setting up varies depending on the printing commands. Make sure to make settings accordingly.
Using the lp / lpr commands
A Use the installation shell script to register the device option, as well as the
printer host name and the IP address.
See p.6 Using the Installation Shell Script.
B Start printing.
See p.16 Printing Method.
Using the rsh / rcp / ftp commands
A Edit the host file to register the printer host name and the IP address.
B Start printing.
See p.16 Printing Method.
Reference
See p.11 After Executing the Installation Shell Script for host file editing.
Note
If you cannot edit the host file, use the install shell script to register the host
name.
5
UNIX Configuration
Using the Installation Shell Script

The installation shell script helps with the setup process. The installation shell
script automates some of the tasks in configuring /etc/hosts, /etc/printcap; creating the spool directory for BSD UNIX; and running the lpadmin command for
System V UNIX.
Important
The installation shell script can be used on the following workstations: (it cannot be used with other types of workstations.)
SunOS 4.x.x
Solaris 2.x(Sun OS 5.x), Solaris 7, Solaris 8,
HP-UX
Redhat Linux
UnixWare
OpenServer
Note
Depending on security settings when installed, rsh / rcp /telnet may not be
usable with Red Hat 7.1 or later. Change the security level to allows use of rsh
/ rcp /telnet. For details about how to change the setting, see the operating
instructions for Red Hat.
When you use NIS (Network Information Service) or DNS, you should configure the server before running the installation shell script.
Installation shell script does not support CUPS. For details about the settings
of CUPS, see the manual that comes with the UNIX workstation , and the
CUPS' manual.
When you use Solaris and HP-UX, you can set UNIX configuration with admintools that came with Solaris and HP-UX. For details about setting using
the admintools, see the admintool's manual.
Reference
For details about the configuration utility of your operating system, see the
manual that came with the utility.
6
Assigning the IP Address

Important
Configure the machine to use TCP/IP.
Make sure that TCP/IP on the machine is set to active. (Default setting is
active.)
Assign an IP address to the machine and configure the other settings required for TCP/IP.
Reference
For details about how to make the above settings, see the manual that comes
with this machine.
Checking the IP address configuration

Follow the procedure below to make sure that the IP address has been configured correctly.
The following procedure uses the sample IP address: 192.168.15.16.
A Enter the following:

# ping 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears:
192.168.15.16 is alive
If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message appears:
no answer from 192.168.15.16
Note
When you use NIS, the IP address and host name are written to /etc/hosts
on the master server. When you use DNS, the information is written to a
data file on the name server. After writing the host name and IP address to
the file, make sure that the configuration is correct by pinging the host.
# ping host_name
If the host name is registered with an IP address, the server can access the
printer using its host name instead of its IP address.
7
UNIX Configuration
Executing the Installation Shell Script

Having configured the printer IP address, follow the procedure below to execute
the installation shell script and set up the workstation printing environment.
Important
Before executing the installation shell script, the IP address, host name and
printer name are required.
The following procedures use the sample IP address: 192.168.15.16; sample

host name: nphost; and sample printer name: np.
Use ftp to get the installation shell script from the printer.
A Log on to the workstation as root.

If you do not log on as root, the installation shell script will not run.
B Get the installation shell script from the printer.

C Move to the directory you want to copy the installation shell script to.
D Use ftp to connect to the printer with the IP address that you just configured.
# ftp 192.168.15.16
Connected to 192.168.15.16
220 printer FTP server ready.
name (192.168.15.16:root:)
E When a user name is requested, leave the user name field blank and press
the {RETURN} ( {ENTER} ) key.
331 Password required for root.
Password:
F When a password is requested, leave the password field blank and press
the {RETURN} ( {ENTER} ) key.
230 User root logged in.
ftp>
G Enter the following to get the installation shell script:

ftp> get install
H Close the ftp session.

ftp> bye
221 Goodbye.
#
I Run the installation shell script.

# sh ./install
Insert a period and slash before the current directory.
8
J Enter a number to select the workstation operating system that you are using.
Network printer install shell
Select your workstation OS type
1.SunOS 4.x.x
2.Solaris 2.x, Solaris 7-9 (SunOS5.x)
3.HP-UX
4.UnixWare
5.Linux
6.OpenServer
7.Quit
Enter <1-7>:
2
If you select 7, the installation shell script ends.
K Enter the printer's IP address.

Enter Printer host IP address <xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx> [return=skip]:
192.168.15.16
If the host name of the printer has already been configured, press the {RETURN} ( {ENTER} ) key. Nothing will be added to the /etc/hosts file.
L Enter the printer's host name.

Enter Printer host name : nphost
If no IP address was entered in step K, nothing is added to the /etc/hosts file.
M Configure the printer name.
Enter logical printer name [default nphost_prn]

If you want to use the default name, press the {RETURN} ( {ENTER} ) key. Enter a new name, if you want to use a different one.
The host name entered in step L followed by _prn appears in default.
N Set the print option.
Enter remote printer name [default lp]:

Press the {RETURN} ( {ENTER} ) key, and printing with PCL or PostScript
is enabled.
If you want to set the device option, enter the option parameter.
Enter remote printer name [default lp]:tray=tray1
If you enter text, text printing is enabled.
If you enter text, printing with PCL and PostScript is disabled.
Enter remote printer name [default lp]:text
You can enter up to 14 characters for HP-UX 11.0, 256 for Solaris 8 and Red
Hat Linux 7.0, and 51 for Red Hat Linux 6.2.
After setup with the installation shell script is complete, and if you entered
the IP address in step K, the following message appears:
hosts file is modified
UNIX Configuration
O Perform a test print to make sure that the settings are correct.
# lpr -Pnp file_name
# lp -d np file_name
Note
SunOS, UnixWare, and OpenServer appear on the screen, but they are not
supported. Use Solaris, HP-UX, or Linux.
The IP address will be added to the /etc/hosts file.

The host name will be added to the /etc/hosts file.
When printing with the lp command, use ( _ ) instead of ( = ) and ( ; ) instead of ( , ) for operating systems that cannot use ( = ) and ( , ) such as Solaris 2.5 or later.
Reference
For details about lpr and lp, see p.16 Printing Method.
For details about the device option, see p.21 Specifying the Device Option.
Deleting the printer

To print using the lp or lpr command, the option specified when the installation
shell script is executed is used. Change the option in accordance with the workstation you are using.
BSD UNIX workstation, Linux

Delete the printer entry from /etc/printcap, and then execute the installation
shell script again. Select options during the setup process.
Alternatively, search the printer entry from /etc/printcap, and change its rp
capability to option setting.
Solaris, HP-UX
Delete the printer entry, and then execute the installation shell script again.
Select options during the setup process. To delete the printer entry, follow the
procedure below:
A Stop the scheduler.
# /usr/sbin/lpshut
B Delete the printer.
# /usr/sbin/lpadmin -x printer_name
C Restart the scheduler.
# /usr/lib/lpsched
10
After Executing the Installation Shell Script

The printing environment is set up automatically when the installation shell
script is executed.
This section describes setup contents when the installation shell script is executed under Red Hat Linux, Solaris, and HP-UX.
Linux
Adding the IP address and host name to the /etc/hosts file
The following line is added to the /etc/hosts file. The IP address and printer
host name which you previously entered in the installation script will be
used:
192.168.15.16 nphost # Network Printer
192.168.15.16 is the IP address, nphost is the host name, from # to the end
of the line is the comment.
Note
The /etc/hosts file contains a list of the IP addresses and host names of all
hosts communicating on the network. Each entry is delimited with a space
or a tab, and each line is separated with a return.
If you do not use NIS or DNS, you must manually enter the IP address and
host name of each workstation using the network printer in the /etc/hosts
file.
Adding an entry to the /etc/printcap file

The following entry is added to the /etc/printcap file, which is the configuration for printing with the lpr command. In order to use the lpr command to
print, you need to edit the /etc/hosts file, add an entry for the network printer to the /etc/printcap file and create a spool directory:
##PRINTTOOL3## REMOTE
np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network
Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network
Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:\
:rm=nphost:\
:rp=option:\
:sd=/var/spool/lpd/npd:\
:lf=/var/log/npd-errs:\
:sh:\
:mx#0:
11
UNIX Configuration
Note
The /etc/printcap file is used to register the name and attributes of a printer. You must make an entry for the network printer in the /etc/printcap
file of all workstations using the network printer.
You must make an entry for each printer option when using the same
printer.
Each entry is separated with colons into several fields. The syntax is to begin each entry with a colon, followed by the entry, and then end with a colon, a back slash, and then a return.
The first line of the field is the name of the printer. You use this name when
logging on to a network printer from a workstation. You can define several
different names by separating each name with the | character.
The second and following lines contain the printer's attributes. Attributes
are represented by two-character names referred to as capabilities. For details about capabilities, see the following table:
Capability
Explanation
Value requiredfor the network

printer.
rm
Host name ofthe printer.
The host namethat was registered

with the /etc/hosts file.
rp
Optional specification.
Select optionsfor printing. For details about available options, see

p.21 Specifying the Device Option.
lp will be assigned, if the option

isnot used.
sd
Path name ofthe spool directory.
Path name ofthe spool directory

that is to be created.
lf
Path name ofthe log file.
Path name ofthe log file.

For example /var/log/lpd-errs.
mx
Maximum filesize which the direc- None, or somethingsuitable.

tory can copy. When set to 0, the
size is unlimited. Ifnothing is entered, the size is set to 1024 k.
12
Making the spool directory

Create a spool directory under /var/spool/lpd. The name of the spool directory should be the name of the printer followed by a d.
Note
The spool directory is used to control data used for print jobs. For example,
when a print job is created, a temporary copy of the data used is created in
the spool directory. All workstations accessing the network printer need to
have a spool directory for the network printer.
A spool directory should be made for every network printer entry listed in
the /etc/printcap file.
The spool directory should normally be made under /var/spool/lpd and
the name should match that listed under the sd capability in /etc/printcap. Change the owner and group of the directory to root and lp. The following examples show how to make a /var/spool/lpd/npd spool
directory:
# cd /var/spool/lpd
# mkdir npd
# chown root npd
# chgrp lp npd
Making the log file

Error messages are logged to a file created in the /var/log directory. The log
file name is the printer name followed by d-errs.
Note
The log file is used for logging errors or warning messages by the UNIX
workstation.
The log file should be made for every network printer entry listed in the
/etc/printcap file.
The log file should normally be made under /var/log directory and the
name should match that listed under the lf capability in /etc/printcap.
Change the owner and group of the log file to root and lp. The following
examples show how to make a /var/log/npd-errs file:
# cd /var/log
# touch npd-errs
# chown root npd-errs
# chgrp lp npd-errs
13
UNIX Configuration
Solaris
host name previously entered in the installation script will be used.
192.168.15.16 nphost # Network Printer
192.168.15.16 is the IP address, nphost is the host name, from # to the end
of the line is the comment.
Note
The /etc/hosts file contains a list of IP addresses and host names of all
file.
Registering the printer

The installation shell script registers the printer as a remote printer following
the procedure below:
A If your workstation is Solaris 2.5.1, register the print server and print client
to the print service.
# lpsystem -t bsd -R 0 -y Network Printer nphost
B Register the printer as a remote printer.
# lpadmin -p np -s nphost!option -T dump -I any
np is the printer name, nphost is the host name. For details about option, see p.21 Specifying the Device Option.
lp will be assigned, if the option is not used.
When printing with the lp command, use ( _ ) instead of ( = ) and ( ; )
instead of ( , ) for operating systems that cannot use ( = ) and ( , ) such as
Solaris 2.5 or later.
C If your workstation is Solaris 2.5.1, set the print job to active so it can be accepted by the print queue.
/usr/lib/accept np
D If your workstation is Solaris 2.5.1, set the print job to active to print.
/usr/lib/enable np
14
HP-UX
host name previously entered in the installation script will be used:
192.168.15.16 np # Network Printer
192.168.15.16 is the IP address, np is the host name, from # to the end of
the line is the comment.
Note
The /etc/hosts file contains a list of IP addresses and host names of all
file.
Registering the printer

The installation shell script registers the printer as a remote printer following
the procedure below:
A Stop the scheduler.
/usr/lib/lpshut
B Register the printer.
/usr/lib/lpadmin -Pnp -v/dev/null -mrmodel
-ormnphost -orpoption -ob3
np is the printer name, nphost is the host name.
For details about option, see p.21 Specifying the Device Option.
lp will be assigned, if the option is not used.
C Set the printer so the print job is listed in the print queue.
/usr/lib/accept np
D Set the printer to perform the print job.
/usr/lib/enable np
E Restart the scheduler.
/usr/lib/lpsched
15
UNIX Configuration
Printing Method
Printing with lpr, lp
Execute one of the following commands according to type of workstation used:

% lpr -Pprinter_name file_name [file_name...]
For example:
The printer name is np, file names are file1 and file2
% lpr -Pnp file1 file2
Solaris, HP-UX
% lp -d printer_name file_name [file_name...]
For example:
The printer name is np, file names are file1 and file2
% lp -d np file1 file2
Note
printer_name is the name entered when executing the installation shell
script.
You can use wild cards ( * or ? ) for the file name.

The message print session full appears when the maximum number of
print requests has been reached (max. 5 sessions Job Spool setting available). You should try to print again when the number of requests is less than
five. You can check the number of print requests using telnet. For details
about using telnet, see the manual that comes with this machine.
The number of print sessions does not change, whether you increase or reduce the machine's total memory size.
16
Printing Method
Printing with rsh, rcp, ftp

You can also print using the rsh, rcp and ftp commands.
Note
Print using a format the printer supports.
You should try to print again when the number of requests is zero.
The message print session full appears when the maximum number of
print requests is reached.
The maximum number of print sessions varies depending on the command.
When using the rsh, rcp command, the maximum number of print sessions is
5; when using the ftp command, the number is 3.
rsh
% rsh host_name print < file_name
For example:
host name is nphost, file name is file1
% rsh nphost print < file1
Note
host_name is the name entered when executing the installation shell script.
If you are using HP-UX, use the remsh command instead of rsh.
rcp
To specify and print the file
% rcp file_name [file_name...] host_name:
For example:
host name is nphost, file names are file1 and file2
% rcp file1 file2 nphost:
To print all of the files in a directory
% rcp -r directory_name host_name:
For example:
host name is nphost, directory name is directory
% rcp -r directory1 nphost:
Note
histamine is the name entered when executing the installation shell script.
You can use wild cards ( * or ? ) for the file name.
17
UNIX Configuration
ftp
Use the put or mput commands depending on the number of files to be printed.
Important
File names cannot contain = or ,.
You can use wild cards ( * or ? ) for the file name with the mput command.
To print one file

ftp> put file_name
To print several files
ftp> mput file_name [file_name...]
The following procedure shows an example of how to print a file using ftp.
It is not possible to set options with the mput command:
A Start ftp using the IP address or host name of the printer.

% ftp IP_address
B Enter the user name. Skip the password, and then press the {RETURN} ( {ENTER} ) key.
Name:
Password:
C Set the file transfer mode to binary.

ftp> bin
If the file transfer mode is not set to binary, the image may not be printed correctly.
D Print the file.

For example, to print the file named file1:
ftp> put file1
For example, to print the two files named file1 and file2:
ftp> mput file1 file2
E Exit ftp.
ftp> bye
18
Printer Status
Printer Status
You can use the following commands to have information and printer status displayed or copied to a file.
Use the lpq or lpstat command to display the status of the printer or information
about print jobs.
Use the rsh, rcp or ftp commands to get more detailed information from the
printer.
Viewing the Print Job Status with lpq and lpstat

% lpq -Pprinter_name
For example: Printer name is np
% lpq -Pnp
System V UNIX, Solaris, HP-UX
% lpstat -o printer_name
For example: Printer name is np
% lpstat -o np
Note
If you are using HP-UX, do not put a space between -o and printer
name.
19
UNIX Configuration
Viewing the Printer Status with rsh and ftp

Use the rsh or ftp command to display printer status or information about print
jobs using specified parameters.
You can use these commands for BSD and System V UNIX.
If your workstation is HP-UX, use the remsh command instead of rsh.
rsh
% rsh host_name parameter
ftp
% ftp host_name
User user_name
password:
ftp> get parameter Parameters that can be used with rsh, rcp and ftp :
Parameter
stat
Informationreturned
Status ofthe printer.
Information about print jobs.
info
Informationabout the paper tray, output tray and printer language.
prnlog
Record ofthe last 10 jobs printed.
syslog
Record ofmessages about the network interface board.
Note
Leave the user name and password blank, and then press the {RETURN} ( {ENTER} )
key.
- indicates standard output. Display will be displayed on screen if standard

output has not been specified.
Copying Information to a File

Use the rcp or ftp command to copy information about specified parameters to a file.
You can use these commands for BSD and System V UNIX.
Important
The same parameters are used as those above.
rcp
% rcp host_name:parameter file_name
ftp
% ftp host_name
User: user_name
password:
ftp> get parameter file_name
20
Note
Leave the user name and password blank, and then press the {RETURN} ( {ENTER} ) key.
Specifying the Device Option

With the following options, you can print with specific printer functions.
This manual covers all models, and therefore contains functions and settings
that may not be available for your model.
Configuring the Device Option

Important
The optional character strings the printer can recognize contain a maximum
of 512 bytes.
The number of available characters used as options is limited, depending on

operating systems.
The configuration of the print option varies, depending on printing commands.
rsh
% rsh host_name print option1=value1, < file_name
rcp
% rcp file_name host_name:option1=value1,
ftp
ftp> put file_name option1=value1,
Host_name is the printer host name. File_name is the file name you want to print.
The device option is specified in the form of option=value. For details about
types of device options and values, see the following explanations.
For example, the following settings are for printing with rsh, rcp, and ftp : switch
to PostScript, feed paper from paper feed tray 1, set the printing amount to 3 sets,
and print with the resolution set to 600 dpi (host_name :nphost, file_name :file1).
rsh
% rsh nphost print filetype=postscript,tray=tray1,copies=3,resolution=600 < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:filetype=postscript,tray=tray1,copies=3,resolution=600
ftp
ftp> put file1 filetype=postscript,tray=tray1,copies=3,resolution=600
21
UNIX Configuration
Note
Multiple options must be separated by commas (,). Do not use spaces.
When the printing file contains the PCL, PJL, PostScript commands control of
the option, the command takes priority.
Enter the option using the lp or lpr command, when the shell script is implemented. The option settings made here are configured as default. You must
create another printer if you want to change printer option settings. For details about changing the configured option, see p.10 Deleting the printer.
When printing with the lp command, use ( _ ) instead of ( = ) and ( ; ) instead of
( , ) for operating systems that cannot use ( = ) and ( , ) such as Solaris 2.5 or later.
Using the cd command with ftp

For printing with ftp, if the option is specified using the cd command, it becomes
available whenever the put or mput command is used.
ftp> cd option
Note
The pwd command shows the current option settings.
ftp> pwd
List of the device options

Device option
Value
Functionsummary.
filetype
pcl, postscript( rps), pdf, pictbridge
Specifies the printerlanguage

for printing.
filter
text
Specifies the text printing.
tray
tray1~tray7, lct, bypass, all
Specifies the input tray.
paper
a0~a6, a3wide, jisb1~jisb6, an- Specifies the paper size.

sic, ledger, letter, halfletter, legal, executive, fgl, foolscap,
folio, com10, C5, C6, dl, monarch, k8, k16, custom
papertype
plain, recycled, special, special2, Specifies the paper type.

special3, thick, thick2, thick3,
thin, tabstock, transparency,
color, letterhead, preprinted,
prepunched, labels, bond, cardstock, translucent, usercolor1,
usercolor2, yellow, green, blue,
purple, ivory, orange, pink, red,
gray, middlethick, envelope,
hgplain, inkjetjpost, jpost, plainorrecycled, plainduplexbackside, thickduplexbackside, film,
used, glossy, auto
22

Device option
Value
Functionsummary.
outbin
inner, optionaloutputbin1~12, Specifies the output tray.

lower, finishershift, finisherproof, finisherbooklet, upper
copies
Number of copies (19999)
qty
Number of collated sets(1999) Specifies the number tocollate.
duplex
on, off
Specifies whether duplexprinting is on or off.
binding
longedge, shortedge, left,

right, top
Specifies the bindingdirection

for duplex printing.
orientation
portrait, landscape
Specifies the feed directionof

the paper.
resolution
value of resolution (200,300,

400, 600, 1200)
Specifies the resolutionfor

printing.
fold
off, zbottom, zright, zleft
Specifies the foldingposition.
staple
booklet, left2land, left2port,

Specifies the staple position.
lefttop, lefttophorizland, lefttophorizport, lefttopslantland,
lefttopslantport, lefttopvertland, lefttopvertport,
right2land, right2port, righttop, righttophorizland, righttophorizport, righttopslantland,
righttopslantport, righttopvertland, righttopvertport,
top2land, top2port, off
punch
off, leftport, leftland, rightport,

rightland, topport, topland
Specifies the punch position.
punchhole
2, 3, 4
Specifies the number ofpunch

holes.
symbol set
desktop, iso4, iso6, iso11,

iso15, iso17, iso21, iso60,
iso69, isol1, isol2, isol5, legal,
math8, mspubl, pc8, pc850,
pc852, pc8dn, pc8tk, pifont,
psmath, pstext, roman8, vnintl, vnmath, vnus, win30,
winl1, winl2, winl5
Specify the set of printcharacters.
Specifies the number ofcopies.
23
UNIX Configuration
Printer Language
Select a printer language to print.
filetype=printer language
fil=printer language
Printer language
Value
PCL
pcl
PostScript3
postscriptor rps
PDF
pdf
PictBridge
pictbridge
The following sample shows how to print with PostScript 3 (host name: nphost,
file name: file1):
rsh
% rsh nphost print filetype=postscript < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:filetype=postscript
ftp
ftp> put file1 filetype=postscript
Text Printing
Set this function when printing text files directly.
filter=text
The following sample shows how to print text files directly.
rsh
% rsh nphost print filter=text < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:filter=text
ftp
ftp> put file1 filter=text
24
Input Tray
Select a default input tray.
Important
Only installed input trays are available.
tray=value of input tray

Input tray
Value
Tray 1
tray1
Tray 2
tray2
Tray 3
tray3
Tray 4
tray4
Tray 5
tray5
Tray 6
tray6
Tray 7
tray7
Large Capacity Tray(LCT)
lct
Bypass tray
bypass
Auto Tray Select
all
The following sample shows how to print from tray 2 (host name: nphost, file
name: file1):
rsh
% rsh nphost print tray=tray2 < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:tray=tray2
ftp
ftp> put file1 tray=tray2
25
UNIX Configuration
Paper Size
Select the paper size.
Important
Only the loaded paper sizes are available.
paper=value of
paper size
Paper size
Value
A0
a0
A1
a1
A2
a2
A3
a3
12 18
a3wide
A4
a4
A5
a5
A6
a6
B1JIS (Japanese IndustrialStandard)
jisb1
B2JIS
jisb2
B3JIS
jisb3
B4JIS
jisb4
B5JIS
jisb5
B6JIS
jisb6
17 22
ansic
11 17
ledger
81/2 11
letter
51/2 81/2
halfletter
81/2 14
legal
71/4 101/2
executive
8 13
fgl
81/2 13
foolscap
81/4 13
folio
4 1/8" 9 1/2"
com10
6.38" 9.02"
C5
4.49" 6.38"
C6
4.33" 8.66"
dl
3 7/8" 7 1/2"
monarch
26

Paper size
Value
10 1/2" 15.35"
k8
7.68" 10 1/2"
k16
Custom size
custom
The following sample shows how to print using A4 size paper (host name:
nphost, file name: file1):
rsh
% rsh nphost print paper=a4 < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:paper=a4
ftp
ftp> put file1 paper=a4
Paper Type
Select the paper type.
Important
Only the loaded paper types are available.
mediatype=value of paper type

Paper type
Value
Plain paper/recycled paper
plainorrecycled
Plain paper
plain
Preprinted paper
preprinted
Prepunched paper
prepunched
Letterhead
letterhead
Recycled paper
recycled
Color paper
color
usercolor1
usercolor2
Special paper
special
special2
special3
Thick paper
thick
thick2
thick3
Semi thick paper
middlethick
Thin paper
thin
27
UNIX Configuration
Paper type
Value
OHP transparency
transparency
Labels
labels
Bond paper
bond
Translucent
translucent
Cardstock
cardstock
Tabstock
tabstock
Envelope
envelope
Yellow
yellow
Green
green
Blue
blue
Purple
purple
Ivory
ivory
Orange
orange
Pink
pink
Red
red
Gray
gray
Postcard
jpost
InkJet Postcard
inkjetjpost
Inkjet plain paper
hgplain
Plain Paper (Duplex Backside)
plainduplexbackside
Thick Paper (Duplex Backside)
thickduplexbackside
Film
film
Used paper
used
Glossy paper
glossy
Auto Paper Select
auto
The following sample shows how to print using recycled paper (host name:
nphost, file name: file1):
rsh
% rsh nphost print mediatype=recycled < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:mediatype=recycled
ftp
% ftp> put file1 mediatype=recycled
28
Output Tray
Select the output tray.
outbin=value of output tray
Important
Only installed output trays are available.
Value
upper, inner, lower, finisherproof, finishershift, finisherbooklet, optionaloutbin1~12
Reference
For details about available output tray, see the manual that comes with this
machine.
The following sample shows how to print to the standard tray (standard tray:
upper, host name: nphost, file name: file1):
rsh
% rsh nphost print outbin=upper < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:outbin=upper
ftp
ftp> put file1 outbin=upper
Copies
Specify the number of copies.
copies=number of copies (1 to 9999)
Important
Do not specify copies and qty *1 commands at the same time.
*1 qty specifies the number of collated sets.
The following sample shows how to print 10 copies (host name: nphost, file
name: file1):
rsh
% rsh nphost print copies=10 < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:copies=10
ftp
ftp> put file1 copies=10
29
UNIX Configuration
Collating
Specify the number of collated sets.
qty=number of collated sets (1 to 999)
The following sample shows how to print 10 copies using the collate function
(host name: nphost, file name: file1):
rsh
% rsh nphost print qty=10 < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:qty=10
ftp
ftp> put file1 qty=10
Duplex Printing
This option enables duplex printing.
Important
The duplex unit is required.
duplex=value of duplex printing

Duplex printing
Value
enable
on
disable
off
The following sample shows how to set duplex printing (host name: nphost, file
name: file1):
rsh
% rsh nphost print duplex=on,binding=longedge < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:duplex=on,binding=longedge
ftp
ftp> put file1 duplex=on,binding=longedge
Note
Before selecting duplex, the binding option must be set to on.
Data and paper volume affect the completion of the print job.
Reference
For details about available paper size for duplex printing, see the manual that
comes with this machine.
30
Binding
Select the binding direction for duplex printing.
Important
The duplex unit is required.
binding=value of binding
Binding direction
Value
Longedge
longedge
Shortedge
shortedge
Left
left
Right
right
Top
top
The following sample shows how to set duplex printing and long-edge binding
(host name: nphost, file name: file1):
rsh
% rsh nphost print duplex=on,binding=longedge < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:duplex=on,binding=longedge
ftp
ftp> put file1 duplex=on,binding=longedge
Note
Before selecting the binding option, the duplex option must be set to on.
Data and paper volume affect completion of the print job.
31
UNIX Configuration
Orientation
Select the paper feed orientation.
Important
This function is only for PCL.
orientation=feed direction (portrait or landscape)

Orientation
value
Portrait
portrait
Landscape
landscape
The following sample shows how to print the paper vertically using the orientation function (host name : nphost, file name : file1):
rsh
% rsh nphost print orientation=portrait < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:orientation=portrait
ftp
ftp> put file1 orientation=portrait
Resolution
Select the printing resolution.
resolution=value of resolution
Resolution
Value
1200 dpi
1200
600 dpi
600
400 dpi
400
300 dpi
300
200 dpi
200
The following sample shows how to print with 600 dpi and better quality. (host
name: nphost, file name: file1):
rsh
% rsh nphost print resolution=600 < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:resolution=600
ftp
ftp> put file1 resolution=600
32
Z-Fold
Select the folding position for the output.
Important
When using this option, the optional finisher unit is required.
fold=value of folding position

Position
Value
Bottom fold
zbottom
Right fold
zright
Left fold
zleft
Off
off
The following sample shows how to print with the fold on the upper left using
finisher shift tray (host name : nphost, file name : file1, finisher shift tray: finisherproof):
rsh
% rsh nphost print fold=zright,outbin=finisherproof % rsh
nphost print fold=zright,outbin=finisherproof
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:fold=zright,outbin=finisherproof
ftp
ftp> put file1 fold=zright,outbin=finisherproof
Note
Available fold positions vary depending on type of installed output tray. For
details about staple, see the manual that comes with this machine.
33
UNIX Configuration
Staple
Select the staple position for the output.
Important
staple=value of staple position

Position
Value
Off
off
Left top
lefttop
Right top
righttop
Left top horiz
lefttophorizland, lefttophorizport
Left top slant
lefttopslantland, lefttopslantlport
Left top vert
lefttopvertland, lefttopvertport
Right top horiz
righttophorizland, righttophorizport
Right top slant
righttopslantland, righttopslantport
Right top vert
righttopvertland, righttopvertport
Left 2
left2land, left2port
Right 2
right2land, right2port
Top 2
top2land, top2port
Booklet
booklet
The following sample shows how to print with the staple on the upper left using
finisher shift tray (host name : nphost, file name : file1, finisher shift tray: finisherproof):
rsh
% rsh nphost print staple=lefttop,outbin=finisherproof <
file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:staple=lefttop,outbin=finisherproof
ftp
ftp> put file1 staple=lefttop,outbin=finisherproof
Note
Available staple positions vary depending on type of installed output tray.
For details about staple, see the manual that comes with this machine.
34
Punch, Punchhole
Select the punch position for the output and the number of punch holes.
Important
punch=value of punch position

Position
Value
Off
off
Left
leftport
leftland
Right
rightport
rightland
Top
topport
topland
punchhole=value of punchhole
Available numbers of punch holes may vary depending the type of installed
Punch Kit. Specify an appropriate value referring to the table below.
Number of punchholes
Value
jp2, us2
us3
eu4, neu4
The following sample shows how to print with four punch holes on the left using
finisher tray 1 (host name : nphost, file name : file1, finisher tray 1: finisherproof).
rsh
% rsh nphost print punch=leftport,punchhole=eu4,outbin=finisherproof < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:punch=leftport,punchhole=eu4,outbin=finisherproof
ftp
ftp > put file1 punch=leftport,punchhole=eu4,outbin=finisherproof
Note
Available punch positions may vary depending the type of installed output
tray. For details about punch, see the manual that comes with this machine.
When punchhole is not specified, the machine executes the punch function
by the default number of punch holes.
When punchhole is not specified correctly, the machine does not execute
the function.
35
UNIX Configuration
Symbol Set
Select the set of print characters for the chosen font.
Important
This function is only for PCL.
symset=value of font
Font
Value
Desktop
desktop
ISO 4
iso4
ISO 6
iso6
ISO 11
iso11
ISO 15
iso15
ISO 17
iso17
ISO 21
iso21
ISO 60
iso60
ISO 69
iso69
ISO L1
isol1
ISO L2
isol2
ISO L5
isol5
Legal
legal
Math-8
math8
MS Publ
mspubl
PC-8
pc8
PC-850
pc850
PC-852
pc852
PC-8 D/N
pc8dn
PC8-TK
pc8tk
Pifont
pifont
PS Math
psmath
PS Text
pstext
Roman-8
roman8
VN Intl
vnintl
VN Math
vnmath
VN US
vnus
Win 3.0
win30
Win L1
winl1
36

Font
Value
Win L2
winl2
Win L5
winl5
The following sample shows how to print the ISO 4 character set (host name :
nphost, file name : file1):
rsh
% rsh nphost print symset=iso4 < file1
rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:symset=iso4
ftp
ftp> put file1 symset=iso4
37
INDEX
B
Binding
Option, 31
BSD UNIX workstation
Deleting the printer, 10
Printer Status, 19
Printing Method, 16
C
Collating
Option, 30
configuration
UNIX, 5
Copies
Option, 29
Linux
Printer Status, 19
Printing Method, 16
lp
Printing, 16
lpr
Printing, 16
O
Orientation
Option, 32
Output Tray
Option, 29

Device Option, 21
Duplex Printing
Option, 30
F
ftp
Printing, 18
H
HP-UX
Printer Status, 19
Printing Method, 16
I
Input Tray
Option, 25
Installation Shell Script, 6, 8, 11
IP Address, 7
38
Paper Size
Option, 26
Paper Type
Option, 27
Printer Language
Option, 24
Printer Status, 19
ftp, 20
rsh, 20
Printing Method, 16
Printing with rsh, rcp, ftp, 17
Punch, Punchhole
Option, 35
R
rcp
Printing, 17
Resolution
Option, 32
rsh
Printing, 17
S
Solaris
Printer Status, 19
Printing Method, 16
Staple
Option, 34
Symbol Set
Option, 36
System V UNIX
Printer Status, 19
T
Text Printing
Option, 24
U
UNIX, 5
Z
Z-Fold
Option, 33
39
40
EN
USA
GB
GB
AE
AE
B229
Copyright 2005
UNIX Supplement
EN USA
GB GB
AE AE

Ricoh MP C3500 - Ricoh MP C4500

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ricoh MP C3500 - Ricoh MP C4500

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions

About This Machine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Type 1: C3535/DSc535/LD435c/Aficio MP C3500

Type 2: C4540/C4540g/DSc545/DSc545g/LD445c/Aficio MP C4500/Aficio MP C4500G

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Manuals for This Machine

About This Machine

Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the

and ScanRout- The ScanRouter delivery software

What You Can Do with This Machine

Copier, Facsimile, Printer, and Scanner Functions

Utilizing Stored Documents

Paperless Fax Transmission and Reception

You can use DeskTopBinder (optional) or a Web Image Monitor to check,

Fax Transmission and Reception Through the Internet

Using the Scanner in a Network Environment

Administrating the Machine/Protecting Documents (Security

Monitoring the Machine Via Computer

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, or a

Preventing an Unauthorized Copy

Notice To Wireless LAN Interface (optional) Users

Note to users in Canada

How to Read This Manual

Safety During Operation

Positions of RWARNING and RCAUTION

ENERGY STAR Program

1. Auto Document Feeder (ADF)

If you load a stack of originals in the auto

Copied, printed paper or fax messages

Open this cover to replace toner cartridges.

Place originals face down here for copying.

3. Main power switch

If the machine does not operate after

9. Lower Paper Trays (optional)

Load paper here.

10. Switch for Anti-Condensation

Pull this extender out when loading sheets

3. Lower Right Cover

p.27 Turning On the Power

8. Booklet Finisher SR3020

If you select this as the output tray, copied

Used as a receiver when a fax unit is installed.

Sorts, stacks, staples and punches copies.

4. Scanner Accessibility Unit

2. Exposure glass cover

This unit lets you operate the machine or

5. Paper Tray 3 (LCT)

6. Lower Paper Trays

Sorts, stacks, staples and punches copies.

10. Bridge Unit

1. {User Tools/Counter} key

5. {Interrupt} key (copier and scanner

Press to make interrupt copies during

6. {Energy Saver} key

7. Main power indicator

Press to clear the current settings.

4. {Program} key (copier, facsimile,

3. {Clear Modes} key

Press this to log in or log out.

10. {Simplified Display} key

11. {Sample Copy} key

16. Function keys

Press to make a single set of copies or